Attachment 43275 Details for Bug 34196 – patch containing translation of german comments in libs-core/editeng

[patch] patch containing translation of german comments in libs-core/editeng

editeng-german-comments.diff (text/plain), 929.77 KB, created by Albert Thuswaldner on 2011-02-11 15:57:35 UTC

(hide)

Description:

Filename:

MIME Type:

Creator: Albert Thuswaldner

Created: 2011-02-11 15:57:35 UTC

Size: 929.77 KB

patch

obsolete

>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/acorrcfg.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/acorrcfg.hxx
>index b61c252..f9d6267 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/acorrcfg.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/acorrcfg.hxx
>@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ public:
>     void                    SetModified() {ConfigItem::SetModified();}
> };
> /*--------------------------------------------------------------------
>-    Beschreibung:   Konfiguration fuer Auto Correction
>+    Description:   Configuration for Auto Correction
>  --------------------------------------------------------------------*/
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxAutoCorrCfg
> {
>@@ -77,10 +77,10 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxAutoCorrCfg
>     SvxBaseAutoCorrCfg      aBaseConfig;
>     SvxSwAutoCorrCfg        aSwConfig;
> 
>-    // Flags f"ur Autotext:
>+    // Flags for Autotext:
>     sal_Bool    bFileRel;
>     sal_Bool    bNetRel;
>-    // Tiphilfe f"ur Autotext w"ahrend der Eingabe
>+    // Help tip for Autotext as you type
>     sal_Bool    bAutoTextTip;
>     sal_Bool    bAutoTextPreview;
>     sal_Bool    bAutoFmtByInput;
>@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ public:
> 
>           SvxAutoCorrect* GetAutoCorrect()          { return pAutoCorrect; }
>     const SvxAutoCorrect* GetAutoCorrect() const    { return pAutoCorrect; }
>-    // der Pointer geht in den Besitz des ConfigItems!
>+    // the pointer is transfered to the possession of the ConfigItems!
>     void SetAutoCorrect( SvxAutoCorrect* );
> 
>     sal_Bool IsAutoFmtByInput() const       { return bAutoFmtByInput; }
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/adjitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/adjitem.hxx
>index 1e15453..b2d9394 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/adjitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/adjitem.hxx
>@@ -44,8 +44,8 @@ namespace rtl
> // class SvxAdjustItem ---------------------------------------------------
> 
> /*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt die Zeilenausrichtung.
>+[Description]
>+This item describes the row orientation.
> */
> #define	ADJUST_LASTBLOCK_VERSION		((USHORT)0x0001)
> 
>@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxAdjustItem : public SfxEnumItemInterface
>     BOOL    bCenter    : 1;
>     BOOL    bBlock     : 1;
> 
>-    // nur aktiv, wenn bBlock
>+    // only activ when bBlock
>     BOOL    bOneBlock : 1;
>     BOOL    bLastCenter : 1;
>     BOOL    bLastBlock : 1;
>@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ public:
>     SvxAdjustItem( const SvxAdjust eAdjst /*= SVX_ADJUST_LEFT*/,
>                    const USHORT nId );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
> 
>     virtual	bool            QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/akrnitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/akrnitem.hxx
>index 6bcf6a3..6b3972e 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/akrnitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/akrnitem.hxx
>@@ -42,8 +42,8 @@ namespace rtl
> // class SvxAutoKernItem -------------------------------------------------
> 
> /*
>-    [Beschreibung]
>-    Attribut fuer Pair-Kerning.
>+    [Description]
>+    Attribute for Pair-Kerning.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxAutoKernItem : public SfxBoolItem
>@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
>     SvxAutoKernItem( const BOOL bAutoKern /*= FALSE*/,
>                      const USHORT nId );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/blnkitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/blnkitem.hxx
>index 304f0f5..6b96d2d 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/blnkitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/blnkitem.hxx
>@@ -43,8 +43,8 @@ namespace rtl
> // class SvxBlinkItem -------------------------------------------------
> 
> /*
>-    [Beschreibung]
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt, ob geblinkt werden soll.
>+    [Description]
>+    This item describes, whether to flash.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxBlinkItem : public SfxBoolItem
>@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
> 
>     SvxBlinkItem( const BOOL bBlink /*= FALSE*/, const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/bolnitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/bolnitem.hxx
>index af1b6a0..c523705 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/bolnitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/bolnitem.hxx
>@@ -41,8 +41,8 @@
> 
> 
> /*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item transportiert eine SvxBorderLine.
>+[Description]
>+This Item transports a SvxBorderLine.
> */
> 
> class SvxBorderLine;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/boxitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/boxitem.hxx
>index 35fd036..68f34db 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/boxitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/boxitem.hxx
>@@ -37,10 +37,10 @@ namespace rtl { class OUString; }
> 
> // class SvxBoxItem ------------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt ein Umrandungsattribut (alle vier Kanten und
>-Abstand nach innen.
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes a border attribute
>+    (all four edges and the inward distance)
> */
> 
> #define BOX_LINE_TOP	((USHORT)0)
>@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ public:
>     ~SvxBoxItem();
>     SvxBoxItem &operator=( const SvxBoxItem& rBox );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual	bool             QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>     virtual	bool             PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
>@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ public:
> 
>     const	SvxBorderLine* GetLine( USHORT nLine ) const;
> 
>-        //Die Pointer werden kopiert!
>+        //The Pointers are being copied!
>     void	SetLine( const SvxBorderLine* pNew, USHORT nLine );
> 
>     USHORT	GetDistance( USHORT nLine ) const;
>@@ -103,9 +103,8 @@ public:
>     void 	SetDistance( USHORT nNew, USHORT nLine );
>     inline void SetDistance( USHORT nNew );
> 
>-        //Breite der Linien plus Zwischenraum plus Abstand nach innen.
>-        //JP 09.06.99: bIgnoreLine = TRUE -> Distance auch returnen, wenn
>-        //							keine Line gesetzt ist
>+        // Line width plus Space plus inward distance
>+        //bIgnoreLine = TRUE -> Also return distance, when no Line is set
>     USHORT 	CalcLineSpace( USHORT nLine, BOOL bIgnoreLine = FALSE ) const;
>     static com::sun::star::table::BorderLine2 SvxLineToLine( const SvxBorderLine* pLine, sal_Bool bConvert );
>     static sal_Bool LineToSvxLine(const ::com::sun::star::table::BorderLine& rLine, SvxBorderLine& rSvxLine, sal_Bool bConvert);
>@@ -119,13 +118,12 @@ inline void SvxBoxItem::SetDistance( USHORT nNew )
> 
> // class SvxBoxInfoItem --------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Noch ein Item fuer die Umrandung. Dieses Item hat lediglich SS-Funktionalitaet.
>-Einerseits wird dem allgemeinen Dialog mit diesem Item mitgeteilt, welche
>-Moeglichkeiten er anbieten soll.
>-Andererseits werden ueber dieses Attribut ggf. die BorderLines fuer die
>-horizontalen und vertikalen innerern Linien transportiert.
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    Another item for the border. This item has only limited functionality.
>+    On one hand, the general Dialog is told by the item which options it
>+    should offer. On the other hand, this attribute  may be used to
>+    transported the borderline for the inner horizontal and vertical lines.
> */
> 
> #define BOXINFO_LINE_HORI	((USHORT)0)
>@@ -142,24 +140,24 @@ horizontalen und vertikalen innerern Linien transportiert.
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxBoxInfoItem : public SfxPoolItem
> {
>-    SvxBorderLine* pHori;   //innere horizontale Linie
>-    SvxBorderLine* pVert;   //innere vertikale Linie
>+    SvxBorderLine* pHori;   //inner horizontal Line
>+    SvxBorderLine* pVert;   //inner vertical Line
> 
>-    bool                mbEnableHor;   /// true = Enable inner horizonal line.
>+    bool                mbEnableHor;   /// true = Enable inner horizontal line.
>     bool                mbEnableVer;   /// true = Enable inner vertical line.
> 
>     /*
>-     z.Z. nur fuer StarWriter: Abstand nach innen von SvxBoxItem.
>-     Wenn der Abstand gewuenscht ist, so muss das Feld fuer den Abstand vom
>-     Dialog freigeschaltet werden. nDefDist ist als Defaultwert anzusehen.
>-     Wenn irgendeine	Linie eingeschalt ist oder wird, so muss dieser
>-     Abstand defaultet werden. bMinDist gibt an, ob der Wert durch den
>-     Anwender unterschritten werden darf. Mit nDist wird der aktuelle
>-     Abstand von der App zum Dialog und zurueck transportiert.
>+     Currently only for StarWriter: distance inward from SvxBoxItem. If the
>+     distance is requested, then the field for the distance from the dialog be
>+     activated. nDefDist is regarded as a default value. If any line is
>+     turned on or will be turned on it must this distance be set to default.
>+     bMinDist indicates whether the user can go below this value or not.
>+     With NDIST is the current distance from the app transported back and
>+     forth to the dialogue.
>     */
> 
>-    BOOL	bDist      :1;  // TRUE, Abstand freischalten.
>-    BOOL	bMinDist   :1;  // TRUE, Abstand darf nicht unterschritten werden.
>+    BOOL	bDist      :1;  // TRUE, Unlock Distance.
>+    BOOL	bMinDist   :1;  // TRUE, Going below minimum Distance is prohibited
> 
>     BYTE	nValidFlags;	// 0000 0000
>                             // ³³³³ ³³³ÀÄ VALID_TOP
>@@ -171,7 +169,7 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxBoxInfoItem : public SfxPoolItem
>                             // ³ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ VALID_DIST
>                             // ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ VALID_DISABLE
> 
>-    USHORT	nDefDist;       // Der Default- bzw. Minimalabstand.
>+    USHORT	nDefDist;       // The default or minimum distance.
> 
> public:
>     TYPEINFO();
>@@ -181,7 +179,7 @@ public:
>     ~SvxBoxInfoItem();
>     SvxBoxInfoItem &operator=( const SvxBoxInfoItem &rCpy );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual SfxItemPresentation GetPresentation( SfxItemPresentation ePres,
>                                     SfxMapUnit eCoreMetric,
>@@ -199,7 +197,7 @@ public:
>     const SvxBorderLine*	GetHori() const { return pHori; }
>     const SvxBorderLine*	GetVert() const { return pVert; }
> 
>-    //Die Pointer werden kopiert!
>+        //The Pointers are being copied!
>     void					SetLine( const SvxBorderLine* pNew, USHORT nLine );
> 
>     BOOL    IsTable() const             { return mbEnableHor && mbEnableVer; }
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/brkitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/brkitem.hxx
>index 1409f31..244bafc 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/brkitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/brkitem.hxx
>@@ -41,10 +41,10 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxFmtBreakItem -------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-    [Beschreibung]
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt ein Umbruch-Attribut
>-    Automatisch?, Seiten- oder Spaltenumbruch, davor oder danach?
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item Describes a wrap-attribute
>+    Automatic?, Page or column break, before or after?
> */
> #define	FMTBREAK_NOAUTO	((USHORT)0x0001)
> 
>@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ public:
>     inline SvxFmtBreakItem( const SvxFmtBreakItem& rBreak );
>     inline SvxFmtBreakItem& operator=( const SvxFmtBreakItem& rCpy );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual	bool             QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>     virtual	bool             PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
>@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*	 Create( SvStream&, USHORT ) const;
>     virtual USHORT			 GetValueCount() const;
> 
>-    // MS VC4.0 kommt durcheinander
>+    // MS VC4.0 messes things up
>     void			 SetValue( USHORT nNewVal )
>                                 {SfxEnumItem::SetValue(nNewVal); }
>     SvxBreak			 GetBreak() const { return SvxBreak( GetValue() ); }
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/bulitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/bulitem.hxx
>index ea41ef5..9723404 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/bulitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/bulitem.hxx
>@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@
> #define BJ_VCENTER          0x20
> 
> // Valid-Bits
>-// Erstmal nur die Werte, die vom Dialog geaendert werden...
>+// First, only the values that are changed by the dialogue ...
> #define VALID_FONTCOLOR     0x0001
> #define VALID_FONTNAME      0x0002
> #define VALID_SYMBOL        0x0004
>@@ -82,7 +82,8 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxBulletItem : public SfxPoolItem
>     USHORT          nScale;
>     sal_Unicode     cSymbol;
>     BYTE            nJustify;
>-    USHORT          nValidMask; // Nur temporaer fuer GetAttribs/SetAttribs, wegen des grossen Bullets
>+    USHORT          nValidMask; // Only temporary for GetAttribs / setAttribs, 
>+                                // because of the large Bullets
> 
> #ifdef _SVX_BULITEM_CXX
>     void    SetDefaultFont_Impl();
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/charhiddenitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/charhiddenitem.hxx
>index 0e4ae84..1f7d52e 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/charhiddenitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/charhiddenitem.hxx
>@@ -35,8 +35,8 @@
> #include "editeng/editengdllapi.h"
> 
> // class SvxCharHiddenItem -------------------------------------------------
>-/*
>-    [Description]
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>     This item marks text as hidden
> */
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/charreliefitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/charreliefitem.hxx
>index 376090a..a14f7f9 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/charreliefitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/charreliefitem.hxx
>@@ -40,7 +40,6 @@
> 
>     This item defines a character relief and has currently the values
>     emboss, relief.
>-
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxCharReliefItem : public SfxEnumItem
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/cmapitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/cmapitem.hxx
>index b436b1e..791f7a2 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/cmapitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/cmapitem.hxx
>@@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxCaseMapItem --------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt die Schrift-Ausrichtung (Versalien, Kapitaelchen,...).
>+    This item describe the font type (uppercase, small caps ,...).
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxCaseMapItem : public SfxEnumItem
>@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public:
>     SvxCaseMapItem( const SvxCaseMap eMap /*= SVX_CASEMAP_NOT_MAPPED*/,
>                     const USHORT nId );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem + SfxEnumItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem + SfxEnumItem
>     virtual SfxItemPresentation GetPresentation( SfxItemPresentation ePres,
>                                     SfxMapUnit eCoreMetric,
>                                     SfxMapUnit ePresMetric,
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/cntritem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/cntritem.hxx
>index d1b4bfe..6c539d1 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/cntritem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/cntritem.hxx
>@@ -35,9 +35,8 @@
> 
> // class SvxContourItem --------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-    [Beschreibung]
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt, ob Konturschrift eingestellt ist.
>+/*  [Description]
>+    This item describes, if contour is employed.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxContourItem : public SfxBoolItem
>@@ -48,7 +47,7 @@ public:
>     SvxContourItem( const BOOL bContoured /*= FALSE*/,
>                     const USHORT nId );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/colritem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/colritem.hxx
>index c71829b..24041ba 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/colritem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/colritem.hxx
>@@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxColorItem ----------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt eine Farbe.
>+    This item describes a color.
> */
> 
> #define VERSION_USEAUTOCOLOR	1
>@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ public:
>     SvxColorItem( const SvxColorItem& rCopy );
>     ~SvxColorItem();
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual	bool            QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>     virtual	bool            PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/crsditem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/crsditem.hxx
>index 6c832f5..a7264df 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/crsditem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/crsditem.hxx
>@@ -42,9 +42,8 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxCrossedOutItem -----------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-    [Beschreibung]
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt, ob und wie durchstrichen ist.
>+/*  [Description]
>+    This item describes, whether and how it is striked out.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxCrossedOutItem : public SfxEnumItem
>@@ -55,7 +54,7 @@ public:
>     SvxCrossedOutItem( const FontStrikeout eSt /*= STRIKEOUT_NONE*/,
>                        const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxItemPresentation GetPresentation( SfxItemPresentation ePres,
>                                     SfxMapUnit eCoreMetric,
>                                     SfxMapUnit ePresMetric,
>@@ -69,7 +68,7 @@ public:
>     virtual	bool            QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>     virtual	bool            PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
> 
>-    // MS VC4.0 kommt durcheinander
>+    // MS VC4.0 messes things up
>     void			 		SetValue( USHORT nNewVal )
>                                 {SfxEnumItem::SetValue(nNewVal); }
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/cscoitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/cscoitem.hxx
>index 4ddbfe3..b286f34 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/cscoitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/cscoitem.hxx
>@@ -36,9 +36,9 @@
> 
> // class SvxCharSetColorItem ---------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    PB: wird nur intern im Reader des Writers benoetigt
>+    Is only needed internally in the reader of Writer.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxCharSetColorItem : public SvxColorItem
>@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ public:
>     SvxCharSetColorItem( const Color& aColor, const rtl_TextEncoding eFrom,
>                      const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxItemPresentation GetPresentation( SfxItemPresentation ePres,
>                                     SfxMapUnit eCoreMetric,
>                                     SfxMapUnit ePresMetric,
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/editdata.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/editdata.hxx
>index 6d252b3..7921c3c 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/editdata.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/editdata.hxx
>@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ enum EVAnchorMode		{
> #define EE_APPEND				0xFFFF
> #define EE_INDEX_NOT_FOUND		0xFFFF
> 
>-// Fehlermeldungen fuer Read/Write-Methode
>+// Error messages for Read / Write Method
> #define EE_READWRITE_OK				 (SVSTREAM_OK)
> #define EE_READWRITE_WRONGFORMAT	 (SVSTREAM_ERRBASE_USER+1)
> #define EE_READWRITE_GENERALERROR	 (SVSTREAM_ERRBASE_USER+2)
>@@ -104,9 +104,9 @@ class ImpEditEngine;
> class EditTextObject;
> class SfxStyleSheet;
> 
>-#define RGCHK_NONE			0	// Keine Korrektur der ViusArea beim Scrollen
>-#define RGCHK_NEG			1	// Keine neg. ViusArea beim Scrollen
>-#define RGCHK_PAPERSZ1		2	// VisArea muss in Papierbreite,Texthoehe liegen
>+#define RGCHK_NONE			0	// No correction of ViusArea when scrolling
>+#define RGCHK_NEG			1	// No negative ViusArea when scrolling
>+#define RGCHK_PAPERSZ1		2	// VisArea must be within paper width, Text Size
> 
> struct EPosition
> {
>@@ -178,8 +178,8 @@ inline sal_Bool ESelection::IsEqual( const ESelection& rS ) const
> 
> inline sal_Bool ESelection::IsLess( const ESelection& rS ) const
> {
>-    // Selektion muss justiert sein.
>-    // => Nur pueffen, ob Ende von 'this' < Start von rS
>+    // The selection must be adjusted.
>+    // => Only check if end of 'this' < Start of rS
> 
>     if ( ( nEndPara < rS.nStartPara ) ||
>          ( ( nEndPara == rS.nStartPara ) && ( nEndPos < rS.nStartPos ) && !IsEqual( rS ) ) )
>@@ -191,8 +191,8 @@ inline sal_Bool ESelection::IsLess( const ESelection& rS ) const
> 
> inline sal_Bool ESelection::IsGreater( const ESelection& rS ) const
> {
>-    // Selektion muss justiert sein.
>-    // => Nur pueffen, ob Ende von 'this' > Start von rS
>+    // The selection must be adjusted.
>+    // => Only check if end of 'this' < Start of rS
> 
>     if ( ( nStartPara > rS.nEndPara ) ||
>          ( ( nStartPara == rS.nEndPara ) && ( nStartPos > rS.nEndPos ) && !IsEqual( rS ) ) )
>@@ -235,12 +235,12 @@ struct EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC EFieldInfo
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
> enum ImportState {
>-                    RTFIMP_START, RTFIMP_END, 				// nur pParser, nPara, nIndex
>+                    RTFIMP_START, RTFIMP_END, 				// only pParser, nPara, nIndex
>                     RTFIMP_NEXTTOKEN, RTFIMP_UNKNOWNATTR,	// nToken+nTokenValue
>                     RTFIMP_SETATTR, 						// pAttrs
>                     RTFIMP_INSERTTEXT, 						// aText
>                     RTFIMP_INSERTPARA,						// -
>-                    HTMLIMP_START, HTMLIMP_END, 			// nur pParser, nPara, nIndex
>+                    HTMLIMP_START, HTMLIMP_END, 			// only pParser, nPara, nIndex
>                     HTMLIMP_NEXTTOKEN, HTMLIMP_UNKNOWNATTR,	// nToken
>                     HTMLIMP_SETATTR, 						// pAttrs
>                     HTMLIMP_INSERTTEXT, 					// aText
>@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ struct ParagraphInfos
>     USHORT	nFirstLineTextHeight;
>     USHORT	nFirstLineMaxAscent;
> 
>-    BOOL	bValid;	// Bei einer Abfrage waehrend der Formatierung ungueltig!
>+    BOOL	bValid;	// A query during formatting is not valid!
> };
> 
> struct EECharAttrib
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/editeng.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/editeng.hxx
>index 75750ba..000003d 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/editeng.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/editeng.hxx
>@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
>  * for a copy of the LGPLv3 License.
>  *
>  ************************************************************************/
>-// MyEDITENG, wegen exportiertem EditEng
>+// MyEDITENG, due to exported EditEng
> #ifndef _MyEDITENG_HXX
> #define _MyEDITENG_HXX
> 
>@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ namespace basegfx { class B2DPolyPolygon; }
> #include <i18npool/lang.h>
> #include "editeng/editengdllapi.h"
> 
>-#include <tools/rtti.hxx>	// wegen typedef TypeId
>+#include <tools/rtti.hxx>	// due to typedef TypeId
> 
> #include <editeng/eedata.hxx>
> class SvxFieldData;
>@@ -296,13 +296,13 @@ public:
>     Point			GetDocPos( const Point& rPaperPos ) const;
>     BOOL			IsTextPos( const Point& rPaperPos, USHORT nBorder = 0 );
> 
>-    // StartDocPos entspr. VisArea.TopLeft().
>+    // StartDocPos corrresponds to VisArea.TopLeft().
>     void			Draw( OutputDevice* pOutDev, const Rectangle& rOutRect );
>     void			Draw( OutputDevice* pOutDev, const Rectangle& rOutRect, const Point& rStartDocPos );
>     void			Draw( OutputDevice* pOutDev, const Rectangle& rOutRect, const Point& rStartDocPos, BOOL bClip );
>     void			Draw( OutputDevice* pOutDev, const Point& rStartPos, short nOrientation = 0 );
> 
>-//  ULONG: Fehlercode des Streams.
>+//  ULONG: Error code of the stream. 
>     ULONG           Read( SvStream& rInput, const String& rBaseURL, EETextFormat, SvKeyValueIterator* pHTTPHeaderAttrs = NULL );
>     ULONG			Write( SvStream& rOutput, EETextFormat );
> 
>@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ public:
>     void			SetImportHdl( const Link& rLink );
>     Link			GetImportHdl() const;
> 
>-    // Flat-Mode: Keine Zeichenformatierung auswerten => Fuer Outliner
>+    // Do not evaluate font formatting => For Outliner
>     BOOL			IsFlatMode() const;
>     void			SetFlatMode( BOOL bFlat );
> 
>@@ -383,7 +383,7 @@ public:
>     USHORT			GetBigTextObjectStart() const;
>     BOOL			ShouldCreateBigTextObject() const;
> 
>-    // Zum schnellen Vorab-Pruefen ohne View:
>+    // For fast Pre-Test without view:
>     EESpellState	HasSpellErrors();
>     BOOL			HasText( const SvxSearchItem& rSearchItem );
> 
>@@ -427,7 +427,6 @@ public:
>     virtual	void	StyleSheetChanged( SfxStyleSheet* pStyle );
>     virtual	void	ParagraphHeightChanged( USHORT nPara );
> 
>-    // #101498#
>     virtual void DrawingText(
>         const Point& rStartPos, const String& rText, USHORT nTextStart, USHORT nTextLen, const sal_Int32* pDXArray,
>         const SvxFont& rFont, USHORT nPara, xub_StrLen nIndex, BYTE nRightToLeft,
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/editobj.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/editobj.hxx
>index c995ea2..a4741bf 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/editobj.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/editobj.hxx
>@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ public:
> 
>     USHORT				Which() const { return nWhich; }
> 
>-    virtual USHORT		GetUserType() const;	// Fuer OutlinerMode, der kann das aber nicht kompatibel speichern
>+    virtual USHORT		GetUserType() const;  // For OutlinerMode, it can however not save in compatible format
>     virtual void		SetUserType( USHORT n );
> 
>     virtual ULONG		GetObjectSettings() const;
>@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
> 
>     virtual USHORT		GetScriptType() const;
> 
>-    virtual USHORT		GetVersion() const;	// Solange der Outliner keine Recordlaenge speichert
>+    virtual USHORT		GetVersion() const;	// As long as the outliner does not store any record length.
> 
>     virtual EditTextObject*	Clone() const = 0;
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/editrids.hrc b/editeng/inc/editeng/editrids.hrc
>index 528e8b1..00901b0 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/editrids.hrc
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/editrids.hrc
>@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@
> #define RID_SVXITEMS_SHADOW_BOTTOMLEFT		(RID_EDIT_START + 232)
> #define RID_SVXITEMS_SHADOW_BOTTOMRIGHT		(RID_EDIT_START + 233)
> 
>-// Umrandungslinien
>+// Border lines
> #define RID_SINGLE_LINE0					(RID_EDIT_START + 234)
> #define RID_SINGLE_LINE1					(RID_EDIT_START + 235)
> #define RID_SINGLE_LINE2					(RID_EDIT_START + 236)
>@@ -336,7 +336,7 @@
> #define RID_DOUBLE_LINE9					(RID_EDIT_START + 248)
> #define RID_DOUBLE_LINE10					(RID_EDIT_START + 249)
> 
>-// Metric-Texte
>+// Metric-Text
> #define RID_SVXITEMS_METRIC_MM				(RID_EDIT_START + 250)
> #define RID_SVXITEMS_METRIC_CM				(RID_EDIT_START + 251)
> #define RID_SVXITEMS_METRIC_INCH			(RID_EDIT_START + 252)
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/editstat.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/editstat.hxx
>index 15de80a..2b56c06 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/editstat.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/editstat.hxx
>@@ -32,43 +32,43 @@
> #include <tools/string.hxx>
> #include <i18npool/lang.h>
> 
>-#define EE_CNTRL_USECHARATTRIBS		0x00000001	// Verwendung harter ZeichenAttr.
>-#define EE_CNTRL_USEPARAATTRIBS		0x00000002	// Verwendung von AbsatzAttr.
>-#define EE_CNTRL_CRSRLEFTPARA		0x00000004	// Cursor ist in einen anderen Absatz gewandert
>-#define EE_CNTRL_DOIDLEFORMAT		0x00000008	// Idle-Formatierung
>+#define EE_CNTRL_USECHARATTRIBS		0x00000001	// Use of hard character attributes
>+#define EE_CNTRL_USEPARAATTRIBS		0x00000002	// Using paragraph attributes.
>+#define EE_CNTRL_CRSRLEFTPARA		0x00000004	// Cursor is moved to another paragraph
>+#define EE_CNTRL_DOIDLEFORMAT		0x00000008	// Formatting idle
> #define EE_CNTRL_PASTESPECIAL		0x00000010	// Allow PasteSpecial
>-#define EE_CNTRL_AUTOINDENTING		0x00000020	// Automatisches einruecken
>-#define EE_CNTRL_UNDOATTRIBS		0x00000040	// Undo fuer Attribute....
>-#define EE_CNTRL_ONECHARPERLINE		0x00000080	// Ein Zeichen pro Zeile
>-#define EE_CNTRL_NOCOLORS			0x00000100	// Engine: Keine Farben
>-#define EE_CNTRL_OUTLINER			0x00000200	// Sonderbehandlung Outliner/Gliederungsmodus
>-#define EE_CNTRL_OUTLINER2			0x00000400	// Sonderbehandlung Outliner/Seite
>-#define EE_CNTRL_ALLOWBIGOBJS		0x00000800	// PortionInfo in Textobjekten
>-#define EE_CNTRL_ONLINESPELLING		0x00001000	// Waehrend des editieren Spelling
>-#define EE_CNTRL_STRETCHING			0x00002000	// Stretch-Modus
>-#define EE_CNTRL_MARKFIELDS			0x00004000	// Felder farblich hinterlegen
>+#define EE_CNTRL_AUTOINDENTING		0x00000020	// Automatic indenting
>+#define EE_CNTRL_UNDOATTRIBS		0x00000040	// Undo for Attributes....
>+#define EE_CNTRL_ONECHARPERLINE		0x00000080	// One character per line
>+#define EE_CNTRL_NOCOLORS			0x00000100	// Engine: No Color
>+#define EE_CNTRL_OUTLINER			0x00000200	// Special treatment Outliner/Outline mode
>+#define EE_CNTRL_OUTLINER2			0x00000400	// Special treatment Outliner/Page
>+#define EE_CNTRL_ALLOWBIGOBJS		0x00000800	// Portion info in text object
>+#define EE_CNTRL_ONLINESPELLING		0x00001000	// During the edit Spelling
>+#define EE_CNTRL_STRETCHING			0x00002000	// Stretch mode
>+#define EE_CNTRL_MARKFIELDS			0x00004000	// Mark Fields with color
> #define EE_CNTRL_URLSFXEXECUTE		0x00008000	// !!!OLD!!!: SFX-URL-Execute.
>-#define EE_CNTRL_RESTOREFONT		0x00010000	// Font im OutDev restaurieren
>-#define EE_CNTRL_RTFSTYLESHEETS		0x00020000	// Stylesheets bei Import verwenden
>-//#define EE_CNTRL_NOREDLINES            0x00040000  // Keine RedLines bei OnlineSpellError     /* removed #i91949 */
>-#define EE_CNTRL_AUTOCORRECT		0x00080000	// AutoKorrektur
>+#define EE_CNTRL_RESTOREFONT		0x00010000	// Restore Font in OutDev
>+#define EE_CNTRL_RTFSTYLESHEETS		0x00020000	// Use Stylesheets when imported
>+//#define EE_CNTRL_NOREDLINES            0x00040000  // No RedLines when OnlineSpellError     /* removed #i91949 */
>+#define EE_CNTRL_AUTOCORRECT		0x00080000	// AutoCorrect
> #define EE_CNTRL_AUTOCOMPLETE		0x00100000	// AutoComplete
>-#define EE_CNTRL_AUTOPAGESIZEX		0x00200000	// Papierbreite an Text anpassen
>-#define EE_CNTRL_AUTOPAGESIZEY		0x00400000	// Papierhoehe an Text anpassen
>+#define EE_CNTRL_AUTOPAGESIZEX		0x00200000	// Adjust paper width to Text
>+#define EE_CNTRL_AUTOPAGESIZEY		0x00400000	// Adjust paper height to Text
> #define EE_CNTRL_AUTOPAGESIZE		(EE_CNTRL_AUTOPAGESIZEX|EE_CNTRL_AUTOPAGESIZEY)
>-#define EE_CNTRL_TABINDENTING		0x00800000	// Einruecken mit Tab
>-#define EE_CNTRL_FORMAT100			0x01000000	// Immer nach 100% formatieren
>-#define EE_CNTRL_ULSPACESUMMATION	0x02000000	// MS Compat: SA und SB aufsummieren, nicht maximalwert
>-#define EE_CNTRL_ULSPACEFIRSTPARA	0x04000000	// MS Compat: SB auch beim ersten Absatz auswerten
>-
>-#define EV_CNTRL_AUTOSCROLL			0x00000001	// Autom. Scrollen horiz.
>-#define EV_CNTRL_BIGSCROLL			0x00000002	// Weiter Scrollen, als nur zum Cursor
>-#define EV_CNTRL_ENABLEPASTE		0x00000004	// Paste erlauben
>-#define EV_CNTRL_SINGLELINEPASTE	0x00000008	// View: Paste in Eingabezeile...
>-#define EV_CNTRL_OVERWRITE			0x00000010	// Ueberschreibmodus
>-#define EV_CNTRL_INVONEMORE			0x00000020	// Ein Pixel mehr invalidieren
>-#define EV_CNTRL_AUTOSIZEX			0x00000040	// Automatisch an Textbreite anpassen
>-#define EV_CNTRL_AUTOSIZEY			0x00000080	// Automatisch an Texthoehe anpassen
>+#define EE_CNTRL_TABINDENTING		0x00800000	// Indent with tab
>+#define EE_CNTRL_FORMAT100			0x01000000	// Always format to 100%
>+#define EE_CNTRL_ULSPACESUMMATION	0x02000000	// MS Compat: sum SA and SB, not maximum value
>+#define EE_CNTRL_ULSPACEFIRSTPARA	0x04000000	// MS Compat: evaluate also at the first paragraph 
>+
>+#define EV_CNTRL_AUTOSCROLL			0x00000001	// Auto scrolling horizontally
>+#define EV_CNTRL_BIGSCROLL			0x00000002	// Scroll further to the cursor
>+#define EV_CNTRL_ENABLEPASTE		0x00000004	// Enable Paste
>+#define EV_CNTRL_SINGLELINEPASTE	0x00000008	// View: Paste in input line ...
>+#define EV_CNTRL_OVERWRITE			0x00000010	// Overwrite mode
>+#define EV_CNTRL_INVONEMORE			0x00000020	// Invalidate one pixel more
>+#define EV_CNTRL_AUTOSIZEX			0x00000040	// Automatically adapt to text width
>+#define EV_CNTRL_AUTOSIZEY			0x00000080	// Automatically adapt to Text width
> #define EV_CNTRL_AUTOSIZE			(EV_CNTRL_AUTOSIZEX|EV_CNTRL_AUTOSIZEY)
> 
> #define EE_STAT_HSCROLL				0x00000001
>@@ -81,12 +81,12 @@
> #define EE_STAT_WRONGWORDCHANGED	0x00000080
> // #define EE_STAT_MODIFIED			0x00000100
> 
>-// Nur fuer Update:
>+// Only for Update:
> #define EE_CNTRL_AUTOCENTER		EE_CNTRL_AUTOPAGESIZE
> #define EE_STAT_GROWY			EE_STAT_TEXTHEIGHTCHANGED
> 
> /*
>-    EE_STAT_CRSRLEFTPARA zur Zeit bei Cursorbewegungen und Return.
>+    EE_STAT_CRSRLEFTPARA at the time cursor movement and the enter.
> */
> 
> inline void SetFlags( ULONG& rBits, const ULONG nMask, bool bOn )
>@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ class EditStatus
> protected:
>     ULONG	nStatusBits;
>     ULONG	nControlBits;
>-    USHORT	nPrevPara;					// fuer EE_STAT_CRSRLEFTPARA
>+    USHORT	nPrevPara;					// for EE_STAT_CRSRLEFTPARA
> 
> public:
>             EditStatus()				{ nStatusBits = 0; nControlBits = 0; nPrevPara = 0xFFFF; }
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/editview.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/editview.hxx
>index 39756b5..e709630 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/editview.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/editview.hxx
>@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@
>  * for a copy of the LGPLv3 License.
>  *
>  ************************************************************************/
>-// MyEDITVIEW, wegen exportiertem EditView
>+// MyEDITVIEW, due to exported EditView
> #ifndef _MyEDITVIEW_HXX
> #define _MyEDITVIEW_HXX
> 
>@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC EditView
>     friend class ImpEditEngine;
>     friend class EditSelFunctionSet;
> 
>-public:	// brauche ich fuer Undo
>+public:	// Needed for Undo
>     ImpEditView*	GetImpEditView() const 		{ return pImpEditView; }
>     ImpEditEngine*	GetImpEditEngine() const;
> 
>@@ -126,13 +126,13 @@ public:
> 
>     USHORT			GetSelectedScriptType() const;
> 
>-                        // Position der VisArea im Ausgabefenster.
>-                        // Eine Groessenaenderung betrifft auch die VisArea
>+                        // VisArea position of the Output window.
>+                        // A size change also affects the VisArea
>     void				SetOutputArea( const Rectangle& rRec );
>     const Rectangle&	GetOutputArea() const;
> 
>-                        // Dokumentposition.
>-                        // Eine Groessenaenderung betrifft auch die VisArea
>+                        // Document position.
>+                        // A size change also affects the VisArea
>     void				SetVisArea( const Rectangle& rRec );
>     const Rectangle&	GetVisArea() const;
> 
>@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ public:
>     void			Undo();
>     void			Redo();
> 
>-    // speziell fuer Olli
>+    // especially for Olli
>     USHORT			GetParagraph( const Point& rMousePosPixel );
>     Point			GetWindowPosTopLeft( USHORT nParagraph );
>     void			MoveParagraphs( Range aParagraphs, USHORT nNewPos );
>@@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ public:
> 
>     ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::XTransferable > GetTransferable();
> 
>-    // An EditView, damit bei TRUE flackerfreies Update:
>+    // An EditView, so that when TRUE the update will be free from flickering:
>     void			SetEditEngineUpdateMode( BOOL bUpdate );
>     void			ForceUpdate();
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/eeitemid.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/eeitemid.hxx
>index 3e28e0e..62b5a52 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/eeitemid.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/eeitemid.hxx
>@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@
> #undef ITEMID_BRUSH
> #endif
> 
>-// Zeichenattribute....
>+// Character Attributes....
> #define ITEMID_FONT 			EE_CHAR_FONTINFO
> #define ITEMID_POSTURE			EE_CHAR_ITALIC
> #define ITEMID_WEIGHT			EE_CHAR_WEIGHT
>@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@
> #define ITEMID_EMPHASISMARK		EE_CHAR_EMPHASISMARK
> #define ITEMID_CHARRELIEF		EE_CHAR_RELIEF
> 
>-// Absatzattribute
>+// Paragraph Attributes
> #define ITEMID_SCRIPTSPACE		EE_PARA_ASIANCJKSPACING
> #define ITEMID_ADJUST			EE_PARA_JUST
> #define ITEMID_LINESPACING		EE_PARA_SBL
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/emphitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/emphitem.hxx
>index 2715f50..826c7c3 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/emphitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/emphitem.hxx
>@@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxEmphasisMarkItem ----------------------------------------------
> 
>-/* [Beschreibung]
>+/* [Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt die Font-Betonung.
>+    This item describes the Font emphasis.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxEmphasisMarkItem : public SfxUInt16Item
>@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public:
>     SvxEmphasisMarkItem(  const FontEmphasisMark eVal /*= EMPHASISMARK_NONE*/,
>                           const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem + SfxEnumItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem + SfxEnumItem
>     virtual SfxItemPresentation GetPresentation( SfxItemPresentation ePres,
>                                     SfxMapUnit eCoreMetric,
>                                     SfxMapUnit ePresMetric,
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/escpitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/escpitem.hxx
>index f37f763..7c47268 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/escpitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/escpitem.hxx
>@@ -43,14 +43,14 @@ namespace rtl
> // class SvxEscapementItem -----------------------------------------------
> 
> #define DFLT_ESC_SUPER	 33		// 1/3
>-#define DFLT_ESC_SUB    -33		// auch 1/3 fr"uher 8/100
>+#define DFLT_ESC_SUB    -33		// also 1/3 previously 8/100
> #define DFLT_ESC_PROP	 58
> #define DFLT_ESC_AUTO_SUPER	101
> #define DFLT_ESC_AUTO_SUB  -101
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt die Schrift-Position.
>+    This item describes the writing position.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxEscapementItem : public SfxEnumItemInterface
>@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ public:
>     SvxEscapementItem( const short nEsc, const BYTE nProp,
>                    const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual SfxItemPresentation GetPresentation( SfxItemPresentation ePres,
>                                     SfxMapUnit eCoreMetric,
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/fhgtitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/fhgtitem.hxx
>index e4305a6..0496ceb 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/fhgtitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/fhgtitem.hxx
>@@ -41,11 +41,11 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxFontHeightItem -----------------------------------------------
> 
>-// Achtung: Twips-Werte
>+// Warning: twips values
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt die Font-Hoehe.
>+    This item describes the font height
> */
> 
> #define	FONTHEIGHT_16_VERSION	((USHORT)0x0001)
>@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ public:
>     SvxFontHeightItem( const ULONG nSz /*= 240*/, const USHORT nPropHeight /*= 100*/,
>                        const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual	bool             QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>     virtual	bool             PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/flditem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/flditem.hxx
>index 6a680b0..94d47ae 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/flditem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/flditem.hxx
>@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ public:
> };
> 
> /*
>-[Beschreibung]
>+[Description]
> In diesem Item wird ein Feld (SvxFieldData) gespeichert.
> Das Feld gehoert dem Item.
> Das Feld selbst wird durch eine Ableitung von SvxFieldData bestimmt. (RTTI)
>@@ -88,13 +88,13 @@ public:
> };
> 
> // =================================================================
>-// Es folgen die Ableitungen von SvxFieldData...
>+// The following are the derivatives of SvxFieldData ...
> // =================================================================
> 
> #define SVX_DATEFIELD		2
> #define SVX_URLFIELD		3
> 
>-#define SVX_PAGEFIELD		100		// Ex-Calc-Felder
>+#define SVX_PAGEFIELD		100		// Ex-Calc Fields
> #define SVX_PAGESFIELD		101
> #define SVX_TIMEFIELD		102
> #define SVX_FILEFIELD		103
>@@ -106,19 +106,19 @@ public:
> #define SVX_FOOTERFIELD		109
> #define SVX_DATEFIMEFIELD	110
> 
>-#define SVX_USERFIELD		200	// Ab hier eigene Felder, nicht im SVX
>+#define SVX_USERFIELD		200	// From here on own fields, not in the SVX
> 
> enum SvxDateType { SVXDATETYPE_FIX, SVXDATETYPE_VAR };
>-enum SvxDateFormat {	SVXDATEFORMAT_APPDEFAULT, 	// Wie in App eingestellt
>-                        SVXDATEFORMAT_SYSTEM, 		// Wie im System eingestellt
>+enum SvxDateFormat {	SVXDATEFORMAT_APPDEFAULT, 	// Set as in App 
>+                        SVXDATEFORMAT_SYSTEM, 		// Set as in System
>                         SVXDATEFORMAT_STDSMALL,
>                         SVXDATEFORMAT_STDBIG,
>                         SVXDATEFORMAT_A,	// 13.02.96
>                         SVXDATEFORMAT_B,	// 13.02.1996
>                         SVXDATEFORMAT_C,	// 13.Feb 1996
>-                        SVXDATEFORMAT_D,	// 13.Februar 1996
>-                        SVXDATEFORMAT_E,	// Die, 13.Februar 1996
>-                        SVXDATEFORMAT_F		// Dienstag, 13.Februar 1996
>+                        SVXDATEFORMAT_D,	// 13.February 1996
>+                        SVXDATEFORMAT_E,	// Tue, 13.February 1996
>+                        SVXDATEFORMAT_F		// Tuesday, 13.February 1996
>                     };
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxDateField : public SvxFieldData
>@@ -159,18 +159,18 @@ public:
> };
> 
> 
>-enum SvxURLFormat	{	SVXURLFORMAT_APPDEFAULT, 	// Wie in App eingestellt
>-                        SVXURLFORMAT_URL,			// URL darstellen
>-                        SVXURLFORMAT_REPR			// Repraesentation darstellen
>+enum SvxURLFormat	{	SVXURLFORMAT_APPDEFAULT, 	// Set as in App
>+                        SVXURLFORMAT_URL,			// Represent URL 
>+                        SVXURLFORMAT_REPR			// Constitute repraesentation
>                     };
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxURLField : public SvxFieldData
> {
> private:
>     SvxURLFormat			eFormat;
>-    XubString				aURL;      			// URL-Adresse
>-    XubString				aRepresentation;	// Was wird dargestellt
>-    XubString				aTargetFrame;		// In welchem Frame
>+    XubString				aURL;      			// URL-Address
>+    XubString				aRepresentation;	// What is shown
>+    XubString				aTargetFrame;		// In what Frame
> 
> public:
>                             SV_DECL_PERSIST1( SvxURLField, SvxFieldData, SVX_URLFIELD )
>@@ -247,8 +247,8 @@ public:
> 
> 
> enum SvxTimeType { SVXTIMETYPE_FIX, SVXTIMETYPE_VAR };
>-enum SvxTimeFormat {	SVXTIMEFORMAT_APPDEFAULT, 	// Wie in App eingestellt
>-                        SVXTIMEFORMAT_SYSTEM, 		// Wie im System eingestellt
>+enum SvxTimeFormat {	SVXTIMEFORMAT_APPDEFAULT, 	// Set as in App 
>+                        SVXTIMEFORMAT_SYSTEM, 		// Set as in System
>                         SVXTIMEFORMAT_STANDARD,
>                         SVXTIMEFORMAT_24_HM,	// 13:49
>                         SVXTIMEFORMAT_24_HMS,	// 13:49:38
>@@ -300,10 +300,10 @@ public:
> 
> 
> enum SvxFileType { SVXFILETYPE_FIX, SVXFILETYPE_VAR };
>-enum SvxFileFormat {	SVXFILEFORMAT_NAME_EXT,	// Dateiname mit Extension
>-                        SVXFILEFORMAT_FULLPATH,	// vollstndiger Pfad
>-                        SVXFILEFORMAT_PATH,		// nur Pfad
>-                        SVXFILEFORMAT_NAME		// nur Dateiname
>+enum SvxFileFormat {	SVXFILEFORMAT_NAME_EXT,	// File name with Extension
>+                        SVXFILEFORMAT_FULLPATH,	// full path
>+                        SVXFILEFORMAT_PATH,		// only path
>+                        SVXFILEFORMAT_NAME		// only file name
>                    };
> 
> 
>@@ -339,10 +339,10 @@ public:
> 
> 
> enum SvxAuthorType { SVXAUTHORTYPE_FIX, SVXAUTHORTYPE_VAR };
>-enum SvxAuthorFormat {	SVXAUTHORFORMAT_FULLNAME,	// vollstndiger Name
>-                        SVXAUTHORFORMAT_NAME,		// nur Nachname
>-                        SVXAUTHORFORMAT_FIRSTNAME,	// nur Vorname
>-                        SVXAUTHORFORMAT_SHORTNAME	// Initialen
>+enum SvxAuthorFormat {	SVXAUTHORFORMAT_FULLNAME,	// full name
>+                        SVXAUTHORFORMAT_NAME,		// Only Last name
>+                        SVXAUTHORFORMAT_FIRSTNAME,	// Only first name
>+                        SVXAUTHORFORMAT_SHORTNAME	// Initials
>                     };
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxAuthorField : public SvxFieldData
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/flstitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/flstitem.hxx
>index b2d35dd..976a6ae 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/flstitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/flstitem.hxx
>@@ -40,10 +40,10 @@
> class FontList;
> 
> /*
>-    [Beschreibung]
>+    [Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item dient als Transport-Medium fuer eine FontListe.
>-    Die Fontliste wird nicht kopiert und nicht geloescht!
>+    This item serves as a transport medium for a font list. The font list is 
>+    not copied and not deleted!
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxFontListItem : public SfxPoolItem
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/fontitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/fontitem.hxx
>index c0ac85b..4d0a535 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/fontitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/fontitem.hxx
>@@ -43,9 +43,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxFontItem -----------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-    [Beschreibung]
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt einen Font.
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes a Font.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxFontItem : public SfxPoolItem
>@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ public:
>         const rtl_TextEncoding eFontTextEncoding /*= RTL_TEXTENCODING_DONTKNOW*/,
>         const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*     Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*	 Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ public:
>                                     SfxMapUnit ePresMetric,
>                                     String &rText, const IntlWrapper * = 0 ) const;
> 
>-    // ZugriffsMethoden:
>+    // Access methods:
>     inline String &GetFamilyName() { return aFamilyName; }
>     inline const String &GetFamilyName() const { return aFamilyName; }
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/fwdtitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/fwdtitem.hxx
>index cbf4a70..296820d 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/fwdtitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/fwdtitem.hxx
>@@ -37,9 +37,9 @@
> // class SvxFontWidthItem -----------------------------------------------
> 
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt die Font-Breite.
>+    This item describes the font width.
> */
> 
> class SvxFontWidthItem : public SfxPoolItem
>@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ public:
>                         const USHORT nPropWidth /*= 100*/,
>                         const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual	bool             QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>     virtual	bool             PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/hyznitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/hyznitem.hxx
>index f586b18..07bb874 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/hyznitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/hyznitem.hxx
>@@ -41,10 +41,10 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxHyphenZoneItem -----------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt ein Silbentrennungsattribut (Automatisch?, Anzahl der
>-Zeichen am Zeilenende und -anfang).
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes a hyphenation attribute  (automatic?, number of 
>+    characters at the end of the line and start).
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxHyphenZoneItem : public SfxPoolItem
>@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ public:
>     SvxHyphenZoneItem( const BOOL bHyph /*= FALSE*/,
>                        const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual	bool             QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>     virtual	bool             PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/keepitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/keepitem.hxx
>index b98aff4..2d942c6 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/keepitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/keepitem.hxx
>@@ -40,9 +40,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxFmtKeepItem ------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt eine logische Variable "Absaetze zusammenhalten?".
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes a logical variable "keep paragraphs together?".
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxFmtKeepItem : public SfxBoolItem
>@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
>                            const USHORT _nWhich  );
>     inline SvxFmtKeepItem& operator=( const SvxFmtKeepItem& rSplit );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*	Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*	Create( SvStream&, USHORT ) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store( SvStream& , USHORT nItemVersion ) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/kernitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/kernitem.hxx
>index d646378..ba958cc 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/kernitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/kernitem.hxx
>@@ -41,12 +41,12 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxKerningItem --------------------------------------------------
> 
>-// Achtung: Twips-Werte
>-// Twips: 0 = kein Kerning
>+// Note: Twips value
>+// Twips: 0 = no kerning
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt die Schrift-Laufweite.
>+    This item describes the kerning.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxKerningItem : public SfxInt16Item
>@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ public:
> 
>     SvxKerningItem( const short nKern /*= 0*/, const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/langitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/langitem.hxx
>index 4d4ddf2..5255e46 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/langitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/langitem.hxx
>@@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxLanguageItem -------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt eine Sprache.
>+    This item describes a Language.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxLanguageItem : public SfxEnumItem
>@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public:
>     SvxLanguageItem( const LanguageType eLang /*= LANGUAGE_GERMAN*/,
>                      const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxItemPresentation GetPresentation( SfxItemPresentation ePres,
>                                     SfxMapUnit eCoreMetric,
>                                     SfxMapUnit ePresMetric,
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/lcolitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/lcolitem.hxx
>index 00b116f..17b070d 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/lcolitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/lcolitem.hxx
>@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
> #include <editeng/editengdllapi.h>
> 
> /*
>- * dummy-Item fuer ToolBox-Controller:
>+ * Dummy item for ToolBox controller:
>  *
>  */
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/lrspitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/lrspitem.hxx
>index d0e0399..1b5a6c5 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/lrspitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/lrspitem.hxx
>@@ -40,20 +40,19 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxLRSpaceItem --------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Linker/Rechter Rand sowie Erstzeileneinzug
>-
>-SvxLRSpaceItem bietet zwei Schnittstellen zur Befragung des linken
>-Randes und des Erstzeileneinzuges an. Die Get-Methoden liefern
>-die Member zurueck, wie sie das Layout bisher auch erwartete:
>-Der linke Rand verschiebt sich beim negativem Erstzeileneinzug
>-nach links. Die SetTxt/GetTxt-Methoden setzen voraus, dass der
>-linke Rand der 0-Punkt des Erstzeileneinzugs darstellt:
>-
>-     UI         UI       LAYOUT   UI/TEXT      UI/TEXT    (Wo?)
>-SetTxtLeft SetTxtFirst GetLeft  GetTxtLeft  GetTxtFirst  (Was?)
>-    500       -500        0        500         -500      (Wieviel?)
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    Left/Right margin and first line indent
>+
>+    SvxLRSpaceItem offers two interfaces for views from the left margin and 
>+    first line indent. The get methods return the member, with the layout also 
>+    as expected: the left edge shifts to the negative first line indent to the 
>+    left. The SetTxt/Gettxt methods assume that the left side represents the 
>+    0 coordinate for the first line indent:
>+
>+    UI         UI       LAYOUT   UI/TEXT      UI/TEXT    (Where?)
>+    SetTxtLeft SetTxtFirst GetLeft  GetTxtLeft  GetTxtFirst  (What?)
>+    500       -500        0        500         -500      (How much?)
>     500         0        500       500           0
>     500       +500       500       500         +500
>     700       -500       200       700         -500
>@@ -66,15 +65,15 @@ SetTxtLeft SetTxtFirst GetLeft  GetTxtLeft  GetTxtFirst  (Was?)
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxLRSpaceItem : public SfxPoolItem
> {
>-    short	nFirstLineOfst;     // Erstzeileneinzug _immer_ relativ zu nTxtLeft
>-    long	nTxtLeft;           // wir spendieren einen USHORT
>-    long	nLeftMargin;        // nLeft oder der neg. Erstzeileneinzug
>-    long	nRightMargin;		// der unproblematische rechte Rand
>+    short	nFirstLineOfst;     // First-line indent _always_ relative to nTxtLeft
>+    long	nTxtLeft;           // We spend a USHORT
>+    long	nLeftMargin;        // nLeft or the negative first-line indent
>+    long	nRightMargin;		// The unproblematic right edge
> 
>     USHORT	nPropFirstLineOfst, nPropLeftMargin, nPropRightMargin;
>-    BOOL 	bAutoFirst	: 1;	// Automatische Berechnung der Erstzeileneinzugs
>+    BOOL 	bAutoFirst	: 1;	// Automatic calculation of the first line indent
> 
>-    void   AdjustLeft();		// nLeftMargin und nTxtLeft werden angepasst.
>+    void   AdjustLeft();		// nLeftMargin and nTxtLeft are being adjusted.
> 
> public:
>     TYPEINFO();
>@@ -85,7 +84,7 @@ public:
>                     const USHORT nId  );
>     inline SvxLRSpaceItem& operator=( const SvxLRSpaceItem &rCpy );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
> 
>     virtual bool            QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>@@ -103,11 +102,11 @@ public:
>     virtual bool             ScaleMetrics( long nMult, long nDiv );
>     virtual	bool             HasMetrics() const;
> 
>-    // Die "Layout-Schnittstelle":
>+    // The Layout Interface:
>     inline void   SetLeft ( const long nL, const USHORT nProp = 100 );
>     inline void   SetRight( const long nR, const USHORT nProp = 100 );
> 
>-    // abfragen / direktes setzen der absoluten Werte
>+    // Query/direct setting of the absolute values
>     inline long GetLeft()  const { return nLeftMargin; }
>     inline long GetRight() const { return nRightMargin;}
>     inline void SetLeftValue( const long nL ) { nTxtLeft = nLeftMargin = nL; }
>@@ -115,7 +114,7 @@ public:
>     inline BOOL IsAutoFirst()  const { return bAutoFirst; }
>     inline void SetAutoFirst( const BOOL bNew ) { bAutoFirst = bNew; }
> 
>-    // abfragen / setzen der Prozent-Werte
>+    // Query/Setting the percentage values
>     inline void SetPropLeft( const USHORT nProp = 100 )
>                     { nPropLeftMargin = nProp; }
>     inline void SetPropRight( const USHORT nProp = 100 )
>@@ -123,7 +122,7 @@ public:
>     inline USHORT GetPropLeft()  const { return nPropLeftMargin; }
>     inline USHORT GetPropRight() const { return nPropRightMargin;}
> 
>-    // Die "UI/Text-Schnittstelle":
>+    // The UI/text interface:
>     inline void SetTxtLeft( const long nL, const USHORT nProp = 100 );
>     inline long GetTxtLeft() const { return nTxtLeft; }
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/lspcitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/lspcitem.hxx
>index edc631f..a5db017 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/lspcitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/lspcitem.hxx
>@@ -42,9 +42,8 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxLineSpacingItem ----------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt den Abstand zwischen den Zeilen.
>+/*  [Description]
>+    This item describes the distance between the lines.
> */
> 
> #define LINE_SPACE_DEFAULT_HEIGHT 200
>@@ -61,15 +60,14 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxLineSpacingItem : public SfxEnumItemInterface
> public:
>     TYPEINFO();
> 
>-    // Der Writer verlaesst sich auf eine Default-Hoehe von 200!
>-    // Eigentlich wuerde ich alle Werte mit 0 initialisieren, aber wer kann
>-    // die Folgen beim Writer absehen ?
>-    // => lieber einen krummen Wert als Default, aber der Programmierer
>-    // sieht, dass dort etwas besonderes passiert.
>+    // The writer relies on a default height of 200! Actually, I would 
>+    // initialize all values to 0, but who can ignore the consequences in
>+    // writer? => Rather have a crooked vales as the default, but the 
>+    // programmer sees that there's something special happening.
> 
>     SvxLineSpacingItem( USHORT nHeight /*= LINE_SPACE_DEFAULT_HEIGHT*/, const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual	bool            QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>     virtual	bool            PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
>@@ -83,8 +81,7 @@ public:
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*	 Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		 Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion ) const;
> 
>-    // Methoden zum Abfragen und Aendern
>-    // Interlinespace wird zur Hoehe addiert.
>+    // Methods to query and edit. InterlineSpace is added to the height.
>     inline short GetInterLineSpace() const { return nInterLineSpace; }
>     inline void SetInterLineSpace( const short nSpace )
>     {
>@@ -92,7 +89,7 @@ public:
>         eInterLineSpace = SVX_INTER_LINE_SPACE_FIX;
>     }
> 
>-    // Bestimmt absolute oder minimale Zeilenhoehe.
>+    // Determines the absolute or minimum row height.
>     inline USHORT GetLineHeight() const { return nLineHeight; }
>     inline void SetLineHeight( const USHORT nHeight )
>     {
>@@ -100,7 +97,7 @@ public:
>         eLineSpace = SVX_LINE_SPACE_MIN;
>     }
> 
>-    // Vergroessert oder verkleinert die Zeilenhoehe.
>+    // To increase or decrease the row height.
>     BYTE GetPropLineSpace() const { return nPropLineSpace; }
>     inline void SetPropLineSpace( const BYTE nProp )
>     {
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/measfld.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/measfld.hxx
>index 174f838..904d8bd 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/measfld.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/measfld.hxx
>@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@
> 
> #ifndef _FLDITEM_HXX
> #ifndef ITEMID_FIELD
>-#include <editeng/editdata.hxx>  /* das include wird wg. EE_FEATURE_FIELD benoetigt */
>-#define ITEMID_FIELD EE_FEATURE_FIELD  /* wird fuer #include <editeng/flditem.hxx> benoetigt */
>+#include <editeng/editdata.hxx>  /* this include is needed due to EE_FEATURE_FIELD */
>+#define ITEMID_FIELD EE_FEATURE_FIELD  /* is needed for #include <editeng/flditem.hxx> */
> #endif
> #include <editeng/flditem.hxx>
> #endif
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/nhypitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/nhypitem.hxx
>index e515ee4..b5db3ed 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/nhypitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/nhypitem.hxx
>@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ public:
>     SvxNoHyphenItem( const BOOL bHyphen /*= TRUE*/,
>                      const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/nlbkitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/nlbkitem.hxx
>index 4527097..00cb4a5 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/nlbkitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/nlbkitem.hxx
>@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ public:
>     SvxNoLinebreakItem( const BOOL bBreak /*= TRUE*/,
>                         const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/numdef.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/numdef.hxx
>index 4e5b901..5d997c2 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/numdef.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/numdef.hxx
>@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@
>  *
>  ************************************************************************/
> 
>-#define SVX_MAX_NUM				10 // max. moegliche Numerierungsebenen
>-#define SVX_DEF_BULLET			(0xF000 + 149)// Charakter fuer Aufzaehlungen
>+#define SVX_MAX_NUM				10 // max. possible numbering level
>+#define SVX_DEF_BULLET			(0xF000 + 149)// Character for lists
> 
> /* vim:set shiftwidth=4 softtabstop=4 expandtab: */
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/numitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/numitem.hxx
>index 7489f37..186ed8b 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/numitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/numitem.hxx
>@@ -57,17 +57,17 @@ namespace com{namespace sun{ namespace star{
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> //Feature-Flags (only USHORT!)
>-#define NUM_CONTINUOUS 			0x0001 // fortlaufende Numerierung moeglich?
>-#define NUM_CHAR_TEXT_DISTANCE 	0x0002 // Abstand Symbol<->Text?
>-#define NUM_CHAR_STYLE			0x0004 // Zeichenvorlagen?
>-#define NUM_BULLET_REL_SIZE		0x0008 // rel. Bulletgroesse?
>+#define NUM_CONTINUOUS 			0x0001 // consecutive numbers possible?
>+#define NUM_CHAR_TEXT_DISTANCE 	0x0002 // Distance Symbol<->Text?
>+#define NUM_CHAR_STYLE			0x0004 // Character styles?
>+#define NUM_BULLET_REL_SIZE		0x0008 // relative bullet size?
> #define NUM_BULLET_COLOR		0x0010 // Bullet color
>-#define NUM_SYMBOL_ALIGNMENT	0x0040 // alignment soll unter den Optionen angezeigt werden
>-#define NUM_NO_NUMBERS			0x0080 // Numberierungen sind nicht erlaubt
>+#define NUM_SYMBOL_ALIGNMENT	0x0040 // alignment to be shown in the options
>+#define NUM_NO_NUMBERS			0x0080 // Numbering are not allowed
> #define NUM_ENABLE_LINKED_BMP	0x0100 // linked bitmaps are available
> #define NUM_ENABLE_EMBEDDED_BMP	0x0200 // embedded bitmaps are available
> 
>-#define SVX_NO_NUM				200 // Markierung fuer keine Numerierung
>+#define SVX_NO_NUM				200 // Marker for no numbering
> #define SVX_NO_NUMLEVEL         0x20
> 
> #define LINK_TOKEN 	0x80 //indicate linked bitmaps - for use in dialog only
>@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxNumberType
>     static com::sun::star::uno::Reference<com::sun::star::text::XNumberingFormatter> xFormatter;
> 
>     sal_Int16		nNumType;
>-    sal_Bool		bShowSymbol;		// Symbol auch anzeigen?
>+    sal_Bool		bShowSymbol;		// Also show Symbol ?
> 
> public:
>     SvxNumberType(sal_Int16 nType = com::sun::star::style::NumberingType::ARABIC);
>@@ -122,12 +122,12 @@ private:
> 
>     SvxAdjust			eNumAdjust;
> 
>-    BYTE				nInclUpperLevels;	//Nummern aus der vorigen Ebenen uebernehmen
>-    USHORT 				nStart;				//Start der Zaehlung
>+    BYTE				nInclUpperLevels;	// Take over numbers from the previous level.
>+    USHORT 				nStart;				// Start of counting
> 
>-    sal_Unicode 		cBullet;			//Symbol
>-    USHORT				nBulletRelSize;		//proz. Groesse des Bullets
>-    Color				nBulletColor;		//Bullet color
>+    sal_Unicode 		cBullet;			// Symbol
>+    USHORT				nBulletRelSize;		// percentage size of bullets
>+    Color				nBulletColor;		// Bullet color
> 
>     // mode indicating, if the position and spacing of the list label is
>     // determined by the former attributes (nFirstLineOffset, nAbsLSpace,
>@@ -140,10 +140,10 @@ private:
>     //         LABEL_ALIGNMENT is active.
>     SvxNumPositionAndSpaceMode mePositionAndSpaceMode;
> 
>-    short 				nFirstLineOffset;   //Erstzeileneinzug
>-    short 				nAbsLSpace;			//Abstand Rand<->Nummer
>-    short 				nLSpace;			//relative Einrueckung zum Vorgaenger
>-    short				nCharTextDistance;	//Abstand Nummer<->Text
>+    short 				nFirstLineOffset;   // First line indent
>+    short 				nAbsLSpace;			// Distance Border<->Number
>+    short 				nLSpace;			// relative to the previous indentation
>+    short				nCharTextDistance;	// Distance Number<->Text
> 
>     // specifies what follows the list label before the text of the first line
>     // of the list item starts
>@@ -155,13 +155,13 @@ private:
>     // specifies the indent before the text, e.g. in L2R-layout the left margin
>     long                        mnIndentAt;
> 
>-    SvxBrushItem* 	 	pGraphicBrush; 			//
>-    sal_Int16           eVertOrient;        // vert. Ausrichtung einer Bitmap
>+    SvxBrushItem* 	 	pGraphicBrush; 		
>+    sal_Int16           eVertOrient;        // vertical alignment of a bitmap
> 
>-    Size 				aGraphicSize;		// immer! in 1/100 mm
>-    Font* 				pBulletFont;		// Pointer auf den BulletFont
>+    Size 				aGraphicSize;		// Always! in 1/100 mm
>+    Font* 				pBulletFont;		// Pointer to the bullet font
> 
>-    String				sCharStyleName;		// Zeichenvorlage
>+    String				sCharStyleName;		// Character Style
> 
>     BitmapEx*			pScaledImageCache;	// Image scaled to aGraphicSize, only cached for WINDOW/VDEV
> 
>@@ -248,13 +248,13 @@ enum SvxNumRuleType
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxNumRule
> {
>-    USHORT 				nLevelCount;            // Anzahl der unterstuetzten Levels
>-    ULONG 				nFeatureFlags;          // was wird unterstuetzt?
>-    SvxNumRuleType		eNumberingType;         // was fuer eine Numerierung
>-    BOOL 				bContinuousNumbering;	// fortlaufende Numerierung
>+    USHORT 				nLevelCount;            // Number of supported levels
>+    ULONG 				nFeatureFlags;          // What is supported?
>+    SvxNumRuleType		eNumberingType;         // Type of numbering
>+    BOOL 				bContinuousNumbering;	// sequential numbering
> 
>     SvxNumberFormat* 	aFmts[SVX_MAX_NUM];
>-    BOOL			 	aFmtsSet[SVX_MAX_NUM]; //Flags ueber Gueltigkeit der Ebenen
>+    BOOL			 	aFmtsSet[SVX_MAX_NUM]; // Flags indicating valid levels
> 
>     static sal_Int32	nRefCount;
>     com::sun::star::lang::Locale aLocale;
>@@ -324,10 +324,10 @@ public:
> 
> class SvxNodeNum
> {
>-    USHORT nLevelVal[ SVX_MAX_NUM ];	// Nummern aller Levels
>-    USHORT nSetValue;					// vorgegebene Nummer
>-    BYTE nMyLevel;						// akt. Level
>-    BOOL bStartNum;						// Numerierung neu starten
>+    USHORT nLevelVal[ SVX_MAX_NUM ];	// Numbers of all levels
>+    USHORT nSetValue;					// predetermined number
>+    BYTE nMyLevel;						// Current Level
>+    BOOL bStartNum;						// Restart numbering 
> 
> public:
>     inline SvxNodeNum( BYTE nLevel = SVX_NO_NUM, USHORT nSetVal = USHRT_MAX );
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/opaqitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/opaqitem.hxx
>index 1ba3648..204becb 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/opaqitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/opaqitem.hxx
>@@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ namespace rtl
> // class SvxOpaqueItem ---------------------------------------------------
> 
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt eine logische Variable "Undurchsichtig ja oder nein".
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes a logical variable "Opaque yes or no."
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxOpaqueItem : public SfxBoolItem
>@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public:
>     SvxOpaqueItem( const USHORT nId , const BOOL bOpa = TRUE );
>     inline SvxOpaqueItem &operator=( const SvxOpaqueItem &rCpy );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion ) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/orphitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/orphitem.hxx
>index d975116..c6d7b57 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/orphitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/orphitem.hxx
>@@ -41,9 +41,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxOrphansItem --------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt die Anzahl der Zeilen fuer die Schusterjungenregelung.
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes the number of lines for the orphans system.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxOrphansItem: public SfxByteItem
>@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
> 
>     SvxOrphansItem( const BYTE nL /*= 0*/, const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion ) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/outliner.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/outliner.hxx
>index bf8cce8..9264eec 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/outliner.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/outliner.hxx
>@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
> 
> #include <svtools/grfmgr.hxx>
> 
>-#include <tools/rtti.hxx>	// wegen typedef TypeId
>+#include <tools/rtti.hxx>	// due to typedef TypeId
> #include <vector>
> 
> class OutlinerEditEng;
>@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ typedef std::vector<SpellPortion> SpellPortions;
> 
> namespace basegfx { class B2DPolyPolygon; }
> 
>-// nur interner Gebrauch!
>+// internal use only!
> #define PARAFLAG_DROPTARGET         0x1000
> #define PARAFLAG_DROPTARGET_EMPTY   0x2000
> #define PARAFLAG_HOLDDEPTH          0x4000
>@@ -218,8 +218,8 @@ private:
>     enum MouseTarget {
>         MouseText = 0,
>         MouseBullet = 1,
>-        MouseHypertext = 2,    //            ausserhalb OutputArea
>-        MouseOutside = 3,    //            ausserhalb OutputArea
>+        MouseHypertext = 2,  // Outside OutputArea
>+        MouseOutside = 3,    // Outside OutputArea
>         MouseDontKnow = 4
>     };
>     MouseTarget OLD_ePrevMouseTarget;
>@@ -284,8 +284,7 @@ public:
> 
>     List*       CreateSelectionList();
> 
>-    // gibt Anzahl selektierter Absaetze zurueck
>-    // MT 07/00: Who needs this?
>+    // Retruns the number of selected paragraphs
>     ULONG       Select( Paragraph* pParagraph,
>                     BOOL bSelect=TRUE,
>                     BOOL bWChilds=TRUE);
>@@ -294,7 +293,7 @@ public:
>     void        SelectRange( ULONG nFirst, USHORT nCount );
>     void        SetAttribs( const SfxItemSet& );
>     void 		Indent( short nDiff );
>-    void        AdjustDepth( short nDX );	// Spaeter gegeb Indent ersetzen!
>+    void        AdjustDepth( short nDX );	// Later replace with Indent!
> 
>     BOOL        AdjustHeight( long nDY );
>     void        AdjustDepth( Paragraph* pPara, short nDX,
>@@ -415,7 +414,6 @@ public:
>     const Color maOverlineColor;
>     const Color maTextLineColor;
> 
>-    // #101498# BiDi level needs to be transported, too.
>     BYTE			    mnBiDiLevel;
> 
>     bool                mbFilled;
>@@ -633,7 +631,7 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC Outliner : public SfxBroadcaster
> 
>     USHORT				nOutlinerMode;
> 
>-    BOOL                bIsExpanding; // Nur in Expand/Collaps-Hdl gueltig, mal umstellen
>+    BOOL                bIsExpanding; // Only valid in Expand/Collaps-Hdl, reset
>     BOOL                bFirstParaIsEmpty;
>     BOOL                bBlockInsCallback;
>     BOOL                bStrippingPortions;
>@@ -813,9 +811,10 @@ public:
>     virtual long    IndentingPagesHdl( OutlinerView* );
>     void            SetIndentingPagesHdl(const Link& rLink){aIndentingPagesHdl=rLink;}
>     Link            GetIndentingPagesHdl() const { return aIndentingPagesHdl; }
>-    // nur gueltig in den beiden oberen Handlern
>+    // valid only in the two upper handlers
>     USHORT          GetSelPageCount() const { return nDepthChangedHdlPrevDepth; }
>-    // nur gueltig in den beiden oberen Handlern
>+
>+    // valid only in the two upper handlers
>     ULONG           GetFirstSelPage() const { return mnFirstSelPage; }
> 
>     void            SetCalcFieldValueHdl(const Link& rLink ) { aCalcFieldValueHdl= rLink; }
>@@ -883,7 +882,6 @@ public:
> 
>     void            StripPortions();
> 
>-    // #101498#
>     virtual void DrawingText(
>         const Point& rStartPos, const String& rText, USHORT nTextStart, USHORT nTextLen,
>         const sal_Int32* pDXArray, const SvxFont& rFont, USHORT nPara, xub_StrLen nIndex, BYTE nRightToLeft,
>@@ -927,8 +925,8 @@ public:
>     void			RemoveParaFlag( Paragraph* pPara, sal_uInt16 nFlag );
>     bool			HasParaFlag( const Paragraph* pPara, sal_uInt16 nFlag ) const;
> 
>-    // gibt ein Array mit den Bulletbreiten der n Einrueckebenen
>-    // zurueck. Letzter Wert muss -1 sein. Wird vom Outliner geloescht.
>+    // Returns an array containing the widths of the Bullet Indentations 
>+    // Last value must be -1. Is deleted by the outliner.
>     Link            GetWidthArrReqHdl() const{ return aWidthArrReqHdl; }
>     void            SetWidthArrReqHdl(const Link& rLink){aWidthArrReqHdl=rLink; }
> 
>@@ -944,7 +942,7 @@ public:
>     USHORT          GetLineLen( ULONG nParagraph, USHORT nLine ) const;
>     ULONG           GetLineHeight( ULONG nParagraph, ULONG nLine = 0 );
> 
>-    // nFormat muss ein Wert aus dem enum EETextFormat sein (wg.CLOOKS)
>+    // nFormat must be a value from the enum EETextFormat (due to CLOOKS)
>     ULONG           Read( SvStream& rInput, const String& rBaseURL, USHORT, SvKeyValueIterator* pHTTPHeaderAttrs = NULL );
> 
>     SfxUndoManager& GetUndoManager();
>@@ -953,7 +951,7 @@ public:
>     void            QuickInsertField( const SvxFieldItem& rFld, const ESelection& rSel );
>     void 			QuickInsertLineBreak( const ESelection& rSel );
> 
>-    // nur fuer EditEngine-Modus
>+    // Only for EditEngine mode
>     void            QuickInsertText( const String& rText, const ESelection& rSel );
>     void            QuickDelete( const ESelection& rSel );
>     void            QuickRemoveCharAttribs( USHORT nPara, USHORT nWhich = 0 );
>@@ -1027,11 +1025,11 @@ public:
>     USHORT	GetOutlinerMode() const { return nOutlinerMode & OUTLINERMODE_USERMASK; }
> 
>     void            StartSpelling(EditView& rEditView, sal_Bool bMultipleDoc);
>-    //spell and return a sentence
>+    // spell and return a sentence
>     bool            SpellSentence(EditView& rEditView, ::svx::SpellPortions& rToFill, bool bIsGrammarChecking );
>     // put spell position to start of current sentence
>     void            PutSpellingToSentenceStart( EditView& rEditView );
>-    //applies a changed sentence
>+    // applies a changed sentence
>     void            ApplyChangedSentence(EditView& rEditView, const ::svx::SpellPortions& rNewPortions, bool bRecheck );
>     void            EndSpelling();
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/paragraphdata.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/paragraphdata.hxx
>index b869a80..778dbde 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/paragraphdata.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/paragraphdata.hxx
>@@ -33,10 +33,10 @@
> #include <vector>
> 
> //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
>-// MT 07/00: Only for internal use, oder some kind like hPara for the few
>+// Only for internal use, oder some kind like hPara for the few
> // functions where you need it outside ( eg. moving paragraphs... )
> //
>-// AW: Unfortunately NOT only local (formally in outliner.hxx), but also
>+// Unfortunately NOT only local (formally in outliner.hxx), but also
> // used in outlobj.hxx. Moved to own header
> 
> class ParagraphData
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/pbinitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/pbinitem.hxx
>index 6f217a1..67518bd 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/pbinitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/pbinitem.hxx
>@@ -39,9 +39,9 @@
> 
> // class SvxPaperBinItem -------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt die Auswahl eines Papierschachts des Drucker.
>+    This item describes selecting a paper tray of the printer.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxPaperBinItem : public SfxByteItem
>@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ public:
>                             const BYTE nTray = PAPERBIN_PRINTER_SETTINGS );
>     inline SvxPaperBinItem &operator=( const SvxPaperBinItem &rCpy );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create( SvStream &, USHORT ) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store( SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion ) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/pgrditem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/pgrditem.hxx
>index 16877f5..46d2950 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/pgrditem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/pgrditem.hxx
>@@ -36,8 +36,8 @@
> // class SvxParaGridItem -------------------------------------------------
> 
> 
>-/*
>-    [Beschreibung]
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>     Paragraph snap to grid
> */
> 
>@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ public:
>     SvxParaGridItem( const BOOL bSnapToGrid /*= TRUE*/,
>                      const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual USHORT			GetVersion( USHORT nFileVersion ) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/pmdlitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/pmdlitem.hxx
>index a474e28..ec31066 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/pmdlitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/pmdlitem.hxx
>@@ -35,9 +35,9 @@
> 
> // class SvxPageModelItem ------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item enthaelt einen Namen einer Seitenvorlage.
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item contains a name of a page template.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxPageModelItem : public SfxStringItem
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/postitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/postitem.hxx
>index 2b0e863..2ba5365 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/postitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/postitem.hxx
>@@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxPostureItem --------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-    [Beschreibung]
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt die Font-Stellung (Italic)
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes the font setting (Italic)
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxPostureItem : public SfxEnumItem
>@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public:
>     SvxPostureItem( const FontItalic ePost /*= ITALIC_NONE*/,
>                     const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem + SwEnumItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem + SwEnumItem
>     virtual SfxItemPresentation GetPresentation( SfxItemPresentation ePres,
>                                     SfxMapUnit eCoreMetric,
>                                     SfxMapUnit ePresMetric,
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/prntitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/prntitem.hxx
>index d05b935..e0ce99f 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/prntitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/prntitem.hxx
>@@ -38,9 +38,9 @@
> // class SvxPrintItem ----------------------------------------------------
> 
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt eine logische Variable "Drucken ja oder nein".
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes a logical variable "Print yes or no".
> */
> 
> 
>@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ public:
>     SvxPrintItem( const USHORT nId , const BOOL bPrt = TRUE );
>     inline SvxPrintItem &operator=( const SvxPrintItem &rCpy );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion ) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/protitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/protitem.hxx
>index dec9414..95c9c6b 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/protitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/protitem.hxx
>@@ -43,17 +43,16 @@ namespace rtl
> // class SvxProtectItem --------------------------------------------------
> 
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt, ob Inhalt, Groesse oder Position geschuetzt werden
>-sollen.
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes, if content, size or position should be protected.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxProtectItem : public SfxPoolItem
> {
>-    BOOL bCntnt :1;     //Inhalt geschuetzt
>-    BOOL bSize  :1;     //Groesse geschuetzt
>-    BOOL bPos   :1;     //Position geschuetzt
>+    BOOL bCntnt :1;     // Content protected
>+    BOOL bSize  :1;     // Size protected
>+    BOOL bPos   :1;     // Position protected
> 
> public:
>     TYPEINFO();
>@@ -61,7 +60,7 @@ public:
>     inline SvxProtectItem( const USHORT nId  );
>     inline SvxProtectItem &operator=( const SvxProtectItem &rCpy );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
> 
>     virtual SfxItemPresentation GetPresentation( SfxItemPresentation ePres,
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/prszitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/prszitem.hxx
>index d0eec00..4effacc 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/prszitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/prszitem.hxx
>@@ -35,9 +35,9 @@
> 
> // class SvxPropSizeItem -------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt die relative Schriftgroesse.
>+    This item describes the relative Font Size.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxPropSizeItem : public SfxUInt16Item
>@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ public:
>     SvxPropSizeItem( const USHORT nPercent /*= 100*/,
>                  const USHORT nID  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/scriptspaceitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/scriptspaceitem.hxx
>index a2c9b41..b2eb098 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/scriptspaceitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/scriptspaceitem.hxx
>@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
> 
> /* [Description]
> 
>-    This item describe the scriptype of the selected text and is only
>+    This item describe the script type of the selected text and is only
>     used for the user interface.
> */
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/scripttypeitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/scripttypeitem.hxx
>index 45d93ea..ae29460 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/scripttypeitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/scripttypeitem.hxx
>@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
> 
> /* [Description]
> 
>-        This item describe  the scriptype of the selected text and is only
>+    This item describes the script type of the selected text and is only
>     used for the user interface.
> */
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/shaditem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/shaditem.hxx
>index 1ecaa39..6477d4c 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/shaditem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/shaditem.hxx
>@@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxShadowItem ---------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt ein Schattenattribut (Farbe, Breite, Lage).
>+    This item describes the shadow attribute (color, width and position).
> */
> 
> #define SHADOW_TOP		((USHORT)0)
>@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ public:
> 
>     inline SvxShadowItem& operator=( const SvxShadowItem& rFmtShadow );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual	bool             QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>     virtual	bool             PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
>@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ public:
>     void SetWidth( USHORT nNew ) { nWidth = nNew; }
>     void SetLocation( SvxShadowLocation eNew ) { eLocation = eNew; }
> 
>-        //Breite des Schattens auf der jeweiligen Seite berechnen.
>+    // Calculate width of the shadow on the page.
>     USHORT CalcShadowSpace( USHORT nShadow ) const;
> 
>     virtual USHORT			GetValueCount() const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/shdditem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/shdditem.hxx
>index ec47d7e..1863ce4 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/shdditem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/shdditem.hxx
>@@ -41,9 +41,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxShadowedItem -------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-    [Beschreibung]
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt, ob und wie schattiert ist.
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes, whether and how it is shaded.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxShadowedItem : public SfxBoolItem
>@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
>     SvxShadowedItem( const BOOL bShadowed /*= FALSE*/,
>                      const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/sizeitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/sizeitem.hxx
>index a3b7180..3622086 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/sizeitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/sizeitem.hxx
>@@ -36,9 +36,9 @@
> 
> // class SvxSizeItem -----------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt eine zweidimensionale Groesse (Size).
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes a two-dimensional size.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxSizeItem : public SfxPoolItem
>@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
> 
>     inline SvxSizeItem& operator=( const SvxSizeItem &rCpy );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual	bool             QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>     virtual	bool             PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/spltitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/spltitem.hxx
>index 311f0e1..25cb62a 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/spltitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/spltitem.hxx
>@@ -41,9 +41,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxFmtSplitItem -------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt eine logische Variable "Absatz trennen ja oder nein".
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes a logical variable "split paragraph yes or no".
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxFmtSplitItem : public SfxBoolItem
>@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ public:
>                             const USHORT nWh  );
>     inline SvxFmtSplitItem& operator=( const SvxFmtSplitItem& rSplit );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*	Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*	Create( SvStream&, USHORT ) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store( SvStream& , USHORT nItemVersion ) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/splwrap.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/splwrap.hxx
>index 67d03a7..bc45535 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/splwrap.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/splwrap.hxx
>@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ class Window;
> void EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxPrepareAutoCorrect( String &rOldText, String &rNewText );
> 
> /*--------------------------------------------------------------------
>-     Beschreibung: Der SpellWrapper
>+     Description: The SpellWrapper
>  --------------------------------------------------------------------*/
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxSpellWrapper {
>@@ -66,21 +66,21 @@ private:
>         ::com::sun::star::linguistic2::XSpellChecker1 > xSpell;
>     ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference<
>         ::com::sun::star::linguistic2::XHyphenator > 	xHyph;
>-    sal_uInt16 	nOldLang; 		// Sprache merken, nur bei Aenderung SetLanguage rufen
>-    sal_Bool 	bOtherCntnt : 1; // gesetzt => Sonderbereiche zunaechst pruefen
>-    sal_Bool 	bDialog		: 1; // Ist pWin der Svx...Dialog?
>-    sal_Bool 	bHyphen		: 1; // Trennen statt Spellen
>-    sal_Bool	bAuto		: 1; // Autokorrektur vorhanden?
>-    sal_Bool	bReverse	: 1; // Rueckwaerts Spellen
>-    sal_Bool	bStartDone	: 1; // Vorderen Teil bereits korrigiert
>-    sal_Bool	bEndDone	: 1; // Hinteren Teil bereits korrigiert
>-    sal_Bool	bStartChk	: 1; // Vorderen Teil pruefen
>-    sal_Bool	bRevAllowed : 1; // Niemals rueckwaerts spellen
>-    sal_Bool	bAllRight	: 1; // falsche Woerter in geignetes Woerterbuch
>-                             // aufnehmen und nicht den Dialog starten.
>-
>-    EDITENG_DLLPRIVATE sal_Bool 	SpellNext();   		// naechsten Bereich anwaehlen
>-    sal_Bool	FindSpellError(); 	// Suche nach Fehlern ( ueber Bereiche hinweg )
>+    sal_uInt16 	nOldLang; 		 // Set Language, only call SetLanguage on changes
>+    sal_Bool 	bOtherCntnt : 1; // set => Check special sections initially
>+    sal_Bool 	bDialog		: 1; // Is pWin the Svx...Dialog?
>+    sal_Bool 	bHyphen		: 1; // Split instead of spell checking
>+    sal_Bool	bAuto		: 1; // AutoCorrect available?
>+    sal_Bool	bReverse	: 1; // Reverse spell check
>+    sal_Bool	bStartDone	: 1; // Beginning already corrected
>+    sal_Bool	bEndDone	: 1; // End part already corrected
>+    sal_Bool	bStartChk	: 1; // Examine the beginning
>+    sal_Bool	bRevAllowed : 1; // Reverse spell check prohibited  
>+    sal_Bool	bAllRight	: 1; // Record wrong words in the dedicated 
>+                                 // dictionary and do not start the dialog.
>+
>+    EDITENG_DLLPRIVATE sal_Bool 	SpellNext();   		// select next area
>+    sal_Bool	FindSpellError(); 	// Check for errors (over areas)
> 
> public:
>     SvxSpellWrapper( Window* pWn,
>@@ -106,12 +106,12 @@ public:
> 
>     static void			ShowLanguageErrors();
> 
>-    void 			SpellDocument();		// Rechtschreibpruefung durchfuehren
>+    void 			SpellDocument();		// Perform Spell Checking
>     inline sal_Bool IsStartDone(){ return bStartDone; }
>     inline sal_Bool IsEndDone(){ return bEndDone; }
>     inline sal_Bool IsReverse(){ return bReverse; }
>     inline sal_Bool IsDialog(){ return bDialog; } // SvxSpellCheckDialog OnScreen
>-    inline sal_Bool IsHyphen(){ return bHyphen; } // Trennen statt Spellen
>+    inline sal_Bool IsHyphen(){ return bHyphen; } // Split instead of Spell check
>     inline void 	SetHyphen( const sal_Bool bNew = sal_True ){ bHyphen = bNew; }
>     inline ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference<
>         ::com::sun::star::linguistic2::XSpellChecker1 >
>@@ -121,10 +121,10 @@ public:
>                     GetXHyphenator() 	{ return xHyph; }
>     inline sal_Bool				IsAllRight()		{ return bAllRight; }
>     inline Window* 	GetWin() { return pWin; }
>-    // kann evtl entfallen in ONE_LINGU:
>+    // can possibly be omitted in ONE_LINGU:
>     inline void 	SetOldLang( const sal_uInt16 nNew ){ nOldLang = nNew; }
>-    // kann evtl entfallen in ONE_LINGU:
>-    inline void 	ChangeLanguage( const sal_uInt16 nNew ) // rufe ggf. SetLanguage
>+    // can possibly be omitted in ONE_LINGU:
>+    inline void 	ChangeLanguage( const sal_uInt16 nNew ) // call SetLanguage if needed.
>         { if ( nNew != nOldLang ) { SetLanguage( nNew ); nOldLang = nNew; } }
>     inline void 	EnableAutoCorrect() { bAuto = sal_True; }
> 
>@@ -135,26 +135,26 @@ protected:
>     void			 SetLast(const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference<
>                                 ::com::sun::star::uno::XInterface >  &xNewLast)
>                             { xLast = xNewLast; }
>-    virtual	sal_Bool SpellMore(); 				// weitere Dokumente pruefen?
>-    virtual	sal_Bool HasOtherCnt(); 			// gibt es ueberhaupt Sonderbereiche
>-    virtual	void 	 SpellStart( SvxSpellArea eSpell ); // Bereich vorbereiten
>-    virtual	sal_Bool SpellContinue();			// Bereich pruefen
>-                                            // Ergebnis mit GetLast verfuegbar
>-    virtual void ReplaceAll( const String &rNewText, sal_Int16 nLanguage );	// Wort aus Replace-Liste ersetzen
>-    virtual void StartThesaurus( const String &rWord, sal_uInt16 nLang );	// Thesaurus starten
>+    virtual	sal_Bool SpellMore(); 				// examine further documents?
>+    virtual	sal_Bool HasOtherCnt(); 			// Are there any special areas?
>+    virtual	void 	 SpellStart( SvxSpellArea eSpell ); // Preparing the area
>+    virtual	sal_Bool SpellContinue();	  // Check Areas
>+                                          // Result avaliable through GetLast
>+    virtual void ReplaceAll( const String &rNewText, sal_Int16 nLanguage );	//Replace word from the replace list 
>+    virtual void StartThesaurus( const String &rWord, sal_uInt16 nLang ); 
>     virtual ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference<
>         ::com::sun::star::linguistic2::XDictionary >
>                  GetAllRightDic() const;
>-    virtual	void SpellEnd();                        // Bereich abschliessen
>-    virtual void ScrollArea();                      // ScrollArea einstellen
>-    // Wort ersetzen
>+    virtual	void SpellEnd();                        // Finish area
>+    virtual void ScrollArea();                      // Set ScrollArea
>+    // Replace word
>     virtual void ChangeWord( const String& rNewWord, const sal_uInt16 nLang );
>     virtual String GetThesWord();
>     // Wort via Thesaurus ersetzen
>     virtual void ChangeThesWord( const String& rNewWord );
>-    virtual void SetLanguage( const sal_uInt16 nLang ); // Sprache aendern
>+    virtual void SetLanguage( const sal_uInt16 nLang ); // Change Language
>     virtual void AutoCorrect( const String& rAktStr, const String& rNewStr );
>-    virtual void InsertHyphen( const sal_uInt16 nPos ); // Hyphen einfuegen
>+    virtual void InsertHyphen( const sal_uInt16 nPos ); // Insert hyphen
> 
> };
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/svxacorr.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/svxacorr.hxx
>index fe8b7ca..6a245f2 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/svxacorr.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/svxacorr.hxx
>@@ -50,29 +50,29 @@ class SotStorageRef;
> class SotStorage;
> class Window;
> 
>-// Flags fuer die AutoKorrekt-Flags
>-const long CptlSttSntnc		= 0x00000001;	// Gross-Buchstaben am SatzAnfang
>-const long CptlSttWrd		= 0x00000002;	// keine 2 Gr.-Buchst. am WordAnfang
>+// Auto correct flags
>+const long CptlSttSntnc		= 0x00000001;	// Capital letters at the beginning of a sentence
>+const long CptlSttWrd		= 0x00000002;	// not two Capital letters at the beginning of a word 
> const long AddNonBrkSpace   = 0x00000004;	// Add non breaking space before :;?!
> const long ChgOrdinalNumber = 0x00000008;	// Ordinal-Number 1st, 2nd,..
> const long ChgToEnEmDash    = 0x00000010;	// - -> Endash/Emdash
>-const long ChgWeightUnderl  = 0x00000020;	// * -> Fett, _ -> unterstreichen
>-const long SetINetAttr      = 0x00000040;	// INetAttribut setzen
>-const long Autocorrect 		= 0x00000080;	// Autokorrektur aufrufen
>-const long ChgQuotes		= 0x00000100;	// doppelte Quotes ersetzen
>-const long SaveWordCplSttLst= 0x00000200;	// GrB. am SatzAnf. auto. aufnehmen
>-const long SaveWordWrdSttLst= 0x00000400;	// 2 GrB. am WortAnf. auto. aufnehmen
>-const long IgnoreDoubleSpace= 0x00000800;	// 2 Spaces ignorieren
>-const long ChgSglQuotes		= 0x00001000;	// einfache Quotes ersetzen
>+const long ChgWeightUnderl  = 0x00000020;	// * -> Bold, _ -> Underscore
>+const long SetINetAttr      = 0x00000040;	// Set INetAttribut
>+const long Autocorrect 		= 0x00000080;	// Call AutoCorrect
>+const long ChgQuotes		= 0x00000100;	// replace double quotes
>+const long SaveWordCplSttLst= 0x00000200;	// Save Auto correction of Capital letter at beginning of sentence.
>+const long SaveWordWrdSttLst= 0x00000400;	// Save Auto correction of 2 Capital letter at beginning of word.
>+const long IgnoreDoubleSpace= 0x00000800;	// Ignore 2 Spaces
>+const long ChgSglQuotes		= 0x00001000;	// Replace simple quotes
> const long CorrectCapsLock  = 0x00002000;   // Correct accidental use of cAPS LOCK key
> 
>-const long ChgWordLstLoad	= 0x20000000;	// Ersetzungsliste geladen
>-const long CplSttLstLoad	= 0x40000000;	// Exceptionlist fuer CplStart geladen
>-const long WrdSttLstLoad	= 0x80000000;	// Exceptionlist fuer WordStart geladen
>+const long ChgWordLstLoad	= 0x20000000;	// Replacement list loaded
>+const long CplSttLstLoad	= 0x40000000;	// Exception list for Capital letters Start loaded
>+const long WrdSttLstLoad	= 0x80000000;	// Exception list for Word Start loaded
> 
> // TODO: handle unicodes > U+FFFF and check users of this class
> 
>-// nur eine Mappingklasse
>+// only a mapping class
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxAutoCorrDoc
> {
> public:
>@@ -88,28 +88,26 @@ public:
> 
>     virtual BOOL SetINetAttr( xub_StrLen nStt, xub_StrLen nEnd, const String& rURL ) = 0;
> 
>-    // returne den Text eines vorherigen Absatzes.
>-    // Dieser darf nicht leer sein!
>-    // Gibt es diesen nicht oder gibt es davor nur Leere, dann returne 0
>-    // Das Flag gibt an:
>-    //		TRUE: den, vor der normalen Einfuegeposition (TRUE)
>-    // 		FALSE: den, in den das korrigierte Wort eingfuegt wurde.
>-    //				(Muss nicht der gleiche Absatz sein!!!!)
>+    // Return the text of a previous paragraph. This must not be empty! 
>+    // If no paragraph exits or just an empty one, then return 0. 
>+    // The flag indicates: 
>+    //      TRUE: before the normal insertion position (TRUE) 
>+    //      FALSE: in which the corrected word was inserted. 
>+    //             (Does not to have to be the same paragraph !!!!)
>     virtual const String* GetPrevPara( BOOL bAtNormalPos ) = 0;
> 
>     virtual BOOL ChgAutoCorrWord( xub_StrLen& rSttPos, xub_StrLen nEndPos,
>                                   SvxAutoCorrect& rACorrect,
>                                   const String** ppPara ) = 0;
>-    // wird nach dem austauschen der Zeichen von den Funktionen
>+    // Is called after the change of the signs by the functions 
>     //	- FnCptlSttWrd
>     // 	- FnCptlSttSntnc
>-    // gerufen. Dann koennen die Worte ggfs. in die Ausnahmelisten
>-    // aufgenommen werden.
>+    // As an option, the words can then be inserted into the exception lists.
>     virtual void SaveCpltSttWord( ULONG nFlag, xub_StrLen nPos,
>                                     const String& rExceptWord,
>                                     sal_Unicode cChar );
> 
>-    // welche Sprache gilt an der Position?
>+    // which language at the position?
>     virtual LanguageType GetLanguage( xub_StrLen nPos, BOOL bPrevPara = FALSE ) const;
> };
> 
>@@ -117,7 +115,7 @@ public:
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxAutocorrWord
> {
>     String sShort, sLong;
>-    BOOL bIsTxtOnly;				// ist reiner ASCII - Text
>+    BOOL bIsTxtOnly;				// Is pure ASCII - Text
> public:
>     SvxAutocorrWord( const String& rS, const String& rL, BOOL bFlag = TRUE )
>         : sShort( rS ), sLong( rL ), bIsTxtOnly( bFlag )
>@@ -134,11 +132,11 @@ SV_DECL_PTRARR_SORT_DEL_VISIBILITY( SvxAutocorrWordList, SvxAutocorrWordPtr, 10,
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists
> {
>     String sShareAutoCorrFile, sUserAutoCorrFile;
>-    // falls die AutoCorr Datei neuer ist
>+    // If the AutoCorr file is newer 
>     Date aModifiedDate;
>     Time aModifiedTime, aLastCheckTime;
> 
>-    LanguageType 			eLanguage; //LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW fuer alle Sprachen verwenden
>+    LanguageType 			eLanguage; //LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW use for all languages
>     SvStringsISortDtor* 	pCplStt_ExcptLst;
>     SvStringsISortDtor* 	pWrdStt_ExcptLst;
>     SvxAutocorrWordList* 	pAutocorr_List;
>@@ -166,35 +164,35 @@ public:
>             LanguageType eLang);
>     ~SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists();
> 
>-    // Lade, Setze, Gebe - die Ersetzungsliste
>+    // Load, Set, Get - the replacement list
>     SvxAutocorrWordList* LoadAutocorrWordList();
>     void SetAutocorrWordList( SvxAutocorrWordList* pList );
>     const SvxAutocorrWordList* GetAutocorrWordList();
> 
>-    // Lade, Setze, Gebe - die Ausnahmeliste fuer Grossbuchstabe am
>-    // Satzanfang
>+    // Load, Set, Get - the exception list for Capital letter at the 
>+    // beginning of a sentence
>     SvStringsISortDtor* LoadCplSttExceptList();
>     void SaveCplSttExceptList();
>     void SetCplSttExceptList( SvStringsISortDtor* pList );
>     SvStringsISortDtor* GetCplSttExceptList();
>     BOOL AddToCplSttExceptList(const String& rNew);
> 
>-    // Lade, Setze, Gebe die Ausnahmeliste fuer 2 Grossbuchstaben am
>-    // Wortanfang
>+    // Load, Set, Get the exception list for 2 Capital letters at the
>+    // begining of a word.
>     SvStringsISortDtor* LoadWrdSttExceptList();
>     void SaveWrdSttExceptList();
>     void SetWrdSttExceptList( SvStringsISortDtor* pList );
>     SvStringsISortDtor* GetWrdSttExceptList();
>     BOOL AddToWrdSttExceptList(const String& rNew);
> 
>-    // Speichern von Wortersetzungen:
>-    //		Diese speichern direkt im Storage. Die Wortliste wird
>-    //		entsprechend aktualisiert!
>-    //	- purer Text
>+    // Save word substitutions: 
>+    //      Store these directly in the storage. The word list is updated 
>+    //      accordingly!
>+    //	- pure Text
>     BOOL PutText( const String& rShort, const String& rLong );
>-    //	- Text mit Attributierung (kann nur der SWG - SWG-Format!)
>+    //	- Text with attribution (only the SWG - SWG format!)
>     BOOL PutText( const String& rShort, SfxObjectShell& );
>-    //	- loesche einen Eintrag
>+    //	- Deleting an entry
>     BOOL DeleteText( const String& rShort );
> };
> 
>@@ -205,9 +203,9 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxAutoCorrect
> 
>     String sShareAutoCorrFile, sUserAutoCorrFile;
> 
>-    SvxSwAutoFmtFlags aSwFlags;		// StarWriter AutoFormat-Flags
>+    SvxSwAutoFmtFlags aSwFlags;		// StarWriter AutoFormat Flags
> 
>-    // alle Sprachen in einer Tabelle
>+    // all languages in a table
>     SvxAutoCorrLanguageTable_Impl* pLangTable;
>     SvxAutoCorrLastFileAskTable_Impl* pLastFileTable;
>     CharClass* pCharClass;
>@@ -227,16 +225,16 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxAutoCorrect
>     void _GetCharClass( LanguageType eLang );
> 
> protected:
>-    //	- Text mit Attributierung (kann nur der SWG - SWG-Format!)
>-    //		rShort ist der Stream-Name - gecryptet!
>+    //	- Text with attribution (only the SWG - SWG format!)
>+    //      rShort is the stream name - encrypted!
>     virtual BOOL PutText( const com::sun::star::uno::Reference < com::sun::star::embed::XStorage >& rStg, const String& rFileName, const String& rShort, SfxObjectShell& ,
>                             String& );
> 
>-    // geforderte Sprache in die Tabelle eintragen gfs. nur wenn das file existiert
>+    // required language in the table add if possible only when the file exists
>     BOOL 	CreateLanguageFile(LanguageType eLang, BOOL bNewFile = TRUE);
>-    //	- return den Ersetzungstext (nur fuer SWG-Format, alle anderen
>-    //		koennen aus der Wortliste herausgeholt werden!)
>-    //		rShort ist der Stream-Name - gecryptet!
>+    //  - Return the replacement text (only for SWG format, all others can be 
>+    //      taken from the word list!) 
>+    //      rShort is the stream name - encrypted!
> public:
> 
>     sal_Unicode GetQuote( sal_Unicode cInsChar, BOOL bSttQuote,
>@@ -250,28 +248,28 @@ public:
>     SvxAutoCorrect( const SvxAutoCorrect& );
>     virtual ~SvxAutoCorrect();
> 
>-    // fuehre eine AutoKorrektur aus.
>-    // returnt was ausgefuehrt wurde; entsprechend den obigen Flags
>+    // Execute an AutoCorrect. 
>+    // Returns what has been executed, according to the above flags
>     ULONG AutoCorrect( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>                         xub_StrLen nPos, sal_Unicode cInsChar, BOOL bInsert, Window* pFrameWin = NULL );
> 
>-    // return fuer die Autotext Expandierung das vorherige Wort, was dem
>-    // AutoCorrect - Algorythmus entspricht.
>+    // Return for the autotext expansion the previous word,  
>+    // AutoCorrect - corresponding algorithm
>     BOOL GetPrevAutoCorrWord( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>                                 xub_StrLen nPos, String& rWord ) const;
> 
>-    // suche das oder die Worte in der ErsetzungsTabelle.
>-    // rText - ueberpruefe in diesem Text die Worte der Liste
>-    // rStt - die gefundene Startposition
>-    // nEnd - zu ueberpruefende Position - ab dieser Pos nach vorne
>-    // rLang - Input: in welcher Sprache wird gesucht
>-    //			Output: in welcher "Sprach-Liste" wurde es gefunden
>+    // Search for or or the words in the replacement table.
>+    // rText - check in this text the words of the list
>+    // rStt - the detected starting position
>+    // nEnd - to check position - as of this item forward
>+    // rLang - Input: in which language is searched
>+    //		   Output: in which "language list" was it found
>     const SvxAutocorrWord* SearchWordsInList( const String& rTxt,
>                                     xub_StrLen& rStt, xub_StrLen nEndPos,
>                                     SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>                                     LanguageType& rLang );
> 
>-    // erfrage / setze die Zeichen fuer die Quote-Ersetzung
>+    // Query/Set the Character for the Quote substitution
>     sal_Unicode GetStartSingleQuote() const 		{ return cStartSQuote; }
>     sal_Unicode GetEndSingleQuote() const			{ return cEndSQuote; }
>     sal_Unicode GetStartDoubleQuote() const 		{ return cStartDQuote; }
>@@ -287,22 +285,22 @@ public:
>     void InsertQuote( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, xub_StrLen nInsPos,
>                     sal_Unicode cInsChar, BOOL bSttQuote, BOOL bIns );
> 
>-    // erfrage / setze den Namen der AutoKorrektur-Datei
>-    // defaultet auf "autocorr.dat"
>+    // Query/Set the name of the AutoCorrect file 
>+    // the default is "autocorr.dat"
>     String GetAutoCorrFileName( LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM,
>                                 BOOL bNewFile = FALSE,
>                                 BOOL bTstUserExist = FALSE ) const;
>     void SetUserAutoCorrFileName( const String& rNew );
>     void SetShareAutoCorrFileName( const String& rNew );
> 
>-    // erfrage / setze die aktuellen Einstellungen der AutoKorrektur
>+    // Query/Set the current settings of AutoCorrect
>     long GetFlags() const						{ return nFlags; }
>     inline SvxSwAutoFmtFlags&	GetSwFlags()	{ return aSwFlags;}
>     BOOL IsAutoCorrFlag( long nFlag ) const
>                                 { return nFlags & nFlag ? TRUE : FALSE; }
>     void SetAutoCorrFlag( long nFlag, BOOL bOn = TRUE );
> 
>-    // Lade, Setze, Gebe - die Ersetzungsliste
>+    // Load, Set, Get - the replacement list
>     SvxAutocorrWordList* LoadAutocorrWordList(
>                                     LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM )
>         { return _GetLanguageList( eLang ).LoadAutocorrWordList(); }
>@@ -310,21 +308,21 @@ public:
>                                     LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM )
>         { return _GetLanguageList( eLang ).GetAutocorrWordList(); }
> 
>-    // Speichern von Wortersetzungen:
>-    //		Diese speichern direkt im Storage. Die Wortliste wird
>-    //		entsprechend aktualisiert!
>-    //	- purer Text
>+    // Save word substitutions: 
>+    //      Save these directly in the storage. The word list is updated 
>+    //      accordingly!
>+    //	- pure Text
>     BOOL PutText( const String& rShort, const String& rLong, LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM );
>-    //	- Text mit Attributierung (kann nur der SWG - SWG-Format!)
>+    //	- Text with attribution (only in the SWG - SWG format!)
>     BOOL PutText( const String& rShort, SfxObjectShell& rShell,
>                  LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM )
>         { return _GetLanguageList( eLang ).PutText(rShort, rShell ); }
> 
>-    //	- loesche einen Eintrag
>+    //	- Delete a entry
>     BOOL DeleteText( const String& rShort, LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM);
> 
>-    // Lade, Setze, Gebe - die Ausnahmeliste fuer Grossbuchstabe am
>-    // Satzanfang
>+    // Load, Set, Get - the exception list for capital letters at the 
>+    // beginning of a sentence
>     void SaveCplSttExceptList( LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM );
>     SvStringsISortDtor* LoadCplSttExceptList(
>                                     LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM)
>@@ -333,13 +331,12 @@ public:
>                                     LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM )
>         {	return _GetLanguageList( eLang ).GetCplSttExceptList(); }
> 
>-    // fuegt ein einzelnes Wort hinzu. Die Liste wird sofort
>-    // in die Datei geschrieben!
>+    // Adds a single word. The list will be immediately written to the file!
>     BOOL AddCplSttException( const String& rNew,
>                                 LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM );
> 
>-    // Lade, Setze, Gebe die Ausnahmeliste fuer 2 Grossbuchstaben am
>-    // Wortanfang
>+    // Load, Set, Get the exception list for 2 Capital letters at the 
>+    // beginning of a word.
>     void SaveWrdSttExceptList( LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM );
>     SvStringsISortDtor* LoadWrdSttExceptList(
>                                     LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM )
>@@ -347,16 +344,15 @@ public:
>     const SvStringsISortDtor* GetWrdSttExceptList(
>                                     LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM )
>         {	return _GetLanguageList( eLang ).GetWrdSttExceptList(); }
>-    // fuegt ein einzelnes Wort hinzu. Die Liste wird sofort
>-    // in die Datei geschrieben!
>+    // Adds a single word. The list will be immediately written to the file!
>     BOOL AddWrtSttException( const String& rNew, LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM);
> 
>-    //ueber die Sprachen nach dem Eintrag suchen
>+    // Search through the Languages for the entry
>     BOOL FindInWrdSttExceptList( LanguageType eLang, const String& sWord );
>     BOOL FindInCplSttExceptList( LanguageType eLang, const String& sWord,
>                                     BOOL bAbbreviation = FALSE);
> 
>-    // die einzelnen Methoden fuer die Autokorrektur
>+    // Methods for the auto-correction
>     BOOL FnCptlSttWrd( SvxAutoCorrDoc&, const String&,
>                                 xub_StrLen nSttPos, xub_StrLen nEndPos,
>                                 LanguageType eLang = LANGUAGE_SYSTEM );
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/svxenum.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/svxenum.hxx
>index 37f0276..f9305e0 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/svxenum.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/svxenum.hxx
>@@ -202,23 +202,23 @@ enum SvxSpellArea
> 
> enum SvxFrameAnchor
> {
>-    SVX_FLY_AT_CNTNT,		//Absatzgebundener Rahmen
>-    SVX_FLY_IN_CNTNT,		//Zeichengebundener Rahmen
>-    SVX_FLY_PAGE			//Seitengebundener Rahmen
>+    SVX_FLY_AT_CNTNT,		// Paragraph-based frame
>+    SVX_FLY_IN_CNTNT,		// Character-based frame
>+    SVX_FLY_PAGE			// Page-based frame
> };
> 
> enum SvxExtNumType
> {
>-    SVX_NUM_CHARS_UPPER_LETTER, // zaehlt von a-z, aa - az, ba - bz, ...
>+    SVX_NUM_CHARS_UPPER_LETTER, // Counts from a-z, aa - az, ba - bz, ...
>     SVX_NUM_CHARS_LOWER_LETTER,
>     SVX_NUM_ROMAN_UPPER,
>     SVX_NUM_ROMAN_LOWER,
>     SVX_NUM_ARABIC,
>     SVX_NUM_NUMBER_NONE,
>-    SVX_NUM_CHAR_SPECIAL, 	//Bullet
>-    SVX_NUM_PAGEDESC,   	// Numerierung aus der Seitenvorlage
>+    SVX_NUM_CHAR_SPECIAL, 	// Bullet
>+    SVX_NUM_PAGEDESC,   	// Numbering from the page template
>     SVX_NUM_BITMAP,
>-    SVX_NUM_CHARS_UPPER_LETTER_N, // zaehlt von  a-z, aa-zz, aaa-zzz
>+    SVX_NUM_CHARS_UPPER_LETTER_N, // Counts from  a-z, aa-zz, aaa-zzz
>     SVX_NUM_CHARS_LOWER_LETTER_N
> };
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/svxfont.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/svxfont.hxx
>index c07a0eb..63751d7 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/svxfont.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/svxfont.hxx
>@@ -45,9 +45,9 @@ class Printer;
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxFont : public Font
> {
>     LanguageType eLang;         // Language
>-    SvxCaseMap	 eCaseMap;      // Textauszeichnung
>-    short nEsc;                 // Grad der Hoch-/Tiefstellung
>-    BYTE  nPropr;               // Grad der Verkleinerung der Fonthoehe
>+    SvxCaseMap	 eCaseMap;      // Text Markup
>+    short nEsc;                 // Degree of Superscript/Subscript 
>+    BYTE  nPropr;               // Degree of reduction of the font height
>     short nKern;                // Kerning in Pt
> 
> public:
>@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public:
>     SvxFont( const Font &rFont );
>     SvxFont( const SvxFont &rFont );
> 
>-    // Methoden fuer die Hoch-/Tiefstellung
>+    // Methods for Superscript/Subscript 
>     inline short GetEscapement() const { return nEsc; }
>     inline void SetEscapement( const short nNewEsc ) { nEsc = nNewEsc; }
> 
>@@ -75,19 +75,18 @@ public:
>     inline void SetLanguage( const LanguageType eNewLan )
>         { eLang = eNewLan;  Font::SetLanguage(eNewLan); }
> 
>-    // Is-Methoden:
>+    // Is-Methods:
>     inline BOOL IsCaseMap() const { return SVX_CASEMAP_NOT_MAPPED != eCaseMap; }
>     inline BOOL IsCapital() const { return SVX_CASEMAP_KAPITAELCHEN == eCaseMap; }
>     inline BOOL IsKern() const { return 0 != nKern; }
>     inline BOOL IsEsc() const { return 0 != nEsc; }
> 
>-    // Versalien, Gemeine etc. beruecksichtigen
>+    // Consider Upper case, Lower case letters etc.
>     String CalcCaseMap( const String &rTxt ) const;
> 
>-// Der folgende Bereich wird nicht von jedem benoetigt, er kann deshalb
>-// ausgeklammert werden.
>+// The following section is not needed by anyone, so it can be excluded.
> #ifndef REDUCEDSVXFONT
>-    // Kapitaelchenbearbeitung
>+    // Handle upper case letters
>     void DoOnCapitals( SvxDoCapitals &rDo,
>                        const USHORT nPartLen = USHRT_MAX ) const;
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/svxrtf.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/svxrtf.hxx
>index 5c92d5a..1ed8ef2 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/svxrtf.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/svxrtf.hxx
>@@ -57,9 +57,9 @@ namespace com { namespace sun { namespace star {
> } } }
> 
> 
>-// Mapper-Klassen fuer die verschiedenen Anforderungen an Doc-Positionen
>-//		  Swg - NodePosition ist ein SwIndex, der intern veraendert wird
>-// EditEngine - ULONG auf Liste von Absaetzen
>+// Mapper-Classes for the various requirements on Document positions
>+//		  Swg - NodePosition is a SwIndex, which is used internally
>+// EditEngine - ULONG to list of paragraphs
> // .....
> 
> class SvxNodeIdx
>@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ class SvxNodeIdx
> public:
>     virtual ~SvxNodeIdx() {}
>     virtual ULONG	GetIdx() const = 0;
>-    virtual SvxNodeIdx* Clone() const = 0;	// erzeuge von sich eine Kopie
>+    virtual SvxNodeIdx* Clone() const = 0;	// Cloning itself
> };
> 
> class SvxPosition
>@@ -78,8 +78,8 @@ public:
>     virtual ULONG		GetNodeIdx() const = 0;
>     virtual xub_StrLen	GetCntIdx() const = 0;
> 
>-    virtual SvxPosition* Clone() const = 0; // erzeuge von sich eine Kopie
>-    virtual SvxNodeIdx* MakeNodeIdx() const = 0; // erzeuge vom NodeIndex eine Kopie
>+    virtual SvxPosition* Clone() const = 0; // Cloning itself
>+    virtual SvxNodeIdx* MakeNodeIdx() const = 0; // Cloning NodeIndex
> };
> 
> 
>@@ -91,13 +91,13 @@ typedef SvxRTFItemStackType* SvxRTFItemStackTypePtr;
> SV_DECL_PTRARR_DEL( SvxRTFItemStackList, SvxRTFItemStackTypePtr, 1, 1 )
> SV_DECL_PTRARR_STACK( SvxRTFItemStack, SvxRTFItemStackTypePtr, 0, 1 )
> 
>-// einige Hilfsklassen fuer den RTF-Parser
>+// own helper classes for the RTF Parser
> struct SvxRTFStyleType
> {
>-    SfxItemSet aAttrSet;		// die Attribute vom Style (+Ableitung!)
>+    SfxItemSet aAttrSet;		// the attributes of Style (+ derivate!)
>     String sName;
>     USHORT nBasedOn, nNext;
>-    BOOL bBasedOnIsSet; //$flr #117411#
>+    BOOL bBasedOnIsSet;
>     BYTE nOutlineNo;
>     BOOL bIsCharFmt;
> 
>@@ -109,17 +109,17 @@ struct SvxRTFStyleType
> typedef ::std::vector< ::std::pair< ::rtl::OUString, ::rtl::OUString > > PictPropertyNameValuePairs;
> struct EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxRTFPictureType
> {
>-    // Format der Bitmap
>+    // Bitmap Format
>     enum RTF_BMPSTYLE
>     {
>-        RTF_BITMAP, 		// Bitmap, die Planes sind in den Pict.Daten
>-        WIN_METAFILE,		// in den Pict.Daten steht ein Window-Metafile
>-        MAC_QUICKDRAW,		// in den Pict.Daten steht ein Mac-QuickDraw
>-        OS2_METAFILE,		// in den Pict.Daten steht ein OS2-Metafile
>-        RTF_DI_BMP,			// Device Independent Bitmap
>-        ENHANCED_MF,		// in den Pict.Daten steht ein Enhanced-Metafile
>-        RTF_PNG,			// in den Pict.Daten steht ein PNG file
>-        RTF_JPG				// in den Pict.Daten steht ein JPG file
>+        RTF_BITMAP, 		// Meta data: Bitmap  
>+        WIN_METAFILE,		// Meta data: Window-Metafile
>+        MAC_QUICKDRAW,		// Meta data: Mac-QuickDraw
>+        OS2_METAFILE,		// Meta data: OS2-Metafile
>+        RTF_DI_BMP,			// Meta data: Device Independent Bitmap
>+        ENHANCED_MF,		// Meta data: Enhanced-Metafile
>+        RTF_PNG,			// Meta data: PNG file
>+        RTF_JPG				// Meta data: JPG file
>     } eStyle;
> 
>     enum RTF_BMPMODE
>@@ -139,13 +139,13 @@ struct EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxRTFPictureType
>     short 	nCropT, nCropB, nCropL, nCropR;
>     PictPropertyNameValuePairs aPropertyPairs;
>     SvxRTFPictureType() { ResetValues(); }
>-    // alle Werte auf default; wird nach einlesen der Bitmap aufgerufen !
>+    // Reset all values to default; is called after loading the Bitmap
>     void ResetValues();
> };
> 
>-// Hier sind die Ids fuer alle Charakter-Attribute, die vom SvxParser
>-// erkannt und in einem SfxItemSet gesetzt werden koennen.
>-// Die Ids werden ueber die SlotIds vom POOL richtig gesetzt.
>+// Here are the IDs for all character attributes, which can be detected by
>+// SvxParser and can be set in a SfxItemSet. The IDs are set correctly throught
>+// the SlotIds from POOL.
> struct RTFPlainAttrMapIds
> {
>     USHORT 	nCaseMap,
>@@ -186,9 +186,9 @@ struct RTFPlainAttrMapIds
>     RTFPlainAttrMapIds( const SfxItemPool& rPool );
> };
> 
>-// Hier sind die Ids fuer alle Paragraph-Attribute, die vom SvxParser
>-// erkannt und in einem SfxItemSet gesetzt werden koennen.
>-// Die Ids werden ueber die SlotIds vom POOL richtig gesetzt.
>+// Here are the IDs for all paragraph attributes, which can be detected by
>+// SvxParser and can be set in a SfxItemSet. The IDs are set correctly throught
>+// the SlotIds from POOL.
> struct RTFPardAttrMapIds
> {
>     USHORT	nLinespacing,
>@@ -242,13 +242,13 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxRTFParser : public SvRTFParser
>     long	nVersionNo;
>     int 	nDfltFont;
> 
>-    BOOL	bNewDoc : 1;			// FALSE - in ein bestehendes lesen
>-    BOOL	bNewGroup : 1;			// TRUE - es gab eine oeffnende Klammer
>-    BOOL	bIsSetDfltTab : 1;		// TRUE - DefTab wurde eingelesen
>-    BOOL	bChkStyleAttr : 1;		// TRUE - StyleSheets werden ausgewertet
>-    BOOL	bCalcValue : 1; 		// TRUE - Twipwerte an APP anpassen
>-    BOOL	bPardTokenRead : 1; 	// TRUE - Token \pard wurde erkannt
>-    BOOL	bReadDocInfo : 1;		// TRUE - DocInfo mit einlesen
>+    BOOL	bNewDoc : 1;			// FALSE - Reading in an existing
>+    BOOL	bNewGroup : 1;			// TRUE - there was an opening parenthesis
>+    BOOL	bIsSetDfltTab : 1;		// TRUE - DefTab was loaded
>+    BOOL	bChkStyleAttr : 1;		// TRUE - StyleSheets are evaluated
>+    BOOL	bCalcValue : 1; 		// TRUE - Twip values adapt to App
>+    BOOL	bPardTokenRead : 1; 	// TRUE - Token \pard was detected
>+    BOOL	bReadDocInfo : 1;		// TRUE - DocInfo to read
>     BOOL	bIsLeftToRightDef : 1; 	// TRUE - in LeftToRight char run def.
>                                     // FALSE - in RightToLeft char run def.
>     BOOL 	bIsInReadStyleTab : 1;	// TRUE - in ReadStyleTable
>@@ -258,15 +258,15 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxRTFParser : public SvRTFParser
>     void ClearStyleTbl();
>     void ClearAttrStack();
> 
>-    SvxRTFItemStackTypePtr _GetAttrSet( int bCopyAttr=FALSE );	// neue ItemStackType anlegen
>+    SvxRTFItemStackTypePtr _GetAttrSet( int bCopyAttr=FALSE );	// Create new ItemStackType:s
>     void _ClearStyleAttr( SvxRTFItemStackType& rStkType );
> 
>-    // setzt alle Attribute, die unterschiedlich zum aktuellen sind
>+    // Sets all the attributes that are different from the current
>     void SetAttrSet( SfxItemSet& rAttrSet, SvxPosition& rSttPos );
>     void SetAttrSet( SvxRTFItemStackType &rSet );
>     void SetDefault( int nToken, int nValue );
> 
>-    // pard / plain abarbeiten
>+    // Excecute pard / plain 
>     void RTFPardPlain( int bPard, SfxItemSet** ppSet );
> 
>     void BuildWhichTbl();
>@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ protected:
> 
>     String& DelCharAtEnd( String& rStr, const sal_Unicode cDel );
> 
>-    // wird fuer jedes Token gerufen, das in CallParser erkannt wird
>+    // is called for each token that is recognized in CallParser
>     virtual void NextToken( int nToken );
> 
>     virtual void ReadBitmapData();
>@@ -304,15 +304,15 @@ protected:
>     void ReadAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet* pSet );
>     void ReadTabAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet );
> 
>-    // Dokument-Info lesen
>+    // Read Document-Info
>     ::com::sun::star::util::DateTime GetDateTimeStamp( );
>     String& GetTextToEndGroup( String& rStr );
>     virtual void ReadInfo( const sal_Char* pChkForVerNo = 0 );
> 
>     inline SfxItemSet& GetAttrSet();
>-    // wurde noch kein Text eingefuegt ? (SttPos vom obersten StackEintrag!)
>+    // no text yet inserted? (SttPos from the top stack entry!)
>     int IsAttrSttPos();
>-    void AttrGroupEnd();		// den akt. Bearbeiten, vom Stack loeschen
>+    void AttrGroupEnd();		// edit the current, delete from stack
>     void SetAllAttrOfStk();		// end all Attr. and set it into doc
> 
> 
>@@ -321,10 +321,10 @@ protected:
>     virtual void SetEndPrevPara( SvxNodeIdx*& rpNodePos,
>                                  xub_StrLen& rCntPos )=0;
>     virtual void SetAttrInDoc( SvxRTFItemStackType &rSet );
>-    // fuer Tokens, die im ReadAttr nicht ausgewertet werden
>+    // for Tokens, which are not evaluated in ReadAttr
>     virtual void UnknownAttrToken( int nToken, SfxItemSet* pSet );
> 
>-    // falls jemand keine Twips haben moechte
>+    // if no-one would like to have any twips
>     virtual void CalcValue();
> 
>     SvxRTFParser( SfxItemPool& rAttrPool,
>@@ -347,14 +347,14 @@ protected:
>     int IsReadDocInfo() const			{ return bReadDocInfo; }
>     void SetReadDocInfo( int bFlag )	{ bReadDocInfo = bFlag; }
> 
>-    // erfrage/setze die aktuelle Einfuegeposition
>+    // Query/Set the current insert position
>     SvxPosition& GetInsPos() const		{ return *pInsPos; }
>     void SetInsPos( const SvxPosition& rNew );
> 
>     long GetVersionNo() const 			{ return nVersionNo; }
> 
>-    // erfrage/setze die Mapping-Ids fuer die Pard/Plain Attribute
>-    // (Set: es werden sich die Pointer gemerkt, also keine Kopie erzeugt!!! )
>+    // Query/Set the mapping IDs for the Pard/Plain attributes 
>+    //(Set: It is noted in the pointers, which thus does not create a copy)
>     void AddPardAttr( USHORT nWhich ) { aPardMap.Insert( nWhich, aPardMap.Count() ); }
>     void AddPlainAttr( USHORT nWhich ) { aPlainMap.Insert( nWhich, aPlainMap.Count() ); }
> 
>@@ -365,37 +365,37 @@ protected:
> 
>     const String& GetBaseURL() const			{ return sBaseURL; }
> 
>-        // lesen die GrafikDaten und fuelle damit die Grafik und die
>-        // die PicDaten.
>-        // Return - TRUE: die Grafik ist gueltig
>+    // Read the graphics data and make up for the graphics and the picture
>+    // meta data.
>+    // Return - TRUE: the graphic is valid
>     BOOL ReadBmpData( Graphic& rGrf, SvxRTFPictureType& rPicType );
>-        // wandel die ASCII-HexCodes in binaere Zeichen um. Werden
>-        // ungueltige Daten gefunden (Zeichen ausser 0-9|a-f|A-F, so
>-        // wird USHRT_MAX returnt, ansonsten die Anzahl der umgewandelten Ze.
>+        // Change the ASCII-HexCodes into binary characters. If invalid data is
>+        // found (strings not 0-9 | a-f | A-F, then USHRT_MAX is returned, 
>+        // otherwise the number of the converted character.
>     xub_StrLen HexToBin( String& rToken );
> 
> public:
> 
>-    virtual SvParserState CallParser(); // Aufruf des Parsers
>+    virtual SvParserState CallParser();
> 
>     inline const Color& GetColor( USHORT nId ) const;
>-    const Font& GetFont( USHORT nId );		// aendert den dflt Font
>+    const Font& GetFont( USHORT nId );		// Changes the dflt Font
> 
>     virtual int IsEndPara( SvxNodeIdx* pNd, xub_StrLen nCnt ) const = 0;
> 
>-    // um einen anderen Attribut-Pool setzen zukoennen. Darf nur vorm
>-    // CallParser erfolgen!! Die Maps werden nicht neu erzeugt!
>+    // to det a different attribute pool. May only be done prior to CallParser!
>+    // The maps are not generated anew!
>     void SetAttrPool( SfxItemPool* pNewPool )	{ pAttrPool = pNewPool; }
>-    // um andere WhichIds fuer einen anderen Pool zusetzen.
>+    // to set different WhichIds for a different pool.
>     RTFPardAttrMapIds& GetPardMap()
>                         { return (RTFPardAttrMapIds&)*aPardMap.GetData(); }
>     RTFPlainAttrMapIds& GetPlainMap()
>                         { return (RTFPlainAttrMapIds&)*aPlainMap.GetData(); }
>-    // um diese von aussen z.B. Tabellenzellen zuordnen zu koennen
>+    // to be able to assign them from the outside as for example table cells
>     void ReadBorderAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet, int bTableDef=FALSE );
>     void ReadBackgroundAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet, int bTableDef=FALSE	);
> 
>-    // fuers asynchrone lesen aus dem SvStream
>+    // for asynchronous read from the SvStream
>     virtual void Continue( int nToken );
> 
>     // get RTF default ItemSets. Must be used by pard/plain tokens or in
>@@ -404,8 +404,8 @@ public:
>     virtual bool UncompressableStackEntry(const SvxRTFItemStackType &rSet) const;
> };
> 
>-// der Stack fuer die Attribute:
>-// diese Klasse darf nur vom SvxRTFParser benutzt werden!
>+// The stack for the attributes: 
>+// this class may only be used by SvxRTFParser!
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxRTFItemStackType
> {
>     friend class SvxRTFParser;
>@@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ public:
> };
> 
> 
>-// ----------- Inline Implementierungen --------------
>+// ----------- Inline Implementations --------------
> 
> inline const Color& SvxRTFParser::GetColor( USHORT nId ) const
> {
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/swafopt.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/swafopt.hxx
>index 8292df4..f22b13f 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/swafopt.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/swafopt.hxx
>@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@
> class SvStringsISortDtor;
> class SmartTagMgr;
> 
>-// Klasse fuer Optionen vom Autoformat
>+// Class of options for AutoFormat
> struct EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxSwAutoFmtFlags
> {
>     Font aBulletFont;
>@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ struct EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxSwAutoFmtFlags
>     BOOL bAutoCompleteWords : 1;
>     BOOL bAutoCmpltCollectWords : 1;
>     BOOL bAutoCmpltEndless : 1;
>-// -- under NT hier starts a new long
>+// -- under NT here starts a new long
>     BOOL bAutoCmpltAppendBlanc : 1;
>     BOOL bAutoCmpltShowAsTip : 1;
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/tstpitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/tstpitem.hxx
>index 6d80024..568225c 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/tstpitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/tstpitem.hxx
>@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
> #define SVX_TAB_DEFCOUNT    10
> #define SVX_TAB_DEFDIST     1134            // 2cm in twips
> #define SVX_TAB_NOTFOUND    USHRT_MAX
>-#define cDfltDecimalChar    (sal_Unicode(0x00)) // aus IntlWrapper besorgen
>+#define cDfltDecimalChar    (sal_Unicode(0x00)) // Get from IntlWrapper
> #define cDfltFillChar       (sal_Unicode(' '))
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxTabStop
>@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ public:
> 
>     String			GetValueString() const;
> 
>-    // das "alte" operator==()
>+    // the "old" operator==()
>     BOOL			IsEqual( const SvxTabStop& rTS ) const
>                         {
>                             return ( nTabPos     == rTS.nTabPos     &&
>@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ public:
>                                      cFill       == rTS.cFill );
>                         }
> 
>-    // Fuer das SortedArray:
>+    // For the SortedArray:
>     BOOL            operator==( const SvxTabStop& rTS ) const
>                         { return nTabPos == rTS.nTabPos; }
>     BOOL            operator <( const SvxTabStop& rTS ) const
>@@ -112,9 +112,9 @@ public:
> 
> SV_DECL_VARARR_SORT_VISIBILITY( SvxTabStopArr, SvxTabStop, SVX_TAB_DEFCOUNT, 1, EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC )
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt eine Liste von TabStops.
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes a list of TabStops.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxTabStopItem : public SfxPoolItem, private SvxTabStopArr
>@@ -131,13 +131,13 @@ public:
>                     USHORT nWhich  );
>     SvxTabStopItem( const SvxTabStopItem& rTSI );
> 
>-    // Liefert Index-Position des Tabs zurueck oder TAB_NOTFOUND
>+    // Returns index of the tab or TAB_NOTFOUND
>     USHORT          GetPos( const SvxTabStop& rTab ) const;
> 
>-    // Liefert Index-Position des Tabs an nPos zurueck oder TAB_NOTFOUND
>+    // Returns index of the tab at nPos, or TAB_NOTFOUND
>     USHORT          GetPos( const long nPos ) const;
> 
>-    // entprivatisiert:
>+    // unprivatized:
>     USHORT          Count() const { return SvxTabStopArr::Count(); }
>     BOOL            Insert( const SvxTabStop& rTab );
>     void            Insert( const SvxTabStopItem* pTabs, USHORT nStart = 0,
>@@ -147,14 +147,14 @@ public:
>     void            Remove( const USHORT nPos, const USHORT nLen = 1 )
>                         { SvxTabStopArr::Remove( nPos, nLen ); }
> 
>-    // Zuweisungsoperator, Gleichheitsoperator (vorsicht: teuer!)
>+    // Assignment operator, equality operator (caution: expensive!)
>     SvxTabStopItem& operator=( const SvxTabStopItem& rTSI );
> 
>     // this is already included in SfxPoolItem declaration
>     //int             operator!=( const SvxTabStopItem& rTSI ) const
>     //					{ return !( operator==( rTSI ) ); }
> 
>-    // SortedArrays liefern nur Stackobjekte zurueck!
>+    // SortedArrays returns only Stackobjects!
>     const SvxTabStop& operator[]( const USHORT nPos ) const
>                         {
>                             DBG_ASSERT( GetStart() &&
>@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ public:
>     const SvxTabStop*  GetStart() const
>                         {   return SvxTabStopArr::GetData(); }
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual	bool             QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>     virtual	bool             PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/twolinesitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/twolinesitem.hxx
>index c5f48e5..71c80f8 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/twolinesitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/twolinesitem.hxx
>@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ public:
>     SvxTwoLinesItem( const SvxTwoLinesItem& rAttr );
>     virtual ~SvxTwoLinesItem();
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int             operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*	Clone( SfxItemPool* pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*	Create(SvStream &, USHORT nVer) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/txtrange.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/txtrange.hxx
>index 90b5512..275da1c 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/txtrange.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/txtrange.hxx
>@@ -55,19 +55,19 @@ class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC TextRanger
> {
>     Range *pRangeArr;
>     SvLongsPtr *pCache;
>-    PolyPolygon *mpPolyPolygon; // Flaechenpolygon
>-    PolyPolygon *mpLinePolyPolygon; // Linienpolygon
>-    Rectangle *pBound;	// Umfassendes Rechteck
>+    PolyPolygon *mpPolyPolygon; // Surface polygon
>+    PolyPolygon *mpLinePolyPolygon; // Line polygon
>+    Rectangle *pBound;	// Comprehensive rectangle
>     USHORT nCacheSize;	// Cache-Size
>     USHORT nCacheIdx;	// Cache-Index
>-    USHORT nRight;		// Abstand Kontur-Text
>-    USHORT nLeft;		// Abstand Text-Kontur
>-    USHORT nUpper;		// Abstand Kontur-Text
>-    USHORT nLower;		// Abstand Text-Kontur
>-    sal_uInt32 nPointCount; // Anzahl der Polygonpunkte
>-    BOOL bSimple : 1;	// Nur Aussenkante
>-    BOOL bInner  : 1;	// TRUE: Objekt beschriften (EditEngine);
>-                        // FALSE: Objekt umfliessen (StarWriter);
>+    USHORT nRight;		// Distance Contour-Text
>+    USHORT nLeft;		// Distance Text-Contour
>+    USHORT nUpper;		// Distance Contour-Text
>+    USHORT nLower;		// Distance Text-Contour
>+    sal_uInt32 nPointCount; // Number of polygon points
>+    BOOL bSimple : 1;	// Just outside edge
>+    BOOL bInner  : 1;	// TRUE: Objekt inline (EditEngine);
>+                        // FALSE: Objekt flow (StarWriter);
>     BOOL bVertical :1;	// for vertical writing mode
>     BOOL bFlag3 :1;
>     BOOL bFlag4 :1;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/udlnitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/udlnitem.hxx
>index 8f5d13c..ab01ff6 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/udlnitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/udlnitem.hxx
>@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
>     SvxTextLineItem( const FontUnderline eSt,
>                      const USHORT nId );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxItemPresentation GetPresentation( SfxItemPresentation ePres,
>                             SfxMapUnit eCoreMetric,
>                             SfxMapUnit ePresMetric,
>@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ public:
>     virtual	bool            PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal,
>                                         BYTE nMemberId = 0 );
> 
>-    // MS VC4.0 kommt durcheinander
>+    // MS VC4.0 messes things up
>     void			 		SetValue( USHORT nNewVal )
>                                 {SfxEnumItem::SetValue(nNewVal); }
>     virtual int 			HasBoolValue() const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/ulspitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/ulspitem.hxx
>index 83bc118..6f58c5b 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/ulspitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/ulspitem.hxx
>@@ -40,18 +40,18 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxULSpaceItem --------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt den oberen und unteren Rand einer Seite oder Absatz.
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes the Upper- and Lower space of a page or paragraph.
> */
> 
> #define	ULSPACE_16_VERSION	((USHORT)0x0001)
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxULSpaceItem : public SfxPoolItem
> {
>-    USHORT nUpper;  //Oberer Rand
>-    USHORT nLower;  //Unterer Rand
>-    USHORT nPropUpper, nPropLower;		// relativ oder absolut (=100%)
>+    USHORT nUpper;  // Upper space
>+    USHORT nLower;  // Lower space
>+    USHORT nPropUpper, nPropLower;		// relative or absolute (=100%)
> public:
>     TYPEINFO();
> 
>@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ public:
>                     const USHORT nId  );
>     inline SvxULSpaceItem& operator=( const SvxULSpaceItem &rCpy );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual int 			 operator==( const SfxPoolItem& ) const;
> 
>     virtual	bool            QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId = 0 ) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/unofield.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/unofield.hxx
>index 5c00449..33f5ae2 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/unofield.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/unofield.hxx
>@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ public:
>     SvxUnoTextField( ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::text::XTextRange > xAnchor, const ::rtl::OUString& rPresentation, const SvxFieldData* pFieldData ) throw();
>     virtual	~SvxUnoTextField() throw();
> 
>-    // Intern
>+    // Internal
>     virtual sal_Int32 GetFieldId( const SvxFieldData* pFieldData ) const throw();
>     SvxFieldData* CreateFieldData() const throw();
>     void SetAnchor( ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::text::XTextRange > xAnchor ) { mxAnchor = xAnchor; }
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/unofored.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/unofored.hxx
>index b13118c..e615611 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/unofored.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/unofored.hxx
>@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@
> #include <editeng/unoedsrc.hxx>
> #include "editeng/editengdllapi.h"
> 
>-//	SvxEditEngineForwarder - SvxTextForwarder fuer EditEngine
>+//	SvxEditEngineForwarder - SvxTextForwarder for EditEngine
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxEditEngineForwarder : public SvxTextForwarder
> {
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/unoforou.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/unoforou.hxx
>index 80f053a..65e4016 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/unoforou.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/unoforou.hxx
>@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@
> 
> class Outliner;
> 
>-//	SvxOutlinerForwarder - SvxTextForwarder fuer Outliner
>+//	SvxOutlinerForwarder - SvxTextForwarder for Outliner
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxOutlinerForwarder : public SvxTextForwarder
> {
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/unoipset.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/unoipset.hxx
>index 5ad230b..685d0aa 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/unoipset.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/unoipset.hxx
>@@ -55,11 +55,11 @@ public:
>     SvxItemPropertySet( const SfxItemPropertyMapEntry *pMap, SfxItemPool& rPool, sal_Bool bConvertTwips = sal_False );
>     ~SvxItemPropertySet();
> 
>-    // Methoden, die direkt mit dem ItemSet arbeiten
>+    // Methods, which work directly with the ItemSet
>     ::com::sun::star::uno::Any getPropertyValue( const SfxItemPropertySimpleEntry* pMap, const SfxItemSet& rSet, bool bSearchInParent, bool bDontConvertNegativeValues ) const;
>     void setPropertyValue( const SfxItemPropertySimpleEntry* pMap, const ::com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, SfxItemSet& rSet, bool bDontConvertNegativeValues ) const;
> 
>-    // Methoden, die stattdessen Any benutzen
>+    // Methods that use Any instead
>     ::com::sun::star::uno::Any getPropertyValue( const SfxItemPropertySimpleEntry* pMap ) const;
>     void setPropertyValue( const SfxItemPropertySimpleEntry* pMap, const ::com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal ) const;
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/unolingu.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/unolingu.hxx
>index e50884e..1989780 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/unolingu.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/unolingu.hxx
>@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ public:
> 
> ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
> 
>-//TL:TODO: remove those functions or make them inline
>+//TODO: remove those functions or make them inline
> EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< 
>     ::com::sun::star::linguistic2::XSpellChecker1 >	SvxGetSpellChecker();
> EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< 
>@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference<
>     ::com::sun::star::linguistic2::XDictionaryList > SvxGetDictionaryList();
> EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< 
>     ::com::sun::star::beans::XPropertySet > 		SvxGetLinguPropertySet();
>-//TL:TODO: remove argument or provide SvxGetIgnoreAllList with the same one
>+//TODO: remove argument or provide SvxGetIgnoreAllList with the same one
> EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< 
>     ::com::sun::star::linguistic2::XDictionary >  	SvxGetOrCreatePosDic( 
>             ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/unonrule.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/unonrule.hxx
>index f7d0592..9b5e80b 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/unonrule.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/unonrule.hxx
>@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ public:
>     virtual sal_Bool SAL_CALL supportsService( const ::rtl::OUString& ServiceName ) throw(com::sun::star::uno::RuntimeException);
>     virtual com::sun::star::uno::Sequence< rtl::OUString > SAL_CALL getSupportedServiceNames(  ) throw(com::sun::star::uno::RuntimeException);
> 
>-    // intern
>+    // internal
>     com::sun::star::uno::Sequence<com::sun::star::beans::PropertyValue> getNumberingRuleByIndex( sal_Int32 nIndex) const throw();
>     void setNumberingRuleByIndex( const com::sun::star::uno::Sequence< com::sun::star::beans::PropertyValue >& rProperties, sal_Int32 nIndex) throw( com::sun::star::uno::RuntimeException, com::sun::star::lang::IllegalArgumentException );
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/unoprnms.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/unoprnms.hxx
>index 625ccfa..8adbc60 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/unoprnms.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/unoprnms.hxx
>@@ -258,7 +258,7 @@
> #define	UNO_NAME_3D_TEXTUREPOLYGON3D			"D3DTexturePolygon3D"
> #define	UNO_NAME_3D_LINEONLY					"D3DLineOnly"
> 
>-// #107245# New 3D properties which are possible for lathe and extrude 3d objects
>+// New 3D properties which are possible for lathe and extrude 3d objects
> #define UNO_NAME_3D_SMOOTH_NORMALS				"D3DSmoothNormals"
> #define UNO_NAME_3D_SMOOTH_LIDS					"D3DSmoothLids"
> #define UNO_NAME_3D_CHARACTER_MODE				"D3DCharacterMode"
>@@ -357,7 +357,7 @@
> 
> #define UNO_NAME_CUSTOMSHAPE_ADJUSTMENT			"CustomShapeAdjustment"
> 
>-// Die folgenden Properties sind veraltet und koennen irgendwann mal raus
>+// The following properties are obsolete and can eventually be removed
> #define UNO_NAME_EDIT_FONT_COLOR				"FontColor"
> #define UNO_NAME_EDIT_FONT_ESCAPEMENT			"FontEscapement"
> #define UNO_NAME_EDIT_FONT_HEIGHT				"FontHeight"
>@@ -370,7 +370,7 @@
> #define UNO_NAME_EDIT_FONT_FAMILY				"FontFamily"
> #define UNO_NAME_EDIT_FONT_NAME					"FontName"
> #define UNO_NAME_EDIT_FONT_CHARSET				"FontCharset"
>-// Ende der veralteten Properties
>+// End of the obsolete properties
> 
> #endif
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/unotext.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/unotext.hxx
>index ebd0576..88f2064 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/unotext.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/unotext.hxx
>@@ -173,8 +173,8 @@ EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC void GetSelection( struct ESelection& rSel, SvxTextForwarder*
> EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC void CheckSelection( struct ESelection& rSel, SvxTextForwarder* pForwarder ) throw();
> 
> // ====================================================================
>-// Diese Klasse implementiert eine SvxEditSource und einen SvxTextForwarder
>-// und macht ansonsten rein garnichts
>+// This class implements a SvxEditSource and SvxTextForwarder and does 
>+// nothing otherwise
> // ====================================================================
> 
> class SvxDummyTextSource : public SvxEditSource, public SvxTextForwarder
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/wghtitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/wghtitem.hxx
>index 8a77027..79884f9 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/wghtitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/wghtitem.hxx
>@@ -42,9 +42,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxWeightItem ---------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/* [Beschreibung]
>+/* [Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt die Font-Staerke.
>+    This item describes the font weight.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxWeightItem : public SfxEnumItem
>@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public:
>     SvxWeightItem(  const FontWeight eWght /*= WEIGHT_NORMAL*/,
>                     const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem + SfxEnumItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem + SfxEnumItem
>     virtual SfxItemPresentation GetPresentation( SfxItemPresentation ePres,
>                                     SfxMapUnit eCoreMetric,
>                                     SfxMapUnit ePresMetric,
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/widwitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/widwitem.hxx
>index f8aaeba..9b0d0e8 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/widwitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/widwitem.hxx
>@@ -41,9 +41,9 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxWidowsItem ---------------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*
>-[Beschreibung]
>-Dieses Item beschreibt die Anzahl der Zeilen fuer die Hurenkinderregelung.
>+/*  [Description]
>+
>+    This item describes the number of lines for the widows control.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxWidowsItem: public SfxByteItem
>@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
> 
>     SvxWidowsItem( const BYTE nL /*= 0*/, const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create( SvStream &, USHORT ) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store( SvStream & , USHORT nItemVersion ) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/editeng/wrlmitem.hxx b/editeng/inc/editeng/wrlmitem.hxx
>index de29f41..8e7038e 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/editeng/wrlmitem.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/inc/editeng/wrlmitem.hxx
>@@ -41,10 +41,10 @@ namespace rtl
> 
> // class SvxWordLineModeItem ---------------------------------------------
> 
>-/*	[Beschreibung]
>+/*	[Description]
> 
>-    Dieses Item beschreibt, ob Unterstrichen und Durchgestrichen auf
>-    Wortgrenzen beschraenkt ist.
>+    This item describes, whether underlined and strikethrough is limited 
>+    to word boundaries.
> */
> 
> class EDITENG_DLLPUBLIC SvxWordLineModeItem : public SfxBoolItem
>@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ public:
>     SvxWordLineModeItem( const BOOL bWordLineMode /*= FALSE*/,
>                      const USHORT nId  );
> 
>-    // "pure virtual Methoden" vom SfxPoolItem
>+    // "pure virtual Methods" from SfxPoolItem
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Clone( SfxItemPool *pPool = 0 ) const;
>     virtual SfxPoolItem*    Create(SvStream &, USHORT) const;
>     virtual SvStream&		Store(SvStream &, USHORT nItemVersion) const;
>diff --git a/editeng/inc/helpid.hrc b/editeng/inc/helpid.hrc
>index 7c2f43e..ad64c83 100644
>--- a/editeng/inc/helpid.hrc
>+++ b/editeng/inc/helpid.hrc
>@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@
> 
> #define ACT_SVX_HID_END		(HID_EDIT_START+28)
> #if ACT_SVX_HID_END > HID_EDIT_END
>-#error Resource-Ueberlauf in #line, #file
>+#error Resource overflow on #line, #file
> #endif
> 
> #endif
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editattr.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editattr.cxx
>index 8f50b34..8fe6ddc 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editattr.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editattr.cxx
>@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ void EditCharAttrib::SetFont( SvxFont&, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribFont::EditCharAttribFont( const SvxFontItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTINFO || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTINFO_CJK || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTINFO_CTL, "Kein Fontattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTINFO || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTINFO_CJK || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTINFO_CTL, "Not a Font attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribFont::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ void EditCharAttribFont::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribItalic::EditCharAttribItalic( const SvxPostureItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_ITALIC || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_ITALIC_CJK || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_ITALIC_CTL, "Kein Italicattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_ITALIC || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_ITALIC_CJK || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_ITALIC_CTL, "Not a Italic attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribItalic::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ void EditCharAttribItalic::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribWeight::EditCharAttribWeight( const SvxWeightItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_WEIGHT || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_WEIGHT_CJK || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_WEIGHT_CTL, "Kein Weightttribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_WEIGHT || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_WEIGHT_CJK || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_WEIGHT_CTL, "Not a Weight attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribWeight::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ void EditCharAttribWeight::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribUnderline::EditCharAttribUnderline( const SvxUnderlineItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_UNDERLINE, "Kein Underlineattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_UNDERLINE, "Not a Underline attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribUnderline::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* pOutDev )
>@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ void EditCharAttribUnderline::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* pOutDev )
> EditCharAttribOverline::EditCharAttribOverline( const SvxOverlineItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_OVERLINE, "Kein Overlineattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_OVERLINE, "Not a overline attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribOverline::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* pOutDev )
>@@ -178,12 +178,12 @@ void EditCharAttribOverline::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* pOutDev )
> EditCharAttribFontHeight::EditCharAttribFontHeight( const SvxFontHeightItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT_CJK || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT_CTL, "Kein Heightattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT_CJK || rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT_CTL, "Not a Height attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribFontHeight::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> {
>-    // Prop wird ignoriert
>+    // Property is ignored
>     rFont.SetSize( Size( rFont.GetSize().Width(), ((const SvxFontHeightItem*)GetItem())->GetHeight() ) );
> }
> 
>@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ void EditCharAttribFontHeight::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribFontWidth::EditCharAttribFontWidth( const SvxCharScaleWidthItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTWIDTH, "Kein Widthattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTWIDTH, "Not a Width attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribFontWidth::SetFont( SvxFont& /*rFont*/, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ void EditCharAttribFontWidth::SetFont( SvxFont& /*rFont*/, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribStrikeout::EditCharAttribStrikeout( const SvxCrossedOutItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_STRIKEOUT, "Kein Sizeattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_STRIKEOUT, "Not a Size attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribStrikeout::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ void EditCharAttribStrikeout::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribColor::EditCharAttribColor( const SvxColorItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_COLOR, "Kein Colorattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_COLOR, "Not a Color attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribColor::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ void EditCharAttribColor::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribLanguage::EditCharAttribLanguage( const SvxLanguageItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( ( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_LANGUAGE ) || ( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_LANGUAGE_CJK ) || ( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_LANGUAGE_CTL ), "Kein Languageattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( ( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_LANGUAGE ) || ( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_LANGUAGE_CJK ) || ( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_LANGUAGE_CTL ), "Not a Language attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribLanguage::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ void EditCharAttribLanguage::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribShadow::EditCharAttribShadow( const SvxShadowedItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_SHADOW, "Kein Shadowattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_SHADOW, "Not a Shadow attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribShadow::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ void EditCharAttribShadow::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribEscapement::EditCharAttribEscapement( const SvxEscapementItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_ESCAPEMENT, "Kein Escapementattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_ESCAPEMENT, "Not a escapement attribute!" );
> }
> 
> #if defined( WIN ) && !defined( WNT )
>@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ void EditCharAttribEscapement::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribOutline::EditCharAttribOutline( const SvxContourItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_OUTLINE, "Kein Outlineattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_OUTLINE, "Not a Outline attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribOutline::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -354,8 +354,7 @@ EditCharAttribField::EditCharAttribField( const EditCharAttribField& rAttr )
>     : EditCharAttrib( *rAttr.GetItem(), rAttr.GetStart(), rAttr.GetEnd() ),
>         aFieldValue( rAttr.aFieldValue )
> {
>-    // Diesen CCTOR nur fuer temporaeres Object verwenden,
>-    // Item wird nicht gepoolt.
>+    // Use this constructor only for temporary Objects, Item is not pooled.
>     pTxtColor = rAttr.pTxtColor ? new Color( *rAttr.pTxtColor ) : 0;
>     pFldColor = rAttr.pFldColor ? new Color( *rAttr.pFldColor ) : 0;
> }
>@@ -389,7 +388,7 @@ BOOL EditCharAttribField::operator == ( const EditCharAttribField& rAttr ) const
> EditCharAttribPairKerning::EditCharAttribPairKerning( const SvxAutoKernItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
> : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_PAIRKERNING, "Kein PairKerning!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_PAIRKERNING, "Not a Pair Kerning!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribPairKerning::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -403,7 +402,7 @@ void EditCharAttribPairKerning::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribKerning::EditCharAttribKerning( const SvxKerningItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
> : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_KERNING, "Kein Kerning!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_KERNING, "Not a Kerning!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribKerning::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -417,7 +416,7 @@ void EditCharAttribKerning::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribWordLineMode::EditCharAttribWordLineMode( const SvxWordLineModeItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
> : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_WLM, "Kein Kerning!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_WLM, "Not a Kerning!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribWordLineMode::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>@@ -431,7 +430,7 @@ void EditCharAttribWordLineMode::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
> EditCharAttribEmphasisMark::EditCharAttribEmphasisMark( const SvxEmphasisMarkItem& rAttr, USHORT _nStart, USHORT _nEnd )
>     : EditCharAttrib( rAttr, _nStart, _nEnd )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_EMPHASISMARK, "Kein Emphasisattribut!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rAttr.Which() == EE_CHAR_EMPHASISMARK, "Not a Emphasis attribute!" );
> }
> 
> void EditCharAttribEmphasisMark::SetFont( SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* )
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editattr.hxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editattr.hxx
>index 27e20f3..fdaee62 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editattr.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editattr.hxx
>@@ -60,9 +60,9 @@ class SfxVoidItem;
> #define CH_FEATURE_OLD	(BYTE)			0xFF
> #define CH_FEATURE		(sal_Unicode) 	0x01
> 
>-// DEF_METRIC: Bei meinem Pool sollte immer die DefMetric bei
>-// GetMetric( nWhich ) ankommen!
>-// => Zum ermitteln der DefMetrik einfach ein GetMetric( 0 )
>+// DEF_METRIC: For my pool, the DefMetric should always appear when 
>+// GetMetric (nWhich)! 
>+// => To determine the DefMetric simply use GetMetric(0)
> #define DEF_METRIC	0
> 
> // -------------------------------------------------------------------------
>@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ protected:
>     virtual				~EditAttrib();
> 
> public:
>-    // RemoveFromPool muss immer vorm DTOR Aufruf erfolgen!!
>+    // RemoveFromPool must always be called before the destructor!!
>     void				RemoveFromPool( SfxItemPool& rPool );
> 
>     USHORT				Which() const	{ return pItem->Which(); }
>@@ -91,8 +91,8 @@ public:
> // -------------------------------------------------------------------------
> // class EditCharAttrib
> // -------------------------------------------------------------------------
>-// bFeature: Attribut darf nicht expandieren/schrumfen, Laenge immer 1
>-// bEdge: Attribut expandiert nicht, wenn genau an der Kante expandiert werden soll
>+// bFeature: Attribute must not expand/shrink, length is always 1
>+// bEdge: Attribute will not expand, if you want to expand just on the edge
> class EditCharAttrib : public EditAttrib
> {
> protected:
>@@ -158,14 +158,14 @@ inline void EditCharAttrib::MoveBackward( USHORT nDiff )
> inline void	EditCharAttrib::Expand( USHORT nDiff )
> {
>     DBG_ASSERT( ( ((long)nEnd + nDiff) <= (long)0xFFFF ), "EditCharAttrib: Expand?!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !bFeature, "Bitte keine Features expandieren!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !bFeature, "Please do not expand any features!" );
>     nEnd = nEnd + nDiff;
> }
> 
> inline void	EditCharAttrib::Collaps( USHORT nDiff )
> {
>     DBG_ASSERT( (long)nEnd - nDiff >= (long)nStart, "EditCharAttrib: Collaps?!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !bFeature, "Bitte keine Features schrumpfen!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !bFeature, "Please do not shrink any Features!" );
>     nEnd = nEnd - nDiff;
> }
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editdbg.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editdbg.cxx
>index 1011ba1..d0cc8a3 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editdbg.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editdbg.cxx
>@@ -329,28 +329,28 @@ void EditDbg::ShowEditEngineData( EditEngine* pEE, BOOL bInfoBox )
> #endif
>     if ( fp == 0 )
>     {
>-        DBG_ERROR( "Log-File konnte nicht angelegt werden!" );
>+        DBG_ERROR( "Log file could not be created!" );
>         return;
>     }
> 
>     const SfxItemPool& rPool = *pEE->GetEmptyItemSet().GetPool();
> 
>     fprintf( fp, "================================================================================" );
>-    fprintf( fp, "\n==================   Dokument   ================================================" );
>+    fprintf( fp, "\n==================   Document   ================================================" );
>     fprintf( fp, "\n================================================================================" );
>     for ( USHORT nPortion = 0; nPortion < pEE->pImpEditEngine->GetParaPortions(). Count(); nPortion++)
>     {
> 
>         ParaPortion* pPPortion = pEE->pImpEditEngine->GetParaPortions().GetObject(nPortion );
>-        fprintf( fp, "\nAbsatz %i: Laenge = %i, Invalid = %i\nText = '%s'", nPortion, pPPortion->GetNode()->Len(), pPPortion->IsInvalid(), ByteString( *pPPortion->GetNode(), RTL_TEXTENCODING_ASCII_US ).GetBuffer() );
>+        fprintf( fp, "\nParagraph %i: Length = %i, Invalid = %i\nText = '%s'", nPortion, pPPortion->GetNode()->Len(), pPPortion->IsInvalid(), ByteString( *pPPortion->GetNode(), RTL_TEXTENCODING_ASCII_US ).GetBuffer() );
>         fprintf( fp, "\nVorlage:" );
>         SfxStyleSheet* pStyle = pPPortion->GetNode()->GetStyleSheet();
>         if ( pStyle )
>             fprintf( fp, " %s", ByteString( pStyle->GetName(), RTL_TEXTENCODING_ASCII_US ).GetBuffer() );
>-        fprintf( fp, "\nAbsatzattribute:" );
>+        fprintf( fp, "\nParagraph attribute:" );
>         DbgOutItemSet( fp, pPPortion->GetNode()->GetContentAttribs().GetItems(), FALSE, FALSE );
> 
>-        fprintf( fp, "\nZeichenattribute:" );
>+        fprintf( fp, "\nCharacter attribute:" );
>         BOOL bZeroAttr = FALSE;
>         USHORT z;
>         for ( z = 0; z < pPPortion->GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().Count(); z++ )
>@@ -376,11 +376,11 @@ void EditDbg::ShowEditEngineData( EditEngine* pEE, BOOL bInfoBox )
>             fprintf( fp, "\nNULL-Attribute!" );
> 
>         USHORT nTextPortions = pPPortion->GetTextPortions().Count();
>-        ByteString aPortionStr("\nTextportions: #");
>+        ByteString aPortionStr("\nText portions: #");
>         aPortionStr += ByteString::CreateFromInt32( nTextPortions );
>         aPortionStr += " \nA";
>         aPortionStr += ByteString::CreateFromInt32( nPortion );
>-        aPortionStr += ": Absatzlaenge = ";
>+        aPortionStr += ": Paragraph Length = ";
>         aPortionStr += ByteString::CreateFromInt32( pPPortion->GetNode()->Len() );
>         aPortionStr += "\nA";
>         aPortionStr += ByteString::CreateFromInt32( nPortion );
>@@ -402,29 +402,29 @@ void EditDbg::ShowEditEngineData( EditEngine* pEE, BOOL bInfoBox )
>         }
>         aPortionStr += "\nA";
>         aPortionStr += ByteString::CreateFromInt32( nPortion );
>-        aPortionStr += ": Gesamtlaenge: ";
>+        aPortionStr += ": Total length: ";
>         aPortionStr += ByteString::CreateFromInt32( n );
>         if ( pPPortion->GetNode()->Len() != n )
>-            aPortionStr += " => Fehler !!!";
>+            aPortionStr += " => Error !!!";
>         fprintf( fp, "%s", aPortionStr.GetBuffer() );
> 
> 
>-        fprintf( fp, "\n\nZeilen:" );
>-        // Erstmal die Inhalte...
>+        fprintf( fp, "\n\nLines:" );
>+        // First the content ...
>         USHORT nLine;
>         for ( nLine = 0; nLine < pPPortion->GetLines().Count(); nLine++ )
>         {
>             EditLine* pLine = pPPortion->GetLines().GetObject( nLine );
> 
>             ByteString aLine( *(pPPortion->GetNode()), pLine->GetStart(), pLine->GetEnd() - pLine->GetStart(), RTL_TEXTENCODING_ASCII_US );
>-            fprintf( fp, "\nZeile %i\t>%s<", nLine, aLine.GetBuffer() );
>+            fprintf( fp, "\nLine %i\t>%s<", nLine, aLine.GetBuffer() );
>         }
>-        // dann die internen Daten...
>+        // then the internal data ...
>         for ( nLine = 0; nLine < pPPortion->GetLines().Count(); nLine++ )
>         {
>             EditLine* pLine = pPPortion->GetLines().GetObject( nLine );
>             fprintf( fp, "\nZeile %i:\tStart: %i,\tEnd: %i", nLine, pLine->GetStart(), pLine->GetEnd() );
>-            fprintf( fp, "\t\tPortions: %i - %i.\tHoehe: %i, Ascent=%i", pLine->GetStartPortion(), pLine->GetEndPortion(), pLine->GetHeight(), pLine->GetMaxAscent() );
>+            fprintf( fp, "\t\tPortions: %i - %i.\tHight: %i, Ascent=%i", pLine->GetStartPortion(), pLine->GetEndPortion(), pLine->GetHeight(), pLine->GetMaxAscent() );
>         }
> 
>         fprintf( fp, "\n-----------------------------------------------------------------------------" );
>@@ -436,12 +436,12 @@ void EditDbg::ShowEditEngineData( EditEngine* pEE, BOOL bInfoBox )
>         fprintf( fp, "\n\n================================================================================" );
>         fprintf( fp, "\n==================   Stylesheets   =============================================" );
>         fprintf( fp, "\n================================================================================" );
>-        fprintf( fp, "\n#Vorlagen:   %lu\n", nStyles );
>+        fprintf( fp, "\n#Template:   %lu\n", nStyles );
>         SfxStyleSheetIterator aIter( pEE->pImpEditEngine->GetStyleSheetPool(), SFX_STYLE_FAMILY_ALL );
>         SfxStyleSheetBase* pStyle = aIter.First();
>         while ( pStyle )
>         {
>-            fprintf( fp, "\nVorlage:   %s", ByteString( pStyle->GetName(), RTL_TEXTENCODING_ASCII_US ).GetBuffer() );
>+            fprintf( fp, "\nTemplate:   %s", ByteString( pStyle->GetName(), RTL_TEXTENCODING_ASCII_US ).GetBuffer() );
>             fprintf( fp, "\nParent:    %s", ByteString( pStyle->GetParent(), RTL_TEXTENCODING_ASCII_US ).GetBuffer() );
>             fprintf( fp, "\nFollow:    %s", ByteString( pStyle->GetFollow(), RTL_TEXTENCODING_ASCII_US ).GetBuffer() );
>             DbgOutItemSet( fp, pStyle->GetItemSet(), FALSE, FALSE );
>@@ -465,23 +465,23 @@ void EditDbg::ShowEditEngineData( EditEngine* pEE, BOOL bInfoBox )
>     fprintf( fp, "\nMaxAutoPaperSize: %li x %li", pEE->GetMaxAutoPaperSize().Width(), pEE->GetMaxAutoPaperSize().Height() );
>     fprintf( fp, "\nMinAutoPaperSize: %li x %li", pEE->GetMinAutoPaperSize().Width(), pEE->GetMinAutoPaperSize().Height() );
>     fprintf( fp, "\nUpdate: %i", pEE->GetUpdateMode() );
>-    fprintf( fp, "\nAnzahl der Views: %i", pEE->GetViewCount() );
>+    fprintf( fp, "\nNumber of Views: %i", pEE->GetViewCount() );
>     for	( USHORT nView = 0; nView < pEE->GetViewCount(); nView++ )
>     {
>         EditView* pV = pEE->GetView( nView );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pV, "View nicht gefunden!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pV, "View not found!" );
>         fprintf( fp, "\nView %i: Focus=%i", nView, pV->GetWindow()->HasFocus() );
>         Rectangle aR( pV->GetOutputArea() );
>         fprintf( fp, "\n  OutputArea: nX=%li, nY=%li, dX=%li, dY=%li, MapMode = %i", aR.TopLeft().X(), aR.TopLeft().Y(), aR.GetSize().Width(), aR.GetSize().Height() , pV->GetWindow()->GetMapMode().GetMapUnit() );
>         aR = pV->GetVisArea();
>         fprintf( fp, "\n  VisArea: nX=%li, nY=%li, dX=%li, dY=%li", aR.TopLeft().X(), aR.TopLeft().Y(), aR.GetSize().Width(), aR.GetSize().Height() );
>         ESelection aSel = pV->GetSelection();
>-        fprintf( fp, "\n  Selektion: Start=%u,%u, End=%u,%u", aSel.nStartPara, aSel.nStartPos, aSel.nEndPara, aSel.nEndPos );
>+        fprintf( fp, "\n  Selection: Start=%u,%u, End=%u,%u", aSel.nStartPara, aSel.nStartPos, aSel.nEndPara, aSel.nEndPos );
>     }
>     if ( pEE->GetActiveView() )
>     {
>         fprintf( fp, "\n\n================================================================================" );
>-        fprintf( fp, "\n==================   Aktuelle View   ===========================================" );
>+        fprintf( fp, "\n==================   Current View   ===========================================" );
>         fprintf( fp, "\n================================================================================" );
>         DbgOutItemSet( fp, pEE->GetActiveView()->GetAttribs(), TRUE, FALSE );
>     }
>@@ -494,10 +494,10 @@ ByteString EditDbg::GetPortionInfo( ParaPortion* pPPortion )
> {
>     USHORT z;
> 
>-    ByteString aDebStr( "Absatzlaenge = " );
>+    ByteString aDebStr( "Paragraph Length = " );
>     aDebStr += ByteString::CreateFromInt32( pPPortion->GetNode()->Len() );
> 
>-    aDebStr += "\nZeichenattribute:";
>+    aDebStr += "\nCharacter attribute:";
>     for ( z = 0; z < pPPortion->GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().Count(); z++ )
>     {
>         EditCharAttrib* pAttr = pPPortion->GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs().GetObject( z );
>@@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ ByteString EditDbg::GetPortionInfo( ParaPortion* pPPortion )
>         aDebStr += ByteString::CreateFromInt32( pAttr->GetEnd() );
>     }
> 
>-    aDebStr += "\nTextportions:";
>+    aDebStr += "\nText portions:";
>     USHORT n = 0;
>     for ( z = 0; z < pPPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(); z++ )
>     {
>@@ -522,15 +522,15 @@ ByteString EditDbg::GetPortionInfo( ParaPortion* pPPortion )
>         aDebStr += ";";
>         n = n + pPortion->GetLen();
>     }
>-    aDebStr += "\nGesamtlaenge: ";
>+    aDebStr += "\nTotal length: ";
>     aDebStr += ByteString::CreateFromInt32( n );
>-    aDebStr += "\nSortiert nach Start:";
>+    aDebStr += "\nSorted after Start:";
>     for ( USHORT x = 0; x < pPPortion->GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().Count(); x++ )
>     {
>         EditCharAttrib* pCurAttrib = pPPortion->GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs().GetObject( x );
>         aDebStr += "\nStart: ";
>         aDebStr += ByteString::CreateFromInt32( pCurAttrib->GetStart() );
>-        aDebStr += "\tEnde: ";
>+        aDebStr += "\tEnd: ";
>         aDebStr += ByteString::CreateFromInt32( pCurAttrib->GetEnd() );
>     }
>     return aDebStr;
>@@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ void EditDbg::ShowPortionData( ParaPortion* pPortion )
> 
> BOOL ParaPortion::DbgCheckTextPortions()
> {
>-    // pruefen, ob Portionlaenge ok:
>+    // check, if Portion length ok:
>     USHORT nXLen = 0;
>     for ( USHORT nPortion = 0; nPortion < aTextPortionList.Count(); nPortion++  )
>         nXLen = nXLen + aTextPortionList[nPortion]->GetLen();
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc.cxx
>index 78b4515..9db56ca 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc.cxx
>@@ -161,8 +161,8 @@ BOOL IsScriptItemValid( USHORT nItemId, short nScriptType )
> 
> // ------------------------------------------------------------
> 
>-// Sollte spaeter zentral nach TOOLS/STRING (Aktuell: 303)
>-// fuer Grep: WS_TARGET
>+// Should later be moved to TOOLS/STRING (Current: 303)
>+// for Grep: WS_TARGET
> 
> DBG_NAME( EE_TextPortion );
> DBG_NAME( EE_EditLine );
>@@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ int SAL_CALL CompareStart( const void* pFirst, const void* pSecond )
> 
> EditCharAttrib* MakeCharAttrib( SfxItemPool& rPool, const SfxPoolItem& rAttr, USHORT nS, USHORT nE )
> {
>-    // das neue Attribut im Pool anlegen
>+    // Create a new attribute in the pool
>     const SfxPoolItem& rNew = rPool.Put( rAttr );
> 
>     EditCharAttrib* pNew = 0;
>@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ EditCharAttrib* MakeCharAttrib( SfxItemPool& rPool, const SfxPoolItem& rAttr, US
>         break;
>         case EE_CHAR_XMLATTRIBS:
>         {
>-            pNew = new EditCharAttrib( rNew, nS, nE );	// Attrib is only for holding XML information...
>+            pNew = new EditCharAttrib( rNew, nS, nE );	// Attribute is only for holding XML information...
>         }
>         break;
>         case EE_FEATURE_TAB:
>@@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ EditCharAttrib* MakeCharAttrib( SfxItemPool& rPool, const SfxPoolItem& rAttr, US
>         break;
>         default:
>         {
>-            DBG_ERROR( "Ungueltiges Attribut!" );
>+            DBG_ERROR( "Invalid Attribute!" );
>         }
>     }
>     return pNew;
>@@ -417,7 +417,8 @@ EditLine::EditLine()
>     DBG_CTOR( EE_EditLine, 0 );
> 
>     nStart = nEnd = 0;
>-    nStartPortion = 0;				// damit in ungueltiger Zeile ohne Portions von einer gueltigen Zeile mit der Portion Nr0 unterscieden werden kann.
>+    nStartPortion = 0;  // to be able to tell the difference between a line 
>+                        // without Ptorions form one with the Portion number 0
>     nEndPortion = 0;
>     nHeight = 0;
>     nStartPosX = 0;
>@@ -514,7 +515,7 @@ Size EditLine::CalcTextSize( ParaPortion& rParaPortion )
> 
>     USHORT nIndex = GetStart();
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rParaPortion.GetTextPortions().Count(), "GetTextSize vor CreatePortions !" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rParaPortion.GetTextPortions().Count(), "GetTextSize before CreatePortions !" );
> 
>     for ( USHORT n = nStartPortion; n <= nEndPortion; n++ )
>     {
>@@ -584,7 +585,7 @@ USHORT EditLineList::FindLine( USHORT nChar, BOOL bInclEnd )
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !bInclEnd, "Zeile nicht gefunden: FindLine" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !bInclEnd, "Line not found: FindLine" );
>     return ( Count() - 1 );
> }
> 
>@@ -619,15 +620,15 @@ EditSelection::EditSelection()
> 
> EditSelection::EditSelection( const EditPaM& rStartAndAnd )
> {
>-    // koennte noch optimiert werden!
>-    // nicht erst Def-CTOR vom PaM rufen!
>+    // could still be optimized!
>+    // do no first call the Def-constructor from PaM!
>     aStartPaM = rStartAndAnd;
>     aEndPaM = rStartAndAnd;
> }
> 
> EditSelection::EditSelection( const EditPaM& rStart, const EditPaM& rEnd )
> {
>-    // koennte noch optimiert werden!
>+    // could still be optimized!
>     aStartPaM = rStart;
>     aEndPaM = rEnd;
> }
>@@ -654,8 +655,8 @@ BOOL EditSelection::IsInvalid() const
> 
> BOOL EditSelection::Adjust( const ContentList& rNodes )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( aStartPaM.GetIndex() <= aStartPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "Index im Wald in Adjust(1)" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( aEndPaM.GetIndex() <= aEndPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "Index im Wald in Adjust(2)" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( aStartPaM.GetIndex() <= aStartPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "Index out of range in Adjust(1)" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( aEndPaM.GetIndex() <= aEndPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "Index out of range in Adjust(2)" );
> 
>     ContentNode* pStartNode = aStartPaM.GetNode();
>     ContentNode* pEndNode = aEndPaM.GetNode();
>@@ -663,8 +664,8 @@ BOOL EditSelection::Adjust( const ContentList& rNodes )
>     USHORT nStartNode = rNodes.GetPos( pStartNode );
>     USHORT nEndNode = rNodes.GetPos( pEndNode );
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nStartNode != USHRT_MAX, "Node im Wald in Adjust(1)" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nEndNode != USHRT_MAX, "Node im Wald in Adjust(2)" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nStartNode != USHRT_MAX, "Node out of range in Adjust(1)" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nEndNode != USHRT_MAX, "Node out of range in Adjust(2)" );
> 
>     BOOL bSwap = FALSE;
>     if ( nStartNode > nEndNode )
>@@ -739,14 +740,12 @@ void ContentNode::ExpandAttribs( USHORT nIndex, USHORT nNew, SfxItemPool& rItemP
>     if ( !nNew )
>         return;
> 
>-    // Da Features anders behandelt werden als normale Zeichenattribute,
>-    // kann sich hier auch die Sortierung der Start-Liste aendern!
>-    // In jedem if..., in dem weiter (n) Moeglichkeiten aufgrund von
>-    // bFeature oder Spezialfall existieren,
>-    // muessen (n-1) Moeglichkeiten mit bResort versehen werden.
>-    // Die wahrscheinlichste Moeglichkeit erhaelt kein bResort,
>-    // so dass nicht neu sortiert wird, wenn sich alle Attribute
>-    // gleich verhalten.
>+    // Since features are treated differently than normal character attributes,
>+    // can also the order of the start list be change! 
>+    // In every if ...,  in the next (n) opportunities due to bFeature or 
>+    // an existing special case, must (n-1) opportunities be provided with 
>+    // bResort. The most likely possibility receives no bResort, so that is 
>+    // not sorted anew when all attributes are the same.
>     BOOL bResort = FALSE;
>     BOOL bExpandedEmptyAtIndexNull = FALSE;
> 
>@@ -756,29 +755,30 @@ void ContentNode::ExpandAttribs( USHORT nIndex, USHORT nNew, SfxItemPool& rItemP
>     {
>         if ( pAttrib->GetEnd() >= nIndex )
>         {
>-            // Alle Attribute hinter der Einfuegeposition verschieben...
>+            // Move all attributes behind the insertion point...
>             if ( pAttrib->GetStart() > nIndex )
>             {
>                 pAttrib->MoveForward( nNew );
>             }
>-            // 0: Leeres Attribut expandieren, wenn an Einfuegestelle
>+            // 0: Expand empty attribute, if at insertion point
>             else if ( pAttrib->IsEmpty() )
>             {
>-                // Index nicht pruefen, leeres durfte nur dort liegen.
>-                // Wenn spaeter doch Ueberpruefung:
>-                //   Spezialfall: Start == 0; AbsLen == 1, nNew = 1 => Expand, weil durch Absatzumbruch!
>+                // Do not check Index, a emty one could only be there
>+                // When later checking it anyhow:
>+                //   Special caase: Start == 0; AbsLen == 1, nNew = 1 
>+                // => Expand, because of paragraph break!
>                 // Start <= nIndex, End >= nIndex => Start=End=nIndex!
> //				if ( pAttrib->GetStart() == nIndex )
>                 pAttrib->Expand( nNew );
>                 if ( pAttrib->GetStart() == 0 )
>                     bExpandedEmptyAtIndexNull = TRUE;
>             }
>-            // 1: Attribut startet davor, geht bis Index...
>-            else if ( pAttrib->GetEnd() == nIndex ) // Start muss davor liegen
>+            // 1: Attribute starts before, goes to index ...
>+            else if ( pAttrib->GetEnd() == nIndex ) // Start must be before
>             {
>-                // Nur expandieren, wenn kein Feature,
>-                // und wenn nicht in ExcludeListe!
>-                // Sonst geht z.B. ein UL bis zum neuen ULDB, beide expandieren
>+                // Only expand when there is no feature
>+                // and if not in exclude list!
>+                // Otherwise, a UL will go on until a new ULDB, expaning both
> //				if ( !pAttrib->IsFeature() && !rExclList.FindAttrib( pAttrib->Which() ) )
>                 if ( !pAttrib->IsFeature() && !aCharAttribList.FindEmptyAttrib( pAttrib->Which(), nIndex ) )
>                 {
>@@ -788,13 +788,13 @@ void ContentNode::ExpandAttribs( USHORT nIndex, USHORT nNew, SfxItemPool& rItemP
>                 else
>                     bResort = TRUE;
>             }
>-            // 2: Attribut startet davor, geht hinter Index...
>+            // 2: Attribute starts before, goes past the Index...
>             else if ( ( pAttrib->GetStart() < nIndex ) && ( pAttrib->GetEnd() > nIndex ) )
>             {
>-                DBG_ASSERT( !pAttrib->IsFeature(), "Grosses Feature?!" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( !pAttrib->IsFeature(), "Large Feature?!" );
>                 pAttrib->Expand( nNew );
>             }
>-            // 3: Attribut startet auf Index...
>+            // 3: Attribute starts on index...
>             else if ( pAttrib->GetStart() == nIndex )
>             {
>                 if ( pAttrib->IsFeature() )
>@@ -842,11 +842,11 @@ void ContentNode::ExpandAttribs( USHORT nIndex, USHORT nNew, SfxItemPool& rItemP
> 
>         DBG_ASSERT( !pAttrib->IsFeature() || ( pAttrib->GetLen() == 1 ), "Expand: FeaturesLen != 1" );
> 
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pAttrib->GetStart() <= pAttrib->GetEnd(), "Expand: Attribut verdreht!" );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( ( pAttrib->GetEnd() <= Len() ), "Expand: Attrib groesser als Absatz!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pAttrib->GetStart() <= pAttrib->GetEnd(), "Expand: Attribute distorted!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( ( pAttrib->GetEnd() <= Len() ), "Expand: Attribute larger than paragraph!" );
>         if ( pAttrib->IsEmpty() )
>         {
>-            DBG_ERROR( "Leeres Attribut nach ExpandAttribs?" );
>+            DBG_ERROR( "Empty Attribute after ExpandAttribs?" );
>             bResort = TRUE;
>             aCharAttribList.GetAttribs().Remove( nAttr );
>             rItemPool.Remove( *pAttrib->GetItem() );
>@@ -869,7 +869,7 @@ void ContentNode::ExpandAttribs( USHORT nIndex, USHORT nNew, SfxItemPool& rItemP
> #endif // !SVX_LIGHT
> 
> #ifdef EDITDEBUG
>-    DBG_ASSERT( CheckOrderedList( aCharAttribList.GetAttribs(), TRUE ), "Expand: Start-Liste verdreht" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( CheckOrderedList( aCharAttribList.GetAttribs(), TRUE ), "Expand: Start List distorted" );
> #endif
> }
> 
>@@ -878,8 +878,8 @@ void ContentNode::CollapsAttribs( USHORT nIndex, USHORT nDeleted, SfxItemPool& r
>     if ( !nDeleted )
>         return;
> 
>-    // Da Features anders behandelt werden als normale Zeichenattribute,
>-    // kann sich hier auch die Sortierung der Start-Liste aendern!
>+    // Since features are treated differently than normal character attributes,
>+    // can also the order of the start list be change! 
>     BOOL bResort = FALSE;
>     BOOL bDelAttr = FALSE;
>     USHORT nEndChanges = nIndex+nDeleted;
>@@ -891,34 +891,34 @@ void ContentNode::CollapsAttribs( USHORT nIndex, USHORT nDeleted, SfxItemPool& r
>         bDelAttr = FALSE;
>         if ( pAttrib->GetEnd() >= nIndex )
>         {
>-            // Alles Attribute hinter der Einfuegeposition verschieben...
>+            // Move all Attribute behind the insert point...
>             if ( pAttrib->GetStart() >= nEndChanges )
>             {
>                 pAttrib->MoveBackward( nDeleted );
>             }
>-            // 1. Innenliegende Attribute loeschen...
>+            // 1. Delete Internal attributes...
>             else if ( ( pAttrib->GetStart() >= nIndex ) && ( pAttrib->GetEnd() <= nEndChanges ) )
>             {
>-                // Spezialfall: Attrubt deckt genau den Bereich ab
>-                // => als leeres Attribut behalten.
>+                // Special case: Attribute covers the area exactly 
>+                // => keep as empty Attribute.
>                 if ( !pAttrib->IsFeature() && ( pAttrib->GetStart() == nIndex ) && ( pAttrib->GetEnd() == nEndChanges ) )
>-                    pAttrib->GetEnd() = nIndex;	// leer
>+                    pAttrib->GetEnd() = nIndex;	// empty
>                 else
>                     bDelAttr = TRUE;
>             }
>-            // 2. Attribut beginnt davor, endet drinnen oder dahinter...
>+            // 2. Attribute starts earlier, ends inside or behind it ...
>             else if ( ( pAttrib->GetStart() <= nIndex ) && ( pAttrib->GetEnd() > nIndex ) )
>             {
>                 DBG_ASSERT( !pAttrib->IsFeature(), "Collapsing Feature!" );
>-                if ( pAttrib->GetEnd() <= nEndChanges )	// endet drinnen
>+                if ( pAttrib->GetEnd() <= nEndChanges )	// ends inside
>                     pAttrib->GetEnd() = nIndex;
>                 else
>-                    pAttrib->Collaps( nDeleted );		// endet dahinter
>+                    pAttrib->Collaps( nDeleted );		// ends behind
>             }
>-            // 3. Attribut beginnt drinnen, endet dahinter...
>+            // 3. Attribute starts inside, ending behind ...
>             else if ( ( pAttrib->GetStart() >= nIndex ) && ( pAttrib->GetEnd() > nEndChanges ) )
>             {
>-                // Features duerfen nicht expandieren!
>+                // Features not allowed to expand!
>                 if ( pAttrib->IsFeature() )
>                 {
>                     pAttrib->MoveBackward( nDeleted );
>@@ -933,8 +933,8 @@ void ContentNode::CollapsAttribs( USHORT nIndex, USHORT nDeleted, SfxItemPool& r
>         }
>         DBG_ASSERT( !pAttrib->IsFeature() || ( pAttrib->GetLen() == 1 ), "Expand: FeaturesLen != 1" );
> 
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pAttrib->GetStart() <= pAttrib->GetEnd(), "Collaps: Attribut verdreht!" );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( ( pAttrib->GetEnd() <= Len()) || bDelAttr, "Collaps: Attrib groesser als Absatz!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pAttrib->GetStart() <= pAttrib->GetEnd(), "Collaps: Attribut distorted!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( ( pAttrib->GetEnd() <= Len()) || bDelAttr, "Collaps: Attribute larger than paragraph!" );
>         if ( bDelAttr /* || pAttrib->IsEmpty() */ )
>         {
>             bResort = TRUE;
>@@ -959,13 +959,13 @@ void ContentNode::CollapsAttribs( USHORT nIndex, USHORT nDeleted, SfxItemPool& r
> #endif // !SVX_LIGHT
> 
> #ifdef EDITDEBUG
>-    DBG_ASSERT( CheckOrderedList( aCharAttribList.GetAttribs(), TRUE ), "Collaps: Start-Liste verdreht" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( CheckOrderedList( aCharAttribList.GetAttribs(), TRUE ), "Collaps: Start list distorted" );
> #endif
> }
> 
> void ContentNode::CopyAndCutAttribs( ContentNode* pPrevNode, SfxItemPool& rPool, BOOL bKeepEndingAttribs )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPrevNode, "kopieren von Attributen auf einen NULL-Pointer ?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPrevNode, "Copy of attributes to a null pointer?" );
> 
>     xub_StrLen nCut = pPrevNode->Len();
> 
>@@ -975,32 +975,31 @@ void ContentNode::CopyAndCutAttribs( ContentNode* pPrevNode, SfxItemPool& rPool,
>     {
>         if ( pAttrib->GetEnd() < nCut )
>         {
>-            // bleiben unveraendert....
>+            // remain unchanged ....
>             ;
>         }
>         else if ( pAttrib->GetEnd() == nCut )
>         {
>-            // muessen als leeres Attribut kopiert werden.
>+            // must be copied as an empty attributes.
>             if ( bKeepEndingAttribs && !pAttrib->IsFeature() && !aCharAttribList.FindAttrib( pAttrib->GetItem()->Which(), 0 ) )
>             {
>                 EditCharAttrib* pNewAttrib = MakeCharAttrib( rPool, *(pAttrib->GetItem()), 0, 0 );
>-                DBG_ASSERT( pNewAttrib, "MakeCharAttrib fehlgeschlagen!" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( pNewAttrib, "MakeCharAttrib failed!" );
>                 aCharAttribList.InsertAttrib( pNewAttrib );
>             }
>         }
>         else if ( pAttrib->IsInside( nCut ) || ( !nCut && !pAttrib->GetStart() && !pAttrib->IsFeature() ) )
>         {
>-            // Wenn ganz vorne gecuttet wird, muss das Attribut erhalten bleiben!
>-            // muessen kopiert und geaendert werden
>+            // If cut is done right at the front then the attribute must be 
>+            // kept! Has to be copied and changed.
>             EditCharAttrib* pNewAttrib = MakeCharAttrib( rPool, *(pAttrib->GetItem()), 0, pAttrib->GetEnd()-nCut );
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pNewAttrib, "MakeCharAttrib fehlgeschlagen!" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pNewAttrib, "MakeCharAttrib failed!" );
>             aCharAttribList.InsertAttrib( pNewAttrib );
>-            // stutzen:
>             pAttrib->GetEnd() = nCut;
>         }
>         else
>         {
>-            // alle dahinter verschieben in den neuen Node (this)
>+            // Move all attributes in the current node (this)
> //			pPrevNode->GetCharAttribs().RemoveAttrib( pAttrib );
>             pPrevNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs().Remove( nAttr );
>             aCharAttribList.InsertAttrib( pAttrib );
>@@ -1017,23 +1016,23 @@ void ContentNode::CopyAndCutAttribs( ContentNode* pPrevNode, SfxItemPool& rPool,
> 
> void ContentNode::AppendAttribs( ContentNode* pNextNode )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNextNode, "kopieren von Attributen von einen NULL-Pointer ?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNextNode, "Copy of attributes to a null pointer?" );
> 
>     USHORT nNewStart = Len();
> 
> #ifdef EDITDEBUG
>-    DBG_ASSERT( aCharAttribList.DbgCheckAttribs(), "Attribute VOR AppendAttribs kaputt" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( aCharAttribList.DbgCheckAttribs(), "Attribute before AppendAttribs broken" );
> #endif
> 
>     USHORT nAttr = 0;
>     EditCharAttrib* pAttrib = GetAttrib( pNextNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs(), nAttr );
>     while ( pAttrib )
>     {
>-        // alle Attribute verschieben in den aktuellen Node (this)
>+        // Move all attributes in the current node (this)
>         BOOL bMelted = FALSE;
>         if ( ( pAttrib->GetStart() == 0 ) && ( !pAttrib->IsFeature() ) )
>         {
>-            // Evtl koennen Attribute zusammengefasst werden:
>+            // Attributes can possibly be summarized as:
>             USHORT nTmpAttr = 0;
>             EditCharAttrib* pTmpAttrib = GetAttrib( aCharAttribList.GetAttribs(), nTmpAttr );
>             while ( !bMelted && pTmpAttrib )
>@@ -1046,7 +1045,7 @@ void ContentNode::AppendAttribs( ContentNode* pNextNode )
>                         pTmpAttrib->GetEnd() =
>                             pTmpAttrib->GetEnd() + pAttrib->GetLen();
>                         pNextNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs().Remove( nAttr );
>-                        // Vom Pool abmelden ?!
>+                        // Unsubscribe from the pool?!
>                         delete pAttrib;
>                         bMelted = TRUE;
>                     }
>@@ -1065,22 +1064,22 @@ void ContentNode::AppendAttribs( ContentNode* pNextNode )
>         }
>         pAttrib = GetAttrib( pNextNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs(), nAttr );
>     }
>-    // Fuer die Attribute, die nur ruebergewandert sind:
>+    // For the Attributes that just moved over:
>     pNextNode->GetCharAttribs().Clear();
> 
> #ifdef EDITDEBUG
>-    DBG_ASSERT( aCharAttribList.DbgCheckAttribs(), "Attribute NACH AppendAttribs kaputt" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( aCharAttribList.DbgCheckAttribs(), "Attribute after AppendAttribs broken" );
> #endif
> }
> 
> void ContentNode::CreateDefFont()
> {
>-    // Erst alle Informationen aus dem Style verwenden...
>+    // First use the information from the style ...
>     SfxStyleSheet* pS = aContentAttribs.GetStyleSheet();
>     if ( pS )
>         CreateFont( GetCharAttribs().GetDefFont(), pS->GetItemSet() );
> 
>-    // ... dann die harte Absatzformatierung rueberbuegeln...
>+    // ... then iron out the hard paragraph formatting...
>     CreateFont( GetCharAttribs().GetDefFont(),
>         GetContentAttribs().GetItems(), pS == NULL );
> }
>@@ -1089,9 +1088,10 @@ void ContentNode::SetStyleSheet( SfxStyleSheet* pS, const SvxFont& rFontFromStyl
> {
>     aContentAttribs.SetStyleSheet( pS );
> 
>-    // Erst alle Informationen aus dem Style verwenden...
>+
>+    // First use the information from the style ...
>     GetCharAttribs().GetDefFont() = rFontFromStyle;
>-    // ... dann die harte Absatzformatierung rueberbuegeln...
>+    // ... then iron out the hard paragraph formatting...
>     CreateFont( GetCharAttribs().GetDefFont(),
>         GetContentAttribs().GetItems(), pS == NULL );
> }
>@@ -1113,7 +1113,7 @@ void ContentNode::DestroyWrongList()
> 
> void ContentNode::CreateWrongList()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !pWrongList, "WrongList existiert schon!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !pWrongList, "WrongList already exist!" );
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>     pWrongList = new WrongList;
> #endif
>@@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@ void ContentNode::CreateWrongList()
> 
> void ContentNode::SetWrongList( WrongList* p )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !pWrongList, "WrongList existiert schon!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !pWrongList, "WrongList already exist!" );
>     pWrongList = p;
> }
> 
>@@ -1154,7 +1154,7 @@ SvxTabStop ContentAttribs::FindTabStop( long nCurPos, USHORT nDefTab )
>             return rTab;
>     }
> 
>-    // DefTab ermitteln...
>+    // Determine DefTab ...
>     SvxTabStop aTabStop;
>     long x = nCurPos / nDefTab + 1;
>     aTabStop.GetTabPos() = nDefTab * x;
>@@ -1165,15 +1165,16 @@ void ContentAttribs::SetStyleSheet( SfxStyleSheet* pS )
> {
>     BOOL bStyleChanged = ( pStyle != pS );
>     pStyle = pS;
>-    // #104799# Only when other style sheet, not when current style sheet modified
>+    // Only when other style sheet, not when current style sheet modified
>     if ( pStyle && bStyleChanged )
>     {
>-        // Gezielt die Attribute aus der Absatzformatierung entfernen, die im Style
>-        // spezifiziert sind, damit die Attribute des Styles wirken koennen.
>+        // Selectively remove the attributes from the paragraph formatting 
>+        // which are specified in the style, so that the attributes of the 
>+        // style can have an affect.
>         const SfxItemSet& rStyleAttribs = pStyle->GetItemSet();
>         for ( USHORT nWhich = EE_PARA_START; nWhich <= EE_CHAR_END; nWhich++ )
>         {
>-            // #99635# Don't change bullet on/off
>+            // Don't change bullet on/off
>             if ( ( nWhich != EE_PARA_BULLETSTATE ) && ( rStyleAttribs.GetItemState( nWhich ) == SFX_ITEM_ON ) )
>                 aAttribSet.ClearItem( nWhich );
>         }
>@@ -1182,7 +1183,7 @@ void ContentAttribs::SetStyleSheet( SfxStyleSheet* pS )
> 
> const SfxPoolItem& ContentAttribs::GetItem( USHORT nWhich )
> {
>-    // Harte Absatzattribute haben Vorrang!
>+    // Hard paragraph attributes take precedence!
>     SfxItemSet* pTakeFrom = &aAttribSet;
>     if ( pStyle && ( aAttribSet.GetItemState( nWhich, FALSE ) != SFX_ITEM_ON  ) )
>         pTakeFrom = &pStyle->GetItemSet();
>@@ -1353,12 +1354,12 @@ void CreateFont( SvxFont& rFont, const SfxItemSet& rSet, bool bSearchInParent, s
>     if ( bSearchInParent || ( rSet.GetItemState( EE_CHAR_RELIEF ) == SFX_ITEM_ON ) )
>         rFont.SetRelief( (FontRelief)((const SvxCharReliefItem&)rSet.Get( EE_CHAR_RELIEF )).GetValue() );
> 
>-    // Ob ich jetzt den ganzen Font vergleiche, oder vor jeder Aenderung
>-    // pruefe, ob der Wert sich aendert, bleibt sich relativ gleich.
>-    // So ggf ein MakeUniqFont im Font mehr, dafuer bei Aenderung schnellerer
>-    // Abbruch der Abfrage, oder ich musste noch jedesmal ein bChanged pflegen.
>+    // If comparing the entire font, or if checking before each alteration 
>+    // whether the value changes, remains relatively the same thing. 
>+    // So possible one MakeUniqFont more in the font, but as a result a quicker
>+    // abortion of the query, or one must each time check bChanged.    
>     if ( rFont == aPrevFont  )
>-        rFont = aPrevFont;	// => Gleicher ImpPointer fuer IsSameInstance
>+        rFont = aPrevFont;	// => The same ImpPointer for IsSameInstance
> }
> 
> void EditDoc::CreateDefFont( BOOL bUseStyles )
>@@ -1405,7 +1406,7 @@ XubString EditDoc::GetText( LineEnd eEnd ) const
>         nLen += nNodes * nSepSize;
>     if ( nLen > 0xFFFb / sizeof(xub_Unicode) )
>     {
>-        DBG_ERROR( "Text zu gross fuer String" );
>+        DBG_ERROR( "Text to large for String" );
>         return XubString();
>     }
>     xub_Unicode* pStr = new xub_Unicode[nLen+1];
>@@ -1438,7 +1439,7 @@ XubString EditDoc::GetParaAsString( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStartPos, USHORT
>     if ( nEndPos > pNode->Len() )
>         nEndPos = pNode->Len();
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nStartPos <= nEndPos, "Start und Ende vertauscht?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nStartPos <= nEndPos, "Start and End reversed?" );
> 
>     USHORT nIndex = nStartPos;
>     XubString aStr;
>@@ -1449,9 +1450,9 @@ XubString EditDoc::GetParaAsString( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStartPos, USHORT
>         if ( pNextFeature && ( pNextFeature->GetStart() < nEnd ) )
>             nEnd = pNextFeature->GetStart();
>         else
>-            pNextFeature = 0;	// Feature interessiert unten nicht
>+            pNextFeature = 0;	// Feature does not interest the below
> 
>-        DBG_ASSERT( nEnd >= nIndex, "Ende vorm Index?" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( nEnd >= nIndex, "End in front of the index?" );
>         //!! beware of sub string length  of -1 which is also defined as STRING_LEN and
>         //!! thus would result in adding the whole sub string up to the end of the node !!
>         if (nEnd > nIndex)
>@@ -1468,7 +1469,7 @@ XubString EditDoc::GetParaAsString( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStartPos, USHORT
>                 case EE_FEATURE_FIELD:	if ( bResolveFields )
>                                             aStr += ((EditCharAttribField*)pNextFeature)->GetFieldValue();
>                 break;
>-                default:	DBG_ERROR( "Was fuer ein Feature ?" );
>+                default:	DBG_ERROR( "What feature?" );
>             }
>             pNextFeature = pNode->GetCharAttribs().FindFeature( ++nEnd );
>         }
>@@ -1528,7 +1529,7 @@ void EditDoc::SetModified( BOOL b )
> 
> EditPaM EditDoc::RemoveText()
> {
>-    // Das alte ItemSetmerken, damit z.B. im Chart Font behalten bleibt
>+    // Keep the old ItemSet, to keep the chart Font.
>     ContentNode* pPrevFirstNode = GetObject(0);
>     SfxStyleSheet* pPrevStyle = pPrevFirstNode->GetStyleSheet();
>     SfxItemSet aPrevSet( pPrevFirstNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItems() );
>@@ -1551,9 +1552,9 @@ EditPaM EditDoc::RemoveText()
> 
> void EditDoc::InsertText( const EditPaM& rPaM, xub_Unicode c )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( c != 0x0A, "EditDoc::InsertText: Zeilentrenner in Absatz nicht erlaubt!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( c != 0x0D, "EditDoc::InsertText: Zeilentrenner in Absatz nicht erlaubt!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( c != '\t', "EditDoc::InsertText: Zeilentrenner in Absatz nicht erlaubt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( c != 0x0A, "EditDoc::InsertText: Newlines prohibited in paragraph!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( c != 0x0D, "EditDoc::InsertText: Newlines prohibited in paragraph!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( c != '\t', "EditDoc::InsertText: Newlines prohibited in paragraph!" );
> 
>     rPaM.GetNode()->Insert( c, rPaM.GetIndex() );
>     rPaM.GetNode()->ExpandAttribs( rPaM.GetIndex(), 1, GetItemPool() );
>@@ -1563,9 +1564,9 @@ void EditDoc::InsertText( const EditPaM& rPaM, xub_Unicode c )
> 
> EditPaM EditDoc::InsertText( EditPaM aPaM, const XubString& rStr )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( 0x0A ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "EditDoc::InsertText: Zeilentrenner in Absatz nicht erlaubt!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( 0x0D ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "EditDoc::InsertText: Zeilentrenner in Absatz nicht erlaubt!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( '\t' ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "EditDoc::InsertText: Zeilentrenner in Absatz nicht erlaubt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( 0x0A ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "EditDoc::InsertText: Newlines prohibited in paragraph!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( 0x0D ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "EditDoc::InsertText: Newlines prohibited in paragraph!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( '\t' ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "EditDoc::InsertText: Newlines prohibited in paragraph!" );
>     DBG_ASSERT( aPaM.GetNode(), "Blinder PaM in EditDoc::InsertText1" );
> 
>     aPaM.GetNode()->Insert( rStr, aPaM.GetIndex() );
>@@ -1591,10 +1592,10 @@ EditPaM EditDoc::InsertParaBreak( EditPaM aPaM, BOOL bKeepEndingAttribs )
>     // for a new paragraph we like to have the bullet/numbering visible by default
>     aContentAttribs.GetItems().Put( SfxBoolItem( EE_PARA_BULLETSTATE, TRUE), EE_PARA_BULLETSTATE );
> 
>-    // ContenNode-CTOR kopiert auch die Absatzattribute
>+    // ContenNode constructor copies also the paragraph attributes
>     ContentNode* pNode = new ContentNode( aStr, aContentAttribs );
> 
>-    // Den Default-Font kopieren
>+    // Copy the Default Font
>     pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetDefFont() = aPaM.GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().GetDefFont();
>     SfxStyleSheet* pStyle = aPaM.GetNode()->GetStyleSheet();
>     if ( pStyle )
>@@ -1607,7 +1608,7 @@ EditPaM EditDoc::InsertParaBreak( EditPaM aPaM, BOOL bKeepEndingAttribs )
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // Zeichenattribute muessen ggf. kopiert bzw gestutzt werden:
>+    // Character attributes may need to be copied or trimmed:
>     pNode->CopyAndCutAttribs( aPaM.GetNode(), GetItemPool(), bKeepEndingAttribs );
> 
>     Insert( pNode, nPos+1 );
>@@ -1626,9 +1627,9 @@ EditPaM EditDoc::InsertFeature( EditPaM aPaM, const SfxPoolItem& rItem  )
>     aPaM.GetNode()->Insert( CH_FEATURE, aPaM.GetIndex() );
>     aPaM.GetNode()->ExpandAttribs( aPaM.GetIndex(), 1, GetItemPool() );
> 
>-    // Fuer das Feature ein Feature-Attribut anlegen...
>+    // Create a feature-attribute for the feature...
>     EditCharAttrib* pAttrib = MakeCharAttrib( GetItemPool(), rItem, aPaM.GetIndex(), aPaM.GetIndex()+1 );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pAttrib, "Warum kann ich kein Feature anlegen ?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pAttrib, "Why can not the feature be created?" );
>     aPaM.GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().InsertAttrib( pAttrib );
> 
>     SetModified( TRUE );
>@@ -1641,12 +1642,12 @@ EditPaM EditDoc::ConnectParagraphs( ContentNode* pLeft, ContentNode* pRight )
> {
>     const EditPaM aPaM( pLeft, pLeft->Len() );
> 
>-    // Erst die Attribute, da sonst nLen nicht stimmt!
>+    // First the attributes, otherwise nLen will not be correct!
>     pLeft->AppendAttribs( pRight );
>-    // Dann den Text...
>+    // then the Text...
>     *pLeft += *pRight;
> 
>-    // der rechte verschwindet.
>+    // the one to the right disappears.
>     RemoveItemsFromPool( pRight );
>     USHORT nRight = GetPos( pRight );
>     Remove( nRight );
>@@ -1659,7 +1660,7 @@ EditPaM EditDoc::ConnectParagraphs( ContentNode* pLeft, ContentNode* pRight )
> 
> EditPaM EditDoc::RemoveChars( EditPaM aPaM, USHORT nChars )
> {
>-    // Evtl. Features entfernen!
>+    // Maybe remove Features!
>     aPaM.GetNode()->Erase( aPaM.GetIndex(), nChars );
>     aPaM.GetNode()->CollapsAttribs( aPaM.GetIndex(), nChars, GetItemPool() );
> 
>@@ -1670,16 +1671,16 @@ EditPaM EditDoc::RemoveChars( EditPaM aPaM, USHORT nChars )
> 
> void EditDoc::InsertAttribInSelection( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd, const SfxPoolItem& rPoolItem )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Wohin mit dem Attribut?" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nEnd <= pNode->Len(), "InsertAttrib: Attribut zu gross!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "What to do with the attribute?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nEnd <= pNode->Len(), "InsertAttrib: Attribute to large!" );
> 
>-    // fuer Optimierung:
>-    // dieses endet am Anfang der Selektion => kann erweitert werden
>+    // for Optimization:
>+    // This ends at the beginning of the selection => can be expanded
>     EditCharAttrib* pEndingAttrib = 0;
>-    // dieses startet am Ende der Selektion => kann erweitert werden
>+    // This starts at the end of the selection => can be expanded
>     EditCharAttrib* pStartingAttrib = 0;
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nStart <= nEnd, "Kleiner Rechenfehler in InsertAttribInSelection" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nStart <= nEnd, "Small miscalculations in InsertAttribInSelection" );
> 
>     RemoveAttribs( pNode, nStart, nEnd, pStartingAttrib, pEndingAttrib, rPoolItem.Which() );
> 
>@@ -1687,7 +1688,7 @@ void EditDoc::InsertAttribInSelection( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStart, USHORT
>          ( *(pStartingAttrib->GetItem()) == rPoolItem ) &&
>          ( *(pEndingAttrib->GetItem()) == rPoolItem ) )
>     {
>-        // wird ein groesses Attribut.
>+        // Will become a large Attribute.
>         pEndingAttrib->GetEnd() = pStartingAttrib->GetEnd();
>         GetItemPool().Remove( *(pStartingAttrib->GetItem()) );
>         pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs().Remove( pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs().GetPos( pStartingAttrib ) );
>@@ -1715,65 +1716,62 @@ BOOL EditDoc::RemoveAttribs( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd, USH
> 
> BOOL EditDoc::RemoveAttribs( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd, EditCharAttrib*& rpStarting, EditCharAttrib*& rpEnding, USHORT nWhich )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Wohin mit dem Attribut?" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nEnd <= pNode->Len(), "InsertAttrib: Attribut zu gross!" );
> 
>-    // dieses endet am Anfang der Selektion => kann erweitert werden
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "What to do with the attribute?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nEnd <= pNode->Len(), "InsertAttrib: Attribute to large!" );
>+
>+    // This ends at the beginning of the selection => can be expanded
>     rpEnding = 0;
>-    // dieses startet am Ende der Selektion => kann erweitert werden
>+    // This starts at the end of the selection => can be expanded
>     rpStarting = 0;
> 
>     BOOL bChanged = FALSE;
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nStart <= nEnd, "Kleiner Rechenfehler in InsertAttribInSelection" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nStart <= nEnd, "Small miscalculations in InsertAttribInSelection" );
> 
>-    // ueber die Attribute iterieren...
>+    // iterate over the attributes ...
>     USHORT nAttr = 0;
>     EditCharAttrib* pAttr = GetAttrib( pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs(), nAttr );
>     while ( pAttr )
>     {
>         BOOL bRemoveAttrib = FALSE;
>-        // MT 11.9.97:
>-        // Ich denke dass in dieser Methode generell keine Features geloescht
>-        // werden sollen.
>-        // => Dann koennen die Feature-Abfragen weiter unten entfallen
>         USHORT nAttrWhich = pAttr->Which();
>         if ( ( nAttrWhich < EE_FEATURE_START ) && ( !nWhich || ( nAttrWhich == nWhich ) ) )
>         {
>-            // Attribut beginnt in Selection
>+            // Attribute starts in Selection
>             if ( ( pAttr->GetStart() >= nStart ) && ( pAttr->GetStart() <= nEnd ) )
>             {
>                 bChanged = TRUE;
>                 if ( pAttr->GetEnd() > nEnd )
>                 {
>-                    pAttr->GetStart() = nEnd;	// dann faengt es dahinter an
>+                    pAttr->GetStart() = nEnd;	// then it starts after this
>                     rpStarting = pAttr;
>                     if ( nWhich )
>-                        break;	// es kann kein weiteres Attrib hier liegen
>+                        break;	// There can be no further attributes here
>                 }
>                 else if ( !pAttr->IsFeature() || ( pAttr->GetStart() == nStart ) )
>                 {
>-                    // Feature nur loeschen, wenn genau an der Stelle
>+                    // Delete feature only if on the exact spot
>                     bRemoveAttrib = TRUE;
>                 }
>             }
> 
>-            // Attribut endet in Selection
>+            // Attribute ends in Selection
>             else if ( ( pAttr->GetEnd() >= nStart ) && ( pAttr->GetEnd() <= nEnd ) )
>             {
>                 bChanged = TRUE;
>                 if ( ( pAttr->GetStart() < nStart ) && !pAttr->IsFeature() )
>                 {
>-                    pAttr->GetEnd() = nStart;	// dann hoert es hier auf
>+                    pAttr->GetEnd() = nStart;	// then it ends here
>                     rpEnding = pAttr;
>                 }
>                 else if ( !pAttr->IsFeature() || ( pAttr->GetStart() == nStart ) )
>                 {
>-                    // Feature nur loeschen, wenn genau an der Stelle
>+                    // Delete feature only if on the exact spot
>                     bRemoveAttrib = TRUE;
>                 }
>             }
>-            // Attribut ueberlappt die Selektion
>+            // Attribute overlaps the selection
>             else if ( ( pAttr->GetStart() <= nStart ) && ( pAttr->GetEnd() >= nEnd ) )
>             {
>                 bChanged = TRUE;
>@@ -1782,29 +1780,29 @@ BOOL EditDoc::RemoveAttribs( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd, Edi
>                     pAttr->GetStart() = nEnd;
>                     rpStarting = pAttr;
>                     if ( nWhich )
>-                        break;	// es kann weitere Attribute geben!
>+                        break;	// There can be further attributes!
>                 }
>                 else if ( pAttr->GetEnd() == nEnd )
>                 {
>                     pAttr->GetEnd() = nStart;
>                     rpEnding = pAttr;
>                     if ( nWhich )
>-                        break;	// es kann weitere Attribute geben!
>+                        break;	// There can be further attributes!
>                 }
>-                else // Attribut muss gesplittet werden...
>+                else // Attribute must be split ...
>                 {
>                     USHORT nOldEnd = pAttr->GetEnd();
>                     pAttr->GetEnd() = nStart;
>                     rpEnding = pAttr;
>                     InsertAttrib( *pAttr->GetItem(), pNode, nEnd, nOldEnd );
>                     if ( nWhich )
>-                        break;	// es kann weitere Attribute geben!
>+                        break;	// There can be further attributes!
>                 }
>             }
>         }
>         if ( bRemoveAttrib )
>         {
>-            DBG_ASSERT( ( pAttr != rpStarting ) && ( pAttr != rpEnding ), "Loeschen und behalten des gleichen Attributs ?" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( ( pAttr != rpStarting ) && ( pAttr != rpEnding ), "Delete and retain the same attribute?" );
>             DBG_ASSERT( !pAttr->IsFeature(), "RemoveAttribs: Remove a feature?!" );
>             pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs().Remove(nAttr);
>             GetItemPool().Remove( *pAttr->GetItem() );
>@@ -1828,11 +1826,10 @@ BOOL EditDoc::RemoveAttribs( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd, Edi
> 
> void EditDoc::InsertAttrib( const SfxPoolItem& rPoolItem, ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd )
> {
>-    // Diese Methode prueft nicht mehr, ob ein entspr. Attribut
>-    // schon an der Stelle existiert!
>-
>+    // This method no longer checks whether a corresponding attribute already 
>+    // exists at this place!
>     EditCharAttrib* pAttrib = MakeCharAttrib( GetItemPool(), rPoolItem, nStart, nEnd );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pAttrib, "MakeCharAttrib fehlgeschlagen!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pAttrib, "MakeCharAttrib failed!" );
>     pNode->GetCharAttribs().InsertAttrib( pAttrib );
> 
>     SetModified( TRUE );
>@@ -1846,23 +1843,23 @@ void EditDoc::InsertAttrib( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd, cons
>     }
>     else
>     {
>-        // Pruefen, ob schon ein neues Attribut mit der WhichId an der Stelle:
>+        // Check whether already a new attribute with WhichId exists at this place:
>         EditCharAttrib* pAttr = pNode->GetCharAttribs().FindEmptyAttrib( rPoolItem.Which(), nStart );
>         if ( pAttr )
>         {
>-            // Attribut entfernen....
>+            // Remove attribute....
>             pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs().Remove(
>                 pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs().GetPos( pAttr ) );
>         }
> 
>-        // pruefen, ob ein 'gleiches' Attribut an der Stelle liegt.
>+        // check whether 'the same' attribute exist at this place.
>         pAttr = pNode->GetCharAttribs().FindAttrib( rPoolItem.Which(), nStart );
>         if ( pAttr )
>         {
>-            if ( pAttr->IsInside( nStart ) )	// splitten
>+            if ( pAttr->IsInside( nStart ) )	// split
>             {
>                 // ???????????????????????????????
>-                // eigentlich noch pruefen, ob wirklich splittet, oder return !
>+                // check again if really splitting, or return !
>                 // ???????????????????????????????
>                 USHORT nOldEnd = pAttr->GetEnd();
>                 pAttr->GetEnd() = nStart;
>@@ -1871,8 +1868,8 @@ void EditDoc::InsertAttrib( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd, cons
>             }
>             else if ( pAttr->GetEnd() == nStart )
>             {
>-                DBG_ASSERT( !pAttr->IsEmpty(), "Doch noch ein leeres Attribut?" );
>-                // pruefen, ob genau das gleiche Attribut
>+                DBG_ASSERT( !pAttr->IsEmpty(), "Still an empty attribute?" );
>+                // Check if exactly the same attribute
>                 if ( *(pAttr->GetItem()) == rPoolItem )
>                     return;
>             }
>@@ -1885,35 +1882,35 @@ void EditDoc::InsertAttrib( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd, cons
> 
> void EditDoc::FindAttribs( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStartPos, USHORT nEndPos, SfxItemSet& rCurSet )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Wo soll ich suchen ?" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nStartPos <= nEndPos, "Ungueltiger Bereich!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Where to search?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nStartPos <= nEndPos, "Invalid region!" );
> 
>     USHORT nAttr = 0;
>     EditCharAttrib* pAttr = GetAttrib( pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs(), nAttr );
>-    // keine Selection...
>+    // No Selection...
>     if ( nStartPos == nEndPos )
>     {
>         while ( pAttr && ( pAttr->GetStart() <= nEndPos) )
>         {
>             const SfxPoolItem* pItem = 0;
>-            // Attribut liegt dadrueber...
>+            // Attribute is about...
>             if ( ( pAttr->GetStart() < nStartPos ) && ( pAttr->GetEnd() > nStartPos ) )
>                 pItem = pAttr->GetItem();
>-            // Attribut endet hier, ist nicht leer
>+            // Attribute ending here is not empty
>             else if ( ( pAttr->GetStart() < nStartPos ) && ( pAttr->GetEnd() == nStartPos ) )
>             {
>                 if ( !pNode->GetCharAttribs().FindEmptyAttrib( pAttr->GetItem()->Which(), nStartPos ) )
>                     pItem = pAttr->GetItem();
>             }
>-            // Attribut endet hier, ist leer
>+            // Attribute ending here is empty
>             else if ( ( pAttr->GetStart() == nStartPos ) && ( pAttr->GetEnd() == nStartPos ) )
>             {
>                 pItem = pAttr->GetItem();
>             }
>-            // Attribut beginnt hier
>+            // Attribute starts here
>             else if ( ( pAttr->GetStart() == nStartPos ) && ( pAttr->GetEnd() > nStartPos ) )
>             {
>-                if ( nStartPos == 0 ) 	// Sonderfall
>+                if ( nStartPos == 0 ) 	// special case
>                     pItem = pAttr->GetItem();
>             }
> 
>@@ -1937,40 +1934,33 @@ void EditDoc::FindAttribs( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStartPos, USHORT nEndPos,
>             pAttr = GetAttrib( pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs(), nAttr );
>         }
>     }
>-    else	// Selektion
>+    else	// Selection
>     {
>         while ( pAttr && ( pAttr->GetStart() < nEndPos) )
>         {
>             const SfxPoolItem* pItem = 0;
>-            // Attribut liegt dadrueber...
>+            // Attribut is about...
>             if ( ( pAttr->GetStart() <= nStartPos ) && ( pAttr->GetEnd() >= nEndPos ) )
>                 pItem = pAttr->GetItem();
>-            // Attribut startet mitten drin...
>+            // Attribute starts right in the middle ...
>             else if ( pAttr->GetStart() >= nStartPos )
>             {
>                 // !!! pItem = pAttr->GetItem();
>-                // einfach nur pItem reicht nicht, da ich z.B. bei Shadow
>-                // niemals ein ungleiches Item finden wuerde, da ein solche
>-                // seine Anwesenheit durch Abwesenheit repraesentiert!
>-                // if ( ... )
>-                // Es muesste geprueft werden, on genau das gleiche Attribut
>-                // an der Bruchstelle aufsetzt, was recht aufwendig ist.
>-                // Da ich beim Einfuegen von Attributen aber etwas optimiere
>-                // tritt der Fall nicht so schnell auf...
>-                // Also aus Geschwindigkeitsgruenden:
>+                // PItem is simply not enough, since one for example in case
>+                // of Shadow, would never find an unequal item, since such a
>+                // item represents its presence by absence! 
>+                // If (...) 
>+                // It needs to be examined on exactly the same attribute at the
>+                // breaki point, which is quite expensive. 
>+                // Since optimazation is done when inserting the  attributes 
>+                // this case does not appear so fast ... 
>+                // So based on the need for speed:
>                 rCurSet.InvalidateItem( pAttr->GetItem()->Which() );
> 
>             }
>-            // Attribut endet mitten drin...
>+            // Attribute ends in the middle of it ...
>             else if ( pAttr->GetEnd() > nStartPos )
>             {
>-                // pItem = pAttr->GetItem();
>-                // s.o.
>-                /* Ist falsch, wenn das gleiche Attribut sofort wieder
>-                   eingestellt wird!
>-                   => Sollte am besten nicht vorkommen, also gleich beim
>-                      Setzen von Attributen richtig machen!
>-                */
>                 rCurSet.InvalidateItem( pAttr->GetItem()->Which() );
>             }
> 
>@@ -2025,18 +2015,16 @@ CharAttribList::~CharAttribList()
> void CharAttribList::InsertAttrib( EditCharAttrib* pAttrib )
> {
> // !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
>-// optimieren: binaere Suche ? !
>+// optimize: binary search?    !
> // !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
> 
>-    // MT: 26.11.98
>-    // Vielleicht aber auch einfach nur rueckwaerts iterieren:
>-    // Der haeufigste und kritischste Fall: Attribute kommen bereits
>-    // sortiert an (InsertBinTextObject!)
>-    // Hier waere auch binaere Suche nicht optimal.
>-    // => Wuerde einiges bringen!
>+    // Maybe just simply iterate backwards:
>+    // The most common and critical case: Attributes are already sorted 
>+    // (InsertBinTextObject!) binary search would not be optimal here.
>+    // => Would bring something!
> 
>     const USHORT nCount = Count();
>-    const USHORT nStart = pAttrib->GetStart(); // vielleicht besser fuer Comp.Opt.
>+    const USHORT nStart = pAttrib->GetStart(); // may be better for Comp.Opt.
> 
>     if ( pAttrib->IsEmpty() )
>         bHasEmptyAttribs = TRUE;
>@@ -2099,8 +2087,8 @@ void CharAttribList::OptimizeRanges( SfxItemPool& rItemPool )
> 
> EditCharAttrib* CharAttribList::FindAttrib( USHORT nWhich, USHORT nPos )
> {
>-    // Rueckwaerts, falls eins dort endet, das naechste startet.
>-    // => Das startende gilt...
>+    // Backwards, if one ends where the next starts. 
>+    // => The starting one is the valid one ...
>     USHORT nAttr = aAttribs.Count()-1;
>     EditCharAttrib* pAttr = GetAttrib( aAttribs, nAttr );
>     while ( pAttr )
>@@ -2151,8 +2139,8 @@ BOOL CharAttribList::HasAttrib( USHORT nStartPos, USHORT nEndPos ) const
> 
> BOOL CharAttribList::HasBoundingAttrib( USHORT nBound )
> {
>-    // Rueckwaerts, falls eins dort endet, das naechste startet.
>-    // => Das startende gilt...
>+    // Backwards, if one ends where the next starts. 
>+    // => The starting one is the valid one ...
>     USHORT nAttr = aAttribs.Count()-1;
>     EditCharAttrib* pAttr = GetAttrib( aAttribs, nAttr );
>     while ( pAttr && ( pAttr->GetEnd() >= nBound ) )
>@@ -2186,14 +2174,14 @@ EditCharAttrib*	CharAttribList::FindFeature( USHORT nPos ) const
>     USHORT nAttr = 0;
>     EditCharAttrib* pNextAttrib = GetAttrib( aAttribs, nAttr );
> 
>-    // erstmal zur gewuenschten Position...
>+    // first to the desired position ...
>     while ( pNextAttrib && ( pNextAttrib->GetStart() < nPos ) )
>     {
>         nAttr++;
>         pNextAttrib = GetAttrib( aAttribs, nAttr );
>     }
> 
>-    // jetzt das Feature suchen...
>+    // Now search for the Feature...
>     while ( pNextAttrib && !pNextAttrib->IsFeature() )
>     {
>         nAttr++;
>@@ -2230,7 +2218,7 @@ BOOL CharAttribList::DbgCheckAttribs()
>         if ( pAttr->GetStart() > pAttr->GetEnd() )
>         {
>             bOK = FALSE;
>-            DBG_ERROR( "Attr verdreht" );
>+            DBG_ERROR( "Attribute is distorted" );
>         }
>         else if ( pAttr->IsFeature() && ( pAttr->GetLen() != 1 ) )
>         {
>@@ -2269,7 +2257,7 @@ ULONG SvxFontTable::GetId( const SvxFontItem& rFontItem )
>             return GetCurKey();
>         pItem = Next();
>     }
>-    DBG_WARNING( "Font nicht gefunden: GetId()" );
>+    DBG_WARNING( "Font not found: GetId()" );
>     return 0;
> }
> 
>@@ -2290,7 +2278,7 @@ size_t SvxColorList::GetId( const SvxColorItem& rColorItem )
>     for ( size_t i = 0, n = aColorList.size(); i < n; ++i )
>         if ( *aColorList[ i ] == rColorItem )
>             return i;
>-    DBG_WARNING( "Color nicht gefunden: GetId()" );
>+    DBG_WARNING( "Color not found: GetId()" );
>     return 0;
> }
> 
>@@ -2335,11 +2323,11 @@ EditEngineItemPool::~EditEngineItemPool()
> 
> SvStream& EditEngineItemPool::Store( SvStream& rStream ) const
> {
>-    // Bei einem 3.1-Export muess ein Hack eingebaut werden, da BUG im
>-    // SfxItemSet::Load, aber nicht nachtraeglich in 3.1 fixbar.
>+    // for a 3.1 export a hack has to be installed, as in there is a BUG in
>+    // SfxItemSet::Load, but not subsequently after 3.1.
> 
>-    // Der eingestellte Range muss nach Store erhalten bleiben, weil dann
>-    // erst die ItemSets gespeichert werden...
>+    // The selected range must be kept after Store, because itemsets are not 
>+    // stored until then...
> 
>     long nVersion = rStream.GetVersion();
>     BOOL b31Format = ( nVersion && ( nVersion <= SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_31 ) )
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc.hxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc.hxx
>index de2d99a..8f9ab61 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc.hxx
>@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ private:
> public:
>                     ContentAttribs( SfxItemPool& rItemPool );
>                     ContentAttribs( const ContentAttribs& );
>-                    ~ContentAttribs();	// erst bei umfangreicheren Tabs
>+                    ~ContentAttribs();	// only for larger Tabs
> 
>     SvxTabStop		FindTabStop( long nCurPos, USHORT nDefTab );
>     SfxItemSet&		GetItems()							{ return aAttribSet; }
>@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ class CharAttribList
> {
> private:
>     CharAttribArray	aAttribs;
>-    SvxFont			aDefFont;				// schneller, als jedesmal vom Pool!
>+    SvxFont			aDefFont;	       // faster than ever from the pool!
>     BOOL			bHasEmptyAttribs;
> 
>                     CharAttribList( const CharAttribList& ) {;}
>@@ -465,16 +465,16 @@ private:
>     CharPosArray	aPositions;
>     long            nTxtWidth;
>     USHORT			nStartPosX;
>-    USHORT			nStart;		// koennte durch nStartPortion ersetzt werden
>-    USHORT			nEnd;       // koennte durch nEndPortion ersetzt werden
>+    USHORT			nStart;		// could be replaced by nStartPortion
>+    USHORT			nEnd;       // could be replaced by nEndPortion
>     USHORT			nStartPortion;
>     USHORT 			nEndPortion;
>-    USHORT			nHeight;	// Gesamthoehe der Zeile
>-    USHORT			nTxtHeight;	// Reine Texthoehe
>-    USHORT			nCrsrHeight;	// Bei Konturfluss hohe Zeilen => Cursor zu groá.
>+    USHORT			nHeight;	//  Total height of the line
>+    USHORT			nTxtHeight;	// Pure Text height
>+    USHORT			nCrsrHeight;	// For contour flow high lines => cursor is large.
>     USHORT			nMaxAscent;
>     BOOL			bHangingPunctuation;
>-    BOOL			bInvalid;	// fuer geschickte Formatierung
>+    BOOL			bInvalid;	// for skillful formatting
> 
> public:
>                     EditLine();
>@@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ public:
> // -------------------------------------------------------------------------
> class ParaPortion
> {
>-    friend class ImpEditEngine;	// zum Einstellen der Hoehe
>+    friend class ImpEditEngine;	// to adjust the height
> private:
>     EditLineList		aLineList;
>     TextPortionList		aTextPortionList;
>@@ -578,13 +578,13 @@ private:
>     WritingDirectionInfos   aWritingDirectionInfos;
> 
>     USHORT				nInvalidPosStart;
>-    USHORT				nFirstLineOffset;	// Fuer Writer-LineSpacing-Interpretation
>+    USHORT				nFirstLineOffset;	// For Writer-LineSpacing-Interpretation
>     USHORT				nBulletX;
>     short				nInvalidDiff;
> 
>     BOOL				bInvalid 			: 1;
>-    BOOL				bSimple				: 1;	// nur lineares Tippen
>-    BOOL				bVisible			: 1;	// MT 05/00: Gehoert an den Node!!!
>+    BOOL				bSimple				: 1;	// only linear Tap
>+    BOOL				bVisible			: 1;	// Belongs to the node!
>     BOOL				bForceRepaint		: 1;
> 
>                         ParaPortion( const ParaPortion& );
>@@ -650,7 +650,7 @@ public:
> 
>     USHORT                  GetPos( const ParaPortionPtr &rPtr ) const;
> 
>-    // temporaer:
>+    // temporary:
>     void			DbgCheck( EditDoc& rDoc );
> };
> 
>@@ -664,7 +664,8 @@ private:
>     EditPaM 		aEndPaM;
> 
> public:
>-                    EditSelection();	// kein CCTOR und DTOR, geht autom. richtig!
>+                    EditSelection();	// No constructor and destructor 
>+                                        // are automtically excecuted correctly!
>                     EditSelection( const EditPaM& rStartAndAnd );
>                     EditSelection( const EditPaM& rStart, const EditPaM& rEnd );
> 
>@@ -717,7 +718,7 @@ private:
>     SfxItemPool*	pItemPool;
>     Link            aModifyHdl;
> 
>-    SvxFont			aDefFont;			//schneller, als jedesmal vom Pool!
>+    SvxFont			aDefFont;			//faster than ever from the pool!!
>     USHORT			nDefTab;
>     BOOL			bIsVertical;
>     BOOL			bIsFixedCellHeight;
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc2.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc2.cxx
>index 71077d0..fd89554 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc2.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editdoc2.cxx
>@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@
> #include <editeng/wrlmitem.hxx>
> #include <editeng/charscaleitem.hxx>
> 
>-#include <vcl/svapp.hxx>	// Fuer AppWindow...
>+#include <vcl/svapp.hxx>	// For AppWindow...
> 
> DBG_NAME( EE_ParaPortion )
> 
>@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ void TextPortionList::DeleteFromPortion( USHORT nDelFrom )
> 
> USHORT TextPortionList::FindPortion( USHORT nCharPos, USHORT& nPortionStart, BOOL bPreferStartingPortion )
> {
>-    // Bei nCharPos an Portion-Grenze wird die linke Portion gefunden
>+    // When nCharPos at portion limit, the left portion is found
>     USHORT nTmpPos = 0;
>     for ( USHORT nPortion = 0; nPortion < Count(); nPortion++ )
>     {
>@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ USHORT TextPortionList::FindPortion( USHORT nCharPos, USHORT& nPortionStart, BOO
>             }
>         }
>     }
>-    DBG_ERROR( "FindPortion: Nicht gefunden!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "FindPortion: Not found!" );
>     return ( Count() - 1 );
> }
> 
>@@ -217,13 +217,13 @@ void ParaPortion::MarkInvalid( USHORT nStart, short nDiff )
>     }
>     else
>     {
>-        // Einfaches hintereinander tippen
>+        // Simple tap in succession
>         if ( ( nDiff > 0 ) && ( nInvalidDiff > 0 ) &&
>              ( ( nInvalidPosStart+nInvalidDiff ) == nStart ) )
>         {
>             nInvalidDiff = nInvalidDiff + nDiff;
>         }
>-        // Einfaches hintereinander loeschen
>+        // Simple delete in succession
>         else if ( ( nDiff < 0 ) && ( nInvalidDiff < 0 ) && ( nInvalidPosStart == nStart ) )
>         {
>             nInvalidPosStart = nInvalidPosStart + nDiff;
>@@ -266,8 +266,8 @@ void ParaPortion::MarkSelectionInvalid( USHORT nStart, USHORT /* nEnd */ )
> 
> USHORT ParaPortion::GetLineNumber( USHORT nIndex )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERTWARNING( aLineList.Count(), "Leere ParaPortion in GetLine!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( bVisible, "Wozu GetLine() bei einem unsichtbaren Absatz?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERTWARNING( aLineList.Count(), "Empty ParaPortion in GetLine!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( bVisible, "Why GetLine() on an invisible paragraph?" );
> 
>     for ( USHORT nLine = 0; nLine < aLineList.Count(); nLine++ )
>     {
>@@ -275,8 +275,8 @@ USHORT ParaPortion::GetLineNumber( USHORT nIndex )
>             return nLine;
>     }
> 
>-    // Dann sollte es am Ende der letzten Zeile sein!
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nIndex == aLineList[ aLineList.Count() - 1 ]->GetEnd(), "Index voll daneben!" );
>+    // Then it should be at the end of the last line!
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nIndex == aLineList[ aLineList.Count() - 1 ]->GetEnd(), "Index dead wrong!" );
>     return (aLineList.Count()-1);
> }
> 
>@@ -288,19 +288,19 @@ void ParaPortion::SetVisible( BOOL bMakeVisible )
> void ParaPortion::CorrectValuesBehindLastFormattedLine( USHORT nLastFormattedLine )
> {
>     USHORT nLines = aLineList.Count();
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nLines, "CorrectPortionNumbersFromLine: Leere Portion?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nLines, "CorrectPortionNumbersFromLine: Empty Portion?" );
>     if ( nLastFormattedLine < ( nLines - 1 ) )
>     {
>         const EditLine* pLastFormatted = aLineList[ nLastFormattedLine ];
>         const EditLine* pUnformatted = aLineList[ nLastFormattedLine+1 ];
>         short nPortionDiff = pUnformatted->GetStartPortion() - pLastFormatted->GetEndPortion();
>         short nTextDiff = pUnformatted->GetStart() - pLastFormatted->GetEnd();
>-        nTextDiff++;	// LastFormatted->GetEnd() war incl. => 1 zuviel abgezogen!
>+        nTextDiff++;	// LastFormatted->GetEnd() was included => 1 deducted too much!
> 
>-        // Die erste unformatierte muss genau eine Portion hinter der letzten der
>-        // formatierten beginnen:
>-        // Wenn in der geaenderten Zeile eine Portion gesplittet wurde,
>-        // kann nLastEnd > nNextStart sein!
>+        // The first unformatted must begin exactly one Portion behind the last
>+        // of the formatted: 
>+        // If the modified line was split into one portion, can 
>+        // nLastEnd > nNextStart!
>         int nPDiff = -( nPortionDiff-1 );
>         int nTDiff = -( nTextDiff-1 );
>         if ( nPDiff || nTDiff )
>@@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ void ParaPortion::CorrectValuesBehindLastFormattedLine( USHORT nLastFormattedLin
>             }
>         }
>     }
>-    DBG_ASSERT( aLineList[ aLineList.Count()-1 ]->GetEnd() == pNode->Len(), "CorrectLines: Ende stimmt nicht!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( aLineList[ aLineList.Count()-1 ]->GetEnd() == pNode->Len(), "CorrectLines: The end is not right!" );
> }
> 
> // Shared reverse lookup acceleration pieces ...
>@@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ long ParaPortionList::GetYOffset( ParaPortion* pPPortion )
>             return nHeight;
>         nHeight += pTmpPortion->GetHeight();
>     }
>-    DBG_ERROR( "GetYOffset: Portion nicht gefunden" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "GetYOffset: Portion not found" );
>     return nHeight;
> }
> 
>@@ -410,11 +410,11 @@ USHORT ParaPortionList::FindParagraph( long nYOffset )
>     long nY = 0;
>     for ( USHORT nPortion = 0; nPortion < Count(); nPortion++ )
>     {
>-        nY += GetObject(nPortion)->GetHeight(); // sollte auch bei !bVisible richtig sein!
>+        nY += GetObject(nPortion)->GetHeight(); // should also be correct even in bVisible!
>         if ( nY > nYOffset )
>             return nPortion;
>     }
>-    return 0xFFFF;	// solte mal ueber EE_PARA_NOT_FOUND erreicht werden!
>+    return 0xFFFF;	// Should be reachable through EE_PARA_NOT_FOUND!
> }
> 
> void ParaPortionList::DbgCheck( EditDoc&
>@@ -424,12 +424,12 @@ void ParaPortionList::DbgCheck( EditDoc&
>                                 )
> {
> #ifdef DBG_UTIL
>-    DBG_ASSERT( Count() == rDoc.Count(), "ParaPortionList::DbgCheck() - Count() ungleich!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( Count() == rDoc.Count(), "ParaPortionList::DbgCheck() - Count() unequal!" );
>     for ( USHORT i = 0; i < Count(); i++ )
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERT( SaveGetObject(i), "ParaPortionList::DbgCheck() - Null-Pointer in Liste!" );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( GetObject(i)->GetNode(), "ParaPortionList::DbgCheck() - Null-Pointer in Liste(2)!" );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( GetObject(i)->GetNode() == rDoc.GetObject(i), "ParaPortionList::DbgCheck() - Eintraege kreuzen sich!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( SaveGetObject(i), "ParaPortionList::DbgCheck() - Null-Pointer in List!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( GetObject(i)->GetNode(), "ParaPortionList::DbgCheck() - Null-Pointer in List(2)!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( GetObject(i)->GetNode() == rDoc.GetObject(i), "ParaPortionList::DbgCheck() - Entries intersect!" );
>     }
> #endif
> }
>@@ -449,17 +449,17 @@ void ConvertItem( SfxPoolItem& rPoolItem, MapUnit eSourceUnit, MapUnit eDestUnit
>     {
>         case EE_PARA_LRSPACE:
>         {
>-            DBG_ASSERT( rPoolItem.IsA( TYPE( SvxLRSpaceItem ) ), "ConvertItem: Ungueltiges Item!" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( rPoolItem.IsA( TYPE( SvxLRSpaceItem ) ), "ConvertItem: invalid Item!" );
>             SvxLRSpaceItem& rItem = (SvxLRSpaceItem&)rPoolItem;
>             rItem.SetTxtFirstLineOfst( sal::static_int_cast< short >( OutputDevice::LogicToLogic( rItem.GetTxtFirstLineOfst(), eSourceUnit, eDestUnit ) ) );
>             rItem.SetTxtLeft( OutputDevice::LogicToLogic( rItem.GetTxtLeft(), eSourceUnit, eDestUnit ) );
>-//			rItem.SetLeft( OutputDevice::LogicToLogic( rItem.GetLeft(), eSourceUnit, eDestUnit ) ); // #96298# SetLeft manipulates nTxtLeft!
>+//			rItem.SetLeft( OutputDevice::LogicToLogic( rItem.GetLeft(), eSourceUnit, eDestUnit ) ); 
>             rItem.SetRight( OutputDevice::LogicToLogic( rItem.GetRight(), eSourceUnit, eDestUnit ) );
>         }
>         break;
>         case EE_PARA_ULSPACE:
>         {
>-            DBG_ASSERT( rPoolItem.IsA( TYPE( SvxULSpaceItem ) ), "ConvertItem: Ungueltiges Item!" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( rPoolItem.IsA( TYPE( SvxULSpaceItem ) ), "ConvertItem: Invalid Item!" );
>             SvxULSpaceItem& rItem = (SvxULSpaceItem&)rPoolItem;
>             rItem.SetUpper( sal::static_int_cast< USHORT >( OutputDevice::LogicToLogic( rItem.GetUpper(), eSourceUnit, eDestUnit ) ) );
>             rItem.SetLower( sal::static_int_cast< USHORT >( OutputDevice::LogicToLogic( rItem.GetLower(), eSourceUnit, eDestUnit ) ) );
>@@ -467,16 +467,16 @@ void ConvertItem( SfxPoolItem& rPoolItem, MapUnit eSourceUnit, MapUnit eDestUnit
>         break;
>         case EE_PARA_SBL:
>         {
>-            DBG_ASSERT( rPoolItem.IsA( TYPE( SvxLineSpacingItem ) ), "ConvertItem: Ungueltiges Item!" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( rPoolItem.IsA( TYPE( SvxLineSpacingItem ) ), "ConvertItem: Invalid Item!" );
>             SvxLineSpacingItem& rItem = (SvxLineSpacingItem&)rPoolItem;
>-            // #96298# SetLineHeight changes also eLineSpace!
>+            // SetLineHeight changes also eLineSpace!
>             if ( rItem.GetLineSpaceRule() == SVX_LINE_SPACE_MIN )
>                 rItem.SetLineHeight( sal::static_int_cast< USHORT >( OutputDevice::LogicToLogic( rItem.GetLineHeight(), eSourceUnit, eDestUnit ) ) );
>         }
>         break;
>         case EE_PARA_TABS:
>         {
>-            DBG_ASSERT( rPoolItem.IsA( TYPE( SvxTabStopItem ) ), "ConvertItem: Ungueltiges Item!" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( rPoolItem.IsA( TYPE( SvxTabStopItem ) ), "ConvertItem: Invalid Item!" );
>             SvxTabStopItem& rItem = (SvxTabStopItem&)rPoolItem;
>             SvxTabStopItem aNewItem( EE_PARA_TABS );
>             for ( USHORT i = 0; i < rItem.Count(); i++ )
>@@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ void ConvertItem( SfxPoolItem& rPoolItem, MapUnit eSourceUnit, MapUnit eDestUnit
>         case EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT_CJK:
>         case EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT_CTL:
>         {
>-            DBG_ASSERT( rPoolItem.IsA( TYPE( SvxFontHeightItem ) ), "ConvertItem: Ungueltiges Item!" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( rPoolItem.IsA( TYPE( SvxFontHeightItem ) ), "ConvertItem: Invalid Item!" );
>             SvxFontHeightItem& rItem = (SvxFontHeightItem&)rPoolItem;
>             rItem.SetHeight( OutputDevice::LogicToLogic( rItem.GetHeight(), eSourceUnit, eDestUnit ) );
>         }
>@@ -507,7 +507,7 @@ void ConvertAndPutItems( SfxItemSet& rDest, const SfxItemSet& rSource, const Map
> 
>     for ( USHORT nWhich = EE_PARA_START; nWhich <= EE_CHAR_END; nWhich++ )
>     {
>-        // Wenn moeglich ueber SlotID gehen...
>+        // If possible go through SlotID ...
> 
>         USHORT nSourceWhich = nWhich;
>         USHORT nSlot = pDestPool->GetTrueSlotId( nWhich );
>@@ -537,8 +537,6 @@ void ConvertAndPutItems( SfxItemSet& rDest, const SfxItemSet& rSource, const Map
>         }
>         else
>         {
>-            // MT 3.3.99: Waere so eigentlich richtig, aber schon seit Jahren nicht so...
>-//			rDest.ClearItem( nWhich );
>         }
>     }
> }
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editeng.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editeng.cxx
>index 3b9b25e..7fb6f72 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editeng.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editeng.cxx
>@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@
> #endif
> #include <basegfx/polygon/b2dpolygon.hxx>
> 
>-// Spaeter -> TOOLS\STRING.H (fuer Grep: WS_TARGET)
>+// later -> TOOLS\STRING.H (for Grep: WS_TARGET)
> 
> using namespace ::com::sun::star;
> using namespace ::com::sun::star::uno;
>@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ SV_IMPL_VARARR( EECharAttribArray, EECharAttrib );
> 
> static SfxItemPool* pGlobalPool=0;
> 
>-// ----------------------------------------------------------------------
>+// ----------------------------------------------------------------------
> // EditEngine
> // ----------------------------------------------------------------------
> EditEngine::EditEngine( SfxItemPool* pItemPool )
>@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ SfxUndoManager& EditEngine::GetUndoManager()
> void EditEngine::UndoActionStart( sal_uInt16 nId )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !pImpEditEngine->IsInUndo(), "Aufruf von UndoActionStart im Undomodus!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !pImpEditEngine->IsInUndo(), "Calling UndoActionStart in Undomode!" );
>     if ( !pImpEditEngine->IsInUndo() )
>         pImpEditEngine->UndoActionStart( nId );
> }
>@@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ void EditEngine::UndoActionStart( sal_uInt16 nId )
> void EditEngine::UndoActionEnd( sal_uInt16 nId )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !pImpEditEngine->IsInUndo(), "Aufruf von UndoActionEnd im Undomodus!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !pImpEditEngine->IsInUndo(), "Calling UndoActionStart in Undomode!" );
>     if ( !pImpEditEngine->IsInUndo() )
>         pImpEditEngine->UndoActionEnd( nId );
> }
>@@ -254,8 +254,8 @@ void EditEngine::Draw( OutputDevice* pOutDev, const Rectangle& rOutRect )
> void EditEngine::Draw( OutputDevice* pOutDev, const Point& rStartPos, short nOrientation )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>-    // Mit 2 Punkten erzeugen, da bei Positivem Punkt, LONGMAX als Size
>-    // Bottom und Right im Bereich > LONGMAX landen.
>+    // Create with 2 points, as with positive points it will end up with 
>+    // LONGMAX as Size, Bottom and Right in the range > LONGMAX.
>     Rectangle aBigRec( -0x3FFFFFFF, -0x3FFFFFFF, 0x3FFFFFFF, 0x3FFFFFFF );
>     if( pOutDev->GetConnectMetaFile() )
>         pOutDev->Push();
>@@ -284,8 +284,8 @@ void EditEngine::Draw( OutputDevice* pOutDev, const Rectangle& rOutRect, const P
>         EditDbg::ShowEditEngineData( this, sal_False );
> #endif
> 
>-    // Auf Pixelgrenze ausrichten, damit genau das gleiche
>-    // wie bei Paint().
>+    // Align to the pixel boundary, so that it becomes exactly the same 
>+    // as Paint ().
>     Rectangle aOutRect( pOutDev->LogicToPixel( rOutRect ) );
>     aOutRect = pOutDev->PixelToLogic( aOutRect );
> 
>@@ -321,12 +321,12 @@ void EditEngine::Draw( OutputDevice* pOutDev, const Rectangle& rOutRect, const P
>     }
> #endif
> 
>-    // Wenn es eine gab => Schnittmenge !
>-    // Bei der Metafileaufzeichnung Push/Pop verwenden.
>+    // If one existed => intersection!
>+    // Use Push/pop for creating the Meta file
>     if ( bMetafile )
>         pOutDev->Push();
> 
>-    // Immer die Intersect-Methode, weil beim Metafile ein Muss!
>+    // Always use the Intersect method, it is a must for Metafile!
>     if ( bClip )
>     {
>         // Clip only if neccesary...
>@@ -338,8 +338,8 @@ void EditEngine::Draw( OutputDevice* pOutDev, const Rectangle& rOutRect, const P
>         }
>         else
>         {
>-            // Einige Druckertreiber bereiten Probleme, wenn Buchstaben die
>-            // ClipRegion streifen, deshalb lieber ein Pixel mehr...
>+            // Some printer drivers cause problems if characters graze the 
>+            // ClipRegion, therefore rather add a pixel more ...
>             Rectangle aClipRect( aOutRect );
>             if ( pOutDev->GetOutDevType() == OUTDEV_PRINTER )
>             {
>@@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ EditView* EditEngine::RemoveView( EditView* pView )
>     pView->HideCursor();
>     EditView* pRemoved = 0;
>     sal_uInt16 nPos = pImpEditEngine->GetEditViews().GetPos( pView );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nPos != USHRT_MAX, "RemoveView mit ungueltigem Index" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nPos != USHRT_MAX, "RemoveView with invalid index" );
>     if ( nPos != USHRT_MAX )
>     {
>         pRemoved = pImpEditEngine->GetEditViews().GetObject( nPos );
>@@ -489,16 +489,10 @@ void EditEngine::SetPaperSize( const Size& rNewSize )
> 
>         if ( bAutoPageSize || pImpEditEngine->IsFormatted() )
>         {
>-            // Aendern der Breite hat bei AutoPageSize keine Wirkung, da durch
>-            // Textbreite bestimmt.
>-            // Optimierung erst nach Vobis-Auslieferung aktivieren...
>-//			if ( !bAutoPageSize )
>+            // Changing the width has no effect for AutoPageSize, as this is
>+            // determined by the text width. 
>+            // Optimization first after Vobis delivery was enabled ...
>                 pImpEditEngine->FormatFullDoc();
>-//			else
>-//			{
>-//				pImpEditEngine->FormatDoc();			// PageSize, falls Aenderung
>-//				pImpEditEngine->CheckAutoPageSize();	// Falls nichts formatiert wurde
>-//			}
> 
>             pImpEditEngine->UpdateViews( pImpEditEngine->GetActiveView() );
> 
>@@ -730,7 +724,7 @@ USHORT EditEngine::GetLineNumberAtIndex( USHORT nPara, USHORT nIndex ) const
> sal_uInt32 EditEngine::GetLineHeight( sal_uInt16 nParagraph, sal_uInt16 nLine )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>-    // Falls jemand mit einer leeren Engine ein GetLineHeight() macht.
>+    // If someone calls GetLineHeight() with an empty Engine.
>     if ( !pImpEditEngine->IsFormatted() )
>         pImpEditEngine->FormatDoc();
>     return pImpEditEngine->GetLineHeight( nParagraph, nLine );
>@@ -826,7 +820,7 @@ sal_Bool EditEngine::PostKeyEvent( const KeyEvent& rKeyEvent, EditView* pEditVie
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>     DBG_CHKOBJ( pEditView, EditView, 0 );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pEditView, "Keine View - keine Kekse !" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pEditView, "no View - no cookie !" );
> 
>     sal_Bool bDone = sal_True;
> 
>@@ -866,7 +860,7 @@ sal_Bool EditEngine::PostKeyEvent( const KeyEvent& rKeyEvent, EditView* pEditVie
>             }
>             // break;
> 
>-            default:	// wird dann evtl. unten bearbeitet.
>+            default:	// is then possible edited below.
>                         eFunc = KEYFUNC_DONTKNOW;
>         }
>     }
>@@ -1153,7 +1147,7 @@ sal_Bool EditEngine::PostKeyEvent( const KeyEvent& rKeyEvent, EditView* pEditVie
>                 {
>                     xub_Unicode nCharCode = rKeyEvent.GetCharCode();
>                     pEditView->pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>-                    // Autokorrektur ?
>+                    // Autocorrection?
>                     SvxAutoCorrect*	pAutoCorrect = SvxAutoCorrCfg::Get()->GetAutoCorrect();
>                     if ( ( pImpEditEngine->GetStatus().DoAutoCorrect() ) &&
>                         ( SvxAutoCorrect::IsAutoCorrectChar( nCharCode ) ||
>@@ -1169,7 +1163,7 @@ sal_Bool EditEngine::PostKeyEvent( const KeyEvent& rKeyEvent, EditView* pEditVie
>                     // AutoComplete ???
>                     if ( pImpEditEngine->GetStatus().DoAutoComplete() && ( nCharCode != ' ' ) )
>                     {
>-                        // Aber nur wenn Wort-Ende...
>+                        // Only at end of word...
>                         sal_uInt16 nIndex = aCurSel.Max().GetIndex();
>                         if ( ( nIndex >= aCurSel.Max().GetNode()->Len() ) ||
>                              ( pImpEditEngine->aWordDelimiters.Search( aCurSel.Max().GetNode()->GetChar( nIndex ) ) != STRING_NOTFOUND ) )
>@@ -1266,7 +1260,7 @@ sal_Bool EditEngine::PostKeyEvent( const KeyEvent& rKeyEvent, EditView* pEditVie
>     if ( bModified )
>     {
>         DBG_ASSERT( !bReadOnly, "ReadOnly but modified???" );
>-        // Idle-Formatter nur, wenn AnyInput.
>+        // Idle-Formatter only when AnyInput.
>         if ( bAllowIdle && pImpEditEngine->GetStatus().UseIdleFormatter()
>                 && Application::AnyInput( INPUT_KEYBOARD) )
>             pImpEditEngine->IdleFormatAndUpdate( pEditView );
>@@ -1466,8 +1460,8 @@ EditTextObject*	EditEngine::CreateTextObject( sal_uInt16 nPara, sal_uInt16 nPara
> 
>     ContentNode* pStartNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( nPara );
>     ContentNode* pEndNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( nPara+nParas-1 );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pStartNode, "Start-Absatz existiert nicht: CreateTextObject" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pEndNode, "End-Absatz existiert nicht: CreateTextObject" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pStartNode, "Start-Paragraph does not exist: CreateTextObject" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pEndNode, "End-Paragraph does not exist: CreateTextObject" );
> 
>     if ( pStartNode && pEndNode )
>     {
>@@ -1482,16 +1476,16 @@ EditTextObject*	EditEngine::CreateTextObject( sal_uInt16 nPara, sal_uInt16 nPara
> void EditEngine::RemoveParagraph( sal_uInt16 nPara )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().Count() > 1, "Der erste Absatz darf nicht geloescht werden!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().Count() > 1, "The first paragraph should not be deleted!" );
>     if( pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().Count() <= 1 )
>         return;
> 
>     ContentNode* pNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( nPara );
>     ParaPortion* pPortion = pImpEditEngine->GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nPara );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion && pNode, "Absatz nicht gefunden: RemoveParagraph" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion && pNode, "Paragraph not found: RemoveParagraph" );
>     if ( pNode && pPortion )
>     {
>-        // Keine Undokappselung noetig.
>+        // No Undo encapsulation needed.
>         pImpEditEngine->ImpRemoveParagraph( nPara );
>         pImpEditEngine->InvalidateFromParagraph( nPara );
>         pImpEditEngine->UpdateSelections();
>@@ -1503,7 +1497,7 @@ sal_uInt16 EditEngine::GetTextLen( sal_uInt16 nPara ) const
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>     ContentNode* pNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( nPara );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Absatz nicht gefunden: GetTextLen" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Paragraph not found: GetTextLen" );
>     if ( pNode )
>         return pNode->Len();
>     return 0;
>@@ -1567,16 +1561,16 @@ void EditEngine::InsertParagraph( sal_uInt16 nPara, const EditTextObject& rTxtOb
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>     if ( nPara > GetParagraphCount() )
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERTWARNING( nPara == USHRT_MAX, "AbsatzNr zu Gro???, aber nicht LIST_APPEND! " );
>+        DBG_ASSERTWARNING( nPara == USHRT_MAX, "Paragraph number to large, but not LIST_APPEND!" );
>         nPara = GetParagraphCount();
>     }
> 
>     pImpEditEngine->UndoActionStart( EDITUNDO_INSERT );
> 
>-    // Keine Undoklammerung noetig.
>+    // No Undo componding needed.
>     EditPaM aPaM( pImpEditEngine->InsertParagraph( nPara ) );
>-    // Bei einem InsertParagraph von aussen sollen keine Harten
>-    // Attribute uebernommen werden !
>+    // When InsertParagraph from the outside, no hard attributes 
>+    // should be taken over!
>     pImpEditEngine->RemoveCharAttribs( nPara );
>     pImpEditEngine->InsertText( rTxtObj, EditSelection( aPaM, aPaM ) );
> 
>@@ -1590,14 +1584,14 @@ void EditEngine::InsertParagraph( sal_uInt16 nPara, const XubString& rTxt )
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>     if ( nPara > GetParagraphCount() )
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERTWARNING( nPara == USHRT_MAX, "AbsatzNr zu Gro???, aber nicht LIST_APPEND! " );
>+        DBG_ASSERTWARNING( nPara == USHRT_MAX, "Paragraph number to large, but not LIST_APPEND!" );
>         nPara = GetParagraphCount();
>     }
> 
>     pImpEditEngine->UndoActionStart( EDITUNDO_INSERT );
>     EditPaM aPaM( pImpEditEngine->InsertParagraph( nPara ) );
>-    // Bei einem InsertParagraph von aussen sollen keine Harten
>-    // Attribute uebernommen werden !
>+    // When InsertParagraph from the outside, no hard attributes 
>+    // should be taken over!
>     pImpEditEngine->RemoveCharAttribs( nPara );
>     pImpEditEngine->UndoActionEnd( EDITUNDO_INSERT );
>     pImpEditEngine->ImpInsertText( EditSelection( aPaM, aPaM ), rTxt );
>@@ -1635,7 +1629,6 @@ void EditEngine::SetText( sal_uInt16 nPara, const XubString& rTxt )
> void EditEngine::SetParaAttribs( sal_uInt16 nPara, const SfxItemSet& rSet )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>-    // Keine Undoklammerung noetig.
>     pImpEditEngine->SetParaAttribs( nPara, rSet );
>     pImpEditEngine->FormatAndUpdate();
> }
>@@ -1689,7 +1682,6 @@ void EditEngine::RemoveAttribs( const ESelection& rSelection, sal_Bool bRemovePa
>     pImpEditEngine->FormatAndUpdate();
> }
> 
>-// MT: Can be removed after 6.x?
> Font EditEngine::GetStandardFont( sal_uInt16 nPara )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>@@ -1758,7 +1750,7 @@ void EditEngine::SetControlWord( sal_uInt32 nWord )
>         sal_uInt32 nChanges = nPrev ^ nWord;
>         if ( pImpEditEngine->IsFormatted() )
>         {
>-            // ggf. neu formatieren:
>+            // possibly reformat:
>             if ( ( nChanges & EE_CNTRL_USECHARATTRIBS ) ||
>                  ( nChanges & EE_CNTRL_USEPARAATTRIBS ) ||
>                  ( nChanges & EE_CNTRL_ONECHARPERLINE ) ||
>@@ -1786,7 +1778,7 @@ void EditEngine::SetControlWord( sal_uInt32 nWord )
>             pImpEditEngine->StopOnlineSpellTimer();
>             if ( bSpellingChanged && ( nWord & EE_CNTRL_ONLINESPELLING ) )
>             {
>-                // WrongListen anlegen, Timer starten...
>+                // Create WrongList, start timer...
>                 sal_uInt16 nNodes = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().Count();
>                 for ( sal_uInt16 n = 0; n < nNodes; n++ )
>                 {
>@@ -1805,8 +1797,8 @@ void EditEngine::SetControlWord( sal_uInt32 nWord )
>                     ContentNode* pNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().GetObject( n );
>                     ParaPortion* pPortion = pImpEditEngine->GetParaPortions().GetObject( n );
>                     sal_Bool bWrongs = ( bSpellingChanged || ( nWord & EE_CNTRL_ONLINESPELLING ) ) ? pNode->GetWrongList()->HasWrongs() : sal_False;
>-                    if ( bSpellingChanged ) 		// Also aus
>-                        pNode->DestroyWrongList();  // => vorm Paint weghaun.
>+                    if ( bSpellingChanged ) 		
>+                        pNode->DestroyWrongList();
>                     if ( bWrongs )
>                     {
>                         pImpEditEngine->aInvalidRec.Left() = 0;
>@@ -1860,17 +1852,18 @@ Point EditEngine::GetDocPosTopLeft( sal_uInt16 nParagraph )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>     ParaPortion* pPPortion = pImpEditEngine->GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nParagraph );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Absatz nicht gefunden: GetWindowPosTopLeft" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Paragraph not found: GetWindowPosTopLeft" );
>     Point aPoint;
>     if ( pPPortion )
>     {
>-        // Falls jemand mit einer leeren Engine ein GetLineHeight() macht.
>+        
>+        // If someone calls GetLineHeight() whith an empty Engine.
>         DBG_ASSERT( pImpEditEngine->IsFormatted() || !pImpEditEngine->IsFormatting(), "GetDocPosTopLeft: Doc not formatted - unable to format!" );
>         if ( !pImpEditEngine->IsFormatted() )
>             pImpEditEngine->FormatAndUpdate();
>         if ( pPPortion->GetLines().Count() )
>         {
>-            // So richtiger, falls grosses Bullet.
>+            // Correct it if large Bullet.
>             EditLine* pFirstLine = pPPortion->GetLines()[0];
>             aPoint.X() = pFirstLine->GetStartPosX();
>         }
>@@ -1913,7 +1906,7 @@ sal_Bool EditEngine::IsTextPos( const Point& rPaperPos, sal_uInt16 nBorder )
>         pImpEditEngine->FormatDoc();
> 
>     sal_Bool bTextPos = sal_False;
>-    // #90780# take unrotated positions for calculation here
>+    // take unrotated positions for calculation here
>     Point aDocPos = GetDocPos( rPaperPos );
> 
>     if ( ( aDocPos.Y() > 0  ) && ( aDocPos.Y() < (long)pImpEditEngine->GetTextHeight() ) )
>@@ -2028,7 +2021,7 @@ void EditEngine::QuickFormatDoc( sal_Bool bFull )
>     else
>         pImpEditEngine->FormatDoc();
> 
>-    // #111072# Don't pass active view, maybe selection is not updated yet...
>+    // Don't pass active view, maybe selection is not updated yet...
>     pImpEditEngine->UpdateViews( NULL );
> }
> 
>@@ -2079,7 +2072,7 @@ XubString EditEngine::GetWordDelimiters() const
> void EditEngine::SetGroupChars( const XubString& rChars )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( ( rChars.Len() % 2 ) == 0, "SetGroupChars: Ungerade Anzahl!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( ( rChars.Len() % 2 ) == 0, "SetGroupChars: Odd number!" );
>     pImpEditEngine->aGroupChars = rChars;
> }
> 
>@@ -2352,7 +2345,7 @@ void EditEngine::RemoveFields( sal_Bool bKeepFieldText, TypeId aType )
>                 const SvxFieldData* pFldData = ((const SvxFieldItem*)pAttr->GetItem())->GetField();
>                 if ( pFldData && ( !aType || ( pFldData->IsA( aType ) ) ) )
>                 {
>-                    DBG_ASSERT( pAttr->GetItem()->ISA( SvxFieldItem ), "Kein FeldItem..." );
>+                    DBG_ASSERT( pAttr->GetItem()->ISA( SvxFieldItem ), "no field item..." );
>                     EditSelection aSel( EditPaM( pNode, pAttr->GetStart() ), EditPaM( pNode, pAttr->GetEnd() ) );
>                     String aFieldText = ((EditCharAttribField*)pAttr)->GetFieldValue();
>                     pImpEditEngine->ImpInsertText( aSel, aFieldText );
>@@ -2411,7 +2404,7 @@ Rectangle EditEngine::GetCharacterBounds( const EPosition& rPos ) const
>     Rectangle aBounds;
>     ContentNode* pNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( rPos.nPara );
> 
>-    // #109151# Check against index, not paragraph
>+    // Check against index, not paragraph
>     if ( pNode && ( rPos.nIndex < pNode->Len() ) )
>     {
>         aBounds = pImpEditEngine->PaMtoEditCursor( EditPaM( pNode, rPos.nIndex ), GETCRSR_TXTONLY );
>@@ -2426,7 +2419,7 @@ ParagraphInfos EditEngine::GetParagraphInfos( sal_uInt16 nPara )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
> 
>-    // Funktioniert nur, wenn nicht bereits in der Formatierung...
>+    // This only works if not already in the format ...
>     if ( !pImpEditEngine->IsFormatted() )
>         pImpEditEngine->FormatDoc();
> 
>@@ -2461,7 +2454,7 @@ ParagraphInfos EditEngine::GetParagraphInfos( sal_uInt16 nPara )
> }
> 
> // =====================================================================
>-// ======================   Virtuelle Methoden   =======================
>+// ======================    Virtual Methods    ========================
> // =====================================================================
> void EditEngine::DrawingText( const Point&, const XubString&, USHORT, USHORT,
>     const sal_Int32*, const SvxFont&, sal_uInt16, sal_uInt16, BYTE,
>@@ -2519,7 +2512,7 @@ void EditEngine::ParagraphConnected( USHORT /*nLeftParagraph*/, USHORT /*nRightP
> 
> sal_Bool EditEngine::FormattingParagraph( sal_uInt16 )
> {
>-    // return sal_True, wenn die Attribute geaendert wurden...
>+    // return sal_True, if the Attribute was changed ...
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
>     return sal_False;
> }
>@@ -2621,8 +2614,8 @@ void EditEngine::FieldSelected( const SvxFieldItem&, sal_uInt16, sal_uInt16 )
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditEngine, 0 );
> }
> 
>-// =====================================================================
>-// ======================   Statische Methoden   =======================
>+// =====================================================================
>+// ======================     Static Methods     =======================
> // =====================================================================
> SfxItemPool* EditEngine::CreatePool( sal_Bool bPersistentRefCounts )
> {
>@@ -2739,7 +2732,7 @@ sal_Bool EditEngine::DoesKeyChangeText( const KeyEvent& rKeyEvent )
>             case KEYFUNC_CUT:
>             case KEYFUNC_PASTE:	bDoesChange = sal_True;
>             break;
>-            default:	// wird dann evtl. unten bearbeitet.
>+            default:	// is then possibly edited below.
>                         eFunc = KEYFUNC_DONTKNOW;
>         }
>     }
>@@ -2777,94 +2770,10 @@ sal_Bool EditEngine::IsSimpleCharInput( const KeyEvent& rKeyEvent )
>     return sal_False;
> }
> 
>-// Mal in den Outliner schieben...
>+// should be moved to the Outliner...
> void EditEngine::ImportBulletItem( SvxNumBulletItem& /*rNumBullet*/, sal_uInt16 /*nLevel*/,
>                                     const SvxBulletItem* /*pOldBullet*/, const SvxLRSpaceItem* /*pOldLRSpace*/ )
> {
>-/* TL_NFLR
>-    if ( pOldBullet || pOldLRSpace )
>-    {
>-        // Numberformat dynamisch, weil Zuweisungsoperator nicht implementiert.
>-
>-        // Altes NumBulletItem nur uebernehmen, wenn kein altes BulletItem
>-        const SvxNumberFormat* pFmt = ( !pOldBullet && ( rNumBullet.GetNumRule()->GetLevelCount() > nLevel ) ) ?
>-                                        rNumBullet.GetNumRule()->Get( nLevel ) : NULL;
>-        SvxNumberFormat* pNumberFormat = pFmt
>-                                            ? new SvxNumberFormat( *pFmt )
>-                                            : new SvxNumberFormat( SVX_NUM_NUMBER_NONE );
>-        if ( pOldBullet )
>-        {
>-            // Style
>-            SvxExtNumType eNumType;
>-            switch( pOldBullet->GetStyle() )
>-            {
>-                case BS_BMP:			eNumType = SVX_NUM_BITMAP;				break;
>-                case BS_BULLET:			eNumType = SVX_NUM_CHAR_SPECIAL;		break;
>-                case BS_ROMAN_BIG:		eNumType = SVX_NUM_ROMAN_UPPER;			break;
>-                case BS_ROMAN_SMALL:	eNumType = SVX_NUM_ROMAN_LOWER;			break;
>-                case BS_ABC_BIG:		eNumType = SVX_NUM_CHARS_UPPER_LETTER;	break;
>-                case BS_ABC_SMALL:		eNumType = SVX_NUM_CHARS_LOWER_LETTER;	break;
>-                case BS_123:			eNumType = SVX_NUM_ARABIC;				break;
>-                default:				eNumType = SVX_NUM_NUMBER_NONE;			break;
>-            }
>-            pNumberFormat->SetNumberingType(
>-                sal::static_int_cast< sal_Int16 >( eNumType ) );
>-
>-            // Justification
>-            SvxAdjust eAdjust;
>-            switch( pOldBullet->GetJustification() & (BJ_HRIGHT|BJ_HCENTER|BJ_HLEFT) )
>-            {
>-                case BJ_HRIGHT:		eAdjust = SVX_ADJUST_RIGHT;		break;
>-                case BJ_HCENTER:	eAdjust = SVX_ADJUST_CENTER;	break;
>-                default:			eAdjust = SVX_ADJUST_LEFT;		break;
>-            }
>-            pNumberFormat->SetNumAdjust(eAdjust);
>-
>-            // Prefix/Suffix
>-            pNumberFormat->SetPrefix( pOldBullet->GetPrevText() );
>-            pNumberFormat->SetSuffix( pOldBullet->GetFollowText() );
>-
>-            //Font
>-            if ( eNumType != SVX_NUM_BITMAP )
>-            {
>-                Font aTmpFont = pOldBullet->GetFont();
>-                pNumberFormat->SetBulletFont( &aTmpFont );
>-            }
>-
>-            // Color
>-            pNumberFormat->SetBulletColor( pOldBullet->GetFont().GetColor() );
>-
>-            // Start
>-            pNumberFormat->SetStart( pOldBullet->GetStart() );
>-
>-            // Scale
>-            pNumberFormat->SetBulletRelSize( pOldBullet->GetScale() );
>-
>-            // Bullet/Bitmap
>-            if( eNumType == SVX_NUM_CHAR_SPECIAL )
>-            {
>-                pNumberFormat->SetBulletChar( pOldBullet->GetSymbol() );
>-            }
>-            else if( eNumType == SVX_NUM_BITMAP )
>-            {
>-                SvxBrushItem aBItem( Graphic( pOldBullet->GetBitmap() ), GPOS_NONE, SID_ATTR_BRUSH );
>-                pNumberFormat->SetGraphicBrush( &aBItem );
>-            }
>-        }
>-
>-        // Einzug und Erstzeileneinzug
>-//TL_NFLR       if ( pOldLRSpace )
>-//TL_NFLR       {
>-//TL_NFLR           short nLSpace = (short)pOldLRSpace->GetTxtLeft();
>-//TL_NFLR           pNumberFormat->SetLSpace( nLSpace );
>-//TL_NFLR           pNumberFormat->SetAbsLSpace( nLSpace );
>-//TL_NFLR           pNumberFormat->SetFirstLineOffset( pOldLRSpace->GetTxtFirstLineOfst() );
>-//TL_NFLR       }
>-
>-        rNumBullet.GetNumRule()->SetLevel( nLevel, *pNumberFormat );
>-        delete pNumberFormat;
>-    }
>-*/
> }
> 
> BOOL EditEngine::HasValidData( const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::XTransferable >& rTransferable )
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editobj.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editobj.cxx
>index f433f60..247b82d 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editobj.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editobj.cxx
>@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ BOOL lcl_CreateBulletItem( const SvxNumBulletItem& rNumBullet, USHORT nLevel, Sv
> 
> XEditAttribute* MakeXEditAttribute( SfxItemPool& rPool, const SfxPoolItem& rItem, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd )
> {
>-    // das neue Attribut im Pool anlegen
>+    // Create thw new attribute in the pool
>     const SfxPoolItem& rNew = rPool.Put( rItem );
> 
>     XEditAttribute* pNew = new XEditAttribute( rNew, nStart, nEnd );
>@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ XEditAttribute::XEditAttribute( const SfxPoolItem& rAttr, USHORT nS, USHORT nE )
> XEditAttribute::~XEditAttribute()
> {
>     DBG_DTOR( XEditAttribute, 0 );
>-    pItem = 0;	// Gehoert dem Pool.
>+    pItem = 0;	// belongs to the Pool.
> }
> 
> XEditAttribute* XEditAttributeList::FindAttrib( USHORT _nWhich, USHORT nChar ) const
>@@ -187,28 +187,22 @@ ContentInfo::ContentInfo( SfxItemPool& rPool ) : aParaAttribs( rPool, EE_PARA_ST
> {
>     eFamily = SFX_STYLE_FAMILY_PARA;
>     pWrongs = NULL;
>-/* cl removed because not needed anymore since binfilter
>-    pTempLoadStoreInfos = NULL;
>-*/
> }
> 
>-// Richtiger CopyCTOR unsinning, weil ich mit einem anderen Pool arbeiten muss!
>+// the real Copy constructor is nonsens, since I have to work with another Pool!
> ContentInfo::ContentInfo( const ContentInfo& rCopyFrom, SfxItemPool& rPoolToUse )
>     : aParaAttribs( rPoolToUse, EE_PARA_START, EE_CHAR_END )
> {
>     pWrongs = NULL;
>-/* cl removed because not needed anymore since binfilter
>-    pTempLoadStoreInfos = NULL;
>-*/
>+
>     if ( rCopyFrom.GetWrongList() )
>         pWrongs = rCopyFrom.GetWrongList()->Clone();
>-    // So sollten die Items im richtigen Pool landen!
>+    // this should ensure that the Items end up in the correct Pool!
>     aParaAttribs.Set( rCopyFrom.GetParaAttribs() );
>     aText = rCopyFrom.GetText();
>     aStyle = rCopyFrom.GetStyle();
>     eFamily = rCopyFrom.GetFamily();
> 
>-    // Attribute kopieren...
>     for ( USHORT n = 0; n < rCopyFrom.GetAttribs().Count(); n++  )
>     {
>         XEditAttribute* pAttr = rCopyFrom.GetAttribs().GetObject( n );
>@@ -216,7 +210,6 @@ ContentInfo::ContentInfo( const ContentInfo& rCopyFrom, SfxItemPool& rPoolToUse
>         aAttribs.Insert( pMyAttr, aAttribs.Count()  );
>     }
> 
>-    // Wrongs
>     pWrongs = NULL;
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>     if ( rCopyFrom.GetWrongList() )
>@@ -229,7 +222,6 @@ ContentInfo::~ContentInfo()
>     for ( USHORT nAttr = 0; nAttr < aAttribs.Count(); nAttr++ )
>     {
>         XEditAttribute* pAttr = aAttribs.GetObject(nAttr);
>-        // Item aus Pool entfernen!
>         aParaAttribs.GetPool()->Remove( *pAttr->GetItem() );
>         delete pAttr;
>     }
>@@ -239,20 +231,6 @@ ContentInfo::~ContentInfo()
> #endif
> }
> 
>-/* cl removed because not needed anymore since binfilter
>-void ContentInfo::CreateLoadStoreTempInfos()
>-{
>-    delete pTempLoadStoreInfos; 
>-    pTempLoadStoreInfos = new LoadStoreTempInfos;
>-}
>-
>-void ContentInfo::DestroyLoadStoreTempInfos()
>-{
>-    delete pTempLoadStoreInfos; 
>-    pTempLoadStoreInfos = NULL; 
>-}
>-*/
>-
> // #i102062#
> bool ContentInfo::isWrongListEqual(const ContentInfo& rCompare) const
> {
>@@ -309,172 +287,172 @@ EditTextObject::~EditTextObject()
> 
> USHORT EditTextObject::GetParagraphCount() const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return 0;
> }
> 
> XubString EditTextObject::GetText( USHORT /* nParagraph */ ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return XubString();
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::Insert( const EditTextObject& /* rObj */, USHORT /* nPara */)
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
> }
> 
> EditTextObject* EditTextObject::CreateTextObject( USHORT /*nPara*/, USHORT /*nParas*/ ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return 0;
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::RemoveParagraph( USHORT /*nPara*/ )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
> }
> 
> BOOL EditTextObject::HasPortionInfo() const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::ClearPortionInfo()
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
> }
> 
> BOOL EditTextObject::HasOnlineSpellErrors() const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
> BOOL EditTextObject::HasCharAttribs( USHORT ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::GetCharAttribs( USHORT /*nPara*/, EECharAttribArray& /*rLst*/ ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::MergeParaAttribs( const SfxItemSet& /*rAttribs*/, USHORT /*nStart*/, USHORT /*nEnd*/ )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
> }
> 
> BOOL EditTextObject::IsFieldObject() const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
> const SvxFieldItem* EditTextObject::GetField() const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return 0;
> }
> 
> BOOL EditTextObject::HasField( TypeId /*aType*/ ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
> SfxItemSet EditTextObject::GetParaAttribs( USHORT /*nPara*/ ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return SfxItemSet( *(SfxItemPool*)NULL );
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::SetParaAttribs( USHORT /*nPara*/, const SfxItemSet& /*rAttribs*/ )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
> }
> 
> BOOL EditTextObject::RemoveCharAttribs( USHORT /*nWhich*/ )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
> BOOL EditTextObject::RemoveParaAttribs( USHORT /*nWhich*/ )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
> BOOL EditTextObject::HasStyleSheet( const XubString& /*rName*/, SfxStyleFamily /*eFamily*/ ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::GetStyleSheet( USHORT /*nPara*/, XubString& /*rName*/, SfxStyleFamily& /*eFamily*/ ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::SetStyleSheet( USHORT /*nPara*/, const XubString& /*rName*/, const SfxStyleFamily& /*eFamily*/ )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
> }
> 
> BOOL EditTextObject::ChangeStyleSheets( const XubString&, SfxStyleFamily,
>                                             const XubString&, SfxStyleFamily )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::ChangeStyleSheetName( SfxStyleFamily /*eFamily*/,
>                 const XubString& /*rOldName*/, const XubString& /*rNewName*/ )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
> }
> 
> USHORT EditTextObject::GetUserType() const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return 0;
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::SetUserType( USHORT )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
> }
> 
> ULONG EditTextObject::GetObjectSettings() const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return 0;
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::SetObjectSettings( ULONG )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
> }
> 
> BOOL EditTextObject::IsVertical() const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::SetVertical( BOOL bVertical )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     ((BinTextObject*)this)->SetVertical( bVertical );
> }
> 
> USHORT EditTextObject::GetScriptType() const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return ((const BinTextObject*)this)->GetScriptType();
> }
> 
>@@ -484,7 +462,6 @@ BOOL EditTextObject::Store( SvStream& rOStream ) const
>     if ( rOStream.GetError() )
>         return FALSE;
> 
>-    // Vorspann:
>     sal_Size nStartPos = rOStream.Tell();
> 
>     rOStream << (USHORT)Which();
>@@ -492,10 +469,8 @@ BOOL EditTextObject::Store( SvStream& rOStream ) const
>     sal_uInt32 nStructSz = 0;
>     rOStream << nStructSz;
> 
>-    // Eigene Daten:
>     StoreData( rOStream );
> 
>-    // Nachspann:
>     sal_Size nEndPos = rOStream.Tell();
>     nStructSz = nEndPos - nStartPos - sizeof( nWhich ) - sizeof( nStructSz );
>     rOStream.Seek( nStartPos + sizeof( nWhich ) );
>@@ -509,14 +484,14 @@ EditTextObject*	EditTextObject::Create( SvStream& rIStream, SfxItemPool* pGlobal
> {
>     ULONG nStartPos = rIStream.Tell();
> 
>-    // Ertmal sehen, was fuer ein Object...
>+    // First check what type of Object...
>     USHORT nWhich;
>     rIStream >> nWhich;
> 
>     sal_uInt32 nStructSz;
>     rIStream >> nStructSz;
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( ( nWhich == 0x22 /*EE_FORMAT_BIN300*/ ) || ( nWhich == EE_FORMAT_BIN ), "CreateTextObject: Unbekanntes Objekt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( ( nWhich == 0x22 /*EE_FORMAT_BIN300*/ ) || ( nWhich == EE_FORMAT_BIN ), "CreateTextObject: Unknown Object!" );
> 
>     if ( rIStream.GetError() )
>         return NULL;
>@@ -532,12 +507,12 @@ EditTextObject*	EditTextObject::Create( SvStream& rIStream, SfxItemPool* pGlobal
>                                     break;
>         default:
>         {
>-            // Wenn ich das Format nicht kenne, ueberlese ich den Inhalt:
>+            // If I do not know the format, I overwrite the contents:
>             rIStream.SetError( EE_READWRITE_WRONGFORMAT );
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // Sicherstellen, dass der Stream an der richtigen Stelle hinterlassen wird.
>+    // Make sure that the stream is left at the correct place.
>     sal_Size nFullSz = sizeof( nWhich ) + sizeof( nStructSz ) + nStructSz;
>     rIStream.Seek( nStartPos + nFullSz );
>     return pTxtObj;
>@@ -559,17 +534,17 @@ void EditTextObject::Skip( SvStream& rIStream )
> 
> void EditTextObject::StoreData( SvStream& ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "StoreData: Basisklasse!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "StoreData: Base class!" );
> }
> 
> void EditTextObject::CreateData( SvStream& )
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "CreateData: Basisklasse!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "CreateData: Base class!" );
> }
> 
> USHORT EditTextObject::GetVersion() const
> {
>-    DBG_ERROR( "V-Methode direkt vom EditTextObject!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Virtual method direct from EditTextObject!" );
>     return 0;
> }
> 
>@@ -683,7 +658,7 @@ BinTextObject::BinTextObject( const BinTextObject& r ) :
>     nObjSettings = r.nObjSettings;
>     bVertical = r.bVertical;
>     nScriptType = r.nScriptType;
>-    pPortionInfo = NULL;	// PortionInfo nicht kopieren
>+    pPortionInfo = NULL;	// Do not copy PortionInfo 
>     bStoreUnicodeStrings = FALSE;
> 
>     if ( !r.bOwnerOfPool )
>@@ -730,9 +705,6 @@ BinTextObject::~BinTextObject()
>     DeleteContents();
>     if ( bOwnerOfPool )
>     {
>-        // Nicht mehr, wegen 1xDefItems.
>-        // siehe auch ~EditDoc().
>-//		pPool->ReleaseDefaults( TRUE /* bDelete */ );
>         SfxItemPool::Free(pPool);
>     }
> }
>@@ -823,7 +795,7 @@ USHORT BinTextObject::GetParagraphCount() const
> 
> XubString BinTextObject::GetText( USHORT nPara ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nPara < aContents.Count(), "BinTextObject::GetText: Absatz existiert nicht!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nPara < aContents.Count(), "BinTextObject::GetText: Paragraph does not exist!" );
>     if ( nPara < aContents.Count() )
>     {
>         ContentInfo* pC = aContents[ nPara ];
>@@ -834,7 +806,7 @@ XubString BinTextObject::GetText( USHORT nPara ) const
> 
> void BinTextObject::Insert( const EditTextObject& rObj, USHORT nDestPara )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rObj.Which() == EE_FORMAT_BIN, "UTO: Unbekanntes Textobjekt" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rObj.Which() == EE_FORMAT_BIN, "UTO: unknown Textobjekt" );
> 
>     const BinTextObject& rBinObj = (const BinTextObject&)rObj;
> 
>@@ -856,7 +828,7 @@ EditTextObject* BinTextObject::CreateTextObject( USHORT nPara, USHORT nParas ) c
>     if ( ( nPara >= aContents.Count() ) || !nParas )
>         return NULL;
> 
>-    // Pool nur teilen, wenn von aussen eingestellter Pool.
>+    // Only split the Pool, when a the Pool is set externally.
>     BinTextObject* pObj = new BinTextObject( bOwnerOfPool ? 0 : pPool );
>     if ( bOwnerOfPool && pPool )
>         pObj->GetPool()->SetDefaultMetric( pPool->GetMetric( DEF_METRIC ) );
>@@ -877,7 +849,7 @@ EditTextObject* BinTextObject::CreateTextObject( USHORT nPara, USHORT nParas ) c
> 
> void BinTextObject::RemoveParagraph( USHORT nPara )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nPara < aContents.Count(), "BinTextObject::GetText: Absatz existiert nicht!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nPara < aContents.Count(), "BinTextObject::GetText: Paragraph does not exist!" );
>     if ( nPara < aContents.Count() )
>     {
>         ContentInfo* pC = aContents[ nPara ];
>@@ -1175,25 +1147,24 @@ void BinTextObject::StoreData( SvStream& rOStream ) const
> 
>     rOStream << bOwnerOfPool;
> 
>-    // Erst den Pool speichern, spaeter nur noch Surregate
>+    // First store the pool, later only the Surregate
>     if ( bOwnerOfPool )
>     {
>         GetPool()->SetFileFormatVersion( SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50 );
>         GetPool()->Store( rOStream );
>     }
> 
>-    // Aktuelle Zeichensatz speichern...
>-    // #90477# GetSOStoreTextEncoding: Bug in 5.2, when default char set is multi byte text encoding
>+    // Store Current text encoding ...
>     rtl_TextEncoding eEncoding = GetSOStoreTextEncoding( gsl_getSystemTextEncoding(), (USHORT) rOStream.GetVersion() );
>     rOStream << (USHORT) eEncoding;
> 
>-    // Die Anzahl der Absaetze...
>+    // The number of paragraphs ...
>     USHORT nParagraphs = GetContents().Count();
>     rOStream << nParagraphs;
> 
>     char cFeatureConverted = ByteString( CH_FEATURE, eEncoding ).GetChar(0);
> 
>-    // Die einzelnen Absaetze...
>+    // The individual paragraphs ...
>     for ( USHORT nPara = 0; nPara < nParagraphs; nPara++ )
>     {
>         ContentInfo* pC = GetContents().GetObject( nPara );
>@@ -1229,7 +1200,7 @@ void BinTextObject::StoreData( SvStream& rOStream ) const
>                     aText.Insert( aNew, pAttr->GetStart() );
>                 }
> 
>-                // #88414# Convert StarSymbol back to StarBats
>+                // Convert StarSymbol back to StarBats
>                 FontToSubsFontConverter hConv = CreateFontToSubsFontConverter( rFontItem.GetFamilyName(), FONTTOSUBSFONT_EXPORT | FONTTOSUBSFONT_ONLYOLDSOSYMBOLFONTS );
>                 if ( hConv )
>                 {
>@@ -1248,7 +1219,7 @@ void BinTextObject::StoreData( SvStream& rOStream ) const
>             }
>         }
> 
>-        // #88414# Convert StarSymbol back to StarBats
>+        // Convert StarSymbol back to StarBats
>         // StarSymbol as paragraph attribute or in StyleSheet?
> 
>         FontToSubsFontConverter hConv = NULL;
>@@ -1256,13 +1227,6 @@ void BinTextObject::StoreData( SvStream& rOStream ) const
>         {
>             hConv = CreateFontToSubsFontConverter( ((const SvxFontItem&)pC->GetParaAttribs().Get( EE_CHAR_FONTINFO )).GetFamilyName(), FONTTOSUBSFONT_EXPORT | FONTTOSUBSFONT_ONLYOLDSOSYMBOLFONTS );
>         }
>-/* cl removed because not needed anymore since binfilter
>-
>-        else if ( pC->GetStyle().Len() && pC->GetLoadStoreTempInfos() )
>-        {
>-            hConv = pC->GetLoadStoreTempInfos()->hOldSymbolConv_Store;
>-        }
>-*/
>         if ( hConv )
>         {
>             for ( USHORT nChar = 0; nChar < pC->GetText().Len(); nChar++ )
>@@ -1285,19 +1249,19 @@ void BinTextObject::StoreData( SvStream& rOStream ) const
>         aText.SearchAndReplaceAll( cFeatureConverted, CH_FEATURE_OLD );
>         rOStream.WriteByteString( aText );
> 
>-        // StyleName und Family...
>+        // StyleName and Family...
>         rOStream.WriteByteString( ByteString( pC->GetStyle(), eEncoding ) );
>         rOStream << (USHORT)pC->GetFamily();
> 
>-        // Absatzattribute...
>+        // Paragraph attributes ...
>         pC->GetParaAttribs().Store( rOStream );
> 
>-        // Die Anzahl der Attribute...
>+        // The number of attributes ...
>         USHORT nAttribs = pC->GetAttribs().Count();
>         rOStream << nAttribs;
> 
>-        // Und die einzelnen Attribute
>-        // Items als Surregate => immer 8 Byte pro Attrib
>+        // And the individual attributes
>+        // Items as Surregate => always 8 bytes per Attribute
>         // Which = 2; Surregat = 2; Start = 2; End = 2;
>         for ( USHORT nAttr = 0; nAttr < nAttribs; nAttr++ )
>         {
>@@ -1310,17 +1274,12 @@ void BinTextObject::StoreData( SvStream& rOStream ) const
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // Ab 400:
>     rOStream << nMetric;
> 
>-    // Ab 600
>     rOStream << nUserType;
>     rOStream << nObjSettings;
> 
>-    // Ab 601
>     rOStream << bVertical;
>-
>-    // Ab 602
>     rOStream << nScriptType;
> 
>     rOStream << bStoreUnicodeStrings;
>@@ -1333,7 +1292,7 @@ void BinTextObject::StoreData( SvStream& rOStream ) const
>             rOStream << nL;
>             rOStream.Write( pC->GetText().GetBuffer(), nL*sizeof(sal_Unicode) );
> 
>-            // #91575# StyleSheetName must be Unicode too!
>+            // StyleSheetName must be Unicode too!
>             // Copy/Paste from EA3 to BETA or from BETA to EA3 not possible, not needed...
>             // If needed, change nL back to ULONG and increase version...
>             nL = pC->GetStyle().Len();
>@@ -1347,63 +1306,61 @@ void BinTextObject::CreateData( SvStream& rIStream )
> {
>     rIStream >> nVersion;
> 
>-    // Das Textobject wurde erstmal mit der aktuellen Einstellung
>-    // von pTextObjectPool erzeugt.
>+    // The text object was first created with the current setting of 
>+    // pTextObjectPool.
>     BOOL bOwnerOfCurrent = bOwnerOfPool;
>     rIStream >> bOwnerOfPool;
> 
>     if ( bOwnerOfCurrent && !bOwnerOfPool )
>     {
>-        // Es wurde ein globaler Pool verwendet, mir jetzt nicht uebergeben,
>-        // aber ich brauche ihn!
>-        DBG_ERROR( "Man gebe mir den globalen TextObjectPool!" );
>+        // A global Pool was used, but not handed over to me, but I need it!
>+        DBG_ERROR( "Give me the global TextObjectPool!" );
>         return;
>     }
>     else if ( !bOwnerOfCurrent && bOwnerOfPool )
>     {
>-        // Es soll ein globaler Pool verwendet werden, aber dieses
>-        // Textobject hat einen eigenen.
>+        // A global Pool should be used, but this Textobject has its own.
>         pPool =	EditEngine::CreatePool();
>     }
> 
>     if ( bOwnerOfPool )
>         GetPool()->Load( rIStream );
> 
>-    // CharSet, in dem gespeichert wurde:
>+    // CharSet, in which it was saved:
>     USHORT nCharSet;
>     rIStream >> nCharSet;
> 
>     rtl_TextEncoding eSrcEncoding = GetSOLoadTextEncoding( (rtl_TextEncoding)nCharSet, (USHORT)rIStream.GetVersion() );
> 
>-    // Die Anzahl der Absaetze...
>+    // The number of paragraphs ...
>     USHORT nParagraphs;
>     rIStream >> nParagraphs;
> 
>-    // Die einzelnen Absaetze...
>+    // The individual paragraphs ...
>     for ( ULONG nPara = 0; nPara < nParagraphs; nPara++ )
>     {
>         ContentInfo* pC = CreateAndInsertContent();
> 
>-        // Der Text...
>+        // The Text...
>         ByteString aByteString;
>         rIStream.ReadByteString( aByteString );
>         pC->GetText() = String( aByteString, eSrcEncoding );
> 
>-        // StyleName und Family...
>+        // StyleName and Family...
>         rIStream.ReadByteString( pC->GetStyle(), eSrcEncoding );
>         USHORT nStyleFamily;
>         rIStream >> nStyleFamily;
>         pC->GetFamily() = (SfxStyleFamily)nStyleFamily;
> 
>-        // Absatzattribute...
>+        // Paragraph attributes ...
>         pC->GetParaAttribs().Load( rIStream );
> 
>-        // Die Anzahl der Attribute...
>+        // The number of attributes ...
>         USHORT nAttribs;
>         rIStream >> nAttribs;
> 
>-        // Und die einzelnen Attribute
>-        // Items als Surregate => immer 8 Byte pro Attrib
>+        // And the individual attributes
>+        // Items as Surregate => always 8 bytes per Attributes
>         // Which = 2; Surregat = 2; Start = 2; End = 2;
>         USHORT nAttr;
>         for ( nAttr = 0; nAttr < nAttribs; nAttr++ )
>@@ -1468,7 +1425,7 @@ void BinTextObject::CreateData( SvStream& rIStream )
>                     pC->GetText().Insert( aNew, pAttr->GetStart() );
>                 }
> 
>-                // #88414# Convert StarMath and StarBats to StarSymbol
>+                // Convert StarMath and StarBats to StarSymbol
>                 FontToSubsFontConverter hConv = CreateFontToSubsFontConverter( rFontItem.GetFamilyName(), FONTTOSUBSFONT_IMPORT | FONTTOSUBSFONT_ONLYOLDSOSYMBOLFONTS );
>                 if ( hConv )
>                 {
>@@ -1495,7 +1452,7 @@ void BinTextObject::CreateData( SvStream& rIStream )
>         }
> 
> 
>-        // #88414# Convert StarMath and StarBats to StarSymbol
>+        // Convert StarMath and StarBats to StarSymbol
>         // Maybe old symbol font as paragraph attribute?
>         if ( pC->GetParaAttribs().GetItemState( EE_CHAR_FONTINFO ) == SFX_ITEM_ON )
>         {
>@@ -1524,15 +1481,15 @@ void BinTextObject::CreateData( SvStream& rIStream )
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // Ab 400 auch die DefMetric:
>+    // From 400 also the DefMetric:
>     if ( nVersion >= 400 )
>     {
>         USHORT nTmpMetric;
>         rIStream >> nTmpMetric;
>         if ( nVersion >= 401 )
>         {
>-            // In der 400 gab es noch einen Bug bei Textobjekten mit eigenem
>-            // Pool, deshalb erst ab 401 auswerten.
>+            // In the 400 there was a bug in text objects with the own Pool, 
>+            // therefore evaluate only from 401
>             nMetric = nTmpMetric;
>             if ( bOwnerOfPool && pPool && ( nMetric != 0xFFFF ) )
>                 pPool->SetDefaultMetric( (SfxMapUnit)nMetric );
>@@ -1585,8 +1542,8 @@ void BinTextObject::CreateData( SvStream& rIStream )
>     }
> 
> 
>-    // Ab 500 werden die Tabs anders interpretiert: TabPos + LI, vorher nur TabPos.
>-    // Wirkt nur wenn auch Tab-Positionen eingestellt wurden, nicht beim DefTab.
>+    // from 500 the tabs are interpreted differently: TabPos + LI, previously only TabPos.
>+    // Works only if tab positions are set, not when DefTab.
>     if ( nVersion < 500 )
>     {
>         for ( USHORT n = 0; n < aContents.Count(); n++ )
>@@ -1663,39 +1620,39 @@ bool BinTextObject::isWrongListEqual(const BinTextObject& rCompare) const
> 
> void BinTextObject::CreateData300( SvStream& rIStream )
> {
>-    // Fuer Aufwaertskompatibilitaet.
>+    // For forward compatibility.
> 
>-    // Erst den Pool laden...
>-    // Ist in der 300 immer gespeichert worden!
>+    // First load the Pool...
>+    // Is always saved in the 300!
>     GetPool()->Load( rIStream );
> 
>-    // Die Anzahl der Absaetze...
>+    // The number of paragraphs ...
>     sal_uInt32 nParagraphs;
>     rIStream >> nParagraphs;
> 
>-    // Die einzelnen Absaetze...
>+    // The individual paragraphs...
>     for ( ULONG nPara = 0; nPara < nParagraphs; nPara++ )
>     {
>         ContentInfo* pC = CreateAndInsertContent();
> 
>-        // Der Text...
>+        // The Text...
>         rIStream.ReadByteString( pC->GetText() );
> 
>-        // StyleName und Family...
>+        // StyleName and Family...
>         rIStream.ReadByteString( pC->GetStyle() );
>         USHORT nStyleFamily;
>         rIStream >> nStyleFamily;
>         pC->GetFamily() = (SfxStyleFamily)nStyleFamily;
> 
>-        // Absatzattribute...
>+        // Paragraph attributes ...
>         pC->GetParaAttribs().Load( rIStream );
> 
>-        // Die Anzahl der Attribute...
>+        // The number of attributes ...
>         sal_uInt32 nAttribs;
>         rIStream >> nAttribs;
> 
>-        // Und die einzelnen Attribute
>-        // Items als Surregate => immer 8 Byte pro Attrib
>+        // And the individual attributes
>+        // Items as Surregate => always 8 bytes per Attribute
>         // Which = 2; Surregat = 2; Start = 2; End = 2;
>         for ( ULONG nAttr = 0; nAttr < nAttribs; nAttr++ )
>         {
>@@ -1715,7 +1672,7 @@ void BinTextObject::CreateData300( SvStream& rIStream )
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // Prueffen, ob ein Zeichensatz gespeichert wurde
>+    // Check whether a font was saved
>     USHORT nCharSetMarker;
>     rIStream >> nCharSetMarker;
>     if ( nCharSetMarker == CHARSETMARKER )
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editobj2.hxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editobj2.hxx
>index 74fa0b4..859cbe6 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editobj2.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editobj2.hxx
>@@ -39,8 +39,8 @@ class SfxStyleSheetPool;
> 
> class XEditAttribute
> {
>-    friend class ContentInfo;	// fuer DTOR
>-    friend class BinTextObject;	// fuer DTOR
>+    friend class ContentInfo;	// for destructor
>+    friend class BinTextObject;	// for destructor
> 
> private:
>     const SfxPoolItem*	pItem;
>@@ -161,10 +161,6 @@ private:
>     SfxItemSet			aParaAttribs;
>     WrongList*			pWrongs;
> 
>-/* cl removed because not needed anymore since binfilter
>-    LoadStoreTempInfos* pTempLoadStoreInfos;
>-*/
>-
>                         ContentInfo( SfxItemPool& rPool );
>                         ContentInfo( const ContentInfo& rCopyFrom, SfxItemPool& rPoolToUse  );
> 
>@@ -194,8 +190,6 @@ public:
> typedef ContentInfo* ContentInfoPtr;
> SV_DECL_PTRARR( ContentInfoList, ContentInfoPtr, 1, 4 )
> 
>-// MT 05/00: Sollte mal direkt EditTextObjekt werden => keine virtuellen Methoden mehr.
>-
> class BinTextObject : public EditTextObject, public SfxItemPoolUser
> {
>     using EditTextObject::operator==;
>@@ -242,7 +236,7 @@ public:
>     USHORT					GetScriptType() const;
>     void					SetScriptType( USHORT nType );
> 
>-    USHORT					GetVersion() const;	// Solange der Outliner keine Recordlaenge speichert
>+    USHORT					GetVersion() const;	// As long as the outliner does not store any record length
> 
>     ContentInfo*			CreateAndInsertContent();
>     XEditAttribute*			CreateAttrib( const SfxPoolItem& rItem, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd );
>@@ -296,13 +290,6 @@ public:
> 
>     BOOL					IsOwnerOfPool() const		{ return bOwnerOfPool; }
>     void					StoreUnicodeStrings( BOOL b ) { bStoreUnicodeStrings = b; }
>-
>-/* cl removed because not needed anymore since binfilter
>-    void 					PrepareStore( SfxStyleSheetPool* pStyleSheetPool );
>-    void 					FinishStore();
>-    void 					FinishLoad( SfxStyleSheetPool* pStyleSheetPool );
>-*/
>-
>     bool					operator==( const BinTextObject& rCompare ) const;
> 
>     // #i102062#
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editsel.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editsel.cxx
>index fa68068..494e54b 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editsel.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editsel.cxx
>@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ void EditSelFunctionSet::CreateAnchor()
> 
> void EditSelFunctionSet::DestroyAnchor()
> {
>-    // Nur bei Mehrfachselektion
>+    // Only with multiple selection
> }
> 
> BOOL EditSelFunctionSet::SetCursorAtPoint( const Point& rPointPixel, BOOL )
>@@ -73,13 +73,13 @@ BOOL EditSelFunctionSet::IsSelectionAtPoint( const Point& rPointPixel )
> void EditSelFunctionSet::DeselectAtPoint( const Point& )
> {
> // !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
>-// !  Implementieren, wenn Mehrfachselektion moeglich  !
>+// !   Implement when multiple selection is possible   !
> // !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
> }
> 
> void EditSelFunctionSet::BeginDrag()
> {
>-    // Nur bei Mehrfachselektion
>+    // Only with multiple selection
> }
> 
> 
>@@ -94,8 +94,6 @@ void EditSelFunctionSet::DeselectAll()
> //	----------------------------------------------------------------------
> EditSelectionEngine::EditSelectionEngine() : SelectionEngine( (Window*)0 )
> {
>-    // Wegen Bug OV: (1994)
>-    // 1995: RangeSelection lassen, SingleSelection nur fuer ListBoxen geeignet!
>     SetSelectionMode( RANGE_SELECTION );
>     EnableDrag( TRUE );
> }
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editundo.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editundo.cxx
>index e928126..2c6e4a8 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editundo.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editundo.cxx
>@@ -38,8 +38,8 @@
> 
> DBG_NAME( EditUndo )
> 
>-#define MAX_UNDOS	100		// ab dieser Menge darf geloescht werden....
>-#define MIN_UNDOS	50		// soviel muss stehen bleiben...
>+#define MAX_UNDOS	100		// From this quantity it may be deleted ....
>+#define MIN_UNDOS	50		// so much has to be left ...
> 
> #define NO_UNDO			0xFFFF
> #define GROUP_NOTFOUND	0xFFFF
>@@ -88,20 +88,20 @@ BOOL EditUndoManager::Undo( USHORT nCount )
>             pImpEE->SetActiveView( pImpEE->GetEditViews().GetObject(0) );
>         else
>         {
>-            DBG_ERROR( "Undo in Engine ohne View nicht moeglich!" );
>+            DBG_ERROR("Undo in engine is not possible without a View! ");
>             return FALSE;
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    pImpEE->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->DrawSelection();	// alte Selektion entfernen
>+    pImpEE->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->DrawSelection();	// Remove the old selection
> 
>     pImpEE->SetUndoMode( TRUE );
>     BOOL bDone = SfxUndoManager::Undo( nCount );
>     pImpEE->SetUndoMode( FALSE );
> 
>     EditSelection aNewSel( pImpEE->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->GetEditSelection() );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !aNewSel.IsInvalid(), "Ungueltige Selektion nach Undo()" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !aNewSel.DbgIsBuggy( pImpEE->GetEditDoc() ), "Kaputte Selektion nach Undo()" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !aNewSel.IsInvalid(), "Invalid selection after Undo () ");
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !aNewSel.DbgIsBuggy( pImpEE->GetEditDoc() ), "Broken selection afte Undo () ");
> 
>     aNewSel.Min() = aNewSel.Max();
>     pImpEE->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->SetEditSelection( aNewSel );
>@@ -128,15 +128,15 @@ BOOL EditUndoManager::Redo( USHORT nCount )
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    pImpEE->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->DrawSelection();	// alte Selektion entfernen
>+    pImpEE->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->DrawSelection();	// Remove the old selection
> 
>     pImpEE->SetUndoMode( TRUE );
>     BOOL bDone = SfxUndoManager::Redo( nCount );
>     pImpEE->SetUndoMode( FALSE );
> 
>     EditSelection aNewSel( pImpEE->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->GetEditSelection() );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !aNewSel.IsInvalid(), "Ungueltige Selektion nach Undo()" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !aNewSel.DbgIsBuggy( pImpEE->GetEditDoc() ), "Kaputte Selektion nach Redo()" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !aNewSel.IsInvalid(), "Invalid selection after Undo () ");
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !aNewSel.DbgIsBuggy( pImpEE->GetEditDoc() ), "Broken selection afte Undo () ");
> 
>     aNewSel.Min() = aNewSel.Max();
>     pImpEE->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->SetEditSelection( aNewSel );
>@@ -201,28 +201,28 @@ EditUndoDelContent::~EditUndoDelContent()
> 
> void EditUndoDelContent::Undo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     GetImpEditEngine()->InsertContent( pContentNode, nNode );
>-    bDelObject = FALSE;	// gehoert wieder der Engine
>+    bDelObject = FALSE;	// belongs to the Engine again
>     EditSelection aSel( EditPaM( pContentNode, 0 ), EditPaM( pContentNode, pContentNode->Len() ) );
>     GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->SetEditSelection( aSel );
> }
> 
> void EditUndoDelContent::Redo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
> 
>     ImpEditEngine* _pImpEE = GetImpEditEngine();
> 
>-    // pNode stimmt nicht mehr, falls zwischendurch Undos, in denen
>-    // Absaetze verschmolzen sind.
>+    // pNode is no longer correct, if the paragraphs where merged
>+    // in between Undos
>     pContentNode = _pImpEE->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( nNode );
>     DBG_ASSERT( pContentNode, "EditUndoDelContent::Redo(): Node?!" );
> 
>     delete _pImpEE->GetParaPortions()[nNode];
>     _pImpEE->GetParaPortions().Remove( nNode );
> 
>-    // Node nicht loeschen, haengt im Undo!
>+    // Do not delete node, depends on the undo!
>     _pImpEE->GetEditDoc().Remove( nNode );
>     if( _pImpEE->IsCallParaInsertedOrDeleted() )
>         _pImpEE->GetEditEnginePtr()->ParagraphDeleted( nNode );
>@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ void EditUndoDelContent::Redo()
>     DBG_ASSERT( pN && ( pN != pContentNode ), "?! RemoveContent !? " );
>     EditPaM aPaM( pN, pN->Len() );
> 
>-    bDelObject = TRUE;	// gehoert wieder dem Undo
>+    bDelObject = TRUE;	// belongs to the Engine again
> 
>     _pImpEE->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->SetEditSelection( EditSelection( aPaM, aPaM ) );
> }
>@@ -275,11 +275,10 @@ EditUndoConnectParas::~EditUndoConnectParas()
> 
> void EditUndoConnectParas::Undo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
> 
>-    // Bei SplitContent darf noch kein ParagraphInserted gerufen werden,
>-    // weil der Outliner sich auf die Attribute verlaesst um die Tiefe
>-    // des Absatzes zu initialisieren
>+    // For SplitContent ParagraphInserted can not be called yet because the 
>+    // Outliner relies on the attributes to initialize the depth
> 
>     BOOL bCall = GetImpEditEngine()->IsCallParaInsertedOrDeleted();
>     GetImpEditEngine()->SetCallParaInsertedOrDeleted( FALSE );
>@@ -305,7 +304,7 @@ void EditUndoConnectParas::Undo()
> 
> void EditUndoConnectParas::Redo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Np Active View!" );
>     EditPaM aPaM = GetImpEditEngine()->ConnectContents( nNode, bBackward );
> 
>     GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->SetEditSelection( EditSelection( aPaM, aPaM ) );
>@@ -327,14 +326,14 @@ EditUndoSplitPara::~EditUndoSplitPara()
> 
> void EditUndoSplitPara::Undo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     EditPaM aPaM = GetImpEditEngine()->ConnectContents( nNode, FALSE );
>     GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->SetEditSelection( EditSelection( aPaM, aPaM ) );
> }
> 
> void EditUndoSplitPara::Redo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     EditPaM aPaM = GetImpEditEngine()->SplitContent( nNode, nSepPos );
>     GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->SetEditSelection( EditSelection( aPaM, aPaM ) );
> }
>@@ -350,7 +349,7 @@ EditUndoInsertChars::EditUndoInsertChars( ImpEditEngine* _pImpEE, const EPaM& rE
> 
> void EditUndoInsertChars::Undo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     EditPaM aPaM( GetImpEditEngine()->CreateEditPaM( aEPaM ) );
>     EditSelection aSel( aPaM, aPaM );
>     aSel.Max().GetIndex() = aSel.Max().GetIndex() + aText.Len();
>@@ -407,7 +406,7 @@ void EditUndoRemoveChars::Undo()
> 
> void EditUndoRemoveChars::Redo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     EditPaM aPaM( GetImpEditEngine()->CreateEditPaM( aEPaM ) );
>     EditSelection aSel( aPaM, aPaM );
>     aSel.Max().GetIndex() = aSel.Max().GetIndex() + aText.Len();
>@@ -422,7 +421,7 @@ EditUndoInsertFeature::EditUndoInsertFeature( ImpEditEngine* _pImpEE, const EPaM
>                     : EditUndo( EDITUNDO_INSERTFEATURE, _pImpEE ), aEPaM( rEPaM )
> {
>     pFeature = rFeature.Clone();
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pFeature, "Feature konnte nicht dupliziert werden: EditUndoInsertFeature" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pFeature, "Feature could not be duplicated: EditUndoInsertFeature" );
> }
> 
> EditUndoInsertFeature::~EditUndoInsertFeature()
>@@ -432,19 +431,19 @@ EditUndoInsertFeature::~EditUndoInsertFeature()
> 
> void EditUndoInsertFeature::Undo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     EditPaM aPaM( GetImpEditEngine()->CreateEditPaM( aEPaM ) );
>     EditSelection aSel( aPaM, aPaM );
>-    // Attribute werden dort implizit vom Dokument korrigiert...
>+    // Attributes are then corrected implicitly by the document ...
>     aSel.Max().GetIndex()++;
>     GetImpEditEngine()->ImpDeleteSelection( aSel );
>-    aSel.Max().GetIndex()--;	// Fuer Selektion
>+    aSel.Max().GetIndex()--;	// For Selection
>     GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->SetEditSelection( aSel );
> }
> 
> void EditUndoInsertFeature::Redo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     EditPaM aPaM( GetImpEditEngine()->CreateEditPaM( aEPaM ) );
>     EditSelection aSel( aPaM, aPaM );
>     GetImpEditEngine()->ImpInsertFeature( aSel, *pFeature );
>@@ -471,7 +470,7 @@ EditUndoMoveParagraphs::~EditUndoMoveParagraphs()
> 
> void EditUndoMoveParagraphs::Undo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     Range aTmpRange( nParagraphs );
>     long nTmpDest = aTmpRange.Min();
> 
>@@ -494,7 +493,7 @@ void EditUndoMoveParagraphs::Undo()
> 
> void EditUndoMoveParagraphs::Redo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     EditSelection aNewSel( GetImpEditEngine()->MoveParagraphs( nParagraphs, nDest, 0 ) );
>     GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView()->GetImpEditView()->SetEditSelection( aNewSel );
> }
>@@ -520,7 +519,7 @@ EditUndoSetStyleSheet::~EditUndoSetStyleSheet()
> 
> void EditUndoSetStyleSheet::Undo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     GetImpEditEngine()->SetStyleSheet( nPara, (SfxStyleSheet*)GetImpEditEngine()->GetStyleSheetPool()->Find( aPrevName, ePrevFamily ) );
>     GetImpEditEngine()->SetParaAttribs( nPara, aPrevParaAttribs );
>     lcl_DoSetSelection( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), nPara );
>@@ -528,7 +527,7 @@ void EditUndoSetStyleSheet::Undo()
> 
> void EditUndoSetStyleSheet::Redo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     GetImpEditEngine()->SetStyleSheet( nPara, (SfxStyleSheet*)GetImpEditEngine()->GetStyleSheetPool()->Find( aNewName, eNewFamily ) );
>     lcl_DoSetSelection( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), nPara );
> }
>@@ -550,14 +549,14 @@ EditUndoSetParaAttribs::~EditUndoSetParaAttribs()
> 
> void EditUndoSetParaAttribs::Undo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     GetImpEditEngine()->SetParaAttribs( nPara, aPrevItems );
>     lcl_DoSetSelection( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), nPara );
> }
> 
> void EditUndoSetParaAttribs::Redo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     GetImpEditEngine()->SetParaAttribs( nPara, aNewItems );
>     lcl_DoSetSelection( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), nPara );
> }
>@@ -570,11 +569,9 @@ EditUndoSetAttribs::EditUndoSetAttribs( ImpEditEngine* _pImpEE, const ESelection
>       aESel( rESel ),
>       aNewAttribs( rNewItems )
> {
>-    // Wenn das EditUndoSetAttribs eigentlich ein RemoveAttribs ist, koennte
>-    // man das eigentlich an einem leeren ItemSet erkennen, aber dann muesste
>-    // an einigen Stellen abgefangen werden, das ggf. ein SetAttribs mit einem
>-    // leeren ItemSet gemacht wird.
>-    // => Ich habe lieber diesen Member spendiert...
>+    // When EditUndoSetAttribs actually is a RemoveAttribs this could be 
>+    // /recognize by the empty itemset, but then it would have to be caught in 
>+    // its own place, which possible a setAttribs does with an empty itemset. 
>     bSetIsRemove = FALSE;
>     bRemoveParaAttribs = FALSE;
>     nRemoveWhich = 0;
>@@ -583,7 +580,7 @@ EditUndoSetAttribs::EditUndoSetAttribs( ImpEditEngine* _pImpEE, const ESelection
> 
> EditUndoSetAttribs::~EditUndoSetAttribs()
> {
>-    // Items aus Pool holen...
>+    // Get Items from Pool...
>     SfxItemPool* pPool = aNewAttribs.GetPool();
>     USHORT nContents = aPrevAttribs.Count();
>     for ( USHORT n = 0; n < nContents; n++ )
>@@ -603,7 +600,7 @@ EditUndoSetAttribs::~EditUndoSetAttribs()
> 
> void EditUndoSetAttribs::Undo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     ImpEditEngine* _pImpEE = GetImpEditEngine();
>     BOOL bFields = FALSE;
>     for ( USHORT nPara = aESel.nStartPara; nPara <= aESel.nEndPara; nPara++ )
>@@ -611,11 +608,11 @@ void EditUndoSetAttribs::Undo()
>         ContentAttribsInfo* pInf = aPrevAttribs[ (USHORT)(nPara-aESel.nStartPara) ];
>         DBG_ASSERT( pInf, "Undo (SetAttribs): pInf = NULL!" );
> 
>-        // erstmal die Absatzattribute...
>+        // first the paragraph attributes ...
>         _pImpEE->SetParaAttribs( nPara, pInf->GetPrevParaAttribs() );
> 
>-        // Dann die Zeichenattribute...
>-        // Alle Attribute inkl. Features entfernen, werden wieder neu eingestellt.
>+        // Then the character attributes ...
>+        // Remove all attributes including features, are later re-established.
>         _pImpEE->RemoveCharAttribs( nPara, 0, TRUE );
>         DBG_ASSERT( _pImpEE->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( nPara ), "Undo (SetAttribs): pNode = NULL!" );
>         ContentNode* pNode = _pImpEE->GetEditDoc().GetObject( nPara );
>@@ -623,7 +620,7 @@ void EditUndoSetAttribs::Undo()
>         {
>             EditCharAttrib* pX = pInf->GetPrevCharAttribs()[nAttr];
>             DBG_ASSERT( pX, "Redo (SetAttribs): pX = NULL!" );
>-            // wird autom. 'eingepoolt'.
>+            // is automatically "poolsized"
>             _pImpEE->GetEditDoc().InsertAttrib( pNode, pX->GetStart(), pX->GetEnd(), *pX->GetItem() );
>             if ( pX->Which() == EE_FEATURE_FIELD )
>                 bFields = TRUE;
>@@ -636,7 +633,7 @@ void EditUndoSetAttribs::Undo()
> 
> void EditUndoSetAttribs::Redo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     ImpEditEngine* _pImpEE = GetImpEditEngine();
> 
>     EditSelection aSel( _pImpEE->CreateSel( aESel ) );
>@@ -672,7 +669,7 @@ EditUndoTransliteration::~EditUndoTransliteration()
> 
> void EditUndoTransliteration::Undo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
> 
>     ImpEditEngine* _pImpEE = GetImpEditEngine();
> 
>@@ -712,7 +709,7 @@ void EditUndoTransliteration::Undo()
> 
> void EditUndoTransliteration::Redo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     ImpEditEngine* _pImpEE = GetImpEditEngine();
> 
>     EditSelection aSel( _pImpEE->CreateSel( aOldESel ) );
>@@ -734,7 +731,7 @@ EditUndoMarkSelection::~EditUndoMarkSelection()
> 
> void EditUndoMarkSelection::Undo()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: Keine Active View!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView(), "Undo/Redo: No Active View!" );
>     if ( GetImpEditEngine()->GetActiveView() ) 
>     {
>         if ( GetImpEditEngine()->IsFormatted() )
>@@ -746,7 +743,7 @@ void EditUndoMarkSelection::Undo()
> 
> void EditUndoMarkSelection::Redo()
> {
>-    // Fuer Redo unwichtig, weil am Anfang der Undo-Klammerung
>+    // For redo unimportant, because at the beginning of the undo parentheses
> }
> 
> /* vim:set shiftwidth=4 softtabstop=4 expandtab: */
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editundo.hxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editundo.hxx
>index 7c230eb..9c78f22 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editundo.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editundo.hxx
>@@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ class EditUndoDelContent : public EditUndo
> private:
>     BOOL 			bDelObject;
>     USHORT			nNode;
>-    ContentNode* 	pContentNode;	// Zeigt auf das gueltige,
>-                                    // nicht zerstoerte Objekt!
>+    ContentNode* 	pContentNode;	// Points to the valid,
>+                                    // undestroyed object!
> 
> public:
>                     TYPEINFO();
>@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ private:
>     SfxItemSet		aLeftParaAttribs;
>     SfxItemSet		aRightParaAttribs;
> 
>-    // 2 Pointer waeren schoener, aber dann muesste es ein SfxListener sein.
>+    // 2 Pointers would be nicer but then it would have to be a SfxListener.
>     String			aLeftStyleName;
>     String			aRightStyleName;
>     SfxStyleFamily	eLeftStyleFamily;
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/editview.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/editview.cxx
>index 6b3dbdd..e3b6892 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/editview.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/editview.cxx
>@@ -233,8 +233,8 @@ void EditView::SetSelection( const ESelection& rESel )
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditView, 0 );
>     DBG_CHKOBJ( pImpEditView->pEditEngine, EditEngine, 0 );
> 
>-    // Falls jemand gerade ein leeres Attribut hinterlassen hat,
>-    // und dann der Outliner die Selektion manipulitert:
>+    // If someone has just left an empty attribute, and then the outliner 
>+    // manipulates the selection:
>     if ( !pImpEditView->GetEditSelection().HasRange() )
>     {
>         ContentNode* pNode = pImpEditView->GetEditSelection().Max().GetNode();
>@@ -242,10 +242,10 @@ void EditView::SetSelection( const ESelection& rESel )
>     }
>     EditSelection aNewSelection( PIMPEE->ConvertSelection( rESel.nStartPara, rESel.nStartPos, rESel.nEndPara, rESel.nEndPos ) );
> 
>-    // Wenn nach einem KeyInput die Selection manipuliert wird:
>+    // If the selection is manipulated after a KeyInput:
>     PIMPEE->CheckIdleFormatter();
> 
>-    // Selektion darf nicht bei einem unsichtbaren Absatz Starten/Enden:
>+    // Selection may not start/end at an invisible paragraph:
>     ParaPortion* pPortion = PIMPEE->FindParaPortion( aNewSelection.Min().GetNode() );
>     if ( !pPortion->IsVisible() )
>     {
>@@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ void EditView::SetSelection( const ESelection& rESel )
>         aNewSelection.Max() = EditPaM( pNode, pNode->Len() );
>     }
> 
>-    pImpEditView->DrawSelection();	// alte Selektion 'weg-zeichnen'
>+    pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>     pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aNewSelection );
>     pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>     sal_Bool bGotoCursor = pImpEditView->DoAutoScroll();
>@@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ void EditView::SetOutputArea( const Rectangle& rRec )
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditView, 0 );
>     pImpEditView->SetOutputArea( rRec );
> 
>-    // Rest nur hier, wenn API-Aufruf:
>+    // the rest here only if it is an API call:
>     pImpEditView->CalcAnchorPoint();
>     if ( PIMPEE->GetStatus().AutoPageSize() )
>         pImpEditView->RecalcOutputArea();
>@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ void EditView::InsertText( const XubString& rStr, sal_Bool bSelect )
> 
>     if ( bSelect )
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERT( !aPaM1.DbgIsBuggy( pImpEE->GetEditDoc() ), "Insert: PaM kaputt" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( !aPaM1.DbgIsBuggy( pImpEE->GetEditDoc() ), "Insert: PaM broken" );
>         pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( EditSelection( aPaM1, aPaM2 ) );
>     }
>     else
>@@ -463,13 +463,9 @@ void EditView::ShowCursor( sal_Bool bGotoCursor, sal_Bool bForceVisCursor )
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditView, 0 );
>     DBG_CHKOBJ( pImpEditView->pEditEngine, EditEngine, 0 );
> 
>-// Draw vertraegt die Assertion nicht, spaeter mal aktivieren
>-//	DBG_ASSERT( pImpEditView->pEditEngine->HasView( this ), "ShowCursor - View nicht angemeldet!" );
>-//	DBG_ASSERT( !GetWindow()->IsInPaint(), "ShowCursor - Why in Paint ?!" );
>-
>     if ( pImpEditView->pEditEngine->HasView( this ) )
>     {
>-        // Das ControlWord hat mehr Gewicht:
>+        // The control word is more important:
>         if ( !pImpEditView->DoAutoScroll() )
>             bGotoCursor = sal_False;
>         pImpEditView->ShowCursor( bGotoCursor, bForceVisCursor );
>@@ -500,9 +496,8 @@ void EditView::SetAttribs( const SfxItemSet& rSet )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditView, 0 );
>     DBG_CHKOBJ( pImpEditView->pEditEngine, EditEngine, 0 );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !pImpEditView->aEditSelection.IsInvalid(), "Blinde Selection in ...." );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !pImpEditView->aEditSelection.IsInvalid(), "Blind Selection in ...." );
> 
>-    // Kein Undo-Kappseln noetig...
>     pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>     PIMPEE->SetAttribs( pImpEditView->GetEditSelection(), rSet, ATTRSPECIAL_WHOLEWORD );
>     PIMPEE->FormatAndUpdate( this );
>@@ -512,9 +507,8 @@ void EditView::SetParaAttribs( const SfxItemSet& rSet, sal_uInt16 nPara )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditView, 0 );
>     DBG_CHKOBJ( pImpEditView->pEditEngine, EditEngine, 0 );
>-    // Kein Undo-Kappseln noetig...
>     PIMPEE->SetParaAttribs( nPara, rSet );
>-    // Beim Aendern von Absatzattributen muss immer formatiert werden...
>+    // When you change paragraph attributes you must always format...
>     PIMPEE->FormatAndUpdate( this );
> }
> 
>@@ -566,7 +560,7 @@ SfxItemSet EditView::GetAttribs()
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( EditView, 0 );
>     DBG_CHKOBJ( pImpEditView->pEditEngine, EditEngine, 0 );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !pImpEditView->aEditSelection.IsInvalid(), "Blinde Selection in ...." );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !pImpEditView->aEditSelection.IsInvalid(), "Blind Selection in ...." );
>     return PIMPEE->GetAttribs( pImpEditView->GetEditSelection() );
> }
> 
>@@ -787,7 +781,7 @@ void EditView::InsertText( const EditTextObject& rTextObject )
>     EditSelection aTextSel( PIMPEE->InsertText( rTextObject, pImpEditView->GetEditSelection() ) );
>     PIMPEE->UndoActionEnd( EDITUNDO_INSERT );
> 
>-    aTextSel.Min() = aTextSel.Max();	// Selektion nicht behalten.
>+    aTextSel.Min() = aTextSel.Max();	// Selection not retained.
>     pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aTextSel );
>     PIMPEE->FormatAndUpdate( this );
> }
>@@ -802,7 +796,7 @@ void EditView::InsertText( ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::d
>     EditSelection aTextSel( PIMPEE->InsertText( xDataObj, rBaseURL, pImpEditView->GetEditSelection().Max(), bUseSpecial ) );
>     PIMPEE->UndoActionEnd( EDITUNDO_INSERT );
> 
>-    aTextSel.Min() = aTextSel.Max();	// Selektion nicht behalten.
>+    aTextSel.Min() = aTextSel.Max();	// Selection not retained.
>     pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aTextSel );
>     PIMPEE->FormatAndUpdate( this );
> }
>@@ -864,7 +858,7 @@ SfxStyleSheet* EditView::GetStyleSheet() const
>     {
>         SfxStyleSheet* pTmpStyle = PIMPEE->GetStyleSheet( n );
>         if ( ( n != nStartPara ) && ( pStyle != pTmpStyle ) )
>-            return NULL;	// Nicht eindeutig.
>+            return NULL;	// Not unique.
>         pStyle = pTmpStyle;
>     }
>     return pStyle;
>@@ -901,7 +895,7 @@ void EditView::TransliterateText( sal_Int32 nTransliterationMode )
>     EditSelection aNewSel = PIMPEE->TransliterateText( pImpEditView->GetEditSelection(), nTransliterationMode );
>     if ( aNewSel != aOldSel )
>     {
>-        pImpEditView->DrawSelection();	// alte Selektion 'weg-zeichnen'
>+        pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>         pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aNewSel );
>         pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>     }
>@@ -933,7 +927,6 @@ void EditView::CompleteAutoCorrect( Window* pFrameWin )
>         pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>         EditSelection aSel = pImpEditView->GetEditSelection();
>         aSel = PIMPEE->EndOfWord( aSel.Max() );
>-        // MT 06/00: Why pass EditSelection to AutoCorrect, not EditPaM?!
>         aSel = PIMPEE->AutoCorrect( aSel, 0, !IsInsertMode(), pFrameWin );
>         pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aSel );
>         if ( PIMPEE->IsModified() )
>@@ -1054,7 +1047,7 @@ void EditView::ExecuteSpellPopup( const Point& rPosPixel, Link* pCallBack )
>         EditPaM aPaM2( aPaM );
>         aPaM2.GetIndex()++;
> 
>-        // Gibt es Replace-Vorschlaege?
>+        // Are there any replace suggestions?
>         String aSelected( GetSelected() );
>         //
>         // restrict the maximal number of suggestions displayed
>@@ -1072,7 +1065,7 @@ void EditView::ExecuteSpellPopup( const Point& rPosPixel, Link* pCallBack )
>         rVal.Name = OUString(RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM( UPN_MAX_NUMBER_OF_SUGGESTIONS ));
>         rVal.Value <<= (INT16) 7;
>         //
>-        // Gibt es Replace-Vorschlaege?
>+        // Are there any replace suggestions?
>         Reference< XSpellAlternatives >  xSpellAlt =
>                 xSpeller->spell( aSelected, PIMPEE->GetLanguage( aPaM2 ), aPropVals );
> 
>@@ -1142,7 +1135,7 @@ void EditView::ExecuteSpellPopup( const Point& rPosPixel, Link* pCallBack )
>             aPopupMenu.InsertSeparator( nWords );
>         }
>         else
>-            aPopupMenu.RemoveItem( MN_AUTOCORR );	// Loeschen?
>+            aPopupMenu.RemoveItem( MN_AUTOCORR );	// delete?
> 
>         SvtLinguConfig aCfg;
> 
>@@ -1249,12 +1242,12 @@ void EditView::ExecuteSpellPopup( const Point& rPosPixel, Link* pCallBack )
>         {
>             if ( !pCallBack )
>             {
>-                // Cursor vor das Wort setzen...
>+                // Set Cursor before word...
>                 EditPaM aCursor = pImpEditView->GetEditSelection().Min();
>-                pImpEditView->DrawSelection();	// alte Selektion 'weg-zeichnen'
>+                pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>                 pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( EditSelection( aCursor, aCursor ) );
>                 pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>-                // Stuerzt ab, wenn keine SfxApp
>+                // Crashes when no SfxApp
>                 PIMPEE->Spell( this, sal_False );
>             }
>             else
>@@ -1374,7 +1367,8 @@ const SvxFieldItem* EditView::GetFieldAtSelection() const
> {
>     EditSelection aSel( pImpEditView->GetEditSelection() );
>     aSel.Adjust( pImpEditView->pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc() );
>-    // Nur wenn Cursor vor Feld, keine Selektion, oder nur Feld selektiert
>+    // Only when cursor is in font of field, no selection, 
>+    // or only selecting field 
>     if ( ( aSel.Min().GetNode() == aSel.Max().GetNode() ) &&
>          ( ( aSel.Max().GetIndex() == aSel.Min().GetIndex() ) ||
>            ( aSel.Max().GetIndex() == aSel.Min().GetIndex()+1 ) ) )
>@@ -1388,7 +1382,7 @@ const SvxFieldItem* EditView::GetFieldAtSelection() const
>             if ( pAttr->GetStart() == nXPos )
>                 if ( pAttr->Which() == EE_FEATURE_FIELD )
>                 {
>-                    DBG_ASSERT( pAttr->GetItem()->ISA( SvxFieldItem ), "Kein FeldItem..." );
>+                    DBG_ASSERT( pAttr->GetItem()->ISA( SvxFieldItem ), "No FeldItem..." );
>                     return (const SvxFieldItem*)pAttr->GetItem();
>                 }
>         }
>@@ -1426,7 +1420,7 @@ XubString EditView::GetWordUnderMousePointer( Rectangle& rWordRect ) const
>         Rectangle aBottomRightRec( pImpEE->PaMtoEditCursor( aWordSel.Max() ) );
> 
> #if OSL_DEBUG_LEVEL > 1
>-        DBG_ASSERT( aTopLeftRec.Top() == aBottomRightRec.Top(), "Top() in einer Zeile unterschiedlich?" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( aTopLeftRec.Top() == aBottomRightRec.Top(), "Top () is different in one line?");
> #endif
> 
>         Point aPnt1( pImpEditView->GetWindowPos( aTopLeftRec.TopLeft() ) );
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/edtspell.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/edtspell.cxx
>index 5a6fccd..1afc8ea 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/edtspell.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/edtspell.cxx
>@@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ EditSpellWrapper::EditSpellWrapper( Window* _pWin,
>         sal_Bool bIsStart, sal_Bool bIsAllRight, EditView* pView ) :
>     SvxSpellWrapper( _pWin, xChecker, bIsStart, bIsAllRight )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pView, "Es muss eine View uebergeben werden!" );
>-    // IgnoreList behalten, ReplaceList loeschen...
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pView, "One view has to be abandoned!" );
>+    // Keep IgnoreList, delete ReplaceList...
>     if (SvxGetChangeAllList().is())
>         SvxGetChangeAllList()->clear();
>     pEditView = pView;
>@@ -71,9 +71,9 @@ void EditSpellWrapper::SpellStart( SvxSpellArea eArea )
> 
>     if ( eArea == SVX_SPELL_BODY_START )
>     {
>-        // Wird gerufen, wenn
>-        // a) Spell-Forwad ist am Ende angekomment und soll von vorne beginnen
>-        // IsEndDone() liefert auch sal_True, wenn Rueckwaerts-Spelling am Ende gestartet wird!
>+        // Is called when
>+        // a) Spell-Forward has arrived at the end and should restart at the top
>+        // IsEndDone() returns also sal_True, when backward-spelling is started at the end!
>         if ( IsEndDone() )
>         {
>             pSpellInfo->bSpellToEnd = sal_False;
>@@ -90,9 +90,9 @@ void EditSpellWrapper::SpellStart( SvxSpellArea eArea )
>     }
>     else if ( eArea == SVX_SPELL_BODY_END )
>     {
>-        // Wird gerufen, wenn
>-        // a) Spell-Forwad wird gestartet
>-        // IsStartDone() liefert auch sal_True, wenn Vorwaerts-Spelling am Anfang gestartet wird!
>+        // Is called when
>+        // a) Spell-Forward is launched
>+        // IsStartDone() return also sal_True, when forward-spelling is started at the beginning!
>         if ( !IsStartDone() )
>         {
>             pSpellInfo->bSpellToEnd = sal_True;
>@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ void EditSpellWrapper::SpellStart( SvxSpellArea eArea )
>     }
>     else if ( eArea == SVX_SPELL_BODY )
>     {
>-        ;	// Wird ueber SpellNextDocument von App gehandelt
>+        ;	// Is handled by the App through SpellNextDocument
> 
>         // pSpellInfo->bSpellToEnd = sal_True;
>         // pSpellInfo->aSpellTo = pImpEE->CreateEPaM( pImpEE->GetEditDoc().GetEndPaM() );
>@@ -147,8 +147,8 @@ sal_Bool EditSpellWrapper::SpellMore()
>         bMore = pImpEE->GetEditEnginePtr()->SpellNextDocument();
>         if ( bMore )
>         {
>-            // Der Text wurde in diese Engine getreten, bei Rueckwaerts
>-            // muss die Selektion hinten sein.
>+            // The text has been entered into the engine, when backwords then 
>+            // it must be behind the selection.
>             Reference< XPropertySet >  xProp( SvxGetLinguPropertySet() );
>             pEditView->GetImpEditView()->SetEditSelection(
>                         pImpEE->GetEditDoc().GetStartPaM() );
>@@ -159,15 +159,15 @@ sal_Bool EditSpellWrapper::SpellMore()
> 
> void EditSpellWrapper::ScrollArea()
> {
>-    // Keine weitere Aktion noetig...
>-    // Es sei denn, der Bereich soll in die Mitte gescrollt werden,
>-    // und nicht irgendwo stehen.
>+    // No further action needed ...
>+    // Except for, that the area is to be scrolled in the center, and not stand 
>+    // still anywhere.
> }
> 
> void EditSpellWrapper::ReplaceAll( const String &rNewText,
>             sal_Int16 )
> {
>-    // Wird gerufen, wenn Wort in ReplaceList des SpellCheckers
>+    // Is called when the word is in ReplaceList of the spell checker 
>     pEditView->InsertText( rNewText );
>     CheckSpellTo();
> }
>@@ -175,11 +175,11 @@ void EditSpellWrapper::ReplaceAll( const String &rNewText,
> void EditSpellWrapper::ChangeWord( const String& rNewWord,
>             const sal_uInt16 )
> {
>-    // Wird gerufen, wenn Wort Button Change
>-    // bzw. intern von mir bei ChangeAll
>+    // Will be called when Word Button Change 
>+    // or internally by me ChangeAll
> 
>-    // Wenn Punkt hinterm Wort, wird dieser nicht mitgegeben.
>-    // Falls '"' => PreStripped.
>+    // If there is a dot Punkt after the word, this dot will be stripped away.
>+    // If '"' => PreStripped.
>     String aNewWord( rNewWord );
>     pEditView->InsertText( aNewWord );
>     CheckSpellTo();
>@@ -203,8 +203,8 @@ void EditSpellWrapper::CheckSpellTo()
>     EPaM aEPaM = pImpEE->CreateEPaM( aPaM );
>     if ( aEPaM.nPara == pSpellInfo->aSpellTo.nPara )
>     {
>-        // prueffen, ob SpellToEnd noch gueltiger Index, falls in dem Absatz
>-        // ersetzt wurde.
>+        // Check if SpellToEnd still has a valid Index, if replace has been
>+        // performed in the paragraph.
>         if ( pSpellInfo->aSpellTo.nIndex > aPaM.GetNode()->Len() )
>             pSpellInfo->aSpellTo.nIndex = aPaM.GetNode()->Len();
>     }
>@@ -255,35 +255,35 @@ void WrongList::TextInserted( sal_uInt16 nPos, sal_uInt16 nNew, sal_Bool bPosIsS
>         sal_Bool bRefIsValid = sal_True;
>         if ( rWrong.nEnd >= nPos )
>         {
>-            // Alle Wrongs hinter der Einfuegeposition verschieben...
>+            // Move all Wrongs after the insert position...
>             if ( rWrong.nStart > nPos )
>             {
>                 rWrong.nStart = rWrong.nStart + nNew;
>                 rWrong.nEnd = rWrong.nEnd + nNew;
>             }
>-            // 1: Startet davor, geht bis nPos...
>+            // 1: Starts before and goes until nPos...
>             else if ( rWrong.nEnd == nPos )
>             {
>-                // Sollte bei einem Blank unterbunden werden!
>+                // Should be halted at a blank!
>                 if ( !bPosIsSep )
>                     rWrong.nEnd = rWrong.nEnd + nNew;
>             }
>-            // 2: Startet davor, geht hinter Pos...
>+            // 2: Starts before and goes until after nPos...
>             else if ( ( rWrong.nStart < nPos ) && ( rWrong.nEnd > nPos ) )
>             {
>                 rWrong.nEnd = rWrong.nEnd + nNew;
>-                // Bei einem Trenner das Wrong entfernen und neu pruefen
>+                // When a separator remove and re-examine the Wrong
>                 if ( bPosIsSep )
>                 {
>-                    // Wrong aufteilen...
>+                    // Split Wrong...
>                     WrongRange aNewWrong( rWrong.nStart, nPos );
>                     rWrong.nStart = nPos+1;
>                     Insert( aNewWrong, n );
>-                    bRefIsValid = sal_False;	// Referenz nach Insert nicht mehr gueltig, der andere wurde davor an dessen Position eingefuegt
>-                    n++; // Diesen nicht nochmal...
>+                    bRefIsValid = sal_False;	// Reference no longer valid after Insert, the other was inserted in front of this position
>+                    n++; // This not again ...
>                 }
>             }
>-            // 3: Attribut startet auf Pos...
>+            // 3: Attribute starts at position ..
>             else if ( rWrong.nStart == nPos )
>             {
>                 rWrong.nEnd = rWrong.nEnd + nNew;
>@@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ void WrongList::TextInserted( sal_uInt16 nPos, sal_uInt16 nNew, sal_Bool bPosIsS
>         (void)bRefIsValid;
>     }
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !DbgIsBuggy(), "InsertWrong: WrongList kaputt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !DbgIsBuggy(), "InsertWrong: WrongList broken!" );
> }
> 
> void WrongList::TextDeleted( sal_uInt16 nPos, sal_uInt16 nDeleted )
>@@ -327,26 +327,26 @@ void WrongList::TextDeleted( sal_uInt16 nPos, sal_uInt16 nDeleted )
>         sal_Bool bDelWrong = sal_False;
>         if ( rWrong.nEnd >= nPos )
>         {
>-            // Alles Wrongs hinter der Einfuegeposition verschieben...
>+            // Move all Wrongs after the insert position...
>             if ( rWrong.nStart >= nEndChanges )
>             {
>                 rWrong.nStart = rWrong.nStart - nDeleted;
>                 rWrong.nEnd = rWrong.nEnd - nDeleted;
>             }
>-            // 1. Innenliegende Wrongs loeschen...
>+            // 1. Delete Internal Wrongs ...
>             else if ( ( rWrong.nStart >= nPos ) && ( rWrong.nEnd <= nEndChanges ) )
>             {
>                 bDelWrong = sal_True;
>             }
>-            // 2. Wrong beginnt davor, endet drinnen oder dahinter...
>+            // 2. Wrong begins before, ends inside or behind it ...
>             else if ( ( rWrong.nStart <= nPos ) && ( rWrong.nEnd > nPos ) )
>             {
>-                if ( rWrong.nEnd <= nEndChanges )	// endet drinnen
>+                if ( rWrong.nEnd <= nEndChanges )	// ends inside
>                     rWrong.nEnd = nPos;
>                 else
>-                    rWrong.nEnd = rWrong.nEnd - nDeleted; // endet dahinter
>+                    rWrong.nEnd = rWrong.nEnd - nDeleted; // ends after
>             }
>-            // 3. Wrong beginnt drinnen, endet dahinter...
>+            // 3. Wrong begins inside, ending after ...
>             else if ( ( rWrong.nStart >= nPos ) && ( rWrong.nEnd > nEndChanges ) )
>             {
>                 rWrong.nStart = nEndChanges;
>@@ -363,14 +363,14 @@ void WrongList::TextDeleted( sal_uInt16 nPos, sal_uInt16 nDeleted )
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !DbgIsBuggy(), "InsertWrong: WrongList kaputt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !DbgIsBuggy(), "InsertWrong: WrongList broken!" );
> }
> 
> sal_Bool WrongList::NextWrong( sal_uInt16& rnStart, sal_uInt16& rnEnd ) const
> {
>     /*
>-        rnStart enthaelt die Startposition, wird ggf. auf Wrong-Start korrigiert
>-        rnEnd braucht nicht inizialisiert sein.
>+        rnStart get the start position, is possibly adjusted wrt. Wrong start
>+        rnEnd does not have to be initialized.
>     */
>     for ( sal_uInt16 n = 0; n < Count(); n++ )
>     {
>@@ -419,7 +419,7 @@ void WrongList::ClearWrongs( sal_uInt16 nStart, sal_uInt16 nEnd,
>         WrongRange& rWrong = GetObject( n );
>         if ( ( rWrong.nEnd > nStart ) && ( rWrong.nStart < nEnd ) )
>         {
>-            if ( rWrong.nEnd > nEnd )	// // Laeuft raus
>+            if ( rWrong.nEnd >  // Runs out
>             {
>                 rWrong.nStart = nEnd;
>                 // Blanks?
>@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ void WrongList::ClearWrongs( sal_uInt16 nStart, sal_uInt16 nEnd,
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !DbgIsBuggy(), "InsertWrong: WrongList kaputt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !DbgIsBuggy(), "InsertWrong: WrongList broken!" );
> }
> 
> void WrongList::InsertWrong( sal_uInt16 nStart, sal_uInt16 nEnd,
>@@ -453,11 +453,10 @@ void WrongList::InsertWrong( sal_uInt16 nStart, sal_uInt16 nEnd,
>             nPos = n;
>             if ( bClearRange )
>             {
>-                // Es kann eigentlich nur Passieren, dass der Wrong genau
>-                // hier beginnt und weiter rauslauft, aber nicht, dass hier
>-                // mehrere im Bereich liegen...
>-                // Genau im Bereich darf keiner liegen, sonst darf diese Methode
>-                // garnicht erst gerufen werden!
>+                // It can really only happen that the Wrong starts exactly here
>+                // and runs along, but not that there are several ranges ... 
>+                // Exactly in the range is no one allowed to be, otherwise this 
>+                // Method can not be called!
>                 DBG_ASSERT( ( ( rWrong.nStart == nStart ) && ( rWrong.nEnd > nEnd ) )
>                                 || ( rWrong.nStart > nEnd ), "InsertWrong: RangeMismatch!" );
>                 if ( ( rWrong.nStart == nStart ) && ( rWrong.nEnd > nEnd ) )
>@@ -468,7 +467,7 @@ void WrongList::InsertWrong( sal_uInt16 nStart, sal_uInt16 nEnd,
>     }
>     Insert( WrongRange( nStart, nEnd ), nPos );
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !DbgIsBuggy(), "InsertWrong: WrongList kaputt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !DbgIsBuggy(), "InsertWrong: WrongList broken!" );
> }
> 
> void WrongList::MarkWrongsInvalid()
>@@ -518,7 +517,7 @@ bool WrongList::operator==(const WrongList& rCompare) const
> #ifdef DBG_UTIL
> sal_Bool WrongList::DbgIsBuggy() const
> {
>-    // Pruefen, ob sich Bereiche ueberlappen
>+    // Check if the ranges overlap.
>     sal_Bool bError = sal_False;
>     for ( sal_uInt16 _nA = 0; !bError && ( _nA < Count() ); _nA++ )
>     {
>@@ -526,11 +525,11 @@ sal_Bool WrongList::DbgIsBuggy() const
>         for ( sal_uInt16 nB = _nA+1; !bError && ( nB < Count() ); nB++ )
>         {
>             WrongRange& rNextWrong = GetObject( nB );
>-            // 1) Start davor, End hinterm anderen Start
>+            // 1) Start before, End after the second Start
>             if (   ( rWrong.nStart <= rNextWrong.nStart )
>-                && ( rWrong.nEnd >= rNextWrong.nStart ) )
>+                && ( rWrong.nEnd >= rNextWrong. nStart ) )
>                 bError = sal_True;
>-            // 2) Start hinter anderen Start, aber noch vorm anderen End
>+            // 2) Start after the second Start, but still before the second End
>             else if (   ( rWrong.nStart >= rNextWrong.nStart)
>                      && ( rWrong.nStart <= rNextWrong.nEnd ) )
>                 bError = sal_True;
>@@ -563,7 +562,7 @@ sal_Bool EdtAutoCorrDoc::Delete( sal_uInt16 nStt, sal_uInt16 nEnd )
> {
>     EditSelection aSel( EditPaM( pCurNode, nStt ), EditPaM( pCurNode, nEnd ) );
>     pImpEE->ImpDeleteSelection( aSel );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nCursor >= nEnd, "Cursor mitten im Geschehen ?!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nCursor >= nEnd, "Cursor in the heart of the action?!" );
>     nCursor -= ( nEnd-nStt );
>     bAllowUndoAction = sal_False;
>     return sal_True;
>@@ -573,7 +572,7 @@ sal_Bool EdtAutoCorrDoc::Insert( sal_uInt16 nPos, const String& rTxt )
> {
>     EditSelection aSel = EditPaM( pCurNode, nPos );
>     pImpEE->ImpInsertText( aSel, rTxt );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nCursor >= nPos, "Cursor mitten im Geschehen ?!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nCursor >= nPos, "Cursor in the heart of the action?!" );
>     nCursor = nCursor + rTxt.Len();
> 
>     if ( bAllowUndoAction && ( rTxt.Len() == 1 ) )
>@@ -585,7 +584,7 @@ sal_Bool EdtAutoCorrDoc::Insert( sal_uInt16 nPos, const String& rTxt )
> 
> sal_Bool EdtAutoCorrDoc::Replace( sal_uInt16 nPos, const String& rTxt )
> {
>-    // Eigentlich ein Replace einfuehren => Entspr. UNDO
>+    // Actually a Replace introduce => corresponds to UNDO
>     sal_uInt16 nEnd = nPos+rTxt.Len();
>     if ( nEnd > pCurNode->Len() )
>         nEnd = pCurNode->Len();
>@@ -634,11 +633,11 @@ sal_Bool EdtAutoCorrDoc::SetAttr( sal_uInt16 nStt, sal_uInt16 nEnd,
> sal_Bool EdtAutoCorrDoc::SetINetAttr( sal_uInt16 nStt, sal_uInt16 nEnd,
>             const String& rURL )
> {
>-    // Aus dem Text ein Feldbefehl machen...
>+    / Turn the Text into a command field ...
>     EditSelection aSel( EditPaM( pCurNode, nStt ), EditPaM( pCurNode, nEnd ) );
>     String aText = pImpEE->GetSelected( aSel );
>     aSel = pImpEE->ImpDeleteSelection( aSel );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nCursor >= nEnd, "Cursor mitten im Geschehen ?!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nCursor >= nEnd, "Cursor in the heart of the action ?!" );
>     nCursor -= ( nEnd-nStt );
>     SvxFieldItem aField( SvxURLField( rURL, aText, SVXURLFORMAT_REPR ),
>                                       EE_FEATURE_FIELD  );
>@@ -665,7 +664,7 @@ sal_Bool EdtAutoCorrDoc::HasSymbolChars( sal_uInt16 nStt, sal_uInt16 nEnd )
>         if ( ( pAttr->Which() == nScriptFontInfoItemId ) &&
>                 ( ((SvxFontItem*)pAttr->GetItem())->GetCharSet() == RTL_TEXTENCODING_SYMBOL ) )
>         {
>-            // Pruefen, ob das Attribt im Bereich liegt...
>+            // check if the Attribtuteis within range...
>             if ( pAttr->GetEnd() >= nStt )
>                 return sal_True;
>         }
>@@ -675,21 +674,21 @@ sal_Bool EdtAutoCorrDoc::HasSymbolChars( sal_uInt16 nStt, sal_uInt16 nEnd )
> 
> const String* EdtAutoCorrDoc::GetPrevPara( sal_Bool )
> {
>-    // Vorherigen Absatz zurueck geben, damit ermittel werden kann,
>-    // ob es sich beim aktuellen Wort um einen Satzanfang handelt.
>+    // Return previous paragraph, so that it can be determined, 
>+    // whether the current word is at the beginning of a sentence.
> 
>-    bAllowUndoAction = sal_False;	// Jetzt nicht mehr...
>+    bAllowUndoAction = sal_False;	// Not anymore ...
> 
>     ContentList& rNodes = pImpEE->GetEditDoc();
>     sal_uInt16 nPos = rNodes.GetPos( pCurNode );
> 
>-    // Sonderbehandlung: Bullet => Absatzanfang => einfach NULL returnen...
>+    // Special case: Bullet => Paragraph start => simply return NULL...
>     const SfxBoolItem& rBulletState = (const SfxBoolItem&)
>             pImpEE->GetParaAttrib( nPos, EE_PARA_BULLETSTATE );
>     sal_Bool bBullet = rBulletState.GetValue() ? sal_True : sal_False;
>     if ( !bBullet && ( pImpEE->aStatus.GetControlWord() & EE_CNTRL_OUTLINER ) )
>     {
>-        // Der Outliner hat im Gliederungsmodus auf Ebene 0 immer ein Bullet.
>+        // The Outliner has still a Bullet at Level 0.
>         const SfxInt16Item& rLevel = (const SfxInt16Item&)
>                 pImpEE->GetParaAttrib( nPos, EE_PARA_OUTLLEVEL );
>         if ( rLevel.GetValue() == 0 )
>@@ -713,10 +712,9 @@ sal_Bool EdtAutoCorrDoc::ChgAutoCorrWord( sal_uInt16& rSttPos,
>             sal_uInt16 nEndPos, SvxAutoCorrect& rACorrect, 
>             const String** ppPara )
> {
>-    // Absatz-Anfang oder ein Blank gefunden, suche nach dem Wort
>-    // Kuerzel im Auto
>-    
>-    bAllowUndoAction = sal_False;	// Jetzt nicht mehr...
>+    // Paragraph-start or a blank found, search for the word 
>+    // shortcut in Auto    
>+    bAllowUndoAction = sal_False;	// Not anymore ...
>     
>     String aShort( pCurNode->Copy( rSttPos, nEndPos - rSttPos ) );
>     sal_Bool bRet = sal_False;
>@@ -728,11 +726,11 @@ sal_Bool EdtAutoCorrDoc::ChgAutoCorrWord( sal_uInt16& rSttPos,
>     const SvxAutocorrWord* pFnd = rACorrect.SearchWordsInList( *pCurNode, rSttPos, nEndPos, *this, eLang );
>     if( pFnd && pFnd->IsTextOnly() )
>     {
>-        // dann mal ersetzen
>+        // then replace
>         EditSelection aSel( EditPaM( pCurNode, rSttPos ), 
>                             EditPaM( pCurNode, nEndPos ) );
>         aSel = pImpEE->ImpDeleteSelection( aSel );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( nCursor >= nEndPos, "Cursor mitten im Geschehen ?!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( nCursor >= nEndPos, "Cursor in the heart of the action?!" );
>         nCursor -= ( nEndPos-rSttPos );
>         pImpEE->ImpInsertText( aSel, pFnd->GetLong() );
>         nCursor = nCursor + pFnd->GetLong().Len();
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/edtspell.hxx b/editeng/source/editeng/edtspell.hxx
>index 992a94f..207a34e 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/edtspell.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/edtspell.hxx
>@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ private:
> 
> protected:
>     virtual	void			SpellStart( SvxSpellArea eArea );
>-    virtual	BOOL 			SpellContinue();	// Bereich pruefen
>+    virtual	BOOL 			SpellContinue();	// Check area
>     virtual void 			ReplaceAll( const String &rNewText, INT16 nLanguage );
>     virtual void			SpellEnd();
>     virtual BOOL			SpellMore();
>@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ public:
> 
>     USHORT			Count() const 				{ return WrongRanges::Count(); }
> 
>-    // Wenn man weiss was man tut:
>+    // When one knos what to do:
>     WrongRange&		GetObject( USHORT n ) const	{ return WrongRanges::GetObject( n ); }
>     void			InsertWrong( const WrongRange& rWrong, USHORT nPos );
> 
>@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ inline void WrongList::InsertWrong( const WrongRange& rWrong, USHORT nPos )
> {
>     WrongRanges::Insert( rWrong, nPos );
> #ifdef DBG_UTIL
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !DbgIsBuggy(), "Insert: WrongList kaputt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !DbgIsBuggy(), "Insert: WrongList broken!" );
> #endif
> }
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/eehtml.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/eehtml.cxx
>index 50a776a..3c40d00 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/eehtml.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/eehtml.cxx
>@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ SvParserState EditHTMLParser::CallParser( ImpEditEngine* pImpEE, const EditPaM&
>     SvParserState _eState = SVPAR_NOTSTARTED;
>     if ( pImpEditEngine )
>     {
>-        // Umbrechmimik vom RTF-Import einbauen?
>+        // Build in wrap mimic in RTF import?
>         aCurSel = EditSelection( rPaM, rPaM );
> 
>         if ( pImpEditEngine->aImportHdl.IsSet() )
>@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::NextToken( int nToken )
>             }
>             else
>             {
>-                // Nur bis HTML mit 319 geschrieben ?!
>+                // Only written until HTML with 319?
>                 if ( IsReadPRE() )
>                 {
>                     USHORT nTabPos = aText.Search( '\t', 0 );
>@@ -301,14 +301,14 @@ void EditHTMLParser::NextToken( int nToken )
> 
>     case HTML_TABLE_ON:		nInTable++;
>                             break;
>-    case HTML_TABLE_OFF:	DBG_ASSERT( nInTable, "Nicht in Table, aber TABLE_OFF?" );
>+    case HTML_TABLE_OFF:	DBG_ASSERT( nInTable, "Not in Table, but TABLE_OFF?" );
>                             nInTable--;
>                             break;
> 
>     case HTML_TABLEHEADER_ON:
>     case HTML_TABLEDATA_ON:
>         nInCell++;
>-    // fallthru
>+    // fall through
>     case HTML_BLOCKQUOTE_ON:
>     case HTML_BLOCKQUOTE_OFF:
>     case HTML_BLOCKQUOTE30_ON:
>@@ -333,7 +333,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::NextToken( int nToken )
>         if ( nInCell )
>             nInCell--;
>     }
>-    // fallthru
>+    // fall through
>     case HTML_LISTHEADER_OFF:
>     case HTML_LI_OFF:
>     case HTML_DD_OFF:
>@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::NextToken( int nToken )
>                                 break;
> 
>     case HTML_TABLEROW_ON:
>-    case HTML_TABLEROW_OFF:	// Nur nach einem CELL ein RETURN, fuer Calc
>+    case HTML_TABLEROW_OFF:	// A RETURN only after a CELL, for Calc
> 
>     case HTML_COL_ON:
>     case HTML_COLGROUP_ON:
>@@ -354,9 +354,6 @@ void EditHTMLParser::NextToken( int nToken )
>     case HTML_FONT_OFF:		// ...
>                             break;
> 
>-
>-    // #58335# kein SkipGroup on/off auf inline markup etc.
>-
>     case HTML_TITLE_ON:
>         bInTitle = TRUE;
>         break;
>@@ -391,7 +388,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::NextToken( int nToken )
>     // HTML 2.0
>     case HTML_ADDRESS_ON:
>     case HTML_ADDRESS_OFF:
>-//	case HTML_BLOCKQUOTE_ON:		//! extra Behandlung
>+//	case HTML_BLOCKQUOTE_ON:		//! special handling
> //	case HTML_BLOCKQUOTE_OFF:
>     case HTML_CITIATION_ON:
>     case HTML_CITIATION_OFF:
>@@ -418,7 +415,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::NextToken( int nToken )
>     case HTML_ACRONYM_OFF:
>     case HTML_AUTHOR_ON:
>     case HTML_AUTHOR_OFF:
>-//	case HTML_BLOCKQUOTE30_ON:		//! extra Behandlung
>+//	case HTML_BLOCKQUOTE30_ON:		//! special handling
> //	case HTML_BLOCKQUOTE30_OFF:
>     case HTML_DELETEDTEXT_ON:
>     case HTML_DELETEDTEXT_OFF:
>@@ -461,20 +458,20 @@ void EditHTMLParser::NextToken( int nToken )
>     // misc
>     case HTML_DIRLIST_ON:
>     case HTML_DIRLIST_OFF:
>-    case HTML_FOOTNOTE_ON:			//! landen so im Text
>+    case HTML_FOOTNOTE_ON:			//! land so im Text
>     case HTML_FOOTNOTE_OFF:
>     case HTML_MENULIST_ON:
>     case HTML_MENULIST_OFF:
>-//	case HTML_PLAINTEXT_ON:			//! extra Behandlung
>+//	case HTML_PLAINTEXT_ON:			//! special handling
> //	case HTML_PLAINTEXT_OFF:
>-//	case HTML_PREFORMTXT_ON:		//! extra Behandlung
>+//	case HTML_PREFORMTXT_ON:		//! special handling
> //	case HTML_PREFORMTXT_OFF:
>     case HTML_SPAN_ON:
>     case HTML_SPAN_OFF:
>     // obsolete
>-//	case HTML_XMP_ON:				//! extra Behandlung
>+//	case HTML_XMP_ON:				//! special handling
> //	case HTML_XMP_OFF:
>-//	case HTML_LISTING_ON:			//! extra Behandlung
>+//	case HTML_LISTING_ON:			//! special handling
> //	case HTML_LISTING_OFF:
>     // Netscape
>     case HTML_BLINK_ON:
>@@ -488,7 +485,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::NextToken( int nToken )
>     // Internet Explorer
>     case HTML_MARQUEE_ON:
>     case HTML_MARQUEE_OFF:
>-//	case HTML_PLAINTEXT2_ON:		//! extra Behandlung
>+//	case HTML_PLAINTEXT2_ON:		//! special handling
> //	case HTML_PLAINTEXT2_OFF:
>     break;
> 
>@@ -502,7 +499,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::NextToken( int nToken )
>             }
>             else if ( !(nToken & 1) )
>             {
>-                DBG_ASSERT( !( nToken & 1 ), "Kein Start-Token ?!" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( !( nToken & 1 ), "No Start-Token ?!" );
>                 SkipGroup( nToken + 1 );
>             }
>         }
>@@ -534,9 +531,9 @@ void EditHTMLParser::ImpInsertParaBreak()
> 
> void EditHTMLParser::ImpSetAttribs( const SfxItemSet& rItems, EditSelection* pSel )
> {
>-    // pSel, wenn Zeichenattribute, sonst Absatzattribute fuer den
>-    // aktuellen Absatz.
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pSel || ( aCurSel.Min().GetNode() == aCurSel.Max().GetNode() ), "ImpInsertAttribs: Selektion?" );
>+    // pSel, when character attributes, otherwise paragraph attributes for 
>+    // the current paragraph.
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pSel || ( aCurSel.Min().GetNode() == aCurSel.Max().GetNode() ), "ImpInsertAttribs: Selection?" );
> 
>     EditPaM aStartPaM( pSel ? pSel->Min() : aCurSel.Min() );
>     EditPaM aEndPaM( pSel ? pSel->Max() : aCurSel.Max() );
>@@ -558,46 +555,23 @@ void EditHTMLParser::ImpSetAttribs( const SfxItemSet& rItems, EditSelection* pSe
>     ContentNode* pSN = aStartPaM.GetNode();
>     USHORT nStartNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().GetPos( pSN );
> 
>-    // Wenn ein Attribut von 0 bis aktuelle Absatzlaenge geht,
>-    // soll es ein Absatz-Attribut sein!
>+    // If an attribute goes from 0 to current Paragraph length, 
>+    // then it should be a paragraph attribute!
> 
>-    // Achtung: Selektion kann ueber mehrere Absaetze gehen.
>-    // Alle vollstaendigen Absaetze sind Absatzattribute...
>+    // Note: Selection can reach over several Paragraphs.
>+    // All complete paragraphs are paragraph attributes ...
> 
>-    // HTML eigentlich nicht:
>+    // not really HTML:
> #ifdef DBG_UTIL
>     ContentNode* pEN = aEndPaM.GetNode();
>     USHORT nEndNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().GetPos( pEN );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nStartNode == nEndNode, "ImpSetAttribs: Mehrere Absaetze?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nStartNode == nEndNode, "ImpSetAttribs: Several paragraphs?" );
> #endif
> 
>-/*
>-    for ( USHORT z = nStartNode+1; z < nEndNode; z++ )
>-    {
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( z ), "Node existiert noch nicht(RTF)" );
>-        pImpEditEngine->SetParaAttribs( z, rSet.GetAttrSet() );
>-    }
>-
>-    if ( aStartPaM.GetNode() != aEndPaM.GetNode() )
>-    {
>-        // Den Rest des StartNodes...
>-        if ( aStartPaM.GetIndex() == 0 )
>-            pImpEditEngine->SetParaAttribs( nStartNode, rSet.GetAttrSet() );
>-        else
>-            pImpEditEngine->SetAttribs( EditSelection( aStartPaM, EditPaM( aStartPaM.GetNode(), aStartPaM.GetNode()->Len() ) ), rSet.GetAttrSet() );
>-
>-        // Den Anfang des EndNodes....
>-        if ( aEndPaM.GetIndex() == aEndPaM.GetNode()->Len() )
>-            pImpEditEngine->SetParaAttribs( nEndNode, rSet.GetAttrSet() );
>-        else
>-            pImpEditEngine->SetAttribs( EditSelection( EditPaM( aEndPaM.GetNode(), 0 ), aEndPaM ), rSet.GetAttrSet() );
>-    }
>-    else
>-*/
>     {
>         if ( ( aStartPaM.GetIndex() == 0 ) && ( aEndPaM.GetIndex() == aEndPaM.GetNode()->Len() ) )
>         {
>-            // Muesse gemergt werden:
>+            // Has to be merged:
>             SfxItemSet aItems( pImpEditEngine->GetParaAttribs( nStartNode ) );
>             aItems.Put( rItems );
>             pImpEditEngine->SetParaAttribs( nStartNode, aItems );
>@@ -610,24 +584,15 @@ void EditHTMLParser::ImpSetAttribs( const SfxItemSet& rItems, EditSelection* pSe
> void EditHTMLParser::ImpSetStyleSheet( USHORT nHLevel )
> {
>     /*
>-        nHLevel:	0: 			Ausschalten
>+        nHLevel:	0: 			Turn offAusschalten
>                     1-6: 		Heading
>                     STYLE_PRE: 	Preformatted
>     */
>-
>-//		if ( pImpEditEngine->GetStatus().DoImportRTFStyleSheets() )
>-//		{
>-//			SvxRTFStyleType* pS = GetStyleTbl().Get( rSet.StyleNo() );
>-//			DBG_ASSERT( pS, "Vorlage in RTF nicht definiert!" );
>-//			if ( pS )
>-//				pImpEditEngine->SetStyleSheet( EditSelection( aStartPaM, aEndPaM ), pS->sName, SFX_STYLE_FAMILY_ALL );
>-//		}
>-//		else
>         {
>-            // Harte Attribute erzeugen...
>-            // Reicht fuer Calc, bei StyleSheets muesste noch geklaert werden,
>-            // dass diese auch in der App liegen sollten, damit sie beim
>-            // fuettern in eine andere Engine auch noch da sind...
>+            // Create hard attributes ...
>+            // Enough for Calc, would have to be clarified with StyleSheets 
>+            // that they should also be in the app so that when they are feed 
>+            // in a different engine still are here ...
> 
>             USHORT nNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().GetPos( aCurSel.Max().GetNode() );
> //			SfxItemSet aItems( pImpEditEngine->GetEmptyItemSet() );
>@@ -647,7 +612,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::ImpSetStyleSheet( USHORT nHLevel )
>             aItems.ClearItem( EE_CHAR_FONTINFO_CTL );
>             aItems.ClearItem( EE_CHAR_WEIGHT_CTL );
> 
>-            // Fett in den ersten 3 Headings
>+            // Bold in the first 3 Headings
>             if ( ( nHLevel >= 1 ) && ( nHLevel <= 3 ) )
>             {
>                 SvxWeightItem aWeightItem( WEIGHT_BOLD, EE_CHAR_WEIGHT );
>@@ -660,7 +625,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::ImpSetStyleSheet( USHORT nHLevel )
>                 aItems.Put( aWeightItem );
>             }
> 
>-            // Fonthoehe und Abstaende, wenn LogicToLogic moeglich:
>+            // Font hight and margins, when LogicToLogic is possible:
>             MapUnit eUnit = pImpEditEngine->GetRefMapMode().GetMapUnit();
>             if ( ( eUnit != MAP_PIXEL ) && ( eUnit != MAP_SYSFONT ) &&
>                  ( eUnit != MAP_APPFONT ) && ( eUnit != MAP_RELATIVE ) )
>@@ -686,7 +651,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::ImpSetStyleSheet( USHORT nHLevel )
>                 SvxFontHeightItem aHeightItemCTL( nPoints, 100, EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT_CTL );
>                 aItems.Put( aHeightItemCTL );
> 
>-                // Absatzabstaende, wenn Heading:
>+                // Paragraph margins, when Heading:
>                 if ( !nHLevel || ((nHLevel >= 1) && (nHLevel <= 6)) )
>                 {
>                     SvxULSpaceItem aULSpaceItem( EE_PARA_ULSPACE );
>@@ -696,7 +661,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::ImpSetStyleSheet( USHORT nHLevel )
>                 }
>             }
> 
>-            // Bei Pre einen proportionalen Font waehlen
>+            // Choose a proportional Font for Pre 
>             if ( nHLevel == STYLE_PRE )
>             {
>                 Font aFont = OutputDevice::GetDefaultFont( DEFAULTFONT_FIXED, LANGUAGE_SYSTEM, 0 );
>@@ -730,7 +695,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::ImpInsertText( const String& rText )
> 
> void EditHTMLParser::SkipGroup( int nEndToken )
> {
>-    // #69109# groups in cells are closed upon leaving the cell, because those
>+    // groups in cells are closed upon leaving the cell, because those
>     // ******* web authors don't know their job
>     // for example: <td><form></td>   lacks a closing </form>
>     BYTE nCellLevel = nInCell;
>@@ -792,18 +757,14 @@ void EditHTMLParser::EndPara( BOOL )
>         BOOL bHasText = HasTextInCurrentPara();
>         if ( bHasText )
>             ImpInsertParaBreak();
>-        // Nur, wenn ohne Absatzabstaende gearbeitet wird...
>-//		if ( !nInTable && bReal && (nNumberingLevel<=1) && (nBulletLevel<=1) )
>-//			ImpInsertParaBreak();
>     }
>     bInPara = FALSE;
> }
> 
> BOOL EditHTMLParser::ThrowAwayBlank()
> {
>-    // Ein Blank muss weggeschmissen werden, wenn der neue Text mit einem
>-    // Blank beginnt und der aktuelle Absatz leer ist oder mit einem
>-    // Blank endet...
>+    // A blank must be thrown away if the new text begins with a Blank and 
>+    // if the current paragraph is empty or ends with a Blank...
>     ContentNode* pNode = aCurSel.Max().GetNode();
>     if ( pNode->Len() && ( pNode->GetChar( pNode->Len()-1 ) != ' ' ) )
>         return FALSE;
>@@ -817,7 +778,7 @@ BOOL EditHTMLParser::HasTextInCurrentPara()
> 
> void EditHTMLParser::AnchorStart()
> {
>-    // Anker im Anker ignoriern
>+    // ignore anchor in anchor 
>     if ( !pCurAnchor )
>     {
>         const HTMLOptions* _pOptions = GetOptions();
>@@ -856,7 +817,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::AnchorEnd()
> {
>     if ( pCurAnchor )
>     {
>-        // Als URL-Feld einfuegen...
>+        // Insert as URL-Field...
>         SvxFieldItem aFld( SvxURLField( pCurAnchor->aHRef, pCurAnchor->aText, SVXURLFORMAT_REPR ), EE_FEATURE_FIELD  );
>         aCurSel = pImpEditEngine->InsertField( aCurSel, aFld );
>         bFieldsInserted = TRUE;
>@@ -881,7 +842,7 @@ void EditHTMLParser::HeadingStart( int nToken )
> 
>     USHORT nId = sal::static_int_cast< USHORT >(
>         1 + ( ( nToken - HTML_HEAD1_ON ) / 2 ) );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( (nId >= 1) && (nId <= 9), "HeadingStart: ID kann nicht stimmen!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( (nId >= 1) && (nId <= 9), "HeadingStart: ID can not be correct!" );
>     ImpSetStyleSheet( nId );
> }
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/eehtml.hxx b/editeng/source/editeng/eehtml.hxx
>index 75dcfda..ab4d428 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/eehtml.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/eehtml.hxx
>@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ private:
>     AnchorInfo*				pCurAnchor;
> 
>     BOOL					bInPara;
>-    BOOL					bWasInPara;	// bInPara vor HeadingStart merken, weil sonst hinterher weg
>+    BOOL					bWasInPara;	// Remember bInPara before HeadingStart, because afterwards it will be gone.
>     BOOL					bFieldsInserted;
>     BYTE					nInTable;
>     BYTE					nInCell;
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/eeobj.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/eeobj.cxx
>index 34d5959..c5220a6 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/eeobj.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/eeobj.cxx
>@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ uno::Any EditDataObject::getTransferData( const datatransfer::DataFlavor& rFlavo
>     }
>     else if ( ( nT == SOT_FORMATSTR_ID_EDITENGINE ) || ( nT == SOT_FORMAT_RTF ) )
>     {
>-        // MT 01/2002: No RTF on demand any more:
>+        // No RTF on demand any more:
>         // 1) Was not working, because I had to flush() the clipboard immediately anyway
>         // 2) Don't have the old pool defaults and the StyleSheetPool here.
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/eerdll.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/eerdll.cxx
>index 1f0f470..c874362 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/eerdll.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/eerdll.cxx
>@@ -96,8 +96,8 @@ GlobalEditData::GlobalEditData()
> 
> GlobalEditData::~GlobalEditData()
> {
>-    // DefItems zerstoeren...
>-    // Oder einfach stehen lassen, da sowieso App-Ende?!
>+    // Destroy DefItems...
>+    // Or simply keep them, since at end of excecution?!
>     if ( ppDefItems )
>         SfxItemPool::ReleaseDefaults( ppDefItems, EDITITEMCOUNT, TRUE );
>     delete pStdRefDevice;
>@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ SfxPoolItem** GlobalEditData::GetDefItems()
>         ppDefItems[50] = new SvxCharSetColorItem( Color( COL_RED ), RTL_TEXTENCODING_DONTKNOW, EE_FEATURE_NOTCONV );
>         ppDefItems[51] = new SvxFieldItem( SvxFieldData(), EE_FEATURE_FIELD );
> 
>-        DBG_ASSERT( EDITITEMCOUNT == 52, "ITEMCOUNT geaendert, DefItems nicht angepasst!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( EDITITEMCOUNT == 52, "ITEMCOUNT changed, DefItems not adapted!" );
> 
>         // Init DefFonts:
>         GetDefaultFonts( *(SvxFontItem*)ppDefItems[EE_CHAR_FONTINFO - EE_ITEMS_START],
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/eertfpar.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/eertfpar.cxx
>index 3b8d109..60856bc 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/eertfpar.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/eertfpar.cxx
>@@ -44,16 +44,16 @@
> 
> #include <svtools/rtftoken.h>
> 
>-// alle Werte auf default; wird nach einlesen der Bitmap aufgerufen !
>+// Set all values to defaultt; is called after loading the bitmap!
> void SvxRTFPictureType::ResetValues()
>-{	// setze alle Werte RTF-Defaults
>+{	// Set all values RTF-Defaults
>     eStyle = RTF_BITMAP;
>     nMode = HEX_MODE;
>     nType = nGoalWidth = nGoalHeight = 0;
>     nWidth = nHeight = nWidthBytes = 0;
>     uPicLen = 0;
>     nBitsPerPixel = nPlanes = 1;
>-    nScalX = nScalY = 100;		// Skalierung in Prozent
>+    nScalX = nScalY = 100;		// Scale in percent
>     nCropT = nCropB = nCropL = nCropR = 0;
>     aPropertyPairs.clear();
> }
>@@ -87,11 +87,10 @@ EditRTFParser::EditRTFParser( SvStream& rIn, EditSelection aSel, SfxItemPool& rA
> 
>     SetInsPos( EditPosition( pImpEditEngine, &aCurSel ) );
> 
>-    // Umwandeln der Twips-Werte...
>+    // Convert the twips values ...
>     SetCalcValue( TRUE );
>     SetChkStyleAttr( pImpEE->GetStatus().DoImportRTFStyleSheets() );
>-    SetNewDoc( FALSE );		// damit die Pool-Defaults nicht
>-                            // ueberschrieben werden...
>+    SetNewDoc( FALSE );		// So that the Pool-Defaults are not overwritten...
>     aEditMapMode = MapMode( pImpEE->GetRefDevice()->GetMapMode().GetMapUnit() );
> }
> 
>@@ -101,21 +100,21 @@ EditRTFParser::~EditRTFParser()
> 
> SvParserState EditRTFParser::CallParser()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !aCurSel.HasRange(), "Selection bei CallParser!" );
>-    // Den Teil, in den importiert wird, vom Rest abtrennen.
>-    // Diese Mimik sollte fuer alle Imports verwendet werden.
>-    // aStart1PaM: Letzte Position vor dem importierten Inhalt
>-    // aEnd1PaM: Erste Position nach dem importierten Inhalt
>-    // aStart2PaM: Erste Position des importierten Inhaltes
>-    // aEnd2PaM: Letzte Position des importierten Inhaltes
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !aCurSel.HasRange(), "Selection for CallParser!" );
>+    // Separate the part that is imported from the rest.
>+    // This expression should be used for all imports.
>+    // aStart1PaM: Last position before the imported content
>+    // aEnd1PaM: First position after the imported content
>+    // aStart2PaM: First position of the imported content
>+    // aEnd2PaM: Last position of the imported content
>     EditPaM aStart1PaM( aCurSel.Min().GetNode(), aCurSel.Min().GetIndex() );
>     aCurSel = pImpEditEngine->ImpInsertParaBreak( aCurSel );
>     EditPaM aStart2PaM = aCurSel.Min();
>-    // Sinnvoll oder nicht?:
>+    // Useful or not?
>     aStart2PaM.GetNode()->GetContentAttribs().GetItems().ClearItem();
>     AddRTFDefaultValues( aStart2PaM, aStart2PaM );
>     EditPaM aEnd1PaM( pImpEditEngine->ImpInsertParaBreak( aCurSel.Max() ) );
>-    // aCurCel zeigt jetzt auf den Zwischenraum
>+    // aCurCel now points to the gap
> 
>     if ( pImpEditEngine->aImportHdl.IsSet() )
>     {
>@@ -136,7 +135,7 @@ SvParserState EditRTFParser::CallParser()
>         ContentNode* pCurNode = aCurSel.Max().GetNode();
>         USHORT nPara = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().GetPos( pCurNode );
>         ContentNode* pPrevNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( nPara-1 );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pPrevNode, "Ungueltiges RTF-Dokument ?!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pPrevNode, "Invalid RTF-Document?!" );
>         EditSelection aSel;
>         aSel.Min() = EditPaM( pPrevNode, pPrevNode->Len() );
>         aSel.Max() = EditPaM( pCurNode, 0 );
>@@ -145,9 +144,9 @@ SvParserState EditRTFParser::CallParser()
>     EditPaM aEnd2PaM( aCurSel.Max() );
>     //AddRTFDefaultValues( aStart2PaM, aEnd2PaM );
>     BOOL bOnlyOnePara = ( aEnd2PaM.GetNode() == aStart2PaM.GetNode() );
>-    // Den Brocken wieder einfuegen...
>-    // Problem: Absatzattribute duerfen ggf. nicht uebernommen werden
>-    // => Zeichenattribute machen.
>+    // Paste the chunk again ...
>+    // Problem: Paragraph attributes may not possibly be taken over
>+    // => Do Character attributes.
> 
>     BOOL bSpecialBackward = aStart1PaM.GetNode()->Len() ? FALSE : TRUE;
>     if ( bOnlyOnePara || aStart1PaM.GetNode()->Len() )
>@@ -155,7 +154,7 @@ SvParserState EditRTFParser::CallParser()
>     aCurSel.Min() = pImpEditEngine->ImpConnectParagraphs(
>         aStart1PaM.GetNode(), aStart2PaM.GetNode(), bSpecialBackward );
>     bSpecialBackward = aEnd1PaM.GetNode()->Len() ? TRUE : FALSE;
>-    // wenn bOnlyOnePara, dann ist der Node beim Connect verschwunden.
>+    // when bOnlyOnePara, then the node is gone on Connect.
>     if ( !bOnlyOnePara && aEnd1PaM.GetNode()->Len() )
>         pImpEditEngine->ParaAttribsToCharAttribs( aEnd2PaM.GetNode() );
>     aCurSel.Max() = pImpEditEngine->ImpConnectParagraphs(
>@@ -167,7 +166,7 @@ SvParserState EditRTFParser::CallParser()
> 
> void EditRTFParser::AddRTFDefaultValues( const EditPaM& rStart, const EditPaM& rEnd )
> {
>-    // Problem: DefFont und DefFontHeight
>+    // Problem: DefFont and DefFontHeight
>     Size aSz( 12, 0 );
>     MapMode aPntMode( MAP_POINT );
>     MapMode _aEditMapMode( pImpEditEngine->GetRefDevice()->GetMapMode().GetMapUnit() );
>@@ -182,7 +181,7 @@ void EditRTFParser::AddRTFDefaultValues( const EditPaM& rStart, const EditPaM& r
>     for ( USHORT nPara = nStartPara; nPara <= nEndPara; nPara++ )
>     {
>         ContentNode* pNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( nPara );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "AddRTFDefaultValues - Kein Absatz ?!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "AddRTFDefaultValues - No paragraph?!" );
>         if ( !pNode->GetContentAttribs().HasItem( EE_CHAR_FONTINFO ) )
>             pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItems().Put( aFontItem );
>         if ( !pNode->GetContentAttribs().HasItem( EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT ) )
>@@ -244,8 +243,8 @@ void EditRTFParser::NextToken( int nToken )
> 
> void EditRTFParser::UnknownAttrToken( int nToken, SfxItemSet* )
> {
>-    // fuer Tokens, die im ReadAttr nicht ausgewertet werden
>-    // Eigentlich nur fuer Calc (RTFTokenHdl), damit RTF_INTBL
>+    // for Tokens which are not evaluated in ReadAttr
>+    // Actually, only for Calc (RTFTokenHdl), so that RTF_INTBL
>     if ( pImpEditEngine->aImportHdl.IsSet() )
>     {
>         ImportInfo aImportInfo( RTFIMP_UNKNOWNATTR, this, pImpEditEngine->CreateESel( aCurSel ) );
>@@ -290,14 +289,13 @@ void EditRTFParser::MovePos( int bForward )
> void EditRTFParser::SetEndPrevPara( SvxNodeIdx*& rpNodePos,
>                                     USHORT& rCntPos )
> {
>-    //    Gewollt ist: von der aktuellen Einfuegeposition den vorherigen
>-    //              Absatz bestimmen und von dem das Ende setzen.
>-    //              Dadurch wird "\pard" immer auf den richtigen Absatz
>-    //              angewendet.
>+    // The Intention is to: determine the current insert position of the 
>+    //                      previous paragraph and set the end from this. 
>+    //                      This "\pard" always apply on the right paragraph.
> 
>     ContentNode* pN = aCurSel.Max().GetNode();
>     USHORT nCurPara = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().GetPos( pN );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nCurPara != 0, "Absatz gleich 0: SetEnfPrevPara" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nCurPara != 0, "Paragraph equal to 0: SetEnfPrevPara" );
>     if ( nCurPara )
>         nCurPara--;
>     ContentNode* pPrevNode = pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( nCurPara );
>@@ -319,7 +317,7 @@ void EditRTFParser::SetAttrInDoc( SvxRTFItemStackType &rSet )
>     EditPaM aStartPaM( pSttNode, rSet.GetSttCnt() );
>     EditPaM aEndPaM( pEndNode, rSet.GetEndCnt() );
> 
>-    // ggf. noch das Escapemant-Item umbiegen:
>+    // If possible adjust the Escapemant-Item:
>     const SfxPoolItem* pItem;
> 
>     // #i66167# adapt font heights to destination MapUnit if necessary
>@@ -349,7 +347,7 @@ void EditRTFParser::SetAttrInDoc( SvxRTFItemStackType &rSet )
> 
>         if( ( DFLT_ESC_AUTO_SUPER != nEsc ) && ( DFLT_ESC_AUTO_SUB != nEsc ) )
>         {
>-            nEsc *= 10;	//HalPoints => Twips wurde in RTFITEM.CXX unterschlagen!
>+            nEsc *= 10;	//HalPoints => Twips was embezzled in RTFITEM.CXX!
>             SvxFont aFont;
>             pImpEditEngine->SeekCursor( aStartPaM.GetNode(), aStartPaM.GetIndex()+1, aFont );
>             nEsc = nEsc * 100 / aFont.GetSize().Height();
>@@ -376,7 +374,7 @@ void EditRTFParser::SetAttrInDoc( SvxRTFItemStackType &rSet )
>     if ( rSet.StyleNo() && pImpEditEngine->GetStyleSheetPool() && pImpEditEngine->GetStatus().DoImportRTFStyleSheets() )
>     {
>         SvxRTFStyleType* pS = GetStyleTbl().Get( rSet.StyleNo() );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pS, "Vorlage in RTF nicht definiert!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pS, "Template not defined in RTF!" );
>         if ( pS )
>         {
>             pImpEditEngine->SetStyleSheet( EditSelection( aStartPaM, aEndPaM ), (SfxStyleSheet*)pImpEditEngine->GetStyleSheetPool()->Find( pS->sName, SFX_STYLE_FAMILY_ALL ) );
>@@ -384,26 +382,26 @@ void EditRTFParser::SetAttrInDoc( SvxRTFItemStackType &rSet )
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // Wenn ein Attribut von 0 bis aktuelle Absatzlaenge geht,
>-    // soll es ein Absatz-Attribut sein!
>+    // When an Attribute goes from 0 to the current paragraph length,
>+    // it should be a paragraph attribute!
> 
>-    // Achtung: Selektion kann ueber mehrere Absaetze gehen.
>-    // Alle vollstaendigen Absaetze sind Absatzattribute...
>+    // Note: Selection can reach over several paragraphs.
>+    // All Complete paragraphs are paragraph attributes ...
>     for ( USHORT z = nStartNode+1; z < nEndNode; z++ )
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( z ), "Node existiert noch nicht(RTF)" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( z ), "Node does not exist yet(RTF)" );
>         pImpEditEngine->SetParaAttribs( z, rSet.GetAttrSet() );
>     }
> 
>     if ( aStartPaM.GetNode() != aEndPaM.GetNode() )
>     {
>-        // Den Rest des StartNodes...
>+        // The rest dof the StartNodes...
>         if ( aStartPaM.GetIndex() == 0 )
>             pImpEditEngine->SetParaAttribs( nStartNode, rSet.GetAttrSet() );
>         else
>             pImpEditEngine->SetAttribs( EditSelection( aStartPaM, EditPaM( aStartPaM.GetNode(), aStartPaM.GetNode()->Len() ) ), rSet.GetAttrSet() );
> 
>-        // Den Anfang des EndNodes....
>+        // the beginning of the EndNodes....
>         if ( aEndPaM.GetIndex() == aEndPaM.GetNode()->Len() )
>             pImpEditEngine->SetParaAttribs( nEndNode, rSet.GetAttrSet() );
>         else
>@@ -413,7 +411,7 @@ void EditRTFParser::SetAttrInDoc( SvxRTFItemStackType &rSet )
>     {
>         if ( ( aStartPaM.GetIndex() == 0 ) && ( aEndPaM.GetIndex() == aEndPaM.GetNode()->Len() ) )
>         {
>-            // #96298# When settings char attribs as para attribs, we must merge with existing attribs, not overwrite the ItemSet!
>+            // When settings char attribs as para attribs, we must merge with existing attribs, not overwrite the ItemSet!
>             SfxItemSet aAttrs = pImpEditEngine->GetParaAttribs( nStartNode );
>             aAttrs.Put( rSet.GetAttrSet() );
>             pImpEditEngine->SetParaAttribs( nStartNode, aAttrs );
>@@ -446,8 +444,7 @@ SvxRTFStyleType* EditRTFParser::FindStyleSheet( const XubString& rName )
> 
> SfxStyleSheet* EditRTFParser::CreateStyleSheet( SvxRTFStyleType* pRTFStyle )
> {
>-    // Prueffen, ob so eine Vorlage existiert....
>-    // dann wird sie auch nicht geaendert!
>+    // Check if a template exists, then it will not be changed!
>     SfxStyleSheet* pStyle = (SfxStyleSheet*)pImpEditEngine->GetStyleSheetPool()->Find( pRTFStyle->sName, SFX_STYLE_FAMILY_ALL );
>     if ( pStyle )
>         return pStyle;
>@@ -463,21 +460,21 @@ SfxStyleSheet* EditRTFParser::CreateStyleSheet( SvxRTFStyleType* pRTFStyle )
> 
>     pStyle = (SfxStyleSheet*) &pImpEditEngine->GetStyleSheetPool()->Make( aName, SFX_STYLE_FAMILY_PARA );
> 
>-    // 1) Items konvertieren und uebernehmen...
>+    // 1) convert and take over Items ...
>     ConvertAndPutItems( pStyle->GetItemSet(), pRTFStyle->aAttrSet );
> 
>-    // 2) Solange Parent nicht im Pool, auch diesen kreieren...
>+    // 2) As long as Parent is not in the pool, also create this ...
>     if ( aParent.Len() && ( aParent != aName ) )
>     {
>         SfxStyleSheet* pS = (SfxStyleSheet*)pImpEditEngine->GetStyleSheetPool()->Find( aParent, SFX_STYLE_FAMILY_ALL );
>         if ( !pS )
>         {
>-            // Wenn nirgendwo gefunden, aus RTF erzeugen...
>+            // If not found anywhere, create from RTF ...
>             SvxRTFStyleType* _pRTFStyle = FindStyleSheet( aParent );
>             if ( _pRTFStyle )
>                 pS = CreateStyleSheet( _pRTFStyle );
>         }
>-        // 2b) ItemSet mit Parent verknuepfen...
>+        // 2b) Link Itemset with Parent ...
>         if ( pS )
>             pStyle->GetItemSet().SetParent( &pS->GetItemSet() );
>     }
>@@ -486,7 +483,7 @@ SfxStyleSheet* EditRTFParser::CreateStyleSheet( SvxRTFStyleType* pRTFStyle )
> 
> void EditRTFParser::CreateStyleSheets()
> {
>-    // der SvxRTFParser hat jetzt die Vorlagen erzeugt...
>+    // the SvxRTFParser haa  now created the template...
>     if ( pImpEditEngine->GetStyleSheetPool() && pImpEditEngine->GetStatus().DoImportRTFStyleSheets() ) 
>     {
>         SvxRTFStyleType* pRTFStyle = GetStyleTbl().First();
>@@ -509,8 +506,8 @@ void EditRTFParser::CalcValue()
> 
> void EditRTFParser::ReadField()
> {
>-    // Aus SwRTFParser::ReadField()
>-    int _nOpenBrakets = 1;		// die erste wurde schon vorher erkannt
>+    // From SwRTFParser::ReadField()
>+    int _nOpenBrakets = 1;		// the first was already detected earlier
>     BOOL bFldInst = FALSE;
>     BOOL bFldRslt = FALSE;
>     String aFldInst;
>@@ -574,12 +571,12 @@ void EditRTFParser::ReadField()
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    SkipToken( -1 );		// die schliesende Klammer wird "oben" ausgewertet
>+    SkipToken( -1 );		// the closing brace is evaluated "above" 
> }
> 
> void EditRTFParser::SkipGroup()
> {
>-    int _nOpenBrakets = 1;		// die erste wurde schon vorher erkannt
>+    int _nOpenBrakets = 1;		// the first was already detected earlier
> 
>     while( _nOpenBrakets && IsParserWorking() )
>     {
>@@ -599,7 +596,7 @@ void EditRTFParser::SkipGroup()
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    SkipToken( -1 );		// die schliesende Klammer wird "oben" ausgewertet
>+    SkipToken( -1 );		// the closing brace is evaluated "above" 
> }
> 
> ULONG EditNodeIdx::GetIdx() const
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/eertfpar.hxx b/editeng/source/editeng/eertfpar.hxx
>index 9656c9e..73c58a6 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/eertfpar.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/eertfpar.hxx
>@@ -62,10 +62,10 @@ public:
>     virtual ULONG	GetNodeIdx() const;
>     virtual USHORT	GetCntIdx() const;
> 
>-    // erzeuge von sich selbst eine Kopie
>+    // clone
>     virtual SvxPosition* Clone() const;
> 
>-    // erzeuge vom NodeIndex eine Kopie
>+    // clone NodeIndex 
>     virtual SvxNodeIdx* MakeNodeIdx() const;
> };
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit.cxx
>index bfb199d..31637af 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit.cxx
>@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ using namespace ::com::sun::star;
> using namespace ::com::sun::star::uno;
> using namespace ::com::sun::star::linguistic2;
> 
>-#define SCRLRANGE	20		// 1/20 der Breite/Hoehe scrollen, wenn im QueryDrop
>+#define SCRLRANGE	20  // Scroll 1/20 of the width/height, when in QueryDrop
> 
> inline void lcl_AllignToPixel( Point& rPoint, OutputDevice* pOutDev, short nDiffX, short nDiffY )
> {
>@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ void ImpEditView::SetBackgroundColor( const Color& rColor )
> 
> void ImpEditView::SetEditSelection( const EditSelection& rEditSelection )
> {
>-    // #100856# set state before notification
>+    // set state before notification
>     aEditSelection = rEditSelection;
> 
>     if ( pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetNotifyHdl().IsSet() )
>@@ -141,14 +141,13 @@ void ImpEditView::DrawSelection( EditSelection aTmpSel, Region* pRegion )
>     if ( GetSelectionMode() == EE_SELMODE_HIDDEN )
>         return;
> 
>-    // Vor dem Zeichnen der Selektion muss sichergestellt werden,
>-    // das der Fensterinhalt komplett gueltig ist!
>-    // Muss hier stehen, damit auf jeden Fall weg wenn lerr, nicht spaeter
>-    // zwei Paint-Events!
>-    // 19.10: Muss sogar vor Abfrage von bUpdate, falls nach Invalidate
>-    // noch Paints in der Queue, aber jemand schaltet den UpdateMode um!
>+    // It must be ensured before rendering the selection, that the contents of
>+    // the window is completely valid! Must be here so that in any case if 
>+    // empty, then later on two-Paint Events! Must be done even before the 
>+    // query from bUpdate, if after Invalidate paints still in the queue, 
>+    // but someone switches the update mode!
> 
>-    // pRegion: Wenn nicht NULL, dann nur Region berechnen.
>+    // pRegion: When not NULL, then only calculate Region.
>     PolyPolygon* pPolyPoly = NULL;
>     if ( pRegion )
>         pPolyPoly = new PolyPolygon;
>@@ -166,8 +165,8 @@ void ImpEditView::DrawSelection( EditSelection aTmpSel, Region* pRegion )
>         if ( !aTmpSel.HasRange() )
>             return;
> 
>-        // aTmpOutArea: Falls OutputArea > Papierbreite und
>-        // Text > Papierbreite ( uebergrosse Felder )
>+        // aTmpOutArea: if OutputArea > Paper width and
>+        // Text > Paper width ( over large fields )
>         Rectangle aTmpOutArea( aOutArea );
>         if ( aTmpOutArea.GetWidth() > pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetPaperSize().Width() )
>             aTmpOutArea.Right() = aTmpOutArea.Left() + pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetPaperSize().Width();
>@@ -187,8 +186,8 @@ void ImpEditView::DrawSelection( EditSelection aTmpSel, Region* pRegion )
>     for ( sal_uInt16 nPara = nStartPara; nPara <= nEndPara; nPara++ )
>     {
>         ParaPortion* pTmpPortion = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nPara );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pTmpPortion, "Portion in Selektion nicht gefunden!" );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( !pTmpPortion->IsInvalid(), "Portion in Selektion nicht formatiert!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pTmpPortion, "Portion in Selection not found!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( !pTmpPortion->IsInvalid(), "Portion in Selection not formatted!" );
> 
>         if ( !pTmpPortion->IsVisible() || pTmpPortion->IsInvalid() )
>             continue;
>@@ -209,7 +208,7 @@ void ImpEditView::DrawSelection( EditSelection aTmpSel, Region* pRegion )
>         for ( sal_uInt16 nLine = nStartLine; nLine <= nEndLine; nLine++ )
>         {
>             EditLine* pLine = pTmpPortion->GetLines().GetObject( nLine );
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Zeile nicht gefunden: DrawSelection()" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Line not found: DrawSelection()" );
> 
>             BOOL bPartOfLine = FALSE;
>             sal_uInt16 nStartIndex = pLine->GetStart();
>@@ -225,7 +224,7 @@ void ImpEditView::DrawSelection( EditSelection aTmpSel, Region* pRegion )
>                 bPartOfLine = TRUE;
>             }
> 
>-            // Kann passieren, wenn am Anfang einer umgebrochenen Zeile.
>+            // Can happen if at the beginning of a wrapped line.
>             if ( nEndIndex < nStartIndex )
>                 nEndIndex = nStartIndex;
> 
>@@ -236,7 +235,7 @@ void ImpEditView::DrawSelection( EditSelection aTmpSel, Region* pRegion )
>             aTopLeft.Y() += nParaStart;
>             aBottomRight.Y() += nParaStart;
> 
>-            // Nur Painten, wenn im sichtbaren Bereich...
>+            // Only paint if in the visible range ...
>             if ( aTopLeft.Y() > GetVisDocBottom() )
>                 break;
> 
>@@ -346,7 +345,7 @@ Rectangle ImpEditView::GetVisDocArea() const
> 
> Point ImpEditView::GetDocPos( const Point& rWindowPos ) const
> {
>-    // Fensterposition => Dokumentposition
>+    // Window Position => Position Document
>     Point aPoint;
> 
>     if ( !pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->IsVertical() )
>@@ -365,7 +364,7 @@ Point ImpEditView::GetDocPos( const Point& rWindowPos ) const
> 
> Point ImpEditView::GetWindowPos( const Point& rDocPos ) const
> {
>-    // Dokumentposition => Fensterposition
>+    // Document position => window position
>     Point aPoint;
> 
>     if ( !pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->IsVertical() )
>@@ -384,7 +383,7 @@ Point ImpEditView::GetWindowPos( const Point& rDocPos ) const
> 
> Rectangle ImpEditView::GetWindowPos( const Rectangle& rDocRect ) const
> {
>-    // Dokumentposition => Fensterposition
>+    // Document position => window position
>     Point aPos( GetWindowPos( rDocRect.TopLeft() ) );
>     Size aSz = rDocRect.GetSize();
>     Rectangle aRect;
>@@ -412,15 +411,15 @@ void ImpEditView::SetSelectionMode( EESelectionMode	eNewMode )
> {
>     if ( eSelectionMode != eNewMode )
>     {
>-        DrawSelection();	// 'Wegmalen' ...
>+        DrawSelection(); 
>         eSelectionMode = eNewMode;
>-        DrawSelection();	// und neu zeichnen.
>+        DrawSelection();	// redraw
>     }
> }
> 
> void ImpEditView::SetOutputArea( const Rectangle& rRec )
> {
>-    // sollte besser auf Pixel allignt sein!
>+    // should be better be aligned on pixels!
>     Rectangle aNewRec( pOutWin->LogicToPixel( rRec ) );
>     aNewRec = pOutWin->PixelToLogic( aNewRec );
>     aOutArea = aNewRec;
>@@ -439,7 +438,7 @@ void ImpEditView::ResetOutputArea( const Rectangle& rRec )
> {
>     Rectangle aCurArea( aOutArea );
>     SetOutputArea( rRec );
>-    // Umliegende Bereiche invalidieren, wenn UpdateMode der Engine auf sal_True
>+    // Invalidate surrounding areas if in update mode of the engine on sal_True
>     if ( !aCurArea.IsEmpty() && pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetUpdateMode() )
>     {
>         long nMore = 0;
>@@ -578,7 +577,7 @@ void ImpEditView::SetAnchorMode( EVAnchorMode eMode )
> 
> void ImpEditView::CalcAnchorPoint()
> {
>-    // GetHeight() und GetWidth() -1, da Rectangle-Berechnung nicht erwuenscht.
>+    // GetHeight() and GetWidth() -1, because rectangle calculation not prefered.
> 
>     // X:
>     switch ( eAnchorMode )
>@@ -635,7 +634,7 @@ void ImpEditView::CalcAnchorPoint()
> 
> void ImpEditView::ShowCursor( sal_Bool bGotoCursor, sal_Bool bForceVisCursor, USHORT nShowCursorFlags )
> {
>-    // Kein ShowCursor bei einer leeren View...
>+    // No ShowCursor in an empty View ...
>     if ( ( aOutArea.Left() >= aOutArea.Right() ) && ( aOutArea.Top() >= aOutArea.Bottom() ) )
>         return;
> 
>@@ -643,8 +642,8 @@ void ImpEditView::ShowCursor( sal_Bool bGotoCursor, sal_Bool bForceVisCursor, US
>     if ( !pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->IsFormatted() )
>         pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->FormatDoc();
> 
>-    // Aus irgendwelchen Gruenden lande ich waehrend der Formatierung hier,
>-    // wenn sich der Outiner im Paint initialisiert, weil kein SetPool();
>+    // For some reasons I end up here during the formatting, if the Outliner
>+    // is initialized in Paint, because no SetPool();
>     if ( pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->IsFormatting() )
>         return;
>     if ( pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetUpdateMode() == sal_False )
>@@ -707,56 +706,56 @@ void ImpEditView::ShowCursor( sal_Bool bGotoCursor, sal_Bool bForceVisCursor, US
>     }
>     if ( bGotoCursor  ) // && (!pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetStatus().AutoPageSize() ) )
>     {
>-        // pruefen, ob scrollen notwendig...
>-        // wenn scrollen, dann Update() und Scroll() !
>+        // check if scrolling is necessary...
>+        // if scrolling, then update () and Scroll ()!
>         long nDocDiffX = 0;
>         long nDocDiffY = 0;
> 
>         Rectangle aTmpVisArea( GetVisDocArea() );
>-        // aTmpOutArea: Falls OutputArea > Papierbreite und
>-        // Text > Papierbreite ( uebergrosse Felder )
>+        // aTmpOutArea: if OutputArea > Paper width and
>+        // Text > Paper width ( over large fields )
>         long nMaxTextWidth = !IsVertical() ? pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetPaperSize().Width() : pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetPaperSize().Height();
>         if ( aTmpVisArea.GetWidth() > nMaxTextWidth )
>             aTmpVisArea.Right() = aTmpVisArea.Left() + nMaxTextWidth;
> 
>         if ( aEditCursor.Bottom() > aTmpVisArea.Bottom() )
>-        {   // hochscrollen, hier positiv
>+        {   // Scroll up, here positive
>             nDocDiffY = aEditCursor.Bottom() - aTmpVisArea.Bottom();
>         }
>         else if ( aEditCursor.Top() < aTmpVisArea.Top() )
>-        {	// runterscrollen, negativ
>+        {   // Scroll down, here negative
>             nDocDiffY = aEditCursor.Top() - aTmpVisArea.Top();
>         }
> 
>         if ( aEditCursor.Right() > aTmpVisArea.Right() )
>         {
>-            // linksscrollen, positiv
>+            // Scroll left, positiv
>             nDocDiffX = aEditCursor.Right() - aTmpVisArea.Right();
>-            // Darfs ein bischen mehr sein?
>+            // Can it be a little more?
>             if ( aEditCursor.Right() < ( nMaxTextWidth - GetScrollDiffX() ) )
>                 nDocDiffX += GetScrollDiffX();
>             else
>             {
>                 long n = nMaxTextWidth - aEditCursor.Right();
>-                // Bei einem MapMode != RefMapMode kann der EditCursor auch mal ueber
>-                // die Papierbreite Wandern!
>+                // If MapMode != RefMapMode then the EditCursor can go beyond
>+                // the paper width!
>                 nDocDiffX += ( n > 0 ? n : -n );
>             }
>         }
>         else if ( aEditCursor.Left() < aTmpVisArea.Left() )
>-        {	// rechtsscrollen
>-            // negativ:
>+        {	
>+            // Scroll right, negative:
>             nDocDiffX = aEditCursor.Left() - aTmpVisArea.Left();
>-            // Darfs ein bischen mehr sein?
>+            // Can it be a little more?
>             if ( aEditCursor.Left() > ( - (long)GetScrollDiffX() ) )
>                 nDocDiffX -= GetScrollDiffX();
>             else
>                 nDocDiffX -= aEditCursor.Left();
>         }
>-        if ( aPaM.GetIndex() == 0 ) 	// braucht Olli fuer den Outliner
>+        if ( aPaM.GetIndex() == 0 ) 	// Olli needed for the Outliner
>         {
>-            // Aber sicherstellen, dass dadurch der Cursor nicht den
>-            // sichtbaren bereich verlaesst!
>+            // But make sure that the cursor is not leaving visible area 
>+            // because of this!
>             if ( aEditCursor.Left() < aTmpVisArea.GetWidth() )
>             {
>                 nDocDiffX = -aTmpVisArea.Left();
>@@ -768,7 +767,7 @@ void ImpEditView::ShowCursor( sal_Bool bGotoCursor, sal_Bool bForceVisCursor, US
>             long nDiffX = !IsVertical() ? nDocDiffX : -nDocDiffY;
>             long nDiffY = !IsVertical() ? nDocDiffY : nDocDiffX;
> 
>-            // Negativ: Zum Anfang bzw. linken Rand
>+            // Negative: Back to the top or left edge
>             if ( ( Abs( nDiffY ) > pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->nOnePixelInRef ) && DoBigScroll() )
>             {
>                 long nH = aOutArea.GetHeight() / 4;
>@@ -802,7 +801,7 @@ void ImpEditView::ShowCursor( sal_Bool bGotoCursor, sal_Bool bForceVisCursor, US
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // Cursor evtl. etwas stutzen...
>+    // Cursor may trim a little ...
>     if ( ( aEditCursor.Bottom() > GetVisDocTop() ) &&
>          ( aEditCursor.Top() < GetVisDocBottom() ) )
>     {
>@@ -866,9 +865,6 @@ void ImpEditView::ShowCursor( sal_Bool bGotoCursor, sal_Bool bForceVisCursor, US
> 
>         if ( bForceVisCursor )
>             GetCursor()->Show();
>-
>-        // #102936# Call SetInputContext every time, otherwise we may have the wrong font
>-        // if ( !pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->mpIMEInfos )
>         {
>             SvxFont aFont;
>             pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->SeekCursor( aPaM.GetNode(), aPaM.GetIndex()+1, aFont );
>@@ -887,7 +883,7 @@ void ImpEditView::ShowCursor( sal_Bool bGotoCursor, sal_Bool bForceVisCursor, US
> 
> Pair ImpEditView::Scroll( long ndX, long ndY, BYTE nRangeCheck )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->IsFormatted(), "Scroll: Nicht formatiert!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->IsFormatted(), "Scroll: Not formatted!" );
>     if ( !ndX && !ndY )
>         return Range( 0, 0 );
> 
>@@ -895,7 +891,7 @@ Pair ImpEditView::Scroll( long ndX, long ndY, BYTE nRangeCheck )
>     Rectangle aR( aOutArea );
>     aR = pOutWin->LogicToPixel( aR );
>     aR = pOutWin->PixelToLogic( aR );
>-    DBG_ASSERTWARNING( aR == aOutArea, "OutArea vor Scroll nicht aligned" );
>+    DBG_ASSERTWARNING( aR == aOutArea, "OutArea before Scroll not aligned" );
> #endif
> 
>     Rectangle aNewVisArea( GetVisDocArea() );
>@@ -914,9 +910,9 @@ Pair ImpEditView::Scroll( long ndX, long ndY, BYTE nRangeCheck )
>     }
>     if ( ( nRangeCheck == RGCHK_PAPERSZ1 ) && ( aNewVisArea.Bottom() > (long)pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetTextHeight() ) )
>     {
>-        // GetTextHeight noch optimieren!
>-        long nDiff = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetTextHeight() - aNewVisArea.Bottom(); // negativ
>-        aNewVisArea.Move( 0, nDiff );	// koennte im neg. Bereich landen...
>+        // GetTextHeight still optimizing!
>+        long nDiff = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetTextHeight() - aNewVisArea.Bottom(); // negative
>+        aNewVisArea.Move( 0, nDiff );	// could end up in the negative area...
>     }
>     if ( ( aNewVisArea.Top() < 0 ) && ( nRangeCheck != RGCHK_NONE ) )
>         aNewVisArea.Move( 0, -aNewVisArea.Top() );
>@@ -934,13 +930,13 @@ Pair ImpEditView::Scroll( long ndX, long ndY, BYTE nRangeCheck )
>     }
>     if ( ( nRangeCheck == RGCHK_PAPERSZ1 ) && ( aNewVisArea.Right() > (long)pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->CalcTextWidth( FALSE ) ) )
>     {
>-        long nDiff = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->CalcTextWidth( FALSE ) - aNewVisArea.Right(); 	// negativ
>-        aNewVisArea.Move( nDiff, 0 );	// koennte im neg. Bereich landen...
>+        long nDiff = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->CalcTextWidth( FALSE ) - aNewVisArea.Right(); 	// negative
>+        aNewVisArea.Move( nDiff, 0 );	// could end up in the negative area...
>     }
>     if ( ( aNewVisArea.Left() < 0 ) && ( nRangeCheck != RGCHK_NONE ) )
>         aNewVisArea.Move( -aNewVisArea.Left(), 0 );
> 
>-    // Die Differenz muss auf Pixel alignt sein (wegen Scroll!)
>+    // The difference must be alignt on pixel (due to scroll!)
>     long nDiffX = !IsVertical() ? ( GetVisDocLeft() - aNewVisArea.Left() ) : -( GetVisDocTop() - aNewVisArea.Top() );
>     long nDiffY = !IsVertical() ? ( GetVisDocTop() - aNewVisArea.Top() ) : ( GetVisDocLeft() - aNewVisArea.Left() );
> 
>@@ -964,7 +960,8 @@ Pair ImpEditView::Scroll( long ndX, long ndY, BYTE nRangeCheck )
>             aVisDocStartPos.Move( -nRealDiffY, nRealDiffX );
>         // Das Move um den allignten Wert ergibt nicht unbedingt ein
>         // alligntes Rechteck...
>-        // MT 11/00: Align VisArea???
>+        // Aligned value of the move does not necessarily result in aligned 
>+        // rectangle ...
>         aVisDocStartPos = pOutWin->LogicToPixel( aVisDocStartPos );
>         aVisDocStartPos = pOutWin->PixelToLogic( aVisDocStartPos );
>         Rectangle aRec( aOutArea );
>@@ -1071,7 +1068,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditView::MouseButtonUp( const MouseEvent& rMouseEvent )
> 
> sal_Bool ImpEditView::MouseButtonDown( const MouseEvent& rMouseEvent )
> {
>-    pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->CheckIdleFormatter();	// Falls schnelles Tippen und MouseButtonDown
>+    pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->CheckIdleFormatter();	// If fast typing and mouse button downs
>     if ( pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->aStatus.NotifyCursorMovements() )
>         pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->aStatus.GetPrevParagraph() = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().GetPos( GetEditSelection().Max().GetNode() );
>     nTravelXPos = TRAVEL_X_DONTKNOW;
>@@ -1088,7 +1085,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditView::MouseMove( const MouseEvent& rMouseEvent )
> 
> void ImpEditView::Command( const CommandEvent& rCEvt )
> {
>-    pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->CheckIdleFormatter();	// Falls schnelles Tippen und MouseButtonDown
>+    pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->CheckIdleFormatter();	// If fast typing and mouse button down
>     pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->Command( rCEvt, GetEditViewPtr() );
> }
> 
>@@ -1112,7 +1109,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditView::IsWrongSpelledWord( const EditPaM& rPaM, sal_Bool bMarkIfW
>         bIsWrong = rPaM.GetNode()->GetWrongList()->HasWrong( aSel.Min().GetIndex(), aSel.Max().GetIndex() );
>         if ( bIsWrong && bMarkIfWrong )
>         {
>-            DrawSelection();	// alte Selektion 'weg-zeichnen'
>+            DrawSelection();
>             SetEditSelection( aSel );
>             DrawSelection();
>         }
>@@ -1136,8 +1133,8 @@ String ImpEditView::SpellIgnoreOrAddWord( sal_Bool bAdd )
>         else
>         {
>             aWord = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetSelected( GetEditSelection() );
>-            // Und deselektieren
>-            DrawSelection();	// alte Selektion 'weg-zeichnen'
>+            // And deselect
>+            DrawSelection();
>             SetEditSelection( EditSelection( aPaM, aPaM ) );
>             DrawSelection();
>         }
>@@ -1194,7 +1191,7 @@ const SvxFieldItem* ImpEditView::GetField( const Point& rPos, sal_uInt16* pPara,
> 
>     if ( aPaM.GetIndex() == aPaM.GetNode()->Len() )
>     {
>-        // Sonst immer, wenn Feld ganz am Schluss und Mouse unter Text
>+        // Otherwise, whenever the Field at the very end and mouse under the text
>         return 0;
>     }
> 
>@@ -1206,7 +1203,7 @@ const SvxFieldItem* ImpEditView::GetField( const Point& rPos, sal_uInt16* pPara,
>         if ( pAttr->GetStart() == nXPos )
>             if ( pAttr->Which() == EE_FEATURE_FIELD )
>             {
>-                DBG_ASSERT( pAttr->GetItem()->ISA( SvxFieldItem ), "Kein FeldItem..." );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( pAttr->GetItem()->ISA( SvxFieldItem ), "No FieldItem..." );
>                 if ( pPara )
>                     *pPara = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetEditDoc().GetPos( aPaM.GetNode() );
>                 if ( pPos )
>@@ -1405,7 +1402,7 @@ BOOL ImpEditView::IsSelectionAtPoint( const Point& rPosPixel )
> 
>     Point aMousePos( rPosPixel );
> 
>-    // Logische Einheiten...
>+    // Logical units ...
>     aMousePos = GetWindow()->PixelToLogic( aMousePos );
> 
>     if ( ( !GetOutputArea().IsInside( aMousePos ) ) && !pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->IsInSelectionMode() )
>@@ -1424,7 +1421,7 @@ BOOL ImpEditView::SetCursorAtPoint( const Point& rPointPixel )
> 
>     Point aMousePos( rPointPixel );
> 
>-    // Logische Einheiten...
>+    // Logical units ...
>     aMousePos = GetWindow()->PixelToLogic( aMousePos );
> 
>     if ( ( !GetOutputArea().IsInside( aMousePos ) ) && !pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->IsInSelectionMode() )
>@@ -1434,15 +1431,13 @@ BOOL ImpEditView::SetCursorAtPoint( const Point& rPointPixel )
> 
>     Point aDocPos( GetDocPos( aMousePos ) );
> 
>-    // Kann optimiert werden: Erst innerhalb eines Absatzes die Zeilen
>-    // fuer den PaM durchwuehlen, dann nochmal mit dem PaM fuer das Rect,
>-    // obwohl die Zeile schon bekannt ist....
>-    // Das muss doch nicht sein !
>-
>+    // Can be optimized: first go through the lines within a paragraph for PAM,
>+    // then again wiht the PaM for the Rect, even though the line is already 
>+    // known .... This must not be, though!
>     EditPaM aPaM = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetPaM( aDocPos );
>     BOOL bGotoCursor = DoAutoScroll();
> 
>-    // aTmpNewSel: Diff zwischen alt und neu, nicht die neue Selektion
>+    // aTmpNewSel: Diff between old and new, not the new selection
>     EditSelection aTmpNewSel( GetEditSelection().Max(), aPaM );
> 
>     // #i27299#
>@@ -1493,9 +1488,9 @@ void ImpEditView::ShowDDCursor( const Rectangle& rRect )
>         Color aOldFillColor = GetWindow()->GetFillColor();
>         GetWindow()->SetFillColor( Color(4210752) );	// GRAY BRUSH_50, OLDSV, change to DDCursor!
> 
>-        // Hintergrund sichern...
>+        // Save background ...
>         Rectangle aSaveRec( GetWindow()->LogicToPixel( rRect ) );
>-        // lieber etwas mehr sichern...
>+        // prefer to save some more ...
>         aSaveRec.Right() += 1;
>         aSaveRec.Bottom() += 1;
> 
>@@ -1514,7 +1509,7 @@ void ImpEditView::ShowDDCursor( const Rectangle& rRect )
>         if ( ( aCurSzPx.Width() < aNewSzPx.Width() ) ||( aCurSzPx.Height() < aNewSzPx.Height() ) )
>         {
>             sal_Bool bDone = pDragAndDropInfo->pBackground->SetOutputSizePixel( aNewSzPx );
>-            DBG_ASSERT( bDone, "Virtuelles Device kaputt?" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( bDone, "Virtual Device broken?" );
>         }
> #endif
> 
>@@ -1524,7 +1519,7 @@ void ImpEditView::ShowDDCursor( const Rectangle& rRect )
>                                     aSaveRec.TopLeft(), aSaveRec.GetSize(), *GetWindow() );
>         pDragAndDropInfo->aCurSavedCursor = aSaveRec;
> 
>-        // Cursor malen...
>+        // Draw Cursor...
>         GetWindow()->DrawRect( rRect );
> 
>         pDragAndDropInfo->bVisCursor = sal_True;
>@@ -1598,7 +1593,7 @@ void ImpEditView::dragGestureRecognized( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::d
> 
>         pDragAndDropInfo->bStarterOfDD = sal_True;
> 
>-        // Sensibler Bereich, wo gescrollt werden soll.
>+        // Sensitive area to be scrolled.
>         Size aSz( 5, 0 );
>         aSz = GetWindow()->PixelToLogic( aSz );
>         pDragAndDropInfo->nSensibleRange = (sal_uInt16) aSz.Width();
>@@ -1610,7 +1605,7 @@ void ImpEditView::dragGestureRecognized( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::d
>         sal_Int8 nActions = bReadOnly ? datatransfer::dnd::DNDConstants::ACTION_COPY : datatransfer::dnd::DNDConstants::ACTION_COPY_OR_MOVE;
> 
>         rDGE.DragSource->startDrag( rDGE, nActions, 0 /*cursor*/, 0 /*image*/, xData, mxDnDListener );
>-        // Falls Drag&Move in einer Engine, muessen Copy&Del geklammert sein!
>+        // If Drag&Move in an Engine, thenCopy&Del has to be optional!
>         GetCursor()->Hide();
> 
>     }
>@@ -1629,7 +1624,7 @@ void ImpEditView::dragDropEnd( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::dnd::DragSo
>         {
>             if ( pDragAndDropInfo->bStarterOfDD && pDragAndDropInfo->bDroppedInMe )
>             {
>-                // DropPos: Wohin wurde gedroppt, unabhaengig von laenge.
>+                // DropPos: Where was it dropped, irrespective of length.
>                 ESelection aDropPos( pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nStartPara, pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nStartPos, pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nStartPara, pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nStartPos );
>                 ESelection aToBeDelSel = pDragAndDropInfo->aBeginDragSel;
>                 ESelection aNewSel( pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nEndPara, pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nEndPos,
>@@ -1638,11 +1633,11 @@ void ImpEditView::dragDropEnd( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::dnd::DragSo
>                 sal_uInt16 nParaDiff = pDragAndDropInfo->aBeginDragSel.nEndPara - pDragAndDropInfo->aBeginDragSel.nStartPara;
>                 if ( bBeforeSelection )
>                 {
>-                    // aToBeDelSel anpassen.
>-                    DBG_ASSERT( pDragAndDropInfo->aBeginDragSel.nStartPara >= pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nStartPara, "Doch nicht davor?" );
>+                    // Adjust aToBeDelSel.
>+                    DBG_ASSERT( pDragAndDropInfo->aBeginDragSel.nStartPara >= pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nStartPara, "But not before? ");
>                     aToBeDelSel.nStartPara = aToBeDelSel.nStartPara + nParaDiff;
>                     aToBeDelSel.nEndPara = aToBeDelSel.nEndPara + nParaDiff;
>-                    // Zeichen korrigieren?
>+                    // To correct the character?
>                     if ( aToBeDelSel.nStartPara == pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nEndPara )
>                     {
>                         sal_uInt16 nMoreChars;
>@@ -1659,12 +1654,12 @@ void ImpEditView::dragDropEnd( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::dnd::DragSo
>                 }
>                 else
>                 {
>-                    // aToBeDelSel ist ok, aber Selektion der View
>-                    // muss angepasst werden, wenn davor geloescht wird!
>-                    DBG_ASSERT( pDragAndDropInfo->aBeginDragSel.nStartPara <= pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nStartPara, "Doch nicht davor?" );
>+                    // aToBeDelSel is ok, but the selection of the  View
>+                    // has to be adapted, if it was deleted before!
>+                    DBG_ASSERT( pDragAndDropInfo->aBeginDragSel.nStartPara <= pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nStartPara, "But not before? ");
>                     aNewSel.nStartPara = aNewSel.nStartPara - nParaDiff;
>                     aNewSel.nEndPara = aNewSel.nEndPara - nParaDiff;
>-                    // Zeichen korrigieren?
>+                    // To correct the character?
>                     if ( pDragAndDropInfo->aBeginDragSel.nEndPara == pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nStartPara )
>                     {
>                         sal_uInt16 nLessChars;
>@@ -1680,7 +1675,7 @@ void ImpEditView::dragDropEnd( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::dnd::DragSo
> 
>                 DrawSelection();
>                 EditSelection aDelSel( pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->CreateSel( aToBeDelSel ) );
>-                DBG_ASSERT( !aDelSel.DbgIsBuggy( pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->aEditDoc ), "ToBeDel ist buggy!" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( !aDelSel.DbgIsBuggy( pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->aEditDoc ), "ToBeDel is buggy!" );
>                 pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->ImpDeleteSelection( aDelSel );
>                 if ( !bBeforeSelection )
>                 {
>@@ -1692,7 +1687,7 @@ void ImpEditView::dragDropEnd( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::dnd::DragSo
>             }
>             else
>             {
>-                // andere EditEngine...
>+                // other EditEngine ...
>                 if ( pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->ImplHasText() )   // #88630# SC ist removing the content when switching the task
>                     DeleteSelected();
>             }
>@@ -1739,7 +1734,7 @@ void ImpEditView::drop( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::dnd::DropTargetDro
>             if ( xDataObj.is() )
>             {
>                 bChanges = TRUE;
>-                // Selektion wegmalen...
>+                // remove Selection ...
>                 DrawSelection();
>                 EditPaM aPaM( pDragAndDropInfo->aDropDest );
> 
>@@ -1757,7 +1752,7 @@ void ImpEditView::drop( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::dnd::DropTargetDro
>                 pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->FormatAndUpdate( pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->GetActiveView() );
>                 if ( pDragAndDropInfo->bStarterOfDD )
>                 {
>-                    // Nur dann setzen, wenn in gleicher Engine!
>+                    // Only set if the same engine!
>                     pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nStartPara = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->aEditDoc.GetPos( aPaM.GetNode() );
>                     pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nStartPos = aPaM.GetIndex();
>                     pDragAndDropInfo->aDropSel.nEndPara = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->aEditDoc.GetPos( aNewSel.Max().GetNode() );
>@@ -1833,9 +1828,7 @@ void ImpEditView::dragOver( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::dnd::DropTarge
> 
>     if ( GetOutputArea().IsInside( aMousePos ) && !bReadOnly )
>     {
>-//        sal_Int8 nSupportedActions = bReadOnly ? datatransfer::dnd::DNDConstants::ACTION_COPY : datatransfer::dnd::DNDConstants::ACTION_COPY_OR_MOVE;
>-
>-        if ( pDragAndDropInfo && pDragAndDropInfo->bHasValidData /* && ( nSupportedActions & rDTDE.DropAction ) MT: Default = 0x80 ?! */ )
>+        if ( pDragAndDropInfo && pDragAndDropInfo->bHasValidData )
>         {
>             bAccept = sal_True;
> 
>@@ -1844,7 +1837,7 @@ void ImpEditView::dragOver( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::dnd::DropTarge
>             {
>                 long nScrollX = 0;
>                 long nScrollY = 0;
>-                // pruefen, ob im sensitiven Bereich
>+                // Chech if in the sensitive area
>                 if ( ( (aMousePos.X()-pDragAndDropInfo->nSensibleRange) < GetOutputArea().Left() ) && ( ( aMousePos.X() + pDragAndDropInfo->nSensibleRange ) > GetOutputArea().Left() ) )
>                         nScrollX = GetOutputArea().GetWidth() / SCRLRANGE;
>                 else if ( ( (aMousePos.X()+pDragAndDropInfo->nSensibleRange) > GetOutputArea().Right() ) && ( ( aMousePos.X() - pDragAndDropInfo->nSensibleRange ) < GetOutputArea().Right() ) )
>@@ -1888,7 +1881,7 @@ void ImpEditView::dragOver( const ::com::sun::star::datatransfer::dnd::DropTarge
>             }
>             else if ( HasSelection() )
>             {
>-                // es darf nicht in eine Selektion gedroppt werden
>+                // it must not be dropped into a selection
>                 EPaM aP = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->CreateEPaM( aPaM );
>                 ESelection aDestSel( aP.nPara, aP.nIndex, aP.nPara, aP.nIndex);
>                 ESelection aCurSel = pEditEngine->pImpEditEngine->CreateESel( GetEditSelection() );
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit.hxx b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit.hxx
>index 9193e19..5bed250 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit.hxx
>@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ public:
> 
>     BOOL            IsBulletArea( const Point& rPos, sal_uInt16* pPara );
> 
>-//	Fuer die SelectionEngine...
>+//	For the Selection Engine...
>     void			CreateAnchor();
>     void			DeselectAll();
>     sal_Bool 		SetCursorAtPoint( const Point& rPointPixel );
>@@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ public:
>     const SvxFieldItem* GetField( const Point& rPos, sal_uInt16* pPara, sal_uInt16* pPos ) const;
>     void                DeleteSelected();
> 
>-    // Ggf. mehr als OutputArea invalidieren, fuer den DrawingEngine-Textrahmen...
>+    //  If possible invalidate more than OutputArea, for the DrawingEngine text frame
>     void			SetInvalidateMore( sal_uInt16 nPixel ) { nInvMore = nPixel; }
>     sal_uInt16		GetInvalidateMore() const { return (sal_uInt16)nInvMore; }
> };
>@@ -390,8 +390,8 @@ SV_DECL_PTRARR( EditViews, EditViewPtr, 0, 1 )
> 
> class ImpEditEngine : public SfxListener
> {
>-    // Die Undos muessen direkt manipulieren ( private-Methoden ),
>-    // damit keine neues Undos eingefuegt werden!
>+    // The Undos have to manipulate directly ( private-Methods ),
>+    // do that no new Undo is inserted!
>     friend class EditUndoInsertChars;
>     friend class EditUndoRemoveChars;
>     friend class EditUndoDelContent;
>@@ -402,26 +402,26 @@ class ImpEditEngine : public SfxListener
> 
>     friend class EditView;
>     friend class ImpEditView;
>-    friend class EditEngine;		// Fuer Zugriff auf Imp-Methoden
>-    friend class EditRTFParser;		// Fuer Zugriff auf Imp-Methoden
>-    friend class EditHTMLParser;	// Fuer Zugriff auf Imp-Methoden
>-    friend class EdtAutoCorrDoc;	// Fuer Zugriff auf Imp-Methoden
>-    friend class EditDbg;			// DebugRoutinen
>+    friend class EditEngine;		// For access to Imp-Methods
>+    friend class EditRTFParser;		// For access to Imp-Methods
>+    friend class EditHTMLParser;	// For access to Imp-Methods
>+    friend class EdtAutoCorrDoc;	// For access to Imp-Methods
>+    friend class EditDbg;			// Debug Routines
> 
> private:
> 
>     // ================================================================
>-    // Daten...
>+    // Data ...
>     // ================================================================
> 
>-    // Dokument-Spezifische Daten...
>-    ParaPortionList		aParaPortionList;		// Formatierung
>+    // Document Specific data ...
>+    ParaPortionList		aParaPortionList;		// Formatting
>     Size				aPaperSize;				// Layout
>     Size				aMinAutoPaperSize;		// Layout ?
>     Size				aMaxAutoPaperSize;		// Layout ?
>-    EditDoc				aEditDoc;				// Dokumenteninhalt
>+    EditDoc				aEditDoc;				// Document content
> 
>-    // Engine-Spezifische Daten....
>+    // Engine Specific data ...
>     EditEngine*			pEditEngine;
>     EditViews			aEditViews;
>     EditView*			pActiveView;
>@@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ private:
>     sal_Bool            bImpConvertFirstCall;   // specifies if ImpConvert is called the very first time after Convert was called
>     sal_Bool            bFirstWordCapitalization;   // specifies if auto-correction should capitalize the first word or not
> 
>-    // Fuer Formatierung / Update....
>+    // For Formatting / Update ....
>     DeletedNodesList	aDeletedNodes;
>     Rectangle			aInvalidRec;
>     sal_uInt32			nCurTextHeight;
>@@ -506,8 +506,8 @@ private:
> 
>     Timer				aOnlineSpellTimer;
> 
>-    // Wenn an einer Stelle erkannt wird, dass der StatusHdl gerufen werden
>-    // muss, dies aber nicht sofort geschehen darf (kritischer Abschnitt):
>+    // If it is detected at one point that the StatusHdl has to be called, but 
>+    // this should not happen immediately (critical section):
>     Timer				aStatusTimer;
>     Link				aStatusHdlLink;
>     Link				aNotifyHdl;
>@@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ private:
> 
> 
>     // ================================================================
>-    // Methoden...
>+    // Methods...
>     // ================================================================
> 
>     void				CursorMoved( ContentNode* pPrevNode );
>@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ private:
>     void			    TextModified();
>     void				CalcHeight( ParaPortion* pPortion );
> 
>-    // ggf. lieber inline, aber so einiges...
>+    // may prefer in-line, but so few ...
>     void				InsertUndo( EditUndo* pUndo, sal_Bool bTryMerge = sal_False );
>     void				ResetUndoManager();
>     sal_Bool			HasUndoManager() const	{ return pUndoManager ? sal_True : sal_False; }
>@@ -844,7 +844,7 @@ public:
> 
>     void			IndentBlock( EditView* pView, sal_Bool bRight );
> 
>-//	Fuer Undo/Redo
>+//	For Undo/Redo
>     sal_Bool 		Undo( EditView* pView );
>     sal_Bool 		Redo( EditView* pView );
>     sal_Bool 		Repeat( EditView* pView );
>@@ -1048,8 +1048,8 @@ inline EPaM ImpEditEngine::CreateEPaM( const EditPaM& rPaM )
> 
> inline EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CreateEditPaM( const EPaM& rEPaM )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rEPaM.nPara < aEditDoc.Count(), "CreateEditPaM: Ungueltiger Absatz" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc[ rEPaM.nPara ]->Len() >= rEPaM.nIndex, "CreateEditPaM: Ungueltiger Index" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rEPaM.nPara < aEditDoc.Count(), "CreateEditPaM: invalid paragraph" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc[ rEPaM.nPara ]->Len() >= rEPaM.nIndex, "CreateEditPaM: invalid Index" );
>     return EditPaM( aEditDoc[ rEPaM.nPara], rEPaM.nIndex );
> }
> 
>@@ -1067,14 +1067,14 @@ inline ESelection ImpEditEngine::CreateESel( const EditSelection& rSel )
> 
> inline EditSelection ImpEditEngine::CreateSel( const ESelection& rSel )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rSel.nStartPara < aEditDoc.Count(), "CreateSel: Ungueltiger Start-Absatz" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rSel.nEndPara < aEditDoc.Count(), "CreateSel: Ungueltiger End-Absatz" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rSel.nStartPara < aEditDoc.Count(), "CreateSel: invalid start paragraph" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rSel.nEndPara < aEditDoc.Count(), "CreateSel: invalid end paragraph" );
>     EditSelection aSel;
>     aSel.Min().SetNode( aEditDoc[ rSel.nStartPara ] );
>     aSel.Min().SetIndex( rSel.nStartPos );
>     aSel.Max().SetNode( aEditDoc[ rSel.nEndPara ] );
>     aSel.Max().SetIndex( rSel.nEndPos );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !aSel.DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "CreateSel: Fehlerhafte Selektion!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !aSel.DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "CreateSel: incorrect selection!" );
>     return aSel;
> }
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit2.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit2.cxx
>index d610c68..3fce7a3 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit2.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit2.cxx
>@@ -80,18 +80,6 @@ using namespace ::com::sun::star;
> USHORT lcl_CalcExtraSpace( ParaPortion*, const SvxLineSpacingItem& rLSItem )
> {
>     USHORT nExtra = 0;
>-    /* if ( ( rLSItem.GetInterLineSpaceRule() == SVX_INTER_LINE_SPACE_PROP )
>-            && ( rLSItem.GetPropLineSpace() != 100 ) )
>-    {
>-        // ULONG nH = pPortion->GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().GetDefFont().GetSize().Height();
>-        ULONG nH = pPortion->GetLines().GetObject( 0 )->GetHeight();
>-        long n = nH * rLSItem.GetPropLineSpace();
>-        n /= 100;
>-        n -= nH;	// nur den Abstand
>-        if ( n > 0 )
>-            nExtra = (USHORT)n;
>-    }
>-    else */
>     if ( rLSItem.GetInterLineSpaceRule() == SVX_INTER_LINE_SPACE_FIX )
>     {
>         nExtra = rLSItem.GetInterLineSpace();
>@@ -177,7 +165,7 @@ ImpEditEngine::ImpEditEngine( EditEngine* pEE, SfxItemPool* pItemPool ) :
> 
>     pRefDev 			= EE_DLL()->GetGlobalData()->GetStdRefDevice();
> 
>-    // Ab hier wird schon auf Daten zugegriffen!
>+    // Access data already from here on!
>     SetRefDevice( pRefDev );
>     InitDoc( FALSE );
> 
>@@ -194,9 +182,9 @@ ImpEditEngine::~ImpEditEngine()
>     aOnlineSpellTimer.Stop();
>     aIdleFormatter.Stop();
> 
>-    // das Zerstoeren von Vorlagen kann sonst unnoetiges Formatieren ausloesen,
>-    // wenn eine Parent-Vorlage zerstoert wird.
>-    // Und das nach dem Zerstoeren der Daten!
>+    // Destroying templates may otherwise cause unnecessary formatting, 
>+    // when a parent template is destroyed. 
>+    // And this after the destruction of the data!
>     bDowning = TRUE;
>     SetUpdateMode( FALSE );
> 
>@@ -237,7 +225,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetRefMapMode( const MapMode& rMapMode )
>     if ( GetRefDevice()->GetMapMode() == rMapMode )
>         return;
> 
>-    // Wenn RefDev == GlobalRefDev => eigenes anlegen!
>+    // When RefDev == GlobalRefDev => create own!
>     if ( !bOwnerOfRefDev && ( pRefDev == EE_DLL()->GetGlobalData()->GetStdRefDevice() ) )
>     {
>         pRefDev = new VirtualDevice;
>@@ -309,19 +297,19 @@ XubString ImpEditEngine::GetSelected( const EditSelection& rSel, const LineEnd e
>     USHORT nStartNode = aEditDoc.GetPos( pStartNode );
>     USHORT nEndNode = aEditDoc.GetPos( pEndNode );
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nStartNode <= nEndNode, "Selektion nicht sortiert ?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nStartNode <= nEndNode, "Selection not sorted ?" );
> 
>-    // ueber die Absaetze iterieren...
>+    // iterate over the paragraphs ...
>     for ( USHORT nNode = nStartNode; nNode <= nEndNode; nNode++	)
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nNode ), "Node nicht gefunden: GetSelected" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nNode ), "Node not found: GetSelected" );
>         ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.GetObject( nNode );
> 
>         xub_StrLen nStartPos = 0;
>         xub_StrLen nEndPos = pNode->Len();
>         if ( nNode == nStartNode )
>             nStartPos = aSel.Min().GetIndex();
>-        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // kann auch == nStart sein!
>+        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // can also be == nStart!
>             nEndPos = aSel.Max().GetIndex();
> 
>         aText += aEditDoc.GetParaAsString( pNode, nStartPos, nEndPos );
>@@ -340,13 +328,13 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::MouseButtonDown( const MouseEvent& rMEvt, EditView* pView )
>         SetAutoCompleteText( String(), TRUE );
> 
>     GetSelEngine().SelMouseButtonDown( rMEvt );
>-    // Sonderbehandlungen
>+    // Special treatment
>     EditSelection aCurSel( pView->pImpEditView->GetEditSelection() );
>     if ( !rMEvt.IsShift() )
>     {
>         if ( rMEvt.GetClicks() == 2 )
>         {
>-            // damit die SelectionEngine weiss, dass Anker.
>+            // So that the SelectionEngine knows about the anchor.
>             aSelEngine.CursorPosChanging( TRUE, FALSE );
> 
>             EditSelection aNewSelection( SelectWord( aCurSel ) );
>@@ -357,7 +345,7 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::MouseButtonDown( const MouseEvent& rMEvt, EditView* pView )
>         }
>         else if ( rMEvt.GetClicks() == 3 )
>         {
>-            // damit die SelectionEngine weiss, dass Anker.
>+            // So that the SelectionEngine knows about the anchor.
>             aSelEngine.CursorPosChanging( TRUE, FALSE );
> 
>             EditSelection aNewSelection( aCurSel );
>@@ -381,9 +369,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Command( const CommandEvent& rCEvt, EditView* pView )
>         const CommandVoiceData* pData = rCEvt.GetVoiceData();
>         if ( pData->GetType() == VOICECOMMANDTYPE_DICTATION )
>         {
>-            // Funktionen auf KeyEvents umbiegen, wenn keine entsprechende
>-            // Methode an EditView/EditEngine, damit Undo konsistent bleibt.
>-
>+            // Turn functions into KeyEvent if no corresponding method to 
>+            // EditView/EditEngine so that Undo remains consistent.
>             SfxPoolItem* pNewAttr = NULL;
> 
>             switch ( pData->GetCommand() )
>@@ -536,7 +523,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Command( const CommandEvent& rCEvt, EditView* pView )
>     }
>     else if ( rCEvt.GetCommand() == COMMAND_EXTTEXTINPUT )
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERT( mpIMEInfos, "COMMAND_EXTTEXTINPUT => Kein Start ?" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( mpIMEInfos, "COMMAND_EXTTEXTINPUT => No Start ?" );
>         if( mpIMEInfos )
>         {
>             const CommandExtTextInputData* pData = rCEvt.GetExtTextInputData();
>@@ -679,7 +666,7 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::MouseButtonUp( const MouseEvent& rMEvt, EditView* pView )
>     GetSelEngine().SetCurView( pView );
>     GetSelEngine().SelMouseButtonUp( rMEvt );
>     bInSelection = FALSE;
>-    // Sonderbehandlungen
>+    // Special treatments
>     EditSelection aCurSel( pView->pImpEditView->GetEditSelection() );
>     if ( !aCurSel.HasRange() )
>     {
>@@ -699,9 +686,7 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::MouseButtonUp( const MouseEvent& rMEvt, EditView* pView )
> 
> BOOL ImpEditEngine::MouseMove( const MouseEvent& rMEvt, EditView* pView )
> {
>-    // MouseMove wird sofort nach ShowQuickHelp() gerufen!
>-//	if ( GetAutoCompleteText().Len() )
>-//		SetAutoCompleteText( String(), TRUE );
>+    // MouseMove is called directly after ShowQuickHelp()!
>     GetSelEngine().SetCurView( pView );
>     GetSelEngine().SelMouseMove( rMEvt );
>     return TRUE;
>@@ -753,10 +738,10 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::RemoveText()
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::SetText( const XubString& rText )
> {
>-    // RemoveText loescht die Undo-Liste!
>+    // RemoveText deletes the undo list!
>     EditPaM aStartPaM = RemoveText();
>     BOOL bUndoCurrentlyEnabled = IsUndoEnabled();
>-    // Der von Hand reingesteckte Text kann nicht vom Anwender rueckgaengig gemacht werden.
>+    // The text inserted manually can not be made reversable by the user
>     EnableUndo( FALSE );
> 
>     EditSelection aEmptySel( aStartPaM, aStartPaM );
>@@ -769,8 +754,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetText( const XubString& rText )
>         EditView* pView = aEditViews[nView];
>         DBG_CHKOBJ( pView, EditView, 0 );
>         pView->pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( EditSelection( aPaM, aPaM ) );
>-        // Wenn kein Text, dann auch Kein Format&Update
>-        // => Der Text bleibt stehen.
>+        //  If no text then also no Format&Update
>+        // => The text remains.
>         if ( !rText.Len() && GetUpdateMode() )
>         {
>             Rectangle aTmpRec( pView->GetOutputArea().TopLeft(),
>@@ -779,11 +764,11 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetText( const XubString& rText )
>             pView->GetWindow()->Invalidate( aTmpRec );
>         }
>     }
>-    if( !rText.Len() )	// sonst muss spaeter noch invalidiert werden, !bFormatted reicht.
>+    if( !rText.Len() )	// otherwise it must be invalidated later, !bFormatted is enough.
>         nCurTextHeight = 0;
>     EnableUndo( bUndoCurrentlyEnabled );
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !HasUndoManager() || !GetUndoManager().GetUndoActionCount(), "Undo nach SetText?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !HasUndoManager() || !GetUndoManager().GetUndoActionCount(), "Undo after SetText?" );
> #endif
> }
> 
>@@ -806,7 +791,7 @@ const SfxItemSet& ImpEditEngine::GetEmptyItemSet()
> //	----------------------------------------------------------------------
> void ImpEditEngine::CursorMoved( ContentNode* pPrevNode )
> {
>-    // Leere Attribute loeschen, aber nur, wenn Absatz nicht leer!
>+    // Delete empty attributes, but only if paragraph is not empty!
>     if ( pPrevNode->GetCharAttribs().HasEmptyAttribs() && pPrevNode->Len() )
>         pPrevNode->GetCharAttribs().DeleteEmptyAttribs( aEditDoc.GetItemPool() );
> }
>@@ -826,7 +811,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::TextModified()
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::ParaAttribsChanged( ContentNode* pNode )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "ParaAttribsChanged: Welcher?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "ParaAttribsChanged: Which one?" );
> 
>     aEditDoc.SetModified( TRUE );
>     bFormatted = FALSE;
>@@ -839,18 +824,18 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ParaAttribsChanged( ContentNode* pNode )
>     pEditEngine->ParaAttribsChanged( nPara );
> 
>     ParaPortion* pNextPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nPara+1 );
>-    // => wird sowieso noch formatiert, wenn Invalid.
>+    // => is formatted again anyway, if Invalid.
>     if ( pNextPortion && !pNextPortion->IsInvalid() )
>         CalcHeight( pNextPortion );
> }
> 
> //	----------------------------------------------------------------------
>-//	Cursorbewegungen
>+//	Cursor movements
> //	----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
> EditSelection ImpEditEngine::MoveCursor( const KeyEvent& rKeyEvent, EditView* pEditView )
> {
>-    // Eigentlich nur bei Up/Down noetig, aber was solls.
>+    // Actually, only necessary for up/down, but whatever.
>     CheckIdleFormatter();
> 
>     EditPaM aPaM( pEditView->pImpEditView->GetEditSelection().Max() );
>@@ -876,13 +861,6 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::MoveCursor( const KeyEvent& rKeyEvent, EditView* pE
>             aPaM = CursorVisualLeftRight( pEditView, aPaM, rKeyEvent.GetKeyCode().IsMod2() ? i18n::CharacterIteratorMode::SKIPCHARACTER : i18n::CharacterIteratorMode::SKIPCELL, rKeyEvent.GetKeyCode().GetCode() == KEY_LEFT );
>             nCode = 0;  // skip switch statement
>         }
>-        /*
>-        else if ( !bCtrl && ( ( nCode == KEY_HOME ) || ( nCode == KEY_END ) ) )
>-        {
>-            aPaM = CursorVisualStartEnd( pEditView, aPaM, nCode == KEY_HOME );
>-            nCode = 0;  // skip switch statement
>-        }
>-        */
>     }
> 
>     bool bKeyModifySelection = aTranslatedKeyEvent.GetKeyCode().IsShift();
>@@ -1010,14 +988,14 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::MoveCursor( const KeyEvent& rKeyEvent, EditView* pE
>     else
>         aStatus.GetStatusWord() = aStatus.GetStatusWord() | EE_STAT_CRSRMOVEFAIL;
> 
>-    // Bewirkt evtl. ein CreateAnchor oder Deselection all
>+    // May cause, an CreateAnchor or deselection all
>     aSelEngine.SetCurView( pEditView );
>     aSelEngine.CursorPosChanging( bKeyModifySelection, aTranslatedKeyEvent.GetKeyCode().IsMod1() );
>     EditPaM aOldEnd( pEditView->pImpEditView->GetEditSelection().Max() );
>     pEditView->pImpEditView->GetEditSelection().Max() = aPaM;
>     if ( bKeyModifySelection )
>     {
>-        // Dann wird die Selektion erweitert...
>+        // Then the selection is expanded ...
>         EditSelection aTmpNewSel( aOldEnd, aPaM );
>         pEditView->pImpEditView->DrawSelection( aTmpNewSel );
>     }
>@@ -1043,7 +1021,6 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorVisualStartEnd( EditView* pEditView, const EditPaM&
>     if ( !bEmptyLine )
>     {
>         String aLine( *aPaM.GetNode(), pLine->GetStart(), pLine->GetEnd() - pLine->GetStart() );
>-//        USHORT nPosInLine = aPaM.GetIndex() - pLine->GetStart();
> 
>         const sal_Unicode* pLineString = aLine.GetBuffer();
> 
>@@ -1064,7 +1041,6 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorVisualStartEnd( EditView* pEditView, const EditPaM&
>         USHORT nTextPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().FindPortion( aPaM.GetIndex(), nTmp, TRUE );
>         TextPortion* pTextPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( nTextPortion );
>         USHORT nRTLLevel = pTextPortion->GetRightToLeft();
>-//        BOOL bParaRTL = IsRightToLeft( nPara );
>         BOOL bPortionRTL = nRTLLevel%2 ? TRUE : FALSE;
> 
>         if ( bStart )
>@@ -1096,7 +1072,6 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorVisualLeftRight( EditView* pEditView, const EditPaM
>     EditLine* pLine = pParaPortion->GetLines().GetObject( nLine );
>     BOOL bEmptyLine = pLine->GetStart() == pLine->GetEnd();
> 
>-//    USHORT nCurrentCursorFlags = pEditView->pImpEditView->nExtraCursorFlags;
>     pEditView->pImpEditView->nExtraCursorFlags = 0;
> 
>     BOOL bParaRTL = IsRightToLeft( nPara );
>@@ -1222,8 +1197,6 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorVisualLeftRight( EditView* pEditView, const EditPaM
>             {
>                 if ( bWasBehind || bRTLPortion || bBeforePortion )
>                     nVisPos++;
>-//                if ( bWasBehind && bRTLPortion )
>-//                    nVisPos++;
>             }
> 
>             bGotoEndOfPrevLine = nVisPos < 0;
>@@ -1233,22 +1206,11 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorVisualLeftRight( EditView* pEditView, const EditPaM
>             {
>                 USHORT nLogPos = (USHORT)ubidi_getLogicalIndex( pBidi, nVisPos, &nError );
> 
>-/*
>-                if ( nLogPos == aPaM.GetIndex() )
>-                {
>-                    if ( bVisualToLeft )
>-                        bGotoEndOfPrevLine = TRUE;
>-                    else
>-                        bGotoStartOfNextLine = TRUE;
>-                }
>-                else
>-*/
>                 {
>                     aPaM.GetIndex() = pLine->GetStart() + nLogPos;
> 
>                     // RTL portion, stay visually on the left side.
>                     USHORT _nPortionStart;
>-                    // USHORT nTextPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().FindPortion( aPaM.GetIndex(), nPortionStart, !bRTLPortion );
>                     USHORT _nTextPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().FindPortion( aPaM.GetIndex(), _nPortionStart, TRUE );
>                     TextPortion* _pTextPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( _nTextPortion );
>                     if ( bVisualToLeft && !bRTLPortion && ( _pTextPortion->GetRightToLeft() % 2 ) )
>@@ -1332,10 +1294,10 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorRight( const EditPaM& rPaM, USHORT nCharacterIterat
> 
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorUp( const EditPaM& rPaM, EditView* pView )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pView, "Keine View - Keine Cursorbewegung!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pView, "No View - No Cursor Movement!" );
> 
>     ParaPortion* pPPortion = FindParaPortion( rPaM.GetNode() );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Keine passende Portion gefunden: CursorUp" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "No matching portion found: CursorUp ");
>     USHORT nLine = pPPortion->GetLineNumber( rPaM.GetIndex() );
>     EditLine* pLine = pPPortion->GetLines().GetObject( nLine );
> 
>@@ -1349,23 +1311,24 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorUp( const EditPaM& rPaM, EditView* pView )
>         nX = pView->pImpEditView->nTravelXPos;
> 
>     EditPaM aNewPaM( rPaM );
>-    if ( nLine )	// gleicher Absatz
>+    if ( nLine )	// same paragraph
>     {
>         EditLine* pPrevLine = pPPortion->GetLines().GetObject(nLine-1);
>         aNewPaM.SetIndex( GetChar( pPPortion, pPrevLine, nX ) );
>-        // Wenn davor eine autom.Umgebrochene Zeile, und ich muss genau an das
>-        // Ende dieser Zeile, landet der Cursor in der aktuellen Zeile am Anfang
>-        // Siehe Problem: Letztes Zeichen einer autom.umgebr. Zeile = Cursor
>+        // If a previous automatically wrapped line, and one has to be exactly 
>+        // at the end of this line, the cursor lands on the current line at the
>+        // beginning. See Problem: Last character of an automatically wrapped
>+        // Row = cursor
>         if ( aNewPaM.GetIndex() && ( aNewPaM.GetIndex() == pLine->GetStart() ) )
>             aNewPaM = CursorLeft( aNewPaM );
>     }
>-    else	// vorheriger Absatz
>+    else	// previous paragraph
>     {
>         ParaPortion* pPrevPortion = GetPrevVisPortion( pPPortion );
>         if ( pPrevPortion )
>         {
>             pLine = pPrevPortion->GetLines().GetObject( pPrevPortion->GetLines().Count()-1 );
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Zeile davor nicht gefunden: CursorUp" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Line in front not found: CursorUp" );
>             aNewPaM.SetNode( pPrevPortion->GetNode() );
>             aNewPaM.SetIndex( GetChar( pPrevPortion, pLine, nX+nOnePixelInRef ) );
>         }
>@@ -1376,10 +1339,10 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorUp( const EditPaM& rPaM, EditView* pView )
> 
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorDown( const EditPaM& rPaM, EditView* pView )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pView, "Keine View - Keine Cursorbewegung!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pView, "No View - No Cursor Movement!" );
> 
>     ParaPortion* pPPortion = FindParaPortion( rPaM.GetNode() );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Keine passende Portion gefunden: CursorDown" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "No matching portion found: CursorDown" );
>     USHORT nLine = pPPortion->GetLineNumber( rPaM.GetIndex() );
> 
>     long nX;
>@@ -1397,20 +1360,20 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorDown( const EditPaM& rPaM, EditView* pView )
>     {
>         EditLine* pNextLine = pPPortion->GetLines().GetObject(nLine+1);
>         aNewPaM.SetIndex( GetChar( pPPortion, pNextLine, nX ) );
>-        // Sonderbehandlung siehe CursorUp...
>+        // Special treatment, see CursorUp ...
>         if ( ( aNewPaM.GetIndex() == pNextLine->GetEnd() ) && ( aNewPaM.GetIndex() > pNextLine->GetStart() ) && ( aNewPaM.GetIndex() < pPPortion->GetNode()->Len() ) )
>             aNewPaM = CursorLeft( aNewPaM );
>     }
>-    else	// naechster Absatz
>+    else	// next paragraph
>     {
>         ParaPortion* pNextPortion = GetNextVisPortion( pPPortion );
>         if ( pNextPortion )
>         {
>             EditLine* pLine = pNextPortion->GetLines().GetObject(0);
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Zeile davor nicht gefunden: CursorUp" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Line in front not found: CursorUp" );
>             aNewPaM.SetNode( pNextPortion->GetNode() );
>-            // Nie ganz ans Ende wenn mehrere Zeilen, da dann eine
>-            // Zeile darunter der Cursor angezeigt wird.
>+            // Never at the very end when several lines, because then a line 
>+            // below the cursor appears.
>             aNewPaM.SetIndex( GetChar( pNextPortion, pLine, nX+nOnePixelInRef ) );
>             if ( ( aNewPaM.GetIndex() == pLine->GetEnd() ) && ( aNewPaM.GetIndex() > pLine->GetStart() ) && ( pNextPortion->GetLines().Count() > 1 ) )
>                 aNewPaM = CursorLeft( aNewPaM );
>@@ -1423,10 +1386,10 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorDown( const EditPaM& rPaM, EditView* pView )
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorStartOfLine( const EditPaM& rPaM )
> {
>     ParaPortion* pCurPortion = FindParaPortion( rPaM.GetNode() );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pCurPortion, "Keine Portion fuer den PaM ?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pCurPortion, "No Portion for the PaM ?" );
>     USHORT nLine = pCurPortion->GetLineNumber( rPaM.GetIndex() );
>     EditLine* pLine = pCurPortion->GetLines().GetObject(nLine);
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Aktuelle Zeile nicht gefunden ?!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Current line not found ?!" );
> 
>     EditPaM aNewPaM( rPaM );
>     aNewPaM.SetIndex( pLine->GetStart() );
>@@ -1436,28 +1399,27 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorStartOfLine( const EditPaM& rPaM )
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorEndOfLine( const EditPaM& rPaM )
> {
>     ParaPortion* pCurPortion = FindParaPortion( rPaM.GetNode() );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pCurPortion, "Keine Portion fuer den PaM ?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pCurPortion, "No Portion for the PaM ?" );
>     USHORT nLine = pCurPortion->GetLineNumber( rPaM.GetIndex() );
>     EditLine* pLine = pCurPortion->GetLines().GetObject(nLine);
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Aktuelle Zeile nicht gefunden ?!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Current line not found ?!" );
> 
>     EditPaM aNewPaM( rPaM );
>     aNewPaM.SetIndex( pLine->GetEnd() );
>     if ( pLine->GetEnd() > pLine->GetStart() )
>     {
>-//		xub_Unicode cLastChar = aNewPaM.GetNode()->GetChar( aNewPaM.GetIndex()-1 );
>         if ( aNewPaM.GetNode()->IsFeature( aNewPaM.GetIndex() - 1 ) )
>         {
>-            // Bei einem weichen Umbruch muss ich davor stehen!
>+            // When a soft break, be in front of it!
>             EditCharAttrib* pNextFeature = aNewPaM.GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().FindFeature( aNewPaM.GetIndex()-1 );
>             if ( pNextFeature && ( pNextFeature->GetItem()->Which() == EE_FEATURE_LINEBR ) )
>                 aNewPaM = CursorLeft( aNewPaM );
>         }
>         else if ( ( aNewPaM.GetNode()->GetChar( aNewPaM.GetIndex() - 1 ) == ' ' ) && ( aNewPaM.GetIndex() != aNewPaM.GetNode()->Len() ) )
>         {
>-            // Bei einem Blank in einer autom. umgebrochenen Zeile macht es Sinn,
>-            // davor zu stehen, da der Anwender hinter das Wort will.
>-            // Wenn diese geaendert wird, Sonderbehandlung fuer Pos1 nach End!
>+            // For a Blank in an auto wrapped line, it makes sense, to stand 
>+            // in front of it, since the user wants to be after the word. 
>+            // If this is changed, special treatment for Pos1 to End!
>             aNewPaM = CursorLeft( aNewPaM );
>         }
>     }
>@@ -1486,7 +1448,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::CursorEndOfDoc()
> {
>     ContentNode* pLastNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( aEditDoc.Count()-1 );
>     ParaPortion* pLastPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( aEditDoc.Count()-1 );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pLastNode && pLastPortion, "CursorEndOfDoc: Node oder Portion nicht gefunden" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pLastNode && pLastPortion, "CursorEndOfDoc: Node or Portion not found" );
> 
>     if ( !pLastPortion->IsVisible() )
>     {
>@@ -1533,7 +1495,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::WordLeft( const EditPaM& rPaM, sal_Int16 nWordType )
>     EditPaM aNewPaM( rPaM );
>     if ( nCurrentPos == 0 )
>     {
>-        // Vorheriger Absatz...
>+        // Previous paragraph...
>         USHORT nCurPara = aEditDoc.GetPos( aNewPaM.GetNode() );
>         ContentNode* pPrevNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( --nCurPara );
>         if ( pPrevNode )
>@@ -1581,7 +1543,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::WordRight( const EditPaM& rPaM, sal_Int16 nWordType )
>     // not 'else', maybe the index reached nMax now...
>     if ( aNewPaM.GetIndex() >= nMax )
>     {
>-        // Naechster Absatz...
>+        // Next paragraph ...
>         USHORT nCurPara = aEditDoc.GetPos( aNewPaM.GetNode() );
>         ContentNode* pNextNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( ++nCurPara );
>         if ( pNextNode )
>@@ -1723,8 +1685,6 @@ void ImpEditEngine::InitScriptTypes( USHORT nPara )
>     ScriptTypePosInfos& rTypes = pParaPortion->aScriptInfos;
>     rTypes.Remove( 0, rTypes.Count() );
> 
>-//	pParaPortion->aExtraCharInfos.Remove( 0, pParaPortion->aExtraCharInfos.Count() );
>-
>     ContentNode* pNode = pParaPortion->GetNode();
>     if ( pNode->Len() )
>     {
>@@ -2091,7 +2051,6 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::HasDifferentRTLLevels( const ContentNode* pNode )
> 
> BYTE ImpEditEngine::GetRightToLeft( USHORT nPara, USHORT nPos, USHORT* pStart, USHORT* pEnd )
> {
>-//    BYTE nRightToLeft = IsRightToLeft( nPara ) ? 1 : 0;
>     BYTE nRightToLeft = 0;
> 
>     ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nPara );
>@@ -2101,7 +2060,6 @@ BYTE ImpEditEngine::GetRightToLeft( USHORT nPara, USHORT nPos, USHORT* pStart, U
>         if ( !pParaPortion->aWritingDirectionInfos.Count() )
>             InitWritingDirections( nPara );
> 
>-//        BYTE nType = 0;
>         WritingDirectionInfos& rDirInfos = pParaPortion->aWritingDirectionInfos;
>         for ( USHORT n = 0; n < rDirInfos.Count(); n++ )
>         {
>@@ -2154,7 +2112,7 @@ SvxCellVerJustify ImpEditEngine::GetVerJustification( USHORT nPara ) const
> 
> 
> //	----------------------------------------------------------------------
>-//	Textaenderung
>+//	Text changes
> //	----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::ImpRemoveChars( const EditPaM& rPaM, USHORT nChars, EditUndoRemoveChars* pCurUndo )
>@@ -2163,11 +2121,10 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpRemoveChars( const EditPaM& rPaM, USHORT nChars, EditUndo
>     {
>         XubString aStr( rPaM.GetNode()->Copy( rPaM.GetIndex(), nChars ) );
> 
>-        // Pruefen, ob Attribute geloescht oder geaendert werden:
>+        // Check whether attributes are deleted or changed:
>         USHORT nStart = rPaM.GetIndex();
>         USHORT nEnd = nStart + nChars;
>         CharAttribArray& rAttribs = rPaM.GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs();
>-//		USHORT nAttrs = rAttribs.Count();
>         for ( USHORT nAttr = 0; nAttr < rAttribs.Count(); nAttr++ )
>         {
>             EditCharAttrib* pAttr = rAttribs[nAttr];
>@@ -2198,8 +2155,8 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::ImpMoveParagraphs( Range aOldPositions, USHORT nNew
> {
>     aOldPositions.Justify();
>     BOOL bValidAction = ( (long)nNewPos < aOldPositions.Min() ) || ( (long)nNewPos > aOldPositions.Max() );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( bValidAction, "Move in sich selbst ?" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( aOldPositions.Max() <= (long)GetParaPortions().Count(), "Voll drueber weg: MoveParagraphs" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( bValidAction, "Move in itself?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( aOldPositions.Max() <= (long)GetParaPortions().Count(), "totally over it: MoveParagraphs" );
> 
>     EditSelection aSelection;
> 
>@@ -2250,14 +2207,14 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::ImpMoveParagraphs( Range aOldPositions, USHORT nNew
>     if ( IsUndoEnabled() && !IsInUndo())
>         InsertUndo( new EditUndoMoveParagraphs( this, aOldPositions, nNewPos ) );
> 
>-    // Position nicht aus dem Auge verlieren!
>+    // do not lose sight of the Position !
>     ParaPortion* pDestPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nNewPos );
> 
>     ParaPortionList aTmpPortionList;
>     USHORT i;
>     for ( i = (USHORT)aOldPositions.Min(); i <= (USHORT)aOldPositions.Max(); i++  )
>     {
>-        // Immer aOldPositions.Min(), da Remove().
>+        // always aOldPositions.Min(), since Remove().
>         ParaPortion* pTmpPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject( (USHORT)aOldPositions.Min() );
>         GetParaPortions().Remove( (USHORT)aOldPositions.Min() );
>         aEditDoc.Remove( (USHORT)aOldPositions.Min() );
>@@ -2265,7 +2222,7 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::ImpMoveParagraphs( Range aOldPositions, USHORT nNew
>     }
> 
>     USHORT nRealNewPos = pDestPortion ? GetParaPortions().GetPos( pDestPortion ) : GetParaPortions().Count();
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nRealNewPos != USHRT_MAX, "ImpMoveParagraphs: Ungueltige Position!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nRealNewPos != USHRT_MAX, "ImpMoveParagraphs: Invalid Position!" );
> 
>     for ( i = 0; i < (USHORT)aTmpPortionList.Count(); i++  )
>     {
>@@ -2305,7 +2262,7 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::ImpMoveParagraphs( Range aOldPositions, USHORT nNew
>     if ( pRecalc4 )
>         CalcHeight( pRecalc4 );
> 
>-    aTmpPortionList.Remove( 0, aTmpPortionList.Count() );	// wichtig !
>+    aTmpPortionList.Remove( 0, aTmpPortionList.Count() );	// important !
> 
> #ifdef EDITDEBUG
>     GetParaPortions().DbgCheck(aEditDoc);
>@@ -2316,9 +2273,9 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::ImpMoveParagraphs( Range aOldPositions, USHORT nNew
> 
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpConnectParagraphs( ContentNode* pLeft, ContentNode* pRight, BOOL bBackward )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pLeft != pRight, "Den gleichen Absatz zusammenfuegen ?" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.GetPos( pLeft ) != USHRT_MAX, "Einzufuegenden Node nicht gefunden(1)" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.GetPos( pRight ) != USHRT_MAX, "Einzufuegenden Node nicht gefunden(2)" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pLeft != pRight, "Join together the same paragraph ?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.GetPos( pLeft ) != USHRT_MAX, "Inserted node not found (1)" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.GetPos( pRight ) != USHRT_MAX, "Inserted node not found (2)" );
> 
>     USHORT nParagraphTobeDeleted = aEditDoc.GetPos( pRight );
>     DeletedNodeInfo* pInf = new DeletedNodeInfo( (ULONG)pRight, nParagraphTobeDeleted );
>@@ -2345,11 +2302,11 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpConnectParagraphs( ContentNode* pLeft, ContentNode* pR
> 
>     ParaAttribsChanged( pLeft );
> 
>-    // Erstmal Portions suchen, da pRight nach ConnectParagraphs weg.
>+    // First search for Portions since pRight is gone after ConnectParagraphs.
>     ParaPortion* pLeftPortion = FindParaPortion( pLeft );
>     ParaPortion* pRightPortion = FindParaPortion( pRight );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pLeftPortion, "Blinde Portion in ImpConnectParagraphs(1)" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pRightPortion, "Blinde Portion in ImpConnectParagraphs(2)" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pLeftPortion, "Blind Portion in ImpConnectParagraphs(1)" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pRightPortion, "Blind Portion in ImpConnectParagraphs(2)" );
>     DBG_ASSERT( nParagraphTobeDeleted == GetParaPortions().GetPos( pRightPortion ), "NodePos != PortionPos?" );
> 
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>@@ -2357,14 +2314,14 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpConnectParagraphs( ContentNode* pLeft, ContentNode* pR
>     {
>         xub_StrLen nEnd = pLeft->Len();
>         xub_StrLen nInv = nEnd ? nEnd-1 : nEnd;
>-        pLeft->GetWrongList()->ClearWrongs( nInv, 0xFFFF, pLeft );	// Evtl. einen wegnehmen
>+        pLeft->GetWrongList()->ClearWrongs( nInv, 0xFFFF, pLeft );	// Possibly remove one
>         pLeft->GetWrongList()->MarkInvalid( nInv, nEnd+1 );
>-        // Falschgeschriebene Woerter ruebernehmen:
>+        // Take over misspelled words 
>         USHORT nRWrongs = pRight->GetWrongList()->Count();
>         for ( USHORT nW = 0; nW < nRWrongs; nW++ )
>         {
>             WrongRange aWrong = pRight->GetWrongList()->GetObject( nW );
>-            if ( aWrong.nStart != 0 ) 	// Nicht ein anschliessender
>+            if ( aWrong.nStart != 0 ) 	// Not a subsequent
>             {
>                 aWrong.nStart = aWrong.nStart + nEnd;
>                 aWrong.nEnd = aWrong.nEnd + nEnd;
>@@ -2383,13 +2340,12 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpConnectParagraphs( ContentNode* pLeft, ContentNode* pR
> 
>     pLeftPortion->MarkSelectionInvalid( aPaM.GetIndex(), pLeft->Len() );
> 
>-    // der rechte Node wird von EditDoc::ConnectParagraphs() geloescht.
>-
>+    // the right node is deleted by EditDoc:ConnectParagraphs().
>     if ( GetTextRanger() )
>     {
>-        // Durch das zusammenfuegen wird der linke zwar neu formatiert, aber
>-        // wenn sich dessen Hoehe nicht aendert bekommt die Formatierung die
>-        // Aenderung der Gesaamthoehe des Textes zu spaet mit...
>+        // By joining together the two, the left is although reformatted, 
>+        // however if its height does not change then the formatting receives 
>+        // the change of the total text hight too late...
>         for ( USHORT n = nParagraphTobeDeleted; n < GetParaPortions().Count(); n++ )
>         {
>             ParaPortion* pPP = GetParaPortions().GetObject( n );
>@@ -2405,9 +2361,9 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpConnectParagraphs( ContentNode* pLeft, ContentNode* pR
> 
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::DeleteLeftOrRight( const EditSelection& rSel, BYTE nMode, BYTE nDelMode )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !EditSelection( rSel ).DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "Index im Wald in DeleteLeftOrRight" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !EditSelection( rSel ).DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "Index out of range in DeleteLeftOrRight" );
> 
>-    if ( rSel.HasRange() )	// dann nur Sel. loeschen
>+    if ( rSel.HasRange() )	// only then Delete Selection
>         return ImpDeleteSelection( rSel );
> 
>     const EditPaM aCurPos( rSel.Max() );
>@@ -2430,7 +2386,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::DeleteLeftOrRight( const EditSelection& rSel, BYTE nMode,
>             aDelStart.SetIndex( 0 );
>             if ( aDelStart == aCurPos )
>             {
>-                // kompletter Absatz davor
>+                // Complete paragraph previous 
>                 ContentNode* pPrev = GetPrevVisNode( aCurPos.GetNode() );
>                 if ( pPrev )
>                     aDelStart = EditPaM( pPrev, 0 );
>@@ -2466,7 +2422,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::DeleteLeftOrRight( const EditSelection& rSel, BYTE nMode,
>             aDelEnd.SetIndex( aCurPos.GetNode()->Len() );
>             if ( aDelEnd == aCurPos )
>             {
>-                // kompletter Absatz dahinter
>+                // Complete paragraph next
>                 ContentNode* pNext = GetNextVisNode( aCurPos.GetNode() );
>                 if ( pNext )
>                     aDelEnd = EditPaM( pNext, pNext->Len() );
>@@ -2474,12 +2430,12 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::DeleteLeftOrRight( const EditSelection& rSel, BYTE nMode,
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // Bei DELMODE_RESTOFCONTENT reicht bei verschiedenen Nodes
>-    // kein ConnectParagraphs.
>+    // ConnectParagraphs  not enoguh for different Nodes when 
>+    // DELMODE_RESTOFCONTENT.
>     if ( ( nDelMode == DELMODE_RESTOFCONTENT ) || ( aDelStart.GetNode() == aDelEnd.GetNode() ) )
>         return ImpDeleteSelection( EditSelection( aDelStart, aDelEnd ) );
> 
>-    // Jetzt entscheiden, ob noch Selektion loeschen (RESTOFCONTENTS)
>+    // Decide now if to delete selection (RESTOFCONTENTS)
>     BOOL bSpecialBackward = ( ( nMode == DEL_LEFT ) && ( nDelMode == DELMODE_SIMPLE ) )
>                                 ? TRUE : FALSE;
>     if ( aStatus.IsAnyOutliner() )
>@@ -2497,11 +2453,11 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpDeleteSelection( EditSelection aSel )
>     EditPaM aStartPaM( aSel.Min() );
>     EditPaM aEndPaM( aSel.Max() );
> 
>-    CursorMoved( aStartPaM.GetNode() ); // nur damit neu eingestellte Attribute verschwinden...
>-    CursorMoved( aEndPaM.GetNode() );	// nur damit neu eingestellte Attribute verschwinden...
>+    CursorMoved( aStartPaM.GetNode() ); // only so that newly set Attributes dissapear...
>+    CursorMoved( aEndPaM.GetNode() );	// only so that newly set Attributes dissapear...
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( aStartPaM.GetIndex() <= aStartPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "Index im Wald in ImpDeleteSelection" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( aEndPaM.GetIndex() <= aEndPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "Index im Wald in ImpDeleteSelection" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( aStartPaM.GetIndex() <= aStartPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "Index out of range in ImpDeleteSelection" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( aEndPaM.GetIndex() <= aEndPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "Index out of range in ImpDeleteSelection" );
> 
>     USHORT nStartNode = aEditDoc.GetPos( aStartPaM.GetNode() );
>     USHORT nEndNode = aEditDoc.GetPos( aEndPaM.GetNode() );
>@@ -2509,31 +2465,31 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpDeleteSelection( EditSelection aSel )
>     DBG_ASSERT( nEndNode != USHRT_MAX, "Start > End ?!" );
>     DBG_ASSERT( nStartNode <= nEndNode, "Start > End ?!" );
> 
>-    // Alle Nodes dazwischen entfernen....
>+    // Remove all nodes in between ....
>     for ( ULONG z = nStartNode+1; z < nEndNode; z++ )
>     {
>-        // Immer nStartNode+1, wegen Remove()!
>+        // Always nStartNode+1, due to Remove()!
>         ImpRemoveParagraph( nStartNode+1 );
>     }
> 
>     if ( aStartPaM.GetNode() != aEndPaM.GetNode() )
>     {
>-        // Den Rest des StartNodes...
>+        // The Rest of the StartNodes...
>         USHORT nChars;
>         nChars = aStartPaM.GetNode()->Len() - aStartPaM.GetIndex();
>         ImpRemoveChars( aStartPaM, nChars );
>         ParaPortion* pPortion = FindParaPortion( aStartPaM.GetNode() );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blinde Portion in ImpDeleteSelection(3)" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blind Portion in ImpDeleteSelection(3)" );
>         pPortion->MarkSelectionInvalid( aStartPaM.GetIndex(), aStartPaM.GetNode()->Len() );
> 
>-        // Den Anfang des EndNodes....
>+        // The beginning of the EndNodes....
>         nChars = aEndPaM.GetIndex();
>         aEndPaM.SetIndex( 0 );
>         ImpRemoveChars( aEndPaM, nChars );
>         pPortion = FindParaPortion( aEndPaM.GetNode() );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blinde Portion in ImpDeleteSelection(4)" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blind Portion in ImpDeleteSelection(4)" );
>         pPortion->MarkSelectionInvalid( 0, aEndPaM.GetNode()->Len() );
>-        // Zusammenfuegen....
>+        // Join together....
>         aStartPaM = ImpConnectParagraphs( aStartPaM.GetNode(), aEndPaM.GetNode() );
>     }
>     else
>@@ -2542,7 +2498,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpDeleteSelection( EditSelection aSel )
>         nChars = aEndPaM.GetIndex() - aStartPaM.GetIndex();
>         ImpRemoveChars( aStartPaM, nChars );
>         ParaPortion* pPortion = FindParaPortion( aStartPaM.GetNode() );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blinde Portion in ImpDeleteSelection(5)" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blind Portion in ImpDeleteSelection(5)" );
>         pPortion->MarkInvalid( aEndPaM.GetIndex(), aStartPaM.GetIndex() - aEndPaM.GetIndex() );
>     }
> 
>@@ -2557,13 +2513,13 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpRemoveParagraph( USHORT nPara )
>     ContentNode* pNextNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nPara+1 );
>     ParaPortion* pPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nPara );
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Blinder Node in ImpRemoveParagraph" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blinde Portion in ImpRemoveParagraph(2)" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Blind Node in ImpRemoveParagraph" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blind Portion in ImpRemoveParagraph(2)" );
> 
>     DeletedNodeInfo* pInf = new DeletedNodeInfo( (ULONG)pNode, nPara );
>     aDeletedNodes.Insert( pInf, aDeletedNodes.Count() );
> 
>-    // Der Node wird vom Undo verwaltet und ggf. zerstoert!
>+    // The node is managed by the undo and possibly destroyed!
>     /* delete */ aEditDoc.Remove( nPara );
>     GetParaPortions().Remove( nPara );
>     delete pPortion;
>@@ -2573,9 +2529,9 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpRemoveParagraph( USHORT nPara )
>         GetEditEnginePtr()->ParagraphDeleted( nPara );
>     }
> 
>-    // Im folgenden muss ggf. Extra-Space neu ermittelt werden.
>-    // Bei ParaAttribsChanged wird leider der Absatz neu formatiert,
>-    // aber diese Methode sollte nicht Zeitkritsch sein!
>+    // Extra-Space may be determined again in the following. For 
>+    // ParaAttribsChanged the paragraph is unfortunately formatted again, 
>+    // however this method should not be time critical!
>     if ( pNextNode )
>         ParaAttribsChanged( pNextNode );
> 
>@@ -2658,8 +2614,8 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::AutoCorrect( const EditSelection& rCurSel, xub_Unicode c,
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::InsertText( const EditSelection& rCurSel,
>         xub_Unicode c, BOOL bOverwrite, sal_Bool bIsUserInput )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( c != '\t', "Tab bei InsertText ?" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( c != '\n', "Zeilenumbruch bei InsertText ?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( c != '\t', "Tab for InsertText ?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( c != '\n', "Word wrapping for InsertText ")?;
> 
>     EditPaM aPaM( rCurSel.Min() );
> 
>@@ -2677,10 +2633,10 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::InsertText( const EditSelection& rCurSel,
>     }
>     else if ( bDoOverwrite )
>     {
>-        // Wenn Selektion, dann nicht auch noch ein Zeichen ueberschreiben!
>+        // If selected, then do not also overwrite a character!
>         EditSelection aTmpSel( aPaM );
>         aTmpSel.Max().GetIndex()++;
>-        DBG_ASSERT( !aTmpSel.DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "Overwrite: Fehlerhafte Selektion!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( !aTmpSel.DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "Overwrite: Wrong selection! ");
>         ImpDeleteSelection( aTmpSel );
>     }
> 
>@@ -2747,9 +2703,9 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::InsertText( const EditSelection& rCurSel,
> 
>         aEditDoc.InsertText( (const EditPaM&)aPaM, c );
>         ParaPortion* pPortion = FindParaPortion( aPaM.GetNode() );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blinde Portion in InsertText" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blind Portion in InsertText" );
>         pPortion->MarkInvalid( aPaM.GetIndex(), 1 );
>-        aPaM.GetIndex()++;   // macht EditDoc-Methode nicht mehr
>+        aPaM.GetIndex()++;   // does not do EditDoc-Method anymore
>     }
> 
>     TextModified();
>@@ -2770,7 +2726,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpInsertText( EditSelection aCurSel, const XubString& rS
>     else
>         aPaM = aCurSel.Max();
> 
>-    EditPaM aCurPaM( aPaM );	// fuers Invalidieren
>+    EditPaM aCurPaM( aPaM );	// for the Invalidate
> 
>     // get word boundaries in order to clear possible WrongList entries
>     // and invalidate all the necessary text (everything after and including the 
>@@ -2781,18 +2737,18 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpInsertText( EditSelection aCurSel, const XubString& rS
>     aText.ConvertLineEnd( LINEEND_LF );
>     SfxVoidItem aTabItem( EE_FEATURE_TAB );
> 
>-    // Konvertiert nach LineSep = \n
>-    // Token mit LINE_SEP abfragen,
>-    // da der MAC-Compiler aus \n etwas anderes macht!
>+    // Converts to linesep = \n
>+    // Token LINE_SEP query,
>+    // since the MAC-Compiler makes something else from \n !
> 
>     USHORT nStart = 0;
>     while ( nStart < aText.Len() )
>     {
>         USHORT nEnd = aText.Search( LINE_SEP, nStart );
>         if ( nEnd == STRING_NOTFOUND )
>-            nEnd = aText.Len();	// nicht dereferenzieren!
>+            nEnd = aText.Len();	// not dereference!
> 
>-        // Start == End => Leerzeile
>+        // Start == End => empty line
>         if ( nEnd > nStart )
>         {
>             XubString aLine( aText, nStart, nEnd-nStart );
>@@ -2800,8 +2756,8 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpInsertText( EditSelection aCurSel, const XubString& rS
>             if ( nChars > MAXCHARSINPARA )
>             {
>                 USHORT nMaxNewChars = MAXCHARSINPARA-aPaM.GetNode()->Len();
>-                nEnd -= ( aLine.Len() - nMaxNewChars );	// Dann landen die Zeichen im naechsten Absatz.
>-                aLine.Erase( nMaxNewChars );            // Del Rest...
>+                nEnd -= ( aLine.Len() - nMaxNewChars );	// Then the characters end up in the next paragraph.
>+                aLine.Erase( nMaxNewChars );            // Delete the Rest...
>             }
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>             if ( IsUndoEnabled() && !IsInUndo() )
>@@ -2817,20 +2773,19 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpInsertText( EditSelection aCurSel, const XubString& rS
>                 {
>                     USHORT nEnd2 = aLine.Search( '\t', nStart2 );
>                     if ( nEnd2 == STRING_NOTFOUND )
>-                        nEnd2 = aLine.Len();	// nicht dereferenzieren!
>+                        nEnd2 = aLine.Len();	// not dereference!
> 
>                     if ( nEnd2 > nStart2 )
>                         aPaM = aEditDoc.InsertText( aPaM, XubString( aLine, nStart2, nEnd2-nStart2 ) );
>                     if ( nEnd2 < aLine.Len() )
>                     {
>-                        // aPaM = ImpInsertFeature( EditSelection( aPaM, aPaM ),  );
>                         aPaM = aEditDoc.InsertFeature( aPaM, aTabItem );
>                     }
>                     nStart2 = nEnd2+1;
>                 }
>             }
>             ParaPortion* pPortion = FindParaPortion( aPaM.GetNode() );
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blinde Portion in InsertText" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blind Portion in InsertText" );
> 
>             // now remove the Wrongs (red spell check marks) from both words...
>             WrongList *pWrongs = aCurPaM.GetNode()->GetWrongList();
>@@ -2853,9 +2808,9 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpInsertText( EditSelection aCurSel, const XubString& rS
> 
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpFastInsertText( EditPaM aPaM, const XubString& rStr )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( 0x0A ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "FastInsertText: Zeilentrenner nicht erlaubt!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( 0x0D ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "FastInsertText: Zeilentrenner nicht erlaubt!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( '\t' ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "FastInsertText: Features nicht erlaubt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( 0x0A ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "FastInsertText: Newline not allowed! ");
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( 0x0D ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "FastInsertText: Newline not allowed! ");
>+    DBG_ASSERT( rStr.Search( '\t' ) == STRING_NOTFOUND, "FastInsertText: Newline not allowed! ");
> 
>     if ( ( aPaM.GetNode()->Len() + rStr.Len() ) < MAXCHARSINPARA )
>     {
>@@ -2893,7 +2848,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpInsertFeature( EditSelection aCurSel, const SfxPoolIte
>     aPaM = aEditDoc.InsertFeature( aPaM, rItem );
> 
>     ParaPortion* pPortion = FindParaPortion( aPaM.GetNode() );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blinde Portion in InsertFeature" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blind Portion in InsertFeature" );
>     pPortion->MarkInvalid( aPaM.GetIndex()-1, 1 );
> 
>     TextModified();
>@@ -2934,12 +2889,13 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpInsertParaBreak( const EditPaM& rPaM, BOOL bKeepEnding
>         aPaM.GetNode()->CreateWrongList();
>         WrongList* pLWrongs = rPaM.GetNode()->GetWrongList();
>         WrongList* pRWrongs = aPaM.GetNode()->GetWrongList();
>-        // Falschgeschriebene Woerter ruebernehmen:
>+        // take over misspelled words:
>         USHORT nLWrongs = pLWrongs->Count();
>         for ( USHORT nW = 0; nW < nLWrongs; nW++ )
>         {
>             WrongRange& rWrong = pLWrongs->GetObject( nW );
>-            // Nur wenn wirklich dahinter, ein ueberlappendes wird beim Spell korrigiert
>+            // Correct only if really a word gets overlapped in the process of
>+            // Spell checking
>             if ( rWrong.nStart > nEnd )
>             {
>                 pRWrongs->InsertWrong( rWrong, pRWrongs->Count() );
>@@ -2955,18 +2911,18 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpInsertParaBreak( const EditPaM& rPaM, BOOL bKeepEnding
>             pLWrongs->MarkInvalid( nInv, nEnd );
>         else
>             pLWrongs->SetValid();
>-        pRWrongs->SetValid(); // sonst 0 - 0xFFFF
>-        pRWrongs->MarkInvalid( 0, 1 );	// Nur das erste Wort testen
>+        pRWrongs->SetValid(); // otherwise 0 - 0xFFFF
>+        pRWrongs->MarkInvalid( 0, 1 );	// Only test the first word
>     }
> #endif // !SVX_LIGHT
> 
> 
>     ParaPortion* pPortion = FindParaPortion( rPaM.GetNode() );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blinde Portion in ImpInsertParaBreak" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blind Portion in ImpInsertParaBreak" );
>     pPortion->MarkInvalid( rPaM.GetIndex(), 0 );
> 
>-    // Optimieren: Nicht unnoetig viele GetPos auf die Listen ansetzen!
>-    // Hier z.B. bei Undo, aber auch in allen anderen Methoden.
>+    // Optimization: Do not place unnecessarily many getPos to Listen! 
>+    // Here, as in undo, but also in all other methods.
>     USHORT nPos = GetParaPortions().GetPos( pPortion );
>     ParaPortion* pNewPortion = new ParaPortion( aPaM.GetNode() );
>     GetParaPortions().Insert( pNewPortion, nPos + 1 );
>@@ -2974,7 +2930,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpInsertParaBreak( const EditPaM& rPaM, BOOL bKeepEnding
>     if ( IsCallParaInsertedOrDeleted() )
>         GetEditEnginePtr()->ParagraphInserted( nPos+1 );
> 
>-    CursorMoved( rPaM.GetNode() );	// falls leeres Attribut entstanden.
>+    CursorMoved( rPaM.GetNode() );	// if empty Attributes have emerged.
>     TextModified();
>     return aPaM;
> }
>@@ -2986,7 +2942,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpFastInsertParagraph( USHORT nPara )
>     {
>         if ( nPara )
>         {
>-            DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nPara-1 ), "FastInsertParagraph: Prev existiert nicht" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nPara-1 ), "FastInsertParagraph: Prev does not exist" );
>             InsertUndo( new EditUndoSplitPara( this, nPara-1, aEditDoc.GetObject( nPara-1 )->Len() ) );
>         }
>         else
>@@ -2995,7 +2951,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ImpFastInsertParagraph( USHORT nPara )
> #endif
> 
>     ContentNode* pNode = new ContentNode( aEditDoc.GetItemPool() );
>-    // Falls FlatMode, wird spaeter kein Font eingestellt:
>+    // If flat mode, then later no Font is set:
>     pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetDefFont() = aEditDoc.GetDefFont();
> 
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>@@ -3019,7 +2975,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::InsertParaBreak( EditSelection aCurSel )
>     if ( aStatus.DoAutoIndenting() )
>     {
>         USHORT nPara = aEditDoc.GetPos( aPaM.GetNode() );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( nPara > 0, "AutoIndenting: Fehler!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( nPara > 0, "AutoIndenting: Error!" );
>         XubString aPrevParaText( GetEditDoc().GetParaAsString( nPara-1 ) );
>         USHORT n = 0;
>         while ( ( n < aPrevParaText.Len() ) &&
>@@ -3056,9 +3012,8 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::UpdateFields()
>     {
>         BOOL bChangesInPara = FALSE;
>         ContentNode* pNode = GetEditDoc().GetObject( nPara );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "NULL-Pointer im Doc" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "NULL-Pointer in Doc" );
>         CharAttribArray& rAttribs = pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs();
>-//		USHORT nAttrs = rAttribs.Count();
>         for ( USHORT nAttr = 0; nAttr < rAttribs.Count(); nAttr++ )
>         {
>             EditCharAttrib* pAttr = rAttribs[nAttr];
>@@ -3086,9 +3041,9 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::UpdateFields()
>         }
>         if ( bChangesInPara )
>         {
>-            // ggf. etwas genauer invalidieren.
>+            // If possible be more precise when invalidate.
>             ParaPortion* pPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject( nPara );
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "NULL-Pointer im Doc" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "NULL-Pointer in Doc" );
>             pPortion->MarkSelectionInvalid( 0, pNode->Len() );
>         }
>     }
>@@ -3102,11 +3057,11 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::InsertLineBreak( EditSelection aCurSel )
> }
> 
> //	----------------------------------------------------------------------
>-//	Hilfsfunktionen
>+//	Helper functions
> //	----------------------------------------------------------------------
> Rectangle ImpEditEngine::PaMtoEditCursor( EditPaM aPaM, USHORT nFlags )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetUpdateMode(), "Darf bei Update=FALSE nicht erreicht werden: PaMtoEditCursor" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetUpdateMode(), "Must not be reached when Update=FALSE: PaMtoEditCursor" );
> 
>     Rectangle aEditCursor;
>     long nY = 0;
>@@ -3114,7 +3069,7 @@ Rectangle ImpEditEngine::PaMtoEditCursor( EditPaM aPaM, USHORT nFlags )
>     {
>         ParaPortion* pPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject(nPortion);
>         ContentNode* pNode = pPortion->GetNode();
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Ungueltiger Node in Portion!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Invalid Node in Portion!" );
>         if ( pNode != aPaM.GetNode() )
>         {
>             nY += pPortion->GetHeight();
>@@ -3127,13 +3082,13 @@ Rectangle ImpEditEngine::PaMtoEditCursor( EditPaM aPaM, USHORT nFlags )
>             return aEditCursor;
>         }
>     }
>-    DBG_ERROR( "Portion nicht gefunden!" );
>+    DBG_ERROR( "Portion not found!" );
>     return aEditCursor;
> }
> 
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::GetPaM( Point aDocPos, BOOL bSmart )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetUpdateMode(), "Darf bei Update=FALSE nicht erreicht werden: GetPaM" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetUpdateMode(), "Must not be reached when Update=FALSE: GetPaM" );
> 
>     long nY = 0;
>     long nTmpHeight;
>@@ -3142,30 +3097,30 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::GetPaM( Point aDocPos, BOOL bSmart )
>     for ( nPortion = 0; nPortion < GetParaPortions().Count(); nPortion++ )
>     {
>         ParaPortion* pPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject(nPortion);
>-        nTmpHeight = pPortion->GetHeight(); 	// sollte auch bei !bVisible richtig sein!
>+        nTmpHeight = pPortion->GetHeight(); 	// should also be correct for !bVisible!
>         nY += nTmpHeight;
>         if ( nY > aDocPos.Y() )
>         {
>             nY -= nTmpHeight;
>             aDocPos.Y() -= nY;
>-            // unsichtbare Portions ueberspringen:
>+            // Skip invisible Portions: 
>             while ( pPortion && !pPortion->IsVisible() )
>             {
>                 nPortion++;
>                 pPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nPortion );
>             }
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Keinen sichtbaren Absatz gefunden: GetPaM" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "No visible paragraph found: GetPaM" );
>             aPaM = GetPaM( pPortion, aDocPos, bSmart );
>             return aPaM;
> 
>         }
>     }
>-    // Dann den letzten sichtbaren Suchen:
>+    // Then search for the last visible:
>     nPortion = GetParaPortions().Count()-1;
>     while ( nPortion && !GetParaPortions()[nPortion]->IsVisible() )
>         nPortion--;
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions()[nPortion]->IsVisible(), "Keinen sichtbaren Absatz gefunden: GetPaM" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions()[nPortion]->IsVisible(), "No visible paragraph found: GetPaM" );
>     aPaM.SetNode( GetParaPortions()[nPortion]->GetNode() );
>     aPaM.SetIndex( GetParaPortions()[nPortion]->GetNode()->Len() );
>     return aPaM;
>@@ -3173,15 +3128,15 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::GetPaM( Point aDocPos, BOOL bSmart )
> 
> sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::GetTextHeight() const
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetUpdateMode(), "Sollte bei Update=FALSE nicht verwendet werden: GetTextHeight" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( IsFormatted() || IsFormatting(), "GetTextHeight: Nicht formatiert" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetUpdateMode(), "Should not be used for Update=FALSE: GetTextHeight" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( IsFormatted() || IsFormatting(), "GetTextHeight: Not formatted" );
>     return nCurTextHeight;
> }
> 
> sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::CalcTextWidth( BOOL bIgnoreExtraSpace )
> {
>-    // Wenn noch nicht formatiert und nicht gerade dabei.
>-    // Wird in der Formatierung bei AutoPageSize gerufen.
>+    // If still not formatted and not in the process. 
>+    // Will be brought in the formatting for AutoPageSize.
>     if ( !IsFormatted() && !IsFormatting() )
>         FormatDoc();
> 
>@@ -3191,11 +3146,9 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::CalcTextWidth( BOOL bIgnoreExtraSpace )
>     long nCurWidth = 0;
> 
>     // --------------------------------------------------
>-    // Ueber alle Absaetze...
>+    // Over all the paragraphs ...
>     // --------------------------------------------------
>     USHORT nParas = GetParaPortions().Count();
>-//	USHORT nBiggestPara = 0;
>-//	USHORT nBiggestLine = 0;
>     for ( USHORT nPara = 0; nPara < nParas; nPara++ )
>     {
>         ParaPortion* pPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject( nPara );
>@@ -3205,18 +3158,18 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::CalcTextWidth( BOOL bIgnoreExtraSpace )
>             sal_Int32 nSpaceBeforeAndMinLabelWidth = GetSpaceBeforeAndMinLabelWidth( pPortion->GetNode() );
> 
>             // --------------------------------------------------
>-            // Ueber die Zeilen des Absatzes...
>+            // On the lines of the paragraph ...
>             // --------------------------------------------------
>             ULONG nLines = pPortion->GetLines().Count();
>             for ( USHORT nLine = 0; nLine < nLines; nLine++ )
>             {
>                 pLine = pPortion->GetLines().GetObject( nLine );
>-                DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "NULL-Pointer im Zeileniterator in CalcWidth" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "NULL-Pointer in the line iterator in CalcWidth" );
>                 // nCurWidth = pLine->GetStartPosX();
>-                // Bei Center oder Right haengt die breite von der
>-                // Papierbreite ab, hier nicht erwuenscht.
>-                // Am besten generell nicht auf StartPosX verlassen,
>-                // es muss auch die rechte Einrueckung beruecksichtigt werden!
>+                // For Center- or Right- alignment it depends on the paper 
>+                // width, here not prefered. I general, it is best not leave it 
>+                // to StartPosX, also the right indents have to be taken into 
>+                // account!
>                 nCurWidth = GetXValue( rLRItem.GetTxtLeft() + nSpaceBeforeAndMinLabelWidth );
>                 if ( nLine == 0 )
>                 {
>@@ -3241,7 +3194,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::CalcTextWidth( BOOL bIgnoreExtraSpace )
>     if ( nMaxWidth < 0 )
>         nMaxWidth = 0;
> 
>-    nMaxWidth++; // Ein breiter, da in CreateLines bei >= umgebrochen wird.
>+    nMaxWidth++; // widen it, because in CreateLines for >= is wrapped.
>     return (sal_uInt32)nMaxWidth;
> }
> 
>@@ -3257,7 +3210,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::CalcLineWidth( ParaPortion* pPortion, EditLine* pLine,
> 
>     SvxAdjust eJustification = GetJustification( nPara );
> 
>-    // Berechnung der Breite ohne die Indents...
>+    // Calculation of the width without the Indents ...
>     sal_uInt32 nWidth = 0;
>     USHORT nPos = pLine->GetStart();
>     for ( USHORT nTP = pLine->GetStartPortion(); nTP <= pLine->GetEndPortion(); nTP++ )
>@@ -3299,7 +3252,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::CalcLineWidth( ParaPortion* pPortion, EditLine* pLine,
> 
> sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::CalcTextHeight()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetUpdateMode(), "Sollte bei Update=FALSE nicht verwendet werden: CalcTextHeight" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetUpdateMode(), "Should not be used when Update=FALSE: CalcTextHeight" );
>     sal_uInt32 nY = 0;
>     for ( USHORT nPortion = 0; nPortion < GetParaPortions().Count(); nPortion++ )
>         nY += GetParaPortions()[nPortion]->GetHeight();
>@@ -3310,7 +3263,7 @@ USHORT ImpEditEngine::GetLineCount( USHORT nParagraph ) const
> {
>     DBG_ASSERT( nParagraph < GetParaPortions().Count(), "GetLineCount: Out of range" );
>     ParaPortion* pPPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nParagraph );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Absatz nicht gefunden: GetLineCount" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Paragraph not found: GetLineCount" );
>     if ( pPPortion )
>         return pPPortion->GetLines().Count();
> 
>@@ -3321,11 +3274,11 @@ xub_StrLen ImpEditEngine::GetLineLen( USHORT nParagraph, USHORT nLine ) const
> {
>     DBG_ASSERT( nParagraph < GetParaPortions().Count(), "GetLineLen: Out of range" );
>     ParaPortion* pPPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nParagraph );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Absatz nicht gefunden: GetLineLen" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Paragraph not found: GetLineLen" );
>     if ( pPPortion && ( nLine < pPPortion->GetLines().Count() ) )
>     {
>         EditLine* pLine = pPPortion->GetLines().GetObject( nLine );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Zeile nicht gefunden: GetLineHeight" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Line not found: GetLineHeight" );
>         return pLine->GetLen();
>     }
> 
>@@ -3336,12 +3289,12 @@ void ImpEditEngine::GetLineBoundaries( /*out*/USHORT &rStart, /*out*/USHORT &rEn
> {
>     DBG_ASSERT( nParagraph < GetParaPortions().Count(), "GetLineCount: Out of range" );
>     ParaPortion* pPPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nParagraph );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Absatz nicht gefunden: GetLineBoundaries" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Paragraph not found: GetLineBoundaries" );
>     rStart = rEnd = 0xFFFF;     // default values in case of error
>     if ( pPPortion && ( nLine < pPPortion->GetLines().Count() ) )
>     {
>         EditLine* pLine = pPPortion->GetLines().GetObject( nLine );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Zeile nicht gefunden: GetLineBoundaries" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Line not found: GetLineBoundaries" );
>         rStart = pLine->GetStart();
>         rEnd   = pLine->GetEnd();
>     }
>@@ -3378,11 +3331,11 @@ USHORT ImpEditEngine::GetLineHeight( USHORT nParagraph, USHORT nLine )
> {
>     DBG_ASSERT( nParagraph < GetParaPortions().Count(), "GetLineCount: Out of range" );
>     ParaPortion* pPPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nParagraph );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Absatz nicht gefunden: GetLineHeight" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Paragraph not found: GetLineHeight" );
>     if ( pPPortion && ( nLine < pPPortion->GetLines().Count() ) )
>     {
>         EditLine* pLine = pPPortion->GetLines().GetObject( nLine );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Zeile nicht gefunden: GetLineHeight" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Paragraph not found: GetLineHeight" );
>         return pLine->GetHeight();
>     }
> 
>@@ -3394,7 +3347,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::GetParaHeight( USHORT nParagraph )
>     sal_uInt32 nHeight = 0;
> 
>     ParaPortion* pPPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nParagraph );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Absatz nicht gefunden: GetParaHeight" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Paragraph not found: GetParaHeight" );
> 
>     if ( pPPortion )
>         nHeight = pPPortion->GetHeight();
>@@ -3406,8 +3359,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::UpdateSelections()
> {
>     USHORT nInvNodes = aDeletedNodes.Count();
> 
>-    // Pruefen, ob eine der Selektionen auf einem geloeschten Node steht...
>-    // Wenn der Node gueltig ist, muss noch der Index geprueft werden!
>+    // Check whether one of the selections is at a deleted node... 
>+    // If the node is valid, the index has yet to be examined!
>     for ( USHORT nView = 0; nView < aEditViews.Count(); nView++ )
>     {
>         EditView* pView = aEditViews.GetObject(nView);
>@@ -3420,39 +3373,39 @@ void ImpEditEngine::UpdateSelections()
>             if ( ( ( ULONG )(aCurSel.Min().GetNode()) == pInf->GetInvalidAdress() ) ||
>                  ( ( ULONG )(aCurSel.Max().GetNode()) == pInf->GetInvalidAdress() ) )
>             {
>-                // ParaPortions verwenden, da jetzt auch versteckte
>-                // Absaetze beruecksichtigt werden muessen!
>+                // Use ParaPortions, as now also hidden paragraphs have to be
>+                // taken into account!
>                 USHORT nPara = pInf->GetPosition();
>                 ParaPortion* pPPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nPara );
>-                if ( !pPPortion ) // letzter Absatz
>+                if ( !pPPortion ) // Last paragraph
>                 {
>                     nPara = GetParaPortions().Count()-1;
>                     pPPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject( nPara );
>                 }
>-                DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Leeres Document in UpdateSelections ?" );
>-                // Nicht aus einem verstecktem Absatz landen:
>+                DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "Empty Document in UpdateSelections ?" );
>+                // Do not end up from a hidden paragraph:
>                 USHORT nCurPara = nPara;
>                 USHORT nLastPara = GetParaPortions().Count()-1;
>                 while ( nPara <= nLastPara && !GetParaPortions()[nPara]->IsVisible() )
>                     nPara++;
>-                if ( nPara > nLastPara ) // dann eben rueckwaerts...
>+                if ( nPara > nLastPara ) // then also backwards ...
>                 {
>                     nPara = nCurPara;
>                     while ( nPara && !GetParaPortions()[nPara]->IsVisible() )
>                         nPara--;
>                 }
>-                DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions()[nPara]->IsVisible(), "Keinen sichtbaren Absatz gefunden: UpdateSelections" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions()[nPara]->IsVisible(), "No visible paragraph found: UpdateSelections" );
> 
>                 ParaPortion* pParaPortion = GetParaPortions()[nPara];
>                 EditSelection aTmpSelection( EditPaM( pParaPortion->GetNode(), 0 ) );
>                 pView->pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aTmpSelection );
>                 bChanged=TRUE;
>-                break;	// for-Schleife
>+                break;	// for loop
>             }
>         }
>         if ( !bChanged )
>         {
>-            // Index prueffen, falls Node geschrumpft.
>+            // Check Index if node shrunk.
>             if ( aCurSel.Min().GetIndex() > aCurSel.Min().GetNode()->Len() )
>             {
>                 aCurSel.Min().GetIndex() = aCurSel.Min().GetNode()->Len();
>@@ -3466,7 +3419,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::UpdateSelections()
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // Loeschen...
>+    // Delete ...
>     for ( USHORT n = 0; n < nInvNodes; n++ )
>     {
>         DeletedNodeInfo* pInf = aDeletedNodes.GetObject( n );
>@@ -3533,9 +3486,9 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::MatchGroup( const EditSelection& rSel )
>         USHORT nNode = aEditDoc.GetPos( pNode );
>         if ( ( nMatchChar % 2 ) == 0 )
>         {
>-            // Vorwaerts suchen...
>+            // Search forward...
>             xub_Unicode nSC = aGroupChars.GetChar( nMatchChar );
>-            DBG_ASSERT( aGroupChars.Len() > (nMatchChar+1), "Ungueltige Gruppe von MatchChars!" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( aGroupChars.Len() > (nMatchChar+1), "Invalid group of MatchChars!" );
>             xub_Unicode nEC = aGroupChars.GetChar( nMatchChar+1 );
> 
>             USHORT nCur = aTmpSel.Min().GetIndex()+1;
>@@ -3563,7 +3516,7 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::MatchGroup( const EditSelection& rSel )
>                     nCur = 0;
>                 }
>             }
>-            if ( nLevel == 0 )	// gefunden
>+            if ( nLevel == 0 )	// found
>             {
>                 aMatchSel.Min() = aTmpSel.Min();
>                 aMatchSel.Max() = EditPaM( pNode, nCur+1 );
>@@ -3571,7 +3524,7 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::MatchGroup( const EditSelection& rSel )
>         }
>         else
>         {
>-            // Rueckwaerts suchen...
>+            // Search backwards...
>             xub_Unicode nEC = aGroupChars.GetChar( nMatchChar );
>             xub_Unicode nSC = aGroupChars.GetChar( nMatchChar-1 );
> 
>@@ -3601,14 +3554,14 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::MatchGroup( const EditSelection& rSel )
>                 {
>                     pNode = nNode ? aEditDoc.GetObject( --nNode ) : 0;
>                     if ( pNode )
>-                        nCur = pNode->Len()-1;	// egal ob negativ, weil if Len()
>+                        nCur = pNode->Len()-1;	// no matter if negative, because if Len ()
>                 }
>             }
> 
>-            if ( nLevel == 0 )	// gefunden
>+            if ( nLevel == 0 )	// found
>             {
>                 aMatchSel.Min() = aTmpSel.Min();
>-                aMatchSel.Min().GetIndex()++;	// hinter das Zeichen
>+                aMatchSel.Min().GetIndex()++;	// after the character
>                 aMatchSel.Max() = EditPaM( pNode, nCur );
>             }
>         }
>@@ -3620,7 +3573,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::StopSelectionMode()
> {
>     if ( ( IsInSelectionMode() || aSelEngine.IsInSelection() ) && pActiveView )
>     {
>-        pActiveView->pImpEditView->DrawSelection();	// Wegzeichnen...
>+        pActiveView->pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>         EditSelection aSel( pActiveView->pImpEditView->GetEditSelection() );
>         aSel.Min() = aSel.Max();
>         pActiveView->pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aSel );
>@@ -3633,18 +3586,11 @@ void ImpEditEngine::StopSelectionMode()
> void ImpEditEngine::SetActiveView( EditView* pView )
> {
>     // !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
>-    // Eigentlich waere jetzt ein bHasVisSel und HideSelection notwendig !!!
>+    // Actually, now bHasVisSel and HideSelection would be necessary     !!!
> 
>     if ( pView == pActiveView )
>-        return;
>-
>-    if ( pActiveView && pActiveView->HasSelection() )
>-        pActiveView->pImpEditView->DrawSelection();	// Wegzeichnen...
>-
>-    pActiveView = pView;
>-
>     if ( pActiveView && pActiveView->HasSelection() )
>-        pActiveView->pImpEditView->DrawSelection();	// Wegzeichnen...
>+        pActiveView->pImpEditView->DrawSelection();	
> 
>     //	NN: Quick fix for #78668#:
>     //	When editing of a cell in Calc is ended, the edit engine is not deleted,
>@@ -3672,7 +3618,7 @@ uno::Reference< datatransfer::XTransferable > ImpEditEngine::CreateTransferable(
>     xDataObj = pDataObj;
> 
>     XubString aText( GetSelected( aSelection ) );
>-    aText.ConvertLineEnd();	// Systemspezifisch
>+    aText.ConvertLineEnd();	// System specific
>     pDataObj->GetString() = aText;
> 
>     SvxFontItem::EnableStoreUnicodeNames( TRUE );
>@@ -3743,21 +3689,6 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertText( uno::Reference< datatransfer::XTransfer
> 
>             if ( !bDone )
>             {
>-                // Bookmark
>-                /*
>-                String aURL = ...;
>-                String aTxt = ...;
>-                // Feld nur einfuegen, wenn Factory vorhanden.
>-                if ( ITEMDATA() && ITEMDATA()->GetClassManager().Get( SVX_URLFIELD ) )
>-                {
>-                    SvxFieldItem aField( SvxURLField( aURL, aTxt, SVXURLFORMAT_URL ), EE_FEATURE_FIELD  );
>-                    aNewSelection = InsertField( aPaM, aField );
>-                    UpdateFields();
>-                }
>-                else
>-                    aNewSelection = ImpInsertText( aPaM, aURL );
>-                }
>-                */
>             }
>             if ( !bDone )
>             {
>@@ -3822,7 +3753,7 @@ Range ImpEditEngine::GetInvalidYOffsets( ParaPortion* pPortion )
>         USHORT nSBL = ( rLSItem.GetInterLineSpaceRule() == SVX_INTER_LINE_SPACE_FIX )
>                             ? GetYValue( rLSItem.GetInterLineSpace() ) : 0;
> 
>-        // erst von vorne...
>+        // only from the top ...
>         USHORT nFirstInvalid = 0xFFFF;
>         USHORT nLine;
>         for ( nLine = 0; nLine < pPortion->GetLines().Count(); nLine++ )
>@@ -3833,17 +3764,17 @@ Range ImpEditEngine::GetInvalidYOffsets( ParaPortion* pPortion )
>                 nFirstInvalid = nLine;
>                 break;
>             }
>-            if ( nLine && !aStatus.IsOutliner() ) 	// nicht die erste Zeile
>+            if ( nLine && !aStatus.IsOutliner() ) 	// not the first line
>                 aRange.Min() += nSBL;
>             aRange.Min() += pL->GetHeight();
>         }
>-        DBG_ASSERT( nFirstInvalid != 0xFFFF, "Keine ungueltige Zeile gefunden in GetInvalidYOffset(1)" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( nFirstInvalid != 0xFFFF, "No invalid line found in GetInvalidYOffset(1)" );
> 
> 
>-        // Abgleichen und weiter...
>+        // Syndicate and more ...
>         aRange.Max() = aRange.Min();
>         aRange.Max() += pPortion->GetFirstLineOffset();
>-        if ( nFirstInvalid != 0 )	// Nur wenn nicht die erste Zeile ungueltig
>+        if ( nFirstInvalid != 0 )	// Only if the first line is invalid
>             aRange.Min() = aRange.Max();
> 
>         USHORT nLastInvalid = pPortion->GetLines().Count()-1;
>@@ -3861,7 +3792,6 @@ Range ImpEditEngine::GetInvalidYOffsets( ParaPortion* pPortion )
>             aRange.Max() += pL->GetHeight();
>         }
> 
>-        // MT 07/00 SBL kann jetzt kleiner 100% sein => ggf. die Zeile davor neu ausgeben.
>         if( ( rLSItem.GetInterLineSpaceRule() == SVX_INTER_LINE_SPACE_PROP ) && rLSItem.GetPropLineSpace() &&
>             ( rLSItem.GetPropLineSpace() < 100 ) )
>         {
>@@ -3880,8 +3810,8 @@ Range ImpEditEngine::GetInvalidYOffsets( ParaPortion* pPortion )
> 
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::GetPaM( ParaPortion* pPortion, Point aDocPos, BOOL bSmart )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->IsVisible(), "Wozu GetPaM() bei einem unsichtbaren Absatz?" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( IsFormatted(), "GetPaM: Nicht formatiert" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->IsVisible(), "Why GetPaM() for an invisible paragraph?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( IsFormatted(), "GetPaM: Not formatted" );
> 
>     USHORT nCurIndex = 0;
>     EditPaM aPaM;
>@@ -3893,7 +3823,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::GetPaM( ParaPortion* pPortion, Point aDocPos, BOOL bSmart
> 
>     long nY = pPortion->GetFirstLineOffset();
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetLines().Count(), "Leere ParaPortion in GetPaM!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetLines().Count(), "Empty ParaPortion in GetPaM!" );
> 
>     EditLine* pLine = 0;
>     for ( USHORT nLine = 0; nLine < pPortion->GetLines().Count(); nLine++ )
>@@ -3902,26 +3832,26 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::GetPaM( ParaPortion* pPortion, Point aDocPos, BOOL bSmart
>         nY += pTmpLine->GetHeight();
>         if ( !aStatus.IsOutliner() )
>             nY += nSBL;
>-        if ( nY > aDocPos.Y() ) 	// das war 'se
>+        if ( nY > aDocPos.Y() )
>         {
>             pLine = pTmpLine;
>-            break;					// richtige Y-Position intressiert nicht
>+            break;					// correct Y-position is not of interest
>         }
> 
>         nCurIndex = nCurIndex + pTmpLine->GetLen();
>     }
> 
>-    if ( !pLine ) // darf nur im Bereich von SA passieren!
>+    if ( !pLine ) // may happen only in the range of SA!
>     {
>         #ifdef DBG_UTIL
>          const SvxULSpaceItem& rULSpace =(const SvxULSpaceItem&)pPortion->GetNode()->GetContentAttribs().GetItem( EE_PARA_ULSPACE );
>-         DBG_ASSERT( nY+GetYValue( rULSpace.GetLower() ) >= aDocPos.Y() , "Index in keiner Zeile, GetPaM ?" );
>+         DBG_ASSERT( nY+GetYValue( rULSpace.GetLower() ) >= aDocPos.Y() , "Index in no line, GetPaM ?" );
>         #endif
>         aPaM.SetIndex( pPortion->GetNode()->Len() );
>         return aPaM;
>     }
> 
>-    // Wenn Zeile gefunden, nur noch X-Position => Index
>+    // If no line found, only just X-Position => Index
>     nCurIndex = GetChar( pPortion, pLine, aDocPos.X(), bSmart );
>     aPaM.SetIndex( nCurIndex );
> 
>@@ -3936,7 +3866,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::GetPaM( ParaPortion* pPortion, Point aDocPos, BOOL bSmart
> 
> USHORT ImpEditEngine::GetChar( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, long nXPos, BOOL bSmart )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Keine Zeile erhalten: GetChar" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "No line received: GetChar" );
> 
>     USHORT nChar = 0xFFFF;
>     USHORT nCurIndex = pLine->GetStart();
>@@ -3982,12 +3912,12 @@ USHORT ImpEditEngine::GetChar( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, long
>                     long nTmpPosMax = pLine->GetCharPosArray().GetObject( nTmpCurIndex+x );
>                     if ( nTmpPosMax > nXInPortion )
>                     {
>-                        // pruefen, ob dieser oder der davor...
>+                        // Check whether this or the previous...
>                         long nTmpPosMin = x ? pLine->GetCharPosArray().GetObject( nTmpCurIndex+x-1 ) : 0;
>                         long nDiffLeft = nXInPortion - nTmpPosMin;
>                         long nDiffRight = nTmpPosMax - nXInPortion;
>-                        DBG_ASSERT( nDiffLeft >= 0, "DiffLeft negativ" );
>-                        DBG_ASSERT( nDiffRight >= 0, "DiffRight negativ" );
>+                        DBG_ASSERT( nDiffLeft >= 0, "DiffLeft negative" );
>+                        DBG_ASSERT( nDiffRight >= 0, "DiffRight negative" );
>                         nOffset = ( bSmart && ( nDiffRight < nDiffLeft ) ) ? x+1 : x;
>                         // I18N: If there are character position with the length of 0,
>                         // they belong to the same character, we can not use this position as an index.
>@@ -4002,9 +3932,9 @@ USHORT ImpEditEngine::GetChar( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, long
>                     }
>                 }
> 
>-                // Bei Verwendung des CharPosArray duerfte es keine Ungenauigkeiten geben!
>-                // Vielleicht bei Kerning ?
>-                // 0xFFF passiert z.B. bei Outline-Font, wenn ganz hinten.
>+                // There should not be any inaccuracies when using the 
>+                // CharPosArray! Maybe for kerning?
>+                // 0xFFF happens for example for Outline-Font when at the very end.
>                 if ( nOffset == 0xFFFF )
>                     nOffset = nMax;
> 
>@@ -4077,7 +4007,6 @@ long ImpEditEngine::GetPortionXOffset( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLin
>             case PORTIONKIND_TEXT:
>             case PORTIONKIND_HYPHENATOR:
>             case PORTIONKIND_TAB:
>-//	        case PORTIONKIND_EXTRASPACE:
>             {
>                 nX += pPortion->GetSize().Width();
>             }
>@@ -4118,7 +4047,7 @@ long ImpEditEngine::GetPortionXOffset( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLin
>         }
>         else if ( bR2LPara && !pDestPortion->IsRightToLeft() )
>         {
>-            // Portions behind must be ermoved, visual behind this portion
>+            // Portions behind must be removed, visual behind this portion
>             sal_uInt16 nTmpPortion = nTextPortion+1;
>             while ( nTmpPortion <= pLine->GetEndPortion() )
>             {
>@@ -4156,8 +4085,8 @@ long ImpEditEngine::GetPortionXOffset( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLin
> 
> long ImpEditEngine::GetXPos( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, USHORT nIndex, BOOL bPreferPortionStart )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "Keine Zeile erhalten: GetXPos" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( ( nIndex >= pLine->GetStart() ) && ( nIndex <= pLine->GetEnd() ) , "GetXPos muss richtig gerufen werden!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "No line received: GetXPos" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( ( nIndex >= pLine->GetStart() ) && ( nIndex <= pLine->GetEnd() ) , "GetXPos has to be called properly!" );
> 
>     BOOL bDoPreferPortionStart = bPreferPortionStart;
>     // Assure that the portion belongs to this line:
>@@ -4194,8 +4123,6 @@ long ImpEditEngine::GetXPos( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, USHORT
>                     TextPortion* pNextPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( nTextPortion+1 );
>                     if ( pNextPortion->GetKind() != PORTIONKIND_TAB )
>                     {
>-                        // DBG_ASSERT( !bPreferPortionStart, "GetXPos - How can we this tab portion here???" );
>-                        // #109879# We loop if nIndex == pLine->GetEnd, because bPreferPortionStart will be reset
>                         if ( !bPreferPortionStart )
>                             nX = GetXPos( pParaPortion, pLine, nIndex, TRUE );
>                         else if ( !IsRightToLeft( GetEditDoc().GetPos( pParaPortion->GetNode() ) ) )
>@@ -4293,7 +4220,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CalcHeight( ParaPortion* pPortion )
> 
>     if ( pPortion->IsVisible() )
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetLines().Count(), "Absatz ohne Zeilen in ParaPortion::CalcHeight" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetLines().Count(), "Paragraph with no lines in ParaPortion::CalcHeight" );
>         for ( USHORT nLine = 0; nLine < pPortion->GetLines().Count(); nLine++ )
>             pPortion->nHeight += pPortion->GetLines().GetObject( nLine )->GetHeight();
> 
>@@ -4321,7 +4248,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CalcHeight( ParaPortion* pPortion )
> 
>             if ( ( nPortion != (GetParaPortions().Count()-1) ) )
>             {
>-                pPortion->nHeight += GetYValue( rULItem.GetLower() );	// nicht in letzter
>+                pPortion->nHeight += GetYValue( rULItem.GetLower() );	// not in the last
>             }
> 
> 
>@@ -4331,48 +4258,47 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CalcHeight( ParaPortion* pPortion )
>                 const SvxULSpaceItem& rPrevULItem = (const SvxULSpaceItem&)pPrev->GetNode()->GetContentAttribs().GetItem( EE_PARA_ULSPACE );
>                 const SvxLineSpacingItem& rPrevLSItem = (const SvxLineSpacingItem&)pPrev->GetNode()->GetContentAttribs().GetItem( EE_PARA_SBL );
> 
>-                // Verhalten WinWord6/Writer3:
>-                // Bei einem proportionalen Zeilenabstand wird auch der Absatzabstand
>-                // manipuliert.
>-                // Nur Writer3: Nicht aufaddieren, sondern Mindestabstand.
>+                // In realation between WinWord6/Writer3:
>+                // With a proportional line spacing the paragraph spacing is 
>+                // also manipulated.
>+                // Only Writer3: Do not add up, but minimum distance.
> 
>-                // Pruefen, ob Abstand durch LineSpacing > Upper:
>+                // check if distance by LineSpacing > Upper:
>                 USHORT nExtraSpace = GetYValue( lcl_CalcExtraSpace( pPortion, rLSItem ) );
>                 if ( nExtraSpace > pPortion->nFirstLineOffset )
>                 {
>-                    // Absatz wird 'groesser':
>+                    // Paragraph becomes 'bigger':
>                     pPortion->nHeight += ( nExtraSpace - pPortion->nFirstLineOffset );
>                     pPortion->nFirstLineOffset = nExtraSpace;
>                 }
> 
>-                // nFirstLineOffset jetzt f(pNode) => jetzt f(pNode, pPrev) ermitteln:
>+                // Determine nFirstLineOffset now f(pNode) => now f(pNode, pPrev):
>                 USHORT nPrevLower = GetYValue( rPrevULItem.GetLower() );
> 
>-                // Dieser PrevLower steckt noch in der Hoehe der PrevPortion...
>+                // This PrevLower is still in the height of PrevPortion ...
>                 if ( nPrevLower > pPortion->nFirstLineOffset )
>                 {
>-                    // Absatz wird 'kleiner':
>+                    // Paragraph is 'small': 
>                     pPortion->nHeight -= pPortion->nFirstLineOffset;
>                     pPortion->nFirstLineOffset = 0;
>                 }
>                 else if ( nPrevLower )
>                 {
>-                    // Absatz wird 'etwas kleiner':
>+                    // Paragraph becomes 'somewhat smaller':
>                     pPortion->nHeight -= nPrevLower;
>                     pPortion->nFirstLineOffset =
>                         pPortion->nFirstLineOffset - nPrevLower;
>                 }
>-
>-                // Finde ich zwar nicht so gut, aber Writer3-Feature:
>-                // Pruefen, ob Abstand durch LineSpacing > Lower:
>-                // Dieser Wert steckt nicht in der Hoehe der PrevPortion.
>+                // I find it not so good, but Writer3 feature: 
>+                // Check if distance by LineSpacing > Lower: this value is not
>+                // stuck in the height of PrevPortion.
>                 if ( !pPrev->IsInvalid() )
>                 {
>                     nExtraSpace = GetYValue( lcl_CalcExtraSpace( pPrev, rPrevLSItem ) );
>                     if ( nExtraSpace > nPrevLower )
>                     {
>                         USHORT nMoreLower = nExtraSpace - nPrevLower;
>-                        // Absatz wird 'groesser', 'waechst' nach unten:
>+                        // Paragraph becomes 'bigger', 'grows' downwards:
>                         if ( nMoreLower > pPortion->nFirstLineOffset )
>                         {
>                             pPortion->nHeight += ( nMoreLower - pPortion->nFirstLineOffset );
>@@ -4387,14 +4313,14 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CalcHeight( ParaPortion* pPortion )
> 
> Rectangle ImpEditEngine::GetEditCursor( ParaPortion* pPortion, USHORT nIndex, USHORT nFlags )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->IsVisible(), "Wozu GetEditCursor() bei einem unsichtbaren Absatz?" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( IsFormatted() || GetTextRanger(), "GetEditCursor: Nicht formatiert" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->IsVisible(), "Why GetEditCursor() for an invisible paragraph?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( IsFormatted() || GetTextRanger(), "GetEditCursor: Not formatted" );
> 
>     /*
>-     GETCRSR_ENDOFLINE: Wenn hinter dem letzten Zeichen einer umgebrochenen Zeile,
>-     am Ende der Zeile bleiben, nicht am Anfang der naechsten.
>-     Zweck: 	- END => wirklich hinter das letzte Zeichen
>-                - Selektion....
>+     GETCRSR_ENDOFLINE: If after the last character of a wrapped line, remaining
>+     at the end of the line, not the beginning of the next one.
>+     Purpose: 	- END => really after the last character
>+                - Selection....
>     */
> 
>     long nY = pPortion->GetFirstLineOffset();
>@@ -4404,7 +4330,7 @@ Rectangle ImpEditEngine::GetEditCursor( ParaPortion* pPortion, USHORT nIndex, US
>                         ? GetYValue( rLSItem.GetInterLineSpace() ) : 0;
> 
>     USHORT nCurIndex = 0;
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetLines().Count(), "Leere ParaPortion in GetEditCursor!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetLines().Count(), "Empty ParaPortion in GetEditCursor!" );
>     EditLine* pLine = 0;
>     BOOL bEOL = ( nFlags & GETCRSR_ENDOFLINE ) ? TRUE : FALSE;
>     for ( USHORT nLine = 0; nLine < pPortion->GetLines().Count(); nLine++ )
>@@ -4423,8 +4349,8 @@ Rectangle ImpEditEngine::GetEditCursor( ParaPortion* pPortion, USHORT nIndex, US
>     }
>     if ( !pLine )
>     {
>-        // Cursor am Ende des Absatzes.
>-        DBG_ASSERT( nIndex == nCurIndex, "Index voll daneben in GetEditCursor!" );
>+        // Cursor at the End of the paragraph.
>+        DBG_ASSERT( nIndex == nCurIndex, "Index dead wrong in GetEditCursor!" );
> 
>         pLine = pPortion->GetLines().GetObject( pPortion->GetLines().Count()-1 );
>         nY -= pLine->GetHeight();
>@@ -4439,7 +4365,7 @@ Rectangle ImpEditEngine::GetEditCursor( ParaPortion* pPortion, USHORT nIndex, US
>     nY += pLine->GetHeight();
>     aEditCursor.Bottom() = nY-1;
> 
>-    // innerhalb der Zeile suchen...
>+    // Search within the line...
>     long nX;
> 
>     if ( ( nIndex == pLine->GetStart() ) && ( nFlags & GETCRSR_STARTOFLINE ) )
>@@ -4476,13 +4402,13 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetValidPaperSize( const Size& rNewSz )
>     long nMinHeight = aStatus.AutoPageHeight() ? aMinAutoPaperSize.Height() : 0;
>     long nMaxHeight = aStatus.AutoPageHeight() ? aMaxAutoPaperSize.Height() : 0x7FFFFFFF;
> 
>-    // Minimale/Maximale Breite:
>+    // Minimum/Maximum width:
>     if ( aPaperSize.Width() < nMinWidth )
>         aPaperSize.Width() = nMinWidth;
>     else if ( aPaperSize.Width() > nMaxWidth )
>         aPaperSize.Width() = nMaxWidth;
> 
>-    // Minimale/Maximale Hoehe:
>+    // Minimum/Maximum height:
>     if ( aPaperSize.Height() < nMinHeight )
>         aPaperSize.Height() = nMinHeight;
>     else if ( aPaperSize.Height() > nMaxHeight )
>@@ -4494,7 +4420,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::IndentBlock( EditView* pEditView, BOOL bRight )
>     ESelection aESel( CreateESel( pEditView->pImpEditView->GetEditSelection() ) );
>     aESel.Adjust();
> 
>-    // Nur wenn mehrere selektierte Absaetze...
>+    // Only if more selected Paragraphs ...
>     if ( aESel.nEndPara > aESel.nStartPara )
>     {
>         ESelection aNewSel = aESel;
>@@ -4503,7 +4429,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::IndentBlock( EditView* pEditView, BOOL bRight )
> 
>         if ( aESel.nEndPos == 0 )
>         {
>-            aESel.nEndPara--;		// dann diesen Absatz nicht...
>+            aESel.nEndPara--;		// then not this paragraph ...
>             aNewSel.nEndPos = 0;
>         }
> 
>@@ -4517,13 +4443,13 @@ void ImpEditEngine::IndentBlock( EditView* pEditView, BOOL bRight )
>             ContentNode* pNode = GetEditDoc().GetObject( nPara );
>             if ( bRight )
>             {
>-                // Tabs hinzufuegen
>+                // Insert Tabs
>                 EditPaM aPaM( pNode, 0 );
>                 InsertTab( aPaM );
>             }
>             else
>             {
>-                // Tabs entfernen
>+                // Remove Tabs
>                 EditCharAttrib* pFeature = pNode->GetCharAttribs().FindFeature( 0 );
>                 if ( pFeature && ( pFeature->GetStart() == 0 ) &&
>                    ( pFeature->GetItem()->Which() == EE_FEATURE_TAB ) )
>@@ -4589,17 +4515,6 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::DoVisualCursorTraveling( const ContentNode* )
> {
>     // Don't check if it's necessary, because we also need it when leaving the paragraph
>     return IsVisualCursorTravelingEnabled();
>-/*
>-    BOOL bDoVisualCursorTraveling = FALSE;
>-
>-    if ( IsVisualCursorTravelingEnabled() && pNode->Len() )
>-    {
>-        // Only necessary when RTL text in LTR para or LTR text in RTL para
>-        bDoVisualCursorTraveling = HasDifferentRTLLevels( pNode );
>-    }
>-
>-    return bDoVisualCursorTraveling;
>-*/
> }
> 
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit3.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit3.cxx
>index 6b770b9..83c27c9 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit3.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit3.cxx
>@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ void lcl_DrawRedLines(
>     BOOL bIsRightToLeft )
> {
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>-    // Aber nur, wenn Font nicht zu klein...
>+    // But only if font is not too small ...
>     long nHght = pOutDev->LogicToPixel( Size( 0, nFontHeight ) ).Height();
>     if( WRONG_SHOW_MIN < nHght )
>     {
>@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ void lcl_DrawRedLines(
>             if ( nStart >= nMaxEnd )
>                 break;
> 
>-            if ( nStart < nIndex ) 	// Wurde korrigiert
>+            if ( nStart < nIndex ) 	// Corrected
>                 nStart = nIndex;
>             if ( nEnd > nMaxEnd )
>                 nEnd = nMaxEnd;
>@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::UpdateViews( EditView* pCurView )
>     if ( !GetUpdateMode() || IsFormatting() || aInvalidRec.IsEmpty() )
>         return;
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( IsFormatted(), "UpdateViews: Doc nicht formatiert!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( IsFormatted(), "UpdateViews: Do not format Doc!" );
> 
>     for ( sal_uInt16 nView = 0; nView < aEditViews.Count(); nView++ )
>     {
>@@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::UpdateViews( EditView* pCurView )
> 
>         if ( !aClipRec.IsEmpty() )
>         {
>-            // in Fensterkoordinaten umwandeln....
>+            // convert to window coordinates ....
>             aClipRec = pView->pImpEditView->GetWindowPos( aClipRec );
> 
>             if ( ( pView == pCurView )  )
>@@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ IMPL_LINK_INLINE_END( ImpEditEngine, IdleFormatHdl, Timer *, EMPTYARG )
> void ImpEditEngine::CheckIdleFormatter()
> {
>     aIdleFormatter.ForceTimeout();
>-    // Falls kein Idle, aber trotzdem nicht formatiert:
>+    // If not idle, but still not formatted:
>     if ( !IsFormatted() )
>         FormatDoc();
> }
>@@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::FormatDoc()
> 
>     bIsFormatting = sal_True;
> 
>-    // Dann kann ich auch den Spell-Timer starten...
>+    // Then I can also start the spell-timer ...
>     if ( GetStatus().DoOnlineSpelling() )
>         StartOnlineSpellTimer();
> 
>@@ -390,10 +390,10 @@ void ImpEditEngine::FormatDoc()
> 
>     Font aOldFont( GetRefDevice()->GetFont() );
> 
>-    // Hier schon, damit nicht jedesmal in CreateLines...
>+    // Here already, so that not always lines are created...
>     sal_Bool bMapChanged = ImpCheckRefMapMode();
> 
>-    aInvalidRec = Rectangle();	// leermachen
>+    aInvalidRec = Rectangle();	// make empty
>     for ( sal_uInt16 nPara = 0; nPara < GetParaPortions().Count(); nPara++ )
>     {
>         ParaPortion* pParaPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject( nPara );
>@@ -408,17 +408,13 @@ void ImpEditEngine::FormatDoc()
>                     pParaPortion->MarkSelectionInvalid( 0, pParaPortion->GetNode()->Len() );
>                 }
>             }
>-            // bei MustRepaint() sollte keine Formatierung noetig sein!
>-            // 23.1.95: Evtl. ist sie durch eine andere Aktion aber doch
>-            // ungueltig geworden!
>-//			if ( pParaPortion->MustRepaint() || CreateLines( nPara ) )
>+            // No formatting should be necessary for MustRepaint()!
>             if ( ( pParaPortion->MustRepaint() && !pParaPortion->IsInvalid() )
>                     || CreateLines( nPara, nY ) )
>             {
>                 if ( !bGrow && GetTextRanger() )
>                 {
>-                    // Bei einer Aenderung der Hoehe muss alles weiter unten
>-                    // neu formatiert werden...
>+                    // For a change in height must all below be reformatted ...
>                     for ( sal_uInt16 n = nPara+1; n < GetParaPortions().Count(); n++ )
>                     {
>                         ParaPortion* pPP = GetParaPortions().GetObject( n );
>@@ -432,10 +428,10 @@ void ImpEditEngine::FormatDoc()
>                 pParaPortion->SetMustRepaint( sal_False );
>             }
> 
>-            // InvalidRec nur einmal setzen...
>+            // InvalidRec set only once...
>             if ( aInvalidRec.IsEmpty() )
>             {
>-                // Bei Paperwidth 0 (AutoPageSize) bleibt es sonst Empty()...
>+                // For Paperwidth 0 (AutoPageSize) it would otherwise be Empty()...
>                 long nWidth = Max( (long)1, ( !IsVertical() ? aPaperSize.Width() : aPaperSize.Height() ) );
>                 Range aInvRange( GetInvalidYOffsets( pParaPortion ) );
>                 aInvalidRec = Rectangle( Point( 0, nY+aInvRange.Min() ),
>@@ -453,9 +449,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::FormatDoc()
>         nY += pParaPortion->GetHeight();
>     }
> 
>-    // Man kann auch durch UpdateMode An=>AUS=>AN in die Formatierung gelangen...
>-    // Optimierung erst nach Vobis-Auslieferung aktivieren...
>-//	if ( !aInvalidRec.IsEmpty() )
>+    // One can also get into the formatting through UpdateMode ON=>OFF=>ON...
>+    // enable optimization firdt after Vobis delivery ...
>     {
>         sal_uInt32 nNewHeight = CalcTextHeight();
>         long nDiff = nNewHeight - nCurTextHeight;
>@@ -467,7 +462,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::FormatDoc()
>             if ( aInvalidRec.IsEmpty() )
>             {
>                 aInvalidRec.Top() = 0;
>-                // Left und Right werden nicht ausgewertet, aber wegen IsEmpty gesetzt.
>+                // Left and Right are not evaluated, are however set due to IsEmpty.
>                 aInvalidRec.Left() = 0;
>                 aInvalidRec.Right() = !IsVertical() ? aPaperSize.Width() : aPaperSize.Height();
>             }
>@@ -505,7 +500,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::FormatDoc()
>     if ( bMapChanged )
>         GetRefDevice()->Pop();
> 
>-    CallStatusHdl();	// Falls Modified...
>+    CallStatusHdl();	// If Modified...
> 
>     LeaveBlockNotifications();
> }
>@@ -543,27 +538,26 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CheckAutoPageSize()
>     if ( GetStatus().AutoPageHeight() )
>         aPaperSize.Height() = (long) !IsVertical() ? GetTextHeight() : CalcTextWidth( TRUE );
> 
>-    SetValidPaperSize( aPaperSize );	//Min, Max beruecksichtigen
>+    SetValidPaperSize( aPaperSize );	// consider Min, Max
> 
>     if ( aPaperSize != aPrevPaperSize )
>     {
>         if ( ( !IsVertical() && ( aPaperSize.Width() != aPrevPaperSize.Width() ) )
>              || ( IsVertical() && ( aPaperSize.Height() != aPrevPaperSize.Height() ) ) )
>         {
>-            // Falls davor zentriert/rechts oder Tabs...
>+            // If previous centered / right or tabs ...  
>             aStatus.GetStatusWord() |= !IsVertical() ? EE_STAT_TEXTWIDTHCHANGED : EE_STAT_TEXTHEIGHTCHANGED;
>             for ( sal_uInt16 nPara = 0; nPara < GetParaPortions().Count(); nPara++ )
>             {
>-                // Es brauchen nur Absaetze neu formatiert werden,
>-                // die nicht linksbuendig sind.
>-                // Die Hoehe kann sich hier nicht mehr aendern.
>+                // Only paragraphs who are not aligned to the left need to be 
>+                // reformatted, The height can not be changed here.
>                 ParaPortion* pParaPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject( nPara );
>                 ContentNode* pNode = pParaPortion->GetNode();
>                 SvxAdjust eJustification = GetJustification( nPara );
>                 if ( eJustification != SVX_ADJUST_LEFT )
>                 {
>                     pParaPortion->MarkSelectionInvalid( 0, pNode->Len() );
>-                    CreateLines( nPara, 0 );	// 0: Bei AutoPageSize kein TextRange!
>+                    CreateLines( nPara, 0 );  // 0: For AutoPageSize no TextRange!
>                 }
>             }
>         }
>@@ -600,20 +594,20 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
> {
>     ParaPortion* pParaPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject( nPara );
> 
>-    // sal_Bool: Aenderung der Hoehe des Absatzes Ja/Nein - sal_True/sal_False
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetNode(), "Portion ohne Node in CreateLines" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->IsVisible(), "Unsichtbare Absaetze nicht formatieren!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->IsInvalid(), "CreateLines: Portion nicht invalid!" );
>+    // sal_Bool: Changes in the height of paragraph Yes / No - sal_True/sal_False
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetNode(), "Portion without Node in CreateLines" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->IsVisible(), "Invisible paragraph not formatted!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->IsInvalid(), "CreateLines: Portion not invalid!" );
> 
>     BOOL bProcessingEmptyLine = ( pParaPortion->GetNode()->Len() == 0 );
>     BOOL bEmptyNodeWithPolygon = ( pParaPortion->GetNode()->Len() == 0 ) && GetTextRanger();
> 
>     // ---------------------------------------------------------------
>-    // Schnelle Sonderbehandlung fuer leere Absaetze...
>+    // Fast special treatment for empty paragraphs ...
>     // ---------------------------------------------------------------
>     if ( ( pParaPortion->GetNode()->Len() == 0 ) && !GetTextRanger() )
>     {
>-        // schnelle Sonderbehandlung...
>+        // fast special treatment ...
>         if ( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count() )
>             pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Reset();
>         if ( pParaPortion->GetLines().Count() )
>@@ -623,10 +617,10 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>     }
> 
>     // ---------------------------------------------------------------
>-    // Initialisierung......
>+    // Initialization ......
>     // ---------------------------------------------------------------
> 
>-    // Immer fuer 100% formatieren:
>+    // Always format for 100%:
>     sal_Bool bMapChanged = ImpCheckRefMapMode();
> 
>     if ( pParaPortion->GetLines().Count() == 0 )
>@@ -636,7 +630,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>     }
> 
>     // ---------------------------------------------------------------
>-    // Absatzattribute holen......
>+    // Get Paragraph attributes  ......
>     // ---------------------------------------------------------------
>     ContentNode* const pNode = pParaPortion->GetNode();
> 
>@@ -651,32 +645,15 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>     const SvxLineSpacingItem& rLSItem = (const SvxLineSpacingItem&) pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItem( EE_PARA_SBL );
>     const BOOL bScriptSpace = ((const SvxScriptSpaceItem&) pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItem( EE_PARA_ASIANCJKSPACING )).GetValue();
> 
>-//	const sal_uInt16 nInvalidEnd = ( pParaPortion->GetInvalidDiff() > 0 )
>-//		? pParaPortion->GetInvalidPosStart() + pParaPortion->GetInvalidDiff()
>-//		: pNode->Len();
>-    const short nInvalidDiff = pParaPortion->GetInvalidDiff();
>-    const sal_uInt16 nInvalidStart = pParaPortion->GetInvalidPosStart();
>-    const sal_uInt16 nInvalidEnd =  nInvalidStart + Abs( nInvalidDiff );
>-
>-    sal_Bool bQuickFormat = sal_False;
>-    if ( !bEmptyNodeWithPolygon && !HasScriptType( nPara, i18n::ScriptType::COMPLEX ) )
>-    {
>-        if ( ( pParaPortion->IsSimpleInvalid() ) && ( nInvalidDiff > 0 ) &&
>-             ( pNode->Search( CH_FEATURE, nInvalidStart ) > nInvalidEnd ) )
>-        {
>-            bQuickFormat = sal_True;
>-        }
>-        else if ( ( pParaPortion->IsSimpleInvalid() ) && ( nInvalidDiff < 0 ) )
>-        {
>-            // pruefen, ob loeschen ueber Portiongrenzen erfolgte...
>-            sal_uInt16 nStart = nInvalidStart;	// DOPPELT !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
>-            sal_uInt16 nEnd = nStart - nInvalidDiff;  // neg.
>+            // check if delete over the portion boundaries wss done ...
>+            sal_uInt16 nStart = nInvalidStart;	// DOUBLE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
>+            sal_uInt16 nEnd = nStart - nInvalidDiff;  // negative
>             bQuickFormat = sal_True;
>             sal_uInt16 nPos = 0;
>             sal_uInt16 nPortions = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count();
>             for ( sal_uInt16 nTP = 0; nTP < nPortions; nTP++ )
>             {
>-                // Es darf kein Start/Ende im geloeschten Bereich liegen.
>+                // There must be no start / end are in the deleted area.
>                 TextPortion* const pTP = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions()[ nTP ];
>                 nPos = nPos + pTP->GetLen();
>                 if ( ( nPos > nStart ) && ( nPos < nEnd ) )
>@@ -707,33 +684,33 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>     }
>     else if ( bQuickFormat )
>     {
>-        // schnellere Methode:
>+        // faster Method:
>         RecalcTextPortion( pParaPortion, nInvalidStart, nInvalidDiff );
>     }
>-    else	// nRealInvalidStart kann vor InvalidStart liegen, weil Portions geloescht....
>+    else	// nRealInvalidStart can be before InvalidStart, since Portions were deleted....
>     {
>         CreateTextPortions( pParaPortion, nRealInvalidStart );
>     }
> 
> 
>     // ---------------------------------------------------------------
>-    // Zeile mit InvalidPos suchen, eine Zeile davor beginnen...
>-    // Zeilen flaggen => nicht removen !
>+    // Search for line with InvalidPos, start one line before
>+    // Flag the line => do not remove it !
>     // ---------------------------------------------------------------
> 
>     sal_uInt16 nLine = pParaPortion->GetLines().Count()-1;
>     for ( sal_uInt16 nL = 0; nL <= nLine; nL++ )
>     {
>         EditLine* pLine = pParaPortion->GetLines().GetObject( nL );
>-        if ( pLine->GetEnd() > nRealInvalidStart )	// nicht nInvalidStart!
>+        if ( pLine->GetEnd() > nRealInvalidStart )	// not nInvalidStart!
>         {
>             nLine = nL;
>             break;
>         }
>         pLine->SetValid();
>     }
>-    // Eine Zeile davor beginnen...
>-    // Wenn ganz hinten getippt wird, kann sich die Zeile davor nicht aendern.
>+    // Begin one line before...
>+    // If it is typed at the end, can the line in front can not change.
>     if ( nLine && ( !pParaPortion->IsSimpleInvalid() || ( nInvalidEnd < pNode->Len() ) || ( nInvalidDiff <= 0 ) ) )
>         nLine--;
> 
>@@ -747,11 +724,11 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>         if ( aBulletArea.Right() > 0 )
>             pParaPortion->SetBulletX( (sal_uInt16) GetXValue( aBulletArea.Right() ) );
>         else
>-            pParaPortion->SetBulletX( 0 ); // Falls Bullet falsch eingestellt.
>+            pParaPortion->SetBulletX( 0 ); // if Bullet is set incorrectly
>     }
> 
>     // ---------------------------------------------------------------
>-    // Ab hier alle Zeilen durchformatieren...
>+    // Reformat all lines from here ...
>     // ---------------------------------------------------------------
>     sal_uInt16 nDelFromLine = 0xFFFF;
>     sal_Bool bLineBreak = sal_False;
>@@ -763,7 +740,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>     sal_Bool bCalcCharPositions = sal_True;
>     sal_Int32* pBuf = new sal_Int32[ pNode->Len() ];
> 
>-    sal_Bool bSameLineAgain = sal_False;	// Fuer TextRanger, wenn sich die Hoehe aendert.
>+    sal_Bool bSameLineAgain = sal_False;	// For TextRanger, if the height changes.
>     TabInfo aCurrentTab;
> 
>     BOOL bForceOneRun = bEmptyNodeWithPolygon;
>@@ -786,8 +763,6 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
> 
>             if ( !nLine && ( pParaPortion->GetBulletX() > nStartX ) )
>             {
>-// TL_NFLR				nStartX += nFI;	// Vielleicht reicht der LI?
>-// TL_NFLR				if ( pParaPortion->GetBulletX() > nStartX )
>                     nStartX = pParaPortion->GetBulletX();
>             }
>         }
>@@ -801,20 +776,20 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>         nMaxLineWidth -= GetXValue( rLRItem.GetRight() );
>         nMaxLineWidth -= nStartX;
> 
>-        // Wenn PaperSize == long_max, kann ich keinen neg. Erstzeileneinzug
>-        // abziehen (Overflow)
>+        // When PaperSize == long_max, one can not take away any negative 
>+        // first line indent. (Overflow)
>         if ( ( nMaxLineWidth < 0 ) && ( nStartX < 0 ) )
>             nMaxLineWidth = ( !IsVertical() ? aPaperSize.Width() : aPaperSize.Height() ) - GetXValue( rLRItem.GetRight() );
> 
>-        // Wenn jetzt noch kleiner 0, kann es nur der rechte Rand sein.
>+        // If still less than 0, it may be just the right edge.
>         if ( nMaxLineWidth <= 0 )
>             nMaxLineWidth = 1;
> 
>-        // Problem: Da eine Zeile _vor_ der ungueltigen Position mit der
>-        // Formatierung begonnen wird, werden hier leider auch die Positionen
>-        // neu bestimmt...
>-        // Loesungsansatz:
>-        // Die Zeile davor kann nur groesser werden, nicht kleiner
>+        // Problem: 
>+        // Since a line _before_ the invalid position is started with the 
>+        // formatting, the positions has unfortunately to be redefined ...
>+        // Solution:
>+        // The line before can only be bigger, not smaller
>         // => ...
>         if ( bCalcCharPositions )
>             pLine->GetCharPosArray().Remove( 0, pLine->GetCharPosArray().Count() );
>@@ -823,7 +798,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>         sal_uInt16 nTmpPortion = pLine->GetStartPortion();
>         long nTmpWidth = 0;
>         long nXWidth = nMaxLineWidth;
>-        if ( nXWidth <= nTmpWidth )	// while muss 1x durchlaufen werden
>+        if ( nXWidth <= nTmpWidth )	// while has to be looped once 
>             nXWidth = nTmpWidth+1;
> 
>         SvLongsPtr pTextRanges = 0;
>@@ -845,7 +820,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                     nTextLineHeight = ImplCalculateFontIndependentLineSpacing( aTmpFont.GetHeight() );
>                 else
>                     nTextLineHeight = aTmpFont.GetPhysTxtSize( GetRefDevice(), String() ).Height();
>-                // Metriken koennen groesser sein
>+                // Metrics can be greater
>                 FormatterFontMetric aTempFormatterMetrics;
>                 RecalcFormatterFontMetrics( aTempFormatterMetrics, aTmpFont );
>                 sal_uInt16 nLineHeight = aTempFormatterMetrics.GetHeight();
>@@ -869,30 +844,11 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                 pTextRanges = GetTextRanger()->GetTextRanges( Range( nYOff, nYOff + nYDiff ) );
>                 DBG_ASSERT( pTextRanges, "GetTextRanges?!" );
>                 long nMaxRangeWidth = 0;
>-                // Den breitesten Bereich verwenden...
>-                // Der breiteste Bereich koennte etwas verwirren, also
>-                // generell den ersten. Am besten mal richtig mit Luecken.
>-//				for ( sal_uInt16 n = 0; n < pTextRanges->Count(); )
>-                if ( pTextRanges->Count() )
>-                {
>-                    sal_uInt16 n = 0;
>-                    long nA = pTextRanges->GetObject( n++ );
>-                    long nB = pTextRanges->GetObject( n++ );
>-                    DBG_ASSERT( nA <= nB, "TextRange verdreht?" );
>-                    long nW = nB - nA;
>-                    if ( nW > nMaxRangeWidth )
>-                    {
>-                        nMaxRangeWidth = nW;
>-                        nTextXOffset = nA;
>-                    }
>-                }
>-                nXWidth = nMaxRangeWidth;
>-                if ( nXWidth )
>-                    nMaxLineWidth = nXWidth - nStartX - GetXValue( rLRItem.GetRight() );
>-                else
>-                {
>-                    // Weiter unten im Polygon versuchen.
>-                    // Unterhalb des Polygons die Paperbreite verwenden.
>+                // Use the widest range ...
>+                // The widest range could be a bit confusing, so normally it 
>+                // is the first one. The best times to correct gaps.
>+                    // Try further down in the polygon.
>+                    // Below the polygon use the Paper Width.
>                     nTextExtraYOffset += Max( (long)(nTextLineHeight / 10), (long)1 );
>                     if ( ( nTextY + nTextExtraYOffset  ) > GetTextRanger()->GetBoundRect().Bottom() )
>                     {
>@@ -904,7 +860,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>             }
>         }
> 
>-        // Portion suchen, die nicht mehr in Zeile passt....
>+        // search for Portion that no longer fits in line ....
>         TextPortion* pPortion = 0;
>         sal_Bool bBrokenLine = sal_False;
>         bLineBreak = sal_False;
>@@ -915,8 +871,8 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>             pPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( nTmpPortion );
>             if ( pPortion->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_HYPHENATOR )
>             {
>-                // Portion wegschmeissen, ggf. die davor korrigieren, wenn
>-                // die Hyph-Portion ein Zeichen geschluckt hat...
>+                // Throw away a Portion, if necessary correct the one before, 
>+                // if the Hyph portion has swallowed a sign ...
>                 pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Remove( nTmpPortion );
>                 if ( nTmpPortion && pPortion->GetLen() )
>                 {
>@@ -929,11 +885,11 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                     pPrev->GetSize().Width() = (-1);
>                 }
>                 delete pPortion;
>-                DBG_ASSERT( nTmpPortion < pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "Keine Portion mehr da!" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( nTmpPortion < pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "No more Portions left!" );
>                 pPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( nTmpPortion );
>             }
>             DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetKind() != PORTIONKIND_HYPHENATOR, "CreateLines: Hyphenator-Portion!" );
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetLen() || bProcessingEmptyLine, "Leere Portion in CreateLines ?!" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetLen() || bProcessingEmptyLine, "Empty Portion in CreateLines ?!" );
>             (void)bProcessingEmptyLine;
>             if ( pNextFeature && ( pNextFeature->GetStart() == nTmpPos ) )
>             {
>@@ -944,10 +900,9 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                     {
>                         long nOldTmpWidth = nTmpWidth;
> 
>-                        // Tab-Pos suchen...
>+                        // Search for Tab-Pos...
>                         long nCurPos = nTmpWidth+nStartX;
>-//						nCurPos -= rLRItem.GetTxtLeft();	// Tabs relativ zu LI
>-                        // Skalierung rausrechnen
>+                        // Calculate scaleing
>                         if ( aStatus.DoStretch() && ( nStretchX != 100 ) )
>                             nCurPos = nCurPos*100/nStretchX;
> 
>@@ -969,7 +924,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                              ( aCurrentTab.aTabStop.GetAdjustment() == SVX_TAB_ADJUST_CENTER ) ||
>                              ( aCurrentTab.aTabStop.GetAdjustment() == SVX_TAB_ADJUST_DECIMAL ) )
>                         {
>-                            // Bei LEFT/DEFAULT wird dieses Tab nicht mehr betrachtet.
>+                            // With LEFT / DEFAULT this tab is no longer seen.
>                             aCurrentTab.bValid = TRUE;
>                             aCurrentTab.nStartPosX = nTmpWidth;
>                             aCurrentTab.nCharPos = nTmpPos;
>@@ -980,21 +935,19 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                         pPortion->SetExtraValue( aCurrentTab.aTabStop.GetFill() );
>                         pPortion->GetSize().Width() = aCurrentTab.nTabPos - (nTmpWidth+nStartX);
> 
>-                        // #90520# Height needed...
>                         SeekCursor( pNode, nTmpPos+1, aTmpFont );
>                         pPortion->GetSize().Height() = aTmpFont.QuickGetTextSize( GetRefDevice(), String(), 0, 0, NULL ).Height();
> 
>-                        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetSize().Width() >= 0, "Tab falsch berechnet!" );
>+                        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetSize().Width() >= 0, "Tab incorrectly calculated!" );
> 
>                         nTmpWidth = aCurrentTab.nTabPos-nStartX;
> 
>-                        // Wenn dies das erste Token in der Zeile ist,
>-                        // und nTmpWidth > aPaperSize.Width, habe ich eine
>-                        // Endlos-Schleife!
>+                        // If this is the first token on the line,
>+                        // and nTmpWidth > aPaperSize.Width, => infinite loop!
>                         if ( ( nTmpWidth >= nXWidth ) && ( nTmpPortion == pLine->GetStartPortion() ) )
>                         {
>-                            // Aber was jetzt ?
>-                            // Tab passend machen
>+                            // What now?
>+                            // Tab, make them fit
>                             pPortion->GetSize().Width() = nXWidth-nOldTmpWidth;
>                             nTmpWidth = nXWidth-1;
>                             bEOL = sal_True;
>@@ -1017,8 +970,6 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                     break;
>                     case EE_FEATURE_FIELD:
>                     {
>-//						long nCurWidth = nTmpWidth;
>-                        SeekCursor( pNode, nTmpPos+1, aTmpFont );
>                         sal_Unicode cChar = 0;	// later: NBS?
>                         aTmpFont.SetPhysFont( GetRefDevice() );
>                         ImplInitDigitMode( GetRefDevice(), 0, 0, 0, aTmpFont.GetLanguage() );
>@@ -1027,16 +978,15 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                         if ( bCalcCharPositions || !pPortion->HasValidSize() )
>                         {
>                             pPortion->GetSize() = aTmpFont.QuickGetTextSize( GetRefDevice(), aFieldValue, 0, aFieldValue.Len(), 0 );
>-                            // Damit kein Scrollen bei ueberlangen Feldern
>+                            // So no scrolling over long fields
>                             if ( pPortion->GetSize().Width() > nXWidth )
>                                 pPortion->GetSize().Width() = nXWidth;
>                         }
>                         nTmpWidth += pPortion->GetSize().Width();
>                         pLine->GetCharPosArray().Insert( pPortion->GetSize().Width(), nTmpPos-pLine->GetStart() );
>                         pPortion->GetKind() = cChar ? PORTIONKIND_TEXT : PORTIONKIND_FIELD;
>-                        // Wenn dies das erste Token in der Zeile ist,
>-                        // und nTmpWidth > aPaperSize.Width, habe ich eine
>-                        // Endlos-Schleife!
>+                        // If this is the first token on the line,
>+                        // and nTmpWidth > aPaperSize.Width, => infinite loop!
>                         if ( ( nTmpWidth >= nXWidth ) && ( nTmpPortion == pLine->GetStartPortion() ) )
>                         {
>                             nTmpWidth = nXWidth-1;
>@@ -1048,7 +998,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                         bCompressedChars = FALSE;
>                     }
>                     break;
>-                    default:	DBG_ERROR( "Was fuer ein Feature ?" );
>+                    default:	DBG_ERROR( "What feature?" );
>                 }
>                 pNextFeature = pNode->GetCharAttribs().FindFeature( pNextFeature->GetStart() + 1  );
>             }
>@@ -1073,8 +1023,8 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                 if ( bCalcCharPositions )
>                 {
>                     sal_uInt16 nLen = pPortion->GetLen();
>-                    // Es wird am Anfang generell das Array geplaettet
>-                    // => Immer einfach schnelles insert.
>+                    // The array is  generally flattened at the beginning
>+                    // => Always simply quick inserts.
>                     sal_uInt16 nPos = nTmpPos - pLine->GetStart();
>                     pLine->GetCharPosArray().Insert( pBuf, nLen, nPos );
>                 }
>@@ -1118,56 +1068,11 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                 long nW = nWidthAfterTab;	// Length before tab position
>                 if ( aCurrentTab.aTabStop.GetAdjustment() == SVX_TAB_ADJUST_RIGHT )
>                 {
>-//					nW = nWidthAfterTab;
>-                }
>-                else if ( aCurrentTab.aTabStop.GetAdjustment() == SVX_TAB_ADJUST_CENTER )
>-                {
>-                    nW = nWidthAfterTab/2;
>-                }
>-                else if ( aCurrentTab.aTabStop.GetAdjustment() == SVX_TAB_ADJUST_DECIMAL )
>-                {
>-//					nW = nWidthAfterTab;
>-                    String aText = GetSelected( EditSelection(  EditPaM( pParaPortion->GetNode(), nTmpPos ),
>-                                                                EditPaM( pParaPortion->GetNode(), nTmpPos + pPortion->GetLen() ) ) );
>-                    USHORT nDecPos = aText.Search( aCurrentTab.aTabStop.GetDecimal() );
>-                    if ( nDecPos != STRING_NOTFOUND )
>-                    {
>-                        nW -= pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( nTmpPortion )->GetSize().Width();
>-                        nW += aTmpFont.QuickGetTextSize( GetRefDevice(), *pParaPortion->GetNode(), nTmpPos, nDecPos, NULL ).Width();
>-                        aCurrentTab.bValid = FALSE;
>-                    }
>-                }
>-                else
>-                {
>-                    DBG_ERROR( "CreateLines: Tab not handled!" );
>-                }
>-                long nMaxW = aCurrentTab.nTabPos - aCurrentTab.nStartPosX - nStartX;
>-                if ( nW >= nMaxW )
>-                {
>-                    nW = nMaxW;
>-                    aCurrentTab.bValid = FALSE;
>-                }
>-                TextPortion* pTabPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( aCurrentTab.nTabPortion );
>-                pTabPortion->GetSize().Width() = aCurrentTab.nTabPos - aCurrentTab.nStartPosX - nW - nStartX;
>-                nTmpWidth = aCurrentTab.nStartPosX + pTabPortion->GetSize().Width() + nWidthAfterTab;
>-            }
>-
>-            nTmpPos = nTmpPos + pPortion->GetLen();
>-            nPortionEnd = nTmpPos;
>-            nTmpPortion++;
>-            if ( aStatus.OneCharPerLine() )
>-                bEOL = sal_True;
>-        }
>-
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "no portion!?" );
>-
>-        aCurrentTab.bValid = FALSE;
>-
>-        // das war evtl. eine Portion zu weit:
>+        // this was possibly a portion to far:
>         sal_Bool bFixedEnd = sal_False;
>         if ( aStatus.OneCharPerLine() )
>         {
>-            // Zustand vor Portion: ( bis auf nTmpWidth )
>+            // State before Portion (up to nTmpWidth):
>             nPortionEnd = nTmpPos;
>             nTmpPos -= pPortion ? pPortion->GetLen() : 0;
>             nPortionStart = nTmpPos;
>@@ -1176,14 +1081,14 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>             bEOL = sal_True;
>             bEOC = sal_False;
> 
>-            // Und jetzt genau ein Zeichen:
>+            // And now just one character:
>             nTmpPos++;
>             nTmpPortion++;
>             nPortionEnd = nTmpPortion;
>-            // Eine Nicht-Feature-Portion muss gebrochen werden
>+            // one Non-Feature-Portion has to be wrapped
>             if ( pPortion->GetLen() > 1 )
>             {
>-                DBG_ASSERT( pPortion && (pPortion->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_TEXT), "Len>1, aber keine TextPortion?" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( pPortion && (pPortion->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_TEXT), "Len>1, but no TextPortion?" );
>                 nTmpWidth -= pPortion ? pPortion->GetSize().Width() : 0;
>                 sal_uInt16 nP = SplitTextPortion( pParaPortion, nTmpPos, pLine );
>                 TextPortion* p = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( nP );
>@@ -1216,8 +1121,8 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                 break;
>                 default:
>                 {
>-                    // Ein Feature wird nicht umgebrochen:
>-                    DBG_ASSERT( ( pPortion->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_LINEBREAK ), "Was fuer ein Feature ?" );
>+                    //  A feature does not wrap:
>+                    DBG_ASSERT( ( pPortion->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_LINEBREAK ), "What Feature ?" );
>                     bEOL = sal_True;
>                     bFixedEnd = sal_True;
>                 }
>@@ -1228,7 +1133,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>             bEOL = sal_True;
>             bEOC = sal_True;
>             pLine->SetEnd( nPortionEnd );
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "Keine TextPortions?" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "No TextPortions?" );
>             pLine->SetEndPortion( (sal_uInt16)pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count() - 1 );
>         }
> 
>@@ -1246,11 +1151,11 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>         {
>             pLine->SetEnd( nPortionStart+1 );
>             pLine->SetEndPortion( nTmpPortion-1 );
>-            bEOC = sal_False; // wurde oben gesetzt, vielleich mal die if's umstellen?
>+            bEOC = sal_False; // was set above, maybe reset the if's?
>         }
>         else if ( !bEOL )
>         {
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pPortion && ((nPortionEnd-nPortionStart) == pPortion->GetLen()), "Doch eine andere Portion?!" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pPortion && ((nPortionEnd-nPortionStart) == pPortion->GetLen()), "However, another portion?!" );
>             long nRemainingWidth = nMaxLineWidth - nTmpWidth;
>             sal_Bool bCanHyphenate = ( aTmpFont.GetCharSet() != RTL_TEXTENCODING_SYMBOL );
>             if ( bCompressedChars && pPortion && ( pPortion->GetLen() > 1 ) && pPortion->GetExtraInfos() && pPortion->GetExtraInfos()->bCompressed )
>@@ -1264,11 +1169,10 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>         }
> 
>         // ------------------------------------------------------------------
>-        // Zeile fertig => justieren
>+        // Line finished => adjust 
>         // ------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
>-        // CalcTextSize sollte besser durch ein kontinuierliches
>-        // Registrieren ersetzt werden !
>+        // CalcTextSize should be replsced through a continuous registering!
>         Size aTextSize = pLine->CalcTextSize( *pParaPortion );
> 
>         if ( aTextSize.Height() == 0 )
>@@ -1284,10 +1188,9 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>             pLine->SetHeight( (sal_uInt16)aTextSize.Height() );
>         }
> 
>-        // Die Fontmetriken koennen nicht kontinuierlich berechnet werden,
>-        // wenn der Font sowieso eingestellt ist, weil ggf. ein grosser Font
>-        // erst nach dem Umbrechen ploetzlich in der naechsten Zeile landet
>-        // => Font-Metriken zu gross.
>+        // The font metrics can not be calculated continuously, if the font is
>+        // set anyway, because if large font only after wrapping suddenly end 
>+        // up in the next line => Font metrics too big.
>         FormatterFontMetric aFormatterMetrics;
>         sal_uInt16 nTPos = pLine->GetStart();
>         for ( sal_uInt16 nP = pLine->GetStartPortion(); nP <= pLine->GetEndPortion(); nP++ )
>@@ -1311,7 +1214,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>         bSameLineAgain = sal_False;
>         if ( GetTextRanger() && ( pLine->GetHeight() > nTextLineHeight ) )
>         {
>-            // Nochmal mit der anderen Groesse aufsetzen!
>+            // put down with the other size!
>             bSameLineAgain = sal_True;
>         }
> 
>@@ -1324,7 +1227,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                 sal_uInt16 nTxtHeight = pLine->GetHeight();
>                 if ( nTxtHeight < nMinHeight )
>                 {
>-                    // Der Ascent muss um die Differenz angepasst werden:
>+                    //  The Ascent to be adjusted for the difference:
>                     long nDiff = nMinHeight - nTxtHeight;
>                     pLine->SetMaxAscent( (sal_uInt16)(pLine->GetMaxAscent() + nDiff) );
>                     pLine->SetHeight( nMinHeight, nTxtHeight );
>@@ -1332,7 +1235,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>             }
>             else if ( rLSItem.GetInterLineSpaceRule() == SVX_INTER_LINE_SPACE_PROP )
>             {
>-                if ( nPara || IsFixedCellHeight() || pLine->GetStartPortion() ) // Nicht die aller erste Zeile
>+                if ( nPara || IsFixedCellHeight() || pLine->GetStartPortion() ) // Not the very first line
>                 {
>                     // #100508# There are documents with PropLineSpace 0, why?
>                     // (cmc: re above question :-) such documents can be seen by importing a .ppt
>@@ -1342,7 +1245,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                         sal_Int32 nH = nTxtHeight;
>                         nH *= rLSItem.GetPropLineSpace();
>                         nH /= 100;
>-                        // Der Ascent muss um die Differenz angepasst werden:
>+                        // The Ascent to be adjusted for the difference:
>                         long nDiff = pLine->GetHeight() - nH;
>                         if ( nDiff > pLine->GetMaxAscent() )
>                             nDiff = pLine->GetMaxAscent();
>@@ -1353,27 +1256,13 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>             }
>         }
> 
>-
>-        // #80582# - Bullet should not influence line height
>-//		if ( !nLine )
>-//		{
>-//			long nBulletHeight = aBulletArea.GetHeight();
>-//			if ( nBulletHeight > (long)pLine->GetHeight() )
>-//			{
>-//				long nDiff =  nBulletHeight - (long)pLine->GetHeight();
>-//				// nDiff auf oben und unten verteilen.
>-//				pLine->SetMaxAscent( (sal_uInt16)(pLine->GetMaxAscent() + nDiff/2) );
>-//				pLine->SetHeight( (sal_uInt16)nBulletHeight );
>-//			}
>-//		}
>-
>         if ( ( !IsVertical() && aStatus.AutoPageWidth() ) ||
>              ( IsVertical() && aStatus.AutoPageHeight() ) )
>         {
>-            // Wenn die Zeile in die aktuelle Papierbreite passt, muss
>-            // diese Breite fuer die Ausrichting verwendet werden.
>-            // Wenn sie nicht passt oder sie die Papierbreite aendert,
>-            // wird bei Justification != LEFT sowieso noch mal formatiert.
>+            // If the row fits within the current paper width, then this width 
>+            // has to be used for the Alignment. If it does not fit or if it 
>+            // will change the paper width, it will anyway be formatted for 
>+            // Justification! = LEFT anyway formatted again.
>             long nMaxLineWidthFix = ( !IsVertical() ? aPaperSize.Width() : aPaperSize.Height() )
>                                         - GetXValue( rLRItem.GetRight() ) - nStartX;
>             if ( aTextSize.Width() < nMaxLineWidthFix )
>@@ -1408,7 +1297,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>             case SVX_ADJUST_CENTER:
>             {
>                 long n = ( nMaxLineWidth - aTextSize.Width() ) / 2;
>-                n += nStartX;  // Einrueckung bleibt erhalten.
>+                n += nStartX;  // Indentation is kept.
>                 if ( n > 0 )
>                     pLine->SetStartPosX( (sal_uInt16)n );
>                 else
>@@ -1418,11 +1307,10 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>             break;
>             case SVX_ADJUST_RIGHT:
>             {
>-                // Bei automatisch umgebrochenen Zeilen, die ein Blank
>-                // am Ende enthalten, darf das Blank nicht ausgegeben werden!
>-
>+                // For automatically wrapped lines, which has a blank at the end
>+                // the blank must not be displayed!
>                 long n = nMaxLineWidth - aTextSize.Width();
>-                n += nStartX;  // Einrueckung bleibt erhalten.
>+                n += nStartX;  // Indentation is kept.
>                 if ( n > 0 )
>                     pLine->SetStartPosX( (sal_uInt16)n );
>                 else
>@@ -1446,12 +1334,12 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>         }
> 
>         // -----------------------------------------------------------------
>-        // pruefen, ob die Zeile neu ausgegeben werden muss...
>+        // Check whether the line must be re-issued ...
>         // -----------------------------------------------------------------
>         pLine->SetInvalid();
> 
>-        // Wenn eine Portion umgebrochen wurde sind ggf. viel zu viele Positionen
>-        // im CharPosArray:
>+        // If a portion was wrapped there may be far too many positions in 
>+        // CharPosArray:
>         if ( bCalcCharPositions )
>         {
>             sal_uInt16 nLen = pLine->GetLen();
>@@ -1471,14 +1359,13 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>             }
>         }
> 
>-        // Fuer kleiner 0 noch ueberlegen!
>+        // for 0 or less still superiour!
>         if ( pParaPortion->IsSimpleInvalid() /* && ( nInvalidDiff > 0 ) */ )
>         {
>-            // Aenderung durch einfache Textaenderung...
>-            // Formatierung nicht abbrechen, da Portions evtl. wieder
>-            // gesplittet werden muessen!
>-            // Wenn irgendwann mal abbrechbar, dann fogende Zeilen Validieren!
>-            // Aber ggf. als Valid markieren, damit weniger Ausgabe...
>+            // Change through simple Text changes ... 
>+            // Do mot cancel formatting since Portions possibly have to be split
>+            // again! If at some point broken off, then validate the following 
>+            // line! But if necessary, mark as valid, so there is less output...
>             if ( pLine->GetEnd() < nInvalidStart )
>             {
>                 if ( *pLine == aSaveLine )
>@@ -1508,10 +1395,9 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                 }
>                 else if ( bCalcCharPositions && bQuickFormat && ( nEnd > nInvalidEnd) )
>                 {
>-                    // Wenn die ungueltige Zeile so endet, dass die naechste an
>-                    // der 'gleichen' Textstelle wie vorher beginnt, also nicht
>-                    // anders umgebrochen wird, brauche ich dort auch nicht die
>-                    // textbreiten neu bestimmen:
>+                    // If the invalid line ends so that the next begins on the 
>+                    // 'same' passage as before, i.e. not wrapped differently, 
>+                    //  then the text width does not have to be determined anew:
>                     if ( nEnd == ( aSaveLine.GetEnd() + nInvalidDiff ) )
>                     {
>                         bCalcCharPositions = sal_False;
>@@ -1525,12 +1411,12 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
> 
>         if ( !bSameLineAgain )
>         {
>-            nIndex = pLine->GetEnd();	// naechste Zeile Start = letzte Zeile Ende
>-                                        // weil nEnd hinter das letzte Zeichen zeigt!
>+            nIndex = pLine->GetEnd();	// next line start = last line end
>+                                        // as nEnd points to the last charecter!
> 
>             sal_uInt16 nEndPortion = pLine->GetEndPortion();
> 
>-            // Naechste Zeile oder ggf. neue Zeile....
>+            // Next line or maybe a new line....
>             pLine = 0;
>             if ( nLine < pParaPortion->GetLines().Count()-1 )
>                 pLine = pParaPortion->GetLines().GetObject( ++nLine );
>@@ -1567,12 +1453,12 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::CreateLines( USHORT nPara, sal_uInt32 nStartPosY )
>                 pLine->SetEndPortion( nEndPortion+1 );
>             }
>         }
>-    }	// while ( Index < Len )
>+    }
> 
>     if ( nDelFromLine != 0xFFFF )
>         pParaPortion->GetLines().DeleteFromLine( nDelFromLine );
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetLines().Count(), "Keine Zeile nach CreateLines!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetLines().Count(), "No line after CreateLines!" );
> 
>     if ( bLineBreak == sal_True )
>         CreateAndInsertEmptyLine( pParaPortion, nStartPosY );
>@@ -1616,7 +1502,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CreateAndInsertEmptyLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uIn
>         if ( aBulletArea.Right() > 0 )
>             pParaPortion->SetBulletX( (sal_uInt16) GetXValue( aBulletArea.Right() ) );
>         else
>-            pParaPortion->SetBulletX( 0 ); // Falls Bullet falsch eingestellt.
>+            pParaPortion->SetBulletX( 0 ); // If Bullet set incorrectly.
>         if ( pParaPortion->GetBulletX() > nStartX )
>         {
>             nStartX = (short)GetXValue( rLRItem.GetTxtLeft() + rLRItem.GetTxtFirstLineOfst() + nSpaceBeforeAndMinLabelWidth );
>@@ -1669,7 +1555,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CreateAndInsertEmptyLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uIn
>             sal_uInt16 nTxtHeight = pTmpLine->GetHeight();
>             if ( nTxtHeight < nMinHeight )
>             {
>-                // Der Ascent muss um die Differenz angepasst werden:
>+                // The Ascent to be adjusted for the difference:s
>                 long nDiff = nMinHeight - nTxtHeight;
>                 pTmpLine->SetMaxAscent( (sal_uInt16)(pTmpLine->GetMaxAscent() + nDiff) );
>                 pTmpLine->SetHeight( nMinHeight, nTxtHeight );
>@@ -1678,7 +1564,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CreateAndInsertEmptyLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uIn
>         else if ( rLSItem.GetInterLineSpaceRule() == SVX_INTER_LINE_SPACE_PROP )
>         {
>             USHORT nPara = GetParaPortions().GetPos( pParaPortion );
>-            if ( nPara || IsFixedCellHeight() || pTmpLine->GetStartPortion() ) // Nicht die aller erste Zeile
>+            if ( nPara || IsFixedCellHeight() || pTmpLine->GetStartPortion() ) // Not the very first line
>             {
>                 // #100508# There are documents with PropLineSpace 0, why?
>                 // (cmc: re above question :-) such documents can be seen by importing a .ppt
>@@ -1688,7 +1574,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CreateAndInsertEmptyLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uIn
>                     sal_Int32 nH = nTxtHeight;
>                     nH *= rLSItem.GetPropLineSpace();
>                     nH /= 100;
>-                    // Der Ascent muss um die Differenz angepasst werden:
>+                    // The Ascent to be adjusted for the difference:
>                     long nDiff = pTmpLine->GetHeight() - nH;
>                     if ( nDiff > pTmpLine->GetMaxAscent() )
>                         nDiff = pTmpLine->GetMaxAscent();
>@@ -1705,18 +1591,18 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CreateAndInsertEmptyLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uIn
>         if ( nMinHeight > (long)pTmpLine->GetHeight() )
>         {
>             long nDiff = nMinHeight - (long)pTmpLine->GetHeight();
>-            // nDiff auf oben und unten verteilen.
>+            // nDiff distribute upwards and downwards
>             pTmpLine->SetMaxAscent( (sal_uInt16)(pTmpLine->GetMaxAscent() + nDiff/2) );
>             pTmpLine->SetHeight( (sal_uInt16)nMinHeight );
>         }
>     }
>     else
>     {
>-        // -2: Die neue ist bereits eingefuegt.
>+        // -2: The new one is already inserted.
> #ifdef DBG_UTIL
>         EditLine* pLastLine = pParaPortion->GetLines().GetObject( pParaPortion->GetLines().Count()-2 );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pLastLine, "Weicher Umbruch, keine Zeile ?!" );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pLastLine->GetEnd() == pParaPortion->GetNode()->Len(), "Doch anders?" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pLastLine, "soft wrap no line?!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pLastLine->GetEnd() == pParaPortion->GetNode()->Len(), "diffrent anyway?" );
> #endif
> //		pTmpLine->SetStart( pLastLine->GetEnd() );
> //		pTmpLine->SetEnd( pLastLine->GetEnd() );
>@@ -1731,12 +1617,9 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::FinishCreateLines( ParaPortion* pParaPortion )
> //	CalcCharPositions( pParaPortion );
>     pParaPortion->SetValid();
>     long nOldHeight = pParaPortion->GetHeight();
>-//	sal_uInt16 nPos = GetParaPortions().GetPos( pParaPortion );
>-//	DBG_ASSERT( nPos != USHRT_MAX, "FinishCreateLines: Portion nicht in Liste!" );
>-//	ParaPortion* pPrev = nPos ? GetParaPortions().GetObject( nPos-1 ) : 0;
>     CalcHeight( pParaPortion );
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "FinishCreateLines: Keine Text-Portion?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "FinishCreateLines: No Text-Portion?" );
>     sal_Bool bRet = ( pParaPortion->GetHeight() != nOldHeight );
>     return bRet;
> }
>@@ -1815,7 +1698,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpBreakLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, Te
>             nBreakPos = nMaxBreakPos;
> 
>         // BUG in I18N - the japanese dot is in the next line!
>-        // !!!	Testen!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
>+        // !!!	Test!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
>         if ( (nBreakPos + ( aUserOptions.allowPunctuationOutsideMargin ? 0 : 1 ) ) <= nMaxBreakPos )
>         {
>             sal_Unicode cFirstInNextLine = ( (nBreakPos+1) < pNode->Len() ) ? pNode->GetChar( nBreakPos ) : 0;
>@@ -1827,17 +1710,14 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpBreakLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, Te
>         pLine->SetHangingPunctuation( bHangingPunctuation );
> 
>     #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>-        // Egal ob Trenner oder nicht: Das Wort nach dem Trenner durch
>-        // die Silbentrennung jagen...
>-        // nMaxBreakPos ist das letzte Zeichen was in die Zeile passt,
>-        // nBreakPos ist der Wort-Anfang
>-        // Ein Problem gibt es, wenn das Dok so schmal ist, dass ein Wort
>-        // auf mehr als Zwei Zeilen gebrochen wird...
>+        // Whether a separator or not, push the word after the separator through
>+        // hyphenation ... NMaxBreakPos is the last character that fits into 
>+        // the line, nBreakPos is the beginning of the word. 
>+        // There is a problem if the Doc is so narrow that a word is broken
>+        // into more than two lines ...
>         if ( !bHangingPunctuation && bCanHyphenate && GetHyphenator().is() )
>         {
>             i18n::Boundary aBoundary = _xBI->getWordBoundary( *pNode, nBreakPos, GetLocale( EditPaM( pNode, nBreakPos ) ), ::com::sun::star::i18n::WordType::DICTIONARY_WORD, sal_True );
>-//		    sal_uInt16 nWordStart = nBreakPos;
>-//		    sal_uInt16 nBreakPos_OLD = nBreakPos;
>             sal_uInt16 nWordStart = nBreakPos;
>             sal_uInt16 nWordEnd = (USHORT) aBoundary.endPos;
>             DBG_ASSERT( nWordEnd > nWordStart, "ImpBreakLine: Start >= End?" );
>@@ -1846,9 +1726,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpBreakLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, Te
>             if ( ( nWordEnd >= nMaxBreakPos ) && ( nWordLen > 3 ) )
>             {
>                 // #104415# May happen, because getLineBreak may differ from getWordBoudary with DICTIONARY_WORD
>-                // DBG_ASSERT( nWordEnd >= nMaxBreakPos, "Hyph: Break?" );
>                 String aWord( *pNode, nWordStart, nWordLen );
>-                sal_uInt16 nMinTrail = nWordEnd-nMaxBreakPos+1; 	//+1: Vor dem angeknacksten Buchstaben
>+                sal_uInt16 nMinTrail = nWordEnd-nMaxBreakPos+1; 	//+1: Before the crack in most letters
>                 Reference< XHyphenatedWord > xHyphWord;
>                 if (xHyphenator.is())
>                     xHyphWord = xHyphenator->hyphenate( aWord, aLocale, aWord.Len() - nMinTrail, Sequence< PropertyValue >() );
>@@ -1868,27 +1747,25 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpBreakLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, Te
>                         {
>                             String aAlt( xHyphWord->getHyphenatedWord() );
> 
>-                            // Wir gehen von zwei Faellen aus, die nun
>-                            // vorliegen koennen:
>-                            // 1) packen wird zu pak-ken
>-                            // 2) Schiffahrt wird zu Schiff-fahrt
>-                            // In Fall 1 muss ein Zeichen ersetzt werden,
>-                            // in Fall 2 wird ein Zeichen hinzugefuegt.
>-                            // Die Identifikation wird erschwert durch Worte wie
>-                            // "Schiffahrtsbrennesseln", da der Hyphenator alle
>-                            // Position des Wortes auftrennt und "Schifffahrtsbrennnesseln"
>-                            // ermittelt. Wir koennen also eigentlich nicht unmittelbar vom
>-                            // Index des AlternativWord auf aWord schliessen.
>-
>-                            // Das ganze geraffel wird durch eine Funktion am
>-                            // Hyphenator vereinfacht werden, sobald AMA sie einbaut...
>+                            // We expect the two cases, which might exist now: 
>+                            // 1) packen becomes pak-ken 
>+                            // 2) Shiffahrt becomes shiff-fahrt 
>+                            // In case 1, a character has to be replaced 
>+                            // in case 2 is a character added. 
>+                            // The identification is complicated by long 
>+                            // compound words because the Hyphenator separates 
>+                            // all position of the word. We can thus actually 
>+                            // not directly connect the index of the alternative
>+                            // word to aWord. The whole issue will be simplified
>+                            // through a function in the  Hyphenator as soon as
>+                            // AMA builds this in...
>                             sal_uInt16 nAltStart = _nWordLen - 1;
>                             sal_uInt16 nTxtStart = nAltStart - (aAlt.Len() - aWord.Len());
>                             sal_uInt16 nTxtEnd = nTxtStart;
>                             sal_uInt16 nAltEnd = nAltStart;
> 
>-                            // Die Bereiche zwischen den nStart und nEnd ist
>-                            // die Differenz zwischen Alternativ- und OriginalString.
>+                            // The regions between the nStart and nEnd is the 
>+                            // difference between alternative and original string.
>                             while( nTxtEnd < aWord.Len() && nAltEnd < aAlt.Len() &&
>                                    aWord.GetChar(nTxtEnd) != aAlt.GetChar(nAltEnd) )
>                             {
>@@ -1896,7 +1773,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpBreakLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, Te
>                                 ++nAltEnd;
>                             }
> 
>-                            // Wenn ein Zeichen hinzugekommen ist, dann bemerken wir es jetzt:
>+                            // If a character is added, then we notice it now:
>                             if( nAltEnd > nTxtEnd && nAltStart == nAltEnd &&
>                                 aWord.GetChar( nTxtEnd ) == aAlt.GetChar(nAltEnd) )
>                             {
>@@ -1905,7 +1782,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpBreakLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, Te
>                                 ++nTxtEnd;
>                             }
> 
>-                            DBG_ASSERT( ( nAltEnd - nAltStart ) == 1, "Alternate: Falsche Annahme!" );
>+                            DBG_ASSERT( ( nAltEnd - nAltStart ) == 1, "Alternate: Wrong assumption!" );
> 
>                             if ( nTxtEnd > nTxtStart )
>                                 cAlternateReplChar = aAlt.GetChar( nAltStart );
>@@ -1926,22 +1803,22 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpBreakLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, Te
> 
>         if ( nBreakPos <= pLine->GetStart() )
>         {
>-            // keine Trenner in Zeile => abhacken !
>+            // No separator in line => Chop!
>             nBreakPos = nMaxBreakPos;
>-            // MT: I18N nextCharacters !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
>+            // I18N nextCharacters !
>             if ( nBreakPos <= pLine->GetStart() )
>-                nBreakPos = pLine->GetStart() + 1; 	// Sonst Endlosschleife!
>+                nBreakPos = pLine->GetStart() + 1; 	// Otherwise infinite loop!
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // die angeknackste Portion ist die End-Portion
>+    // the battered portion is the end portion
>     pLine->SetEnd( nBreakPos );
> 
>     sal_uInt16 nEndPortion = SplitTextPortion( pParaPortion, nBreakPos, pLine );
> 
>     if ( !bCompressBlank && !bHangingPunctuation )
>     {
>-        // #96187# When justification is not SVX_ADJUST_LEFT, it's important to compress
>+        // When justification is not SVX_ADJUST_LEFT, it's important to compress
>         // the trailing space even if there is enough room for the space...
>         // Don't check for SVX_ADJUST_LEFT, doesn't matter to compress in this case too...
>         DBG_ASSERT( nBreakPos > pLine->GetStart(), "ImpBreakLines - BreakPos not expected!" );
>@@ -1952,15 +1829,15 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpBreakLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, Te
>     if ( bCompressBlank || bHangingPunctuation )
>     {
>         TextPortion* pTP = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( nEndPortion );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pTP->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_TEXT, "BlankRubber: Keine TextPortion!" );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( nBreakPos > pLine->GetStart(), "SplitTextPortion am Anfang der Zeile?" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pTP->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_TEXT, "BlankRubber: No TextPortion!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( nBreakPos > pLine->GetStart(), "SplitTextPortion at the beginning of the line?" );
>         sal_uInt16 nPosInArray = nBreakPos - 1 - pLine->GetStart();
>         pTP->GetSize().Width() = ( nPosInArray && ( pTP->GetLen() > 1 ) ) ? pLine->GetCharPosArray()[ nPosInArray-1 ] : 0;
>         pLine->GetCharPosArray()[ nPosInArray ] = pTP->GetSize().Width();
>     }
>     else if ( bHyphenated )
>     {
>-        // Eine Portion fuer den Trenner einbauen...
>+        // A portion for installing the separator ...
>         TextPortion* pHyphPortion = new TextPortion( 0 );
>         pHyphPortion->GetKind() = PORTIONKIND_HYPHENATOR;
>         String aHyphText( CH_HYPH );
>@@ -1971,7 +1848,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpBreakLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, Te
>             pPrev->SetLen( pPrev->GetLen() - 1 );
>             pHyphPortion->SetLen( 1 );
>             pHyphPortion->SetExtraValue( cAlternateReplChar );
>-            // Breite der Portion davor korrigieren:
>+            // Correct width of the portion above:
>             pPrev->GetSize().Width() =
>                 pLine->GetCharPosArray()[ nBreakPos-1 - pLine->GetStart() - 1 ];
>         }
>@@ -1981,7 +1858,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpBreakLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, Te
>             aHyphText.Insert( cAlternateExtraChar, 0 );
>         }
> 
>-        // Breite der Hyph-Portion ermitteln:
>+        // Determine the width if the Hyph-Portion:
>         SvxFont aFont;
>         SeekCursor( pParaPortion->GetNode(), nBreakPos, aFont );
>         aFont.SetPhysFont( GetRefDevice() );
>@@ -1995,13 +1872,13 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpBreakLine( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, Te
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::ImpAdjustBlocks( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine, long nRemainingSpace )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nRemainingSpace > 0, "AdjustBlocks: Etwas zuwenig..." );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "AdjustBlocks: Zeile ?!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nRemainingSpace > 0, "AdjustBlocks: Somewhat too little..." );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "AdjustBlocks: Line ?!" );
>     if ( ( nRemainingSpace < 0 ) || pLine->IsEmpty() )
>         return ;
> 
>     const USHORT nFirstChar = pLine->GetStart();
>-    const USHORT nLastChar = pLine->GetEnd() -1;	// Last zeigt dahinter
>+    const USHORT nLastChar = pLine->GetEnd() -1;	// Last points to pervious
>     ContentNode* pNode = pParaPortion->GetNode();
> 
>     DBG_ASSERT( nLastChar < pNode->Len(), "AdjustBlocks: Out of range!" );
>@@ -2047,9 +1924,9 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpAdjustBlocks( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine,
>     if ( !aPositions.Count() )
>         return;
> 
>-    // Wenn das letzte Zeichen ein Blank ist, will ich es nicht haben!
>-    // Die Breite muss auf die Blocker davor verteilt werden...
>-    // Aber nicht, wenn es das einzige ist
>+    // If the last character is a blank, it is rejected! 
>+    // The width must be distributed to the blockers in front... 
>+    // But not if it is the only one.
>     if ( ( pNode->GetChar( nLastChar ) == ' ' ) && ( aPositions.Count() > 1 ) && ( MsLangId::getPrimaryLanguage( GetLanguage( EditPaM( pNode, nLastChar ) ) ) != LANGUAGE_ARABIC_PRIMARY_ONLY ) )
>     {
>         aPositions.Remove( aPositions.Count()-1, 1 );
>@@ -2060,12 +1937,12 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpAdjustBlocks( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine,
>         long nBlankWidth = nRealWidth;
>         if ( nLastChar > nPortionStart )
>             nBlankWidth -= pLine->GetCharPosArray()[nLastChar-nFirstChar-1];
>-        // Evtl. ist das Blank schon in ImpBreakLine abgezogen worden:
>+        // Possibly the blank is already deducted in ImpBreakLine:
>         if ( nRealWidth == pLastPortion->GetSize().Width() )
>         {
>-            // Beim letzten Zeichen muss die Portion hinter dem Blank aufhoeren
>-            // => Korrektur vereinfachen:
>-            DBG_ASSERT( ( nPortionStart + pLastPortion->GetLen() ) == ( nLastChar+1 ), "Blank doch nicht am Portion-Ende?!" );
>+            // For the last character the portion must stop behind the blank
>+            // => Simplify correction:
>+            DBG_ASSERT( ( nPortionStart + pLastPortion->GetLen() ) == ( nLastChar+1 ), "Blank actually not at the end portion!?");
>             pLastPortion->GetSize().Width() -= nBlankWidth;
>             nRemainingSpace += nBlankWidth;
>         }
>@@ -2076,11 +1953,11 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpAdjustBlocks( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine,
>     const long nMore4Everyone = nRemainingSpace / nGaps;
>     long nSomeExtraSpace = nRemainingSpace - nMore4Everyone*nGaps;
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nSomeExtraSpace < (long)nGaps, "AdjustBlocks: ExtraSpace zu gross" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nSomeExtraSpace < (long)nGaps, "AdjustBlocks: ExtraSpace to large" );
>     DBG_ASSERT( nSomeExtraSpace >= 0, "AdjustBlocks: ExtraSpace < 0 " );
> 
>-    // Die Positionen im Array und die Portion-Breiten korrigieren:
>-    // Letztes Zeichen wird schon nicht mehr beachtet...
>+    // Correct the positions in the Array and the portion widths:
>+    // Last character is already not considered ...
>     for ( USHORT n = 0; n < aPositions.Count(); n++ )
>     {
>         USHORT nChar = aPositions[n];
>@@ -2091,7 +1968,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpAdjustBlocks( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, EditLine* pLine,
>             TextPortion* pLastPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions()[ nPortion ];
>             USHORT nPortionEnd = nPortionStart + pLastPortion->GetLen();
> 
>-            // Die Breite der Portion:
>+            // The width of the portion:
>             pLastPortion->GetSize().Width() += nMore4Everyone;
>             if ( nSomeExtraSpace )
>                 pLastPortion->GetSize().Width()++;
>@@ -2234,10 +2111,9 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpFindKashidas( ContentNode* pNode, USHORT nStart, USHORT n
> 
> sal_uInt16 ImpEditEngine::SplitTextPortion( ParaPortion* pPortion, sal_uInt16 nPos, EditLine* pCurLine )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "SplitTextPortion: Welche ?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "SplitTextPortion: Which ?" );
> 
>-    // Die Portion bei nPos wird geplittet, wenn bei nPos nicht
>-    // sowieso ein Wechsel ist
>+    // The portion at nPos is split, if ther is not a transition at nPos anyway
>     if ( nPos == 0 )
>         return 0;
> 
>@@ -2251,12 +2127,8 @@ sal_uInt16 ImpEditEngine::SplitTextPortion( ParaPortion* pPortion, sal_uInt16 nP
>         nTmpPos = nTmpPos + pTP->GetLen();
>         if ( nTmpPos >= nPos )
>         {
>-            if ( nTmpPos == nPos )	// dann braucht nichts geteilt werden
>+            if ( nTmpPos == nPos )	// then nothing needs to be split
>             {
>-                // Skip Portions with ExtraSpace
>-//				while ( ( (nSplitPortion+1) < nPortions ) && (pPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject(nSplitPortion+1)->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_EXTRASPACE ) )
>-//					nSplitPortion++;
>-
>                 return nSplitPortion;
>             }
>             pTextPortion = pTP;
>@@ -2264,18 +2136,18 @@ sal_uInt16 ImpEditEngine::SplitTextPortion( ParaPortion* pPortion, sal_uInt16 nP
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pTextPortion, "Position ausserhalb des Bereichs!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pTextPortion->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_TEXT, "SplitTextPortion: Keine TextPortion!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pTextPortion, "Position outside the area!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pTextPortion->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_TEXT, "SplitTextPortion: No TextPortion!" );
> 
>     sal_uInt16 nOverlapp = nTmpPos - nPos;
>     pTextPortion->GetLen() = pTextPortion->GetLen() - nOverlapp;
>     TextPortion* pNewPortion = new TextPortion( nOverlapp );
>     pPortion->GetTextPortions().Insert( pNewPortion, nSplitPortion+1 );
>-    // Groessen setzen:
>+    // Set sizes
>     if ( pCurLine )
>     {
>-        // Kein neues GetTextSize, sondern Werte aus Array verwenden:
>-        DBG_ASSERT( nPos > pCurLine->GetStart(), "SplitTextPortion am Anfang der Zeile?" );
>+        // No new GetTextSize, instead use values from the Array:
>+        DBG_ASSERT( nPos > pCurLine->GetStart(), "SplitTextPortion at the beginning of the line?" );
>         pTextPortion->GetSize().Width() = pCurLine->GetCharPosArray()[ nPos-pCurLine->GetStart()-1 ];
> 
>         if ( pTextPortion->GetExtraInfos() && pTextPortion->GetExtraInfos()->bCompressed )
>@@ -2302,7 +2174,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CreateTextPortions( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uInt16& r
> {
>     sal_uInt16 nStartPos = rStart;
>     ContentNode* pNode = pParaPortion->GetNode();
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode->Len(), "CreateTextPortions sollte nicht fuer leere Absaetze verwendet werden!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode->Len(), "CreateTextPortions should not be used for empty paragraphs!" );
> 
>     SortedPositions aPositions;
>     aPositions.Insert( (sal_uInt32) 0 );
>@@ -2311,8 +2183,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CreateTextPortions( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uInt16& r
>     EditCharAttrib* pAttrib = GetAttrib( pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs(), nAttr );
>     while ( pAttrib )
>     {
>-        // Start und Ende in das Array eintragen...
>-        // Die InsertMethode laesst keine doppelten Werte zu....
>+        // Insert Start and Ende in the Array...
>+        // The InsertMethode does not allow for duplicate values....
>         aPositions.Insert( pAttrib->GetStart() );
>         aPositions.Insert( pAttrib->GetEnd() );
>         nAttr++;
>@@ -2345,9 +2217,9 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CreateTextPortions( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uInt16& r
>         aPositions.Insert( mpIMEInfos->aPos.GetIndex() + mpIMEInfos->nLen );
>     }
> 
>-    // Ab ... loeschen:
>-    // Leider muss die Anzahl der TextPortions mit aPositions.Count()
>-    // nicht uebereinstimmen, da evtl. Zeilenumbrueche...
>+    // From ... Delete:
>+    // Unfortunately, the number of text portions does not have to match with 
>+    // aPositions.Count(), since there possible are line breaks...
>     sal_uInt16 nPortionStart = 0;
>     sal_uInt16 nInvPortion = 0;
>     sal_uInt16 nP;
>@@ -2363,18 +2235,18 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CreateTextPortions( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uInt16& r
>             break;
>         }
>     }
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nP < pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count() || !pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "Nichts zum loeschen: CreateTextPortions" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nP < pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count() || !pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "Nothing to delete: CreateTextPortions" );
>     if ( nInvPortion && ( nPortionStart+pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject(nInvPortion)->GetLen() > nStartPos ) )
>     {
>-        // lieber eine davor...
>-        // Aber nur wenn es mitten in der Portion war, sonst ist es evtl.
>-        // die einzige in der Zeile davor !
>+        // prefer one in front ...
>+        // But only if it was in the middle of the portion of, otherwise it is 
>+        // possibly the only one in the row in front!
>         nInvPortion--;
>         nPortionStart = nPortionStart - pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject(nInvPortion)->GetLen();
>     }
>     pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().DeleteFromPortion( nInvPortion );
> 
>-    // Eine Portion kann auch durch einen Zeilenumbruch entstanden sein:
>+    // A portion may also have been formed by a line break:
>     aPositions.Insert( nPortionStart );
> 
>     sal_uInt16 nInvPos;
>@@ -2390,35 +2262,34 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CreateTextPortions( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uInt16& r
>         pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Insert( pNew, pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count());
>     }
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "Keine Portions?!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "No Portions?!" );
> #ifdef EDITDEBUG
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->DbgCheckTextPortions(), "Portions kaputt?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->DbgCheckTextPortions(), "Portion is broken?" );
> #endif
> }
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::RecalcTextPortion( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uInt16 nStartPos, short nNewChars )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "Keine Portions!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nNewChars, "RecalcTextPortion mit Diff == 0" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "No Portions!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nNewChars, "RecalcTextPortion with Diff == 0" );
> 
>     ContentNode* const pNode = pParaPortion->GetNode();
>     if ( nNewChars > 0 )
>     {
>-        // Wenn an nStartPos ein Attribut beginnt/endet, faengt eine neue Portion
>-        // an, ansonsten wird die Portion an nStartPos erweitert.
>-
>+        // If an Attribute begins/ends at a nStartPos, then a new portion starts
>+        // otherwise the portion is extended at nStartPos.
>         if ( pNode->GetCharAttribs().HasBoundingAttrib( nStartPos ) || IsScriptChange( EditPaM( pNode, nStartPos ) ) )
>         {
>             sal_uInt16 nNewPortionPos = 0;
>             if ( nStartPos )
>                 nNewPortionPos = SplitTextPortion( pParaPortion, nStartPos ) + 1;
> 
>-            // Eine leere Portion kann hier stehen, wenn der Absatz leer war,
>-            // oder eine Zeile durch einen harten Zeilenumbruch entstanden ist.
>+            // A blank portion may be here, when the paragraph was empty,
>+            // or if a line was created through a hard line break.
>             if ( ( nNewPortionPos < pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count() ) &&
>                     !pParaPortion->GetTextPortions()[nNewPortionPos]->GetLen() )
>             {
>-                DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions()[nNewPortionPos]->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_TEXT, "Leere Portion war keine TextPortion!" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions()[nNewPortionPos]->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_TEXT, "the empty portion was no TextPortion!" );
>                 USHORT & r =
>                     pParaPortion->GetTextPortions()[nNewPortionPos]->GetLen();
>                 r = r + nNewChars;
>@@ -2435,19 +2306,20 @@ void ImpEditEngine::RecalcTextPortion( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uInt16 nSt
>             const sal_uInt16 nTP = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().
>                 FindPortion( nStartPos, nPortionStart );
>             TextPortion* const pTP = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions()[ nTP ];
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pTP, "RecalcTextPortion: Portion nicht gefunden"  );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pTP, "RecalcTextPortion: Portion not found"  );
>             pTP->GetLen() = pTP->GetLen() + nNewChars;
>             pTP->GetSize().Width() = (-1);
>         }
>     }
>     else
>     {
>-        // Portion schrumpfen oder ggf. entfernen.
>-        // Vor Aufruf dieser Methode muss sichergestellt sein, dass
>-        // keine Portions in dem geloeschten Bereich lagen!
>+        // Shrink or remove portion if necessary.
>+        // Before calling this method it must be ensured that no portions were 
>+        // in the deleted area!
> 
>-        // Es darf keine reinragende oder im Bereich startende Portion geben,
>-        // also muss nStartPos <= nPos <= nStartPos - nNewChars(neg.) sein
>+        // There can be no purely outstanding portions or portions starting in 
>+        // the area, so it must be:
>+        //    nStartPos <= nPos <= nStartPos - nNewChars(neg.) 
>         sal_uInt16 nPortion = 0;
>         sal_uInt16 nPos = 0;
>         sal_uInt16 nEnd = nStartPos-nNewChars;
>@@ -2458,16 +2330,16 @@ void ImpEditEngine::RecalcTextPortion( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uInt16 nSt
>             pTP = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions()[ nPortion ];
>             if ( ( nPos+pTP->GetLen() ) > nStartPos )
>             {
>-                DBG_ASSERT( nPos <= nStartPos, "Start falsch!" );
>-                DBG_ASSERT( nPos+pTP->GetLen() >= nEnd, "End falsch!" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( nPos <= nStartPos, "Wrong Start!" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( nPos+pTP->GetLen() >= nEnd, "Wrong End!" );
>                 break;
>             }
>             nPos = nPos + pTP->GetLen();
>         }
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pTP, "RecalcTextPortion: Portion nicht gefunden" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pTP, "RecalcTextPortion: Portion not found" );
>         if ( ( nPos == nStartPos ) && ( (nPos+pTP->GetLen()) == nEnd ) )
>         {
>-            // Portion entfernen;
>+            // Remove portion;
>             BYTE nType = pTP->GetKind();
>             pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Remove( nPortion );
>             delete pTP;
>@@ -2476,7 +2348,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::RecalcTextPortion( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uInt16 nSt
>                 TextPortion* pNext = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions()[ nPortion ];
>                 if ( pNext && !pNext->GetLen() )
>                 {
>-                    // Dummy-Portion entfernen
>+                    // Remove dummy portion
>                     pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Remove( nPortion );
>                     delete pNext;
>                 }
>@@ -2484,18 +2356,18 @@ void ImpEditEngine::RecalcTextPortion( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uInt16 nSt
>         }
>         else
>         {
>-            DBG_ASSERT( pTP->GetLen() > (-nNewChars), "Portion zu klein zum schrumpfen!" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( pTP->GetLen() > (-nNewChars), "Portion too small to shrink! ");
>             pTP->GetLen() = pTP->GetLen() + nNewChars;
>         }
> 
>-        // ganz am Schluss darf keine HYPHENATOR-Portion stehen bleiben...
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "RecalcTextPortions: Keine mehr da!" );
>+        // No HYPHENATOR portion is allowed to get stuck right at the end...
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "RecalcTextPortions: No longer there! ");
>         sal_uInt16 nLastPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count() - 1;
>         pTP = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( nLastPortion );
>         if ( pTP->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_HYPHENATOR )
>         {
>-            // Portion wegschmeissen, ggf. die davor korrigieren, wenn
>-            // die Hyph-Portion ein Zeichen geschluckt hat...
>+            // Discard portion if possible, correct the ones before, 
>+            // when the Hyphenator portion has swallowed one character...
>             pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Remove( nLastPortion );
>             if ( nLastPortion && pTP->GetLen() )
>             {
>@@ -2508,7 +2380,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::RecalcTextPortion( ParaPortion* pParaPortion, sal_uInt16 nSt
>         }
>     }
> #ifdef EDITDEBUG
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->DbgCheckTextPortions(), "Portions kaputt?" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion->DbgCheckTextPortions(), "Portions are broken?" );
> #endif
> }
> 
>@@ -2563,9 +2435,9 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetFixedCellHeight( BOOL bUseFixedCellHeight )
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::SeekCursor( ContentNode* pNode, sal_uInt16 nPos, SvxFont& rFont, OutputDevice* pOut, sal_uInt16 nIgnoreWhich )
> {
>-    // Es war mal geplant, SeekCursor( nStartPos, nEndPos, ... ), damit nur
>-    // ab der StartPosition neu gesucht wird.
>-    // Problem: Es mussten zwei Listen beruecksichtigt/gefuehrt werden:
>+    // It was planned, SeekCursor( nStartPos, nEndPos, ... ), so that it would 
>+    // only be searched anew at the StartPosition.
>+    // Problem: There would be two Listen to consider/handle:
>     // OrderedByStart,OrderedByEnd.
> 
>     if ( nPos > pNode->Len() )
>@@ -2618,17 +2490,15 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SeekCursor( ContentNode* pNode, sal_uInt16 nPos, SvxFont& rF
>         EditCharAttrib* pAttrib = GetAttrib( rAttribs, nAttr );
>         while ( pAttrib && ( pAttrib->GetStart() <= nPos ) )
>         {
>-            // Beim Seeken nicht die Attr beruecksichtigen, die dort beginnen!
>-            // Leere Attribute werden beruecksichtigt( verwendet), da diese
>-            // gerade eingestellt wurden.
>-            // 12.4.95: Doch keine Leeren Attribute verwenden:
>-            // - Wenn gerade eingestellt und leer => keine Auswirkung auf Font
>-            // In einem leeren Absatz eingestellte Zeichen werden sofort wirksam.
>+            // when seeking, ignore attributes which start there! Empty attributes
>+            // are considered (used as these are just set. But do not use empty
>+            // attributes: When just set and empty => no effect on font 
>+            // In a blank paragraph, set characters take effect immediately.
>             if ( ( pAttrib->Which() != nIgnoreWhich ) &&
>                  ( ( ( pAttrib->GetStart() < nPos ) && ( pAttrib->GetEnd() >= nPos ) )
>                      || ( !pNode->Len() ) ) )
>             {
>-                DBG_ASSERT( ( pAttrib->Which() >= EE_CHAR_START ) && ( pAttrib->Which() <= EE_FEATURE_END ), "Unglueltiges Attribut in Seek() " );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( ( pAttrib->Which() >= EE_CHAR_START ) && ( pAttrib->Which() <= EE_FEATURE_END ), "Invalid Attribute in Seek() " );
>                 if ( IsScriptItemValid( pAttrib->Which(), nScriptType ) )
>                 {
>                     pAttrib->SetFont( rFont, pOut );
>@@ -2659,20 +2529,18 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SeekCursor( ContentNode* pNode, sal_uInt16 nPos, SvxFont& rF
> 
>     if ( aStatus.DoNotUseColors() )
>     {
>-        // Hack fuer DL,weil JOE staendig die Pooldefaults verbiegt!
>-        // const SvxColorItem& rColorItem = (const SvxColorItem&)aEditDoc.GetItemPool().GetDefaultItem( EE_CHAR_COLOR );
>         rFont.SetColor( /* rColorItem.GetValue() */ COL_BLACK );
>     }
> 
>     if ( aStatus.DoStretch() || ( nRelWidth != 100 ) )
>     {
>-        // Fuer das aktuelle Ausgabegeraet, weil es sonst bei einem
>-        // Drucker als RefDev auf dem Bildschirm #?!@' aussieht!
>+        // For the current Output device, because otherwise it looks on 
>+        // a printer as RefDev does on the screen!
>         OutputDevice* pDev = pOut ? pOut : GetRefDevice();
>         rFont.SetPhysFont( pDev );
>         FontMetric aMetric( pDev->GetFontMetric() );
>-        // Fuer die Hoehe nicht die Metriken nehmen, da das bei
>-        // Hoch-/Tiefgestellt schief geht.
>+        // For the height do not consider the metrics, because it will go 
>+        // wrong at Superscript/Subscript.
>         Size aRealSz( aMetric.GetSize().Width(), rFont.GetSize().Height() );
>         if ( aStatus.DoStretch() )
>         {
>@@ -2693,23 +2561,22 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SeekCursor( ContentNode* pNode, sal_uInt16 nPos, SvxFont& rF
>                     aRealSz.Width() *= nStretchX;
>                     aRealSz.Width() /= 100;
> 
>-                    // Auch das Kerning: (long wegen Zwischenergebnis)
>+                    // Also the Kerning: (long to handle Interim results)
>                     long nKerning = rFont.GetFixKerning();
> /*
>-  Die Ueberlegung war: Wenn neg. Kerning, aber StretchX = 200
>-  => Nicht das Kerning verdoppelt, also die Buchstaben weiter
>-  zusammenziehen
>+  The consideration was: When negative Kerning, but StretchX = 200
>+  => Do not double the Kerning, so pull the letters closer together
>   ---------------------------
>   Kern	StretchX	=>Kern
>   ---------------------------
>   >0		<100		< (Proportional)
>   <0		<100		< (Proportional)
>   >0		>100		> (Proportional)
>-  <0		>100		< (Der Betrag, also Antiprop)
>+  <0		>100		< (The amount eg. Disproportional)
> */
>                     if ( ( nKerning < 0  ) && ( nStretchX > 100 ) )
>                     {
>-                        // Antiproportional
>+                        // Disproportional
>                         nKerning *= 100;
>                         nKerning /= nStretchX;
>                     }
>@@ -2729,7 +2596,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SeekCursor( ContentNode* pNode, sal_uInt16 nPos, SvxFont& rF
>             aRealSz.Width() /= 100;
>         }
>         rFont.SetSize( aRealSz );
>-        // Font wird nicht restauriert...
>+        // Font is not restored ...
>     }
> 
>     if ( ( ( rFont.GetColor() == COL_AUTO ) || ( IsForceAutoColor() ) ) && pOut )
>@@ -2786,9 +2653,9 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SeekCursor( ContentNode* pNode, sal_uInt16 nPos, SvxFont& rF
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::RecalcFormatterFontMetrics( FormatterFontMetric& rCurMetrics, SvxFont& rFont )
> {
>-    // Fuer Zeilenhoehe bei Hoch/Tief erstmal ohne Propr!
>+    // Line heights at high / low first without Propr!
>     sal_uInt16 nPropr = rFont.GetPropr();
>-    DBG_ASSERT( ( nPropr == 100 ) || rFont.GetEscapement(), "Propr ohne Escape?!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( ( nPropr == 100 ) || rFont.GetEscapement(), "Propr without Escape?!" );
>     if ( nPropr != 100 )
>     {
>         rFont.SetPropr( 100 );
>@@ -2805,52 +2672,35 @@ void ImpEditEngine::RecalcFormatterFontMetrics( FormatterFontMetric& rCurMetrics
> 
>     if ( IsFixedCellHeight() )
>     {
>-/*	creating correct proportional ascent and descent values lead to problems if different fonts are used
>-    in the same portion, it results in a bigger linespacing.
>-        sal_Int32 f = nAscent + nDescent;
>-        if ( f )
>-        {
>-            sal_Int32 nHeight = ImplCalculateFontIndependentLineSpacing( rFont.GetHeight() );
>-            nAscent  = (sal_Int16)(( nHeight * nAscent ) / f );
>-            nDescent = (sal_Int16)(nHeight - nAscent);
>-        }
>-*/
>         nAscent = sal::static_int_cast< sal_uInt16 >( rFont.GetHeight() );
>         nDescent= sal::static_int_cast< sal_uInt16 >( ImplCalculateFontIndependentLineSpacing( rFont.GetHeight() ) - nAscent );
>     }
>     else
>     {
>         sal_uInt16 nIntLeading = ( aMetric.GetIntLeading() > 0 ) ? (sal_uInt16)aMetric.GetIntLeading() : 0;
>-        // Fonts ohne Leading bereiten Probleme
>+        // Fonts without leading cause problems
>         if ( ( nIntLeading == 0 ) && ( pRefDev->GetOutDevType() == OUTDEV_PRINTER ) )
>         {
>-            // Da schaun wir mal, was fuer eine Leading ich auf dem
>-            // Bildschirm erhalte
>+            // Lets see what Leading one gets on the screen
>             VirtualDevice* pVDev = GetVirtualDevice( pRefDev->GetMapMode(), pRefDev->GetDrawMode() );
>             rFont.SetPhysFont( pVDev );
>             aMetric = pVDev->GetFontMetric();
> 
>-            // Damit sich die Leading nicht wieder rausrechnet,
>-            // wenn die ganze Zeile den Font hat, nTmpLeading.
>-
>-            // 4/96: Kommt bei HP Laserjet 4V auch nicht hin
>-            // => Werte komplett vom Bildschirm holen.
>-    //		sal_uInt16 nTmpLeading = (sal_uInt16)aMetric.GetLeading();
>-    //		nAscent += nTmpLeading;
>+            // This is so that the Leading does not count itself out again,
>+            // if the whole line has the font nTmpLeading.
>             nAscent = (sal_uInt16)aMetric.GetAscent();
>             nDescent = (sal_uInt16)aMetric.GetDescent();
>-    //		nLeading = (sal_uInt16)aMetric.GetLeading();
>         }
>     }
>     if ( nAscent > rCurMetrics.nMaxAscent )
>         rCurMetrics.nMaxAscent = nAscent;
>     if ( nDescent > rCurMetrics.nMaxDescent )
>         rCurMetrics.nMaxDescent= nDescent;
>-    // Sonderbehandlung Hoch/Tief:
>+    // Special treatment of high/low:
>     if ( rFont.GetEscapement() )
>     {
>-        // Jetzt unter Beruecksichtigung von Escape/Propr
>-        // Ascent oder Descent ggf vergroessern
>+        // Now in consideration from Escape/Propr 
>+        // Ascent or Descent possibly enlarge
>         short nDiff = (short)(rFont.GetSize().Height()*rFont.GetEscapement()/100L);
>         if ( rFont.GetEscapement() > 0 )
>         {
>@@ -2858,7 +2708,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::RecalcFormatterFontMetrics( FormatterFontMetric& rCurMetrics
>             if ( nAscent > rCurMetrics.nMaxAscent )
>                 rCurMetrics.nMaxAscent = nAscent;
>         }
>-        else	// muss < 0 sein
>+        else	// has to be < 0 
>         {
>             nDescent = (sal_uInt16) (((long)nDescent)*nPropr/100 - nDiff);
>             if ( nDescent > rCurMetrics.nMaxDescent )
>@@ -2881,15 +2731,15 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
>     EditLine* pLine;
>     Point aTmpPos;
>     Point aRedLineTmpPos;
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions().Count(), "Keine ParaPortion?!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions().Count(), "No ParaPortion?!" );
>     SvxFont aTmpFont( GetParaPortions()[0]->GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().GetDefFont() );
>     Font aOldFont( pOutDev->GetFont() );
>     vcl::PDFExtOutDevData* pPDFExtOutDevData = PTR_CAST( vcl::PDFExtOutDevData, pOutDev->GetExtOutDevData() );
> 
>-    // Bei gedrehtem Text wird aStartPos als TopLeft angesehen, da andere
>-    // Informationen fehlen, und sowieso das ganze Object ungescrollt
>-    // dargestellt wird.
>-    // Das Rechteck ist unendlich gross.
>+    // In the case of rotated text is aStartPos considered TopLeft because 
>+    // other information is missing, and since the whole object is shown anyway
>+    // un-scrolled.
>+    // The rectangle is infinite.
>     Point aOrigin( aStartPos );
>     double nCos = 0.0, nSin = 0.0;
>     if ( nOrientation )
>@@ -2904,22 +2754,17 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
>     GDIMetaFile* pMtf = pOutDev->GetConnectMetaFile();
>     const bool bMetafileValid( pMtf != NULL );
> 
>-    // Fuer OnlineSpelling:
>-//	EditPaM aCursorPos;
>-//	if( GetStatus().DoOnlineSpelling() && pActiveView )
>-//		aCurPos = pActiveView->pImpEditView->GetEditSelections().Max();
>-
>     long nVertLineSpacing = CalcVertLineSpacing(aStartPos);
> 
>     // --------------------------------------------------
>-    // Ueber alle Absaetze...
>+    // Over all the paragraphs ...
>     // --------------------------------------------------
>     for ( sal_uInt16 n = 0; n < GetParaPortions().Count(); n++ )
>     {
>         ParaPortion* pPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject( n );
>         DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "NULL-Pointer in TokenList in Paint" );
>-        // falls beim Tippen Idle-Formatierung, asynchrones Paint.
>-        // Unsichtbare Portions koennen ungueltig sein.
>+        // if when typing idle formatting,  asynchronous Paint.
>+        // Invisible Portions may be invalid.
>         if ( pPortion->IsVisible() && pPortion->IsInvalid() )
>             return;
> 
>@@ -2934,7 +2779,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
> 
>         {
>             // --------------------------------------------------
>-            // Ueber die Zeilen des Absatzes...
>+            // On the lines of the paragraph ...
>             // --------------------------------------------------
>             sal_uInt16 nLines = pPortion->GetLines().Count();
>             sal_uInt16 nLastLine = nLines-1;
>@@ -2952,7 +2797,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
>             for ( sal_uInt16 nLine = 0; nLine < nLines; nLine++ )
>             {
>                 pLine = pPortion->GetLines().GetObject(nLine);
>-                DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "NULL-Pointer im Zeileniterator in UpdateViews" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( pLine, "NULL-Pointer in the line iterator in UpdateViews" );
>                 aTmpPos = aStartPos;
>                 if ( !IsVertical() )
>                 {
>@@ -2980,46 +2825,33 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
>                     // does, too. No change for not-layouting (painting).
>                     if(0 == nLine) // && !bStripOnly)
>                     {
>-                        // VERT???
>                         GetEditEnginePtr()->PaintingFirstLine( n, aParaStart, aTmpPos.Y(), aOrigin, nOrientation, pOutDev );
>                     }
> 
>                     // --------------------------------------------------
>-                    // Ueber die Portions der Zeile...
>+                    // Over the Portions of the line ...
>                     // --------------------------------------------------
>                     nIndex = pLine->GetStart();
>                     for ( sal_uInt16 y = pLine->GetStartPortion(); y <= pLine->GetEndPortion(); y++ )
>                     {
>-                        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "Zeile ohne Textportion im Paint!" );
>+                        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion->GetTextPortions().Count(), "Line without'''' Textportion in Paint!" );
>                         TextPortion* pTextPortion = pPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( y );
>-                        DBG_ASSERT( pTextPortion, "NULL-Pointer im Portioniterator in UpdateViews" );
>+                        DBG_ASSERT( pTextPortion, "NULL-Pointer in Portion iterator in UpdateViews" );
> 
>                         long nPortionXOffset = GetPortionXOffset( pPortion, pLine, y );
>                         if ( !IsVertical() )
>                         {
>                             aTmpPos.X() = aStartPos.X() + nPortionXOffset;
>                             if ( aTmpPos.X() > aClipRec.Right() )
>-                                break;	// Keine weitere Ausgabe in Zeile noetig
>+                                break;	// No further output in line necessary
>                         }
>                         else
>                         {
>                             aTmpPos.Y() = aStartPos.Y() + nPortionXOffset;
>                             if ( aTmpPos.Y() > aClipRec.Bottom() )
>-                                break;	// Keine weitere Ausgabe in Zeile noetig
>+                                break;	// No further output in line necessary
>                         }
> 
>-                        // R2L replaces with obove...
>-                        // New position after processing R2L text...
>-// R2L                        if ( nR2LWidth && !pTextPortion->GetRightToLeft() )
>-// R2L                        {
>-// R2L							if ( !IsVertical() )
>-// R2L								aTmpPos.X() += nR2LWidth;
>-// R2L							else
>-// R2L								aTmpPos.Y() += nR2LWidth;
>-// R2L
>-// R2L                            nR2LWidth = 0;
>-// R2L                        }
>-
>                         switch ( pTextPortion->GetKind() )
>                         {
>                             case PORTIONKIND_TEXT:
>@@ -3170,8 +3002,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
>                                 else if ( pTextPortion->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_FIELD )
>                                 {
>                                     EditCharAttrib* pAttr = pPortion->GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().FindFeature( nIndex );
>-                                    DBG_ASSERT( pAttr, "Feld nicht gefunden" );
>-                                    DBG_ASSERT( pAttr && pAttr->GetItem()->ISA( SvxFieldItem ), "Feld vom falschen Typ!" );
>+                                    DBG_ASSERT( pAttr, "Field not found");
>+                                    DBG_ASSERT( pAttr && pAttr->GetItem()->ISA( SvxFieldItem ), "Field of the wrong type! ");
>                                     aText = ((EditCharAttribField*)pAttr)->GetFieldValue();
>                                     nTextStart = 0;
>                                     nTextLen = aText.Len();
>@@ -3224,24 +3056,6 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
>                                 if (pTextPortion->IsRightToLeft())
>                                     aRedLineTmpPos.X() += pTextPortion->GetSize().Width();
> 
>-//L2R                                if ( pTextPortion->GetRightToLeft() )
>-//L2R                                {
>-//L2R                                    sal_uInt16 nNextPortion = y+1;
>-//L2R                                    while ( nNextPortion <= pLine->GetEndPortion() )
>-//L2R                                    {
>-//L2R						                TextPortion* pNextTextPortion = pPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject( nNextPortion );
>-//L2R                                        if ( pNextTextPortion->GetRightToLeft() )
>-//L2R                                        {
>-//L2R			                                if ( !IsVertical() )
>-//L2R                                                aOutPos.X() += pNextTextPortion->GetSize().Width();
>-//L2R			                                else
>-//L2R                                                aOutPos.Y() += pNextTextPortion->GetSize().Width();
>-//L2R                                        }
>-//L2R                                        else
>-//L2R                                            break;
>-//L2R                                        nNextPortion++;
>-//L2R                                    }
>-//L2R                                }
>                                 if ( bStripOnly )
>                                 {
>                                     EEngineData::WrongSpellVector aWrongSpellVector;
>@@ -3340,7 +3154,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
>                                     short nEsc = aTmpFont.GetEscapement();
>                                     if ( nOrientation )
>                                     {
>-                                        // Bei Hoch/Tief selbst Hand anlegen:
>+                                        // In case of high/low self-evident:
>                                         if ( aTmpFont.GetEscapement() )
>                                         {
>                                             long nDiff = aTmpFont.GetSize().Height() * aTmpFont.GetEscapement() / 100L;
>@@ -3357,23 +3171,25 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
>                                         aTmpFont.SetPhysFont( pOutDev );
> 
>                                     }
>-                                    // nur ausgeben, was im sichtbaren Bereich beginnt:
>-                                    // Wichtig, weil Bug bei einigen Grafikkarten bei transparentem Font, Ausgabe bei neg.
>+
>+                                    // Take only what begins in the visible range: 
>+                                    // Important, because of a bug in some graphic cards 
>+                                    // when transparent font, output when negative
>                                     if ( nOrientation || ( !IsVertical() && ( ( aTmpPos.X() + nTxtWidth ) >= nFirstVisXPos ) )
>                                             || ( IsVertical() && ( ( aTmpPos.Y() + nTxtWidth ) >= nFirstVisYPos ) ) )
>                                     {
>                                         if ( nEsc && ( ( aTmpFont.GetUnderline() != UNDERLINE_NONE ) ) )
>                                         {
>-                                            // Das Hoch/Tief ohne Underline malen, das Underline
>-                                            // auf der BaseLine der Original-Fonthoehe ausgeben...
>-
>-                                            // Aber nur, wenn davor auch Unterstrichen!
>+                                            // Paint the high/low without underline, 
>+                                            // Display the Underline on the 
>+                                            // base line of the original font height ... 
>+                                            // But only if there was an underscores before!                                            
>                                             sal_Bool bSpecialUnderline = sal_False;
>                                             EditCharAttrib* pPrev = pPortion->GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().FindAttrib( EE_CHAR_ESCAPEMENT, nIndex );
>                                             if ( pPrev )
>                                             {
>                                                 SvxFont aDummy;
>-                                                // Unterstreichung davor?
>+                                                // Underscore in front?
>                                                 if ( pPrev->GetStart() )
>                                                 {
>                                                     SeekCursor( pPortion->GetNode(), pPrev->GetStart(), aDummy );
>@@ -3499,24 +3315,6 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
>                                 if ( pTmpDXArray )
>                                     delete[] pTmpDXArray;
> 
>-// R2L                                if ( !pTextPortion->GetRightToLeft() )
>-// R2L                                {
>-// R2L								    if ( !IsVertical() )
>-// R2L									    aTmpPos.X() += nTxtWidth;
>-// R2L								    else
>-// R2L									    aTmpPos.Y() += nTxtWidth;
>-// R2L                                }
>-// R2L                                else
>-// R2L                                {
>-// R2L                                    nR2LWidth += nTxtWidth;
>-// R2L                                }
>-
>-                                if ( pTextPortion->GetKind() == PORTIONKIND_FIELD )
>-                                {
>-                                    EditCharAttrib* pAttr = pPortion->GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().FindFeature( nIndex );
>-                                    DBG_ASSERT( pAttr, "Feld nicht gefunden" );
>-                                    DBG_ASSERT( pAttr && pAttr->GetItem()->ISA( SvxFieldItem ), "Feld vom falschen Typ!" );
>-
>                                     // add a meta file comment if we record to a metafile
>                                     if( bMetafileValid )
>                                     {
>@@ -3534,23 +3332,9 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
> 
>                             }
>                             break;
>-//							case PORTIONKIND_EXTRASPACE:
>-                            case PORTIONKIND_TAB:
>-                            {
>-                                if ( pTextPortion->GetExtraValue() && ( pTextPortion->GetExtraValue() != ' ' ) )
>-                                {
>-                                    SeekCursor( pPortion->GetNode(), nIndex+1, aTmpFont, pOutDev );
>-                                    aTmpFont.SetTransparent( sal_False );
>-                                    aTmpFont.SetEscapement( 0 );
>-                                    aTmpFont.SetPhysFont( pOutDev );
>-                                    long nCharWidth = aTmpFont.QuickGetTextSize( pOutDev, pTextPortion->GetExtraValue(), 0, 1, NULL ).Width();
>-                                    long nChars = 2;
>-                                    if( nCharWidth )
>-                                        nChars = pTextPortion->GetSize().Width() / nCharWidth;
>-                                    if ( nChars < 2 )
>-                                        nChars = 2;	// wird durch DrawStretchText gestaucht.
>+                                        nChars = 2;	// is compressed by DrawStretchText.
>                                     else if ( nChars == 2 )
>-                                        nChars = 3;	// sieht besser aus
>+                                        nChars = 3;	// looks better
> 
>                                     String aText;
>                                     aText.Fill( (USHORT)nChars, pTextPortion->GetExtraValue() );
>@@ -3590,7 +3374,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
>                         aStartPos.X() -= nSBL;
>                 }
> 
>-                // keine sichtbaren Aktionen mehr?
>+                // no more visible actions?
>                 if ( !IsVertical() && ( aStartPos.Y() >= aClipRec.Bottom() ) )
>                     break;
>                 else if ( IsVertical() && ( aStartPos.X() <= aClipRec.Left() ) )
>@@ -3618,7 +3402,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
>         if ( pPDFExtOutDevData )
>             pPDFExtOutDevData->EndStructureElement();
> 
>-        // keine sichtbaren Aktionen mehr?
>+        // no more visible actions?
>         if ( !IsVertical() && ( aStartPos.Y() > aClipRec.Bottom() ) )
>             break;
>         if ( IsVertical() && ( aStartPos.X() < aClipRec.Left() ) )
>@@ -3630,13 +3414,13 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( OutputDevice* pOutDev, Rectangle aClipRec, Point aSta
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::Paint( ImpEditView* pView, const Rectangle& rRec, sal_Bool bUseVirtDev )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pView, "Keine View - Kein Paint!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pView, "No View - No Paint!" );
>     DBG_CHKOBJ( GetEditEnginePtr(), EditEngine, 0 );
> 
>     if ( !GetUpdateMode() || IsInUndo() )
>         return;
> 
>-    // Schnittmenge aus Paintbereich und OutputArea.
>+    // Intersection of paint area and output area.
>     Rectangle aClipRec( pView->GetOutputArea() );
>     aClipRec.Intersection( rRec );
> 
>@@ -3657,7 +3441,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( ImpEditView* pView, const Rectangle& rRec, sal_Bool b
>             aClipRecPixel.Bottom() += 1;
>         }
> 
>-        // Wenn aClipRecPixel > XXXX, dann invalidieren ?!
>+        // If aClipRecPixel > XXXX, then invalidate?!
> 
>         VirtualDevice* pVDev = GetVirtualDevice( pOutWin->GetMapMode(), pOutWin->GetDrawMode() );
>         pVDev->SetDigitLanguage( GetRefDevice()->GetDigitLanguage() );
>@@ -3699,8 +3483,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( ImpEditView* pView, const Rectangle& rRec, sal_Bool b
>         }
>         else
>         {
>-            // Das VirtDev kann bei einem Resize sehr gross werden =>
>-            // irgendwann mal kleiner machen!
>+            // The VirtDev can become very big during a Resize =>
>+            // eventually make it smaller!
>             if ( ( aOutSz.Height() > ( aClipRecPixel.GetHeight() + RESDIFF ) ) ||
>                  ( aOutSz.Width() > ( aClipRecPixel.GetWidth() + RESDIFF ) ) )
>             {
>@@ -3711,15 +3495,15 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( ImpEditView* pView, const Rectangle& rRec, sal_Bool b
>                 pVDev->Erase();
>             }
>         }
>-        DBG_ASSERT( bVDevValid, "VDef konnte nicht vergroessert werden!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( bVDevValid, "VDef could not be enlarged!" );
>         if ( !bVDevValid )
>         {
>             Paint( pView, rRec, sal_False /* ohne VDev */ );
>             return;
>         }
> 
>-        // PaintRect fuer VDev nicht mit alignter Groesse,
>-        // da sonst die Zeile darunter auch ausgegeben werden muss:
>+        // PaintRect for VDev not with aligner size,
>+        // Otherwise, the line below must also be printed out:
>         Rectangle aTmpRec( Point( 0, 0 ), aClipRec.GetSize() );
> 
>         aClipRec = pOutWin->PixelToLogic( aClipRecPixel );
>@@ -3747,12 +3531,9 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( ImpEditView* pView, const Rectangle& rRec, sal_Bool b
>         if ( GetTextRanger() )
>         {
>             // Some problems here with push/pop, why?!
>-//			pOutWin->Push( PUSH_CLIPREGION|PUSH_MAPMODE );
>-            bClipRegion = pOutWin->IsClipRegion();
>-            aOldRegion = pOutWin->GetClipRegion();
>-            // Wie bekomme ich das Polygon an die richtige Stelle????
>-            // Das Polygon bezieht sich auf die View, nicht auf das Window
>-            // => Origin umsetzen...
>+            // How do I get the polygon to the right place??
>+            // The polygon is based on the view, not the Window
>+            // => reset origin...
>             aOldMapMode = pOutWin->GetMapMode();
>             Point aOrigin = aOldMapMode.GetOrigin();
>             Point aViewPos = pView->GetOutputArea().TopLeft();
>@@ -3769,36 +3550,10 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( ImpEditView* pView, const Rectangle& rRec, sal_Bool b
> 
>         if ( GetTextRanger() )
>         {
>-//			pOutWin->Pop();
>-            if ( bClipRegion )
>-                pOutWin->SetClipRegion( aOldRegion );
>-            else
>-                pOutWin->SetClipRegion();
>-            pOutWin->SetMapMode( aOldMapMode );
>-        }
>-
>-
>-        pView->DrawSelection();
>-    }
>-    else
>-    {
>-        Point aStartPos;
>-        if ( !IsVertical() )
>-        {
>-            aStartPos = pView->GetOutputArea().TopLeft();
>-            aStartPos.X() -= pView->GetVisDocLeft();
>-            aStartPos.Y() -= pView->GetVisDocTop();
>-        }
>-        else
>-        {
>-            aStartPos = pView->GetOutputArea().TopRight();
>-            aStartPos.X() += pView->GetVisDocTop();
>-            aStartPos.Y() -= pView->GetVisDocLeft();
>-        }
>-
>-        // Wenn Doc-Breite < OutputArea,Width, nicht umgebrochene Felder,
>-        // stehen die Felder sonst ï¿½ber, wenn > Zeile.
>-        // ( Oben nicht, da dort bereits Doc-Breite von Formatierung mit drin )
>+        // If Doc-width < Output Area,Width then not wrapped fields, 
>+        // the fields usually protrude if > line. 
>+        // (Not at the top, since there the Doc-width from formatting is already
>+        // there)
>         if ( !IsVertical() && ( pView->GetOutputArea().GetWidth() > GetPaperSize().Width() ) )
>         {
>             long nMaxX = pView->GetOutputArea().Left() + GetPaperSize().Width();
>@@ -3826,8 +3581,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Paint( ImpEditView* pView, const Rectangle& rRec, sal_Bool b
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::InsertContent( ContentNode* pNode, sal_uInt16 nPos )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "NULL-Poointer in InsertContent! " );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( IsInUndo(), "InsertContent nur fuer Undo()!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "NULL-Pointer in InsertContent! " );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( IsInUndo(), "InsertContent only for Undo()!" );
>     ParaPortion* pNew = new ParaPortion( pNode );
>     GetParaPortions().Insert( pNew, nPos );
>     aEditDoc.Insert( pNode, nPos );
>@@ -3838,9 +3593,9 @@ void ImpEditEngine::InsertContent( ContentNode* pNode, sal_uInt16 nPos )
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::SplitContent( sal_uInt16 nNode, sal_uInt16 nSepPos )
> {
>     ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nNode );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Ungueltiger Node in SplitContent" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( IsInUndo(), "SplitContent nur fuer Undo()!" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nSepPos <= pNode->Len(), "Index im Wald: SplitContent" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Invalid Node in SplitContent" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( IsInUndo(), "SplitContent only for Undo()!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nSepPos <= pNode->Len(), "Index out of range: SplitContent" );
>     EditPaM aPaM( pNode, nSepPos );
>     return ImpInsertParaBreak( aPaM );
> }
>@@ -3849,9 +3604,9 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ConnectContents( sal_uInt16 nLeftNode, sal_Bool bBackward
> {
>     ContentNode* pLeftNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nLeftNode );
>     ContentNode* pRightNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nLeftNode+1 );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pLeftNode, "Ungueltiger linker Node in ConnectContents" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pRightNode, "Ungueltiger rechter Node in ConnectContents" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( IsInUndo(), "ConnectContent nur fuer Undo()!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pLeftNode, "Invalid left node in ConnectContents ");
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pRightNode, "Invalid right node in ConnectContents ");
>+    DBG_ASSERT( IsInUndo(), "ConnectContent only for Undo()!" );
>     return ImpConnectParagraphs( pLeftNode, pRightNode, bBackward );
> }
> 
>@@ -3859,23 +3614,12 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetUpdateMode( sal_Bool bUp, EditView* pCurView, sal_Bool bF
> {
>     sal_Bool bChanged = ( GetUpdateMode() != bUp );
> 
>-    // Beim Umschalten von sal_True auf sal_False waren alle Selektionen sichtbar,
>-    // => Wegmalen
>-    // Umgekehrt waren alle unsichtbar => malen
>-
>-//	DrawAllSelections();	sieht im Outliner schlecht aus !
>-//	EditView* pView = aEditViewList.First();
>-//	while ( pView )
>-//	{
>-//		DBG_CHKOBJ( pView, EditView, 0 );
>-//		pView->pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>-//		pView = aEditViewList.Next();
>-//	}
>-
>-    // Wenn !bFormatted, also z.B. nach SetText, braucht bei UpdateMode sal_True
>-    // nicht sofort formatiert werden, weil warscheinlich noch Text kommt.
>-    // Spaetestens bei einem Paint / CalcTextWidth wird formatiert.
>-
>+    // When switching from sal_True to sal_False, all selections were visible, 
>+    // => paint over 
>+    // the other hand, were all invisible => paint 
>+    // If !bFormatted, eg for example after SetText, then sal_True does not Ã¤
>+    // format immediately for update mode, probably because more text is coming.
>+    // At Latest it is formatted at a Paint/CalcTextWidth.
>     bUpdate = bUp;
>     if ( bUpdate && ( bChanged || bForceUpdate ) )
>         FormatAndUpdate( pCurView );
>@@ -3884,32 +3628,21 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetUpdateMode( sal_Bool bUp, EditView* pCurView, sal_Bool bF
> void ImpEditEngine::ShowParagraph( sal_uInt16 nParagraph, sal_Bool bShow )
> {
>     ParaPortion* pPPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nParagraph );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "ShowParagraph: Absatz existiert nicht!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "ShowParagraph: Paragraph does not exist! ");
>     if ( pPPortion && ( pPPortion->IsVisible() != bShow ) )
>     {
>         pPPortion->SetVisible( bShow );
> 
>         if ( !bShow )
>         {
>-            // Als deleted kenzeichnen, damit keine Selektion auf diesem
>-            // Absatz beginnt oder endet...
>+            // Mark as deleted, so that no selection will end or begin at
>+            // this paragraph...
>             DeletedNodeInfo* pDelInfo = new DeletedNodeInfo( (sal_uIntPtr)pPPortion->GetNode(), nParagraph );
>             aDeletedNodes.Insert( pDelInfo, aDeletedNodes.Count() );
>             UpdateSelections();
>-            // Dann kriege ich den unteren Bereich nicht invalidiert,
>-            // wenn UpdateMode = sal_False!
>-            // Wenn doch, dann vor SetVisible auf sal_False merken!
>-//			nCurTextHeight -= pPPortion->GetHeight();
>-        }
>-
>-        if ( bShow && ( pPPortion->IsInvalid() || !pPPortion->nHeight ) )
>-        {
>-            if ( !GetTextRanger() )
>-            {
>-                if ( pPPortion->IsInvalid() )
>-                {
>-                    Font aOldFont( GetRefDevice()->GetFont() );
>-                    CreateLines( nParagraph, 0 );	// 0: Kein TextRanger
>+            // The region below will not be invalidated if UpdateMode = sal_False!
>+            // If anyway, then set SetVisible to sal_False!
>+                    CreateLines( nParagraph, 0 );	// 0: No TextRanger
>                     if ( aStatus.DoRestoreFont() )
>                         GetRefDevice()->SetFont( aOldFont );
>                 }
>@@ -3938,7 +3671,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ShowParagraph( sal_uInt16 nParagraph, sal_Bool bShow )
> sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::IsParagraphVisible( sal_uInt16 nParagraph )
> {
>     ParaPortion* pPPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nParagraph );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "IsParagraphVisible: Absatz existiert nicht!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPPortion, "IsParagraphVisible: Paragraph does not exist! ");
>     if ( pPPortion )
>         return pPPortion->IsVisible();
>     return sal_False;
>@@ -3946,7 +3679,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::IsParagraphVisible( sal_uInt16 nParagraph )
> 
> EditSelection ImpEditEngine::MoveParagraphs( Range aOldPositions, sal_uInt16 nNewPos, EditView* pCurView )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions().Count() != 0, "Keine Absaetze gefunden: MoveParagraphs" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions().Count() != 0, "No paragraphs found: MoveParagraphs" );
>     if ( GetParaPortions().Count() == 0 )
>         return EditSelection();
>     aOldPositions.Justify();
>@@ -3956,20 +3689,20 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::MoveParagraphs( Range aOldPositions, sal_uInt16 nNe
>     if ( nNewPos >= GetParaPortions().Count() )
>         nNewPos = GetParaPortions().Count() - 1;
> 
>-    // Dort, wo der Absatz eingefuegt wurde, muss richtig gepainted werden:
>-    // Dort, wo der Absatz entfernt wurde, muss richtig gepainted werden:
>-    // ( Und dazwischen entsprechend auch...)
>+    // Where the paragraph was inserted it has to be properly redrawn:
>+    // Where the paragraph was removed it has to be properly redrawn:
>+    // ( and correspondingly in between as well...)
>     if ( pCurView && ( GetUpdateMode() == sal_True ) )
>     {
>-        // in diesem Fall kann ich direkt neu malen, ohne die
>-        // Portions zu Invalidieren.
>+        // in this case one can redraw directly whithout invalidating the 
>+        // Portions
>         sal_uInt16 nFirstPortion = Min( (sal_uInt16)aOldPositions.Min(), nNewPos );
>         sal_uInt16 nLastPortion = Max( (sal_uInt16)aOldPositions.Max(), nNewPos );
> 
>         ParaPortion* pUpperPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nFirstPortion );
>         ParaPortion* pLowerPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nLastPortion );
> 
>-        aInvalidRec = Rectangle();	// leermachen
>+        aInvalidRec = Rectangle();	// make empty
>         aInvalidRec.Left() = 0;
>         aInvalidRec.Right() = aPaperSize.Width();
>         aInvalidRec.Top() = GetParaPortions().GetYOffset( pUpperPortion );
>@@ -3979,7 +3712,7 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::MoveParagraphs( Range aOldPositions, sal_uInt16 nNe
>     }
>     else
>     {
>-        // aber der oberen ungueltigen Position neu painten...
>+        // but redraw at the upper invalid position
>         sal_uInt16 nFirstInvPara = Min( (sal_uInt16)aOldPositions.Min(), nNewPos );
>         InvalidateFromParagraph( nFirstInvPara );
>     }
>@@ -3988,9 +3721,8 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::MoveParagraphs( Range aOldPositions, sal_uInt16 nNe
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::InvalidateFromParagraph( sal_uInt16 nFirstInvPara )
> {
>-    // Es werden nicht die folgenden Absaetze invalidiert,
>-    // da ResetHeight() => Groessenanderung => alles folgende wird
>-    // sowieso neu ausgegeben.
>+    // The following paragraphs are not invalidated, since ResetHeight() 
>+    // => size change => all the following are re-issued anyway.
>     ParaPortion* pTmpPortion;
>     if ( nFirstInvPara != 0 )
>     {
>@@ -4016,19 +3748,19 @@ void ImpEditEngine::CallStatusHdl()
> {
>     if ( aStatusHdlLink.IsSet() && aStatus.GetStatusWord() )
>     {
>-        // Der Status muss vor Call zurueckgesetzt werden,
>-        // da im Hdl evtl. weitere Fags gesetzt werden...
>+        // The Status has to be reset before the Call,
>+        // since other Flags might be set in the handler...
>         EditStatus aTmpStatus( aStatus );
>         aStatus.Clear();
>         aStatusHdlLink.Call( &aTmpStatus );
>-        aStatusTimer.Stop();	// Falls von Hand gerufen...
>+        aStatusTimer.Stop();	// If created by hand ...
>     }
> }
> 
> ContentNode* ImpEditEngine::GetPrevVisNode( ContentNode* pCurNode )
> {
>     ParaPortion* pPortion = FindParaPortion( pCurNode );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "GetPrevVisibleNode: Keine passende Portion!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "GetPrevVisibleNode: No matching portion!" );
>     pPortion = GetPrevVisPortion( pPortion );
>     if ( pPortion )
>         return pPortion->GetNode();
>@@ -4038,7 +3770,7 @@ ContentNode* ImpEditEngine::GetPrevVisNode( ContentNode* pCurNode )
> ContentNode* ImpEditEngine::GetNextVisNode( ContentNode* pCurNode )
> {
>     ParaPortion* pPortion = FindParaPortion( pCurNode );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "GetNextVisibleNode: Keine passende Portion!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "GetNextVisibleNode: No matching portion!" );
>     pPortion = GetNextVisPortion( pPortion );
>     if ( pPortion )
>         return pPortion->GetNode();
>@@ -4048,7 +3780,7 @@ ContentNode* ImpEditEngine::GetNextVisNode( ContentNode* pCurNode )
> ParaPortion* ImpEditEngine::GetPrevVisPortion( ParaPortion* pCurPortion )
> {
>     sal_uInt16 nPara = GetParaPortions().GetPos( pCurPortion );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nPara < GetParaPortions().Count() , "Portion nicht gefunden: GetPrevVisPortion" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nPara < GetParaPortions().Count() , "Portion not found: GetPrevVisPortion" );
>     ParaPortion* pPortion = nPara ? GetParaPortions()[--nPara] : 0;
>     while ( pPortion && !pPortion->IsVisible() )
>         pPortion = nPara ? GetParaPortions()[--nPara] : 0;
>@@ -4059,7 +3791,7 @@ ParaPortion* ImpEditEngine::GetPrevVisPortion( ParaPortion* pCurPortion )
> ParaPortion* ImpEditEngine::GetNextVisPortion( ParaPortion* pCurPortion )
> {
>     sal_uInt16 nPara = GetParaPortions().GetPos( pCurPortion );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nPara < GetParaPortions().Count() , "Portion nicht gefunden: GetPrevVisNode" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nPara < GetParaPortions().Count() , "Portion not found: GetPrevVisNode" );
>     ParaPortion* pPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( ++nPara );
>     while ( pPortion && !pPortion->IsVisible() )
>         pPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( ++nPara );
>@@ -4123,7 +3855,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::InsertParagraph( sal_uInt16 nPara )
>         ContentNode* pNode = GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( nPara-1 );
>         if ( !pNode )
>             pNode = GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( GetEditDoc().Count() - 1 );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Kein einziger Absatz in InsertParagraph ?" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Not a single paragraph in InsertParagraph ?" );
>         aPaM = EditPaM( pNode, pNode->Len() );
>     }
>     else
>@@ -4139,7 +3871,7 @@ EditSelection* ImpEditEngine::SelectParagraph( sal_uInt16 nPara )
> {
>     EditSelection* pSel = 0;
>     ContentNode* pNode = GetEditDoc().SaveGetObject( nPara );
>-    DBG_ASSERTWARNING( pNode, "Absatz existiert nicht: SelectParagraph" );
>+    DBG_ASSERTWARNING( pNode, "Paragraph does not exist: SelectParagraph" );
>     if ( pNode )
>         pSel = new EditSelection( EditPaM( pNode, 0 ), EditPaM( pNode, pNode->Len() ) );
> 
>@@ -4214,9 +3946,9 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoStretchChars( sal_uInt16 nX, sal_uInt16 nY )
> 
>         if ( nX != 100 )
>         {
>-            // Fontbreite
>+            // Font width
>             SvxCharScaleWidthItem* pNewWidth = (SvxCharScaleWidthItem*) pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItem( EE_CHAR_FONTWIDTH ).Clone();
>-            sal_uInt32 nProp = pNewWidth->GetValue();	// sal_uInt32, kann temporaer gross werden
>+            sal_uInt32 nProp = pNewWidth->GetValue();	// sal_uInt32, can get big temporary
>             nProp *= nX;
>             nProp /= 100;
>             pNewWidth->SetValue( (sal_uInt16)nProp );
>@@ -4235,8 +3967,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoStretchChars( sal_uInt16 nX, sal_uInt16 nY )
>             }
>             else if ( nKerning < 0 )
>             {
>-                // Bei Negativen Werten:
>-                // Bei Stretching > 100 muessen die Werte kleiner werden und umgekehrt.
>+                // For Negative values:
>+                // For Stretching > 100 the values must be smaller and vice versa
>                 nKerning *= 100;
>                 nKerning /= nX;
>             }
>@@ -4249,7 +3981,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoStretchChars( sal_uInt16 nX, sal_uInt16 nY )
> 
>         if ( nY != 100 )
>         {
>-            // Fonthoehe
>+            // Font height
>             for ( int nItem = 0; nItem < 3; nItem++ )
>             {
>                 USHORT nItemId = EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT;
>@@ -4269,7 +4001,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoStretchChars( sal_uInt16 nX, sal_uInt16 nY )
>                 delete pNewHeight;
>             }
> 
>-            // Absatzabstaende
>+            // Paragraph spacing
>             const SvxULSpaceItem& rULSpaceItem =
>                 (const SvxULSpaceItem&)pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItem( EE_PARA_ULSPACE );
>             SvxULSpaceItem* pNewUL = (SvxULSpaceItem*)rULSpaceItem.Clone();
>@@ -4289,8 +4021,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoStretchChars( sal_uInt16 nX, sal_uInt16 nY )
> 
>         SetParaAttribs( nPara, aTmpSet );
> 
>-        // harte Attribute:
>-        sal_uInt16 nLastEnd = 0;	// damit nach entfernen und neu nicht nochmal
>+        // hard Attribute:
>+        sal_uInt16 nLastEnd = 0;	// so not again after removing them and new
>         CharAttribArray& rAttribs = pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs();
>         sal_uInt16 nAttribs = rAttribs.Count();
>         for ( sal_uInt16 nAttr = 0; nAttr < nAttribs; nAttr++ )
>@@ -4329,8 +4061,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoStretchChars( sal_uInt16 nX, sal_uInt16 nY )
>                     }
>                     else if ( nKerning < 0 )
>                     {
>-                        // Bei Negativen Werten:
>-                        // Bei Stretching > 100 muessen die Werte kleiner werden und umgekehrt.
>+                        // For Negative values:
>+                        // For Stretching > 100 the values must be smaller and vice versa.
>                         nKerning *= 100;
>                         nKerning /= nX;
>                     }
>@@ -4568,7 +4300,6 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::ImplCalcAsianCompression( ContentNode* pNode, TextPortion* p
>     DBG_ASSERT( pTextPortion->GetLen(), "ImplCalcAsianCompression - Empty Portion?" );
> 
>     // Percent is 1/100 Percent...
>-
>     if ( n100thPercentFromMax == 10000 )
>         pTextPortion->SetExtraInfos( NULL );
> 
>@@ -4597,7 +4328,6 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::ImplCalcAsianCompression( ContentNode* pNode, TextPortion* p
>                 }
>                 pTextPortion->GetExtraInfos()->nMaxCompression100thPercent = n100thPercentFromMax;
>                 pTextPortion->GetExtraInfos()->nAsianCompressionTypes |= nType;
>-//                pTextPortion->GetExtraInfos()->nCompressedChars++;
> 
>                 long nOldCharWidth;
>                 if ( (n+1) < nPortionLen )
>@@ -4696,7 +4426,6 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImplExpandCompressedPortions( EditLine* pLine, ParaPortion*
> {
>     BOOL bFoundCompressedPortion = FALSE;
>     long nCompressed = 0;
>-//    long nCompressWeight = 0;
>     TextPortionList aCompressedPortions;
> 
>     USHORT nPortion = pLine->GetEndPortion();
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit4.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit4.cxx
>index 93f9225..95956d3 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit4.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit4.cxx
>@@ -118,10 +118,10 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::Read( SvStream& rInput, const String& rBaseURL, EETextFor
>         aPaM = ReadBin( rInput, aSel );
>     else
>     {
>-        DBG_ERROR( "Read: Unbekanntes Format" );
>+        DBG_ERROR( "Read: Unknown Format" );
>     }
> 
>-    FormatFullDoc();		// reicht vielleicht auch ein einfaches Format?
>+    FormatFullDoc();		// perhaps a simple format is enough?
>     SetUpdateMode( _bUpdate );
> 
>     return aPaM;
>@@ -174,18 +174,15 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ReadRTF( SvStream& rInput, EditSelection aSel )
>     if ( aSel.HasRange() )
>         aSel = ImpDeleteSelection( aSel );
> 
>-//	sal_Bool bCharsBeforeInsertPos = ( aSel.Min().GetIndex() ) ? sal_True : sal_False;
>-//	sal_Bool bCharsBehindInsertPos = ( aSel.Min().GetIndex() < aSel.Min().GetNode()->Len() ) ? sal_True : sal_False;
>-
>-    // Der SvRTF-Parser erwartet, dass das Which-Mapping am uebergebenen Pool,
>-    // nicht an einem Secondary haengt.
>+    // The SvRTF parser expects the Which-mapping passed on in the pool, not 
>+    // dependant on a secondary.
>     SfxItemPool* pPool = &aEditDoc.GetItemPool();
>     while ( pPool->GetSecondaryPool() && !pPool->GetName().EqualsAscii( "EditEngineItemPool" ) )
>     {
>         pPool = pPool->GetSecondaryPool();
> 
>     }
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPool && pPool->GetName().EqualsAscii( "EditEngineItemPool" ), "ReadRTF: Kein EditEnginePool!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPool && pPool->GetName().EqualsAscii( "EditEngineItemPool" ), "ReadRTF: no EditEnginePool!" );
> 
>     EditRTFParserRef xPrsr = new EditRTFParser( rInput, aSel, *pPool, this );
>     SvParserState eState = xPrsr->CallParser();
>@@ -207,9 +204,6 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ReadHTML( SvStream& rInput, const String& rBaseURL, EditS
>     if ( aSel.HasRange() )
>         aSel = ImpDeleteSelection( aSel );
> 
>-//	sal_Bool bCharsBeforeInsertPos = ( aSel.Min().GetIndex() ) ? sal_True : sal_False;
>-//	sal_Bool bCharsBehindInsertPos = ( aSel.Min().GetIndex() < aSel.Min().GetNode()->Len() ) ? sal_True : sal_False;
>-
>     EditHTMLParserRef xPrsr = new EditHTMLParser( rInput, rBaseURL, pHTTPHeaderAttrs );
>     SvParserState eState = xPrsr->CallParser( this, aSel.Max() );
>     if ( ( eState != SVPAR_ACCEPTED ) && ( !rInput.GetError() ) )
>@@ -225,7 +219,7 @@ EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ReadHTML( SvStream& rInput, const String& rBaseURL, EditS
> 
> EditPaM ImpEditEngine::ReadBin( SvStream& rInput, EditSelection aSel )
> {
>-    // Einfach ein temporaeres TextObject missbrauchen...
>+    // Simply abuse a temporary text object ...
>     EditTextObject* pObj = EditTextObject::Create( rInput, NULL );
> 
>     EditPaM aLastPaM = aSel.Max();
>@@ -256,7 +250,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Write( SvStream& rOutput, EETextFormat eFormat, EditSelectio
>             WriteBin( rOutput, aSel );
>         else
>         {
>-            DBG_ERROR( "Write: Unbekanntes Format" );
>+            DBG_ERROR( "Write: Unknown Format" );
>         }
>     }
> }
>@@ -278,11 +272,11 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteText( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>         nEndNode = aEditDoc.Count()-1;
>     }
> 
>-    // ueber die Absaetze iterieren...
>+    // iterate over the paragraphs ...
>     for ( sal_uInt16 nNode = nStartNode; nNode <= nEndNode; nNode++  )
>     {
>         ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.GetObject( nNode );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node nicht gefunden: Search&Replace" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node not founden: Search&Replace" );
> 
>         sal_uInt16 nStartPos = 0;
>         sal_uInt16 nEndPos = pNode->Len();
>@@ -290,7 +284,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteText( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>         {
>             if ( nNode == nStartNode )
>                 nStartPos = aSel.Min().GetIndex();
>-            if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // kann auch == nStart sein!
>+            if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // can also be == nStart!
>                 nEndPos = aSel.Max().GetIndex();
>         }
>         XubString aTmpStr = aEditDoc.GetParaAsString( pNode, nStartPos, nEndPos );
>@@ -318,7 +312,7 @@ void lcl_FindValidAttribs( ItemList& rLst, ContentNode* pNode, sal_uInt16 nIndex
>     EditCharAttrib* pAttr = GetAttrib( pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs(), nAttr );
>     while ( pAttr && ( pAttr->GetStart() <= nIndex ) )
>     {
>-        // Start wird in While ueberprueft...
>+        // Start is checked in while ...
>         if ( pAttr->GetEnd() > nIndex )
>         {
>             if ( IsScriptItemValid( pAttr->GetItem()->Which(), nScriptType ) )
>@@ -365,7 +359,7 @@ static sal_uInt16 getStylePos( const SfxStyles& rStyles, SfxStyleSheet* pSheet )
> sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
> {
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>-    DBG_ASSERT( GetUpdateMode(), "WriteRTF bei UpdateMode = sal_False!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( GetUpdateMode(), "WriteRTF for UpdateMode = sal_False!" );
>     CheckIdleFormatter();
>     if ( !IsFormatted() )
>         FormatDoc();
>@@ -376,7 +370,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>     nStartNode = aEditDoc.GetPos( aSel.Min().GetNode() );
>     nEndNode = aEditDoc.GetPos( aSel.Max().GetNode() );
> 
>-    // RTF-Vorspann...
>+    // RTF header ...
>     rOutput << '{' ;
> 
>     rOutput << OOO_STRING_SVTOOLS_RTF_RTF;
>@@ -384,9 +378,9 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>     rOutput << OOO_STRING_SVTOOLS_RTF_ANSI;
>     rtl_TextEncoding eDestEnc = RTL_TEXTENCODING_MS_1252;
> 
>-    // Fonttabelle erzeugen und rausschreiben...
>+    // Generate and write out Font table  ...
>     SvxFontTable aFontTable;
>-    // DefaultFont muss ganz vorne stehen, damit DEF-Font im RTF
>+    // default font must be up front, so DEF font in RTF
>     aFontTable.Insert( 0, new SvxFontItem( (const SvxFontItem&)aEditDoc.GetItemPool().GetDefaultItem( EE_CHAR_FONTINFO ) ) );
>     aFontTable.Insert( 1, new SvxFontItem( (const SvxFontItem&)aEditDoc.GetItemPool().GetDefaultItem( EE_CHAR_FONTINFO_CJK ) ) );
>     aFontTable.Insert( 2, new SvxFontItem( (const SvxFontItem&)aEditDoc.GetItemPool().GetDefaultItem( EE_CHAR_FONTINFO_CTL ) ) );
>@@ -466,7 +460,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>     rOutput << '}';
>     rOutput << endl;
> 
>-    // ColorList rausschreiben...
>+    // Write out ColorList  ...
>     SvxColorList aColorList;
>     sal_uInt16 i = 0;
>     SvxColorItem* pColorItem = (SvxColorItem*)aEditDoc.GetItemPool().GetItem( EE_CHAR_COLOR, i );
>@@ -515,7 +509,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>                 sal_uInt16 nNumber = (sal_uInt16) (nStyle + 1);
>                 rOutput.WriteNumber( nNumber );
> 
>-                // Attribute, auch aus Parent!
>+                // Attribute, alos from Parent!
>                 for ( sal_uInt16 nParAttr = EE_PARA_START; nParAttr <= EE_CHAR_END; nParAttr++ )
>                 {
>                     if ( pStyle->GetItemSet().GetItemState( nParAttr ) == SFX_ITEM_ON )
>@@ -525,27 +519,27 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>                     }
>                 }
> 
>-                // Parent...(nur wenn noetig)
>+                // Parent ... (only if necessary)
>                 if ( pStyle->GetParent().Len() && ( pStyle->GetParent() != pStyle->GetName() ) )
>                 {
>                     SfxStyleSheet* pParent = (SfxStyleSheet*)GetStyleSheetPool()->Find( pStyle->GetParent(), pStyle->GetFamily() );
>-                    DBG_ASSERT( pParent, "Parent nicht gefunden!" );
>+                    DBG_ASSERT( pParent, "Parent not found!" );
>                     rOutput << OOO_STRING_SVTOOLS_RTF_SBASEDON;
>                     nNumber = (sal_uInt16) getStylePos( GetStyleSheetPool()->GetStyles(), pParent ) + 1;
>                     rOutput.WriteNumber( nNumber );
>                 }
> 
>-                // Folgevorlage...(immer)
>+                // Next Style ... (more)
>                 SfxStyleSheet* pNext = pStyle;
>                 if ( pStyle->GetFollow().Len() && ( pStyle->GetFollow() != pStyle->GetName() ) )
>                     pNext = (SfxStyleSheet*)GetStyleSheetPool()->Find( pStyle->GetFollow(), pStyle->GetFamily() );
> 
>-                DBG_ASSERT( pNext, "Naechsten nicht gefunden!" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( pNext, "Next ot found!" );
>                 rOutput << OOO_STRING_SVTOOLS_RTF_SNEXT;
>                 nNumber = (sal_uInt16) getStylePos( GetStyleSheetPool()->GetStyles(), pNext ) + 1;
>                 rOutput.WriteNumber( nNumber );
> 
>-                // Namen der Vorlage...
>+                // Name of the template ...
>                 rOutput << " " << ByteString( pStyle->GetName(), eDestEnc ).GetBuffer();
>                 rOutput << ";}";
>             }
>@@ -554,7 +548,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // Die Pool-Defaults vorweg schreiben...
>+    // Write the pool defaults in advance ...
>     rOutput << '{' << OOO_STRING_SVTOOLS_RTF_IGNORE << "\\EditEnginePoolDefaults";
>     for ( sal_uInt16 nPoolDefItem = EE_PARA_START; nPoolDefItem <= EE_CHAR_END; nPoolDefItem++)
>     {
>@@ -563,13 +557,6 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>     }
>     rOutput << '}' << endl;
> 
>-    // Def-Hoehe vorweg, da sonst 12Pt
>-    // Doch nicht, onst in jedem Absatz hart!
>-    // SfxItemSet aTmpSet( GetEmptyItemSet() );
>-    // const SvxFontHeightItem& rDefFontHeight = (const SvxFontHeightItem&)aTmpSet.Get( EE_CHAR_FONTHEIGHT );
>-    // WriteItemAsRTF( rDefFontHeight, rOutput, aFontTable, aColorList );
>-    // rOutput << '{' << OOO_STRING_SVTOOLS_RTF_IGNORE << "\\EditEnginePoolDefaultHeight}" << endl;
>-
>     // DefTab:
>     MapMode aTwpMode( MAP_TWIP );
>     sal_uInt16 nDefTabTwps = (sal_uInt16) GetRefDevice()->LogicToLogic(
>@@ -579,26 +566,26 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>     rOutput.WriteNumber( nDefTabTwps );
>     rOutput << endl;
> 
>-    // ueber die Absaetze iterieren...
>+    // iterate over the paragraphs ...
>     rOutput << '{' << endl;
>     for ( sal_uInt16 nNode = nStartNode; nNode <= nEndNode; nNode++  )
>     {
>         ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nNode );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node nicht gefunden: Search&Replace" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node not found: Search&Replace" );
> 
>-        // Die Absatzattribute vorweg...
>+        // The paragraph attributes in advance ...
>         sal_Bool bAttr = sal_False;
> 
>-        // Vorlage ?
>+        // Template?
>         if ( pNode->GetStyleSheet() )
>         {
>-            // Nummer der Vorlage
>+            // Number of template
>             rOutput << OOO_STRING_SVTOOLS_RTF_S;
>             sal_uInt16 nNumber = (sal_uInt16) getStylePos( GetStyleSheetPool()->GetStyles(), pNode->GetStyleSheet() ) + 1;
>             rOutput.WriteNumber( nNumber );
> 
>-            // Alle Attribute
>-            // Attribute, auch aus Parent!
>+            // All Attribute
>+            // Attribute, also from Parent!
>             for ( sal_uInt16 nParAttr = EE_PARA_START; nParAttr <= EE_CHAR_END; nParAttr++ )
>             {
>                 if ( pNode->GetStyleSheet()->GetItemSet().GetItemState( nParAttr ) == SFX_ITEM_ON )
>@@ -612,8 +599,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
> 
>         for ( sal_uInt16 nParAttr = EE_PARA_START; nParAttr <= EE_CHAR_END; nParAttr++ )
>         {
>-//			const SfxPoolItem& rItem = pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItem( nParAttr );
>-            // Jetzt, wo StyleSheet-Verarbeitung, nur noch harte Absatzattribute!
>+            // Now where stylesheet processing, only hard paragraph attributes!
>             if ( pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItems().GetItemState( nParAttr ) == SFX_ITEM_ON )
>             {
>                 const SfxPoolItem& rItem = pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItems().Get( nParAttr );
>@@ -626,7 +612,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
> 
>         ItemList aAttribItems;
>         ParaPortion* pParaPortion = FindParaPortion( pNode );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion, "Portion nicht gefunden: WriteRTF" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pParaPortion, "Portion not found: WriteRTF" );
> 
>         sal_uInt16 nIndex = 0;
>         sal_uInt16 nStartPos = 0;
>@@ -646,8 +632,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>                 lcl_FindValidAttribs( aAttribItems, pNode, nStartPos, GetScriptType( EditPaM( pNode, 0 ) ) );
>                 if ( aAttribItems.Count() )
>                 {
>-                    // Diese Attribute duerfen nicht fuer den gesamten
>-                    // Absatz gelten:
>+                    // These attributes may not apply to the entire paragraph:
>                     rOutput << '{';
>                     WriteItemListAsRTF( aAttribItems, rOutput, nNode, nStartPos, aFontTable, aColorList );
>                     bFinishPortion = sal_True;
>@@ -655,15 +640,14 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>                 aAttribItems.Clear();
>             }
>         }
>-        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // kann auch == nStart sein!
>+        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // can also be == nStart!
>         {
>             nEndPos = aSel.Max().GetIndex();
>             nEndPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().FindPortion( nEndPos, nPortionStart );
>         }
> 
>         EditCharAttrib* pNextFeature = pNode->GetCharAttribs().FindFeature( nIndex );
>-        // Bei 0 anfangen, damit der Index richtig ist...
>-
>+        // start at 0, so the index is right ...
>         for ( sal_uInt16 n = 0; n <= nEndPortion; n++ )
>         {
>             TextPortion* pTextPortion = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().GetObject(n);
>@@ -691,7 +675,7 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>                     aAttribItems.Insert( &aAttribs.Get( GetScriptItemId( EE_CHAR_ITALIC, nScriptType ) ) );
>                     aAttribItems.Insert( &aAttribs.Get( GetScriptItemId( EE_CHAR_LANGUAGE, nScriptType ) ) );
>                 }
>-                // #96298# Insert hard attribs AFTER CJK attribs...
>+                // Insert hard attribs AFTER CJK attribs...
>                 lcl_FindValidAttribs( aAttribItems, pNode, nIndex, nScriptType );
> 
>                 rOutput << '{';
>@@ -721,8 +705,8 @@ sal_uInt32 ImpEditEngine::WriteRTF( SvStream& rOutput, EditSelection aSel )
>         rOutput << OOO_STRING_SVTOOLS_RTF_PAR << OOO_STRING_SVTOOLS_RTF_PARD << OOO_STRING_SVTOOLS_RTF_PLAIN;;
>         rOutput << endl;
>     }
>-    // RTF-Nachspann...
>-    rOutput << "}}";	// 1xKlammerung Absaetze, 1x Klammerung RTF-Dokument
>+    // RTF-trailer ...
>+    rOutput << "}}";	// 1xparentheses paragraphs, 1xparentheses RTF document
>     rOutput.Flush();
> 
> #if defined (EDITDEBUG) && !defined( UNX )
>@@ -770,8 +754,6 @@ void ImpEditEngine::WriteItemAsRTF( const SfxPoolItem& rItem, SvStream& rOutput,
>         case EE_PARA_OUTLLRSPACE:
>         case EE_PARA_LRSPACE:
>         {
>-//            const ContentNode *pNode = aEditDoc.GetObject( nPara );
>-
>             rOutput << OOO_STRING_SVTOOLS_RTF_FI;
>             short nTxtFirst = ((const SvxLRSpaceItem&)rItem).GetTxtFirstLineOfst();
>             nTxtFirst = (short)LogicToTwips( nTxtFirst );
>@@ -805,8 +787,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::WriteItemAsRTF( const SfxPoolItem& rItem, SvStream& rOutput,
>             char cMult = '0';
>             if ( ((const SvxLineSpacingItem&)rItem).GetInterLineSpaceRule() == SVX_INTER_LINE_SPACE_PROP )
>             {
>-                // Woher kriege ich jetzt den Wert?
>-                // Der SwRTF-Parser geht von einem 240er Font aus!
>+                // From where do I get the value now? 
>+                // The SwRTF parser is based on a 240 Font!
>                 nVal = ((const SvxLineSpacingItem&)rItem).GetPropLineSpace();
>                 nVal *= 240;
>                 nVal /= 100;
>@@ -883,8 +865,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::WriteItemAsRTF( const SfxPoolItem& rItem, SvStream& rOutput,
>         break;
>         case EE_CHAR_UNDERLINE:
>         {
>-            // muesste bei WordLineMode ggf. ulw werden,
>-            // aber die Information fehlt hier
>+            // Must underlined if in WordLineMode, but the information is 
>+            // missing here
>             FontUnderline e = ((const SvxUnderlineItem&)rItem).GetLineStyle();
>             switch ( e )
>             {
>@@ -1004,14 +986,14 @@ void ImpEditEngine::WriteItemAsRTF( const SfxPoolItem& rItem, SvStream& rOutput,
>             MapMode aPntMode( MAP_POINT );
>             long nFontHeight = GetRefDevice()->LogicToLogic(
>                     aFont.GetSize(), &GetRefMapMode(), &aPntMode ).Height();
>-            nFontHeight *=2;	// HalfPoints
>+            nFontHeight *=2;	// HalfP oints
>             sal_uInt16 nProp = ((const SvxEscapementItem&)rItem).GetProp();
>-            sal_uInt16 nProp100 = nProp*100;	// Fuer SWG-Token Prop in 100tel Prozent.
>+            sal_uInt16 nProp100 = nProp*100;	// For SWG-Token Prop in 100th percent.
>             short nEsc = ((const SvxEscapementItem&)rItem).GetEsc();
>             if ( nEsc == DFLT_ESC_AUTO_SUPER )
>             {
>                 nEsc = 100 - nProp;
>-                nProp100++;	// Eine 1 hinten bedeutet 'automatisch'.
>+                nProp100++;	// A 1 afterwards means 'automatic'.
>             }
>             else if ( nEsc == DFLT_ESC_AUTO_SUB )
>             {
>@@ -1072,17 +1054,16 @@ EditTextObject*	ImpEditEngine::CreateBinTextObject( EditSelection aSel, SfxItemP
>         ( aSel.Max().GetIndex() < aSel.Max().GetNode()->Len() ) ) ?
>             sal_False : sal_True;
> 
>-    // Vorlagen werden nicht gespeichert!
>-    // ( Nur Name und Familie, Vorlage selbst muss in App stehen! )
>-
>+    // Templates are not saved! 
>+    // (Only the name and family, template itself must be in App!)
>     pTxtObj->SetScriptType( GetScriptType( aSel ) );
> 
>-    // ueber die Absaetze iterieren...
>+    // iterate over the paragraphs ...
>     sal_uInt16 nNode;
>     for ( nNode = nStartNode; nNode <= nEndNode; nNode++  )
>     {
>         ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nNode );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node nicht gefunden: Search&Replace" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node not found: Search&Replace" );
> 
>         if ( bOnlyFullParagraphs )
>         {
>@@ -1103,30 +1084,30 @@ EditTextObject*	ImpEditEngine::CreateBinTextObject( EditSelection aSel, SfxItemP
> 
>         ContentInfo* pC = pTxtObj->CreateAndInsertContent();
> 
>-        // Die Absatzattribute...
>+        // The paragraph attributes ...
>         pC->GetParaAttribs().Set( pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItems() );
> 
>-        // Das StyleSheet...
>+        // The StyleSheet...
>         if ( pNode->GetStyleSheet() )
>         {
>             pC->GetStyle() = pNode->GetStyleSheet()->GetName();
>             pC->GetFamily() = pNode->GetStyleSheet()->GetFamily();
>         }
> 
>-        // Der Text...
>+        // The Text...
>         pC->GetText() = pNode->Copy( nStartPos, nEndPos-nStartPos );
> 
>-        // und die Attribute...
>+        // and the Attribute...
>         sal_uInt16 nAttr = 0;
>         EditCharAttrib* pAttr = GetAttrib( pNode->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs(), nAttr );
>         while ( pAttr )
>         {
>-            // In einem leeren Absatz die Attribute behalten!
>+            // In a blank paragraph keep the attributes!
>             if ( bEmptyPara ||
>                  ( ( pAttr->GetEnd() > nStartPos ) && ( pAttr->GetStart() < nEndPos ) ) )
>             {
>                 XEditAttribute* pX = pTxtObj->CreateAttrib( *pAttr->GetItem(), pAttr->GetStart(), pAttr->GetEnd() );
>-                // Evtl. korrigieren...
>+                // Possibly Correct ...
>                 if ( ( nNode == nStartNode ) && ( nStartPos != 0 ) )
>                 {
>                     pX->GetStart() = ( pX->GetStart() > nStartPos ) ? pX->GetStart()-nStartPos : 0;
>@@ -1138,7 +1119,7 @@ EditTextObject*	ImpEditEngine::CreateBinTextObject( EditSelection aSel, SfxItemP
>                     if ( pX->GetEnd() > (nEndPos-nStartPos) )
>                         pX->GetEnd() = nEndPos-nStartPos;
>                 }
>-                DBG_ASSERT( pX->GetEnd() <= (nEndPos-nStartPos), "CreateBinTextObject: Attribut zu lang!" );
>+                DBG_ASSERT( pX->GetEnd() <= (nEndPos-nStartPos), "CreateBinTextObject: Attribute too long!" );
>                 if ( !pX->GetLen() && !bEmptyPara )
>                     pTxtObj->DestroyAttrib( pX );
>                 else
>@@ -1149,15 +1130,15 @@ EditTextObject*	ImpEditEngine::CreateBinTextObject( EditSelection aSel, SfxItemP
>         }
> 
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>-        // ggf. Online-Spelling
>+        // If possible online spelling
>         if ( bAllowBigObjects && bOnlyFullParagraphs && pNode->GetWrongList() )
>             pC->SetWrongList( pNode->GetWrongList()->Clone() );
> #endif // !SVX_LIGHT
> 
>     }
> 
>-    // Bei grossen Textobjekten die PortionInfos merken:
>-    // Schwelle rauf setzen, wenn Olli die Absaetze nicht mehr zerhackt!
>+    // Remember the portions info in case of large text objects: 
>+    // sleeper set up when Olli paragraphs not hacked!
>     if ( bAllowBigObjects && bOnlyFullParagraphs && IsFormatted() && GetUpdateMode() && ( nTextPortions >= nBigObjectStart ) )
>     {
>         XParaPortionList* pXList = new XParaPortionList( GetRefDevice(), aPaperSize.Width(), nStretchX, nStretchY );
>@@ -1171,7 +1152,7 @@ EditTextObject*	ImpEditEngine::CreateBinTextObject( EditSelection aSel, SfxItemP
>             pX->nHeight = pParaPortion->GetHeight();
>             pX->nFirstLineOffset = pParaPortion->GetFirstLineOffset();
> 
>-            // Die TextPortions
>+            // The TextPortions
>             sal_uInt16 nCount = pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Count();
>             sal_uInt16 n;
>             for ( n = 0; n < nCount; n++ )
>@@ -1181,7 +1162,7 @@ EditTextObject*	ImpEditEngine::CreateBinTextObject( EditSelection aSel, SfxItemP
>                 pX->aTextPortions.Insert( pNew, pX->aTextPortions.Count() );
>             }
> 
>-            // Die Zeilen
>+            // The lines
>             nCount = pParaPortion->GetLines().Count();
>             for ( n = 0; n < nCount; n++ )
>             {
>@@ -1205,7 +1186,7 @@ EditTextObject*	ImpEditEngine::CreateBinTextObject( EditSelection aSel, SfxItemP
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::SetText( const EditTextObject& rTextObject )
> {
>-    // Da Setzen eines TextObject ist nicht Undo-faehig!
>+    // Since setting a text object is not undo-able!
>     ResetUndoManager();
>     sal_Bool _bUpdate = GetUpdateMode();
>     sal_Bool _bUndo = IsUndoEnabled();
>@@ -1220,7 +1201,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetText( const EditTextObject& rTextObject )
>     SetVertical( rTextObject.IsVertical() );
> 
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !HasUndoManager() || !GetUndoManager().GetUndoActionCount(), "Woher kommt das Undo in SetText ?!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !HasUndoManager() || !GetUndoManager().GetUndoActionCount(), "From where comes the Undo in SetText ?!" );
> #endif
>     SetUpdateMode( _bUpdate );
>     EnableUndo( _bUndo );
>@@ -1235,19 +1216,15 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertText( const EditTextObject& rTextObject, Edit
>     EditSelection aNewSel = InsertBinTextObject( (BinTextObject&)rTextObject, aSel.Max() );
>     LeaveBlockNotifications();
>     return aNewSel;
>-
>-    // MT 05/00: InsertBinTextObject direkt hier machen...
> }
> 
> EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertBinTextObject( BinTextObject& rTextObject, EditPaM aPaM )
> {
>-    // Optimieren:
>-    // Kein GetPos undFindParaportion, sondern Index berechnen!
>+    // Optimize: No getPos undFindParaportion, instead calculate index!
>     EditSelection aSel( aPaM, aPaM );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !aSel.DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "InsertBibTextObject: Selektion kaput!(1)" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !aSel.DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "InsertBibTextObject: Selection broken!(1)" );
> 
>     sal_Bool bUsePortionInfo = sal_False;
>-//	sal_Bool bFields = sal_False;
>     XParaPortionList* pPortionInfo = rTextObject.GetPortionInfo();
> 
>     if ( pPortionInfo && ( (long)pPortionInfo->GetPaperWidth() == aPaperSize.Width() )
>@@ -1283,10 +1260,10 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertBinTextObject( BinTextObject& rTextObject, Ed
>         aPaM = ImpFastInsertText( aPaM, pC->GetText() );
> 
>         ParaPortion* pPortion = FindParaPortion( aPaM.GetNode() );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blinde Portion in FastInsertText" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Blind Portion in FastInsertText" );
>         pPortion->MarkInvalid( nStartPos, pC->GetText().Len() );
> 
>-        // Zeicheattribute...
>+        // Character attributes ...
>         sal_Bool bAllreadyHasAttribs = aPaM.GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().Count() ? sal_True : sal_False;
>         sal_uInt16 nNewAttribs = pC->GetAttribs().Count();
>         if ( nNewAttribs )
>@@ -1295,15 +1272,16 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertBinTextObject( BinTextObject& rTextObject, Ed
>             for ( sal_uInt16 nAttr = 0; nAttr < nNewAttribs; nAttr++ )
>             {
>                 XEditAttribute* pX = pC->GetAttribs().GetObject( nAttr );
>-                // Kann passieren wenn Absaetze >16K entstehen, dann wird einfach umgebrochen.
>+                // Can happen when paragraphs > 16K, it is simply wrapped.
>                 if ( pX->GetEnd() <= aPaM.GetNode()->Len() )
>                 {
>                     if ( !bAllreadyHasAttribs || pX->IsFeature() )
>                     {
>-                        // Normale Attribute gehen dann schneller...
>-                        // Features duerfen nicht ueber EditDoc::InsertAttrib
>-                        // eingefuegt werden, sie sind bei FastInsertText schon im TextFluss
>-                        DBG_ASSERT( pX->GetEnd() <= aPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "InsertBinTextObject: Attribut zu gross!" );
>+                        // Normal attributes then go faster ... 
>+                        // Features shall not be inserted through 
>+                        // EditDoc:: InsertAttrib, using FastInsertText they are
>+                        // already in the flow
>+                        DBG_ASSERT( pX->GetEnd() <= aPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "InsertBinTextObject: Attribute too large!" );
>                         EditCharAttrib* pAttr;
>                         if ( !bConvertItems )
>                             pAttr = MakeCharAttrib( aEditDoc.GetItemPool(), *(pX->GetItem()), pX->GetStart()+nStartPos, pX->GetEnd()+nStartPos );
>@@ -1314,15 +1292,15 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertBinTextObject( BinTextObject& rTextObject, Ed
>                             pAttr = MakeCharAttrib( aEditDoc.GetItemPool(), *pNew, pX->GetStart()+nStartPos, pX->GetEnd()+nStartPos );
>                             delete pNew;
>                         }
>-                        DBG_ASSERT( pAttr->GetEnd() <= aPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "InsertBinTextObject: Attribut passt nicht! (1)" );
>+                        DBG_ASSERT( pAttr->GetEnd() <= aPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "InsertBinTextObject: Attribute does not fit! (1)" );
>                         aPaM.GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().InsertAttrib( pAttr );
>                         if ( pAttr->Which() == EE_FEATURE_FIELD )
>                             bUpdateFields = TRUE;
>                     }
>                     else
>                     {
>-                        DBG_ASSERT( pX->GetEnd()+nStartPos <= aPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "InsertBinTextObject: Attribut passt nicht! (2)" );
>-                        // Tabs und andere Features koennen nicht ueber InsertAttrib eingefuegt werden:
>+                        DBG_ASSERT( pX->GetEnd()+nStartPos <= aPaM.GetNode()->Len(), "InsertBinTextObject: Attribute does not fit! (2)" );
>+                        // Tabs and other Features can not be inserted through InsertAttrib:
>                         aEditDoc.InsertAttrib( aPaM.GetNode(), pX->GetStart()+nStartPos, pX->GetEnd()+nStartPos, *pX->GetItem() );
>                     }
>                 }
>@@ -1330,22 +1308,19 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertBinTextObject( BinTextObject& rTextObject, Ed
>             if ( bUpdateFields )
>                 UpdateFields();
> 
>-            // Sonst QuickFormat => Keine Attribute!
>+            // Otherwise, quick format => no attributes!
>             pPortion->MarkSelectionInvalid( nStartPos, pC->GetText().Len() );
>         }
> 
>-        DBG_ASSERT( CheckOrderedList( aPaM.GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs(), sal_True ), "InsertBinTextObject: Start-Liste verdreht" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( CheckOrderedList( aPaM.GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().GetAttribs(), sal_True ), "InsertBinTextObject: Start-Liste distorted" );
> 
>         sal_Bool bParaAttribs = sal_False;
>         if ( bNewContent || ( ( n > 0 ) && ( n < (nContents-1) ) ) )
>         {
>             bParaAttribs = sal_False;
>-            // #101512# Don't overwrite level/style from existing paragraph in OutlineView
>-            // MT 10/2002: Removed because of #103874#, handled in Outliner::EndPasteOrDropHdl now.
>-//            if ( !aStatus.IsOutliner() || n )
>             {
>-                // nur dann Style und ParaAttribs, wenn neuer Absatz, oder
>-                // komplett inneliegender...
>+                // only style and ParaAttribs when new paragraph, or 
>+                // completely internal ...
>                 bParaAttribs = pC->GetParaAttribs().Count() ? sal_True : sal_False;
>                 if ( GetStyleSheetPool() && pC->GetStyle().Len() )
>                 {
>@@ -1371,9 +1346,9 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertBinTextObject( BinTextObject& rTextObject, Ed
>                 pParaPortion->nHeight = pXP->nHeight;
>                 pParaPortion->nFirstLineOffset = pXP->nFirstLineOffset;
>                 pParaPortion->bForceRepaint = sal_True;
>-                pParaPortion->SetValid();	// Nicht formatieren
>+                pParaPortion->SetValid();	// Do not format
> 
>-                // Die TextPortions
>+                // The Text Portions
>                 pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Reset();
>                 sal_uInt16 nCount = pXP->aTextPortions.Count();
>                 for ( sal_uInt16 _n = 0; _n < nCount; _n++ )
>@@ -1383,14 +1358,14 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertBinTextObject( BinTextObject& rTextObject, Ed
>                     pParaPortion->GetTextPortions().Insert( pNew, _n );
>                 }
> 
>-                // Die Zeilen
>+                // The lines
>                 pParaPortion->GetLines().Reset();
>                 nCount = pXP->aLines.Count();
>                 for ( sal_uInt16 m = 0; m < nCount; m++ )
>                 {
>                     EditLine* pLine = pXP->aLines[m];
>                     EditLine* pNew = pLine->Clone();
>-                    pNew->SetInvalid();	// neu Painten!
>+                    pNew->SetInvalid();	// Paint again!
>                     pParaPortion->GetLines().Insert( pNew, m );
>                 }
> #ifdef DBG_UTIL
>@@ -1404,7 +1379,7 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertBinTextObject( BinTextObject& rTextObject, Ed
> #endif
>             }
>         }
>-        if ( !bParaAttribs ) // DefFont wird bei FastInsertParagraph nicht berechnet
>+        if ( !bParaAttribs ) // DefFont is not calculated for FastInsertParagraph 
>         {
>             aPaM.GetNode()->GetCharAttribs().GetDefFont() = aEditDoc.GetDefFont();
>             if ( aStatus.UseCharAttribs() )
>@@ -1419,7 +1394,7 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertBinTextObject( BinTextObject& rTextObject, Ed
>         }
> #endif // !SVX_LIGHT
> 
>-        // Zeilenumbruch, wenn weitere folgen...
>+        // Wrap when followed by other ...
>         if ( n < ( nContents-1) )
>         {
>             if ( bNewContent )
>@@ -1430,7 +1405,7 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::InsertBinTextObject( BinTextObject& rTextObject, Ed
>     }
> 
>     aSel.Max() = aPaM;
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !aSel.DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "InsertBibTextObject: Selektion kaput!(1)" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !aSel.DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "InsertBibTextObject: Selection broken!(1)" );
>     return aSel;
> }
> 
>@@ -1473,8 +1448,6 @@ SpellInfo * ImpEditEngine::CreateSpellInfo( const EditSelection &rSel, bool bMul
> 
>     pSpellInfo->bMultipleDoc = bMultipleDocs;
>     EditSelection aSentenceSel( SelectSentence( rSel ) );
>-//    pSpellInfo->aSpellStart = CreateEPaM( aSentenceSel.Min() );
>-//    pSpellInfo->aSpellTo    = CreateEPaM( rSel.HasRange()? aSentenceSel.Max() : aSentenceSel.Min() );
>     // always spell draw objects completely, startting at the top.
>     // (spelling in only a selection or not starting with the top requires
>     // further changes elsewehe to work properly)
>@@ -1490,14 +1463,14 @@ EESpellState ImpEditEngine::Spell( EditView* pEditView, sal_Bool bMultipleDoc )
>     return EE_SPELL_NOSPELLER;
> #else
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERTWARNING( xSpeller.is(), "Kein Speller gesetzt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERTWARNING( xSpeller.is(), "No Spell checker set!" );
> 
>     if ( !xSpeller.is() )
>         return EE_SPELL_NOSPELLER;
> 
>     aOnlineSpellTimer.Stop();
> 
>-    // Bei MultipleDoc immer von vorne/hinten...
>+    // In MultipleDoc always from the front / rear ...
>     if ( bMultipleDoc )
>     {
>         pEditView->pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aEditDoc.GetStartPaM() );
>@@ -1508,7 +1481,7 @@ EESpellState ImpEditEngine::Spell( EditView* pEditView, sal_Bool bMultipleDoc )
> 
>     sal_Bool bIsStart = sal_False;
>     if ( bMultipleDoc )
>-        bIsStart = sal_True;	// Immer von Vorne bzw. von hinten...
>+        bIsStart = sal_True;	// Accessible from the front or from behind ...
>     else if ( ( CreateEPaM( aEditDoc.GetStartPaM() ) == pSpellInfo->aSpellStart ) )
>         bIsStart = sal_True;
> 
>@@ -1583,13 +1556,12 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Convert( EditView* pEditView,
> #ifdef SVX_LIGHT
> #else
> 
>-    // Bei MultipleDoc immer von vorne/hinten...
>+    // In MultipleDoc always from the front / rear ...
>     if ( bMultipleDoc )
>         pEditView->pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aEditDoc.GetStartPaM() );
> 
>-    //
>+
>     // initialize pConvInfo
>-    //
>     EditSelection aCurSel( pEditView->pImpEditView->GetEditSelection() );
>     aCurSel.Adjust( aEditDoc );
>     pConvInfo = new ConvInfo;
>@@ -1621,7 +1593,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Convert( EditView* pEditView,
> 
>     sal_Bool bIsStart = sal_False;
>     if ( bMultipleDoc )
>-        bIsStart = sal_True;    // Immer von Vorne bzw. von hinten...
>+        bIsStart = sal_True;    // Accessible from the front or from behind ...
>     else if ( CreateEPaM( aEditDoc.GetStartPaM() ) == pConvInfo->aConvStart )
>         bIsStart = sal_True;
> 
>@@ -1743,18 +1715,6 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ImpConvert( rtl::OUString &rConvTxt, LanguageType &rConvTxtL
>             pConvInfo->aConvContinue.nIndex >= pConvInfo->aConvTo.nIndex)
>             break;
> 
>-/*
>-        // Bekannter (wahrscheinlicher) Bug: Wenn SpellToCurrent, muss
>-        // Current bei jeder Ersetzung korrigiert werden, sonst passt
>-        // das Ende evtl. nicht mehr genau...
>-        if ( pConvInfo->bConvToEnd || pConvInfo->bMultipleDoc )
>-        {
>-            if ( aCurSel.Max().GetNode() == pLastNode &&
>-                 aCurSel.Max().GetIndex() >= pLastNode->Len() )
>-                break;
>-        }
>-*/
>-
>         USHORT nAttribStart	= USHRT_MAX;
>         USHORT nAttribEnd	= USHRT_MAX;
>         USHORT nCurPos		= USHRT_MAX;
>@@ -1894,7 +1854,7 @@ Reference< XSpellAlternatives > ImpEditEngine::ImpSpell( EditView* pEditView )
>     return Reference< XSpellAlternatives >();
> #else
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( xSpeller.is(), "Kein Speller gesetzt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( xSpeller.is(), "No spell checker set!" );
> 
>     ContentNode* pLastNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( (aEditDoc.Count()-1) );
>     EditSelection aCurSel( pEditView->pImpEditView->GetEditSelection() );
>@@ -1905,10 +1865,9 @@ Reference< XSpellAlternatives > ImpEditEngine::ImpSpell( EditView* pEditView )
>     Sequence< PropertyValue > aEmptySeq;
>     while (!xSpellAlt.is())
>     {
>-
>-        // Bekannter (wahrscheinlicher) Bug: Wenn SpellToCurrent, muss
>-        // Current bei jeder Ersetzung korrigiert werden, sonst passt
>-        // das Ende evtl. nicht mehr genau...
>+        // Known (most likely) bug: If SpellToCurrent, the current has to be 
>+        // corrected at each replacement, otherwise it may not fit exactly in
>+        // the end ...
>         if ( pSpellInfo->bSpellToEnd || pSpellInfo->bMultipleDoc )
>         {
>             if ( aCurSel.Max().GetNode() == pLastNode )
>@@ -1927,8 +1886,8 @@ Reference< XSpellAlternatives > ImpEditEngine::ImpSpell( EditView* pEditView )
>         aCurSel = SelectWord( aCurSel, ::com::sun::star::i18n::WordType::DICTIONARY_WORD );
>         aWord = GetSelected( aCurSel );
> 
>-        // Wenn Punkt dahinter, muss dieser mit uebergeben werden !
>-        // Falls Abkuerzung...
>+        // If afterwards a dot, this must be handed over! 
>+        // If an abbreviation ...
>         if ( aWord.Len() && ( aCurSel.Max().GetIndex() < aCurSel.Max().GetNode()->Len() ) )
>         {
>             sal_Unicode cNext = aCurSel.Max().GetNode()->GetChar( aCurSel.Max().GetIndex() );
>@@ -1993,8 +1952,8 @@ Reference< XSpellAlternatives > ImpEditEngine::ImpFindNextError(EditSelection& r
>         aCurSel = SelectWord( aCurSel, ::com::sun::star::i18n::WordType::DICTIONARY_WORD );
>         aWord = GetSelected( aCurSel );
> 
>-        // Wenn Punkt dahinter, muss dieser mit uebergeben werden !
>-        // Falls Abkuerzung...
>+        // If afterwards a dot, this must be handed over! 
>+        // If an abbreviation ...
>         if ( aWord.Len() && ( aCurSel.Max().GetIndex() < aCurSel.Max().GetNode()->Len() ) )
>         {
>             sal_Unicode cNext = aCurSel.Max().GetNode()->GetChar( aCurSel.Max().GetIndex() );
>@@ -2030,7 +1989,7 @@ bool ImpEditEngine::SpellSentence(EditView& rEditView,
>     if(!pSpellInfo)
>         pSpellInfo = CreateSpellInfo( aCurSel, true );
>     pSpellInfo->aCurSentenceStart = aCurSel.Min();
>-    DBG_ASSERT( xSpeller.is(), "Kein Speller gesetzt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( xSpeller.is(), "No spell checker set!" );
>     pSpellInfo->aLastSpellPortions.clear();
>     pSpellInfo->aLastSpellContentSelections.clear();
>     rToFill.clear();
>@@ -2226,8 +2185,6 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ApplyChangedSentence(EditView& rEditView,
>                 }
> 
>                 USHORT nScriptType = GetI18NScriptTypeOfLanguage( aCurrentNewPortion->eLanguage );
>-//                LanguageType eTextLanguage = GetLanguage( aCurrentOldPosition->Min() );
>-
>                 USHORT nLangWhichId = EE_CHAR_LANGUAGE;
>                 switch(nScriptType)
>                 {
>@@ -2329,15 +2286,14 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoOnlineSpelling( ContentNode* pThisNodeOnly, sal_Bool bSpel
> {
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>     /*
>-     Er wird ueber alle Absaetze iteriert, nur Absaetze mit invalidierter
>-     WrongList werden geprueft...
>-
>-     Es werden alle Woerter im invalidierten Bereich geprueft.
>-     Ist ein Wort falsch, aber noch nicht in der WrongList, oder umgekehrt,
>-     wird der Bereich des Wortes invalidiert
>-      (	kein Invalidate, sondern wenn nur Uebergaenge von richtig=>falsch,
>-        einfaches Paint, bei Uebergaengen von falsch=>richtig mit VDev
>-        ueberplaetten )
>+     It will iterate over all the paragraphs, paragraphs with only 
>+     invalidated wrong list will be checked ...
>+
>+     All the words are checked in the invalidated region. Is a word wrong, 
>+     but not in the wrong list, or vice versa, the range of the word will be
>+     invalidated 
>+     (no Invalidate, but if only transitions wrong from right =>, simple Paint,
>+      even out properly with VDev on transitions from wrong => right)
>     */
> 
>      if ( !xSpeller.is() )
>@@ -2367,9 +2323,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoOnlineSpelling( ContentNode* pThisNodeOnly, sal_Bool bSpel
>             sal_uInt16 nInvStart = pWrongList->GetInvalidStart();
>             sal_uInt16 nInvEnd = pWrongList->GetInvalidEnd();
> 
>-            sal_uInt16 nWrongs = 0;	// Auch im Absatz mal die Kontrolle abgeben...
>-//			sal_Bool bStop = sal_False;
>-
>+            sal_uInt16 nWrongs = 0;	// Lose control also in the paragraphs
>             sal_uInt16 nPaintFrom = 0xFFFF, nPaintTo = 0;
>             sal_Bool bSimpleRepaint = sal_True;
> 
>@@ -2381,12 +2335,12 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoOnlineSpelling( ContentNode* pThisNodeOnly, sal_Bool bSpel
>             {
>                 if ( ( aSel.Min().GetIndex() > nInvEnd )
>                         || ( ( aSel.Max().GetNode() == pLastNode ) && ( aSel.Max().GetIndex() >= pLastNode->Len() ) ) )
>-                    break;	// Dokument- oder Ungueltigkeitsbereich-Ende
>+                    break;	// Document end or end of invalid region
> 
>                 aSel = SelectWord( aSel, ::com::sun::star::i18n::WordType::DICTIONARY_WORD );
>                 String aWord( GetSelected( aSel ) );
>-                // Wenn Punkt dahinter, muss dieser mit uebergeben werden !
>-                // Falls Abkuerzung...
>+                // If afterwards a dot, this must be handed over! 
>+                // If an abbreviation ...
>                 sal_Bool bDottAdded = sal_False;
>                 if ( aSel.Max().GetIndex() < aSel.Max().GetNode()->Len() )
>                 {
>@@ -2407,19 +2361,13 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoOnlineSpelling( ContentNode* pThisNodeOnly, sal_Bool bSpel
>                     sal_uInt16 nWEnd= aSel.Max().GetIndex();
>                     if ( !xSpeller->isValid( aWord, GetLanguage( EditPaM( aSel.Min().GetNode(), nWStart+1 ) ), aEmptySeq ) )
>                     {
>-                        // Pruefen, ob schon richtig markiert...
>+                        // Check if already marked correctly...
>                         nWrongs++;
>-                        // Nur bei SimpleRepaint stoppen, sonst zu oft VDev
>-    //						if ( ( nWrongs > 8 ) && bSimpleRepaint )
>-    //						{
>-    //							bStop = sal_True;
>-    // 							pWrongList->MarkInvalid( aSel.Max().GetIndex(), nInvEnd );
>-    //						}
>                         sal_uInt16 nXEnd = bDottAdded ? nWEnd -1 : nWEnd;
>                         if ( !pWrongList->HasWrong( nWStart, nXEnd ) )
>                         {
>-                            // Wort als falsch markieren...
>-                            // Aber nur, wenn nicht an Cursor-Position...
>+                            // Mark Word as wrong...
>+                            // But only when not at Cursor-Position...
>                             sal_Bool bCursorPos = sal_False;
>                             if ( aCursorPos.GetNode() == pNode )
>                             {
>@@ -2428,16 +2376,17 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoOnlineSpelling( ContentNode* pThisNodeOnly, sal_Bool bSpel
>                             }
>                             if ( bCursorPos )
>                             {
>-                                // Dann weiter als ungueltig markieren...
>+                                // Then continue to mark as invalid ...
>                                 pWrongList->GetInvalidStart() = nWStart;
>                                 pWrongList->GetInvalidEnd() = nWEnd;
>                                 bRestartTimer = sal_True;
>                             }
>                             else
>                             {
>-                                // Es kann sein, dass die Wrongs in der Liste nicht
>-                                // genau ueber Woerter aufgespannt sind, weil die
>-                                // WordDelimiters beim Expandieren nicht ausgewrtet werden.
>+                                // It may be that the Wrongs in the list ar not
>+                                // spanning exactly over words because the 
>+                                // WordDelimiters during expansion are not 
>+                                // evaluated.
>                                 pWrongList->InsertWrong( nWStart, nXEnd, sal_True );
>                                 bChanged = sal_True;
>                             }
>@@ -2445,7 +2394,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoOnlineSpelling( ContentNode* pThisNodeOnly, sal_Bool bSpel
>                     }
>                     else
>                     {
>-                        // Pruefen, ob nicht als als falsch markiert....
>+                        // Check if not marked as wrong
>                         if ( pWrongList->HasAnyWrong( nWStart, nWEnd ) )
>                         {
>                             pWrongList->ClearWrongs( nWStart, nWEnd, pNode );
>@@ -2466,14 +2415,14 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoOnlineSpelling( ContentNode* pThisNodeOnly, sal_Bool bSpel
>                 if ( bChanged && ( aSel.Min().GetNode() == pNode ) &&
>                         ( ( aSel.Min().GetIndex()-aLastEnd.GetIndex() > 1 ) ) )
>                 {
>-                    // Wenn zwei Worte durch mehr Zeichen als ein Blank getrennt
>-                    // sind, kann es passieren, dass beim Aufsplitten eines Wrongs
>-                    // der Start den zweiten Wortes vor dem tatsaechlich Wort liegt
>+                    // If two words are separated by more than one blank, it 
>+                    // can happen that when splitting a Wrongs the start of  
>+                    // the second word is before the actually word 
>                     pWrongList->ClearWrongs( aLastEnd.GetIndex(), aSel.Min().GetIndex(), pNode );
>                 }
>             }
> 
>-            // Invalidieren?
>+            // Invalidate?
>             if ( ( nPaintFrom != 0xFFFF ) )
>             {
>                 aStatus.GetStatusWord() |= EE_STAT_WRONGWORDCHANGED;
>@@ -2481,22 +2430,21 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoOnlineSpelling( ContentNode* pThisNodeOnly, sal_Bool bSpel
> 
>                 if ( aEditViews.Count() )
>                 {
>-                    // Bei SimpleRepaint wuerde ein uebermalen ohne VDev reichen,
>-                    // aber dann muesste ich ueber alle Views, Intersecten,
>-                    // Clippen, ...
>-                    // Lohnt wahrscheinlich nicht.
>+                    // For SimpleRepaint one was painted over a range without 
>+                    // reaching VDEV, but then one would have to intersect, c
>+                    // clipping, ... over all views. Probably not worthwhile.
>                     EditPaM aStartPaM( pNode, nPaintFrom );
>                     EditPaM aEndPaM( pNode, nPaintTo );
>                     Rectangle aStartCursor( PaMtoEditCursor( aStartPaM ) );
>                     Rectangle aEndCursor( PaMtoEditCursor( aEndPaM ) );
>-                    DBG_ASSERT( aInvalidRec.IsEmpty(), "InvalidRect gesetzt!" );
>+                    DBG_ASSERT( aInvalidRec.IsEmpty(), "InvalidRect set!" );
>                     aInvalidRec.Left() = 0;
>                     aInvalidRec.Right() = GetPaperSize().Width();
>                     aInvalidRec.Top() = aStartCursor.Top();
>                     aInvalidRec.Bottom() = aEndCursor.Bottom();
>                     if ( pActiveView && pActiveView->HasSelection() )
>                     {
>-                        // Dann darf nicht ueber VDev ausgegeben werden
>+                        // Then no output through VDev.
>                         UpdateViews( NULL );
>                     }
>                     else if ( bSimpleRepaint )
>@@ -2508,9 +2456,9 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoOnlineSpelling( ContentNode* pThisNodeOnly, sal_Bool bSpel
>                             aClipRec.Intersection( pView->GetVisArea() );
>                             if ( !aClipRec.IsEmpty() )
>                             {
>-                                // in Fensterkoordinaten umwandeln....
>+                                // convert to window coordinates ....
>                                 aClipRec.SetPos( pView->pImpEditView->GetWindowPos( aClipRec.TopLeft() ) );
>-                                // Wenn Selektion, dann VDev...
>+                                // If selected, then VDev ...
>                                 Paint( pView->pImpEditView, aClipRec, pView->HasSelection() );
>                             }
>                         }
>@@ -2522,7 +2470,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoOnlineSpelling( ContentNode* pThisNodeOnly, sal_Bool bSpel
>                     aInvalidRec = Rectangle();
>                 }
>             }
>-            // Nach zwei korrigierten Nodes die Kontrolle abgeben...
>+            // After two corrected nodes give up the control ...
>             nInvalids++;
>             if ( bInteruptable && ( nInvalids >= 2 ) )
>             {
>@@ -2542,7 +2490,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::DoOnlineSpelling( ContentNode* pThisNodeOnly, sal_Bool bSpel
> 
> EESpellState ImpEditEngine::HasSpellErrors()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( xSpeller.is(), "Kein Speller gesetzt!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( xSpeller.is(), "No spell checker set!" );
> 
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>     ContentNode* pLastNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( aEditDoc.Count() - 1 );
>@@ -2590,7 +2538,7 @@ EESpellState ImpEditEngine::StartThesaurus( EditView* pEditView )
>     AbstractThesaurusDialog* pDlg = pFact->CreateThesaurusDialog( pEditView->GetWindow(), xThes, aWord, GetLanguage( aCurSel.Max() ) );
>     if ( pDlg->Execute() == RET_OK )
>     {
>-        // Wort ersetzen...
>+        // Replace Word...
>         pEditView->pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>         pEditView->pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aCurSel );
>         pEditView->pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>@@ -2612,7 +2560,7 @@ sal_uInt16 ImpEditEngine::StartSearchAndReplace( EditView* pEditView, const SvxS
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>     EditSelection aCurSel( pEditView->pImpEditView->GetEditSelection() );
> 
>-    // FIND_ALL ohne Mehrfachselektion nicht moeglich.
>+    // FIND_ALL is not possible without multiple selection. 
>     if ( ( rSearchItem.GetCommand() == SVX_SEARCHCMD_FIND ) ||
>          ( rSearchItem.GetCommand() == SVX_SEARCHCMD_FIND_ALL ) )
>     {
>@@ -2621,8 +2569,8 @@ sal_uInt16 ImpEditEngine::StartSearchAndReplace( EditView* pEditView, const SvxS
>     }
>     else if ( rSearchItem.GetCommand() == SVX_SEARCHCMD_REPLACE )
>     {
>-        // Das Wort ist selektiert, wenn der Anwender die Selektion
>-        // nicht zwischendurch manipuliert:
>+        // The word is selected if the user not altered the selection
>+        // in between:
>         if ( aCurSel.HasRange() )
>         {
>             pEditView->InsertText( rSearchItem.GetReplaceString() );
>@@ -2634,7 +2582,7 @@ sal_uInt16 ImpEditEngine::StartSearchAndReplace( EditView* pEditView, const SvxS
>     }
>     else if ( rSearchItem.GetCommand() == SVX_SEARCHCMD_REPLACE_ALL )
>     {
>-        // Der Writer ersetzt alle, vorn Anfang bis Ende...
>+        // The Writer replaces all front beginning to end ...
>         SvxSearchItem aTmpItem( rSearchItem );
>         aTmpItem.SetBackward( sal_False );
> 
>@@ -2681,7 +2629,7 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::Search( const SvxSearchItem& rSearchItem, EditView* pEditVie
> 
>     EditSelection aFoundSel;
>     BOOL bFound = ImpSearch( rSearchItem, aSel, aStartPaM, aFoundSel );
>-    if ( bFound && ( aFoundSel == aSel ) )	// Bei Rueckwaetssuche
>+    if ( bFound && ( aFoundSel == aSel ) )	// For backwards-search
>     {
>         aStartPaM = aSel.Min();
>         bFound = ImpSearch( rSearchItem, aSel, aStartPaM, aFoundSel );
>@@ -2690,7 +2638,7 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::Search( const SvxSearchItem& rSearchItem, EditView* pEditVie
>     pEditView->pImpEditView->DrawSelection();
>     if ( bFound )
>     {
>-        // Erstmal das Min einstellen, damit das ganze Wort in den sichtbaren Bereich kommt.
>+        // First, set the minimum, so the whole word is in the visible range.
>         pEditView->pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aFoundSel.Min() );
>         pEditView->ShowCursor( TRUE, FALSE );
>         pEditView->pImpEditView->SetEditSelection( aFoundSel );
>@@ -2725,12 +2673,12 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::ImpSearch( const SvxSearchItem& rSearchItem,
> 
>     utl::TextSearch aSearcher( aSearchOptions );
> 
>-    // ueber die Absaetze iterieren...
>+    // iterate over the paragraphs ...
>     for ( sal_uInt16 nNode = nStartNode;
>             bBack ? ( nNode >= nEndNode ) : ( nNode <= nEndNode) ;
>             bBack ? nNode-- : nNode++ )
>     {
>-        // Bei rueckwaertsuche, wenn nEndNode = 0:
>+        // For backwards-search if nEndNode = 0:
>         if ( nNode >= 0xFFFF )
>             return sal_False;
> 
>@@ -2753,7 +2701,7 @@ sal_Bool ImpEditEngine::ImpSearch( const SvxSearchItem& rSearchItem,
>                 nEndPos = rSearchSelection.Max().GetIndex();
>         }
> 
>-        // Suchen...
>+        // Searching ...
>         XubString aParaStr( GetEditDoc().GetParaAsString( pNode ) );
>         bool bFound = false;
>         if ( bBack )
>@@ -2844,7 +2792,7 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::TransliterateText( const EditSelection& rSelection,
>         xub_StrLen nEndPos = pNode->Len();
>         if ( nNode == nStartNode )
>             nStartPos = aSel.Min().GetIndex();
>-        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // kann auch == nStart sein!
>+        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // can also be == nStart!
>             nEndPos = aSel.Max().GetIndex();
> 
>         USHORT nCurrentStart = nStartPos;
>@@ -3110,7 +3058,7 @@ EditSelection ImpEditEngine::TransliterateText( const EditSelection& rSelection,
>                         std::max< USHORT >( rData.nStart + rData.nLen,
>                                             rData.nStart + rData.aNewText.Len() ) );
>             }
>-        } // if (aChanges.size() > 0)
>+        } 
>     }
> 
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit5.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit5.cxx
>index 8709b19..7877678 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/impedit5.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/impedit5.cxx
>@@ -44,13 +44,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetStyleSheetPool( SfxStyleSheetPool* pSPool )
> {
>     if ( pStylePool != pSPool )
>     {
>-//		if ( pStylePool )
>-//			EndListening( *pStylePool, TRUE );
>-
>         pStylePool = pSPool;
>-
>-//		if ( pStylePool )
>-//			StartListening( *pStylePool, TRUE );
>     }
> }
> 
>@@ -152,7 +146,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::RemoveStyleFromParagraphs( SfxStyleSheet* pStyle )
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::Notify( SfxBroadcaster& rBC, const SfxHint& rHint )
> {
>-    // Damit nicht beim Destruieren unnoetig formatiert wird:
>+    // So that not a lot of unnecessary formatting is done when destructing:
>     if ( !bDowning )
>     {
>         DBG_CHKOBJ( GetEditEnginePtr(), EditEngine, 0 );
>@@ -163,7 +157,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Notify( SfxBroadcaster& rBC, const SfxHint& rHint )
>         if ( rHint.ISA( SfxStyleSheetHint ) )
>         {
>             const SfxStyleSheetHint& rH = (const SfxStyleSheetHint&) rHint;
>-            DBG_ASSERT( rH.GetStyleSheet()->ISA( SfxStyleSheet ), "Kein SfxStyleSheet!" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( rH.GetStyleSheet()->ISA( SfxStyleSheet ), "No SfxStyleSheet!" );
>             pStyle = (SfxStyleSheet*) rH.GetStyleSheet();
>             nId = rH.GetHint();
>         }
>@@ -185,17 +179,6 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Notify( SfxBroadcaster& rBC, const SfxHint& rHint )
>                       ( nId == SFX_STYLESHEET_MODIFIED ) )
>             {
>                 UpdateParagraphsWithStyleSheet( pStyle );
>-
>-                // Alle Absaetze mit EditStyles, die das geaenderte Style
>-                // irgendwie als Parent haben, muessen formatiert werden.
>-                // ULONG nStyles = pMyStylePool->GetStyles().Count();
>-                // for ( ULONG nStyle = 0; nStyle < nStyles; nStyle++ )
>-                // {
>-                // 	EditStyleSheet* pES = (EditStyleSheet*)pMyStylePool->GetStyles().GetObject( nStyle );
>-                // 	DBG_ASSERT( pES, "NULL-Pointer im StyleSheetPool!" );
>-                // 	if ( pES->IsUsed() && pES->HasStyleAsAnyParent( *pStyle ) )
>-                // 		UpdateParagraphsWithStyleSheet( pES );
>-                // }
>             }
>         }
>     }
>@@ -203,7 +186,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::Notify( SfxBroadcaster& rBC, const SfxHint& rHint )
> 
> EditUndoSetAttribs* ImpEditEngine::CreateAttribUndo( EditSelection aSel, const SfxItemSet& rSet )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !aSel.DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "CreateAttribUndo: Fehlerhafte Selektion" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !aSel.DbgIsBuggy( aEditDoc ), "CreateAttribUndo: Incorrect selection ");
>     aSel.Adjust( aEditDoc );
> 
>     ESelection aESel( CreateESel( aSel ) );
>@@ -230,7 +213,7 @@ EditUndoSetAttribs* ImpEditEngine::CreateAttribUndo( EditSelection aSel, const S
>     for ( USHORT nPara = nStartNode; nPara <= nEndNode; nPara++ )
>     {
>         ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.GetObject( nPara );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nPara ), "Node nicht gefunden: CreateAttribUndo" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nPara ), "Node not found: CreateAttribUndo" );
>         ContentAttribsInfo* pInf = new ContentAttribsInfo( pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItems() );
>         pUndo->GetContentInfos().Insert( pInf, pUndo->GetContentInfos().Count() );
> 
>@@ -278,7 +261,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::UndoActionEnd( USHORT )
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::InsertUndo( EditUndo* pUndo, BOOL bTryMerge )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( !IsInUndo(), "InsertUndo im Undomodus!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( !IsInUndo(), "InsertUndo in Undomodus!" );
>     if ( pUndoMarkSelection )
>     {
>         EditUndoMarkSelection* pU = new EditUndoMarkSelection( this, *pUndoMarkSelection );
>@@ -299,7 +282,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ResetUndoManager()
> 
> void ImpEditEngine::EnableUndo( BOOL bEnable )
> {
>-    // Beim Umschalten des Modus Liste loeschen:
>+    // When switching the mode Delete list:
>     if ( bEnable != IsUndoEnabled() )
>         ResetUndoManager();
> 
>@@ -332,7 +315,7 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::Repeat( EditView* /* pView */ )
> {
>     if ( HasUndoManager() && GetUndoManager().GetRepeatActionCount() )
>     {
>-        DBG_WARNING( "Repeat nicht implementiert!" );
>+        DBG_WARNING( "Repeat not implemented!" );
>         return TRUE;
>     }
>     return FALSE;
>@@ -344,42 +327,35 @@ SfxItemSet ImpEditEngine::GetAttribs( EditSelection aSel, BOOL bOnlyHardAttrib )
> 
>     aSel.Adjust( aEditDoc );
> 
>-#if OSL_DEBUG_LEVEL > 1
>-//    if ( ( aSel.Min().GetNode() == aSel.Max().GetNode() ) && ( bOnlyHardAttrib == EditEngineAttribs_All ) )
>-//        return GetAttribs( aEditDoc.GetPos( aSel.Min().GetNode() ), aSel.Min().GetIndex(), aSel.Max().GetIndex(), GETATTRIBS_ALL );
>-#endif
>-
>-
>     SfxItemSet aCurSet( GetEmptyItemSet() );
> 
>     USHORT nStartNode = aEditDoc.GetPos( aSel.Min().GetNode() );
>     USHORT nEndNode = aEditDoc.GetPos( aSel.Max().GetNode() );
> 
>-    // ueber die Absaetze iterieren...
>+    // iterate over the paragraphs ...
>     for ( USHORT nNode = nStartNode; nNode <= nEndNode; nNode++	)
>     {
>         ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.GetObject( nNode );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nNode ), "Node nicht gefunden: GetAttrib" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nNode ), "Node not found: GetAttrib" );
> 
>         xub_StrLen nStartPos = 0;
>         xub_StrLen nEndPos = pNode->Len();
>         if ( nNode == nStartNode )
>             nStartPos = aSel.Min().GetIndex();
>-        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // kann auch == nStart sein!
>+        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // Can also be == nStart!
>             nEndPos = aSel.Max().GetIndex();
> 
>-        // Problem: Vorlagen....
>-        // => Andersrum:
>-        // 1) Harte Zeichenattribute, wie gehabt...
>-        // 2) Nur wenn OFF, Style and Absatzattr. pruefen...
>+        // Problem: Templates ....
>+        // =>  Other way:
>+        // 1) Hard character attributes, as usual ...
>+        // 2) Examine Style and paragraph attributes only when OFF ...
> 
>-        // Erst die ganz harte Formatierung...
>+        // First the very hard formatting ...
>         aEditDoc.FindAttribs( pNode, nStartPos, nEndPos, aCurSet );
> 
>         if( bOnlyHardAttrib != EditEngineAttribs_OnlyHard )
>         {
>-            // Und dann Absatzformatierung und Vorlage...
>-            // SfxStyleSheet* pStyle = pNode->GetStyleSheet();
>+            // and then paragraph formatting and template...
>             for ( USHORT nWhich = EE_ITEMS_START; nWhich <= EE_CHAR_END; nWhich++)
>             {
>                 if ( aCurSet.GetItemState( nWhich ) == SFX_ITEM_OFF )
>@@ -409,13 +385,12 @@ SfxItemSet ImpEditEngine::GetAttribs( EditSelection aSel, BOOL bOnlyHardAttrib )
>                     // pItem can only be NULL when bOnlyHardAttrib...
>                     if ( !pItem || ( *pItem != aCurSet.Get( nWhich ) ) )
>                     {
>-                        // Problem: Wenn Absatzvorlage mit z.B. Font,
>-                        // aber Font hart und anders und komplett in Selektion
>-                        // Falsch, wenn invalidiert....
>-                        // => Lieber nicht invalidieren, UMSTELLEN!
>-                        // Besser waere, Absatzweise ein ItemSet zu fuellen
>-                        // und dieses mit dem gesmten vergleichen.
>-    //						aCurSet.InvalidateItem( nWhich );
>+                        // Problem: When Paragraph style with for example font,
>+                        // but the Font is hard and completely different, 
>+                        // wrong in selection  if invalidated....
>+                        // => better not invalidate, instead CHANGE!
>+                        // It would be better to fill each paragraph with 
>+                        // a itemset and compare this in large.
>                         if ( nWhich <= EE_PARA_END )
>                             aCurSet.InvalidateItem( nWhich );
>                     }
>@@ -424,7 +399,7 @@ SfxItemSet ImpEditEngine::GetAttribs( EditSelection aSel, BOOL bOnlyHardAttrib )
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // Leere Slots mit Defaults fuellen...
>+    // fill empty slots with defaults ...
>     if ( bOnlyHardAttrib == EditEngineAttribs_All )
>     {
>         for ( USHORT nWhich = EE_ITEMS_START; nWhich <= EE_CHAR_END; nWhich++ )
>@@ -441,7 +416,7 @@ SfxItemSet ImpEditEngine::GetAttribs( EditSelection aSel, BOOL bOnlyHardAttrib )
> 
> SfxItemSet ImpEditEngine::GetAttribs( USHORT nPara, USHORT nStart, USHORT nEnd, sal_uInt8 nFlags ) const
> {
>-    // MT: #94002# Optimized function with less Puts(), which cause unnecessary cloning from default items.
>+    // Optimized function with less Puts(), which cause unnecessary cloning from default items.
>     // If this works, change GetAttribs( EditSelection ) to use this for each paragraph and merge the results!
> 
>     DBG_CHKOBJ( GetEditEnginePtr(), EditEngine, 0 );
>@@ -534,8 +509,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetAttribs( EditSelection aSel, const SfxItemSet& rSet, BYTE
> {
>     aSel.Adjust( aEditDoc );
> 
>-    // Wenn keine Selektion => die Attribute aufs Wort anwenden.
>-    // ( Der RTF-Perser sollte die Methode eigentlich nie ohne Range rufen )
>+    // When no selection => use the Attribute on the word.
>+    // ( the RTF-parser should actually never call the Method whithout a Range )
>     if ( ( nSpecial == ATTRSPECIAL_WHOLEWORD ) && !aSel.HasRange() )
>         aSel = SelectWord( aSel, ::com::sun::star::i18n::WordType::ANYWORD_IGNOREWHITESPACES, FALSE );
> 
>@@ -557,7 +532,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetAttribs( EditSelection aSel, const SfxItemSet& rSet, BYTE
>                          ( rSet.GetItemState( EE_CHAR_LANGUAGE_CTL ) == SFX_ITEM_ON );
>     }
> 
>-    // ueber die Absaetze iterieren...
>+    // iterate over the paragraphs ...
>     for ( USHORT nNode = nStartNode; nNode <= nEndNode; nNode++	)
>     {
>         BOOL bParaAttribFound = FALSE;
>@@ -566,22 +541,22 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetAttribs( EditSelection aSel, const SfxItemSet& rSet, BYTE
>         ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.GetObject( nNode );
>         ParaPortion* pPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject( nNode );
> 
>-        DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nNode ), "Node nicht gefunden: SetAttribs" );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions().GetObject( nNode ), "Portion nicht gefunden: SetAttribs" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nNode ), "Node not founden: SetAttribs" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions().GetObject( nNode ), "Portion not found: SetAttribs" );
> 
>         xub_StrLen nStartPos = 0;
>         xub_StrLen nEndPos = pNode->Len();
>         if ( nNode == nStartNode )
>             nStartPos = aSel.Min().GetIndex();
>-        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // kann auch == nStart sein!
>+        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // can also be == nStart!
>             nEndPos = aSel.Max().GetIndex();
> 
>-        // ueber die Items iterieren...
>+        // Iterate over the Items...
> #ifdef EDITDEBUG
> //		FILE* fp = fopen( "d:\\debug.log", "a" );
> //		if ( fp )
> //		{
>-//			fprintf( fp, "\n\n=> Zeichen-Attribute: Absatz %i, %i-%i\n", nNode, nStartPos, nEndPos );
>+//			fprintf( fp, "\n\n=> Character-Attribute: Paragraph %i, %i-%i\n", nNode, nStartPos, nEndPos );
> //			DbgOutItemSet( fp, rSet, TRUE, FALSE );
> //			fclose( fp );
> //		}
>@@ -650,7 +625,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::RemoveCharAttribs( EditSelection aSel, BOOL bRemoveParaAttri
> 
>     if ( IsUndoEnabled() && !IsInUndo() && aStatus.DoUndoAttribs() )
>     {
>-        // Eventuel spezielles Undo, oder ItemSet*
>+        // Possibly a special Undo, or itemset*
>         EditUndoSetAttribs* pUndo = CreateAttribUndo( aSel, GetEmptyItemSet() );
>         pUndo->SetRemoveAttribs( TRUE );
>         pUndo->SetRemoveParaAttribs( bRemoveParaAttribs );
>@@ -658,33 +633,33 @@ void ImpEditEngine::RemoveCharAttribs( EditSelection aSel, BOOL bRemoveParaAttri
>         InsertUndo( pUndo );
>     }
> 
>-    // ueber die Absaetze iterieren...
>+    // iterate over the paragraphs ...
>     for ( USHORT nNode = nStartNode; nNode <= nEndNode; nNode++	)
>     {
>         ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.GetObject( nNode );
>         ParaPortion* pPortion = GetParaPortions().GetObject( nNode );
> 
>-        DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nNode ), "Node nicht gefunden: SetAttribs" );
>-        DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nNode ), "Portion nicht gefunden: SetAttribs" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nNode ), "Node not found: SetAttribs" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nNode ), "Portion not found: SetAttribs" );
> 
>         xub_StrLen nStartPos = 0;
>         xub_StrLen nEndPos = pNode->Len();
>         if ( nNode == nStartNode )
>             nStartPos = aSel.Min().GetIndex();
>-        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // kann auch == nStart sein!
>+        if ( nNode == nEndNode ) // can also be == nStart!
>             nEndPos = aSel.Max().GetIndex();
> 
>-        // Optimieren: Wenn ganzer Absatz, dann RemoveCharAttribs( nPara )?!
>+        // Optimize: If whole paragraph, then RemoveCharAttribs (nPara)?
>         BOOL bChanged = aEditDoc.RemoveAttribs( pNode, nStartPos, nEndPos, nWhich );
>         if ( bRemoveParaAttribs )
>         {
>-            SetParaAttribs( nNode, *_pEmptyItemSet );	// Invalidiert
>+            SetParaAttribs( nNode, *_pEmptyItemSet );	// Invalidated
>         }
>         else
>         {
>-            // Bei 'Format-Standard' sollen auch die Zeichenattribute verschwinden,
>-            // die von der DrawingEngine als Absatzattribute eingestellt wurden.
>-            // Diese koennen sowieso nicht vom Anwender eingestellt worden sein.
>+            // For 'Format-Standard' also the character attributes should 
>+            // disappear, which were set as paragraph attributes by the 
>+            // DrawingEngine. These could not have been set by the user anyway.
> 
>             // #106871# Not when nWhich
>             // Would have been better to offer a separate method for format/standard...
>@@ -712,8 +687,8 @@ void ImpEditEngine::RemoveCharAttribs( USHORT nPara, USHORT nWhich, BOOL bRemove
>     ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.SaveGetObject( nPara );
>     ParaPortion* pPortion = GetParaPortions().SaveGetObject( nPara );
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node nicht gefunden: RemoveCharAttribs" );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Portion nicht gefunden: RemoveCharAttribs" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node not found: RemoveCharAttribs" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pPortion, "Portion not found: RemoveCharAttribs" );
> 
>     if ( !pNode )
>         return;
>@@ -747,7 +722,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetParaAttribs( USHORT nPara, const SfxItemSet& rSet )
> //		FILE* fp = fopen( "d:\\debug.log", "a" );
> //		if ( fp )
> //		{
>-//			fprintf( fp, "\n\n=> Absatz-Attribute: Absatz %i\n", nPara );
>+//			fprintf( fp, "\n\n=> Paragraph-Attribute: Paragraph %i\n", nPara );
> //			DbgOutItemSet( fp, rSet, TRUE, FALSE );
> //			fclose( fp );
> //		}
>@@ -779,14 +754,14 @@ void ImpEditEngine::SetParaAttribs( USHORT nPara, const SfxItemSet& rSet )
> const SfxItemSet& ImpEditEngine::GetParaAttribs( USHORT nPara ) const
> {
>     ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.GetObject( nPara );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node nicht gefunden: GetParaAttribs" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node not found: GetParaAttribs" );
>     return pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItems();
> }
> 
> BOOL ImpEditEngine::HasParaAttrib( USHORT nPara, USHORT nWhich ) const
> {
>     ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.GetObject( nPara );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node nicht gefunden: HasParaAttrib" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node not found: HasParaAttrib" );
> 
>     return pNode->GetContentAttribs().HasItem( nWhich );
> }
>@@ -794,7 +769,7 @@ BOOL ImpEditEngine::HasParaAttrib( USHORT nPara, USHORT nWhich ) const
> const SfxPoolItem& ImpEditEngine::GetParaAttrib( USHORT nPara, USHORT nWhich ) const
> {
>     ContentNode* pNode = aEditDoc.GetObject( nPara );
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node nicht gefunden: GetParaAttrib" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pNode, "Node not found: GetParaAttrib" );
> 
>     return pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItem( nWhich );
> }
>@@ -827,7 +802,7 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ParaAttribsToCharAttribs( ContentNode* pNode )
>         if ( pNode->GetContentAttribs().HasItem( nWhich ) )
>         {
>             const SfxPoolItem& rItem = pNode->GetContentAttribs().GetItem( nWhich );
>-            // Die Luecken auffuellen:
>+            // Fill the gap:
>             USHORT nLastEnd = 0;
>             EditCharAttrib* pAttr = pNode->GetCharAttribs().FindNextAttrib( nWhich, nLastEnd );
>             while ( pAttr )
>@@ -839,13 +814,13 @@ void ImpEditEngine::ParaAttribsToCharAttribs( ContentNode* pNode )
>                 pAttr = nLastEnd ? pNode->GetCharAttribs().FindNextAttrib( nWhich, nLastEnd ) : NULL;
>             }
> 
>-            // Und den Rest:
>+            // And the Rest:
>             if ( nLastEnd < nEndPos )
>                 aEditDoc.InsertAttrib( pNode, nLastEnd, nEndPos, rItem );
>         }
>     }
>     bFormatted = FALSE;
>-    // Portion braucht hier nicht invalidiert werden, geschieht woanders.
>+    // Portion does not need to be invalidated here, happens elsewhere.
> }
> 
> IdleFormattter::IdleFormattter()
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/makefile.mk b/editeng/source/editeng/makefile.mk
>index e0c0076..6a623d0 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/makefile.mk
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/makefile.mk
>@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ ENABLE_EXCEPTIONS=TRUE
> .INCLUDE :  settings.mk
> .INCLUDE :  $(PRJ)$/util$/makefile.pmk
> 
>-# --- Allgemein ----------------------------------------------------------
>+# --- General ----------------------------------------------------------
> 
> .IF "$(editdebug)" != "" || "$(EDITDEBUG)" != ""
> CDEFS+=-DEDITDEBUG
>diff --git a/editeng/source/editeng/textconv.cxx b/editeng/source/editeng/textconv.cxx
>index b37e767..4615b1b 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/editeng/textconv.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/editeng/textconv.cxx
>@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ sal_Bool TextConvWrapper::ConvNext_impl()
> 
>     if ( bStartDone && bEndDone )
>     {
>-        if ( ConvMore_impl() )  // ein weiteres Dokument pruefen?
>+        if ( ConvMore_impl() )  // examine another document?
>         {
>             bStartDone = sal_True;
>             bEndDone  = sal_False;
>@@ -112,12 +112,11 @@ sal_Bool TextConvWrapper::ConvNext_impl()
> 
>     }
> 
>-    //ResMgr* pMgr = DIALOG_MGR();
>     sal_Bool bGoOn = sal_False;
> 
>     if ( bStartDone && bEndDone )
>     {
>-        if ( ConvMore_impl() )  // ein weiteres Dokument pruefen?
>+        if ( ConvMore_impl() )  // examine another document?
>         {
>             bStartDone = sal_True;
>             bEndDone  = sal_False;
>@@ -127,32 +126,12 @@ sal_Bool TextConvWrapper::ConvNext_impl()
>     }
>     else
>     {
>-        // Ein BODY_Bereich erledigt, Frage nach dem anderen BODY_Bereich
>-/*
>-        pWin->LeaveWait();
>-
>-        sal_uInt16 nResId = bReverse ? RID_SVXQB_BW_CONTINUE : RID_SVXQB_CONTINUE;
>-        QueryBox aBox( pWin, ResId( nResId, pMgr ) );
>-        if ( aBox.Execute() != RET_YES )
>-        {
>-            // Verzicht auf den anderen Bereich, ggf. Frage nach Sonderbereich
>-            pWin->EnterWait();
>-            bStartDone = bEndDone = sal_True;
>-            return ConvNext_impl();
>-        }
>-        else
>-        {
>-*/
>             if (!aConvSel.HasRange())
>             {
>                 bStartChk = !bStartDone;
>                 ConvStart_impl( bStartChk ? SVX_SPELL_BODY_START : SVX_SPELL_BODY_END );
>                 bGoOn = sal_True;
>             }
>-/*
>-        }
>-        pWin->EnterWait();
>-*/
>     }
>     return bGoOn;
> }
>@@ -162,8 +141,6 @@ sal_Bool TextConvWrapper::FindConvText_impl()
> {
>     // modified version of SvxSpellWrapper::FindSpellError
> 
>-    //ShowLanguageErrors();
>-
>     sal_Bool bFound = sal_False;
> 
>     pWin->EnterWait();
>@@ -199,7 +176,7 @@ sal_Bool TextConvWrapper::ConvMore_impl()
>         bMore = pImpEE->GetEditEnginePtr()->ConvertNextDocument();
>         if ( bMore )
>         {
>-            // Der Text wurde in diese Engine getreten...
>+            // The text has been entered in this engine ...
>             pEditView->GetImpEditView()->SetEditSelection(
>                         pImpEE->GetEditDoc().GetStartPaM() );
>         }
>@@ -217,8 +194,7 @@ void TextConvWrapper::ConvStart_impl( SvxSpellArea eArea )
> 
>     if ( eArea == SVX_SPELL_BODY_START )
>     {
>-        // Wird gerufen, wenn Spell-Forwad am Ende angekomment ist
>-        // und soll von vorne beginnen
>+        // Is called when Spell-forward has reached the end, and to start over
>         if ( bEndDone )
>         {
>             pConvInfo->bConvToEnd = sal_False;
>@@ -236,7 +212,7 @@ void TextConvWrapper::ConvStart_impl( SvxSpellArea eArea )
>     }
>     else if ( eArea == SVX_SPELL_BODY_END )
>     {
>-        // Wird gerufen, wenn Spell-Forwad gestartet wird
>+        // Is called when Spell-forward starts
>         pConvInfo->bConvToEnd = sal_True;
>         if (aConvSel.HasRange())
>         {
>@@ -258,7 +234,6 @@ void TextConvWrapper::ConvStart_impl( SvxSpellArea eArea )
>         pConvInfo->aConvContinue = pConvInfo->aConvStart;
>         pConvInfo->aConvTo = pImpEE->CreateEPaM(
>             pImpEE->GetEditDoc().GetEndPaM() );
>-        // pSpellInfo->bSpellToEnd = sal_True;
>     }
>     else
>     {
>@@ -439,7 +414,6 @@ void TextConvWrapper::ReplaceUnit(
>         ESelection aNewSel( aOldSel );
>         aNewSel.nStartPos = sal::static_int_cast< xub_StrLen >(
>             aNewSel.nStartPos - aNewTxt.getLength());
>-//		DBG_ASSERT( aOldSel.nEndPos >= 0, "error while building selection" );
> 
>         if (pNewUnitLanguage)
>         {
>diff --git a/editeng/source/items/bulitem.cxx b/editeng/source/items/bulitem.cxx
>index f14d985..f58f4b4 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/items/bulitem.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/items/bulitem.cxx
>@@ -38,7 +38,6 @@
> #include <editeng/bulitem.hxx>
> #include <editeng/editrids.hrc>
> 
>-// #90477#
> #include <tools/tenccvt.hxx>
> 
> #define BULITEM_VERSION		((USHORT)2)
>@@ -56,7 +55,6 @@ void SvxBulletItem::StoreFont( SvStream& rStream, const Font& rFont )
>     rStream << rFont.GetColor();
>     nTemp = (USHORT)rFont.GetFamily(); rStream << nTemp;
> 
>-    // #90477# nTemp = (USHORT)GetStoreCharSet( rFont.GetCharSet(), rStream.GetVersion() );
>     nTemp = (USHORT)GetSOStoreTextEncoding((rtl_TextEncoding)rFont.GetCharSet(), (sal_uInt16)rStream.GetVersion());
>     rStream << nTemp;
> 
>@@ -85,7 +83,6 @@ Font SvxBulletItem::CreateFont( SvStream& rStream, USHORT nVer )
>     USHORT nTemp;
>     rStream >> nTemp; aFont.SetFamily((FontFamily)nTemp);
> 
>-    // #90477#
>     rStream >> nTemp; 
>     nTemp = (sal_uInt16)GetSOLoadTextEncoding((rtl_TextEncoding)nTemp, (sal_uInt16)rStream.GetVersion());
>     aFont.SetCharSet((rtl_TextEncoding)nTemp);
>@@ -189,18 +186,16 @@ SvxBulletItem::SvxBulletItem( SvStream& rStrm, USHORT _nWhich ) :
>         aFont = CreateFont( rStrm, BULITEM_VERSION );
>     else
>     {
>-        // Sicheres Laden mit Test auf leere Bitmap
>+        // Safe Load with Test on empty Bitmap
>         Bitmap			aBmp;
>         const UINT32	nOldPos = rStrm.Tell();
>-        // #69345# Errorcode beim Bitmap lesen ignorieren,
>-        // siehe Kommentar #67581# in SvxBulletItem::Store()
>+        // Ignore Errorcode when reading Bitmap,
>+        // see comment in SvxBulletItem::Store()
>         BOOL bOldError = rStrm.GetError() ? TRUE : FALSE;
>         rStrm >> aBmp;
>         if ( !bOldError && rStrm.GetError() )
>         {
>             rStrm.ResetError();
>-            // #71493# Keine Warnung: Das BulletItem interessiert seit 5.0 im Dateiformat nicht mehr.
>-            // rStrm.SetError(ERRCODE_CLASS_READ | ERRCODE_SVX_BULLETITEM_NOBULLET | ERRCODE_WARNING_MASK);
>         }
> 
>         if( aBmp.IsEmpty() )
>@@ -338,8 +333,8 @@ int SvxBulletItem::operator==( const SfxPoolItem& rItem ) const
> {
>     DBG_ASSERT(rItem.ISA(SvxBulletItem),"operator==Types not matching");
>     const SvxBulletItem& rBullet = (const SvxBulletItem&)rItem;
>-    // ValidMask mitvergleichen, da sonst kein Putten in ein AttrSet moeglich,
>-    // wenn sich das Item nur in der ValidMask von einem existierenden unterscheidet.
>+    // Compare with ValidMask, otherwise no put possible in a AttrSet if the 
>+    // item differs only in terms of the ValidMask from an existing one.
>     if(	nValidMask != rBullet.nValidMask 	||
>         nStyle != rBullet.nStyle 			||
>         nScale != rBullet.nScale			||
>@@ -374,7 +369,7 @@ int SvxBulletItem::operator==( const SfxPoolItem& rItem ) const
> 
> SvStream& SvxBulletItem::Store( SvStream& rStrm, USHORT /*nItemVersion*/ ) const
> {
>-    // Korrektur bei leerer Bitmap
>+    // Correction for empty bitmap
>     if( ( nStyle == BS_BMP ) && 
>         ( !pGraphicObject || ( GRAPHIC_NONE == pGraphicObject->GetType() ) || ( GRAPHIC_DEFAULT == pGraphicObject->GetType() ) ) )
>     {
>@@ -395,7 +390,7 @@ SvStream& SvxBulletItem::Store( SvStream& rStrm, USHORT /*nItemVersion*/ ) const
>     {
>         ULONG _nStart = rStrm.Tell();
> 
>-        // Kleine Vorab-Schaetzung der Groesse...
>+        // Small preliminary estimate of the size ...
>         USHORT nFac = ( rStrm.GetCompressMode() != COMPRESSMODE_NONE ) ? 3 : 1;
>         const Bitmap aBmp( pGraphicObject->GetGraphic().GetBitmap() );
>         ULONG nBytes = aBmp.GetSizeBytes();
>@@ -403,15 +398,14 @@ SvStream& SvxBulletItem::Store( SvStream& rStrm, USHORT /*nItemVersion*/ ) const
>             rStrm << aBmp;
> 
>         ULONG nEnd = rStrm.Tell();
>-        // #67581# Item darf mit Overhead nicht mehr als 64K schreiben,
>-        // sonst platzt der SfxMultiRecord
>-        // Dann lieber auf die Bitmap verzichten, ist nur fuer Outliner
>-        // und auch nur fuer <= 5.0 wichtig.
>-        // Beim Einlesen merkt der Stream-Operator der Bitmap, dass dort keine steht.
>-        // Hiermit funktioniert jetzt der Fall das die grosse Bitmap aus einem anderen
>-        // Fileformat entstanden ist, welches keine 64K belegt, aber wenn eine
>-        // Bitmap > 64K verwendet wird, hat das SvxNumBulletItem beim Laden ein Problem,
>-        // stuerzt aber nicht ab.
>+        // Item can not write with an overhead more than 64K or SfxMultiRecord
>+        // will crash. Then prefer to forego on the bitmap, it is only 
>+        // important for the outliner and only for <= 5.0. 
>+        // When reading, the stream-operator makes note of the bitmap and the 
>+        // fact that there is none. This is now the case how it works with 
>+        // large bitmap created from another file format, which do not occupy a
>+        // 64K chunk, but if a bitmap > 64K is used, the SvxNumBulletItem will 
>+        // have problem loading it, but does not crash.
> 
>         if ( (nEnd-_nStart) > 0xFF00 )
>             rStrm.Seek( _nStart );
>diff --git a/editeng/source/items/flditem.cxx b/editeng/source/items/flditem.cxx
>index 0aa8a49..9b7be3c 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/items/flditem.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/items/flditem.cxx
>@@ -39,7 +39,6 @@
> 
> #include <editeng/measfld.hxx>
> 
>-// #90477#
> #include <tools/tenccvt.hxx>
> 
> #define FRAME_MARKER	(sal_uInt32)0x21981357
>@@ -74,9 +73,9 @@ SvxFieldData* SvxFieldData::Clone() const
> 
> int SvxFieldData::operator==( const SvxFieldData& rFld ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( Type() == rFld.Type(), "==: Verschiedene Typen" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( Type() == rFld.Type(), "==: Different Types" );
>     (void)rFld;
>-    return TRUE;	// Basicklasse immer gleich.
>+    return TRUE;	// Basic class is always the same.
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>@@ -107,7 +106,7 @@ MetaAction* SvxFieldData::createEndComment() const
> SvxFieldItem::SvxFieldItem( SvxFieldData* pFld, const USHORT nId ) :
>     SfxPoolItem( nId )
> {
>-    pField = pFld;	// gehoert direkt dem Item
>+    pField = pFld;	// belongs directly to the item
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>@@ -152,7 +151,7 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxFieldItem::Create( SvStream& rStrm, USHORT ) const
>         aPStrm.SetError( SVSTREAM_GENERALERROR );
> 
>     if ( aPStrm.GetError() == ERRCODE_IO_NOFACTORY )
>-        aPStrm.ResetError();	// Eigentlich einen Code, dass nicht alle Attr gelesen wurden...
>+        aPStrm.ResetError();	// Actually a code for that not all were read Attr ...
> 
>     return new SvxFieldItem( pData, Which() );
> }
>@@ -161,14 +160,14 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxFieldItem::Create( SvStream& rStrm, USHORT ) const
> 
> SvStream& SvxFieldItem::Store( SvStream& rStrm, USHORT /*nItemVersion*/ ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pField, "SvxFieldItem::Store: Feld?!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pField, "SvxFieldItem::Store: Field?!" );
>     SvPersistStream aPStrm( GetClassManager(), &rStrm );
>-    // Das ResetError in der obigen Create-Methode gab es in 3.1 noch nicht,
>-    // deshalb duerfen beim 3.x-Export neuere Items nicht gespeichert werden!
>+    // The reset error in the above Create method did not exist in 3.1, 
>+    // therefore newer items can not be saved for 3.x-exports!
>     if ( ( rStrm.GetVersion() <= SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_31 ) && pField &&
>             pField->GetClassId() == 50 /* SdrMeasureField */ )
>     {
>-        // SvxFieldData reicht nicht, weil auch nicht am ClassMgr angemeldet
>+        // SvxFieldData not enough, because not registered on ClassMgr.
>         SvxURLField aDummyData;
>         aPStrm << &aDummyData;
>     }
>@@ -196,7 +195,7 @@ int SvxFieldItem::operator==( const SfxPoolItem& rItem ) const
> }
> 
> // =================================================================
>-// Es folgen die Ableitungen von SvxFieldData...
>+// The following are the derivatives of SvxFieldData ...
> // =================================================================
> 
> SV_IMPL_PERSIST1( SvxDateField, SvxFieldData );
>@@ -277,12 +276,12 @@ String SvxDateField::GetFormatted( Date& aDate, SvxDateFormat eFormat, SvNumberF
> {
>     if ( eFormat == SVXDATEFORMAT_SYSTEM )
>     {
>-        DBG_ERROR( "SVXDATEFORMAT_SYSTEM nicht implementiert!" );
>+        DBG_ERROR( "SVXDATEFORMAT_SYSTEM not implemented!" );
>         eFormat = SVXDATEFORMAT_STDSMALL;
>     }
>     else if ( eFormat == SVXDATEFORMAT_APPDEFAULT )
>     {
>-        DBG_ERROR( "SVXDATEFORMAT_APPDEFAULT: Woher nehmen?" );
>+        DBG_ERROR( "SVXDATEFORMAT_APPDEFAULT: take them from where? ");
>         eFormat = SVXDATEFORMAT_STDSMALL;
>     }
> 
>@@ -311,15 +310,15 @@ String SvxDateField::GetFormatted( Date& aDate, SvxDateFormat eFormat, SvNumberF
>             nFormatKey = rFormatter.GetFormatIndex( NF_DATE_SYS_DMMMYYYY, eLang );
>         break;
>         case SVXDATEFORMAT_D:
>-            // 13. Februar 1996
>+            // 13. February 1996
>             nFormatKey = rFormatter.GetFormatIndex( NF_DATE_SYS_DMMMMYYYY, eLang );
>         break;
>         case SVXDATEFORMAT_E:
>-            // Die, 13. Februar 1996
>+            // The, 13. February 1996
>             nFormatKey = rFormatter.GetFormatIndex( NF_DATE_SYS_NNDMMMMYYYY, eLang );
>         break;
>         case SVXDATEFORMAT_F:
>-            // Dienstag, 13. Februar 1996
>+            // Tuesday, 13. February 1996
>             nFormatKey = rFormatter.GetFormatIndex( NF_DATE_SYS_NNNNDMMMMYYYY, eLang );
>         break;
>         default:
>@@ -394,7 +393,7 @@ void SvxURLField::Load( SvPersistStream & rStm )
>     // read to a temp string first, read text encoding and
>     // convert later to stay compatible to fileformat
>     ByteString aTempString;
>-    rtl_TextEncoding aTempEncoding = RTL_TEXTENCODING_MS_1252;  // #101493# Init for old documents
>+    rtl_TextEncoding aTempEncoding = RTL_TEXTENCODING_MS_1252;  // Init for old documents
>     rStm.ReadByteString(aTempString);
> 
>     rStm >> nFrameMarker;
>@@ -423,7 +422,7 @@ void SvxURLField::Load( SvPersistStream & rStm )
> 
>     eFormat= (SvxURLFormat)nFormat;
> 
>-    // Relatives Speichern => Beim laden absolut machen.
>+    // Relative save => make it absolute for loading
>     DBG_ERROR("No BaseURL!");
>     // TODO/MBA: no BaseURL
>     aURL = INetURLObject::GetAbsURL( String(), aTmpURL );
>@@ -433,7 +432,7 @@ void SvxURLField::Load( SvPersistStream & rStm )
> 
> void SvxURLField::Save( SvPersistStream & rStm )
> {
>-    // Relatives Speichern der URL
>+    // Relative save of the URL
>     DBG_ERROR("No BaseURL!");
>     // TODO/MBA: no BaseURL
>     String aTmpURL = INetURLObject::GetRelURL( String(), aURL );
>@@ -467,14 +466,14 @@ MetaAction* SvxURLField::createBeginComment() const
> }
> 
> // =================================================================
>-// Die Felder, die aus Calc ausgebaut wurden:
>+// The fields that were removed from Calc:
> // =================================================================
> 
> SV_IMPL_PERSIST1( SvxPageField, SvxFieldData );
> 
> SvxFieldData* SvxPageField::Clone() const
> {
>-    return new SvxPageField;		// leer
>+    return new SvxPageField;		// empty
> }
> 
> int SvxPageField::operator==( const SvxFieldData& rCmp ) const
>@@ -500,7 +499,7 @@ SV_IMPL_PERSIST1( SvxPagesField, SvxFieldData );
> 
> SvxFieldData* SvxPagesField::Clone() const
> {
>-    return new SvxPagesField;	// leer
>+    return new SvxPagesField;	// empty
> }
> 
> int SvxPagesField::operator==( const SvxFieldData& rCmp ) const
>@@ -520,7 +519,7 @@ SV_IMPL_PERSIST1( SvxTimeField, SvxFieldData );
> 
> SvxFieldData* SvxTimeField::Clone() const
> {
>-    return new SvxTimeField;	// leer
>+    return new SvxTimeField;	// empty
> }
> 
> int SvxTimeField::operator==( const SvxFieldData& rCmp ) const
>@@ -545,7 +544,7 @@ SV_IMPL_PERSIST1( SvxFileField, SvxFieldData );
> 
> SvxFieldData* SvxFileField::Clone() const
> {
>-    return new SvxFileField;	// leer
>+    return new SvxFileField;	// empty
> }
> 
> int SvxFileField::operator==( const SvxFieldData& rCmp ) const
>@@ -565,7 +564,7 @@ SV_IMPL_PERSIST1( SvxTableField, SvxFieldData );
> 
> SvxFieldData* SvxTableField::Clone() const
> {
>-    return new SvxTableField;	// leer
>+    return new SvxTableField;	// empty
> }
> 
> int SvxTableField::operator==( const SvxFieldData& rCmp ) const
>@@ -1013,7 +1012,7 @@ SV_IMPL_PERSIST1( SvxHeaderField, SvxFieldData );
> 
> SvxFieldData* SvxHeaderField::Clone() const
> {
>-    return new SvxHeaderField;		// leer
>+    return new SvxHeaderField;		// empty
> }
> 
> int SvxHeaderField::operator==( const SvxFieldData& rCmp ) const
>@@ -1035,7 +1034,7 @@ SV_IMPL_PERSIST1( SvxFooterField, SvxFieldData );
> 
> SvxFieldData* SvxFooterField::Clone() const
> {
>-    return new SvxFooterField;		// leer
>+    return new SvxFooterField;		// empty
> }
> 
> int SvxFooterField::operator==( const SvxFieldData& rCmp ) const
>@@ -1057,7 +1056,7 @@ SV_IMPL_PERSIST1( SvxDateTimeField, SvxFieldData );
> 
> SvxFieldData* SvxDateTimeField::Clone() const
> {
>-    return new SvxDateTimeField;		// leer
>+    return new SvxDateTimeField;		// empty
> }
> 
> int SvxDateTimeField::operator==( const SvxFieldData& rCmp ) const
>diff --git a/editeng/source/items/frmitems.cxx b/editeng/source/items/frmitems.cxx
>index 8faf443..c11df0e 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/items/frmitems.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/items/frmitems.cxx
>@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ using namespace ::rtl;
> using namespace ::com::sun::star;
> 
> 
>-// Konvertierung fuer UNO
>+// Conversion for UNO
> #define TWIP_TO_MM100(TWIP) 	((TWIP) >= 0 ? (((TWIP)*127L+36L)/72L) : (((TWIP)*127L-36L)/72L))
> #define MM100_TO_TWIP(MM100)	((MM100) >= 0 ? (((MM100)*72L+63L)/127L) : (((MM100)*72L-63L)/127L))
> #define TWIP_TO_MM100_UNSIGNED(TWIP)     ((((TWIP)*127L+36L)/72L))
>@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ bool SvxLRSpaceItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>     {
>-        //	jetzt alles signed
>+        // now all signed
>         case MID_L_MARGIN:
>             rVal <<= (sal_Int32)(bConvert ? TWIP_TO_MM100(nLeftMargin) : nLeftMargin);
>             break;
>@@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ bool SvxLRSpaceItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
>-// nLeftMargin und nTxtLeft anpassen.
>+// Adapt nLeftMargin and nTxtLeft.
> 
> void SvxLRSpaceItem::AdjustLeft()
> {
>@@ -650,15 +650,14 @@ SfxItemPresentation SvxLRSpaceItem::GetPresentation
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
>-// MT: BulletFI: Vor 501 wurde im Outliner das Bullet nicht auf der Position des
>-// FI positioniert, deshalb muss in aelteren Dokumenten der FI auf 0 stehen.
>-
>+// BulletFI: Before 501 in the Outliner the bullet was not on the position of 
>+// the FI, so in older documents one must set FI to 0.
> #define BULLETLR_MARKER	0x599401FE
> 
> SvStream& SvxLRSpaceItem::Store( SvStream& rStrm , sal_uInt16 nItemVersion ) const
> {
>     short nSaveFI = nFirstLineOfst;
>-    ((SvxLRSpaceItem*)this)->SetTxtFirstLineOfst( 0 );	// nLeftMargin wird mitmanipuliert, siehe Create()
>+    ((SvxLRSpaceItem*)this)->SetTxtFirstLineOfst( 0 );	// nLeftMargin is manipulated together with this, see Create()
> 
>     sal_uInt16 nMargin = 0;
>     if( nLeftMargin > 0 )
>@@ -686,8 +685,8 @@ SvStream& SvxLRSpaceItem::Store( SvStream& rStrm , sal_uInt16 nItemVersion ) con
>             nAutoFirst |= 0x80;
>         rStrm << nAutoFirst;
> 
>-        // Ab 6.0 keine Magicnumber schreiben...
>-        DBG_ASSERT( rStrm.GetVersion() <= SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50, "MT: Fileformat SvxLRSpaceItem aendern!" );
>+        // From 6.0 onwards, do not write Magic numbers...
>+        DBG_ASSERT( rStrm.GetVersion() <= SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50, "Change File format SvxLRSpaceItem!" );
>         rStrm << (sal_uInt32) BULLETLR_MARKER;
>         rStrm << nSaveFI;
> 
>@@ -723,7 +722,7 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxLRSpaceItem::Create( SvStream& rStrm, sal_uInt16 nVersion ) cons
>         {
>             rStrm >> firstline;
>             if ( firstline < 0 )
>-                left = left + static_cast<sal_uInt16>(firstline);	// s.u.: txtleft = ...
>+                left = left + static_cast<sal_uInt16>(firstline);	// see below: txtleft = ...
>         }
>         else
>             rStrm.Seek( nPos );
>@@ -831,7 +830,7 @@ bool SvxULSpaceItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>     {
>-        //	jetzt alles signed
>+        // now all signed
>         case 0:
>         {
>             ::com::sun::star::frame::status::UpperLowerMarginScale aUpperLowerMarginScale;
>@@ -1168,7 +1167,6 @@ int SvxProtectItem::operator==( const SfxPoolItem& rAttr ) const
> 
> bool SvxProtectItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//  sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     sal_Bool bValue;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>@@ -1177,7 +1175,7 @@ bool SvxProtectItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
>         case MID_PROTECT_SIZE    :  bValue = bSize; break;
>         case MID_PROTECT_POSITION:  bValue = bPos; break;
>         default:
>-            DBG_ERROR("falsche MemberId");
>+            DBG_ERROR("Wrong MemberId");
>             return false;
>     }
> 
>@@ -1187,7 +1185,6 @@ bool SvxProtectItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> 
> bool	SvxProtectItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//  sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     sal_Bool bVal( Any2Bool(rVal) );
>     switch(nMemberId)
>@@ -1196,7 +1193,7 @@ bool	SvxProtectItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
>         case MID_PROTECT_SIZE    :  bSize  = bVal;	break;
>         case MID_PROTECT_POSITION:  bPos   = bVal;	break;
>         default:
>-            DBG_ERROR("falsche MemberId");
>+            DBG_ERROR("Wrong MemberId");
>             return false;
>     }
>     return true;
>@@ -1640,7 +1637,7 @@ XubString SvxBorderLine::GetValueString( SfxMapUnit eSrcUnit,
>     }
>     else if ( DEF_LINE_WIDTH_1 == nDistance )
>     {
>-        // doppelte Linie, kleiner Abstand
>+        // double line, small gap
>         if ( DEF_LINE_WIDTH_0 == nOutWidth && DEF_LINE_WIDTH_0 == nInWidth )
>             nResId = RID_DOUBLE_LINE0;
>         else if ( DEF_LINE_WIDTH_1 == nOutWidth &&
>@@ -1652,7 +1649,7 @@ XubString SvxBorderLine::GetValueString( SfxMapUnit eSrcUnit,
>     }
>     else if ( DEF_LINE_WIDTH_2 == nDistance )
>     {
>-        // doppelte Linie, gro\ser Abstand
>+        // double line, large gap
>         if ( DEF_LINE_WIDTH_0 == nOutWidth && DEF_LINE_WIDTH_0 == nInWidth )
>             nResId = RID_DOUBLE_LINE1;
>         else if ( DEF_LINE_WIDTH_2 == nOutWidth &&
>@@ -2681,39 +2678,6 @@ SfxItemPresentation SvxBoxInfoItem::GetPresentation
>     XubString&          rText, const IntlWrapper *
> )   const
> {
>-#ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>-/*!!!
>-    ResMgr* pMgr = DIALOG_MGR();
>-    if ( pHori )
>-    {
>-        rText += pHori->GetValueString();
>-        rText += cpDelim;
>-    }
>-    if ( pVert )
>-    {
>-        rText += pVert->GetValueString();
>-        rText += cpDelim;
>-    }
>-    if ( bTable )
>-        rText += String( ResId( RID_SVXITEMS_BOXINF_TABLE_TRUE, pMgr ) );
>-    else
>-        rText += String( ResId( RID_SVXITEMS_BOXINF_TABLE_FALSE, pMgr ) );
>-    rText += cpDelim;
>-    if ( bDist )
>-        rText += String( ResId( RID_SVXITEMS_BOXINF_DIST_TRUE, pMgr ) );
>-    else
>-        rText += String( ResId( RID_SVXITEMS_BOXINF_DIST_FALSE, pMgr ) );
>-    rText += cpDelim;
>-    if ( bMinDist )
>-        rText += String( ResId( RID_SVXITEMS_BOXINF_MDIST_TRUE, pMgr ) );
>-    else
>-        rText += String( ResId( RID_SVXITEMS_BOXINF_MDIST_FALSE, pMgr ) );
>-    rText += cpDelim;
>-    rText += nDefDist;
>-    return SFX_ITEM_PRESENTATION_NAMELESS;
>-*/
>-    rText.Erase();
>-#endif // !SVX_LIGHT
>     return SFX_ITEM_PRESENTATION_NONE;
> }
> 
>@@ -2808,7 +2772,7 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxBoxInfoItem::Create( SvStream& rStrm, sal_uInt16 ) const
> 
> void SvxBoxInfoItem::ResetFlags()
> {
>-    nValidFlags = 0x7F;	// alles g"ultig au/ser Disable
>+    nValidFlags = 0x7F;	// all valid except Disable
> }
> 
> bool SvxBoxInfoItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId  ) const
>@@ -2879,8 +2843,6 @@ bool SvxBoxInfoItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId  ) const
> bool SvxBoxInfoItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>     sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>-//  sal_uInt16 nLine = BOX_LINE_TOP;
>-//  sal_Bool bDistMember = sal_False;
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     sal_Bool bRet;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>@@ -3136,7 +3098,7 @@ sal_uInt16 SvxFmtBreakItem::GetVersion( sal_uInt16 nFFVer ) const
>     DBG_ASSERT( SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_31==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_40==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50==nFFVer,
>-            "SvxFmtBreakItem: Gibt es ein neues Fileformat?" );
>+            "SvxFmtBreakItem: Is there a new file format? ");
>     return SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_31==nFFVer ||
>            SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_40==nFFVer ? 0 : FMTBREAK_NOAUTO;
> }
>@@ -3706,7 +3668,6 @@ inline sal_Int8 lcl_TransparencyToPercent(sal_Int32 nTrans)
> 
> bool SvxBrushItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch( nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -3768,7 +3729,6 @@ bool SvxBrushItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> 
> bool SvxBrushItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch( nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -4042,9 +4002,9 @@ SvStream& SvxBrushItem::Store( SvStream& rStream , sal_uInt16 /*nItemVersion*/ )
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>-// const wegcasten, da const als logisches const zu verstehen ist
>-// wenn GetGraphic() gerufen wird, soll sich das Item darum kuemmern,
>-// eine gelinkte Grafik zu holen.
>+// cast away const, since const is to be understood as a logical const 
>+// if GetGraphic() is called, the item should take care of getting a linked 
>+// graphic.
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
> void SvxBrushItem::PurgeGraphic() const
>@@ -4065,26 +4025,11 @@ void SvxBrushItem::PurgeMedium() const
> const GraphicObject* SvxBrushItem::GetGraphicObject() const
> {
>     if ( bLoadAgain && pStrLink && !pImpl->pGraphicObject )
>-    // wenn Grafik schon geladen, als Cache benutzen
>+    // when graphics already loaded, use as a cache
>     {
>-        //JP 29.6.2001: only with "valid" names - empty names now allowed
>+        // only with "valid" names - empty names now allowed
>         if( pStrLink->Len() )
>         {
>-            // currently we don't have asynchronous processing
>-/*			if( pImpl->aDoneLink.IsSet() )
>-            {
>-                // Auf besonderen Wunsch des Writers wird der synchrone und der
>-                // asynchrone Fall was die Benachrichtigung angeht unterschiedlich
>-                // behandelt. Der Callback erfolgt nur bei asynchronem Eintreffen
>-                // der Daten
>-
>-                Link aTmp = pImpl->aDoneLink;
>-                pImpl->aDoneLink = Link();
>-                pImpl->xMedium->DownLoad(
>-                    STATIC_LINK( this, SvxBrushItem, DoneHdl_Impl ) );
>-                pImpl->aDoneLink = aTmp;
>-            } */
>-
>             pImpl->pStream = utl::UcbStreamHelper::CreateStream( *pStrLink, STREAM_STD_READ );
>             if( pImpl->pStream && !pImpl->pStream->GetError() )
>             {
>@@ -4110,9 +4055,6 @@ const GraphicObject* SvxBrushItem::GetGraphicObject() const
>             {
>                 const_cast < SvxBrushItem*> (this)->bLoadAgain = sal_False;
>             }
>-
>-            // currently we don't have asynchronous processing
>-//			pThis->pImpl->aDoneLink.Call( pThis );
>         }
>     }
> 
>@@ -4143,7 +4085,7 @@ void SvxBrushItem::SetGraphicPos( SvxGraphicPosition eNew )
>     {
>         if ( !pImpl->pGraphicObject && !pStrLink )
>         {
>-            pImpl->pGraphicObject = new GraphicObject; // dummy anlegen
>+            pImpl->pGraphicObject = new GraphicObject; // Creating a dummy
>         }
>     }
> }
>@@ -4162,7 +4104,7 @@ void SvxBrushItem::SetGraphic( const Graphic& rNew )
>         ApplyGraphicTransparency_Impl();
> 
>         if ( GPOS_NONE == eGraphicPos )
>-            eGraphicPos = GPOS_MM; // None waere Brush, also Default: Mitte
>+            eGraphicPos = GPOS_MM; // None would be brush, then Default: middle
>     }
>     else
>     {
>@@ -4184,7 +4126,7 @@ void SvxBrushItem::SetGraphicObject( const GraphicObject& rNewObj )
>         ApplyGraphicTransparency_Impl();
> 
>         if ( GPOS_NONE == eGraphicPos )
>-            eGraphicPos = GPOS_MM; // None waere Brush, also Default: Mitte
>+            eGraphicPos = GPOS_MM; // None would be brush, then Default: middle
>     }
>     else
>     {
>@@ -4228,7 +4170,7 @@ void SvxBrushItem::SetGraphicFilter( const String& rNew )
> SvxGraphicPosition SvxBrushItem::WallpaperStyle2GraphicPos( WallpaperStyle eStyle )
> {
>     SvxGraphicPosition eResult;
>-    // der Switch ist nicht der schnellste, dafuer aber am sichersten
>+    // The switch is not the fastest, but the safest
>     switch( eStyle )
>     {
>         case WALLPAPER_NULL: eResult = GPOS_NONE; break;
>@@ -4303,7 +4245,6 @@ CntWallpaperItem* SvxBrushItem::CreateCntWallpaperItem() const
>     {
>         DBG_ERRORFILE( "Don't know what to do with a graphic" );
>     }
>-//		pItem->SetGraphic( *pImpl->pGraphic, bLink );
> 
>     return pItem;
> }
>diff --git a/editeng/source/items/itemtype.cxx b/editeng/source/items/itemtype.cxx
>index 6a8ee03..1c290d3 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/items/itemtype.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/items/itemtype.cxx
>@@ -124,7 +124,6 @@ XubString GetMetricText( long nVal, SfxMapUnit eSrcUnit, SfxMapUnit eDestUnit, c
>         nRet %= nDiff;
>         if( 4 == nDigits )
>         {
>-//            DBG_ASSERT(pIntl, "no IntlWrapper* set")
>             if(pIntl)
>                 sRet += pIntl->getLocaleData()->getNumDecimalSep();
>             else
>diff --git a/editeng/source/items/justifyitem.cxx b/editeng/source/items/justifyitem.cxx
>index e6dc9db..559ce8c 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/items/justifyitem.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/items/justifyitem.cxx
>@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxHorJustifyItem::Create( SvStream& rStream, USHORT ) const
> 
> USHORT SvxHorJustifyItem::GetValueCount() const
> {
>-    return SVX_HOR_JUSTIFY_REPEAT + 1;	// letzter Enum-Wert + 1
>+    return SVX_HOR_JUSTIFY_REPEAT + 1;	// Last Enum value + 1
> }
> 
> // class SvxVerJustifyItem -----------------------------------------------
>@@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxVerJustifyItem::Create( SvStream& rStream, USHORT ) const
> 
> USHORT SvxVerJustifyItem::GetValueCount() const
> {
>-    return SVX_VER_JUSTIFY_BOTTOM + 1;	// letzter Enum-Wert + 1
>+    return SVX_VER_JUSTIFY_BOTTOM + 1;	// Last Enum value + 1
> }
> 
> 
>@@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxJustifyMethodItem::Create( SvStream& rStream, USHORT ) const
> 
> USHORT SvxJustifyMethodItem::GetValueCount() const
> {
>-    return SVX_JUSTIFY_METHOD_DISTRIBUTE + 1;	// letzter Enum-Wert + 1
>+    return SVX_JUSTIFY_METHOD_DISTRIBUTE + 1;	// Last Enum value + 1
> }
> 
> SvxJustifyMethodItem& SvxJustifyMethodItem::operator=(const SvxJustifyMethodItem& r)
>diff --git a/editeng/source/items/numitem.cxx b/editeng/source/items/numitem.cxx
>index 9489f6a..529b5a4 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/items/numitem.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/items/numitem.cxx
>@@ -54,8 +54,8 @@
> 
> #define MM100_TO_TWIP(MM100)	((MM100*72L+63L)/127L)
> 
>-#define DEF_WRITER_LSPACE 	500		//Standardeinrueckung
>-#define DEF_DRAW_LSPACE 	800		//Standardeinrueckung
>+#define DEF_WRITER_LSPACE 	500		//Standard Indentation
>+#define DEF_DRAW_LSPACE 	800		//Standard Indentation
> 
> #define NUMITEM_VERSION_01        0x01
> #define NUMITEM_VERSION_02        0x02
>@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ String 	SvxNumberType::GetNumStr( ULONG nNo, const Locale& rLocale ) const
>             break;
>             default:
>                 {
>-                    //#95525# '0' allowed for ARABIC numberings
>+                    // '0' allowed for ARABIC numberings
>                     if(NumberingType::ARABIC == nNumType && 0 == nNo )
>                         aTmpStr = '0';
>                     else
>@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ SvStream&   SvxNumberFormat::Store(SvStream &rStream, FontToSubsFontConverter pC
>     {
>         rStream << (USHORT)1;
> 
>-        // #75113# in SD or SI force bullet itself to be stored,
>+        // in SD or SI force bullet itself to be stored,
>         // for that purpose throw away link when link and graphic
>         // are present, so Brush save is forced
>         if(pGraphicBrush->GetGraphicLink() && pGraphicBrush->GetGraphic())
>@@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ long SvxNumberFormat::GetIndentAt() const
> 
> IMPL_STATIC_LINK( SvxNumberFormat, GraphicArrived, void *, EMPTYARG )
> {
>-    // ggfs. die GrfSize setzen:
>+    // if necessary, set the GrfSize:
>     if( !pThis->aGraphicSize.Width() || !pThis->aGraphicSize.Height() )
>     {
>         const Graphic* pGrf = pThis->pGraphicBrush->GetGraphic();
>@@ -614,12 +614,12 @@ Size SvxNumberFormat::GetGraphicSizeMM100(const Graphic* pGraphic)
> 
> String SvxNumberFormat::CreateRomanString( ULONG nNo, BOOL bUpper )
> {
>-    nNo %= 4000;			// mehr kann nicht dargestellt werden
>+    nNo %= 4000;			// more can not be displayed
> //		i, ii, iii, iv, v, vi, vii, vii, viii, ix
> //							(Dummy),1000,500,100,50,10,5,1
>     const char *cRomanArr = bUpper
>-                        ? "MDCLXVI--"	// +2 Dummy-Eintraege !!
>-                        : "mdclxvi--";	// +2 Dummy-Eintraege !!
>+                        ? "MDCLXVI--"	// +2 Dummy entries!
>+                        : "mdclxvi--";	// +2 Dummy entries!
> 
>     String sRet;
>     USHORT nMask = 1000;
>@@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ String SvxNumberFormat::CreateRomanString( ULONG nNo, BOOL bUpper )
>                     break;
>         }
> 
>-        nMask /= 10;			// zur naechsten Dekade
>+        nMask /= 10;			// for the next decade
>         cRomanArr += 2;
>     }
>     return sRet;
>@@ -660,7 +660,7 @@ String SvxNumberFormat::CreateRomanString( ULONG nNo, BOOL bUpper )
> #ifdef OLD_NUMBER_FORMATTING
> void SvxNumberFormat::GetCharStr( ULONG nNo, String& rStr ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nNo, "0 ist eine ungueltige Nummer !!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nNo, "0 is an invalid number !!");
> 
>     const ULONG coDiff = 'Z' - 'A' +1;
>     char cAdd = (SVX_NUM_CHARS_UPPER_LETTER == eNumType ? 'A' : 'a') - 1;
>@@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ void SvxNumberFormat::GetCharStr( ULONG nNo, String& rStr ) const
> 
> void SvxNumberFormat::GetCharStrN( ULONG nNo, String& rStr ) const
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nNo, "0 ist eine ungueltige Nummer !!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nNo, "0 is an invalid number !!");
> 
>     const ULONG coDiff = 'Z' - 'A' +1;
>     char cChar = (char)(--nNo % coDiff);
>@@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ SvxNumRule::SvxNumRule( ULONG nFeatures,
>         if(i < nLevels)
>         {
>             aFmts[i] = new SvxNumberFormat(SVX_NUM_CHARS_UPPER_LETTER);
>-            //daran wird zwischen writer und draw unterschieden
>+            // It is a distinction between writer and draw
>             if(nFeatures & NUM_CONTINUOUS)
>             {
>                 if ( eDefaultNumberFormatPositionAndSpaceMode ==
>@@ -900,7 +900,7 @@ int   SvxNumRule::operator==( const SvxNumRule& rCopy) const
> 
> const SvxNumberFormat* 	SvxNumRule::Get(USHORT nLevel)const
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT(nLevel < SVX_MAX_NUM, "falsches Level" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT(nLevel < SVX_MAX_NUM, "Wrong Level" );
>     if( nLevel < SVX_MAX_NUM )
>         return aFmtsSet[nLevel] ? aFmts[nLevel] : 0;
>     else
>@@ -915,7 +915,7 @@ const SvxNumberFormat& 	SvxNumRule::GetLevel(USHORT nLevel)const
>          pStdOutlineNumFmt = new SvxNumberFormat(SVX_NUM_NUMBER_NONE);
>     }
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT(nLevel < SVX_MAX_NUM, "falsches Level" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT(nLevel < SVX_MAX_NUM, "Wrong Level" );
> 
>     return ( ( nLevel < SVX_MAX_NUM ) && aFmts[nLevel] ) ?
>             *aFmts[nLevel] :  eNumberingType == SVX_RULETYPE_NUMBERING ?
>@@ -925,7 +925,7 @@ const SvxNumberFormat& 	SvxNumRule::GetLevel(USHORT nLevel)const
> 
> void SvxNumRule::SetLevel( USHORT i, const SvxNumberFormat& rNumFmt, BOOL bIsValid )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT(i < SVX_MAX_NUM, "falsches Level" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT(i < SVX_MAX_NUM, "Wrong Level" );
> 
>     if( (i < SVX_MAX_NUM) && (!aFmtsSet[i] || !(rNumFmt == *Get( i ))) )
>     {
>@@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ void SvxNumRule::SetLevel( USHORT i, const SvxNumberFormat& rNumFmt, BOOL bIsVal
> 
> void SvxNumRule::SetLevel(USHORT nLevel, const SvxNumberFormat* pFmt)
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT(nLevel < SVX_MAX_NUM, "falsches Level" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT(nLevel < SVX_MAX_NUM, "Wrong Level" );
> 
>     if( nLevel < SVX_MAX_NUM )
>     {
>@@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ String 	SvxNumRule::MakeNumString( const SvxNodeNum& rNum, BOOL bInclStrings ) c
>             BYTE i = rNum.GetLevel();
> 
>             if( !IsContinuousNumbering() &&
>-                1 < rMyNFmt.GetIncludeUpperLevels() )		// nur der eigene Level ?
>+                1 < rMyNFmt.GetIncludeUpperLevels() )		// only on own level?
>             {
>                 BYTE n = rMyNFmt.GetIncludeUpperLevels();
>                 if( 1 < n )
>@@ -980,9 +980,6 @@ String 	SvxNumRule::MakeNumString( const SvxNodeNum& rNum, BOOL bInclStrings ) c
>                 const SvxNumberFormat& rNFmt = GetLevel( i );
>                 if( SVX_NUM_NUMBER_NONE == rNFmt.GetNumberingType() )
>                 {
>-    // Soll aus 1.1.1 --> 2. NoNum --> 1..1 oder 1.1 ??
>-    //                 if( i != rNum.nMyLevel )
>-    //                    aStr += aDotStr;
>                     continue;
>                 }
> 
>@@ -995,7 +992,7 @@ String 	SvxNumRule::MakeNumString( const SvxNodeNum& rNum, BOOL bInclStrings ) c
>                         bDot = sal_False;
>                 }
>                 else
>-                    aStr += sal_Unicode('0');		// alle 0-Level sind eine 0
>+                    aStr += sal_Unicode('0');		// all 0-levels are a 0
>                 if( i != rNum.GetLevel() && bDot)
>                     aStr += sal_Unicode('.');
>             }
>diff --git a/editeng/source/items/paperinf.cxx b/editeng/source/items/paperinf.cxx
>index 280bd76..e899af4 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/items/paperinf.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/items/paperinf.cxx
>@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
> #include <editeng/eerdll.hxx>
> 
> /*--------------------------------------------------------------------
>-    Beschreibung:	Ist der Printer gueltig
>+    Description:	Is the printer valid
>  --------------------------------------------------------------------*/
> 
> inline BOOL IsValidPrinter( const Printer* pPtr )
>@@ -58,10 +58,9 @@ Size SvxPaperInfo::GetPaperSize( Paper ePaper, MapUnit eUnit )
> }
> 
> /*------------------------------------------------------------------------
>- Beschreibung:	Papiergroesse der Druckers liefern, aligned auf
>-                die eigenen Groessen.
>-                Falls kein Printer im System eingestellt ist,
>-                wird DIN A4 Portrait als Defaultpapiergroesse geliefert.
>+ Description:	Return the paper size of the printer, aligned to our 
>+                own sizes. If no Printer is set in the system, A4 portrait 
>+                will be delivered as the default paper size.
> ------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
> 
> //Is this method may be confused about the units it returns ?
>@@ -76,8 +75,8 @@ Size SvxPaperInfo::GetPaperSize( const Printer* pPrinter )
> 
>     if ( ePaper == PAPER_USER )
>     {
>-        // Orientation nicht beruecksichtigen, da durch SV bereits
>-        // die richtigen Masze eingestellt worden sind.
>+        // Orientation not take into account, as the right size has 
>+        // been already set by SV 
>         Size aPaperSize = pPrinter->GetPaperSize();
>         const Size aInvalidSize;
> 
>@@ -94,7 +93,7 @@ Size SvxPaperInfo::GetPaperSize( const Printer* pPrinter )
> 
>     const Orientation eOrient = pPrinter->GetOrientation();
>     Size aSize( GetPaperSize( ePaper ) );
>-        // bei Landscape die Seiten tauschen, ist bei SV schon geschehen
>+        // for Landscape exchange the pages, has already been done by SV
>     if ( eOrient == ORIENTATION_LANDSCAPE )
>         Swap( aSize );
>     return aSize;
>@@ -130,8 +129,7 @@ Size SvxPaperInfo::GetDefaultPaperSize( MapUnit eUnit )
> }
> 
> /*------------------------------------------------------------------------
>- Beschreibung:	String Repr"asentation f"ur die SV-Defines f"ur
>-                Papiergroessen.
>+ Description:	String representation for the SV-defines of paper size
> ------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
> 
> String SvxPaperInfo::GetName( Paper ePaper )
>diff --git a/editeng/source/items/paraitem.cxx b/editeng/source/items/paraitem.cxx
>index 0d33ed7..009c49f 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/items/paraitem.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/items/paraitem.cxx
>@@ -124,15 +124,14 @@ int SvxLineSpacingItem::operator==( const SfxPoolItem& rAttr ) const
> 
>     const SvxLineSpacingItem& rLineSpace = (const SvxLineSpacingItem&)rAttr;
>     return (
>-        // Gleiche Linespacing Rule?
>+        // Same Linespacing Rule?
>         (eLineSpace == rLineSpace.eLineSpace)
>-        // Bei maximalem und minimalem Linespacing muss das Mass
>-        // uebereinstimmen.
>+        // For maximum and minimum Linespacing be the size must coincide.
>         && (eLineSpace == SVX_LINE_SPACE_AUTO ||
>             nLineHeight == rLineSpace.nLineHeight)
>-        // Gleiche Interlinespacing Rule?
>+        // Same Linespacing Rule?
>         && ( eInterLineSpace == rLineSpace.eInterLineSpace )
>-        // Entweder proportional oder draufaddieren eingestellt.
>+        // Either set proportional or additive.
>         && (( eInterLineSpace == SVX_INTER_LINE_SPACE_OFF)
>             || (eInterLineSpace == SVX_INTER_LINE_SPACE_PROP
>                 && nPropLineSpace == rLineSpace.nPropLineSpace)
>@@ -141,11 +140,10 @@ int SvxLineSpacingItem::operator==( const SfxPoolItem& rAttr ) const
>                 1 : 0;
> }
> 
>-/* wer weiss noch, wieso das LineSpacingItem so
>-   kompliziert ist? Fuer UNO koennen wir das nicht
>-   gebrauchen. Da gibt es nur zwei Werte:
>-      - ein sal_uInt16 fuer den Modus
>-      - ein sal_uInt32 fuer alle Werte (Abstand, Hoehe, rel. Angaben)
>+/* Who does still know why the LineSpacingItem is so complicated?
>+   We can not use it for UNO since there are only two values:
>+      - ein sal_uInt16 for the mode
>+      - ein sal_uInt32 for all values (distance, height, rel. detail)
> */
> bool SvxLineSpacingItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>@@ -323,14 +321,14 @@ sal_uInt16 SvxLineSpacingItem::GetValueCount() const
> 
> XubString SvxLineSpacingItem::GetValueTextByPos( sal_uInt16 nPos ) const
> {
>-    //! Strings demnaechst aus Resource laden
>+    //! load strings from resource
>     XubString aText;
>     switch ( nPos )
>     {
>-        case SVX_LINESPACE_USER					: aText.AppendAscii( "Benutzer" );	break;
>-        case SVX_LINESPACE_ONE_LINE				: aText.AppendAscii( "Einzeilig" );	break;
>-        case SVX_LINESPACE_ONE_POINT_FIVE_LINES	: aText.AppendAscii( "1,5zeilig" );	break;
>-        case SVX_LINESPACE_TWO_LINES			: aText.AppendAscii( "Zweizeilig" );	break;
>+        case SVX_LINESPACE_USER					: aText.AppendAscii( "User" );	break;
>+        case SVX_LINESPACE_ONE_LINE				: aText.AppendAscii( "One line" );	break;
>+        case SVX_LINESPACE_ONE_POINT_FIVE_LINES	: aText.AppendAscii( "1.5 line" );	break;
>+        case SVX_LINESPACE_TWO_LINES			: aText.AppendAscii( "Two lines" );	break;
>     }
>     return aText;
> }
>@@ -386,7 +384,6 @@ int SvxAdjustItem::operator==( const SfxPoolItem& rAttr ) const
> 
> bool SvxAdjustItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>     {
>@@ -405,7 +402,6 @@ bool SvxAdjustItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> 
> bool SvxAdjustItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId  )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>     {
>@@ -702,7 +698,6 @@ SvxHyphenZoneItem::SvxHyphenZoneItem( const sal_Bool bHyph, const sal_uInt16 nId
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> bool	SvxHyphenZoneItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -724,7 +719,6 @@ bool	SvxHyphenZoneItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> bool SvxHyphenZoneItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     sal_Int16 nNewVal = 0;
> 
>@@ -982,27 +976,6 @@ SvxTabStopItem& SvxTabStopItem::operator=( const SvxTabStopItem& rTSI )
>     return *this;
> }
> 
>-
>-/*
>- enum ::com::sun::star::style::TabAlign
>-{
>-    TABALIGN_LEFT,
>-    TABALIGN_CENTER,
>-    TABALIGN_RIGHT,
>-    TABALIGN_DECIMAL
>-};
>-
>-struct	 ::com::sun::star::style::TabStop
>-{
>-    long			Position;
>- ::com::sun::star::style::TabAlign 	 ::com::sun::star::drawing::Alignment;
>-    unsigned short 	DecimalChar;
>-    unsigned short 	FillChar;
>-};
>-typedef sequence ::com::sun::star::style::TabStop> TabSTopSequence;
>-
>- */
>-
> bool SvxTabStopItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>     sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>@@ -1223,11 +1196,9 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxTabStopItem::Create( SvStream& rStrm, sal_uInt16 ) const
> 
> SvStream& SvxTabStopItem::Store( SvStream& rStrm, sal_uInt16 /*nItemVersion*/ ) const
> {
>-    //MA 05. Sep. 96: Default-Tabs werden nur noch fuer das default-Attr
>-    //expandiert. Fuer vollstaendige Rueckwaertskompatibilitaet (<=304)
>-    //muessten alle Tabs expandiert werden, dass blaeht aber das File u.U.
>-    //enorm auf.
>-    //Alles nur SWG!
>+    // Default-Tabs are only expanded for the default Attribute. For complete 
>+    // backward compabillity (<=304) all tabs have to be expanded, this makes 
>+    // the files grow large in size. All only SWG!
> 
>     const SfxItemPool *pPool = SfxItemPool::GetStoringPool();
>     const bool bStoreDefTabs = pPool
>@@ -1370,7 +1341,6 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxPageModelItem::Clone( SfxItemPool* ) const
> 
> bool SvxPageModelItem::QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//  sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
> 
>     switch ( nMemberId )
>@@ -1385,7 +1355,6 @@ bool SvxPageModelItem::QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberI
> 
> bool SvxPageModelItem::PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//  sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     sal_Bool bRet;
>     ::rtl::OUString aStr;
>@@ -1456,7 +1425,7 @@ USHORT	SvxScriptSpaceItem::GetVersion( USHORT nFFVer ) const
>     DBG_ASSERT( SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_31==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_40==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50==nFFVer,
>-            "SvxTwoLinesItem: Gibt es ein neues Fileformat?" );
>+            "SvxTwoLinesItem: Is there a new file format? ");
> 
>     return SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50 > nFFVer ? USHRT_MAX : 0;
> }
>@@ -1509,7 +1478,7 @@ USHORT SvxHangingPunctuationItem::GetVersion( USHORT nFFVer ) const
>     DBG_ASSERT( SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_31==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_40==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50==nFFVer,
>-            "SvxHangingPunctuationItem: Gibt es ein neues Fileformat?" );
>+            "SvxHangingPunctuationItem: Is there a new file format? ");
> 
>     return SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50 > nFFVer ? USHRT_MAX : 0;
> }
>@@ -1562,7 +1531,7 @@ USHORT SvxForbiddenRuleItem::GetVersion( USHORT nFFVer ) const
>     DBG_ASSERT( SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_31==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_40==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50==nFFVer,
>-            "SvxForbiddenRuleItem: Gibt es ein neues Fileformat?" );
>+            "SvxForbiddenRuleItem: Is there a new file format? ");
> 
>     return SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50 > nFFVer ? USHRT_MAX : 0;
> }
>@@ -1704,7 +1673,7 @@ USHORT  SvxParaGridItem::GetVersion( USHORT nFFVer ) const
>     DBG_ASSERT( SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_31==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_40==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50==nFFVer,
>-            "SvxParaGridItem: Gibt es ein neues Fileformat?" );
>+            "SvxParaGridItem: Is there a new file format? ");
> 
>     return SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50 > nFFVer ? USHRT_MAX : 0;
> }
>diff --git a/editeng/source/items/svxfont.cxx b/editeng/source/items/svxfont.cxx
>index 027ffd2..f6f8c90 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/items/svxfont.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/items/svxfont.cxx
>@@ -43,11 +43,11 @@
> #include <editeng/svxfont.hxx>
> #include <editeng/escpitem.hxx>
> 
>-// Minimum: Prozentwert fuers kernen
>+// Minimum: Percentage of kernel
> #define MINKERNPERCENT 5
> 
> #ifndef REDUCEDSVXFONT
>-    const sal_Unicode CH_BLANK = sal_Unicode(' ');  	// ' ' Leerzeichen
>+    const sal_Unicode CH_BLANK = sal_Unicode(' ');  // ' ' Space character
>     static sal_Char const sDoubleSpace[] = "  ";
> #endif
> 
>@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ SvxFont::SvxFont( const Font &rFont )
> }
> 
> /*************************************************************************
>- *						class SvxFont: Copy-Ctor
>+ *						class SvxFont: Copy Constructor
>  *************************************************************************/
> 
> SvxFont::SvxFont( const SvxFont &rFont )
>@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ XubString SvxFont::CalcCaseMap( const XubString &rTxt ) const
> {
>     if( !IsCaseMap() || !rTxt.Len() ) return rTxt;
>     XubString aTxt( rTxt );
>-    // Ich muss mir noch die Sprache besorgen
>+    // I still have to get the language
>     const LanguageType eLng = LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW == eLang
>                             ? LANGUAGE_SYSTEM : eLang;
> 
>@@ -156,9 +156,9 @@ XubString SvxFont::CalcCaseMap( const XubString &rTxt ) const
>         }
>         case SVX_CASEMAP_TITEL:
>         {
>-            // Jeder Wortbeginn wird gross geschrieben,
>-            // der Rest des Wortes wird unbesehen uebernommen.
>-            // Bug: wenn das Attribut mitten im Wort beginnt.
>+            // Every beginning of a word is capitalized,  the rest of the word 
>+            // is taken over as is. 
>+            // Bug: if the attribute starts in the middle of the word.
>             BOOL bBlank = TRUE;
> 
>             for( USHORT i = 0; i < aTxt.Len(); ++i )
>@@ -188,16 +188,16 @@ XubString SvxFont::CalcCaseMap( const XubString &rTxt ) const
> }
> 
> /*************************************************************************
>- * Hier beginnen die Methoden, die im Writer nicht benutzt werden koennen,
>- * deshalb kann man diesen Bereich durch setzen von REDUCEDSVXFONT ausklammern.
>+* Starting form here are the methods that can not be used in Writer, 
>+* so we put this section to be excluded by REDUCEDSVXFONT.
>  *************************************************************************/
> #ifndef REDUCEDSVXFONT
> 
> /*************************************************************************
>  *						class SvxDoCapitals
>- * die virtuelle Methode Do wird von SvxFont::DoOnCapitals abwechselnd mit
>- * den "Gross-" und "Kleinbuchstaben"-Teilen aufgerufen.
>- * Die Ableitungen von SvxDoCapitals erfuellen diese Methode mit Leben.
>+ * The virtual Method Do si called by SvxFont::DoOnCapitals alternately 
>+ * the uppercase and lowercase parts. The derivate of SvxDoCapitals fills
>+ * this method with life.
>  *************************************************************************/
> 
> class SvxDoCapitals
>@@ -235,8 +235,8 @@ void SvxDoCapitals::Do( const XubString &/*_rTxt*/, const xub_StrLen /*_nIdx*/,
> 
> /*************************************************************************
>  *					SvxFont::DoOnCapitals() const
>- * zerlegt den String in Gross- und Kleinbuchstaben und ruft jeweils die
>- * Methode SvxDoCapitals::Do( ) auf.
>+ * Decomposes the String into uppercase and lowercase letters and then
>+ * calls the method SvxDoCapitals::Do( ).
>  *************************************************************************/
> 
> void SvxFont::DoOnCapitals(SvxDoCapitals &rDo, const xub_StrLen nPartLen) const
>@@ -262,11 +262,11 @@ void SvxFont::DoOnCapitals(SvxDoCapitals &rDo, const xub_StrLen nPartLen) const
> 
>     while( nPos < nTxtLen )
>     {
>-        // Erst kommen die Upper-Chars dran
>+        // first in turn are teh uppercase letters
> 
>-        // 4251: Es gibt Zeichen, die Upper _und_ Lower sind (z.B. das Blank).
>-        // Solche Zweideutigkeiten fuehren ins Chaos, deswegen werden diese
>-        // Zeichen der Menge Lower zugeordnet !
>+        // There are characters that are both upper- and lower-case L (eg blank)
>+        // Such ambiguities lead to chaos, this is why these characters are 
>+        // allocated to the lowercase characters!
> 
>         while( nPos < nTxtLen )
>         {
>@@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ void SvxFont::DoOnCapitals(SvxDoCapitals &rDo, const xub_StrLen nPartLen) const
> 
>             nOldPos = nPos;
>         }
>-        // Nun werden die Lower-Chars verarbeitet (ohne Blanks)
>+        // Now the lowercase are processed (without blanks)
>         while( nPos < nTxtLen )
>         {
>             sal_uInt32	nCharacterType = aCharClass.getCharacterType( aCharString, 0 );
>@@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ void SvxFont::DoOnCapitals(SvxDoCapitals &rDo, const xub_StrLen nPartLen) const
> 
>             nOldPos = nPos;
>         }
>-        // Nun werden die Blanks verarbeitet
>+        // Now the blanks are<processed
>         while( nPos < nTxtLen && CH_BLANK == aCharString && ++nPos < nTxtLen )
>             aCharString = rTxt.GetChar( nPos + nIdx );
> 
>@@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Size SvxFont::QuickGetTextSize( const OutputDevice *pOut, const XubString &rTxt,
>         {
>             for ( xub_StrLen i = 0; i < nLen; i++ )
>                 pDXArray[i] += ( (i+1) * long( nKern ) );
>-            // Der letzte ist um ein nKern zu gross:
>+            // The last one is a nKern too big:
>             pDXArray[nLen-1] -= nKern;
>         }
>     }
>@@ -491,7 +491,7 @@ Size SvxFont::GetTxtSize( const OutputDevice *pOut, const XubString &rTxt,
>                          const xub_StrLen nIdx, const xub_StrLen nLen )
> {
>     xub_StrLen nTmp = nLen;
>-    if ( nTmp == STRING_LEN )	// schon initialisiert?
>+    if ( nTmp == STRING_LEN )	// already initialized?
>         nTmp = rTxt.Len();
>     Font aOldFont( ChgPhysFont((OutputDevice *)pOut) );
>     Size aTxtSize;
>@@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ void SvxFont::DrawText( OutputDevice *pOut,
> {
>     if( !nLen || !rTxt.Len() )	return;
>     xub_StrLen nTmp = nLen;
>-    if ( nTmp == STRING_LEN )	// schon initialisiert?
>+    if ( nTmp == STRING_LEN )	// already initialized?
>         nTmp = rTxt.Len();
>     Point aPos( rPos );
>     if ( nEsc )
>@@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ void SvxFont::QuickDrawText( OutputDevice *pOut,
>     const Point &rPos, const XubString &rTxt,
>     const xub_StrLen nIdx, const xub_StrLen nLen, const sal_Int32* pDXArray ) const
> {
>-    // Font muss ins OutputDevice selektiert sein...
>+    // Font has to be selected in OutputDevice...
>     if ( !IsCaseMap() && !IsCapital() && !IsKern() && !IsEsc() )
>     {
>         pOut->DrawTextArray( rPos, rTxt, pDXArray, nIdx, nLen );
>@@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ void SvxFont::QuickDrawText( OutputDevice *pOut,
> 
>     if( IsCapital() )
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERT( !pDXArray, "DrawCapital nicht fuer TextArray!" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( !pDXArray, "DrawCapital not for TextArray!" );
>         DrawCapital( pOut, aPos, rTxt, nIdx, nLen );
>     }
>     else
>@@ -600,7 +600,7 @@ void SvxFont::DrawPrev( OutputDevice *pOut, Printer* pPrinter,
>         return;
>     xub_StrLen nTmp = nLen;
> 
>-    if ( nTmp == STRING_LEN )	// schon initialisiert?
>+    if ( nTmp == STRING_LEN )	// already initialized?
>         nTmp = rTxt.Len();
>     Point aPos( rPos );
> 
>@@ -674,8 +674,8 @@ SvxFont& SvxFont::operator=( const SvxFont& rFont )
> 
> /*************************************************************************
>  *					  class SvxDoGetCapitalSize
>- * wird von SvxFont::GetCapitalSize() zur Berechnung der TxtSize bei
>- * eingestellten Kapitaelchen benutzt.
>+ * Is used by SvxFont::GetCapitalSize() to calculate the text size of the
>+ * set uppercase characters.
>  *************************************************************************/
> 
> class SvxDoGetCapitalSize : public SvxDoCapitals
>@@ -725,7 +725,7 @@ void SvxDoGetCapitalSize::Do( const XubString &_rTxt, const xub_StrLen _nIdx,
> 
> /*************************************************************************
>  *					  SvxFont::GetCapitalSize()
>- * berechnet TxtSize, wenn Kapitaelchen eingestellt sind.
>+ * Calculates the text size when the uppercase is set.
>  *************************************************************************/
> 
> Size SvxFont::GetCapitalSize( const OutputDevice *pOut, const XubString &rTxt,
>@@ -747,7 +747,7 @@ Size SvxFont::GetCapitalSize( const OutputDevice *pOut, const XubString &rTxt,
> 
> /*************************************************************************
>  *					   class SvxDoDrawCapital
>- * wird von SvxFont::DrawCapital zur Ausgabe von Kapitaelchen benutzt.
>+ * Is used by SvxFont::DrawCapital to draw the uppercase letter.
>  *************************************************************************/
> 
> class SvxDoDrawCapital : public SvxDoCapitals
>@@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ void SvxDoDrawCapital::Do( const XubString &_rTxt, const xub_StrLen _nIdx,
>     BYTE nProp = 0;
>     Size aPartSize;
> 
>-    // Einstellen der gewuenschten Fonts
>+    // Set the desired font
>     FontUnderline eUnder = pFont->GetUnderline();
>     FontStrikeout eStrike = pFont->GetStrikeout();
>     pFont->SetUnderline( UNDERLINE_NONE );
>@@ -828,7 +828,7 @@ void SvxDoDrawCapital::Do( const XubString &_rTxt, const xub_StrLen _nIdx,
>     }
>     pOut->DrawStretchText(aPos,nWidth-nKern,_rTxt,_nIdx,_nLen);
> 
>-    // Font restaurieren
>+    // Restore Font
>     pFont->SetUnderline( eUnder );
>     pFont->SetStrikeout( eStrike );
>     if ( !bUpper )
>@@ -839,7 +839,7 @@ void SvxDoDrawCapital::Do( const XubString &_rTxt, const xub_StrLen _nIdx,
> }
> 
> /*************************************************************************
>- * SvxFont::DrawCapital() gibt Kapitaelchen aus.
>+ * SvxFont::DrawCapital() draws the uppercase letter.
>  *************************************************************************/
> 
> void SvxFont::DrawCapital( OutputDevice *pOut,
>diff --git a/editeng/source/items/svxitems.src b/editeng/source/items/svxitems.src
>index 3fb0711..383683b 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/items/svxitems.src
>+++ b/editeng/source/items/svxitems.src
>@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
> #include <editeng/editrids.hrc>
>  // pragma -------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
>- // Value-Strings ------------------------------------------------------------
>+ // Value strings ------------------------------------------------------------
> String RID_SVXITEMS_TRUE
> {
>     Text [ en-US ] = "True" ;
>diff --git a/editeng/source/items/textitem.cxx b/editeng/source/items/textitem.cxx
>index 1e5bb01..e891d92 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/items/textitem.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/items/textitem.cxx
>@@ -110,7 +110,6 @@
> #include <editeng/itemtype.hxx>
> #include <editeng/eerdll.hxx>
> 
>-// #90477#
> #include <tools/tenccvt.hxx>
> 
> #define STORE_UNICODE_MAGIC_MARKER  0xFE331188
>@@ -119,7 +118,7 @@ using namespace ::rtl;
> using namespace ::com::sun::star;
> using namespace ::com::sun::star::text;
> 
>-// Konvertierung fuer UNO
>+// Conversion for UNO
> #define TWIP_TO_MM100(TWIP) 	((TWIP) >= 0 ? (((TWIP)*127L+36L)/72L) : (((TWIP)*127L-36L)/72L))
> #define MM100_TO_TWIP(MM100)	((MM100) >= 0 ? (((MM100)*72L+63L)/127L) : (((MM100)*72L-63L)/127L))
> #define TWIP_TO_MM100_UNSIGNED(TWIP)     ((((TWIP)*127L+36L)/72L))
>@@ -260,7 +259,6 @@ SvxFontItem::SvxFontItem( const FontFamily eFam, const XubString& aName,
> 
> bool SvxFontItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -290,7 +288,6 @@ bool SvxFontItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> bool SvxFontItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId)
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -368,7 +365,7 @@ int SvxFontItem::operator==( const SfxPoolItem& rAttr ) const
>         if ( ePitch != rItem.ePitch || eTextEncoding != rItem.eTextEncoding )
>         {
>             bRet = sal_False;
>-            DBG_WARNING( "FontItem::operator==(): nur Pitch oder rtl_TextEncoding unterschiedlich" );
>+            DBG_WARNING( "FontItem::operator==(): only pitch or rtl_TextEncoding different ");
>         }
>     }
>     return bRet;
>@@ -389,9 +386,6 @@ SvStream& SvxFontItem::Store( SvStream& rStrm , USHORT /*nItemVersion*/ ) const
>         GetFamilyName().EqualsAscii( "StarSymbol", 0, sizeof("StarSymbol")-1 ) ||
>         GetFamilyName().EqualsAscii( "OpenSymbol", 0, sizeof("OpenSymbol")-1 );
> 
>-    // #90477# rStrm << (BYTE) GetFamily()
>-    //	  << (BYTE) GetPitch()
>-    //	  << (BYTE)(bToBats ? RTL_TEXTENCODING_SYMBOL : GetStoreCharSet( GetCharSet(), (USHORT)rStrm.GetVersion() ) );
>     rStrm << (BYTE) GetFamily() << (BYTE) GetPitch()
>           << (BYTE)(bToBats ? RTL_TEXTENCODING_SYMBOL : GetSOStoreTextEncoding(GetCharSet(), (sal_uInt16)rStrm.GetVersion()));
> 
>@@ -401,7 +395,7 @@ SvStream& SvxFontItem::Store( SvStream& rStrm , USHORT /*nItemVersion*/ ) const
>     rStrm.WriteByteString(aStoreFamilyName);
>     rStrm.WriteByteString(GetStyleName());
> 
>-    // #96441# Kach for EditEngine, only set while creating clipboard stream.
>+    // cach for EditEngine, only set while creating clipboard stream.
>     if ( bEnableStoreUnicodeNames )
>     {
>         sal_uInt32 nMagic = STORE_UNICODE_MAGIC_MARKER;
>@@ -429,10 +423,10 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxFontItem::Create(SvStream& rStrm, USHORT) const
>     // UNICODE: rStrm >> aStyle;
>     rStrm.ReadByteString(aStyle);
> 
>-    // Task 91008/90471: set the "correct" textencoding
>+    // Set the "correct" textencoding
>     eFontTextEncoding = (BYTE)GetSOLoadTextEncoding( eFontTextEncoding, (USHORT)rStrm.GetVersion() );
> 
>-    // irgendwann wandelte sich der StarBats vom ANSI- zum SYMBOL-Font
>+    // at some point, the StarBats changes from  ANSI font to SYMBOL font
>     if ( RTL_TEXTENCODING_SYMBOL != eFontTextEncoding && aName.EqualsAscii("StarBats") )
>         eFontTextEncoding = RTL_TEXTENCODING_SYMBOL;
> 
>@@ -505,7 +499,7 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxPostureItem::Clone( SfxItemPool * ) const
> 
> USHORT SvxPostureItem::GetValueCount() const
> {
>-    return ITALIC_NORMAL + 1;	// auch ITALIC_NONE geh"ort dazu
>+    return ITALIC_NORMAL + 1;	// ITALIC_NONE also belongs here
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>@@ -574,7 +568,6 @@ XubString SvxPostureItem::GetValueTextByPos( USHORT nPos ) const
> 
> bool SvxPostureItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>     {
>@@ -582,7 +575,7 @@ bool SvxPostureItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
>             rVal = Bool2Any(GetBoolValue());
>             break;
>         case MID_POSTURE:
>-            rVal <<= (awt::FontSlant)GetValue();	// Werte von awt::FontSlant und FontItalic sind gleich
>+            rVal <<= (awt::FontSlant)GetValue();	// values from awt::FontSlant and FontItalic are equal
>             break;
>     }
>     return true;
>@@ -590,7 +583,6 @@ bool SvxPostureItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> 
> bool SvxPostureItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>     {
>@@ -668,7 +660,7 @@ void SvxWeightItem::SetBoolValue( sal_Bool bVal )
> 
> USHORT SvxWeightItem::GetValueCount() const
> {
>-    return WEIGHT_BLACK;	// WEIGHT_DONTKNOW geh"ort nicht dazu
>+    return WEIGHT_BLACK;	// WEIGHT_DONTKNOW does not belong
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>@@ -729,7 +721,6 @@ XubString SvxWeightItem::GetValueTextByPos( USHORT nPos ) const
> 
> bool SvxWeightItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>     {
>@@ -747,7 +738,6 @@ bool SvxWeightItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> 
> bool SvxWeightItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>     {
>@@ -778,7 +768,7 @@ SvxFontHeightItem::SvxFontHeightItem( const ULONG nSz,
>                                       const USHORT nId ) :
>     SfxPoolItem( nId )
> {
>-    SetHeight( nSz,nPrp );	// mit den Prozenten rechnen
>+    SetHeight( nSz,nPrp );	// calculate in percentage
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>@@ -798,8 +788,8 @@ SvStream& SvxFontHeightItem::Store( SvStream& rStrm , USHORT nItemVersion ) cons
>         rStrm << GetProp() << (USHORT)GetPropUnit();
>     else
>     {
>-        // JP 30.06.98: beim Export in alte Versionen geht die relative
>-        // Angabe verloren, wenn es keine Prozentuale ist
>+        // When exporting to the old versions the relative information is lost
>+        // when there is no percentage
>         USHORT _nProp = GetProp();
>         if( SFX_MAPUNIT_RELATIVE != GetPropUnit() )
>             _nProp = 100;
>@@ -846,8 +836,8 @@ int SvxFontHeightItem::operator==( const SfxPoolItem& rItem ) const
> 
> bool SvxFontHeightItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-    //	In StarOne sind im uno::Any immer 1/100mm. Ueber die MemberId wird
>-    //	gesteuert, ob der Wert im Item 1/100mm oder Twips sind.
>+    //	In StarOne is the uno::Any always 1/100mm. Through the MemberId it is
>+    //	controlled if the value in the Item should be 1/100mm or Twips.
> 
>     sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>@@ -857,8 +847,8 @@ bool SvxFontHeightItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
>         {
>             ::com::sun::star::frame::status::FontHeight aFontHeight;
> 
>-            //	Point (also Twips) sind gefragt,
>-            //	also umrechnen, wenn CONVERT_TWIPS nicht gesetzt ist
>+            // Point (i.e. Twips) is asked for, thus re-calculate if
>+            // CONVERT_TWIPS is not set.
>             if( bConvert )
>             {
>                 long nTwips = bConvert ? nHeight : MM100_TO_TWIP_UNSIGNED(nHeight);
>@@ -898,8 +888,8 @@ bool SvxFontHeightItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
>         break;
>         case MID_FONTHEIGHT:
>         {
>-            //	Point (also Twips) sind gefragt,
>-            //	also umrechnen, wenn CONVERT_TWIPS nicht gesetzt ist
>+            // Point (i.e. Twips) is asked for, thus re-calculate if
>+            // CONVERT_TWIPS is not set.
>             if( bConvert )
>             {
>                 long nTwips = bConvert ? nHeight : MM100_TO_TWIP_UNSIGNED(nHeight);
>@@ -944,7 +934,7 @@ bool SvxFontHeightItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
>     return sal_True;
> }
> 
>-// Relative Abweichung aus der Hoehe herausrechnen
>+// Calculate the relative deviation from the expected height.
> sal_uInt32 lcl_GetRealHeight_Impl(sal_uInt32 nHeight, sal_uInt16 nProp, SfxMapUnit eProp, sal_Bool bCoreInTwip)
> {
>     sal_uInt32 nRet = nHeight;
>@@ -964,11 +954,11 @@ sal_uInt32 lcl_GetRealHeight_Impl(sal_uInt32 nHeight, sal_uInt16 nProp, SfxMapUn
>         }
>         break;
>         case SFX_MAPUNIT_100TH_MM:
>-            //dann ist die Core doch wohl auch in 1/100 mm
>+            //then the core is surely also in 1/100 mm
>             nDiff = (short)nProp;
>         break;
>         case SFX_MAPUNIT_TWIP:
>-            // hier doch sicher TWIP
>+            // Here surely TWIP
>             nDiff = ((short)nProp);
>         break;
>         default: ;//prevent warning
>@@ -998,7 +988,7 @@ bool SvxFontHeightItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> 
>                 nHeight = (long)( fPoint * 20.0 + 0.5 );		// Twips
>                 if (!bConvert)
>-                    nHeight = TWIP_TO_MM100_UNSIGNED(nHeight);  // umrechnen, wenn das Item 1/100mm enthaelt
>+                    nHeight = TWIP_TO_MM100_UNSIGNED(nHeight);  // Convert, if the item contains 1/100mm
> 
>                 nProp = aFontHeight.Prop;
>             }
>@@ -1023,7 +1013,7 @@ bool SvxFontHeightItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> 
>             nHeight = (long)( fPoint * 20.0 + 0.5 );		// Twips
>             if (!bConvert)
>-                nHeight = TWIP_TO_MM100_UNSIGNED(nHeight);  // umrechnen, wenn das Item 1/100mm enthaelt
>+                nHeight = TWIP_TO_MM100_UNSIGNED(nHeight);  // Convert, if the item contains 1/100mm
>         }
>         break;
>         case MID_FONTHEIGHT_PROP:
>@@ -1344,7 +1334,7 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxTextLineItem::Clone( SfxItemPool * ) const
> 
> USHORT SvxTextLineItem::GetValueCount() const
> {
>-    return UNDERLINE_DOTTED + 1;	// auch UNDERLINE_NONE geh"ort dazu
>+    return UNDERLINE_DOTTED + 1;	// UNDERLINE_NONE also belongs here
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>@@ -1402,7 +1392,6 @@ XubString SvxTextLineItem::GetValueTextByPos( USHORT /*nPos*/ ) const
> 
> bool SvxTextLineItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -1425,7 +1414,6 @@ bool SvxTextLineItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> 
> bool SvxTextLineItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     sal_Bool bRet = sal_True;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>@@ -1569,7 +1557,7 @@ void SvxCrossedOutItem::SetBoolValue( sal_Bool bVal )
> 
> USHORT SvxCrossedOutItem::GetValueCount() const
> {
>-    return STRIKEOUT_DOUBLE + 1;	// auch STRIKEOUT_NONE geh"ort dazu
>+    return STRIKEOUT_DOUBLE + 1;	// STRIKEOUT_NONE belongs also here
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>@@ -1630,7 +1618,6 @@ XubString SvxCrossedOutItem::GetValueTextByPos( USHORT nPos ) const
> 
> bool SvxCrossedOutItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -1646,7 +1633,6 @@ bool SvxCrossedOutItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> 
> bool SvxCrossedOutItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -2000,7 +1986,7 @@ USHORT SvxColorItem::GetVersion( USHORT nFFVer ) const
>     DBG_ASSERT( SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_31==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_40==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50==nFFVer,
>-            "SvxColorItem: Gibt es ein neues Fileformat?" );
>+            "SvxColorItem: Is there a new file format? ");
>     return  SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50 >= nFFVer ? VERSION_USEAUTOCOLOR : 0;
> }
> 
>@@ -2124,8 +2110,6 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxCharSetColorItem::Clone( SfxItemPool * ) const
> 
> SvStream& SvxCharSetColorItem::Store( SvStream& rStrm , USHORT /*nItemVersion*/ ) const
> {
>-    // #90477# rStrm << (BYTE) GetStoreCharSet( GetCharSet(), (USHORT)rStrm.GetVersion() )
>-    //	  << GetValue();
>     rStrm << (BYTE)GetSOStoreTextEncoding(GetCharSet(), (sal_uInt16)rStrm.GetVersion())
>           << GetValue();
>     return rStrm;
>@@ -2338,7 +2322,6 @@ bool SvxCaseMapItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE /*nMemberId*/ ) const
>     sal_Int16 nRet = style::CaseMap::NONE;
>     switch( GetValue() )
>     {
>-//		case SVX_CASEMAP_NOT_MAPPED  :		nRet = style::CaseMap::NONE 	; break;
>         case SVX_CASEMAP_VERSALIEN   :      nRet = style::CaseMap::UPPERCASE; break;
>         case SVX_CASEMAP_GEMEINE     :      nRet = style::CaseMap::LOWERCASE; break;
>         case SVX_CASEMAP_TITEL       :      nRet = style::CaseMap::TITLE    ; break;
>@@ -2512,7 +2495,6 @@ void SvxEscapementItem::SetEnumValue( USHORT nVal )
> 
> bool SvxEscapementItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -2531,7 +2513,6 @@ bool SvxEscapementItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> 
> bool SvxEscapementItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -2648,7 +2629,6 @@ SfxItemPresentation SvxLanguageItem::GetPresentation
> 
> bool SvxLanguageItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -2665,7 +2645,6 @@ bool SvxLanguageItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> 
> bool SvxLanguageItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch(nMemberId)
>     {
>@@ -2784,7 +2763,7 @@ SfxItemPresentation SvxNoHyphenItem::GetPresentation
> }
> 
> /*
>- * Dummy-Item fuer ToolBox-Controls:
>+ * Dummy item for ToolBox controls:
>  *
>  */
> 
>@@ -2974,7 +2953,6 @@ SfxItemPresentation SvxEmphasisMarkItem::GetPresentation
> 
> bool SvxEmphasisMarkItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>     {
>@@ -3001,7 +2979,6 @@ bool SvxEmphasisMarkItem::QueryValue( uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId ) const
> 
> bool SvxEmphasisMarkItem::PutValue( const uno::Any& rVal, BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     sal_Bool bRet = true;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>@@ -3035,7 +3012,7 @@ USHORT SvxEmphasisMarkItem::GetVersion( USHORT nFFVer ) const
>     DBG_ASSERT( SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_31==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_40==nFFVer ||
>             SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50==nFFVer,
>-            "SvxEmphasisMarkItem: Gibt es ein neues Fileformat?" );
>+            "SvxEmphasisMarkItem: Is there a new file format? ");
> 
>     return SOFFICE_FILEFORMAT_50 > nFFVer ? USHRT_MAX : 0;
> }
>@@ -3080,7 +3057,6 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxTwoLinesItem::Clone( SfxItemPool* ) const
> bool SvxTwoLinesItem::QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal,
>                                 BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     sal_Bool bRet = true;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>@@ -3114,7 +3090,6 @@ bool SvxTwoLinesItem::QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal,
> bool SvxTwoLinesItem::PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal,
>                                     BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     sal_Bool bRet = sal_False;
>     OUString s;
>@@ -3266,7 +3241,6 @@ SfxItemPresentation SvxCharRotateItem::GetPresentation(
> bool SvxCharRotateItem::QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal,
>                                 BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     bool bRet = true;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>@@ -3287,7 +3261,6 @@ bool SvxCharRotateItem::QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal,
> bool SvxCharRotateItem::PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal,
>                                     BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     bool bRet = true;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>@@ -3342,7 +3315,7 @@ SfxPoolItem* SvxCharScaleWidthItem::Create( SvStream& rStrm, USHORT ) const
> 
>     if ( Which() == EE_CHAR_FONTWIDTH )
>     {
>-        // #87271#: Was a SvxFontWidthItem in 5.2
>+        // Was a SvxFontWidthItem in 5.2
>         // USHORT nFixWidth, USHORT nPropWidth.
>         // nFixWidth has never been used...
>         rStrm >> nVal;
>@@ -3504,7 +3477,6 @@ SfxItemPresentation SvxCharReliefItem::GetPresentation
> bool SvxCharReliefItem::PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal,
>                                         BYTE nMemberId )
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     bool bRet = true;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>@@ -3529,7 +3501,6 @@ bool SvxCharReliefItem::PutValue( const com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal,
> bool SvxCharReliefItem::QueryValue( com::sun::star::uno::Any& rVal,
>                                         BYTE nMemberId ) const
> {
>-//    sal_Bool bConvert = 0!=(nMemberId&CONVERT_TWIPS);
>     nMemberId &= ~CONVERT_TWIPS;
>     bool bRet = true;
>     switch( nMemberId )
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectExport.cxx b/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectExport.cxx
>index de5f2af..0c5bd94 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectExport.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectExport.cxx
>@@ -39,7 +39,6 @@ using namespace ::com::sun::star;
> using namespace ::xmloff::token;
> using namespace ::rtl;
> 
>-// #110680#
> SvXMLAutoCorrectExport::SvXMLAutoCorrectExport( 
>     const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>     const SvxAutocorrWordList *  pNewAutocorr_List, 
>@@ -81,7 +80,6 @@ sal_uInt32 SvXMLAutoCorrectExport::exportDoc(enum XMLTokenEnum /*eClass*/)
>     return 0;
> }
> 
>-// #110680#
> SvXMLExceptionListExport::SvXMLExceptionListExport( 
>     const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>     const SvStringsISortDtor &rNewList, 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectExport.hxx b/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectExport.hxx
>index 9a2bb77..68e7ce4 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectExport.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectExport.hxx
>@@ -39,7 +39,6 @@ class SvXMLAutoCorrectExport : public SvXMLExport
> private:
>     const SvxAutocorrWordList 	*pAutocorr_List;
> public:
>-    // #110680#
>     SvXMLAutoCorrectExport( 
>         const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>         const SvxAutocorrWordList * pNewAutocorr_List, 
>@@ -60,7 +59,6 @@ class SvXMLExceptionListExport : public SvXMLExport
> private:
>     const SvStringsISortDtor & rList;
> public:
>-    // #110680#
>     SvXMLExceptionListExport( 
>         const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>         const SvStringsISortDtor &rNewList, 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectImport.cxx b/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectImport.cxx
>index e81e912..d5b5fd0 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectImport.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectImport.cxx
>@@ -43,7 +43,6 @@ using namespace ::rtl;
> 
> static OUString sBlockList ( RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM ( "_block-list" ) );
> 
>-// #110680#
> SvXMLAutoCorrectImport::SvXMLAutoCorrectImport(
>     const uno::Reference< lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>     SvxAutocorrWordList *pNewAutocorr_List,
>@@ -141,8 +140,6 @@ SvXMLWordContext::SvXMLWordContext(
>     if (!sWrong.Len() || !sRight.Len() )
>         return;
> 
>-//	const International& rInter = Application::GetAppInternational();
>-//	BOOL bOnlyTxt = COMPARE_EQUAL != rInter.Compare( sRight, sWrong, INTN_COMPARE_IGNORECASE );
>     BOOL bOnlyTxt = sRight != sWrong;
>     if( !bOnlyTxt )
>     {
>@@ -164,7 +161,6 @@ SvXMLWordContext::~SvXMLWordContext ( void )
> {
> }
> 
>-// #110680#
> SvXMLExceptionListImport::SvXMLExceptionListImport(
>     const uno::Reference< lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>     SvStringsISortDtor & rNewList )
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectImport.hxx b/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectImport.hxx
>index d79f450..67cd30f 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectImport.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/SvXMLAutoCorrectImport.hxx
>@@ -49,9 +49,7 @@ public:
>     SvxAutocorrWordList		*pAutocorr_List;
>     SvxAutoCorrect			&rAutoCorrect;
>     com::sun::star::uno::Reference < com::sun::star::embed::XStorage > xStorage;
>-    //SvStorageRef            &rStorage;
> 
>-    // #110680#
>     SvXMLAutoCorrectImport(
>         const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>         SvxAutocorrWordList *pNewAutocorr_List,
>@@ -105,7 +103,6 @@ protected:
> public:
>     SvStringsISortDtor 	&rList;
> 
>-    // #110680#
>     SvXMLExceptionListImport(
>         const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>         SvStringsISortDtor & rNewList );
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/acorrcfg.cxx b/editeng/source/misc/acorrcfg.cxx
>index 8a8a179..dd1c618 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/acorrcfg.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/acorrcfg.cxx
>@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ using namespace com::sun::star::uno;
> static SvxAutoCorrCfg* pAutoCorrCfg = 0;
> 
> /*--------------------------------------------------------------------
>-    Beschreibung:	Ctor Dtor
>+    Description:	Constructor Destructor
>  --------------------------------------------------------------------*/
> 
> SvxAutoCorrCfg::SvxAutoCorrCfg() :
>@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ void SvxBaseAutoCorrCfg::Load(sal_Bool bInit)
>     DBG_ASSERT(aValues.getLength() == aNames.getLength(), "GetProperties failed");
>     if(aValues.getLength() == aNames.getLength())
>     {
>-        long nFlags = 0;		// default alles aus
>+        long nFlags = 0;		// default all off
>         sal_Int32 nTemp = 0;
>         for(int nProp = 0; nProp < aNames.getLength(); nProp++)
>         {
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/hangulhanja.cxx b/editeng/source/misc/hangulhanja.cxx
>index b3aeda3..7bedc9f 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/hangulhanja.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/hangulhanja.cxx
>@@ -64,32 +64,7 @@ namespace editeng
>     using namespace ::com::sun::star::i18n::TextConversionOption;
>     using namespace ::com::sun::star::i18n::TextConversionType;
>     using namespace ::com::sun::star::lang;
>-/*
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::ReplacementAction;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eExchange;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eReplacementBracketed;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eOriginalBracketed;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eReplacementAbove;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eOriginalAbove;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eReplacementBelow;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eOriginalBelow;
>-
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eHangulToHanja;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eHanjaToHangul;
>-
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eSimpleConversion;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eHangulBracketed;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eHanjaBracketed;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eRubyHanjaAbove;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eRubyHanjaBelow;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eRubyHangulAbove;
>-    using HangulHanjaConversion::eRubyHangulBelow;
>-
>-    using ::com::sun::star::i18n::TextConversionType::TO_HANJA;
>-    using ::com::sun::star::i18n::TextConversionType::TO_HANGUL;
>-    using ::com::sun::star::i18n::TextConversionOption::CHARACTER_BY_CHARACTER;
>-    using ::com::sun::star::i18n::TextConversionOption::NONE;
>-*/
>+
>     //=========================================================================
>     //= HangulHanjaConversion_Impl
>     //=========================================================================
>@@ -642,15 +617,6 @@ namespace editeng
>             }
>         }
> 
>-        /*
>-        if ( bDocumentDone )
>-            return sal_True;			// we explicitly know that the complete document is done
>-        else if ( bNeedUserInteraction )
>-            return sal_False;			// the doc is not done, we found a convertible, but need the user to decide
>-        else
>-            return sal_True;			// we did not find a next convertible, so the document is implicitly done
>-        */
>-
>         return	bDocumentDone || !bNeedUserInteraction;
>     }
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/lingu.src b/editeng/source/misc/lingu.src
>index 1467532..ad65e16 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/lingu.src
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/lingu.src
>@@ -33,22 +33,22 @@ QueryBox RID_SVXQB_CONTINUE
> {
>     BUTTONS = WB_YES_NO ;
>     DEFBUTTON = WB_DEF_YES ;
>-    /* ### ACHTUNG: Neuer Text in Resource? Überprüfung am Anfang des Dokumentes fortsetzen? : berpr³fung am Anfang des Dokumentes fortsetzen? */
>-    /* ### ACHTUNG: Neuer Text in Resource? Überprüfung am Anfang des Dokumentes fortsetzen? : berpr³fung am Anfang des Dokumentes fortsetzen? */
>+    /* ### WARNING: New Text in Resource? Ã¼berpÃ¼fung am Anfang des Dokumentes fortsetzen? : berpr³fung am Anfang des Dokumentes fortsetzen? */
>+    /* ### WARNING: New Text in Resource? Überprüfung am Anfang des Dokumentes fortsetzen? : berpr³fung am Anfang des Dokumentes fortsetzen? */
>     Message [ en-US ] = "Continue checking at beginning of document?" ;
> };
> QueryBox RID_SVXQB_BW_CONTINUE
> {
>     BUTTONS = WB_YES_NO ;
>     DEFBUTTON = WB_DEF_YES ;
>-    /* ### ACHTUNG: Neuer Text in Resource? Überprüfung am Ende des Dokumentes fortsetzen? : berpr³fung am Ende des Dokumentes fortsetzen? */
>-    /* ### ACHTUNG: Neuer Text in Resource? Überprüfung am Ende des Dokumentes fortsetzen? : berpr³fung am Ende des Dokumentes fortsetzen? */
>+    /* ### WARNING: New Text in Resource? Überprüfung am Ende des Dokumentes fortsetzen? : berpr³fung am Ende des Dokumentes fortsetzen? */
>+    /* ### WARNING: New Text in Resource? Überprüfung am Ende des Dokumentes fortsetzen? : berpr³fung am Ende des Dokumentes fortsetzen? */
>     Message [ en-US ] = "Continue checking at end of document?" ;
> };
> String RID_SVXSTR_HMERR_THESAURUS
> {
>-    /* ### ACHTUNG: Neuer Text in Resource? Ein Thesaurus für die eingestellte Sprache ist nicht verfügbar. \nÜberprüfen Sie bitte Ihre Installation und installieren Sie \ngegebenenfalls die gewünschte Sprache : Ein Thesaurus f³r die eingestellte Sprache ist nicht verf³gbar. \nberpr³fen Sie bitte Ihre Installation und installieren Sie \ngegebenenfalls die gew³nschte Sprache */
>-    /* ### ACHTUNG: Neuer Text in Resource? Ein Thesaurus für die eingestellte Sprache ist nicht verfügbar. \nÜberprüfen Sie bitte Ihre Installation und installieren Sie \ngegebenenfalls die gewünschte Sprache : Ein Thesaurus f³r die eingestellte Sprache ist nicht verf³gbar. \nberpr³fen Sie bitte Ihre Installation und installieren Sie \ngegebenenfalls die gew³nschte Sprache */
>+    /* ### WARNING: New Text in Resource? Ein Thesaurus für die eingestellte Sprache ist nicht verfügbar. \nÜberprüfen Sie bitte Ihre Installation und installieren Sie \ngegebenenfalls die gewünschte Sprache : Ein Thesaurus f³r die eingestellte Sprache ist nicht verf³gbar. \nberpr³fen Sie bitte Ihre Installation und installieren Sie \ngegebenenfalls die gew³nschte Sprache */
>+    /* ### WARNING: New Text in Resource? Ein Thesaurus für die eingestellte Sprache ist nicht verfügbar. \nÜberprüfen Sie bitte Ihre Installation und installieren Sie \ngegebenenfalls die gewünschte Sprache : Ein Thesaurus f³r die eingestellte Sprache ist nicht verf³gbar. \nberpr³fen Sie bitte Ihre Installation und installieren Sie \ngegebenenfalls die gew³nschte Sprache */
>     Text [ en-US ] = "No thesaurus is available for the selected language. \nPlease check your installation and install the desired language\n" ;
> };
> String RID_SVXSTR_DIC_ERR_UNKNOWN
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/makefile.mk b/editeng/source/misc/makefile.mk
>index 23bdb9c..0b4dbbe 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/makefile.mk
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/makefile.mk
>@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ ENABLE_EXCEPTIONS=TRUE
> .INCLUDE :  settings.mk
> .INCLUDE :  $(PRJ)$/util$/makefile.pmk
> 
>-# --- Allgemein ----------------------------------------------------------
>+# --- General ----------------------------------------------------------
> 
> .IF "$(editdebug)" != "" || "$(EDITDEBUG)" != ""
> CDEFS+=-DEDITDEBUG
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/splwrap.cxx b/editeng/source/misc/splwrap.cxx
>index d644e78..04063a5 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/splwrap.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/splwrap.cxx
>@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@
> #include <map>
> 
> #include <editeng/svxenum.hxx>
>-#include <editeng/splwrap.hxx>      // Der Wrapper
>+#include <editeng/splwrap.hxx>      // The Wrapper
> #include <editeng/edtdlg.hxx>      
> #include <editeng/eerdll.hxx>
> #include <editeng/editrids.hrc>
>@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ SvxSpellWrapper::~SvxSpellWrapper()
> }
> 
> /*--------------------------------------------------------------------
>- *	Beschreibung: Ctor, die Pruefreihenfolge wird festgelegt
>+ *	Description: Constructor, the test sequence is determined
>  *
>  *  !bStart && !bOtherCntnt:	BODY_END,	BODY_START,	OTHER
>  *  !bStart && bOtherCntnt:		OTHER,		BODY
>@@ -263,15 +263,15 @@ sal_Int16 SvxSpellWrapper::CheckHyphLang(
> 
> 
> void SvxSpellWrapper::SpellStart( SvxSpellArea /*eSpell*/ )
>-{	// Hier muessen die notwendigen Vorbereitungen fuer SpellContinue
>-}	// im uebergebenen Bereich getroffen werden.
>+{ // Here, the necessary preparations be made for SpellContinue in the 
>+} // given area.
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
> 
> sal_Bool SvxSpellWrapper::HasOtherCnt()
> {
>-    return sal_False; // Gibt es ueberhaupt einen Sonderbereich?
>+    return sal_False; // Is there a special area?
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>@@ -279,14 +279,14 @@ sal_Bool SvxSpellWrapper::HasOtherCnt()
> 
> sal_Bool SvxSpellWrapper::SpellMore()
> {
>-    return sal_False; // Sollen weitere Dokumente geprueft werden?
>+    return sal_False; // Should additional documents be examined?
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
> 
> void SvxSpellWrapper::SpellEnd()
>-{	// Bereich ist abgeschlossen, ggf. Aufraeumen
>+{	// Area is complete, tidy up if necessary 
> 
>     // display error for last language not found
>     ShowLanguageErrors();
>@@ -310,14 +310,14 @@ void SvxSpellWrapper::AutoCorrect( const String&, const String& )
> 
> 
> void SvxSpellWrapper::ScrollArea()
>-{	// Scrollarea einstellen
>+{	// Set Scroll area
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
> 
> void SvxSpellWrapper::ChangeWord( const String&, const sal_uInt16 )
>-{	// Wort ersetzen
>+{	// Insert Word
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ void SvxSpellWrapper::ChangeWord( const String&, const sal_uInt16 )
> 
> String SvxSpellWrapper::GetThesWord()
> {
>-    // Welches Wort soll nachgeschlagen werden?
>+    // What word should be looked up?
>     return String();
> }
> 
>@@ -334,7 +334,7 @@ String SvxSpellWrapper::GetThesWord()
> 
> void SvxSpellWrapper::ChangeThesWord( const String& )
> {
>-    // Wort wg. Thesaurus ersetzen
>+    // replace word due to Thesaurus.
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>@@ -362,25 +362,25 @@ void SvxSpellWrapper::StartThesaurus( const String &rWord, sal_uInt16 nLanguage
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
> void SvxSpellWrapper::ReplaceAll( const String &, sal_Int16 )
>-{	// Wort aus der Replace-Liste ersetzen
>+{	// Replace Word from the the Replace list
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
> 
> void SvxSpellWrapper::SetLanguage( const sal_uInt16 )
>-{	// Sprache aendern
>+{	// Set Language
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
> 
> void SvxSpellWrapper::InsertHyphen( const sal_uInt16 )
>-{	// Hyphen einfuegen bzw. loeschen
>+{	// inserting and deleting Hyphae 
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>-// Pruefung der Dokumentbereiche in der durch die Flags angegebenen Reihenfolge
>+// Testing of the document areas in the order specified by the flags
> 
> 
> void SvxSpellWrapper::SpellDocument( )
>@@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ void SvxSpellWrapper::SpellDocument( )
> }
> 
> // -----------------------------------------------------------------------
>-// Naechsten Bereich auswaehlen
>+// Select the next area
> 
> 
> sal_Bool SvxSpellWrapper::SpellNext( )
>@@ -432,26 +432,26 @@ sal_Bool SvxSpellWrapper::SpellNext( )
>             : sal_False;
>     sal_Bool bActRev = bRevAllowed && bWrapReverse;
> 
>-    // bActRev ist die Richtung nach dem Spellen, bReverse die am Anfang.
>+    // bActRev is the direction after Spell checking, bReverse is the one 
>+    // at the beginning.
>     if( bActRev == bReverse )
>-    {   						// Keine Richtungsaenderung, also ist
>-        if( bStartChk )         // der gewuenschte Bereich ( bStartChk )
>-            bStartDone = sal_True;  // vollstaendig abgearbeitet.
>+    {   						// No change of direction, thus is the 
>+        if( bStartChk )         // desired area ( bStartChk )
>+            bStartDone = sal_True;  // completely processed.
>         else
>             bEndDone = sal_True;
>     }
>-    else if( bReverse == bStartChk ) // Bei einer Richtungsaenderung kann
>-    { 						   // u.U. auch ein Bereich abgearbeitet sein.
>-        if( bStartChk )        // Sollte der vordere Teil rueckwaerts gespellt
>-            bEndDone = sal_True;   // werden und wir kehren unterwegs um, so ist
>-        else				   // der hintere Teil abgearbeitet (und umgekehrt).
>+    else if( bReverse == bStartChk ) //For a change of direction, an area can    { 						   // be processed during certain circumstances
>+        if( bStartChk )        // If the firdt part is spell checked in backwards
>+            bEndDone = sal_True;   // and this is reversed in the process, then 
>+        else				   // then the end part is processed (and vice-versa).
>             bStartDone = sal_True;
>     }
> 
>     bReverse = bActRev;
>-    if( bOtherCntnt && bStartDone && bEndDone ) // Dokument komplett geprueft?
>+    if( bOtherCntnt && bStartDone && bEndDone ) // Document has been fully checked?
>     {
>-        if ( SpellMore() )  // ein weiteres Dokument pruefen?
>+        if ( SpellMore() )  // spell check another document?
>         {
>             bOtherCntnt = sal_False;
>             bStartDone = !bReverse;
>@@ -476,13 +476,13 @@ sal_Bool SvxSpellWrapper::SpellNext( )
>             *(sal_Bool*)xProp->getPropertyValue(
>                 ::rtl::OUString(RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM(UPN_IS_SPELL_SPECIAL)) ).getValue()
>             : sal_False;
>-        // Bodybereich erledigt, Frage nach Sonderbereich
>+        // Body area done, ask for special area
>         if( !IsHyphen() && bIsSpellSpecial && HasOtherCnt() )
>         {
>             SpellStart( SVX_SPELL_OTHER );
>             bOtherCntnt = bGoOn = sal_True;
>         }
>-        else if ( SpellMore() )  // ein weiteres Dokument pruefen?
>+        else if ( SpellMore() )  // check another document?
>         {
>             bOtherCntnt = sal_False;
>             bStartDone = !bReverse;
>@@ -493,11 +493,11 @@ sal_Bool SvxSpellWrapper::SpellNext( )
>     }
>     else
>     {
>-        // Ein BODY_Bereich erledigt, Frage nach dem anderen BODY_Bereich
>+        // a BODY_area done, ask for the other BODY_area
>         WAIT_OFF();
> 
>-// Sobald im Dialog das DontWrapAround gesetzt werden kann, kann der
>-// folgende #ifdef-Zweig aktiviert werden ...
>+// As sonn as the DontWrapAround is set in the dialog, the following
>+// #ifdef-branch may be activated ...
> #ifdef USED
>         sal_Bool bDontWrapAround = IsHyphen() ?
>             pSpell->GetOptions() & DONT_WRAPAROUND :
>@@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ sal_Bool SvxSpellWrapper::SpellNext( )
> #endif
> 
>         {
>-            // Verzicht auf den anderen Bereich, ggf. Frage nach Sonderbereich
>+            // sacrifice the other area if necessary ask for special area 
>             WAIT_ON();
>             bStartDone = bEndDone = sal_True;
>             return SpellNext();
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/svxacorr.cxx b/editeng/source/misc/svxacorr.cxx
>index 0ccc1b7..ed14c46 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/svxacorr.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/svxacorr.cxx
>@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
> #include <i18npool/mslangid.hxx>
> #include <vcl/svapp.hxx>
> #include <sot/storinfo.hxx>
>-// fuer die Sort-String-Arrays aus dem SVMEM.HXX
>+// for the Sort-String-Arrays from SVMEM.HXX
> #define _SVSTDARR_STRINGSISORTDTOR
> #define _SVSTDARR_STRINGSDTOR
> #include <svl/svstdarr.hxx>
>@@ -98,19 +98,19 @@ static const sal_Char pXMLImplCplStt_ExcptLstStr[] = "SentenceExceptList.xml";
> static const sal_Char pXMLImplAutocorr_ListStr[]   = "DocumentList.xml";
> 
> static const sal_Char
>-    /* auch bei diesen Anfaengen - Klammern auf und alle Arten von Anf.Zei. */
>+    /* also at these beginnings - Brackets and all kinds of begin characters */
>     sImplSttSkipChars[]	= "\"\'([{\x83\x84\x89\x91\x92\x93\x94",
>-    /* auch bei diesen Ende - Klammern auf und alle Arten von Anf.Zei. */
>+    /* also at these ends - Brackets and all kinds of begin characters */
>     sImplEndSkipChars[]	= "\"\')]}\x83\x84\x89\x91\x92\x93\x94";
> 
>-// diese Zeichen sind in Worten erlaubt: (fuer FnCptlSttSntnc)
>+// These characters are allowed in words: (for FnCptlSttSntnc)
> static const sal_Char sImplWordChars[] = "-'";
> 
> void EncryptBlockName_Imp( String& rName );
> void DecryptBlockName_Imp( String& rName );
> 
> 
>-// FileVersions Nummern fuer die Ersetzungs-/Ausnahmelisten getrennt
>+// FileVersions Number for the Substitution-/Exception list separately
> #define WORDLIST_VERSION_358	1
> #define EXEPTLIST_VERSION_358	0
> 
>@@ -175,13 +175,11 @@ static BOOL lcl_IsInAsciiArr( const sal_Char* pArr, const sal_Unicode c )
> SvxAutoCorrDoc::~SvxAutoCorrDoc()
> {
> }
>-
>-
>-    // wird nach dem austauschen der Zeichen von den Funktionen
>+    // Is called by the functions:
>     //	- FnCptlSttWrd
>     // 	- FnCptlSttSntnc
>-    // gerufen. Dann koennen die Worte ggfs. in die Ausnahmelisten
>-    // aufgenommen werden.
>+    // after the exchange of characters. then the words can maybe be inserted 
>+    // into the exception list.
> void SvxAutoCorrDoc::SaveCpltSttWord( ULONG, xub_StrLen, const String&,
>                                         sal_Unicode )
> {
>@@ -415,7 +413,7 @@ void SvxAutoCorrect::SetAutoCorrFlag( long nFlag, BOOL bOn )
> }
> 
> 
>-    // Zwei Grossbuchstaben am Wort-Anfang ??
>+    // Two capital letters at the beginning of word?
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttWrd( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>                                     xub_StrLen nSttPos, xub_StrLen nEndPos,
>                                     LanguageType eLang )
>@@ -423,8 +421,8 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttWrd( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>     BOOL bRet = FALSE;
>     CharClass& rCC = GetCharClass( eLang );
> 
>-    // loesche alle nicht alpanum. Zeichen am Wortanfang/-ende und
>-    // teste dann ( erkennt: "(min.", "/min.", usw.)
>+    // Delete all non alphanumeric. Test the characters at the beginning/end of
>+    // the word ( recognizes: "(min.", "/min.", and so on.)
>     for( ; nSttPos < nEndPos; ++nSttPos )
>         if( rCC.isLetterNumeric( rTxt, nSttPos ))
>             break;
>@@ -432,16 +430,16 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttWrd( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>         if( rCC.isLetterNumeric( rTxt, nEndPos - 1 ))
>             break;
> 
>-    // Zwei Grossbuchstaben am Wort-Anfang ??
>+    // Two capital letters at the beginning of word?
>     if( nSttPos+2 < nEndPos &&
>         IsUpperLetter( rCC.getCharacterType( rTxt, nSttPos )) &&
>         IsUpperLetter( rCC.getCharacterType( rTxt, ++nSttPos )) &&
>-        // ist das 3. Zeichen ein klein geschiebenes Alpha-Zeichen
>+        // Is the third character a lower case
>         IsLowerLetter( rCC.getCharacterType( rTxt, nSttPos +1 )) &&
>-        // keine Sonder-Attribute ersetzen
>+        // Do not replace special attributes
>         0x1 != rTxt.GetChar( nSttPos ) && 0x2 != rTxt.GetChar( nSttPos ))
>     {
>-        // teste ob das Wort in einer Ausnahmeliste steht
>+        // test if the word is in an exception list
>         String sWord( rTxt.Copy( nSttPos - 1, nEndPos - nSttPos + 1 ));
>         if( !FindInWrdSttExceptList(eLang, sWord) )
>         {
>@@ -466,8 +464,8 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnChgOrdinalNumber(
>                                 LanguageType eLang )
> {
> // 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4 - 0th
>-// 201th oder 201st
>-// 12th oder 12nd
>+// 201th or 201st
>+// 12th or 12nd
>     CharClass& rCC = GetCharClass( eLang );
>     BOOL bChg = FALSE;
> 
>@@ -505,7 +503,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnChgOrdinalNumber(
> 
>         if( bChg )
>         {
>-            // dann pruefe mal, ob alle bis zum Start alle Zahlen sind
>+            // then check to the start, if all are numbers 
>             for( xub_StrLen n = nEndPos - 3; nSttPos < n; )
>                 if( !rCC.isDigit( rTxt, --n ) )
>                 {
>@@ -513,7 +511,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnChgOrdinalNumber(
>                     break;
>                 }
> 
>-            if( bChg )		// dann setze mal das Escapement Attribut
>+            if( bChg )		// then set the escapement attribute
>             {
>                 SvxEscapementItem aSvxEscapementItem( DFLT_ESC_AUTO_SUPER,
>                                                     DFLT_ESC_PROP, SID_ATTR_CHAR_ESCAPEMENT );
>@@ -539,7 +537,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnChgToEnEmDash(
>         eLang = GetAppLang();
>     bool bAlwaysUseEmDash = (cEmDash && (eLang == LANGUAGE_RUSSIAN || eLang == LANGUAGE_UKRAINIAN));
> 
>-    // ersetze " - " oder " --" durch "enDash"
>+    // replace " - " or " --" with "enDash"
>     if( cEnDash && 1 < nSttPos && 1 <= nEndPos - nSttPos )
>     {
>         sal_Unicode cCh = rTxt.GetChar( nSttPos );
>@@ -723,11 +721,11 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnChgWeightUnderl( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt
>                                         xub_StrLen, xub_StrLen nEndPos,
>                                         LanguageType eLang )
> {
>-    // Bedingung:
>-    //	Am Anfang:	_ oder * hinter Space mit nachfolgenden !Space
>-    //	Am Ende:	_ oder * vor Space (Worttrenner?)
>+    // Condition:
>+    //	at the beginning:	_ or * after Space with the folloeing !Space
>+    //	at the end:	        _ or * before Space (word delimiter?)
> 
>-    sal_Unicode c, cInsChar = rTxt.GetChar( nEndPos );	// unterstreichen oder fett
>+    sal_Unicode c, cInsChar = rTxt.GetChar( nEndPos );	// underline or bold
>     if( ++nEndPos != rTxt.Len() &&
>         !IsWordDelim( rTxt.GetChar( nEndPos ) ) )
>         return FALSE;
>@@ -751,7 +749,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnChgWeightUnderl( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt
>                     !IsWordDelim( rTxt.GetChar( nPos+1 )))
>                         nFndPos = nPos;
>                 else
>-                    // Bedingung ist nicht erfuellt, also abbrechen
>+                    // Condition is not satisfied, so cancel
>                     nFndPos = STRING_NOTFOUND;
>                 nPos = 0;
>             }
>@@ -764,16 +762,16 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnChgWeightUnderl( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt
> 
>     if( STRING_NOTFOUND != nFndPos )
>     {
>-        // ueber den gefundenen Bereich das Attribut aufspannen und
>-        // das gefunde und am Ende stehende Zeichen loeschen
>-        if( '*' == cInsChar )			// Fett
>+        // Span the Attribute over the area and delete the Character found at 
>+        // the end.
>+        if( '*' == cInsChar )			// Bold
>         {
>             SvxWeightItem aSvxWeightItem( WEIGHT_BOLD, SID_ATTR_CHAR_WEIGHT );
>             rDoc.SetAttr( nFndPos + 1, nEndPos,
>                             SID_ATTR_CHAR_WEIGHT,
>                             aSvxWeightItem);
>         }
>-        else							// unterstrichen
>+        else							// underline
>         {
>             SvxUnderlineItem aSvxUnderlineItem( UNDERLINE_SINGLE, SID_ATTR_CHAR_UNDERLINE );
>             rDoc.SetAttr( nFndPos + 1, nEndPos,
>@@ -793,7 +791,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>                                     xub_StrLen nSttPos, xub_StrLen nEndPos,
>                                     LanguageType eLang )
> {
>-    // Grossbuchstabe am Satz-Anfang ??
>+    // Two capital letters at the beginning of a paragraph?
>     if( !rTxt.Len() || nEndPos <= nSttPos )
>         return FALSE;
> 
>@@ -821,7 +819,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>         {
>             if( lcl_IsInAsciiArr( sImplWordChars, *pStr ) &&
>                 pWordStt - 1 == pStr &&
>-                // l'intallazione at beginning of paragraph. Replaced < by <= (#i38971#)
>+                // Installation at beginning of paragraph. Replaced < by <= (#i38971#)
>                 (long)(pStart + 1) <= (long)pStr &&
>                 rCC.isLetter(
>                     aText,
>@@ -841,16 +839,13 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>                 aText,
>                 sal::static_int_cast< xub_StrLen >( pWordStt - pStart ) ) ) ||
>         0x1 == *pWordStt || 0x2 == *pWordStt )
>-        return FALSE;		// kein zu ersetzendes Zeichen, oder schon ok
>+        return FALSE;		// no character to be replaced, or already ok
> 
>-    // JP 27.10.97: wenn das Wort weniger als 3 Zeichen hat und der Trenner
>-    //				ein "Num"-Trenner ist, dann nicht ersetzen!
>-    //				Damit wird ein "a.",  "a)", "a-a" nicht ersetzt!
>     if( *pDelim && 2 >= pDelim - pWordStt &&
>         lcl_IsInAsciiArr( ".-)>", *pDelim ) )
>         return FALSE;
> 
>-    if( !bAtStart )	// noch kein Absatz Anfang ?
>+    if( !bAtStart )	// Still no beginning of a paragraph?
>     {
>         if ( IsWordDelim( *pStr ) )
>         {
>@@ -861,17 +856,17 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>         // and full width question marks are treated as word delimiters
>         else if ( 0x3002 != *pStr && 0xFF0E != *pStr && 0xFF01 != *pStr &&
>                   0xFF1F != *pStr )
>-            return FALSE; // kein gueltiger Trenner -> keine Ersetzung
>+            return FALSE; // no valid separator -> no replacement
>     }
> 
>-    if( bAtStart )	// am Absatz Anfang ?
>+    if( bAtStart )	// at the beginning of a paragraph?
>     {
>-        // Ueberpruefe den vorherigen Absatz, wenn es diesen gibt.
>-        // Wenn ja, dann pruefe auf SatzTrenner am Ende.
>+        // Check out the previous paragraph, if it exists.
>+        // If so, then check to paragraph separator at the end.
>         const String* pPrevPara = rDoc.GetPrevPara( bNormalPos );
>         if( !pPrevPara )
>         {
>-            // gueltiger Trenner -> Ersetze
>+            // valid separator -> replace
>             String sChar( *pWordStt );
>             rCC.toUpper( sChar );
>             return  sChar != *pWordStt &&
>@@ -883,18 +878,18 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>         pStart = aText.GetBuffer();
>         pStr = pStart + aText.Len();
> 
>-        do {			// alle Blanks ueberlesen
>+        do {			// overwrite all blanks
>             --pStr;
>             if( !IsWordDelim( *pStr ))
>                 break;
>         } while( 0 == ( bAtStart = (pStart == pStr)) );
> 
>         if( bAtStart )
>-            return FALSE;		// kein gueltiger Trenner -> keine Ersetzung
>+            return FALSE;  // no valid separator -> no replacement
>     }
> 
>-    // bis hierhier wurde [ \t]+[A-Z0-9]+ gefunden. Test jetzt auf den
>-    // Satztrenner. Es koennen alle 3 vorkommen, aber nicht mehrfach !!
>+    // Found [ \t]+[A-Z0-9]+ until here. Test now on the paragraph separator. 
>+    // all three can happen, but not more than once!
>     const sal_Unicode* pExceptStt = 0;
>     if( !bAtStart )
>     {
>@@ -909,7 +904,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>             case 0xFF0E :
>                 {
>                     if( nFlag & C_FULL_STOP )
>-                        return FALSE;		// kein gueltiger Trenner -> keine Ersetzung
>+                        return FALSE;  // no valid separator -> no replacement
>                     nFlag |= C_FULL_STOP;
>                     pExceptStt = pStr;
>                 }
>@@ -918,7 +913,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>             case 0xFF01 :
>                 {
>                     if( nFlag & C_EXCLAMATION_MARK )
>-                        return FALSE; 	// kein gueltiger Trenner -> keine Ersetzung
>+                        return FALSE; 	// no valid separator -> no replacement
>                     nFlag |= C_EXCLAMATION_MARK;
>                 }
>                 break;
>@@ -926,13 +921,13 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>             case 0xFF1F :
>                 {
>                     if( nFlag & C_QUESTION_MARK)
>-                        return FALSE;		// kein gueltiger Trenner -> keine Ersetzung
>+                        return FALSE;	// no valid separator -> no replacement
>                     nFlag |= C_QUESTION_MARK;
>                 }
>                 break;
>             default:
>                 if( !nFlag )
>-                    return FALSE;		// kein gueltiger Trenner -> keine Ersetzung
>+                    return FALSE;		// no valid separator -> no replacement
>                 else
>                     bWeiter = FALSE;
>                 break;
>@@ -940,11 +935,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
> 
>             if( bWeiter && pStr-- == pStart )
>             {
>-// !!! wenn am Anfang, dann nie ersetzen.
>-//				if( !nFlag )
>-                    return FALSE;		// kein gueltiger Trenner -> keine Ersetzung
>-//				++pStr;
>-//				break;		// Schleife beenden
>+                return FALSE;		// no valid separator -> no replacement
>             }
>         } while( bWeiter );
>         if( C_FULL_STOP != nFlag )
>@@ -991,12 +982,12 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>         }
> 
>         if( !bValid )
>-            return FALSE;		// kein gueltiger Trenner -> keine Ersetzung
>+            return FALSE;		// no valid separator -> no replacement
>     }
> 
>     BOOL bNumericOnly = '0' <= *(pStr+1) && *(pStr+1) <= '9';
> 
>-    // suche den Anfang vom Wort
>+    // Search for the beginning of the word
>     while( !IsWordDelim( *pStr ))
>     {
>         if( bNumericOnly &&
>@@ -1010,7 +1001,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>         --pStr;
>     }
> 
>-    if( bNumericOnly )		// besteht nur aus Zahlen, dann nicht
>+    if( bNumericOnly )		// consists of only numbers, then not
>         return FALSE;
> 
>     if( IsWordDelim( *pStr ))
>@@ -1018,7 +1009,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
> 
>     String sWord;
> 
>-    // ueberpruefe anhand der Exceptionliste
>+    // check on the basis of the exception list
>     if( pExceptStt )
>     {
>         sWord = String(
>@@ -1026,15 +1017,15 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>         if( FindInCplSttExceptList(eLang, sWord) )
>             return FALSE;
> 
>-        // loesche alle nicht alpanum. Zeichen am Wortanfang/-ende und
>-        // teste dann noch mal ( erkennt: "(min.", "/min.", usw.)
>+        // Delete all non alphanumeric. Test the characters at the 
>+        // beginning/end of the word ( recognizes: "(min.", "/min.", and so on.)
>         String sTmp( sWord );
>         while( sTmp.Len() &&
>                 !rCC.isLetterNumeric( sTmp, 0 ) )
>             sTmp.Erase( 0, 1 );
> 
>-        // alle hinteren nicht alphanumerische Zeichen bis auf das
>-        // Letzte entfernen
>+        // Remove all non alphanumeric characters towards the end up until 
>+        // the last one. 
>         xub_StrLen nLen = sTmp.Len();
>         while( nLen && !rCC.isLetterNumeric( sTmp, nLen-1 ) )
>             --nLen;
>@@ -1049,14 +1040,14 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FnCptlSttSntnc( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>             return FALSE;
>     }
> 
>-    // Ok, dann ersetze mal
>+    // Ok, then replace
>     sal_Unicode cSave = *pWordStt;
>     nSttPos = sal::static_int_cast< xub_StrLen >( pWordStt - rTxt.GetBuffer() );
>     String sChar( cSave );
>     rCC.toUpper( sChar );
>     BOOL bRet = sChar.GetChar(0) != cSave && rDoc.Replace( nSttPos, sChar );
> 
>-    // das Wort will vielleicht jemand haben
>+    // Parahaps someone wants to have the word
>     if( bRet && SaveWordCplSttLst & nFlags )
>         rDoc.SaveCpltSttWord( CptlSttSntnc, nSttPos, sWord, cSave );
> 
>@@ -1117,7 +1108,7 @@ sal_Unicode SvxAutoCorrect::GetQuote( sal_Unicode cInsChar, BOOL bSttQuote,
>                                     : GetEndSingleQuote() );
>     if( !cRet )
>     {
>-        // dann ueber die Language das richtige Zeichen heraussuchen
>+        // then through the Language find the right character
>         if( LANGUAGE_NONE == eLang )
>             cRet = cInsChar;
>         else
>@@ -1143,17 +1134,12 @@ void SvxAutoCorrect::InsertQuote( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, xub_StrLen nInsPos,
>     LanguageType eLang = rDoc.GetLanguage( nInsPos, FALSE );
>     sal_Unicode cRet = GetQuote( cInsChar, bSttQuote, eLang );
> 
>-    //JP 13.02.99: damit beim Undo das "einfuegte" Zeichen wieder erscheint,
>-    //				wird es erstmal eingefuegt und dann ueberschrieben
>     String sChg( cInsChar );
>     if( bIns )
>         rDoc.Insert( nInsPos, sChg );
>     else
>         rDoc.Replace( nInsPos, sChg );
> 
>-    //JP 13.08.97: Bug 42477 - bei doppelten Anfuehrungszeichen muss bei
>-    //				franzoesischer Sprache an Anfang ein Leerzeichen dahinter
>-    //				und am Ende ein Leerzeichen dahinter eingefuegt werden.
>     sChg = cRet;
> 
>     if( '\"' == cInsChar )
>@@ -1167,8 +1153,6 @@ void SvxAutoCorrect::InsertQuote( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, xub_StrLen nInsPos,
>         case LANGUAGE_FRENCH_CANADIAN:
>         case LANGUAGE_FRENCH_SWISS:
>         case LANGUAGE_FRENCH_LUXEMBOURG:
>-            // JP 09.02.99: das zusaetzliche Zeichen immer per Insert einfuegen.
>-            //				Es ueberschreibt nichts!
>             {
>                 String s( static_cast< sal_Unicode >(0xA0) );
>                     // UNICODE code for no break space
>@@ -1192,9 +1176,7 @@ String SvxAutoCorrect::GetQuote( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, xub_StrLen nInsPos,
>     sal_Unicode cRet = GetQuote( cInsChar, bSttQuote, eLang );
> 
>     String sRet( cRet );
>-    //JP 13.08.97: Bug 42477 - bei doppelten Anfuehrungszeichen muss bei
>-    //				franzoesischer Sprache an Anfang ein Leerzeichen dahinter
>-    //				und am Ende ein Leerzeichen dahinter eingefuegt werden.
>+  
>     if( '\"' == cInsChar )
>     {
>         if( LANGUAGE_SYSTEM == eLang )
>@@ -1227,7 +1209,7 @@ ULONG SvxAutoCorrect::AutoCorrect( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>     do{		                            // only for middle check loop !!
>         if( cChar )
>         {
>-            //JP 10.02.97: doppelte Spaces verhindern
>+            // Prevent double space
>             if( nInsPos && ' ' == cChar &&
>                 IsAutoCorrFlag( IgnoreDoubleSpace ) &&
>                 ' ' == rTxt.GetChar( nInsPos - 1 ) )
>@@ -1245,8 +1227,6 @@ ULONG SvxAutoCorrect::AutoCorrect( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>                 sal_Unicode cPrev;
>                 BOOL bSttQuote = !nInsPos ||
>                         IsWordDelim( ( cPrev = rTxt.GetChar( nInsPos-1 ))) ||
>-// os: #56034# - Warum kein schliessendes Anfuehrungszeichen nach dem Bindestrich?
>-//						strchr( "-([{", cPrev ) ||
>                         lcl_IsInAsciiArr( "([{", cPrev ) ||
>                         ( cEmDash && cEmDash == cPrev ) ||
>                         ( cEnDash && cEnDash == cPrev );
>@@ -1301,11 +1281,10 @@ ULONG SvxAutoCorrect::AutoCorrect( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
> 
>         xub_StrLen nPos = nInsPos - 1;
> 
>-        // Bug 19286: nur direkt hinter dem "Wort" aufsetzen
>         if( IsWordDelim( rTxt.GetChar( nPos )))
>             break;
> 
>-        // automatisches Fett oder Unterstreichen setzen?
>+        // Set bold or underline automatically?
>         if( '*' == cChar || '_' == cChar )
>         {
>             if( IsAutoCorrFlag( ChgWeightUnderl ) &&
>@@ -1317,9 +1296,9 @@ ULONG SvxAutoCorrect::AutoCorrect( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>         while( nPos && !IsWordDelim( rTxt.GetChar( --nPos )))
>             ;
> 
>-        // Absatz-Anfang oder ein Blank gefunden, suche nach dem Wort
>-        // Kuerzel im Auto
>-        xub_StrLen nCapLttrPos = nPos+1;		// auf das 1. Zeichen
>+        // Found a Paragraph-start or a Blank, search for the word shortcut in 
>+        // auto.
>+        xub_StrLen nCapLttrPos = nPos+1;		// on the 1st Character
>         if( !nPos && !IsWordDelim( rTxt.GetChar( 0 )))
>             --nCapLttrPos;			// Absatz Anfang und kein Blank !
> 
>@@ -1328,7 +1307,6 @@ ULONG SvxAutoCorrect::AutoCorrect( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>             eLang = MsLangId::getSystemLanguage();
>         CharClass& rCC = GetCharClass( eLang );
> 
>-        // Bug 19285: Symbolzeichen nicht anfassen
>         if( lcl_IsSymbolChar( rCC, rTxt, nCapLttrPos, nInsPos ))
>             break;
>             
>@@ -1341,10 +1319,6 @@ ULONG SvxAutoCorrect::AutoCorrect( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>                                                     *this, ppPara );
>             if( !bChgWord )
>             {
>-                // JP 16.06.98: dann versuche mal alle !AlphaNum. Zeichen los zu
>-                //				werden und teste dann nochmals
>-                //JP 22.04.99: Bug 63883 - entferne nur die "Klammern Start/-Anfaenge",
>-                //				alle anderen Zeichen muessen drin bleiben.
>                 xub_StrLen nCapLttrPos1 = nCapLttrPos, nInsPos1 = nInsPos;
>                 while( nCapLttrPos1 < nInsPos &&
>                         lcl_IsInAsciiArr( sImplSttSkipChars, rTxt.GetChar( nCapLttrPos1 ) )
>@@ -1374,7 +1348,7 @@ ULONG SvxAutoCorrect::AutoCorrect( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>                             !IsWordDelim( pPara->GetChar( nEnd )))
>                         ++nEnd;
> 
>-                    // Grossbuchstabe am Satz-Anfang ??
>+                    // Capital letter at beginning of paragraph?
>                     if( IsAutoCorrFlag( CptlSttSntnc ) &&
>                         FnCptlSttSntnc( rDoc, *pPara, FALSE,
>                                                 nCapLttrPos, nEnd, eLang ) )
>@@ -1409,12 +1383,12 @@ ULONG SvxAutoCorrect::AutoCorrect( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>                 pFrameWin->SimulateKeyPress( KEY_CAPSLOCK );
>             }
> 
>-            // Grossbuchstabe am Satz-Anfang ??
>+            // Capital letter at beginning of paragraph ?
>             if( IsAutoCorrFlag( CptlSttSntnc ) &&
>                 FnCptlSttSntnc( rDoc, rTxt, TRUE, nCapLttrPos, nInsPos, eLang ) )
>                 nRet |= CptlSttSntnc;
> 
>-            // Zwei Grossbuchstaben am Wort-Anfang ??
>+            // Two capital letters at beginning of word ??
>             if( IsAutoCorrFlag( CptlSttWrd ) &&
>                 FnCptlSttWrd( rDoc, rTxt, nCapLttrPos, nInsPos, eLang ) )
>                 nRet |= CptlSttWrd;
>@@ -1431,7 +1405,7 @@ ULONG SvxAutoCorrect::AutoCorrect( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, const String& rTxt,
>         ULONG nHelpId = 0;
>         if( nRet & ( Autocorrect|CptlSttSntnc|CptlSttWrd|ChgToEnEmDash ) )
>         {
>-            // von 0 - 15
>+            // from 0 - 15
>             if( nRet & ChgToEnEmDash )
>                 nHelpId += 8;
>             if( nRet & Autocorrect )
>@@ -1482,7 +1456,7 @@ void SvxAutoCorrect::SaveCplSttExceptList( LanguageType eLang )
> #ifdef DBG_UTIL
>     else
>     {
>-        DBG_ERROR("speichern einer leeren Liste?");
>+        DBG_ERROR("Save an empty list? ");
>     }
> #endif
> }
>@@ -1498,19 +1472,17 @@ void SvxAutoCorrect::SaveWrdSttExceptList(LanguageType eLang)
> #ifdef DBG_UTIL
>     else
>     {
>-        DBG_ERROR("speichern einer leeren Liste?");
>+        DBG_ERROR("Save an empty list? ");
>     }
> #endif
> }
> 
>-
>-    // fuegt ein einzelnes Wort hinzu. Die Liste wird sofort
>-    // in die Datei geschrieben!
>+    // Adds a single word. The list will immediately be written to the file!
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::AddCplSttException( const String& rNew,
>                                         LanguageType eLang )
> {
>     SvxAutoCorrectLanguageListsPtr pLists = 0;
>-    //entweder die richtige Sprache ist vorhanden oder es kommt in die allg. Liste
>+    // either the right language is present or it will be this in the general list
>     if( pLangTable->IsKeyValid(ULONG(eLang)))
>         pLists = pLangTable->Seek(ULONG(eLang));
>     else if(pLangTable->IsKeyValid(ULONG(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW))||
>@@ -1518,24 +1490,23 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::AddCplSttException( const String& rNew,
>     {
>         pLists = pLangTable->Seek(ULONG(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW));
>     }
>-    DBG_ASSERT(pLists, "keine Autokorrekturdatei");
>+    DBG_ASSERT(pLists, "No auto correction data");
>     return pLists->AddToCplSttExceptList(rNew);
> }
> 
> 
>-    // fuegt ein einzelnes Wort hinzu. Die Liste wird sofort
>-    // in die Datei geschrieben!
>+    // Adds a single word. The list will immediately be written to the file!
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::AddWrtSttException( const String& rNew,
>                                          LanguageType eLang )
> {
>     SvxAutoCorrectLanguageListsPtr pLists = 0;
>-    //entweder die richtige Sprache ist vorhanden oder es kommt in die allg. Liste
>+    //either the right language is present or it is set in the general list
>     if(pLangTable->IsKeyValid(ULONG(eLang)))
>         pLists = pLangTable->Seek(ULONG(eLang));
>     else if(pLangTable->IsKeyValid(ULONG(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW))||
>             CreateLanguageFile(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW, TRUE))
>         pLists = pLangTable->Seek(ULONG(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW));
>-    DBG_ASSERT(pLists, "keine Autokorrekturdatei");
>+    DBG_ASSERT(pLists, "No auto correction data");
>     return pLists->AddToWrdSttExceptList(rNew);
> }
> 
>@@ -1548,8 +1519,7 @@ void SvxAutoCorrect::SetUserAutoCorrFileName( const String& rNew )
>     {
>         sUserAutoCorrFile = rNew;
> 
>-        // sind die Listen gesetzt sind, so muessen sie jetzt geloescht
>-        // werden
>+        // if the lists are set, they must now be deleted
>         lcl_ClearTable(*pLangTable);
>         nFlags &= ~(CplSttLstLoad | WrdSttLstLoad | ChgWordLstLoad );
>     }
>@@ -1561,8 +1531,7 @@ void SvxAutoCorrect::SetShareAutoCorrFileName( const String& rNew )
>     {
>         sShareAutoCorrFile = rNew;
> 
>-        // sind die Listen gesetzt sind, so muessen sie jetzt geloescht
>-        // werden
>+        // if the lists are set, they must now be deleted
>         lcl_ClearTable(*pLangTable);
>         nFlags &= ~(CplSttLstLoad | WrdSttLstLoad | ChgWordLstLoad );
>     }
>@@ -1578,7 +1547,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::GetPrevAutoCorrWord( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
> 
>     xub_StrLen nEnde = nPos;
> 
>-    // dahinter muss ein Blank oder Tab folgen!
>+    // it must be followed by a blank or tab!
>     if( ( nPos < rTxt.Len() &&
>         !IsWordDelim( rTxt.GetChar( nPos ))) ||
>         IsWordDelim( rTxt.GetChar( --nPos )))
>@@ -1587,18 +1556,16 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::GetPrevAutoCorrWord( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
>     while( nPos && !IsWordDelim( rTxt.GetChar( --nPos )))
>         ;
> 
>-    // Absatz-Anfang oder ein Blank gefunden, suche nach dem Wort
>-    // Kuerzel im Auto
>-    xub_StrLen nCapLttrPos = nPos+1;		// auf das 1. Zeichen
>+    // Found a Paragraph-start or a Blank, search for the word shortcut in 
>+    // auto.
>+    xub_StrLen nCapLttrPos = nPos+1;		// on the 1st Character
>     if( !nPos && !IsWordDelim( rTxt.GetChar( 0 )))
>-        --nCapLttrPos;			// Absatz Anfang und kein Blank !
>+        --nCapLttrPos;			// Beginning of pargraph and no Blank!
> 
>     while( lcl_IsInAsciiArr( sImplSttSkipChars, rTxt.GetChar( nCapLttrPos )) )
>         if( ++nCapLttrPos >= nEnde )
>             return FALSE;
> 
>-    // Bug 19285: Symbolzeichen nicht anfassen
>-    // Interresant erst ab 3 Zeichen
>     if( 3 > nEnde - nCapLttrPos )
>         return FALSE;
> 
>@@ -1618,7 +1585,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::GetPrevAutoCorrWord( SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc,
> 
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::CreateLanguageFile( LanguageType eLang, BOOL bNewFile )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT(!pLangTable->IsKeyValid(ULONG(eLang)), "Sprache ist bereits vorhanden");
>+    DBG_ASSERT(!pLangTable->IsKeyValid(ULONG(eLang)), "Language already exists ");
> 
>     String sUserDirFile( GetAutoCorrFileName( eLang, TRUE, FALSE )),
>            sShareDirFile( sUserDirFile );
>@@ -1671,7 +1638,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::PutText( const String& rShort, const String& rLong,
> }
> 
> 
>-    //	- loesche einen Eintrag
>+    //	- Delete an entry
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::DeleteText( const String& rShort, LanguageType eLang )
> {
>     BOOL bRet = FALSE;
>@@ -1681,14 +1648,14 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::DeleteText( const String& rShort, LanguageType eLang )
> }
> 
> 
>-    //	- return den Ersetzungstext (nur fuer SWG-Format, alle anderen
>-    //		koennen aus der Wortliste herausgeholt werden!)
>+    //	- return the replacement text (only for SWG-Format, all other
>+    //		can be taken from the word list!)
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::GetLongText( const com::sun::star::uno::Reference < com::sun::star::embed::XStorage >&, const String&, const String& , String& )
> {
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
>-    //	- Text mit Attributierung (kann nur der SWG - SWG-Format!)
>+    // Text with attribution (only the SWG - SWG format!)
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::PutText( const com::sun::star::uno::Reference < com::sun::star::embed::XStorage >&, const String&, const String&, SfxObjectShell&,
>                                 String& )
> {
>@@ -1771,7 +1738,7 @@ const SvxAutocorrWord* lcl_SearchWordsInList(
> }
> 
> 
>-// suche das oder die Worte in der ErsetzungsTabelle
>+// the search or the words in the substitution table
> const SvxAutocorrWord* SvxAutoCorrect::SearchWordsInList(
>                 const String& rTxt, xub_StrLen& rStt, xub_StrLen nEndPos,
>                 SvxAutoCorrDoc& rDoc, LanguageType& rLang )
>@@ -1781,13 +1748,12 @@ const SvxAutocorrWord* SvxAutoCorrect::SearchWordsInList(
>     if( LANGUAGE_SYSTEM == eLang )
>         eLang = MsLangId::getSystemLanguage();
> 
>-    // zuerst nach eLang suchen, dann nach der Obersprache
>-    // US-Englisch -> Englisch und zuletzt in LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW
>-
>+    // First search for eLang, then US-English -> English 
>+    // and last in LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW
>     if( pLangTable->IsKeyValid( ULONG( eLang ) ) ||
>         CreateLanguageFile( eLang, FALSE ))
>     {
>-        //die Sprache ist vorhanden - also her damit
>+        //the language is available - so bring it on
>         SvxAutoCorrectLanguageListsPtr pList = pLangTable->Seek(ULONG(eLang));
>         pRet = lcl_SearchWordsInList(  pList, rTxt, rStt, nEndPos, rDoc );
>         if( pRet )
>@@ -1797,9 +1763,10 @@ const SvxAutocorrWord* SvxAutoCorrect::SearchWordsInList(
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // wenn es hier noch nicht gefunden werden konnte, dann weitersuchen
>-    ULONG nTmpKey1 = eLang & 0x7ff, // die Hauptsprache in vielen Faellen u.B. DE
>-          nTmpKey2 = eLang & 0x3ff, // sonst z.B. EN
>+    // If it still could not be found here, then keep on searching
>+
>+    ULONG nTmpKey1 = eLang & 0x7ff, // the main language in many cases DE
>+          nTmpKey2 = eLang & 0x3ff, // otherwise for example EN
>           nTmp;
> 
>     if( ((nTmp = nTmpKey1) != (ULONG)eLang &&
>@@ -1809,7 +1776,7 @@ const SvxAutocorrWord* SvxAutoCorrect::SearchWordsInList(
>          ( pLangTable->IsKeyValid( nTmpKey2 ) ||
>            CreateLanguageFile( LanguageType( nTmpKey2 ), FALSE ) )) )
>     {
>-        //die Sprache ist vorhanden - also her damit
>+        //the language is available - so bring it on
>         SvxAutoCorrectLanguageListsPtr pList = pLangTable->Seek( nTmp );
>         pRet = lcl_SearchWordsInList( pList, rTxt, rStt, nEndPos, rDoc);
>         if( pRet )
>@@ -1821,7 +1788,7 @@ const SvxAutocorrWord* SvxAutoCorrect::SearchWordsInList(
>     if( pLangTable->IsKeyValid( ULONG( LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW ) ) ||
>         CreateLanguageFile( LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW, FALSE ) )
>     {
>-        //die Sprache ist vorhanden - also her damit
>+        //the language is available - so bring it on
>         SvxAutoCorrectLanguageListsPtr pList = pLangTable->Seek(ULONG(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW));
>         pRet = lcl_SearchWordsInList( pList, rTxt, rStt, nEndPos, rDoc);
>         if( pRet )
>@@ -1836,22 +1803,22 @@ const SvxAutocorrWord* SvxAutoCorrect::SearchWordsInList(
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FindInWrdSttExceptList( LanguageType eLang,
>                                              const String& sWord )
> {
>-    //zuerst nach eLang suchen, dann nach der Obersprace US-Englisch -> Englisch
>-    //und zuletzt in LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW
>-    ULONG nTmpKey1 = eLang & 0x7ff; // die Hauptsprache in vielen Faellen u.B. DE
>-    ULONG nTmpKey2 = eLang & 0x3ff; // sonst z.B. EN
>+    // First search for eLang, then US-English -> English 
>+    // and last in LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW
>+    ULONG nTmpKey1 = eLang & 0x7ff; // the main language in many cases DE
>+    ULONG nTmpKey2 = eLang & 0x3ff; // otherwise for example EN
>     String sTemp(sWord);
>     if( pLangTable->IsKeyValid( ULONG( eLang )) ||
>         CreateLanguageFile( eLang, FALSE ) )
>     {
>-        //die Sprache ist vorhanden - also her damit
>+        //the language is available - so bring it on
>         SvxAutoCorrectLanguageListsPtr pList = pLangTable->Seek(ULONG(eLang));
>         String _sTemp(sWord);
>         if(pList->GetWrdSttExceptList()->Seek_Entry(&_sTemp))
>             return TRUE;
> 
>     }
>-    // wenn es hier noch nicht gefunden werden konnte, dann weitersuchen
>+    // If it still could not be found here, then keep on searching
>     ULONG nTmp;
>     if( ((nTmp = nTmpKey1) != (ULONG)eLang &&
>          ( pLangTable->IsKeyValid( nTmpKey1 ) ||
>@@ -1860,14 +1827,14 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FindInWrdSttExceptList( LanguageType eLang,
>          ( pLangTable->IsKeyValid( nTmpKey2 ) ||
>            CreateLanguageFile( LanguageType( nTmpKey2 ), FALSE ) )) )
>     {
>-        //die Sprache ist vorhanden - also her damit
>+        //the language is available - so bring it on
>         SvxAutoCorrectLanguageListsPtr pList = pLangTable->Seek(nTmp);
>         if(pList->GetWrdSttExceptList()->Seek_Entry(&sTemp))
>             return TRUE;
>     }
>     if(pLangTable->IsKeyValid(ULONG(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW))|| CreateLanguageFile(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW, FALSE))
>     {
>-        //die Sprache ist vorhanden - also her damit
>+        //the language is available - so bring it on
>         SvxAutoCorrectLanguageListsPtr pList = pLangTable->Seek(ULONG(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW));
>         if(pList->GetWrdSttExceptList()->Seek_Entry(&sTemp))
>             return TRUE;
>@@ -1889,13 +1856,13 @@ BOOL lcl_FindAbbreviation( const SvStringsISortDtor* pList, const String& sWord)
>                 '~' == ( pAbk = (*pList)[ n ])->GetChar( 0 );
>             ++n )
>         {
>-            // ~ und ~. sind nicht erlaubt!
>+            // ~ and ~. are not allowed!
>             if( 2 < pAbk->Len() && pAbk->Len() - 1 <= sWord.Len() )
>             {
>                 String sLowerAbk( *pAbk ); sLowerAbk.ToLowerAscii();
>                 for( xub_StrLen i = sLowerAbk.Len(), ii = sLowerWord.Len(); i; )
>                 {
>-                    if( !--i )		// stimmt ueberein
>+                    if( !--i )		// agrees
>                         return TRUE;
> 
>                     if( sLowerAbk.GetChar( i ) != sLowerWord.GetChar( --ii ))
>@@ -1905,29 +1872,29 @@ BOOL lcl_FindAbbreviation( const SvStringsISortDtor* pList, const String& sWord)
>         }
>     }
>     DBG_ASSERT( !(nPos && '~' == (*pList)[ --nPos ]->GetChar( 0 ) ),
>-            "falsch sortierte ExeptionListe?" );
>+            "Wrongly sorted exception list?" );
>     return FALSE;
> }
> 
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FindInCplSttExceptList(LanguageType eLang,
>                                 const String& sWord, BOOL bAbbreviation)
> {
>-    //zuerst nach eLang suchen, dann nach der Obersprace US-Englisch -> Englisch
>-    //und zuletzt in LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW
>-    ULONG nTmpKey1 = eLang & 0x7ff; // die Hauptsprache in vielen Faellen u.B. DE
>-    ULONG nTmpKey2 = eLang & 0x3ff; // sonst z.B. EN
>+    // First search for eLang, then US-English -> English 
>+    // and last in LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW
>+    ULONG nTmpKey1 = eLang & 0x7ff; // the main language in many cases DE
>+    ULONG nTmpKey2 = eLang & 0x3ff; // otherwise for example EN
>     String sTemp( sWord );
>     if( pLangTable->IsKeyValid( ULONG( eLang )) ||
>         CreateLanguageFile( eLang, FALSE ))
>     {
>-        //die Sprache ist vorhanden - also her damit
>+        //the language is available - so bring it on
>         SvxAutoCorrectLanguageListsPtr pLists = pLangTable->Seek(ULONG(eLang));
>         const SvStringsISortDtor* pList = pLists->GetCplSttExceptList();
>         if(bAbbreviation ? lcl_FindAbbreviation( pList, sWord)
>                          : pList->Seek_Entry( &sTemp ) )
>             return TRUE;
>     }
>-    // wenn es hier noch nicht gefunden werden konnte, dann weitersuchen
>+    // If it still could not be found here, then keep on searching
>     ULONG nTmp;
> 
>     if( ((nTmp = nTmpKey1) != (ULONG)eLang &&
>@@ -1937,7 +1904,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FindInCplSttExceptList(LanguageType eLang,
>          ( pLangTable->IsKeyValid( nTmpKey2 ) ||
>            CreateLanguageFile( LanguageType( nTmpKey2 ), FALSE ) )) )
>     {
>-        //die Sprache ist vorhanden - also her damit
>+        //the language is available - so bring it on
>         SvxAutoCorrectLanguageListsPtr pLists = pLangTable->Seek(nTmp);
>         const SvStringsISortDtor* pList = pLists->GetCplSttExceptList();
>         if(bAbbreviation ? lcl_FindAbbreviation( pList, sWord)
>@@ -1946,7 +1913,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrect::FindInCplSttExceptList(LanguageType eLang,
>     }
>     if(pLangTable->IsKeyValid(ULONG(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW))|| CreateLanguageFile(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW, FALSE))
>     {
>-        //die Sprache ist vorhanden - also her damit
>+        //the language is available - so bring it on
>         SvxAutoCorrectLanguageListsPtr pLists = pLangTable->Seek(LANGUAGE_DONTKNOW);
>         const SvStringsISortDtor* pList = pLists->GetCplSttExceptList();
>         if(bAbbreviation ? lcl_FindAbbreviation( pList, sWord)
>@@ -2002,14 +1969,13 @@ SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::~SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists()
> 
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::IsFileChanged_Imp()
> {
>-    // nur alle 2 Minuten aufs FileSystem zugreifen um den
>-    // Dateistempel zu ueberpruefen
>+    // Access the file system only every 2 minutes to check the date stamp
>     BOOL bRet = FALSE;
> 
>     Time nMinTime( 0, 2 );
>     Time nAktTime;
>-    if( aLastCheckTime > nAktTime ||	   				// ueberlauf ?
>-        ( nAktTime -= aLastCheckTime ) > nMinTime )		// min Zeit vergangen
>+    if( aLastCheckTime > nAktTime ||	   				// overflow?
>+        ( nAktTime -= aLastCheckTime ) > nMinTime )		// min time past
>     {
>         Date aTstDate; Time aTstTime;
>         if( FStatHelper::GetModifiedDateTimeOfFile( sShareAutoCorrFile,
>@@ -2017,7 +1983,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::IsFileChanged_Imp()
>             ( aModifiedDate != aTstDate || aModifiedTime != aTstTime ))
>         {
>             bRet = TRUE;
>-            // dann mal schnell alle Listen entfernen!
>+            // then remove all the lists fast!
>             if( CplSttLstLoad & nFlags && pCplStt_ExcptLst )
>                 delete pCplStt_ExcptLst, pCplStt_ExcptLst = 0;
>             if( WrdSttLstLoad & nFlags && pWrdStt_ExcptLst )
>@@ -2084,8 +2050,6 @@ void SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::LoadXMLExceptList_Imp(
>                 }
> 
>                 // get filter
>-                // #110680#
>-                // uno::Reference< xml::sax::XDocumentHandler > xFilter = new SvXMLExceptionListImport ( *rpLst );
>                 uno::Reference< xml::sax::XDocumentHandler > xFilter = new SvXMLExceptionListImport ( xServiceFactory, *rpLst );
> 
>                 // connect parser and filter
>@@ -2112,7 +2076,7 @@ void SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::LoadXMLExceptList_Imp(
>             }
>         }
> 
>-        // Zeitstempel noch setzen
>+        // Set time stamp
>         FStatHelper::GetModifiedDateTimeOfFile( sShareAutoCorrFile,
>                                         &aModifiedDate, &aModifiedTime );
>         aLastCheckTime = Time();
>@@ -2167,8 +2131,6 @@ void SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::SaveExceptList_Imp(
> 
>                     uno::Reference<xml::sax::XDocumentHandler> xHandler(xWriter, uno::UNO_QUERY);
> 
>-                // #110680#
>-                    // SvXMLExceptionListExport aExp(rLst, sStrmName, xHandler);
>                     SvXMLExceptionListExport aExp( xServiceFactory, rLst, sStrmName, xHandler );
> 
>                 aExp.exportDoc( XML_BLOCK_LIST );
>@@ -2230,7 +2192,7 @@ SvxAutocorrWordList* SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::LoadAutocorrWordList()
>     {
>     }
> 
>-    // Zeitstempel noch setzen
>+    // Set time stamp
>     FStatHelper::GetModifiedDateTimeOfFile( sShareAutoCorrFile,
>                                     &aModifiedDate, &aModifiedTime );
>     aLastCheckTime = Time();
>@@ -2245,7 +2207,7 @@ void SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::SetAutocorrWordList( SvxAutocorrWordList* pLis
>     pAutocorr_List = pList;
>     if( !pAutocorr_List )
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERT( !this, "keine gueltige Liste" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( !this, "No valid list" );
>         pAutocorr_List = new SvxAutocorrWordList( 16, 16 );
>     }
>     nFlags |= ChgWordLstLoad;
>@@ -2276,7 +2238,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::AddToCplSttExceptList(const String& rNew)
>         SaveExceptList_Imp( *pCplStt_ExcptLst, pXMLImplCplStt_ExcptLstStr, xStg );
> 
>         xStg = 0;
>-        // Zeitstempel noch setzen
>+        // Set time stamp
>         FStatHelper::GetModifiedDateTimeOfFile( sUserAutoCorrFile,
>                                             &aModifiedDate, &aModifiedTime );
>         aLastCheckTime = Time();
>@@ -2298,7 +2260,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::AddToWrdSttExceptList(const String& rNew)
>         SaveExceptList_Imp( *pWrdStt_ExcptLst, pXMLImplWrdStt_ExcptLstStr, xStg );
> 
>         xStg = 0;
>-        // Zeitstempel noch setzen
>+        // Set time stamp
>         FStatHelper::GetModifiedDateTimeOfFile( sUserAutoCorrFile,
>                                             &aModifiedDate, &aModifiedTime );
>         aLastCheckTime = Time();
>@@ -2327,7 +2289,7 @@ void SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::SaveCplSttExceptList()
> 
>     xStg = 0;
> 
>-    // Zeitstempel noch setzen
>+    // Set time stamp
>     FStatHelper::GetModifiedDateTimeOfFile( sUserAutoCorrFile,
>                                             &aModifiedDate, &aModifiedTime );
>     aLastCheckTime = Time();
>@@ -2341,7 +2303,7 @@ void SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::SetCplSttExceptList( SvStringsISortDtor* pList
>     pCplStt_ExcptLst = pList;
>     if( !pCplStt_ExcptLst )
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERT( !this, "keine gueltige Liste" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( !this, "No valid list" );
>         pCplStt_ExcptLst = new SvStringsISortDtor( 16, 16 );
>     }
>     nFlags |= CplSttLstLoad;
>@@ -2364,7 +2326,7 @@ void SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::SaveWrdSttExceptList()
>     SaveExceptList_Imp( *pWrdStt_ExcptLst, pXMLImplWrdStt_ExcptLstStr, xStg );
> 
>     xStg = 0;
>-    // Zeitstempel noch setzen
>+    // Set time stamp
>     FStatHelper::GetModifiedDateTimeOfFile( sUserAutoCorrFile,
>                                             &aModifiedDate, &aModifiedTime );
>     aLastCheckTime = Time();
>@@ -2377,7 +2339,7 @@ void SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::SetWrdSttExceptList( SvStringsISortDtor* pList
>     pWrdStt_ExcptLst = pList;
>     if( !pWrdStt_ExcptLst )
>     {
>-        DBG_ASSERT( !this, "keine gueltige Liste" );
>+        DBG_ASSERT( !this, "No valid list" );
>         pWrdStt_ExcptLst = new SvStringsISortDtor( 16, 16 );
>     }
>     nFlags |= WrdSttLstLoad;
>@@ -2416,13 +2378,9 @@ void SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::MakeUserStorage_Impl()
>     INetURLObject aDest;
>     INetURLObject aSource;
> 
>-//	String sDestPath = sUserAutoCorrFile.Copy ( 0, sUserAutoCorrFile.Len()-3);
>-//	sDestPath.AppendAscii ("bak");
>-
>-
>     if (sUserAutoCorrFile != sShareAutoCorrFile )
>     {
>-        aSource = INetURLObject ( sShareAutoCorrFile ); //aSource.setFSysPath ( sShareAutoCorrFile, INetURLObject::FSYS_DETECT );
>+        aSource = INetURLObject ( sShareAutoCorrFile ); 
>         aDest = INetURLObject ( sUserAutoCorrFile );
>         if ( SotStorage::IsOLEStorage ( sShareAutoCorrFile ) )
>         {
>@@ -2496,8 +2454,6 @@ void SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::MakeUserStorage_Impl()
> 
>             GetAutocorrWordList();
>             MakeBlocklist_Imp( *xDstStg );
>-            // xDstStg is committed in MakeBlocklist_Imp
>-            /*xSrcStg->CopyTo( &xDstStg );*/
>             sShareAutoCorrFile = sUserAutoCorrFile;
>             xDstStg = 0;
>             try
>@@ -2520,13 +2476,6 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::MakeBlocklist_Imp( SvStorage& rStg )
>     BOOL bRet = TRUE, bRemove = !pAutocorr_List || !pAutocorr_List->Count();
>     if( !bRemove )
>     {
>-        /*
>-        if ( rStg.IsContained( sStrmName) )
>-        {
>-            rStg.Remove ( sStrmName );
>-            rStg.Commit();
>-        }
>-        */
>         SvStorageStreamRef refList = rStg.OpenSotStream( sStrmName,
>                     ( STREAM_READ | STREAM_WRITE | STREAM_SHARE_DENYWRITE ) );
>         if( refList.Is() )
>@@ -2557,8 +2506,6 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::MakeBlocklist_Imp( SvStorage& rStg )
> 
>                 uno::Reference<xml::sax::XDocumentHandler> xHandler(xWriter, uno::UNO_QUERY);
> 
>-            // #110680#
>-                // SvXMLAutoCorrectExport aExp(pAutocorr_List, sStrmName, xHandler);
>                 SvXMLAutoCorrectExport aExp( xServiceFactory, pAutocorr_List, sStrmName, xHandler );
> 
>             aExp.exportDoc( XML_BLOCK_LIST );
>@@ -2576,39 +2523,6 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::MakeBlocklist_Imp( SvStorage& rStg )
>                 }
>             }
> 
>-            /*
>-            refList->SetSize( 0 );
>-            refList->SetBufferSize( 8192 );
>-            rtl_TextEncoding eEncoding = gsl_getSystemTextEncoding();
>-
>-            String aDummy;				// Erkennungszeichen fuer neue Streams
>-            refList->WriteByteString( aDummy, RTL_TEXTENCODING_MS_1252 )
>-                     << (BYTE)	4		// Laenge des Headers (ohne den Leerstring)
>-                     << (USHORT)WORDLIST_VERSION_358	// Version des Streams
>-                     << (BYTE)eEncoding;				// der Zeichensatz
>-
>-            for( USHORT i = 0; i < pAutocorr_List->Count() &&
>-                                SVSTREAM_OK == refList->GetError(); ++i )
>-            {
>-                SvxAutocorrWord* p = pAutocorr_List->GetObject( i );
>-                refList->WriteByteString( p->GetShort(), eEncoding ).
>-                        WriteByteString(  p->IsTextOnly()
>-                                            ? p->GetLong()
>-                                            : p->GetShort(), eEncoding );
>-            }
>-            refList->Commit();
>-            bRet = SVSTREAM_OK == refList->GetError();
>-            if( bRet )
>-            {
>-                refList.Clear();
>-                rStg.Commit();
>-                if( SVSTREAM_OK != rStg.GetError() )
>-                {
>-                    bRemove = TRUE;
>-                    bRet = FALSE;
>-                }
>-            }
>-            */
>         }
>         else
>             bRet = FALSE;
>@@ -2626,7 +2540,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::MakeBlocklist_Imp( SvStorage& rStg )
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::PutText( const String& rShort,
>                                            const String& rLong )
> {
>-    // erstmal akt. Liste besorgen!
>+    // First get the current list!
>     GetAutocorrWordList();
> 
>     MakeUserStorage_Impl();
>@@ -2634,12 +2548,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::PutText( const String& rShort,
> 
>     BOOL bRet = xStg.Is() && SVSTREAM_OK == xStg->GetError();
> 
>-/*	if( bRet )
>-    {
>-        // PutText( *xStg, rShort );
>-    }
>-*/
>-    // die Wortliste aktualisieren
>+    // Update the word list
>     if( bRet )
>     {
>         USHORT nPos;
>@@ -2648,7 +2557,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::PutText( const String& rShort,
>         {
>             if( !(*pAutocorr_List)[ nPos ]->IsTextOnly() )
>             {
>-                // dann ist der Storage noch zu entfernen
>+                // Still have to remove the Storage
>                 String sStgNm( rShort );
>                 if (xStg->IsOLEStorage())
>                     EncryptBlockName_Imp( sStgNm );
>@@ -2675,11 +2584,11 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::PutText( const String& rShort,
>     return bRet;
> }
> 
>-// Text mit Attributierung (kann nur der SWG - SWG-Format!)
>+// Text with attribution (only the SWG - SWG format!)
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::PutText( const String& rShort,
>                                         SfxObjectShell& rShell )
> {
>-    // erstmal akt. Liste besorgen!
>+    // First get the current list!
>     GetAutocorrWordList();
> 
>     MakeUserStorage_Impl();
>@@ -2689,13 +2598,10 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::PutText( const String& rShort,
>     try
>     {
>         uno::Reference < embed::XStorage > xStg = comphelper::OStorageHelper::GetStorageFromURL( sUserAutoCorrFile, embed::ElementModes::READWRITE );
>-//		String aName( rShort );
>-//		EncryptBlockName_Imp( aName );
>-//		bRet = PutText( *xStg, aName, rShell, sLong );
>         bRet = rAutoCorrect.PutText( xStg, sUserAutoCorrFile, rShort, rShell, sLong );
>         xStg = 0;
> 
>-        // die Wortliste aktualisieren
>+        // Update the word list
>         if( bRet )
>         {
>             SvxAutocorrWord* pNew = new SvxAutocorrWord( rShort, sLong, FALSE );
>@@ -2715,10 +2621,10 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::PutText( const String& rShort,
>     return bRet;
> }
> 
>-// loesche einen Eintrag
>+// Delete an entry
> BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::DeleteText( const String& rShort )
> {
>-    // erstmal akt. Liste besorgen!
>+    // First get the current list!
>     GetAutocorrWordList();
> 
>     MakeUserStorage_Impl();
>@@ -2746,7 +2652,7 @@ BOOL SvxAutoCorrectLanguageLists::DeleteText( const String& rShort )
>                 }
> 
>             }
>-            // die Wortliste aktualisieren
>+            // Update the word list
>             pAutocorr_List->DeleteAndDestroy( nPos );
>             MakeBlocklist_Imp( *xStg );
>             xStg = 0;
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/txtrange.cxx b/editeng/source/misc/txtrange.cxx
>index cc750a9..7cadf52 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/txtrange.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/txtrange.cxx
>@@ -36,12 +36,15 @@
> #include <basegfx/polygon/b2dpolygon.hxx>
> #include <basegfx/polygon/b2dpolygontools.hxx>
> 
>+<<<<<<< HEAD
>+=======
> /*************************************************************************
> |*
> |*    TextRanger::TextRanger()
> |*
> *************************************************************************/
> 
>+>>>>>>> 4a8517e08d2e56cb730ed50f3d2cd73107a4d179
> #ifdef WIN
> #pragma optimize ( "", off )
> #endif
>@@ -98,12 +101,15 @@ TextRanger::TextRanger( const basegfx::B2DPolyPolygon& rPolyPolygon, const baseg
> #pragma optimize ( "", on )
> #endif
> 
>+<<<<<<< HEAD
>+=======
> /*************************************************************************
> |*
> |*    TextRanger::~TextRanger()
> |*
> *************************************************************************/
> 
>+>>>>>>> 4a8517e08d2e56cb730ed50f3d2cd73107a4d179
> TextRanger::~TextRanger()
> {
>     for( USHORT i = 0; i < nCacheSize; ++i )
>@@ -130,12 +136,15 @@ void TextRanger::SetVertical( BOOL bNew )
>     }
> }
> 
>+<<<<<<< HEAD
>+=======
> /*************************************************************************
> |*
> |*    SvxBoundArgs
> |*
> *************************************************************************/
> 
>+>>>>>>> 4a8517e08d2e56cb730ed50f3d2cd73107a4d179
> class SvxBoundArgs
> {
>     SvBools aBoolArr;
>@@ -290,18 +299,17 @@ void SvxBoundArgs::NoteRange( BOOL bToggle )
>     while( nIdx < nCount && (*pLongArr)[ nIdx ] < nMin )
>         ++nIdx;
>     BOOL bOdd = nIdx % 2 ? TRUE : FALSE;
>-    // Kein Ueberlappung mit vorhandenen Intervallen?
>+    // No overlap with existing intervals?
>     if( nIdx == nCount || ( !bOdd && nMax < (*pLongArr)[ nIdx ] ) )
>-    {	// Dann wird ein neues eingefuegt ...
>+    {	// Then a new one is inserted ...
>         pLongArr->Insert( nMin, nIdx );
>         pLongArr->Insert( nMax, nIdx + 1 );
>         aBoolArr.Insert( bToggle, nIdx / 2 );
>     }
>     else
>-    {   // ein vorhandes Intervall erweitern ...
>+    {   // expand an existing interval ...
>         USHORT nMaxIdx = nIdx;
>-        // Wenn wir auf einer linken Intervallgrenze gelandet sind, muss diese
>-        // auf nMin gesenkt werden.
>+        // If we end up on a left interval boundary, it must be reduced to nMin.
>         if( bOdd )
>             --nIdx;
>         else
>@@ -313,13 +321,12 @@ void SvxBoundArgs::NoteRange( BOOL bToggle )
>             --nMaxIdx;
>         if( nMaxIdx < nIdx )
>             nMaxIdx = nIdx;
>-        // Wenn wir auf einer rechten Intervallgrenze landen, muss diese
>-        // auf nMax angehoben werden.
>+        // If we end up on a right interval boundary, it must be raised to nMax.
>         if( nMaxIdx % 2 )
>             (*pLongArr)[ nMaxIdx-- ] = nMax;
>-        // Jetzt werden eventuell noch Intervalle verschmolzen
>+        // Possible merge of intervals.
>         USHORT nDiff = nMaxIdx - nIdx;
>-        nMaxIdx = nIdx / 2; // Ab hier ist nMaxIdx der Index im BoolArray.
>+        nMaxIdx = nIdx / 2; // From here on is nMaxIdx the Index in BoolArray.
>         if( nDiff )
>         {
>             (*pLongArr).Remove( nIdx + 1, nDiff );
>@@ -355,7 +362,7 @@ void SvxBoundArgs::Calc( const PolyPolygon& rPoly )
>             }
>             else
>             {
>-                // Der erste Punkt des Polygons liegt innerhalb der Zeile.
>+                // The first point of the polygon is within the line.
>                 if( nLast )
>                 {
>                     if( bMultiple || !nAct )
>@@ -379,8 +386,8 @@ void SvxBoundArgs::Calc( const PolyPolygon& rPoly )
>                     else
>                         NotePoint( A(rNull) );
>                 }
>-                nFirst = 0;	// In welcher Richtung wird die Zeile verlassen?
>-                nAct = 3;	// Wir sind z.Z. innerhalb der Zeile.
>+                nFirst = 0;	// leaving the line in which direction?  
>+                nAct = 3;	// we are within the line at the moment.
>             }
>             if( nCount > 1 )
>             {
>@@ -514,12 +521,10 @@ void SvxBoundArgs::Add()
>             pLongArr->Remove( 0, 1 );
>             pLongArr->Remove( pLongArr->Count() - 1, 1 );
> 
>-            // Hier wird die Zeile beim "einfachen" Konturumfluss im Innern
>-            // in ein grosses Rechteck zusammengefasst.
>-            // Zur Zeit (April 1999) wertet die EditEngine nur das erste Rechteck
>-            // aus, falls sie eines Tages in der Lage ist, eine Zeile in mehreren
>-            // Teilen auszugeben, kann es sinnvoll sein, die folgenden Zeilen
>-            // zu loeschen.
>+            // Here the line is held inside a large rectangle for "simple"
>+            // contour wrap. Currently (April 1999) the EditEngine evaluates 
>+            // only the first rectangle. If it one day is able to output a line
>+            // in several parts, it may be advisable to delete the following lines.
>             if( pTextRanger->IsSimple() && pLongArr->Count() > 2 )
>                 pLongArr->Remove( 1, pLongArr->Count() - 2 );
> 
>@@ -544,7 +549,7 @@ void SvxBoundArgs::Concat( const PolyPolygon* pPoly )
>     {
>         USHORT nOldCount = pOld->Count();
>         if( nIdx == nOldCount )
>-        {   // Am Ende des alten Arrays angelangt...
>+        {   // Reached the end of the old Array...
>             if( !bSubtract )
>                 pOld->Insert( pLongArr, nIdx, i, USHRT_MAX );
>             break;
>@@ -555,7 +560,7 @@ void SvxBoundArgs::Concat( const PolyPolygon* pPoly )
>         while( nLeftPos < nOldCount && nLeft > (*pOld)[ nLeftPos ] )
>             nLeftPos += 2;
>         if( nLeftPos >= nOldCount )
>-        {	// Das aktuelle Intervall gehoert ans Ende des alten Arrays...
>+        {	// The current interval belongs to the end of the old array ...
>             if( !bSubtract )
>                 pOld->Insert( pLongArr, nOldCount, i - 2, USHRT_MAX );
>             break;
>@@ -564,16 +569,16 @@ void SvxBoundArgs::Concat( const PolyPolygon* pPoly )
>         while( nRightPos < nOldCount && nRight >= (*pOld)[ nRightPos ] )
>             nRightPos += 2;
>         if( nRightPos < nLeftPos )
>-        {   // Das aktuelle Intervall gehoert zwischen zwei alte Intervalle
>+        {   // The current interval belongs between two old intervals
>             if( !bSubtract )
>                 pOld->Insert( pLongArr, nRightPos, i - 2, i );
>             nIdx = nRightPos + 2;
>         }
>-        else if( bSubtract ) // Subtrahieren ggf. Trennen
>+        else if( bSubtract ) // Subtract, if necessary separate
>         {
>             long nOld;
>             if( nLeft > ( nOld = (*pOld)[ nLeftPos - 1 ] ) )
>-            {   // Jetzt spalten wir den linken Teil ab...
>+            {   // Now we split the left part...
>                 if( nLeft - 1 > nOld )
>                 {
>                     pOld->Insert( nOld, nLeftPos - 1 );
>@@ -589,7 +594,7 @@ void SvxBoundArgs::Concat( const PolyPolygon* pPoly )
>             else
>                 (*pOld)[ nLeftPos - 1 ] = nRight;
>         }
>-        else // Verschmelzen
>+        else // Merge
>         {
>             if( nLeft < (*pOld)[ nLeftPos - 1 ] )
>                 (*pOld)[ nLeftPos - 1 ] = nLeft;
>@@ -605,12 +610,12 @@ void SvxBoundArgs::Concat( const PolyPolygon* pPoly )
> }
> 
> /*************************************************************************
>- * SvxBoundArgs::Area ermittelt den Bereich, in dem sich der Punkt befindet
>- * 0 = innerhalb der Zeile
>- * 1 = unterhalb, aber innerhalb der oberen Randes
>- * 2 = oberhalb, aber innerhalb der unteren Randes
>- * 5 = unterhalb des oberen Randes
>- *10 = oberhalb des unteren Randes
>+ * SvxBoundArgs::Area returns the area in which the point is located.
>+ * 0 = within the line
>+ * 1 = below, but within the upper edge
>+ * 2 = above, but within the lower edge
>+ * 5 = below the upper edge
>+ *10 = above the lower edge
>  *************************************************************************/
> 
> USHORT SvxBoundArgs::Area( const Point& rPt )
>@@ -632,10 +637,10 @@ USHORT SvxBoundArgs::Area( const Point& rPt )
> }
> 
> /*************************************************************************
>- * lcl_Cut berechnet die X-Koordinate der Strecke (Pt1-Pt2) auf der
>- * Y-Koordinate nY.
>- * Vorausgesetzt wird, dass einer der Punkte oberhalb und der andere
>- * unterhalb der Y-Koordinate liegt.
>+ * lcl_Cut calculates the X-Coordinate of the distance (Pt1-Pt2) at the
>+ * Y-Coordinate nY.
>+ * It is assumed that the one of the points are located above and the other 
>+ * one below the Y-Coordinate.
>  *************************************************************************/
> 
> long SvxBoundArgs::Cut( long nB, const Point& rPt1, const Point& rPt2 )
>diff --git a/editeng/source/misc/unolingu.cxx b/editeng/source/misc/unolingu.cxx
>index 5ebdbc6..d8c67cf 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/misc/unolingu.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/misc/unolingu.cxx
>@@ -938,9 +938,6 @@ void LinguMgrExitLstnr::AtExit()
> 
>     LinguMgr::bExiting		= sal_True;
> 
>-    //TL:TODO: MBA fragen wie ich ohne Absturz hier meinen Speicher
>-    //  wieder freibekomme...
>-    //delete LinguMgr::pExitLstnr;
>     LinguMgr::pExitLstnr	= 0;
> }
> 
>@@ -1029,15 +1026,6 @@ uno::Reference< XSpellChecker1 > LinguMgr::GetSpell()
>     //! use dummy implementation in order to avoid loading of lingu DLL
>     xSpell = new SpellDummy_Impl;
> 
>-/*    if (!xLngSvcMgr.is())
>-        xLngSvcMgr = GetLngSvcMgr_Impl();
>-
>-    if (xLngSvcMgr.is())
>-    {
>-        xSpell = uno::Reference< XSpellChecker1 > (
>-                        xLngSvcMgr->getSpellChecker(), UNO_QUERY );
>-    }
>-*/
>     return xSpell;
> }
> 
>@@ -1052,15 +1040,6 @@ uno::Reference< XHyphenator > LinguMgr::GetHyph()
>     //! use dummy implementation in order to avoid loading of lingu DLL
>     xHyph = new HyphDummy_Impl;
> 
>-/*
>-    if (!xLngSvcMgr.is())
>-        xLngSvcMgr = GetLngSvcMgr_Impl();
>-
>-    if (xLngSvcMgr.is())
>-    {
>-        xHyph = xLngSvcMgr->getHyphenator();
>-    }
>-*/
>     return xHyph;
> }
> 
>@@ -1077,15 +1056,7 @@ uno::Reference< XThesaurus > LinguMgr::GetThes()
>     //! The dummy accesses the real implementation (and thus loading the DLL)
>     //! when "real" work needs to be done only.
>     xThes = new ThesDummy_Impl;
>-/*
>-    if (!xLngSvcMgr.is())
>-        xLngSvcMgr = GetLngSvcMgr_Impl();
> 
>-    if (xLngSvcMgr.is())
>-    {
>-        xThes = xLngSvcMgr->getThesaurus();
>-    }
>-*/
>     return xThes;
> }
> 
>@@ -1244,7 +1215,7 @@ uno::Reference< XPropertySet > 	SvxGetLinguPropertySet()
>     return LinguMgr::GetLinguPropertySet();
> }
> 
>-//TL:TODO: remove argument or provide SvxGetIgnoreAllList with the same one
>+//TODO: remove argument or provide SvxGetIgnoreAllList with the same one
> uno::Reference< XDictionary >  SvxGetOrCreatePosDic(
>         uno::Reference< XDictionaryList >  /* xDicList */ )
> {
>@@ -1349,7 +1320,6 @@ short SvxDicError( Window *pParent, sal_Int16 nError )
> 
> LanguageType SvxLocaleToLanguage( const Locale& rLocale )
> {
>-    //	empty Locale -> LANGUAGE_NONE
>     if ( rLocale.Language.getLength() == 0 )
>         return LANGUAGE_NONE;
> 
>@@ -1358,7 +1328,7 @@ LanguageType SvxLocaleToLanguage( const Locale& rLocale )
> 
> Locale& SvxLanguageToLocale( Locale& rLocale, LanguageType eLang )
> {
>-    if ( eLang != LANGUAGE_NONE	/* &&  eLang != LANGUAGE_SYSTEM */)
>+    if ( eLang != LANGUAGE_NONE )
>         MsLangId::convertLanguageToLocale( eLang, rLocale );
>     else
>         rLocale = Locale();
>@@ -1369,7 +1339,7 @@ Locale& SvxLanguageToLocale( Locale& rLocale, LanguageType eLang )
> Locale SvxCreateLocale( LanguageType eLang )
> {
>     Locale aLocale;
>-    if ( eLang != LANGUAGE_NONE /* &&  eLang != LANGUAGE_SYSTEM */)
>+    if ( eLang != LANGUAGE_NONE )
>         MsLangId::convertLanguageToLocale( eLang, aLocale );
> 
>     return aLocale;
>diff --git a/editeng/source/outliner/outleeng.cxx b/editeng/source/outliner/outleeng.cxx
>index 6db152d..2767305 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/outliner/outleeng.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/outliner/outleeng.cxx
>@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ void OutlinerEditEng::DrawingTab( const Point& rStartPos, long nWidth, const Str
> 
> void OutlinerEditEng::FieldClicked( const SvxFieldItem& rField, USHORT nPara, USHORT nPos )
> {
>-    EditEngine::FieldClicked( rField, nPara, nPos );	// Falls URL
>+    EditEngine::FieldClicked( rField, nPara, nPos );	// If URL
>     pOwner->FieldClicked( rField, nPara, nPos );
> }
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/outliner/outleeng.hxx b/editeng/source/outliner/outleeng.hxx
>index a18bd95..11baca5 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/outliner/outleeng.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/outliner/outleeng.hxx
>@@ -54,7 +54,6 @@ public:
>     virtual void 		ParagraphDeleted( USHORT nDeletedParagraph );
>     virtual void        ParagraphConnected( USHORT nLeftParagraph, USHORT nRightParagraph );
> 
>-    // #101498#
>     virtual void DrawingText(
>         const Point& rStartPos, const XubString& rText, USHORT nTextStart, USHORT nTextLen, const sal_Int32* pDXArray, const SvxFont& rFont,
>         USHORT nPara, USHORT nIndex, BYTE nRightToLeft,
>diff --git a/editeng/source/outliner/outlin2.cxx b/editeng/source/outliner/outlin2.cxx
>index 279479c..f6dfff5 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/outliner/outlin2.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/outliner/outlin2.cxx
>@@ -57,8 +57,8 @@ DBG_NAMEEX(Outliner)
> using namespace ::com::sun::star::uno;
> using namespace ::com::sun::star::linguistic2;
> 
>-// =====================================================================
>-// ======================   Einfache Durchreicher =======================
>+// ======================================================================
>+// ======================   Simple pass-through   =======================
> // ======================================================================
> 
> void Outliner::SetUpdateMode( BOOL bUpdate )
>diff --git a/editeng/source/outliner/outliner.cxx b/editeng/source/outliner/outliner.cxx
>index 6188d68..9d594e4 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/outliner/outliner.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/outliner/outliner.cxx
>@@ -63,14 +63,14 @@
> #include <editeng/brshitem.hxx>
> #include <svl/itempool.hxx>
> 
>-// #101498# calculate if it's RTL or not
>+// calculate if it's RTL or not
> #include <unicode/ubidi.h>
> 
> using ::std::advance;
> 
> #define DEFAULT_SCALE	75
> 
>-static const USHORT nDefStyles = 3;	// Sonderbehandlung fuer die ersten 3 Ebenen
>+static const USHORT nDefStyles = 3;	// Special treatment for the first 3 levels
> static const USHORT nDefBulletIndent = 800;
> static const USHORT nDefBulletWidth = 700;
> static const USHORT	pDefBulletIndents[nDefStyles]= 	{ 1400, 800, 800 };
>@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ void Outliner::ParagraphDeleted( USHORT nPara )
>         if ( pPara && ( pPara->GetDepth() > nDepth ) )
>         {
>             ImplCalcBulletText( nPara, TRUE, FALSE );
>-            // naechsten auf gleicher Ebene suchen...
>+            // Search for next on the this level ...
>             while ( pPara && pPara->GetDepth() > nDepth )
>                 pPara = pParaList->GetParagraph( ++nPara );
>         }
>@@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ void Outliner::SetText( const XubString& rText, Paragraph* pPara )
>         aText.ConvertLineEnd( LINEEND_LF );
> 
>         if( aText.GetChar( aText.Len()-1 ) == '\x0A' )
>-            aText.Erase( aText.Len()-1, 1 ); // letzten Umbruch loeschen
>+            aText.Erase( aText.Len()-1, 1 ); // Delete the last break
> 
>         USHORT nCount = aText.GetTokenCount( '\x0A' );
>         USHORT nPos = 0;
>@@ -447,20 +447,19 @@ void Outliner::SetText( const XubString& rText, Paragraph* pPara )
>             else
>                 nCurDepth = pPara->GetDepth();
> 
>-            // Im Outliner-Modus die Tabulatoren filtern und die
>-            // Einrueckung ueber ein LRSpaceItem einstellen
>-            // Im EditEngine-Modus ueber Maltes Tabulatoren einruecken
>+            // In the outliner mode, filter the tabs and set the indentation 
>+            // about a LRSpaceItem. In EditEngine mode intend over old tabs
>             if( ( ImplGetOutlinerMode() == OUTLINERMODE_OUTLINEOBJECT ) ||
>                 ( ImplGetOutlinerMode() == OUTLINERMODE_OUTLINEVIEW ) )
>             {
>-                // Tabs raus
>+                // Extract Tabs 
>                 USHORT nTabs = 0;
>                 while ( ( nTabs < aStr.Len() ) && ( aStr.GetChar( nTabs ) == '\t' ) )
>                     nTabs++;
>                 if ( nTabs )
>                     aStr.Erase( 0, nTabs );
> 
>-                // Tiefe beibehalten ?  (siehe Outliner::Insert)
>+                // Keep depth?  (see Outliner::Insert)
>                 if( !(pPara->nFlags & PARAFLAG_HOLDDEPTH) )
>                 {
>                     nCurDepth = nTabs-1;
>@@ -469,7 +468,7 @@ void Outliner::SetText( const XubString& rText, Paragraph* pPara )
>                     pPara->nFlags &= (~PARAFLAG_HOLDDEPTH);
>                 }
>             }
>-            if( nPos ) // nicht mit dem ersten Absatz
>+            if( nPos ) // not with the first paragraph
>             {
>                 pParaList->Insert( pPara, nInsPos );
>                 pEditEngine->InsertParagraph( nInsPos, aStr );
>@@ -493,7 +492,7 @@ void Outliner::SetText( const XubString& rText, Paragraph* pPara )
>     pEditEngine->SetUpdateMode( bUpdate );
> }
> 
>-// pView == 0 -> Tabulatoren nicht beachten
>+// pView == 0 -> Ignore tabs
> 
> bool Outliner::ImpConvertEdtToOut( sal_uInt32 nPara,EditView* pView)
> {
>@@ -528,11 +527,11 @@ bool Outliner::ImpConvertEdtToOut( sal_uInt32 nPara,EditView* pView)
> 
>     if ( nHeadingNumberStart || nNumberingNumberStart )
>     {
>-        // PowerPoint-Import ?
>+        // PowerPoint import ?
>         if( nHeadingNumberStart && ( aStr.Len() >= 2 ) &&
>                 ( pPtr[0] != '\t' ) && ( pPtr[1] == '\t' ) )
>         {
>-            // Bullet & Tab raus
>+            // Extract Bullet and Tab
>             aDelSel = ESelection( (USHORT)nPara, 0, (USHORT)nPara, 2 );
>         }
> 
>@@ -541,18 +540,18 @@ bool Outliner::ImpConvertEdtToOut( sal_uInt32 nPara,EditView* pView)
>         aLevel.EraseLeadingChars( ' ' );
>         nTabs = sal::static_int_cast< USHORT >(aLevel.ToInt32());
>         if( nTabs )
>-            nTabs--; // ebene 0 = "heading 1"
>+            nTabs--; // Level 0 = "heading 1"
>         bConverted = TRUE;
>     }
>     else
>     {
>-        //  Fuehrende Tabulatoren filtern
>+        // filter leading tabs
>         while( *pPtr == '\t' )
>         {
>             pPtr++;
>             nTabs++;
>         }
>-        // Tabulatoren aus dem Text entfernen
>+        // Remove tabs from the text
>         if( nTabs )
>             aDelSel = ESelection( (USHORT)nPara, 0, (USHORT)nPara, nTabs );
>     }
>@@ -695,7 +694,7 @@ XubString Outliner::CalcFieldValue( const SvxFieldItem& rField, USHORT nPara, US
>         return String( ' ' );
> 
>     EditFieldInfo aFldInfo( this, rField, nPara, nPos );
>-    // Die FldColor ist mit COL_LIGHTGRAY voreingestellt.
>+    // The FldColor is preset with COL_LIGHTGRAY.
>     if ( rpFldColor )
>         aFldInfo.SetFldColor( *rpFldColor );
> 
>@@ -791,9 +790,8 @@ void Outliner::ImplInitDepth( USHORT nPara, sal_Int16 nDepth, BOOL bCreateUndo,
>     sal_Int16 nOldDepth = pPara->GetDepth();
>     pPara->SetDepth( nDepth );
> 
>-    // Bei IsInUndo brauchen Attribute und Style nicht eingestellt werden,
>-    // dort werden die alten Werte durch die EditEngine restauriert.
>-
>+    // For IsInUndo attributes and style do not have to be set, there  
>+    // the old values are restored by the EditEngine.
>     if( !IsInUndo() )
>     {
>         BOOL bUpdate = pEditEngine->GetUpdateMode();
>@@ -861,7 +859,7 @@ BOOL Outliner::Expand( Paragraph* pPara )
> BOOL Outliner::Collapse( Paragraph* pPara )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(Outliner,0);
>-    if ( pParaList->HasVisibleChilds( pPara ) )	// expandiert
>+    if ( pParaList->HasVisibleChilds( pPara ) )	// expanded
>     {
>         OLUndoExpand* pUndo = 0;
>         BOOL bUndo = FALSE;
>@@ -897,7 +895,7 @@ Font Outliner::ImpCalcBulletFont( USHORT nPara ) const
>     const SvxNumberFormat* pFmt = GetNumberFormat( nPara );
>     DBG_ASSERT( pFmt && ( pFmt->GetNumberingType() != SVX_NUM_BITMAP ) && ( pFmt->GetNumberingType() != SVX_NUM_NUMBER_NONE ), "ImpCalcBulletFont: Missing or BitmapBullet!" );
> 
>-    Font aStdFont;  //#107508#
>+    Font aStdFont;  
>     if ( !pEditEngine->IsFlatMode() )
>     {
>         ESelection aSel( nPara, 0, nPara, 0 );
>@@ -923,7 +921,7 @@ Font Outliner::ImpCalcBulletFont( USHORT nPara ) const
>         aBulletFont.SetRelief( RELIEF_NONE );
>     }
> 
>-    // #107508# Use original scale...
>+    // Use original scale...
>     USHORT nStretchX, nStretchY;
>     const_cast<Outliner*>(this)->GetGlobalCharStretching(nStretchX, nStretchY);
> 
>@@ -984,7 +982,7 @@ void Outliner::PaintBullet( USHORT nPara, const Point& rStartPos,
>             if( pFmt->GetNumberingType() != SVX_NUM_BITMAP )
>             {
>                 Font aBulletFont( ImpCalcBulletFont( nPara ) );
>-                // #2338# Use base line
>+                // Use baseline
>                 BOOL bSymbol = pFmt->GetNumberingType() == SVX_NUM_CHAR_SPECIAL;
>                 aBulletFont.SetAlign( bSymbol ? ALIGN_BOTTOM : ALIGN_BASELINE );
>                 Font aOldFont = pOutDev->GetFont();
>@@ -1010,8 +1008,8 @@ void Outliner::PaintBullet( USHORT nPara, const Point& rStartPos,
> 
>                 if ( nOrientation )
>                 {
>-                    // Sowohl TopLeft als auch BottomLeft nicht ganz richtig, da
>-                    // in EditEngine BaseLine...
>+                    // Both TopLeft and bottom left is not quite correct, 
>+                    // since in EditEngine baseline ...
>                     double nRealOrientation = nOrientation*F_PI1800;
>                     double nCos = cos( nRealOrientation );
>                     double nSin = sin( nRealOrientation );
>@@ -1029,7 +1027,7 @@ void Outliner::PaintBullet( USHORT nPara, const Point& rStartPos,
>                     pOutDev->SetFont( aRotatedFont );
>                 }
> 
>-                // #105803# VCL will care for brackets and so on...
>+                // VCL will take care of brackets and so on...
>                 ULONG nLayoutMode = pOutDev->GetLayoutMode();
>                 nLayoutMode &= ~(TEXT_LAYOUT_BIDI_RTL|TEXT_LAYOUT_COMPLEX_DISABLED|TEXT_LAYOUT_BIDI_STRONG);
>                 if ( bRightToLeftPara )
>@@ -1098,14 +1096,14 @@ void Outliner::PaintBullet( USHORT nPara, const Point& rStartPos,
>                     }
>                     else
>                     {
>-                        // MT: Remove CAST when KA made the Draw-Method const
>+                        // Remove CAST when KA made the Draw-Method const
>                         ((GraphicObject*)pFmt->GetBrush()->GetGraphicObject())->Draw( pOutDev, aBulletPos, pPara->aBulSize );
>                     }
>                 }
>             }
>         }
> 
>-        // Bei zusammengeklappten Absaetzen einen Strich vor den Text malen.
>+        // In case of collapsed subparagraphs paint a line before the text.
>         if( pParaList->HasChilds(pPara) && !pParaList->HasVisibleChilds(pPara) &&
>                 !bStrippingPortions && !nOrientation )
>         {
>@@ -1223,7 +1221,7 @@ void Outliner::ImpFilterIndents( ULONG nFirstPara, ULONG nLastPara )
>                     }
>                     else if ( pLastConverted )
>                     {
>-                            // Normale Absaetze unter der Ueberschrift anordnen...
>+                            // Arrange normal paragraphs below the heading ...
>                             pPara->SetDepth( pLastConverted->GetDepth() );
>                     }
> 
>@@ -1269,7 +1267,7 @@ void Outliner::ImpTextPasted( ULONG nStartPara, USHORT nCount )
>                     DepthChangedHdl();
>             }
>         }
>-        else // EditEngine-Modus
>+        else // EditEngine mode
>         {
>             sal_Int16 nDepth = -1;
>             const SfxItemSet& rAttrs = pEditEngine->GetParaAttribs( (USHORT)nStartPara );
>@@ -1303,17 +1301,17 @@ long Outliner::IndentingPagesHdl( OutlinerView* pView )
> BOOL Outliner::ImpCanIndentSelectedPages( OutlinerView* pCurView )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(Outliner,0);
>-    // Die selektierten Seiten muessen vorher durch ImpCalcSelectedPages
>-    // schon eingestellt sein
>+    // The selected pages must already be set in advance through 
>+    // ImpCalcSelectedPages 
> 
>-    // Wenn der erste Absatz auf Ebene 0 liegt darf er auf keinen Fall
>-    // eingerueckt werden, evtl folgen aber weitere auf Ebene 0.
>+    // If the first paragraph is on level 0 it can not indented in any case, 
>+    // possible there might be indentations in the following on the 0 level.
>     if ( ( mnFirstSelPage == 0 ) && ( ImplGetOutlinerMode() != OUTLINERMODE_TEXTOBJECT ) )
>     {
>-        if ( nDepthChangedHdlPrevDepth == 1 )	// ist die einzige Seite
>+        if ( nDepthChangedHdlPrevDepth == 1 )	// is the only page
>             return FALSE;
>         else
>-            pCurView->ImpCalcSelectedPages( FALSE );	// ohne die erste
>+            pCurView->ImpCalcSelectedPages( FALSE );  // without the first
>     }
>     return (BOOL)IndentingPagesHdl( pCurView );
> }
>@@ -1322,8 +1320,8 @@ BOOL Outliner::ImpCanIndentSelectedPages( OutlinerView* pCurView )
> BOOL Outliner::ImpCanDeleteSelectedPages( OutlinerView* pCurView )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(Outliner,0);
>-    // Die selektierten Seiten muessen vorher durch ImpCalcSelectedPages
>-    // schon eingestellt sein
>+    // The selected pages must already be set in advance through 
>+    // ImpCalcSelectedPages 
>     return (BOOL)RemovingPagesHdl( pCurView );
> }
> 
>@@ -1368,7 +1366,7 @@ size_t Outliner::InsertView( OutlinerView* pView, size_t nIndex )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(Outliner,0);
>     size_t ActualIndex;
>-//joe
>+
>     if ( nIndex >= aViewList.size() )
>     {
>         aViewList.push_back( pView );
>@@ -1392,13 +1390,13 @@ OutlinerView* Outliner::RemoveView( OutlinerView* pView )
>     {
>         if ( *it == pView )
>         {
>-            pView->pEditView->HideCursor(); // HACK wg. BugId 10006
>+            pView->pEditView->HideCursor(); // HACK
>             pEditEngine->RemoveView(  pView->pEditView );
>             aViewList.erase( it );
>             break;
>         }
>     }
>-    return NULL;	// MT: return ueberfluessig
>+    return NULL;	// return superfluous
> }
> 
> OutlinerView* Outliner::RemoveView( size_t nIndex )
>@@ -1406,7 +1404,7 @@ OutlinerView* Outliner::RemoveView( size_t nIndex )
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(Outliner,0);
> 
>     EditView* pEditView = pEditEngine->GetView( (USHORT)nIndex );
>-    pEditView->HideCursor(); // HACK wg. BugId 10006
>+    pEditView->HideCursor(); // HACK
> 
>     pEditEngine->RemoveView( (USHORT)nIndex );
> 
>@@ -1416,7 +1414,7 @@ OutlinerView* Outliner::RemoveView( size_t nIndex )
>         aViewList.erase( it );
>     }
> 
>-    return NULL;	// MT: return ueberfluessig
>+    return NULL;	// return superfluous
> }
> 
> 
>@@ -1573,11 +1571,10 @@ void Outliner::ParaAttribsChanged( USHORT nPara )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(Outliner,0);
> 
>-    // Der Outliner hat kein eigenes Undo, wenn Absaetz getrennt/verschmolzen werden.
>-    // Beim ParagraphInserted ist das Attribut EE_PARA_OUTLLEVEL
>-    // ggf. noch nicht eingestellt, dies wird aber benoetigt um die Tiefe
>-    // des Absatzes zu bestimmen.
>-
>+    // The Outliner does not have an undo of its own, when paragraphs are 
>+    // separated/merged. When ParagraphInserted the attribute EE_PARA_OUTLLEVEL
>+    // may not be set, this is however needed when the depth of the paragraph 
>+    // is to be determined.
>     if( pEditEngine->IsInUndo() )
>     {
>         if ( pParaList->GetParagraphCount() == pEditEngine->GetParagraphCount() )
>@@ -1597,11 +1594,10 @@ void Outliner::StyleSheetChanged( SfxStyleSheet* pStyle )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(Outliner,0);
> 
>-    // Die EditEngine ruft StyleSheetChanged auch fuer abgeleitete Styles.
>-    // MT: Hier wurde frueher alle Absaetze durch ein ImpRecalcParaAttribs
>-    // gejagt, die die besagte Vorlage haben, warum?
>-    // => Eigentlich kann sich nur die Bullet-Repraesentation aendern...
>-
>+    // The EditEngine calls StyleSheetChanged also for derived styles. 
>+    // Here all the paragraphs, which had the said template, used to be
>+    // hunted by a ImpRecalcParaAttribs, why? 
>+    // => only the Bullet-representation can really change...
>     USHORT nParas = (USHORT)pParaList->GetParagraphCount();
>     for( USHORT nPara = 0; nPara < nParas; nPara++ )
>     {
>@@ -1609,7 +1605,7 @@ void Outliner::StyleSheetChanged( SfxStyleSheet* pStyle )
>         {
>             ImplCheckNumBulletItem( nPara );
>             ImplCalcBulletText( nPara, FALSE, FALSE );
>-            // #97333# EditEngine formats changed paragraphs before calling this method,
>+            // EditEngine formats changed paragraphs before calling this method,
>             // so they are not reformatted now and use wrong bullet indent
>             pEditEngine->QuickMarkInvalid( ESelection( nPara, 0, nPara, 0 ) );
>         }
>@@ -1618,7 +1614,7 @@ void Outliner::StyleSheetChanged( SfxStyleSheet* pStyle )
> 
> Rectangle Outliner::ImpCalcBulletArea( USHORT nPara, BOOL bAdjust, BOOL bReturnPaperPos )
> {
>-    // Bullet-Bereich innerhalb des Absatzes...
>+    // Bullet area within the paragraph ...
>     Rectangle aBulletArea;
> 
>     const SvxNumberFormat* pFmt = GetNumberFormat( nPara );
>@@ -1636,12 +1632,12 @@ Rectangle Outliner::ImpCalcBulletArea( USHORT nPara, BOOL bAdjust, BOOL bReturnP
>         aTopLeft.X() = rLR.GetTxtLeft() + rLR.GetTxtFirstLineOfst() + nSpaceBefore;
> 
>         long nBulletWidth = Max( (long) -rLR.GetTxtFirstLineOfst(), (long) ((-pFmt->GetFirstLineOffset()) + pFmt->GetCharTextDistance()) );
>-        if ( nBulletWidth < aBulletSize.Width() ) 	// Bullet macht sich Platz
>+        if ( nBulletWidth < aBulletSize.Width() ) 	// The Bullet creates its space
>             nBulletWidth = aBulletSize.Width();
> 
>         if ( bAdjust && !bOutlineMode )
>         {
>-            // Bei zentriert/rechtsbuendig anpassen
>+            // Adjust when centered or align right
>             const SvxAdjustItem& rItem = (const SvxAdjustItem&)pEditEngine->GetParaAttrib( nPara, EE_PARA_JUST );
>             if ( ( !pEditEngine->IsRightToLeft( nPara ) && ( rItem.GetAdjust() != SVX_ADJUST_LEFT ) ) ||
>                  ( pEditEngine->IsRightToLeft( nPara ) && ( rItem.GetAdjust() != SVX_ADJUST_RIGHT ) ) )
>@@ -1650,15 +1646,15 @@ Rectangle Outliner::ImpCalcBulletArea( USHORT nPara, BOOL bAdjust, BOOL bReturnP
>             }
>         }
> 
>-        // Vertikal:
>+        // Vertical:
>         ParagraphInfos aInfos = pEditEngine->GetParagraphInfos( nPara );
>         if ( aInfos.bValid )
>         {
>-            aTopLeft.Y() = /* aInfos.nFirstLineOffset + */ // #91076# nFirstLineOffset is already added to the StartPos (PaintBullet) from the EditEngine
>+            aTopLeft.Y() = /* aInfos.nFirstLineOffset + */ // nFirstLineOffset is already added to the StartPos (PaintBullet) from the EditEngine
>                             aInfos.nFirstLineHeight - aInfos.nFirstLineTextHeight
>                             + aInfos.nFirstLineTextHeight / 2
>                             - aBulletSize.Height() / 2;
>-            // ggf. lieber auf der Baseline ausgeben...
>+            // may prefer to print out on the baseline ...
>             if( ( pFmt->GetNumberingType() != SVX_NUM_NUMBER_NONE ) && ( pFmt->GetNumberingType() != SVX_NUM_BITMAP ) && ( pFmt->GetNumberingType() != SVX_NUM_CHAR_SPECIAL ) )
>             {
>                 Font aBulletFont( ImpCalcBulletFont( nPara ) );
>@@ -1668,7 +1664,7 @@ Rectangle Outliner::ImpCalcBulletArea( USHORT nPara, BOOL bAdjust, BOOL bReturnP
>                     Font aOldFont = pRefDev->GetFont();
>                     pRefDev->SetFont( aBulletFont );
>                     FontMetric aMetric( pRefDev->GetFontMetric() );
>-                    // Leading der ersten Zeile...
>+                    // Leading on the first line ...
>                     aTopLeft.Y() = /* aInfos.nFirstLineOffset + */ aInfos.nFirstLineMaxAscent;
>                     aTopLeft.Y() -= aMetric.GetAscent();
>                     pRefDev->SetFont( aOldFont );
>@@ -1686,7 +1682,7 @@ Rectangle Outliner::ImpCalcBulletArea( USHORT nPara, BOOL bAdjust, BOOL bReturnP
>             aTopLeft.X() += ( nBulletWidth - aBulletSize.Width() ) / 2;
>         }
> 
>-        if ( aTopLeft.X() < 0 ) 	// dann draengeln
>+        if ( aTopLeft.X() < 0 ) 	// then push
>             aTopLeft.X() = 0;
> 
>         aBulletArea = Rectangle( aTopLeft, aBulletSize );
>@@ -1796,7 +1792,6 @@ void Outliner::StripPortions()
>     bStrippingPortions = FALSE;
> }
> 
>-// #101498#
> void Outliner::DrawingText( const Point& rStartPos, const XubString& rText, USHORT nTextStart, USHORT nTextLen, const sal_Int32* pDXArray,const SvxFont& rFont,
>     USHORT nPara, USHORT nIndex, BYTE nRightToLeft,
>     const EEngineData::WrongSpellVector* pWrongSpellVector,
>@@ -1812,7 +1807,6 @@ void Outliner::DrawingText( const Point& rStartPos, const XubString& rText, USHO
> 
>     if(aDrawPortionHdl.IsSet())
>     {
>-        // #101498#
>         DrawPortionInfo aInfo( rStartPos, rText, nTextStart, nTextLen, rFont, nPara, nIndex, pDXArray, pWrongSpellVector,
>             pFieldData, pLocale, rOverlineColor, rTextLineColor, nRightToLeft, false, 0, bEndOfLine, bEndOfParagraph, bEndOfBullet);
> 
>@@ -2062,7 +2056,7 @@ String Outliner::ImplGetBulletText( USHORT nPara )
>     Paragraph* pPara = pParaList->GetParagraph( nPara );
>         if (pPara)
>         {
>-    // MT: Optimierung mal wieder aktivieren...
>+    // Enable optimization again ...
> //	if( pPara->nFlags & PARAFLAG_SETBULLETTEXT )
>         ImplCalcBulletText( nPara, FALSE, FALSE );
>                 aRes = pPara->GetText();
>diff --git a/editeng/source/outliner/outlundo.hxx b/editeng/source/outliner/outlundo.hxx
>index 9e12bb3..3fe9f92 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/outliner/outlundo.hxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/outliner/outlundo.hxx
>@@ -100,9 +100,9 @@ public:
>     virtual void 	Repeat();
> };
> 
>-// Hilfs-Undo: Wenn es fuer eine Aktion keine OutlinerUndoAction gibst, weil
>-// die EditEngine das handelt, aber z.B. noch das Bullet neu berechnet werden muss.
>-
>+// Help-Undo: If it does not exist an OutlinerUndoAction for a certain action
>+// because this is handled by the EditEngine, but for example the bullet has 
>+// to be recalculated. 
> class OutlinerUndoCheckPara : public OutlinerUndoBase
> {
>     using SfxUndoAction::Repeat;
>@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ public:
>     virtual void Redo();
>     virtual void Repeat();
> 
>-    USHORT* pParas;  // 0 == nCount enthaelt Absatznummer
>+    USHORT* pParas;  // 0 == nCount contains paragraph number
>     Outliner* pOutliner;
>     USHORT nCount;
> };
>diff --git a/editeng/source/outliner/outlvw.cxx b/editeng/source/outliner/outlvw.cxx
>index 7c00f24..40dbe34 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/outliner/outlvw.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/outliner/outlvw.cxx
>@@ -58,13 +58,13 @@
> #include <editeng/editstat.hxx>
> 
> 
>-// Breite der Randzonen innerhalb derer beim D&D gescrollt wird
>+// Width of the border zones within which is scrolled during Drag and Drop
> #define OL_SCROLL_LRBORDERWIDTHPIX	10
> #define OL_SCROLL_TBBORDERWIDTHPIX	10
> 
>-// Wert, um den Fensterinhalt beim D&D gescrollt wird
>-#define OL_SCROLL_HOROFFSET			20  /* in % von VisibleSize.Width */
>-#define OL_SCROLL_VEROFFSET			20  /* in % von VisibleSize.Height */
>+// Value to the window content when scrolling during Drag and Drop
>+#define OL_SCROLL_HOROFFSET			20  /* in % of VisibleSize.Width */
>+#define OL_SCROLL_VEROFFSET			20  /* in % of VisibleSize.Height */
> 
> using namespace ::com::sun::star;
> 
>@@ -96,8 +96,8 @@ void OutlinerView::Paint( const Rectangle& rRect )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(OutlinerView,0);
> 
>-    // beim ersten Paint/KeyInput/Drop wird aus einem leeren Outliner ein
>-    // Outliner mit genau einem Absatz
>+    // For the first Paint/KeyInput/Drop an emty Outliner is turned into
>+    // an Outliner with exactly one paragraph. 
>     if( pOwner->bFirstParaIsEmpty )
>         pOwner->Insert( String() );
> 
>@@ -108,8 +108,8 @@ BOOL OutlinerView::PostKeyEvent( const KeyEvent& rKEvt, Window* pFrameWin )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS( OutlinerView, 0 );
> 
>-    // beim ersten Paint/KeyInput/Drop wird aus einem leeren Outliner ein
>-    // Outliner mit genau einem Absatz
>+    // For the first Paint/KeyInput/Drop an emty Outliner is turned into
>+    // an Outliner with exactly one paragraph. 
>     if( pOwner->bFirstParaIsEmpty )
>         pOwner->Insert( String() );
> 
>@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ BOOL OutlinerView::PostKeyEvent( const KeyEvent& rKEvt, Window* pFrameWin )
>                 }
>             }
>             break;
>-            default:	// wird dann evtl. unten bearbeitet.
>+            default:	// is then possibly edited below.
>                         eFunc = KEYFUNC_DONTKNOW;
>         }
>     }
>@@ -220,13 +220,13 @@ BOOL OutlinerView::PostKeyEvent( const KeyEvent& rKEvt, Window* pFrameWin )
>             {
>                 if ( !bReadOnly )
>                 {
>-                    // Sonderbehandlung: Hartes Return am Ende eines Absatzes,
>-                    // der eingeklappte Unterabsaetze besitzt
>+                    // Special treatment: hard return at the end of a paragraph,
>+                    // which has collapsed subparagraphs.
>                     Paragraph* pPara = pOwner->pParaList->GetParagraph( aSel.nEndPara );
> 
>                     if( !aKeyCode.IsShift() )
>                     {
>-                        // Nochmal ImpGetCursor ???
>+                        // ImpGetCursor again???
>                         if( !bSelection &&
>                                 aSel.nEndPos == pOwner->pEditEngine->GetTextLen( aSel.nEndPara ) )
>                         {
>@@ -236,9 +236,9 @@ BOOL OutlinerView::PostKeyEvent( const KeyEvent& rKEvt, Window* pFrameWin )
>                                 pOwner->UndoActionStart( OLUNDO_INSERT );
>                                 ULONG nTemp = aSel.nEndPara;
>                                 nTemp += nChilds;
>-                                nTemp++; // einfuegen ueber naechstem Non-Child
>+                                nTemp++; // insert above next Non-Child
>                                 pOwner->Insert( String(),nTemp,pPara->GetDepth());
>-                                // Cursor positionieren
>+                                // Position the cursor 
>                                 ESelection aTmpSel((USHORT)nTemp,0,(USHORT)nTemp,0);
>                                 pEditView->SetSelection( aTmpSel );
>                                 pEditView->ShowCursor( TRUE, TRUE );
>@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ BOOL OutlinerView::PostKeyEvent( const KeyEvent& rKEvt, Window* pFrameWin )
>                         nTemp++;
>                         pOwner->Insert( String(), nTemp, pPara->GetDepth()+1 );
> 
>-                        // Cursor positionieren
>+                        // Position the cursor
>                         ESelection aTmpSel((USHORT)nTemp,0,(USHORT)nTemp,0);
>                         pEditView->SetSelection( aTmpSel );
>                         pEditView->ShowCursor( TRUE, TRUE );
>@@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ BOOL OutlinerView::MouseButtonDown( const MouseEvent& rMEvt )
>             ULONG nEndPara = nPara;
>             if ( bHasChilds && pOwner->pParaList->HasVisibleChilds(pPara) )
>                 nEndPara += pOwner->pParaList->GetChildCount( pPara );
>-            // umgekehrt rum selektieren, damit EditEngine nicht scrollt
>+            // The selection is inverted, so that EditEngine does not scroll 
>             ESelection aSel((USHORT)nEndPara, 0xffff,(USHORT)nPara, 0 );
>             pEditView->SetSelection( aSel );
>         }
>@@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ void OutlinerView::ImpPaintDDCursor()
>     pWindow->SetRasterOp( eOldOp );
> }
> 
>-// Berechnet, ueber welchem Absatz eingefuegt werden muss
>+// Calculates above which paragraph must it must be inserted
> 
> ULONG OutlinerView::ImpGetInsertionPara( const Point& rPosPixel  )
> {
>@@ -549,7 +549,7 @@ void OutlinerView::SetAttribs( const SfxItemSet& rAttrs )
> 
>     pEditView->SetAttribs( rAttrs );
> 
>-    // Bullet-Texte aktualisieren
>+    // Update Bullet text
>     for( USHORT nPara= aSel.nStartPara; nPara <= aSel.nEndPara; nPara++ )
>     {
>         pOwner->ImplCheckNumBulletItem( nPara );
>@@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ ParaRange OutlinerView::ImpGetSelectedParagraphs( BOOL bIncludeHiddenChilds )
>     ParaRange aParas( aSel.nStartPara, aSel.nEndPara );
>     aParas.Adjust();
> 
>-    // unsichtbare Childs des letzten Parents in Selektion mit aufnehmen
>+    // Record the  invisible Children of the last Parents in the selection
>     if ( bIncludeHiddenChilds )
>     {
>         Paragraph* pLast = pOwner->pParaList->GetParagraph( aParas.nEndPara );
>@@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ ParaRange OutlinerView::ImpGetSelectedParagraphs( BOOL bIncludeHiddenChilds )
>     return aParas;
> }
> 
>-// MT: Name sollte mal geaendert werden!
>+// TODO: Name should be changed!
> void OutlinerView::AdjustDepth( short nDX )
> {
>     Indent( nDX );
>@@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ void OutlinerView::Indent( short nDiff )
>     if( bUndo )
>         pOwner->UndoActionStart( OLUNDO_DEPTH );
> 
>-    sal_Int16 nMinDepth = -1;	// Optimierung: Nicht unnoetig viele Absatze neu berechnen
>+    sal_Int16 nMinDepth = -1;	// Optimization: Not to recalculate to manny parargaphs when not really needed. 
> 
>     ParaRange aSel = ImpGetSelectedParagraphs( TRUE );
>     for ( USHORT nPara = aSel.nStartPara; nPara <= aSel.nEndPara; nPara++ )
>@@ -625,7 +625,7 @@ void OutlinerView::Indent( short nDiff )
>             const bool bPage = pPara->HasFlag(PARAFLAG_ISPAGE);
>             if( (bPage && (nDiff == +1)) || (!bPage && (nDiff == -1) && (nOldDepth <= 0))  )
>             {
>-                // App benachrichtigen
>+                            // Notify App
>                 pOwner->nDepthChangedHdlPrevDepth = (sal_Int16)nOldDepth;
>                 pOwner->mnDepthChangeHdlPrevFlags = pPara->nFlags;
>                 pOwner->pHdlParagraph = pPara;
>@@ -667,10 +667,10 @@ void OutlinerView::Indent( short nDiff )
>         {
>             if ( ( nPara == aSel.nStartPara ) && aSel.nStartPara && ( pOwner->ImplGetOutlinerMode() != OUTLINERMODE_TEXTOBJECT ))
>             {
>-                // Sonderfall: Der Vorgaenger eines eingerueckten Absatzes ist
>-                // unsichtbar und steht jetzt auf der gleichen Ebene wie der
>-                // sichtbare Absatz. In diesem Fall wird der naechste sichtbare
>-                // Absatz gesucht und aufgeplustert.
>+                // Special case: the predecessor of an indented paragraph is 
>+                // invisible and is now on the same level as the visible 
>+                // paragraph. In this case, the next visible paragraph is 
>+                // searched for and fluffed.
> #ifdef DBG_UTIL
>                 Paragraph* _pPara = pOwner->pParaList->GetParagraph( aSel.nStartPara );
>                 DBG_ASSERT(_pPara->IsVisible(),"Selected Paragraph invisible ?!");
>@@ -679,8 +679,8 @@ void OutlinerView::Indent( short nDiff )
> 
>                 if( !pPrev->IsVisible() && ( pPrev->GetDepth() == nNewDepth ) )
>                 {
>-                    // Vorgaenger ist eingeklappt und steht auf gleicher Ebene
>-                    // => naechsten sichtbaren Absatz suchen und expandieren
>+                    // Predecessor is collapsed and is on the same level 
>+                    // => find next visible paragraph and expand it 
>                     pPrev = pOwner->pParaList->GetParent( pPrev );
>                     while( !pPrev->IsVisible() )
>                         pPrev = pOwner->pParaList->GetParent( pPrev );
>@@ -700,7 +700,7 @@ void OutlinerView::Indent( short nDiff )
>             if ( pOwner->ImplGetOutlinerMode() == OUTLINERMODE_OUTLINEOBJECT )
>                 pOwner->ImplSetLevelDependendStyleSheet( nPara );
> 
>-            // App benachrichtigen
>+            // Notify App
>             pOwner->DepthChangedHdl();
>         }
>         else
>@@ -710,12 +710,6 @@ void OutlinerView::Indent( short nDiff )
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    // MT 19.08.99: War mal fuer Optimierung (outliner.cxx#1.193),
>-    // hat aber zu zuviel Wartungsaufwand / doppelten Funktionen gefuehrt
>-    // und zu wenig gebracht:
>-    // pOwner->ImpSetBulletTextsFrom( aSel.nStartPara+1, nMinDepth );
>-    // Wird jetzt direkt in Schleife mit ImplCalcBulletText() erledigt.
>-    // Jetzt fehlen nur noch die folgenden Ansaetze, die davon betroffen sind.
>     USHORT nParas = (USHORT)pOwner->pParaList->GetParagraphCount();
>     for ( USHORT n = aSel.nEndPara+1; n < nParas; n++ )
>     {
>@@ -778,7 +772,7 @@ Point OutlinerView::ImpGetDocPos( const Point& rPosPixel )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(OutlinerView,0);
>     Rectangle aOutArWin = GetOutputArea();
>-    // Position in der OutputArea berechnen
>+    // Calculate position in the OutputArea
>     Point aCurPosDoc( rPosPixel );
>     aCurPosDoc = pEditView->GetWindow()->PixelToLogic( aCurPosDoc );
>     aCurPosDoc -= aOutArWin.TopLeft();
>@@ -786,8 +780,6 @@ Point OutlinerView::ImpGetDocPos( const Point& rPosPixel )
>     return aCurPosDoc;
> }
> 
>-// MT 05/00: Wofuer dies ImpXXXScroll, sollte das nicht die EditEngine machen???
>-
> void OutlinerView::ImpDragScroll( const Point& rPosPix )
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(OutlinerView,0);
>@@ -947,7 +939,7 @@ void OutlinerView::ImplExpandOrCollaps( USHORT nStartPara, USHORT nEndPara, BOOL
>         BOOL bDone = bExpand ? pOwner->Expand( pPara ) : pOwner->Collapse( pPara );
>         if( bDone )
>         {
>-            // Der Strich unter dem Absatz muss verschwinden...
>+            // The line under the paragraph should disappear ...
>             pOwner->pEditEngine->QuickMarkToBeRepainted( nPara );
>         }
>     }
>@@ -978,16 +970,14 @@ void OutlinerView::Collapse( Paragraph* pPara)
> 
> void OutlinerView::InsertText( const OutlinerParaObject& rParaObj )
> {
>-    // MT: Wie Paste, nur EditView::Insert, statt EditView::Paste.
>-    // Eigentlich nicht ganz richtig, das evtl. Einrueckungen
>-    // korrigiert werden muessen, aber das kommt spaeter durch ein
>-    // allgemeingueltiges Import.
>-    // Dann wird im Inserted gleich ermittelt, was fï¿½r eine Einrueckebene
>-    // Moegliche Struktur:
>-    // pImportInfo mit DestPara, DestPos, nFormat, pParaObj...
>-    // Evtl. Problematisch:
>-    // EditEngine, RTF => Absplittung des Bereichs, spaeter
>-    // zusammenfuehrung
>+    // Like Paste, only EditView::Insert, instead of EditView::Paste.
>+    // Actually not quite true that possible indentations must be corrected, 
>+    // but that comes later by a universal import. The indentation level is 
>+    // then determined right in the Inserted method. 
>+    // Possible structure: 
>+    // pImportInfo with DestPara, DestPos, nFormat, pParaObj...
>+    // Possibly problematic:
>+    // EditEngine, RTF => Splitting the area, later join together.
> 
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(OutlinerView,0);
> 
>@@ -1021,7 +1011,7 @@ void OutlinerView::Cut()
> void OutlinerView::Paste()
> {
>     DBG_CHKTHIS(OutlinerView,0);
>-    PasteSpecial(); // HACK(SD ruft nicht PasteSpecial auf)
>+    PasteSpecial(); // HACK(SD does not call PasteSpecial)
> }
> 
> void OutlinerView::PasteSpecial()
>@@ -1164,11 +1154,11 @@ USHORT OutlinerView::ImpCalcSelectedPages( BOOL bIncludeFirstSelected )
>     USHORT nFirstPage = 0xFFFF;
>     USHORT nStartPara = aSel.nStartPara;
>     if ( !bIncludeFirstSelected )
>-        nStartPara++;	// alle nach StartPara kommenden Absaetze werden geloescht
>+        nStartPara++;	// All paragraphs after StartPara will be deleted
>     for ( USHORT nPara = nStartPara; nPara <= aSel.nEndPara; nPara++ )
>     {
>         Paragraph* pPara = pOwner->pParaList->GetParagraph( nPara );
>-        DBG_ASSERT(pPara, "ImpCalcSelectedPages: ungueltige Selection? ");
>+        DBG_ASSERT(pPara, "ImpCalcSelectedPages: invalid Selection? ");
>         if( pPara->HasFlag(PARAFLAG_ISPAGE) )
>         {
>             nPages++;
>@@ -1288,7 +1278,7 @@ void OutlinerView::RemoveAttribs( BOOL bRemoveParaAttribs, USHORT nWhich, BOOL b
>         pEditView->RemoveAttribs( bRemoveParaAttribs, nWhich );
>     if ( bRemoveParaAttribs )
>     {
>-        // Ueber alle Absaetze, und Einrueckung und Level einstellen
>+        // Loop through all paragraphs and set indentation and level
>         ESelection aSel = pEditView->GetSelection();
>         aSel.Adjust();
>         for ( USHORT nPara = aSel.nStartPara; nPara <= aSel.nEndPara; nPara++ )
>@@ -1303,8 +1293,8 @@ void OutlinerView::RemoveAttribs( BOOL bRemoveParaAttribs, USHORT nWhich, BOOL b
> 
> 
> 
>-// =====================================================================
>-// ======================   Einfache Durchreicher =======================
>+// ======================================================================
>+// ======================   Simple pass-through   =======================
> // ======================================================================
> 
> 
>@@ -1606,9 +1596,6 @@ ULONG OutlinerView::Read( SvStream& rInput,  const String& rBaseURL, EETextForma
> 
>     ULONG nRet = pEditView->Read( rInput, rBaseURL, eFormat, bSelect, pHTTPHeaderAttrs );
> 
>-    // MT 08/00: Hier sollte eigentlich das gleiche wie in PasteSpecial passieren!
>-    // Mal anpassen, wenn dieses ImplInitPaste und ImpPasted-Geraffel ueberarbeitet ist.
>-
>     long nParaDiff = pEditView->GetEditEngine()->GetParagraphCount() - nOldParaCount;
>     USHORT nChangesStart = aOldSel.nStartPara;
>     USHORT nChangesEnd = sal::static_int_cast< USHORT >(nChangesStart + nParaDiff + (aOldSel.nEndPara-aOldSel.nStartPara));
>diff --git a/editeng/source/outliner/paralist.cxx b/editeng/source/outliner/paralist.cxx
>index 938db52..81eae5c 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/outliner/paralist.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/outliner/paralist.cxx
>@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@
> #include "precompiled_editeng.hxx"
> 
> #include <paralist.hxx>
>-#include <editeng/outliner.hxx>		// nur wegen Paragraph, muss geaendert werden!
>+#include <editeng/outliner.hxx>	 // only because of Paragraph, this must be changed!
> #include <editeng/numdef.hxx>
> 
> DBG_NAME(Paragraph)
>diff --git a/editeng/source/rtf/rtfgrf.cxx b/editeng/source/rtf/rtfgrf.cxx
>index d7a3070..721b24b 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/rtf/rtfgrf.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/rtf/rtfgrf.cxx
>@@ -74,8 +74,8 @@ void GrfWindow::Paint( const Rectangle& )
> #endif
> 
> static BYTE aPal1[ 2 * 4 ] = {
>-        0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,				// Schwarz
>-        0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0x00				// Weiss
>+        0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,				// Black
>+        0xFF, 0xFF, 0xFF, 0x00				// White
> };
> 
> static BYTE aPal4[ 16 * 4 ] = {
>@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ static void WriteBMPHeader( SvStream& rStream,
>     ULONG n4Height = rPicType.nHeight;
>     USHORT n4ColBits = rPicType.nBitsPerPixel;
> 
>-    USHORT nColors = (1 << n4ColBits);	// Anzahl der Farben ( 1, 16, 256 )
>+    USHORT nColors = (1 << n4ColBits);	// Number of colors (1, 16, 256)
>     USHORT nWdtOut = rPicType.nWidthBytes;
>     if( !nWdtOut )
>         nWdtOut = (USHORT)((( n4Width * n4ColBits + 31 ) / 32 ) * 4 );
>@@ -228,8 +228,8 @@ static void WriteBMPHeader( SvStream& rStream,
>     long nSize = nOffset + nWdtOut * n4Height;
>     rStream << "BM"						// = "BM"
>             << SwapLong(nSize)          // Filesize in Bytes
>-            << SwapShort(0)             // Reserviert
>-            << SwapShort(0)             // Reserviert
>+            << SwapShort(0)             // Reserved
>+            << SwapShort(0)             // Reserved
>             << SwapLong(nOffset);       // Offset?
> 
>     rStream	<< SwapLong(40)				// sizeof( BmpInfo )
>@@ -259,14 +259,14 @@ static void WriteBMPHeader( SvStream& rStream,
> 
> /*  */
> 
>-        // wandel die ASCII-HexCodes in binaere Zeichen um. Werden
>-        // ungueltige Daten gefunden (Zeichen ausser 0-9|a-f|A-F, so
>-        // wird USHRT_MAX returnt, ansonsten die Anzahl der umgewandelten Ze.
>+        // Converts the ASCII characters to hexadecimal codes in binary. 
>+        // If invalid data is found (eg. characters outside 0-9|a-f|A-F), then
>+        // USHRT_MAX is returned, else the number of converted charachters.
> xub_StrLen SvxRTFParser::HexToBin( String& rToken )
> {
>-    // dann mache aus den Hex-Werten mal "Binare Daten"
>-    // (missbrauche den String als temp Buffer)
>-    if( rToken.Len() & 1 )		// ungerade Anzahl, mit 0 auffuellen
>+    // then create "Binary data" from the hex values. 
>+    // (missuse the String as temp Buffer)
>+    if( rToken.Len() & 1 )		// odd number, fill out with 0
>         rToken += '0';
> 
>     xub_StrLen n, nLen;
>@@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ xub_StrLen SvxRTFParser::HexToBin( String& rToken )
>             nVal -= 'a' - 10;
>         else
>         {
>-            DBG_ASSERT( !this, "ungueltiger Hex-Wert" );
>+            DBG_ASSERT( !this, "invalid Hex value" );
>             bValidData = FALSE;
>             break;
>         }
>@@ -300,9 +300,8 @@ xub_StrLen SvxRTFParser::HexToBin( String& rToken )
> 
> BOOL SvxRTFParser::ReadBmpData( Graphic& rGrf, SvxRTFPictureType& rPicType )
> {
>-    // die alten Daten loeschen
>+    // Delete the old data
>     rGrf.Clear();
>-//	ULONG nBmpSize = 0;
> 
>     rtl_TextEncoding eOldEnc = GetSrcEncoding();
>     SetSrcEncoding( RTL_TEXTENCODING_MS_1252 );
>@@ -312,7 +311,7 @@ BOOL SvxRTFParser::ReadBmpData( Graphic& rGrf, SvxRTFPictureType& rPicType )
> 
>     int nToken = 0; 
>     bool bValidBmp = true, bFirstTextToken = true;
>-    int _nOpenBrakets = 1,		// die erste wurde schon vorher erkannt !!
>+    int _nOpenBrakets = 1,		// the first was already recognized before!
>         nValidDataBraket = 1;
> 
>     if( RTF_SHPPICT == GetStackPtr(0)->nTokenId )
>@@ -359,7 +358,7 @@ BOOL SvxRTFParser::ReadBmpData( Graphic& rGrf, SvxRTFPictureType& rPicType )
>         case RTF_MACPICT:
>             {
>                 rPicType.eStyle = SvxRTFPictureType::MAC_QUICKDRAW;
>-                // Mac-Pict bekommt einen leeren Header voran
>+                // Mac-Pict gets a empty header above
>                 pTmpFile = new SvCacheStream;
>                 ByteString aStr;
>                 aStr.Fill( 512, '\0' );
>@@ -467,9 +466,6 @@ BOOL SvxRTFParser::ReadBmpData( Graphic& rGrf, SvxRTFPictureType& rPicType )
>                 nToken = SkipToken( -1 );
>         break;
>         case RTF_TEXTTOKEN:
>-            // JP 26.06.98: Bug #51719# - nur TextToken auf 1. Ebene
>-            //				auswerten. Alle anderen sind irgendwelche
>-            //				nicht auszuwertende Daten
>             if( nValidDataBraket != _nOpenBrakets )
>                 break;
> 
>@@ -478,7 +474,7 @@ BOOL SvxRTFParser::ReadBmpData( Graphic& rGrf, SvxRTFPictureType& rPicType )
>                 switch( rPicType.eStyle )
>                 {
>                 case SvxRTFPictureType::RTF_BITMAP:
>-                    // erstmal die Header und Info-Struktur schreiben
>+                    // first write the header and the info structure
>                     if( pTmpFile )
>                         ::WriteBMPHeader( *pTmpFile, rPicType );
>                     break;
>@@ -540,7 +536,7 @@ BOOL SvxRTFParser::ReadBmpData( Graphic& rGrf, SvxRTFPictureType& rPicType )
>     if( !bValidBmp )
>     {
>         rGrf.Clear();
>-        //TODO  If nToken were not initialized to 0 above, it would potentially
>+        // TODO: If nToken were not initialized to 0 above, it would potentially
>         // be used uninitialized here (if IsParserWorking() is false at the
>         // start of the while loop above):
>         if( '}' != nToken )
>@@ -550,7 +546,6 @@ BOOL SvxRTFParser::ReadBmpData( Graphic& rGrf, SvxRTFPictureType& rPicType )
>     {
>         switch( rPicType.eStyle )
>         {
>-//??		ENHANCED_MF,		// in den Pict.Daten steht ein Enhanced-Metafile
>         case SvxRTFPictureType::RTF_PNG:
>         case SvxRTFPictureType::RTF_JPG:
>             {
>@@ -577,7 +572,7 @@ BOOL SvxRTFParser::ReadBmpData( Graphic& rGrf, SvxRTFPictureType& rPicType )
>     }
>     SetSrcEncoding( eOldEnc );
> 
>-    SkipToken( -1 );		// die schliesende Klammer wird "oben" ausgewertet
>+    SkipToken( -1 );		// the closing brace is evaluated "above" 
>     return bValidBmp;
> }
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/rtf/rtfitem.cxx b/editeng/source/rtf/rtfitem.cxx
>index aa208c5..a03de25 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/rtf/rtfitem.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/rtf/rtfitem.cxx
>@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@
> #define BRACERIGHT	'}'
> 
> 
>-// einige Hilfs-Funktionen
>+// Some helper functions
> // char
> inline const SvxEscapementItem& GetEscapement(const SfxItemSet& rSet,USHORT nId,BOOL bInP=TRUE)
>     { return (const SvxEscapementItem&)rSet.Get( nId,bInP); }
>@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::SetScriptAttr( RTF_CharTypeDef eType, SfxItemSet& rSet,
> 
> void SvxRTFParser::ReadAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet* pSet )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pSet, "Es muss ein SfxItemSet uebergeben werden!" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pSet, "A SfxItemSet has to be provided as argument!" );
>     int bFirstToken = TRUE, bWeiter = TRUE;
>     USHORT nStyleNo = 0; 		// default
>     FontUnderline eUnderline;
>@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet* pSet )
> 
>     int bChkStkPos = !bNewGroup && aAttrStack.Top();
> 
>-    while( bWeiter && IsParserWorking() )			// solange bekannte Attribute erkannt werden
>+    while( bWeiter && IsParserWorking() )  // as long as known Attribute are recognized
>     {
>         switch( nToken )
>         {
>@@ -261,12 +261,12 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet* pSet )
>                 if( pAkt->aAttrSet.Count() || pAkt->pChildList ||
>                     pAkt->nStyleNo )
>                 {
>-                    // eine neue Gruppe aufmachen
>+                    // Open a new Group
>                     SvxRTFItemStackType* pNew = new SvxRTFItemStackType(
>                                                 *pAkt, *pInsPos, TRUE );
>                     pNew->SetRTFDefaults( GetRTFDefaults() );
> 
>-                    // alle bis hierher gueltigen Attribute "setzen"
>+                    // "Set" all valid attributes up until this point
>                     AttrGroupEnd();
>                     pAkt = aAttrStack.Top();  // can be changed after AttrGroupEnd!
>                     pNew->aAttrSet.SetParent( pAkt ? &pAkt->aAttrSet : 0 );
>@@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet* pSet )
>                     pAkt = pNew;
>                 }
>                 else
>-                    // diesen Eintrag als neuen weiterbenutzen
>+                    // continue to use this entry as a new one
>                     pAkt->SetStartPos( *pInsPos );
> 
>                 pSet = &pAkt->aAttrSet;
>@@ -302,8 +302,8 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet* pSet )
>                 else
>                 {
>                     nStyleNo = -1 == nTokenValue ? 0 : USHORT(nTokenValue);
>-                    // setze am akt. auf dem AttrStack stehenden Style die
>-                    // StyleNummer
>+                    // Set the StyleNumber for the current style on 
>+                    // the attribute stack
>                     SvxRTFItemStackType* pAkt = aAttrStack.Top();
>                     if( !pAkt )
>                         break;
>@@ -445,14 +445,14 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet* pSet )
>             case RTF_SLMULT:
>                 if( PARDID->nLinespacing && 1 == nTokenValue )
>                 {
>-                    // dann wird auf mehrzeilig umgeschaltet!
>+                    // then switches to multi-line!
>                     SvxLineSpacingItem aLSpace( GetLineSpacing( *pSet,
>                                                 PARDID->nLinespacing, FALSE ));
> 
>-                    // wieviel bekommt man aus dem LineHeight Wert heraus
>+                    // how much do you get from the line height value?
> 
>-                    // Proportionale-Groesse:
>-                    // D.H. das Verhaeltnis ergibt sich aus ( n / 240 ) Twips
>+                    // Proportional-Size:
>+                    // Ie, the ratio is (n / 240) twips
> 
>                     nTokenValue = 240;
>                     if( IsCalcValue() )
>@@ -461,8 +461,8 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet* pSet )
>                     nTokenValue = short( 100L * aLSpace.GetLineHeight()
>                                             / long( nTokenValue ) );
> 
>-                    if( nTokenValue > 200 )		// Datenwert fuer PropLnSp
>-                        nTokenValue = 200;		// ist ein BYTE !!!
>+                    if( nTokenValue > 200 )		// Data value for PropLnSp
>+                        nTokenValue = 200;		// is one BYTE !!!
> 
>                     aLSpace.SetPropLineSpace( (const BYTE)nTokenValue );
>                     aLSpace.GetLineSpaceRule() = SVX_LINE_SPACE_AUTO;
>@@ -474,9 +474,9 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet* pSet )
>             case RTF_SL:
>                 if( PARDID->nLinespacing )
>                 {
>-                    // errechne das Verhaeltnis aus dem default Font zu der
>-                    // Size Angabe. Der Abstand besteht aus der Zeilenhoehe
>-                    // (100%) und dem Leerraum ueber der Zeile (20%).
>+                    // Calculate the ratio between the default font and the 
>+                    // specified size. The distance consists of the line height
>+                    // (100%) and the space above the line (20%).
>                     SvxLineSpacingItem aLSpace(0, PARDID->nLinespacing);
> 
>                     nTokenValue = !bTokenHasValue ? 0 : nTokenValue;
>@@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ SET_FONTALIGNMENT:
> /*  */
>             case RTF_B:
>             case RTF_AB:
>-                if( IsAttrSttPos() )	// nicht im Textfluss ?
>+                if( IsAttrSttPos() )	// not in the text flow?
>                 {
> 
>                     SvxWeightItem aTmpItem(
>@@ -567,7 +567,7 @@ SET_FONTALIGNMENT:
>             case RTF_CAPS:
>             case RTF_SCAPS:
>                 if( PLAINID->nCaseMap &&
>-                    IsAttrSttPos() )		// nicht im Textfluss ?
>+                    IsAttrSttPos() )		// not in the text flow?
>                 {
>                     SvxCaseMap eCaseMap;
>                     if( !nTokenValue )
>@@ -692,7 +692,7 @@ SET_FONTALIGNMENT:
> 
>             case RTF_I:
>             case RTF_AI:
>-                if( IsAttrSttPos() )		// nicht im Textfluss ?
>+                if( IsAttrSttPos() )		// not in the text flow?
>                 {
>                     SvxPostureItem aTmpItem(
>                                     nTokenValue ? ITALIC_NORMAL : ITALIC_NONE,
>@@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ SET_FONTALIGNMENT:
> 
>             case RTF_OUTL:
>                 if( PLAINID->nContour &&
>-                    IsAttrSttPos() )		// nicht im Textfluss ?
>+                    IsAttrSttPos() )		// not in the text flow?
>                 {
>                     pSet->Put( SvxContourItem( nTokenValue ? TRUE : FALSE,
>                                 PLAINID->nContour ));
>@@ -712,7 +712,7 @@ SET_FONTALIGNMENT:
> 
>             case RTF_SHAD:
>                 if( PLAINID->nShadowed &&
>-                    IsAttrSttPos() )		// nicht im Textfluss ?
>+                    IsAttrSttPos() )		// not in the text flow?
>                 {
>                     pSet->Put( SvxShadowedItem( nTokenValue ? TRUE : FALSE,
>                                 PLAINID->nShadowed ));
>@@ -721,7 +721,7 @@ SET_FONTALIGNMENT:
> 
>             case RTF_STRIKE:
>                 if( PLAINID->nCrossedOut &&
>-                    IsAttrSttPos() )		// nicht im Textfluss ?
>+                    IsAttrSttPos() )		// not in the text flow?
>                 {
>                     pSet->Put( SvxCrossedOutItem(
>                         nTokenValue ? STRIKEOUT_SINGLE : STRIKEOUT_NONE,
>@@ -730,7 +730,7 @@ SET_FONTALIGNMENT:
>                 break;
> 
>             case RTF_STRIKED:
>-                if( PLAINID->nCrossedOut )		// nicht im Textfluss ?
>+                if( PLAINID->nCrossedOut )		// not in the text flow?
>                 {
>                     pSet->Put( SvxCrossedOutItem(
>                         nTokenValue ? STRIKEOUT_DOUBLE : STRIKEOUT_NONE,
>@@ -1112,7 +1112,7 @@ ATTR_SETEMPHASIS:
> 
>             case BRACELEFT:
>                 {
>-                    // teste auf Swg-Interne Tokens
>+                    // tests on Swg internal tokens
>                     bool bHandled = false;
>                     short nSkip = 0;
>                     if( RTF_IGNOREFLAG != GetNextToken())
>@@ -1126,16 +1126,16 @@ ATTR_SETEMPHASIS:
>                         case RTF_PGBRK:
>                         case RTF_SOUTLVL:
>                             UnknownAttrToken( nToken, pSet );
>-                            // ueberlese die schliessende Klammer
>+                            // overwrite the closing parenthesis
>                             break;
> 
>                         case RTF_SWG_ESCPROP:
>                             {
>-                                // prozentuale Veraenderung speichern !
>+                                // Store percentage change!
>                                 BYTE nProp = BYTE( nTokenValue / 100 );
>                                 short nEsc = 0;
>                                 if( 1 == ( nTokenValue % 100 ))
>-                                    // Erkennung unseres AutoFlags!
>+                                    // Recognize own auto-flags!
>                                     nEsc = DFLT_ESC_AUTO_SUPER;
> 
>                                 if( PLAINID->nEscapement )
>@@ -1167,7 +1167,7 @@ ATTR_SETEMPHASIS:
>                                     pSet->Put( aHypenZone );
>                                 }
>                                 else
>-                                    SkipGroup();		// ans Ende der Gruppe
>+                                    SkipGroup();  // at the end of the group
>                             }
>                             break;
> 
>@@ -1182,8 +1182,6 @@ ATTR_SETEMPHASIS:
> 
>                                     if( RTF_SHDW_STYLE != GetNextToken() )
>                                         break;
>-                                    //! (pb) class Brush removed -> obsolete
>-                                    //! BrushStyle eStyle = BrushStyle( nTokenValue );
> 
>                                     if( RTF_SHDW_COL != GetNextToken() )
>                                         break;
>@@ -1191,7 +1189,6 @@ ATTR_SETEMPHASIS:
> 
>                                     if( RTF_SHDW_FCOL != GetNextToken() )
>                                         break;
>-//									USHORT nFillCol = USHORT( nTokenValue );
> 
>                                     Color aColor = GetColor( nCol );
> 
>@@ -1203,7 +1200,7 @@ ATTR_SETEMPHASIS:
>                                 } while( FALSE );
> 
>                                 if( bSkip )
>-                                    SkipGroup();		// ans Ende der Gruppe
>+                                    SkipGroup();  // at the end of the group
>                             }
>                             break;
> 
>@@ -1236,7 +1233,7 @@ ATTR_SETEMPHASIS:
>                                 nToken = SkipToken( -2 );
>                                 ReadBorderAttr( nToken, *pSet );
>                             }
>-                            else		// also kein Attribut mehr
>+                            else		// so no more attribute
>                                 nSkip = -2;
>                             break;
>                         }
>@@ -1258,10 +1255,10 @@ ATTR_SETEMPHASIS:
>                     else
>                         nSkip = -2;
> 
>-                    if( nSkip )				// alles voellig unbekannt
>+                    if( nSkip )				// all completely unknown
>                     {
>                         if (!bFirstToken)
>-                            --nSkip;	// BRACELEFT: ist das naechste Token
>+                            --nSkip;	// BRACELEFT: is the next token
>                         SkipToken( nSkip );
>                         bWeiter = FALSE;
>                     }
>@@ -1276,7 +1273,7 @@ ATTR_SETEMPHASIS:
>                     ReadBackgroundAttr( nToken, *pSet );
>                 else
>                 {
>-                    // kenne das Token nicht also das Token "in den Parser zurueck"
>+                    // unknown token, so token "returned in Parser"
>                     if( !bFirstToken )
>                         SkipToken( -1 );
>                     bWeiter = FALSE;
>@@ -1289,38 +1286,12 @@ ATTR_SETEMPHASIS:
>         }
>         bFirstToken = FALSE;
>     }
>-
>-/*
>-    // teste Attribute gegen ihre Styles
>-    if( IsChkStyleAttr() && pSet->Count() && !pInsPos->GetCntIdx() )
>-    {
>-        SvxRTFStyleType* pStyle = aStyleTbl.Get( nStyleNo );
>-        if( pStyle && pStyle->aAttrSet.Count() )
>-        {
>-            // alle Attribute, die schon vom Style definiert sind, aus dem
>-            // akt. Set entfernen
>-            const SfxPoolItem* pItem;
>-            SfxItemIter aIter( *pSet );
>-            USHORT nWhich = aIter.GetCurItem()->Which();
>-            while( TRUE )
>-            {
>-                if( SFX_ITEM_SET == pStyle->aAttrSet.GetItemState(
>-                    nWhich, FALSE, &pItem ) && *pItem == *aIter.GetCurItem())
>-                    pSet->ClearItem( nWhich );		// loeschen
>-
>-                if( aIter.IsAtEnd() )
>-                    break;
>-                nWhich = aIter.NextItem()->Which();
>-            }
>-        }
>-    }
>-*/
> }
> 
> void SvxRTFParser::ReadTabAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet )
> {
>     bool bMethodOwnsToken = false; // #i52542# patch from cmc.
>-// dann lese doch mal alle TabStops ein
>+// then read all the TabStops
>     SvxTabStop aTabStop;
>     SvxTabStopItem aAttr( 0, 0, SVX_TAB_ADJUST_DEFAULT, PARDID->nTabStop );
>     int bWeiter = TRUE;
>@@ -1334,7 +1305,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadTabAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet )
>                     CalcValue();
>                 aTabStop.GetTabPos() = nTokenValue;
>                 aAttr.Insert( aTabStop );
>-                aTabStop = SvxTabStop();	// alle Werte default
>+                aTabStop = SvxTabStop();	// all values default
>             }
>             break;
> 
>@@ -1359,7 +1330,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadTabAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet )
> 
>         case BRACELEFT:
>             {
>-                // Swg - Kontrol BRACELEFT RTF_IGNOREFLAG RTF_TLSWG BRACERIGHT
>+                // Swg - control BRACELEFT RTF_IGNOREFLAG RTF_TLSWG BRACERIGHT
>                 short nSkip = 0;
>                 if( RTF_IGNOREFLAG != GetNextToken() )
>                     nSkip = -1;
>@@ -1369,13 +1340,13 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadTabAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet )
>                 {
>                     aTabStop.GetDecimal() = BYTE(nTokenValue & 0xff);
>                     aTabStop.GetFill() = BYTE((nTokenValue >> 8) & 0xff);
>-                    // ueberlese noch die schliessende Klammer
>+                    // overwrite the closing parenthesis
>                     if (bMethodOwnsToken)
>                         GetNextToken();
>                 }
>                 if( nSkip )
>                 {
>-                    SkipToken( nSkip );		// Ignore wieder zurueck
>+                    SkipToken( nSkip );		// Ignore back again
>                     bWeiter = FALSE;
>                 }
>             }
>@@ -1391,7 +1362,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadTabAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet )
>         }
>     } while( bWeiter );
> 
>-    // mit Defaults aufuellen fehlt noch !!!
>+    // Fill with defaults is still missing!
>     rSet.Put( aAttr );
>     SkipToken( -1 );
> }
>@@ -1401,7 +1372,7 @@ static void SetBorderLine( int nBorderTyp, SvxBoxItem& rItem,
> {
>     switch( nBorderTyp )
>     {
>-    case RTF_BOX:			// alle Stufen durchlaufen
>+    case RTF_BOX:			// run through all levels
> 
>     case RTF_BRDRT:
>         rItem.SetLine( &rBorder, BOX_LINE_TOP );
>@@ -1428,13 +1399,13 @@ static void SetBorderLine( int nBorderTyp, SvxBoxItem& rItem,
> void SvxRTFParser::ReadBorderAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet,
>                                     int bTableDef )
> {
>-    // dann lese doch mal das BoderAttribut ein
>+    // then read the border attribute
>     SvxBoxItem aAttr( PARDID->nBox );
>     const SfxPoolItem* pItem;
>     if( SFX_ITEM_SET == rSet.GetItemState( PARDID->nBox, FALSE, &pItem ) )
>         aAttr = *(SvxBoxItem*)pItem;
> 
>-    SvxBorderLine aBrd( 0, DEF_LINE_WIDTH_0, 0, 0 );	// einfache Linien
>+    SvxBorderLine aBrd( 0, DEF_LINE_WIDTH_0, 0, 0 );	// simple lines
>     int bWeiter = TRUE, nBorderTyp = 0;
> 
>     do {
>@@ -1471,7 +1442,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadBorderAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet,
> 
> SETBORDER:
>             {
>-                // auf defaults setzen
>+                // set to defaults
>                 aBrd.SetOutWidth( DEF_LINE_WIDTH_0 );
>                 aBrd.SetInWidth( 0 );
>                 aBrd.SetDistance( 0 );
>@@ -1480,7 +1451,7 @@ SETBORDER:
>             break;
> 
> 
>-// werden noch nicht ausgewertet
>+// yet to be evaluated
>         case RTF_BRSP:
>             {
>                 switch( nBorderTyp )
>@@ -1532,7 +1503,7 @@ case RTF_BRDRBAR:			break;
>             goto SETBORDERLINE;
> 
>         case RTF_BRDRSH:
>-            // schattierte Box
>+            // shaded box
>             {
>                 rSet.Put( SvxShadowItem( PARDID->nShadow, (Color*) 0, 60 /*3pt*/,
>                                         SVX_SHADOW_BOTTOMRIGHT ) );
>@@ -1542,14 +1513,14 @@ case RTF_BRDRBAR:			break;
>         case RTF_BRDRW:
>             if( -1 != nTokenValue )
>             {
>-                // sollte es eine "dicke" Linie sein ?
>+                // It should be a "thick" line?
>                 if( DEF_LINE_WIDTH_0 != aBrd.GetOutWidth() )
>                     nTokenValue *= 2;
> 
>-                // eine Doppelline?
>+                // a double line?
>                 if( aBrd.GetInWidth() )
>                 {
>-                    // WinWord - Werte an StarOffice anpassen
>+                    // WinWord - adapt values to StarOffice
>                     if( nTokenValue < DEF_LINE_WIDTH_1 - (DEF_LINE_WIDTH_1/10))
>                     {
>                         aBrd.SetOutWidth( DEF_DOUBLE_LINE0_OUT );
>@@ -1572,7 +1543,7 @@ case RTF_BRDRBAR:			break;
>                 }
>                 else
>                 {
>-                    // WinWord - Werte an StarOffice anpassen
>+                    // WinWord - adapt values to StarOffice
>                     if( nTokenValue < DEF_LINE_WIDTH_1 - (DEF_LINE_WIDTH_1/10))
>                         aBrd.SetOutWidth( DEF_LINE_WIDTH_0 );
>                     else
>@@ -1667,16 +1638,15 @@ SETBORDERLINE:
>                         }
>                     } while( bSwgControl );
> 
>-                    // Ende der Swg-Gruppe
>-                    // -> lese noch die schliessende Klammer
>+                    // End of the Swg-Group
>+                    // -> still read the closing parenthesis
>                     if( BRACERIGHT == nToken )
>                         ;
>                     else if( !bFirstToken )
>                     {
>-                        // es ist ein Parser-Fehler, springe zum
>-                        // Ende der Gruppe
>+                        // It is a parser error, jump to the end of the group
>                         SkipGroup();
>-                        // schliessende BRACERIGHT ueberspringen
>+                        // Disregard closing BRACERIGHT 
>                         GetNextToken();
>                     }
>                     else
>@@ -1685,7 +1655,7 @@ SETBORDERLINE:
> 
>                 if( nSkip )
>                 {
>-                    SkipToken( nSkip );		// Ignore wieder zurueck
>+                    SkipToken( nSkip );		// Ignore back again
>                     bWeiter = FALSE;
>                 }
>             }
>@@ -1711,7 +1681,7 @@ inline ULONG CalcShading( ULONG nColor, ULONG nFillColor, BYTE nShading )
> void SvxRTFParser::ReadBackgroundAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet,
>                                         int bTableDef )
> {
>-    // dann lese doch mal das BoderAttribut ein
>+    // then read the border attribute
>     int bWeiter = TRUE;
>     USHORT nColor = USHRT_MAX, nFillColor = USHRT_MAX;
>     BYTE nFillValue = 0;
>@@ -1798,7 +1768,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadBackgroundAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet,
>     Color aCol( COL_WHITE ), aFCol;
>     if( !nFillValue )
>     {
>-        // es wurde nur eine von beiden Farben angegeben oder kein BrushTyp
>+        // there was only one of two colors specified or no BrushTyp
>         if( USHRT_MAX != nFillColor )
>         {
>             nFillValue = 100;
>@@ -1837,7 +1807,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadBackgroundAttr( int nToken, SfxItemSet& rSet,
> // pard / plain abarbeiten
> void SvxRTFParser::RTFPardPlain( int bPard, SfxItemSet** ppSet )
> {
>-    if( !bNewGroup && aAttrStack.Top() )	// nicht am Anfang einer neuen Gruppe
>+    if( !bNewGroup && aAttrStack.Top() )	// not at the beginning of a new group
>     {
>         SvxRTFItemStackType* pAkt = aAttrStack.Top();
> 
>@@ -1849,11 +1819,11 @@ void SvxRTFParser::RTFPardPlain( int bPard, SfxItemSet** ppSet )
>         {
>             if( pAkt->aAttrSet.Count() || pAkt->pChildList || pAkt->nStyleNo )
>             {
>-                // eine neue Gruppe aufmachen
>+                // open a new group
>                 SvxRTFItemStackType* pNew = new SvxRTFItemStackType( *pAkt, *pInsPos, TRUE );
>                 pNew->SetRTFDefaults( GetRTFDefaults() );
> 
>-                // alle bis hierher gueltigen Attribute "setzen"
>+                // Set all until here valid attributes
>                 AttrGroupEnd();
>                 pAkt = aAttrStack.Top();  // can be changed after AttrGroupEnd!
>                 pNew->aAttrSet.SetParent( pAkt ? &pAkt->aAttrSet : 0 );
>@@ -1862,13 +1832,13 @@ void SvxRTFParser::RTFPardPlain( int bPard, SfxItemSet** ppSet )
>             }
>             else
>             {
>-                // diesen Eintrag als neuen weiterbenutzen
>+                // continue to use this entry as new
>                 pAkt->SetStartPos( *pInsPos );
>                 bNewStkEntry = FALSE;
>             }
>         }
> 
>-        // jetzt noch alle auf default zuruecksetzen
>+        // now reset all to default
>         if( bNewStkEntry &&
>             ( pAkt->aAttrSet.GetParent() || pAkt->aAttrSet.Count() ))
>         {
>@@ -1890,10 +1860,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::RTFPardPlain( int bPard, SfxItemSet** ppSet )
> 
>             for( USHORT n = 0; n < nCnt; ++n, ++pPtr )
>             {
>-                // Item gesetzt und unterschiedlich -> das Pooldefault setzen
>-                //JP 06.04.98: bei Items die nur SlotItems sind, darf nicht
>-                //				auf das Default zugefriffen werden. Diese
>-                //				werden gecleart
>+                // Item set and different -> Set the Default Pool
>                 if( !*pPtr )
>                     ;
>                 else if( SFX_WHICH_MAX < *pPtr )
>@@ -1923,7 +1890,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::RTFPardPlain( int bPard, SfxItemSet** ppSet )
>             }
>         }
>         else if( bPard )
>-            pAkt->nStyleNo = 0;		// Style-Nummer zuruecksetzen
>+            pAkt->nStyleNo = 0;		// reset Style number
> 
>         *ppSet = &pAkt->aAttrSet;
> 
>@@ -1969,7 +1936,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::SetDefault( int nToken, int nValue )
> 
>     case RTF_ADEFLANG:	bIsLeftToRightDef = FALSE;  // no break!
>     case RTF_DEFLANG:
>-        // default Language merken
>+        // store default Language 
>         if( -1 != nValue )
>         {
>             SvxLanguageItem aTmpItem( (const LanguageType)nValue,
>@@ -1981,45 +1948,22 @@ void SvxRTFParser::SetDefault( int nToken, int nValue )
>     case RTF_DEFTAB:
>         if( PARDID->nTabStop )
>         {
>-            // RTF definiert 720 twips als default
>+            // RTF defines 720 twips as default
>             bIsSetDfltTab = TRUE;
>             if( -1 == nValue || !nValue )
>                 nValue = 720;
> 
>-            // wer keine Twips haben moechte ...
>+            // who would like to have no twips  ...
>             if( IsCalcValue() )
>             {
>                 nTokenValue = nValue;
>                 CalcValue();
>                 nValue = nTokenValue;
>             }
>-#if 1
>-            /*
>-            cmc:
>-             This stuff looks a little hairy indeed, this should be totally
>-             unnecessary where default tabstops are understood. Just make one
>-             tabstop and stick the value in there, the first one is all that
>-             matters.
>-
>-             e.g.
>-
>-            SvxTabStopItem aNewTab(1, USHORT(nValue), SVX_TAB_ADJUST_DEFAULT,
>-                PARDID->nTabStop);
>-            ((SvxTabStop&)aNewTab[0]).GetAdjustment() = SVX_TAB_ADJUST_DEFAULT;
>-
>-
>-             It must exist as a foul hack to support somebody that does not
>-             have a true concept of default tabstops by making a tabsetting
>-             result from the default tabstop, creating a lot of them all at
>-             the default locations to give the effect of the first real
>-             default tabstop being in use just in case the receiving
>-             application doesn't do that for itself.
>-             */
>-#endif
> 
>-            // Verhaeltnis der def. TabWidth / Tabs errechnen und
>-            // enstsprechend die neue Anzahl errechnen.
>-            // ?? wie kommt man auf die 13 ??
>+            // Calculate the ratio of default TabWidth / Tabs and 
>+            // calculate the corresponding new number.
>+            // ?? how did one come up with 13 ??
>             USHORT nAnzTabs = (SVX_TAB_DEFDIST * 13 ) / USHORT(nValue);
>             /*
>              cmc, make sure we have at least one, or all hell breaks loose in
>@@ -2028,7 +1972,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::SetDefault( int nToken, int nValue )
>             if (nAnzTabs < 1)
>                 nAnzTabs = 1;
> 
>-            // wir wollen Defaulttabs
>+            // we want Defaulttabs
>             SvxTabStopItem aNewTab( nAnzTabs, USHORT(nValue),
>                                 SVX_TAB_ADJUST_DEFAULT, PARDID->nTabStop );
>             while( nAnzTabs )
>@@ -2054,12 +1998,12 @@ void SvxRTFParser::SetDefault( int nToken, int nValue )
>     }
> }
> 
>-// default: keine Umrechnung, alles bei Twips lassen.
>+// default: no conversion, leaving everything in twips.
> void SvxRTFParser::CalcValue()
> {
> }
> 
>-    // fuer Tokens, die im ReadAttr nicht ausgewertet werden
>+// for tokens that are not evaluated in ReadAttr
> void SvxRTFParser::UnknownAttrToken( int, SfxItemSet* )
> {
> }
>diff --git a/editeng/source/rtf/svxrtf.cxx b/editeng/source/rtf/svxrtf.cxx
>index 5bd1f0c..aaeaf63 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/rtf/svxrtf.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/rtf/svxrtf.cxx
>@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ CharSet lcl_GetDefaultTextEncodingForRTF()
>         return RTL_TEXTENCODING_MS_1252;
> }
> 
>-// -------------- Methoden --------------------
>+// -------------- Methods --------------------
> 
> SvxRTFParser::SvxRTFParser( SfxItemPool& rPool, SvStream& rIn,
>             uno::Reference<document::XDocumentProperties> i_xDocProps,
>@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::SetInsPos( const SvxPosition& rNew )
> 
> SvParserState SvxRTFParser::CallParser()
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pInsPos, "keine Einfuegeposition" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pInsPos, "no insertion position");
> 
>     if( !pInsPos )
>         return SVPAR_ERROR;
>@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ SvParserState SvxRTFParser::CallParser()
> 
>     sBaseURL.Erase();
> 
>-    // erzeuge aus den gesetzten WhichIds die richtige WhichId-Tabelle.
>+    // generate the correct WhichId table from the set WhichIds.
>     BuildWhichTbl();
> 
>     return SvRTFParser::CallParser();
>@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::Continue( int nToken )
> }
> 
> 
>-// wird fuer jedes Token gerufen, das in CallParser erkannt wird
>+// is called for each token that is recognized in CallParser
> void SvxRTFParser::NextToken( int nToken )
> {
>     sal_Unicode cCh;
>@@ -200,10 +200,10 @@ void SvxRTFParser::NextToken( int nToken )
>             if( bNewDoc )
>             {
>                 if( aFontTbl.Count() )
>-                    // koennen wir sofort setzen
>+                    // Can immediately be set 
>                     SetDefault( nToken, nTokenValue );
>                 else
>-                    // wird nach einlesen der Fonttabelle gesetzt
>+                    // is set after reading the font table
>                     nDfltFont = int(nTokenValue);
>             }
>             break;
>@@ -232,11 +232,11 @@ INSINGLECHAR:
>         aToken = ByteString::ConvertToUnicode( (sal_Char)cCh,
>                                             RTL_TEXTENCODING_MS_1252 );
> 
>-        // kein Break, aToken wird als Text gesetzt
>+        // no Break, aToken is set as Text
>     case RTF_TEXTTOKEN:
>         {
>             InsertText();
>-            // alle angesammelten Attribute setzen
>+            // all collected Attributes are set
>             for( USHORT n = aAttrSetList.Count(); n; )
>             {
>                 SvxRTFItemStackType* pStkSet = aAttrSetList[--n];
>@@ -251,13 +251,13 @@ INSINGLECHAR:
>         InsertPara();
>         break;
>     case '{':
>-        if (bNewGroup)			// Verschachtelung !!
>+        if (bNewGroup)			// Nesting!
>             _GetAttrSet();
>         EnterEnvironment();
>         bNewGroup = true;
>         break;
>     case '}':
>-        if( !bNewGroup )		// leere Gruppe ??
>+        if( !bNewGroup )		// Empty Group ??
>             AttrGroupEnd();
>         LeaveEnvironment();
>         bNewGroup = false;
>@@ -272,9 +272,9 @@ INSINGLECHAR:
>         break;
> 
>     // !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
>-    // erstmal gesamt ueberlesen (muessen alle in einer Gruppe stehen !!)
>-    // Koennen auch ohne dem IGNORE-Flag im RTF-File auftreten; alle Gruppen
>-    // mit IGNORE-Flag werden im default-Zweig ueberlesen.
>+    // First overwrite all (all have to be in one group!!)
>+    // Could also appear in the RTF-filewithout the IGNORE-Flag; all Groups
>+    // with the IGNORE-Flag are overwritten in the default branch.
> 
>     case RTF_SWG_PRTDATA:
>     case RTF_FIELD:
>@@ -345,20 +345,20 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadStyleTable()
> {
>     int nToken, bSaveChkStyleAttr = bChkStyleAttr;
>     short nStyleNo = 0;
>-    int _nOpenBrakets = 1;		// die erste wurde schon vorher erkannt !!
>+    int _nOpenBrakets = 1;		// the first was already detected earlier!!
>     SvxRTFStyleType* pStyle = new SvxRTFStyleType( *pAttrPool, aWhichMap.GetData() );
>     pStyle->aAttrSet.Put( GetRTFDefaults() );
> 
>     bIsInReadStyleTab = TRUE;
>-    bChkStyleAttr = FALSE;		// Attribute nicht gegen die Styles checken
>+    bChkStyleAttr = FALSE;		// Do not check Attribute against the Styles
> 
>     while( _nOpenBrakets && IsParserWorking() )
>     {
>         switch( nToken = GetNextToken() )
>         {
>         case '}':		if( --_nOpenBrakets && IsParserWorking() )
>-                            // Style konnte vollstaendig gelesen werden,
>-                            // also ist das noch ein stabiler Status
>+                            // Style has been completely read, 
>+                            // so this is still a stable status
>                             SaveState( RTF_STYLESHEET );
>                         break;
>         case '{':
>@@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadStyleTable()
>                     nToken = SkipToken( -2 );
>                 else
>                 {
>-                    // gleich herausfiltern
>+                    // filter out at once
>                     ReadUnknownData();
>                     nToken = GetNextToken();
>                     if( '}' != nToken )
>@@ -394,19 +394,13 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadStyleTable()
>             {
>                 pStyle->sName = DelCharAtEnd( aToken, ';' );
> 
>-/*
>-??? soll man das umsetzen ???
>-                if( !pStyle->sName.Len() )
>-                    pStyle->sName = "Standard";
>-*/
>-                // sollte die Nummer doppelt vergeben werden ?
>                 if( aStyleTbl.Count() )
>                 {
>                     SvxRTFStyleType* pOldSt = aStyleTbl.Remove( nStyleNo );
>                     if( pOldSt )
>                         delete pOldSt;
>                 }
>-                // alle Daten vom Style vorhanden, also ab in die Tabelle
>+                // All data from the font is available, so off to the table
>                 aStyleTbl.Insert( nStyleNo, pStyle );
>                 pStyle = new SvxRTFStyleType( *pAttrPool, aWhichMap.GetData() );
>                 pStyle->aAttrSet.Put( GetRTFDefaults() );
>@@ -440,10 +434,10 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadStyleTable()
>             break;
>         }
>     }
>-    delete pStyle;			// loesche das letze Style
>-    SkipToken( -1 );		// die schliesende Klammer wird "oben" ausgewertet
>+    delete pStyle;			// Delete the Last Style
>+    SkipToken( -1 );		// the closing brace is evaluated "above"
> 
>-    // Flag wieder auf alten Zustand
>+    // Flag back to old state
>     bChkStyleAttr = bSaveChkStyleAttr;
>     bIsInReadStyleTab = FALSE;
> }
>@@ -461,19 +455,19 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadColorTable()
>         case RTF_GREEN:	nGreen = BYTE(nTokenValue);		break;
>         case RTF_BLUE:	nBlue = BYTE(nTokenValue);		break;
> 
>-        case RTF_TEXTTOKEN:		// oder sollte irgendein Unsin darumstehen?
>+        case RTF_TEXTTOKEN:
>             if( 1 == aToken.Len()
>                     ? aToken.GetChar( 0 ) != ';'
>                     : STRING_NOTFOUND == aToken.Search( ';' ) )
>-                break;		// es muss zumindestens das ';' gefunden werden
>+                break;		// At least the ';' must be found
> 
>-            // else kein break !!
>+            // else no break !!
> 
>         case ';':
>             if( IsParserWorking() )
>             {
>-                // eine Farbe ist Fertig, in die Tabelle eintragen
>-                // versuche die Werte auf SV interne Namen zu mappen
>+                // one color is finished, fill in the table
>+                // try to map the values to SV internal names
>                 ColorPtr pColor = new Color( nRed, nGreen, nBlue );
>                 if( !aColorTbl.Count() &&
>                     BYTE(-1) == nRed && BYTE(-1) == nGreen && BYTE(-1) == nBlue )
>@@ -481,20 +475,20 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadColorTable()
>                 aColorTbl.Insert( pColor, aColorTbl.Count() );
>                 nRed = 0, nGreen = 0, nBlue = 0;
> 
>-                // Color konnte vollstaendig gelesen werden,
>-                // also ist das noch ein stabiler Status
>+                // Color has been completely read, 
>+                // so this is still a stable status
>                 SaveState( RTF_COLORTBL );
>             }
>             break;
>         }
>     }
>-    SkipToken( -1 );		// die schliesende Klammer wird "oben" ausgewertet
>+    SkipToken( -1 );		// the closing brace is evaluated "above"
> }
> 
> void SvxRTFParser::ReadFontTable()
> {
>     int nToken;
>-    int _nOpenBrakets = 1;		// die erste wurde schon vorher erkannt !!
>+    int _nOpenBrakets = 1;		// the first was already detected earlier!!
>     Font* pFont = new Font();
>     short nFontNo(0), nInsFontNo (0);
>     String sAltNm, sFntNm;
>@@ -511,8 +505,8 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadFontTable()
>         {
>             case '}':
>                 bIsAltFntNm = FALSE;
>-                // Style konnte vollstaendig gelesen werden,
>-                // also ist das noch ein stabiler Status
>+                // Style has been completely read, 
>+                // so this is still a stable status
>                 if( --_nOpenBrakets <= 1 && IsParserWorking() )
>                     SaveState( RTF_FONTTBL );
>                 bCheckNewFont = TRUE;
>@@ -521,15 +515,15 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadFontTable()
>             case '{':
>                 if( RTF_IGNOREFLAG != GetNextToken() )
>                     nToken = SkipToken( -1 );
>-                // Unknown und alle bekannten nicht ausgewerteten Gruppen
>-                // sofort ueberspringen
>+                // immediately skip unknown and all known but non-evaluated 
>+                // groups
>                 else if( RTF_UNKNOWNCONTROL != ( nToken = GetNextToken() ) &&
>                         RTF_PANOSE != nToken && RTF_FNAME != nToken &&
>                         RTF_FONTEMB != nToken && RTF_FONTFILE != nToken )
>                     nToken = SkipToken( -2 );
>                 else
>                 {
>-                    // gleich herausfiltern
>+                    // filter out at once
>                     ReadUnknownData();
>                     nToken = GetNextToken();
>                     if( '}' != nToken )
>@@ -553,7 +547,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadFontTable()
>             case RTF_FDECOR:
>                 pFont->SetFamily( FAMILY_DECORATIVE );
>                 break;
>-            // bei technischen/symbolischen Font wird der CharSet ungeschaltet!!
>+            // for technical/symbolic font of the CharSet is changed!
>             case RTF_FTECH:
>                 pFont->SetCharSet( RTL_TEXTENCODING_SYMBOL );
>                 // deliberate fall through
>@@ -606,7 +600,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadFontTable()
> 
>         if( bCheckNewFont && 1 >= _nOpenBrakets && sFntNm.Len() )  // one font is ready
>         {
>-            // alle Daten vom Font vorhanden, also ab in die Tabelle
>+            // All data from the font is available, so off to the table
>             if (sAltNm.Len())
>                 (sFntNm += ';' ) += sAltNm;
> 
>@@ -618,11 +612,11 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadFontTable()
>             sFntNm.Erase();
>         }
>     }
>-    // den letzen muessen wir selbst loeschen
>+    // the last one we have to delete manually
>     delete pFont;
>-    SkipToken( -1 );		// die schliesende Klammer wird "oben" ausgewertet
>+    SkipToken( -1 );		// the closing brace is evaluated "above"
> 
>-    // setze den default Font am Doc
>+    // set the default font in the Document
>     if( bNewDoc && IsParserWorking() )
>         SetDefault( RTF_DEFF, nDfltFont );
> }
>@@ -640,7 +634,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadOLEData()
> String& SvxRTFParser::GetTextToEndGroup( String& rStr )
> {
>     rStr.Erase( 0 );
>-    int _nOpenBrakets = 1, nToken;		// die erste wurde schon vorher erkannt !!
>+    int _nOpenBrakets = 1, nToken;	// the first was already detected earlier!!
> 
>     while( _nOpenBrakets && IsParserWorking() )
>     {
>@@ -655,7 +649,7 @@ String& SvxRTFParser::GetTextToEndGroup( String& rStr )
>                     nToken = SkipToken( -2 );
>                 else
>                 {
>-                    // gleich herausfiltern
>+                    // filter out at once
>                     ReadUnknownData();
>                     nToken = GetNextToken();
>                     if( '}' != nToken )
>@@ -671,7 +665,7 @@ String& SvxRTFParser::GetTextToEndGroup( String& rStr )
>             break;
>         }
>     }
>-    SkipToken( -1 );		// die schliesende Klammer wird "oben" ausgewertet
>+    SkipToken( -1 );		// the closing brace is evaluated "above"
>     return rStr;
> }
> 
>@@ -693,14 +687,14 @@ util::DateTime SvxRTFParser::GetDateTimeStamp( )
>             bWeiter = FALSE;
>         }
>     }
>-    SkipToken( -1 );		// die schliesende Klammer wird "oben" ausgewertet
>+    SkipToken( -1 );		// the closing brace is evaluated "above"
>     return aDT;
> }
> 
> void SvxRTFParser::ReadInfo( const sal_Char* pChkForVerNo )
> {
> #ifndef SVX_LIGHT
>-    int _nOpenBrakets = 1, nToken;		// die erste wurde schon vorher erkannt !!
>+    int _nOpenBrakets = 1, nToken;	// the first was already detected earlier!!
>     DBG_ASSERT(m_xDocProps.is(),
>         "SvxRTFParser::ReadInfo: no DocumentProperties");
>     String sStr, sComment;
>@@ -719,7 +713,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadInfo( const sal_Char* pChkForVerNo )
>                     nToken = SkipToken( -2 );
>                 else
>                 {
>-                    // gleich herausfiltern
>+                    // filter out at once
>                     ReadUnknownData();
>                     nToken = GetNextToken();
>                     if( '}' != nToken )
>@@ -798,7 +792,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::ReadInfo( const sal_Char* pChkForVerNo )
>         COMPARE_EQUAL == sComment.CompareToAscii( pChkForVerNo ))
>         nVersionNo = nVersNo;
> 
>-    SkipToken( -1 );		// die schliesende Klammer wird "oben" ausgewertet
>+    SkipToken( -1 );		// the closing brace is evaluated "above"
> #endif
> }
> 
>@@ -893,35 +887,32 @@ void SvxRTFParser::_ClearStyleAttr( SvxRTFItemStackType& rStkType )
>             if( SFX_WHICH_MAX > nWhich &&
>                 SFX_ITEM_SET == rSet.GetItemState( nWhich, FALSE, &pItem ) &&
>                      rPool.GetDefaultItem( nWhich ) == *pItem )
>-                rSet.ClearItem( nWhich );		// loeschen
>+                rSet.ClearItem( nWhich );		// delete
>         }
>     }
>     else
>     {
>-        // alle Attribute, die schon vom Style definiert sind, aus dem
>-        // akt. AttrSet entfernen
>+        // Delete all Attributes, which are already defined in the Style,
>+        // from the current AttrSet.
>         SfxItemSet &rStyleSet = pStyle->aAttrSet;
>         const SfxPoolItem* pSItem;
>         for( USHORT nWhich = aIter.GetCurWhich(); nWhich; nWhich = aIter.NextWhich() )
>         {
>             if( SFX_ITEM_SET == rStyleSet.GetItemState( nWhich, TRUE, &pSItem ))
>             {
>-                // JP 22.06.99: im Style und im Set gleich gesetzt -> loeschen
>                 if( SFX_ITEM_SET == rSet.GetItemState( nWhich, FALSE, &pItem )
>                     && *pItem == *pSItem )
>-                    rSet.ClearItem( nWhich );		// loeschen
>+                    rSet.ClearItem( nWhich );		// delete
>             }
>-                // Bug 59571 - falls nicht im Style gesetzt und gleich mit
>-                // 				dem PoolDefault -> auch dann loeschen
>             else if( SFX_WHICH_MAX > nWhich &&
>                     SFX_ITEM_SET == rSet.GetItemState( nWhich, FALSE, &pItem ) &&
>                      rPool.GetDefaultItem( nWhich ) == *pItem )
>-                rSet.ClearItem( nWhich );		// loeschen
>+                rSet.ClearItem( nWhich );		// delete
>         }
>     }
> }
> 
>-void SvxRTFParser::AttrGroupEnd()	// den akt. Bearbeiten, vom Stack loeschen
>+void SvxRTFParser::AttrGroupEnd()	// process the current, delete from Stack
> {
>     if( aAttrStack.Count() )
>     {
>@@ -934,9 +925,9 @@ void SvxRTFParser::AttrGroupEnd()	// den akt. Bearbeiten, vom Stack loeschen
>                 ((!pOld->aAttrSet.Count() && !pOld->nStyleNo ) ||
>                 (nOldSttNdIdx == pInsPos->GetNodeIdx() &&
>                 pOld->nSttCnt == pInsPos->GetCntIdx() )))
>-                break;			// keine Attribute oder Bereich
>+                break;			// no attributes or Area
> 
>-            // setze nur die Attribute, die unterschiedlich zum Parent sind
>+            // set only the attributes that are different from the parent
>             if( pAkt && pOld->aAttrSet.Count() )
>             {
>                 SfxItemIter aIter( pOld->aAttrSet );
>@@ -958,19 +949,17 @@ void SvxRTFParser::AttrGroupEnd()	// den akt. Bearbeiten, vom Stack loeschen
>                     break;
>             }
> 
>-            // setze alle Attribute, die von Start bis hier
>-            // definiert sind.
>+            // Set all attributes which have been defined from start until here
>             int bCrsrBack = !pInsPos->GetCntIdx();
>             if( bCrsrBack )
>             {
>-                // am Absatzanfang ? eine Position zurueck
>+                // at the beginning of a paragraph? Move back one position
>                 ULONG nNd = pInsPos->GetNodeIdx();
>                 MovePos( FALSE );
>                 // if can not move backward then later dont move forward !
>                 bCrsrBack = nNd != pInsPos->GetNodeIdx();
>             }
> 
>-            //Bug #46608#: ungueltige Bereiche ignorieren!
>             if( ( pOld->pSttNd->GetIdx() < pInsPos->GetNodeIdx() ||
>                 ( pOld->pSttNd->GetIdx() == pInsPos->GetNodeIdx() &&
>                 pOld->nSttCnt <= pInsPos->GetCntIdx() ))
>@@ -978,37 +967,36 @@ void SvxRTFParser::AttrGroupEnd()	// den akt. Bearbeiten, vom Stack loeschen
>             {
>                 if( !bCrsrBack )
>                 {
>-                    // alle pard-Attribute gelten nur bis zum vorherigen
>-                    // Absatz !!
>+                    // all pard attributes are only valid until the previous
>+                    // paragraph !!
>                     if( nOldSttNdIdx == pInsPos->GetNodeIdx() )
>                     {
>                     }
>                     else
>                     {
>-                        // jetzt wirds kompliziert:
>-                        // - alle Zeichen-Attribute behalten den Bereich,
>-                        // - alle Absatz-Attribute bekommen den Bereich
>-                        // 			bis zum vorherigen Absatz
>+                        // Now it gets complicated:
>+                        // - all character attributes sre keep the area
>+                        // - all paragraph attributes to get the area
>+                        // 	 up to the previous paragraph
>                         SvxRTFItemStackType* pNew = new SvxRTFItemStackType(
>                                     *pOld, *pInsPos, TRUE );
>                         pNew->aAttrSet.SetParent( pOld->aAttrSet.GetParent() );
> 
>-                        // loesche aus pNew alle Absatz Attribute
>+                        // Delete all paragraph attributes from pNew
>                         for( USHORT n = 0; n < aPardMap.Count() &&
>                                             pNew->aAttrSet.Count(); ++n )
>                             if( aPardMap[n] )
>                                 pNew->aAttrSet.ClearItem( aPardMap[n] );
>                         pNew->SetRTFDefaults( GetRTFDefaults() );
> 
>-                        // gab es ueberhaupt welche ?
>+                        // Were there any?
>                         if( pNew->aAttrSet.Count() == pOld->aAttrSet.Count() )
>-                            delete pNew;		// das wars dann
>+                            delete pNew;
>                         else
>                         {
>                             pNew->nStyleNo = 0;
> 
>-                            // spanne jetzt den richtigen Bereich auf
>-                            // pNew von alter
>+                            // Now span the real area of pNew from old
>                             SetEndPrevPara( pOld->pEndNd, pOld->nEndCnt );
>                             pNew->nSttCnt = 0;
> 
>@@ -1025,14 +1013,14 @@ void SvxRTFParser::AttrGroupEnd()	// den akt. Bearbeiten, vom Stack loeschen
>                             }
>                             else
>                             {
>-                                // letzter vom Stack, also zwischenspeichern, bis der
>-                                // naechste Text eingelesen wurde. (keine Attribute
>-                                // aufspannen!!)
>+                                // Last off the stack, thus cache it until the next text was
>+                                // read. (Span no attributes!)
>+
>                                 aAttrSetList.Insert( pOld, aAttrSetList.Count() );
>                                 aAttrSetList.Insert( pNew, aAttrSetList.Count() );
>                             }
>-                            pOld = 0;	// pOld nicht loeschen
>-                            break;		// das wars !!
>+                            pOld = 0;	// Do not delete pOld 
>+                            break;
>                         }
>                     }
>                 }
>@@ -1060,16 +1048,16 @@ void SvxRTFParser::AttrGroupEnd()	// den akt. Bearbeiten, vom Stack loeschen
>                     // to create a "so long" depend list. Bug 95010
>                     if( bCrsrBack && 50 < pAkt->pChildList->Count() )
>                     {
>-                        // am Absatzanfang ? eine Position zurueck
>+                        // at the beginning of a paragraph? Move back one position
>                         MovePos( TRUE );
>                         bCrsrBack = FALSE;
> 
>-                        // eine neue Gruppe aufmachen
>+                        // Open a new Group.
>                         SvxRTFItemStackType* pNew = new SvxRTFItemStackType(
>                                                 *pAkt, *pInsPos, TRUE );
>                         pNew->SetRTFDefaults( GetRTFDefaults() );
> 
>-                        // alle bis hierher gueltigen Attribute "setzen"
>+                        // Set all until here valid Attributes 
>                         AttrGroupEnd();
>                         pAkt = aAttrStack.Top();  // can be changed after AttrGroupEnd!
>                         pNew->aAttrSet.SetParent( pAkt ? &pAkt->aAttrSet : 0 );
>@@ -1078,16 +1066,15 @@ void SvxRTFParser::AttrGroupEnd()	// den akt. Bearbeiten, vom Stack loeschen
>                     }
>                 }
>                 else
>-                    // letzter vom Stack, also zwischenspeichern, bis der
>-                    // naechste Text eingelesen wurde. (keine Attribute
>-                    // aufspannen!!)
>+                    // Last off the stack, thus cache it until the next text was
>+                    // read. (Span no attributes!)
>                     aAttrSetList.Insert( pOld, aAttrSetList.Count() );
> 
>                 pOld = 0;
>             }
> 
>             if( bCrsrBack )
>-                // am Absatzanfang ? eine Position zurueck
>+                // at the beginning of a paragraph? Move back one position
>                 MovePos( TRUE );
> 
>         } while( FALSE );
>@@ -1101,7 +1088,7 @@ void SvxRTFParser::AttrGroupEnd()	// den akt. Bearbeiten, vom Stack loeschen
> 
> void SvxRTFParser::SetAllAttrOfStk()		// end all Attr. and set it into doc
> {
>-    // noch alle Attrbute vom Stack holen !!
>+    // Yet to get all Attrbutes from the stack!
>     while( aAttrStack.Count() )
>         AttrGroupEnd();
> 
>@@ -1113,10 +1100,10 @@ void SvxRTFParser::SetAllAttrOfStk()		// end all Attr. and set it into doc
>     }
> }
> 
>-// setzt alle Attribute, die unterschiedlich zum aktuellen sind
>+// sets all the attributes that are different from the current
> void SvxRTFParser::SetAttrSet( SvxRTFItemStackType &rSet )
> {
>-    // wurde DefTab nie eingelesen? dann setze auf default
>+    // Was DefTab never read? then set to default
>     if( !bIsSetDfltTab )
>         SetDefault( RTF_DEFTAB, 720 );
> 
>@@ -1125,13 +1112,13 @@ void SvxRTFParser::SetAttrSet( SvxRTFItemStackType &rSet )
>     if( rSet.aAttrSet.Count() || rSet.nStyleNo )
>         SetAttrInDoc( rSet );
> 
>-    // dann mal alle Childs abarbeiten
>+    // then process all the children
>     if( rSet.pChildList )
>         for( USHORT n = 0; n < rSet.pChildList->Count(); ++n )
>             SetAttrSet( *(*rSet.pChildList)[ n ] );
> }
> 
>-    // wurde noch kein Text eingefuegt ? (SttPos vom obersten StackEintrag!)
>+    // Has no Text been inserted yet? (SttPos from the top Stack entry!)
> int	SvxRTFParser::IsAttrSttPos()
> {
>     SvxRTFItemStackType* pAkt = aAttrStack.Top();
>@@ -1162,9 +1149,9 @@ void SvxRTFParser::BuildWhichTbl()
>         aWhichMap.Remove( 0, aWhichMap.Count() );
>     aWhichMap.Insert( (USHORT)0, (USHORT)0 );
> 
>-    // Aufbau einer Which-Map 'rWhichMap' aus einem Array von
>-    // 'pWhichIds' von Which-Ids. Es hat die Lange 'nWhichIds'.
>-    // Die Which-Map wird nicht geloescht.
>+    // Building a Which-Map 'rWhichMap' from an Array of
>+    // 'pWhichIds' frm Which-Ids. It has the long 'nWhichIds'.
>+    // The Which-Map is not going to be deleted.
>     SvParser::BuildWhichTbl( aWhichMap, (USHORT*)aPardMap.GetData(), aPardMap.Count() );
>     SvParser::BuildWhichTbl( aWhichMap, (USHORT*)aPlainMap.GetData(), aPlainMap.Count() );
> }
>@@ -1192,9 +1179,9 @@ const SfxItemSet& SvxRTFParser::GetRTFDefaults()
> SvxRTFStyleType::SvxRTFStyleType( SfxItemPool& rPool, const USHORT* pWhichRange )
>     : aAttrSet( rPool, pWhichRange )
> {
>-    nOutlineNo = BYTE(-1);			// nicht gesetzt
>+    nOutlineNo = BYTE(-1);			// not set
>     nBasedOn = 0;
>-    bBasedOnIsSet = FALSE;          //$flr #117411#
>+    bBasedOnIsSet = FALSE;
>     nNext = 0;
>     bIsCharFmt = FALSE;
> }
>@@ -1292,7 +1279,7 @@ bool SvxRTFParser::UncompressableStackEntry(const SvxRTFItemStackType &) const
> 
> void SvxRTFItemStackType::Compress( const SvxRTFParser& rParser )
> {
>-    DBG_ASSERT( pChildList, "es gibt keine ChildListe" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( pChildList, "There is no child list" );
> 
>     USHORT n;
>     SvxRTFItemStackType* pTmp = (*pChildList)[0];
>@@ -1329,7 +1316,7 @@ void SvxRTFItemStackType::Compress( const SvxRTFParser& rParser )
> 
>         if( n )
>         {
>-            // suche alle, die ueber den gesamten Bereich gesetzt sind
>+            // Search for all which are set over the whole area
>             SfxItemIter aIter( aMrgSet );
>             const SfxPoolItem* pItem;
>             do {
>@@ -1354,7 +1341,7 @@ void SvxRTFItemStackType::Compress( const SvxRTFParser& rParser )
>     if( pEndNd->GetIdx() != pLastNd->GetIdx() || nEndCnt != nLastCnt )
>         return;
> 
>-    // es kann zusammengefasst werden
>+    // It can be merged
>     aAttrSet.Put( aMrgSet );
> 
>     for( n = 0; n < pChildList->Count(); ++n )
>diff --git a/editeng/source/uno/unoedhlp.cxx b/editeng/source/uno/unoedhlp.cxx
>index d186a3c..55754f7 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/uno/unoedhlp.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/uno/unoedhlp.cxx
>@@ -185,14 +185,12 @@ Point SvxEditSourceHelper::UserSpaceToEE( const Point& rPoint, const Size& rEESi
> 
> Rectangle SvxEditSourceHelper::EEToUserSpace( const Rectangle& rRect, const Size& rEESize, bool bIsVertical )
> {
>-    // #106775# Don't touch rect if not vertical
>     return bIsVertical ? Rectangle( EEToUserSpace(rRect.BottomLeft(), rEESize, bIsVertical),
>                                     EEToUserSpace(rRect.TopRight(), rEESize, bIsVertical) ) : rRect;
> }
> 
> Rectangle SvxEditSourceHelper::UserSpaceToEE( const Rectangle& rRect, const Size& rEESize, bool bIsVertical )
> {
>-    // #106775# Don't touch rect if not vertical
>     return bIsVertical ? Rectangle( UserSpaceToEE(rRect.TopRight(), rEESize, bIsVertical),
>                                     UserSpaceToEE(rRect.BottomLeft(), rEESize, bIsVertical) ) : rRect;
> }
>diff --git a/editeng/source/uno/unofored.cxx b/editeng/source/uno/unofored.cxx
>index 51ba135..053f871 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/uno/unofored.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/uno/unofored.cxx
>@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
> #include <editeng/unoedhlp.hxx>
> #include <editeng/editdata.hxx>
> #include <editeng/outliner.hxx>
>-#include <editeng/editobj.hxx>		// nur fuer die GetText-Kruecke
>+#include <editeng/editobj.hxx>		// only for the GetText crutch
> 
> #include <editeng/unofored.hxx>
> 
>@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ SvxEditEngineForwarder::SvxEditEngineForwarder( EditEngine& rEngine ) :
> 
> SvxEditEngineForwarder::~SvxEditEngineForwarder()
> {
>-    //	die EditEngine muss ggf. von aussen geloescht werden
>+    // the EditEngine may need to be deleted from the outside
> }
> 
> USHORT SvxEditEngineForwarder::GetParagraphCount() const
>@@ -428,7 +428,6 @@ OutputDevice* SvxEditEngineForwarder::GetRefDevice() const
> 
> sal_Bool SvxEditEngineForwarder::GetIndexAtPoint( const Point& rPos, USHORT& nPara, USHORT& nIndex ) const
> {
>-    // #101701#
>     Size aSize( rEditEngine.CalcTextWidth(), rEditEngine.GetTextHeight() );
>     ::std::swap( aSize.Width(), aSize.Height() );
>     Point aEEPos( SvxEditSourceHelper::UserSpaceToEE( rPos, 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/uno/unoforou.cxx b/editeng/source/uno/unoforou.cxx
>index a7b67a3..4544fd3 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/uno/unoforou.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/uno/unoforou.cxx
>@@ -76,8 +76,8 @@ USHORT SvxOutlinerForwarder::GetTextLen( USHORT nParagraph ) const
> 
> String SvxOutlinerForwarder::GetText( const ESelection& rSel ) const
> {
>-    //!	GetText(ESelection) sollte es wohl auch mal am Outliner geben
>-    //	solange den Hack fuer die EditEngine uebernehmen:
>+    //! GetText (ESelection) should probably also be in the Outliner 
>+    // in the time beeing use as the hack for the EditEngine:
>     EditEngine* pEditEngine = (EditEngine*)&rOutliner.GetEditEngine();
>     return pEditEngine->GetText( rSel, LINEEND_LF );
> }
>@@ -128,8 +128,8 @@ SfxItemSet SvxOutlinerForwarder::GetAttribs( const ESelection& rSel, BOOL bOnlyH
>         }
>     }
> 
>-    //!	gibt's das nicht am Outliner ???
>-    //!	und warum ist GetAttribs an der EditEngine nicht const?
>+    //! Does it not exist on the Outliner?
>+    //!	and why is the GetAttribs on the EditEngine not a const?
>     EditEngine& rEditEngine = (EditEngine&)rOutliner.GetEditEngine();
> 
>     SfxItemSet aSet( ImplOutlinerForwarderGetAttribs( rSel, bOnlyHardAttrib, rEditEngine ) );
>@@ -305,7 +305,6 @@ EBulletInfo SvxOutlinerForwarder::GetBulletInfo( USHORT nPara ) const
> 
> Rectangle SvxOutlinerForwarder::GetCharBounds( USHORT nPara, USHORT nIndex ) const
> {
>-    // #101701#
>     // EditEngine's 'internal' methods like GetCharacterBounds()
>     // don't rotate for vertical text.
>     Size aSize( rOutliner.CalcTextSize() );
>@@ -358,7 +357,6 @@ Rectangle SvxOutlinerForwarder::GetParaBounds( USHORT nPara ) const
> 
>     if( rOutliner.IsVertical() )
>     {
>-        // #101701#
>         // Hargl. Outliner's 'external' methods return the rotated
>         // dimensions, 'internal' methods like GetTextHeight( n )
>         // don't rotate.
>@@ -386,7 +384,6 @@ OutputDevice* SvxOutlinerForwarder::GetRefDevice() const
> 
> sal_Bool SvxOutlinerForwarder::GetIndexAtPoint( const Point& rPos, USHORT& nPara, USHORT& nIndex ) const
> {
>-    // #101701#
>     Size aSize( rOutliner.CalcTextSize() );
>     ::std::swap( aSize.Width(), aSize.Height() );
>     Point aEEPos( SvxEditSourceHelper::UserSpaceToEE( rPos,
>diff --git a/editeng/source/uno/unoipset.cxx b/editeng/source/uno/unoipset.cxx
>index 31c81aa..a2a8292 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/uno/unoipset.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/uno/unoipset.cxx
>@@ -168,13 +168,13 @@ void SvxItemPropertySet::setPropertyValue( const SfxItemPropertySimpleEntry* pMa
>     if(!pMap || !pMap->nWID)
>         return;
> 
>-    // item holen
>+    // Get item
>     const SfxPoolItem* pItem = 0;
>     SfxPoolItem *pNewItem = 0;
>     SfxItemState eState = rSet.GetItemState( pMap->nWID, sal_True, &pItem );
>     SfxItemPool* pPool = rSet.GetPool();
> 
>-    // UnoAny in item-Wert stecken
>+    // Put UnoAny in the item value
>     if(eState < SFX_ITEM_DEFAULT || pItem == NULL)
>     {
>         if( pPool == NULL )
>@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ void SvxItemPropertySet::setPropertyValue( const SfxItemPropertySimpleEntry* pMa
> 
>         if( pNewItem->PutValue( aValue, nMemberId ) )
>         {
>-            // neues item in itemset setzen
>+            // Set new item in item set
>             rSet.Put( *pNewItem, pMap->nWID );
>         }
>         delete pNewItem;
>@@ -218,25 +218,22 @@ void SvxItemPropertySet::setPropertyValue( const SfxItemPropertySimpleEntry* pMa
> //----------------------------------------------------------------------
> uno::Any SvxItemPropertySet::getPropertyValue( const SfxItemPropertySimpleEntry* pMap ) const
> {
>-    // Schon ein Wert eingetragen? Dann schnell fertig
>+    // Already entered a value? Then finish quickly 
>     uno::Any* pUsrAny = GetUsrAnyForID(pMap->nWID);
>     if(pUsrAny)
>         return *pUsrAny;
> 
>-    // Noch kein UsrAny gemerkt, generiere Default-Eintrag und gib
>-    // diesen zurueck
>-
>+    // No UsrAny detected yet, generate Default entry and return this
>     const SfxMapUnit eMapUnit = mrItemPool.GetMetric((USHORT)pMap->nWID);
>     BYTE nMemberId = pMap->nMemberId & (~SFX_METRIC_ITEM);
>     if( eMapUnit == SFX_MAPUNIT_100TH_MM )
>         nMemberId &= (~CONVERT_TWIPS);
>-
>     uno::Any aVal;
>     SfxItemSet aSet( mrItemPool, pMap->nWID, pMap->nWID);
> 
>     if( (pMap->nWID < OWN_ATTR_VALUE_START) && (pMap->nWID > OWN_ATTR_VALUE_END ) )
>     {
>-        // Default aus ItemPool holen
>+        // Get Default from ItemPool
>         if(mrItemPool.IsWhich(pMap->nWID))
>             aSet.Put(mrItemPool.GetDefaultItem(pMap->nWID));
>     }
>diff --git a/editeng/source/uno/unonrule.cxx b/editeng/source/uno/unonrule.cxx
>index a9c5dd6..cca9f8b 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/uno/unonrule.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/uno/unonrule.cxx
>@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ Sequence<beans::PropertyValue> SvxUnoNumberingRules::getNumberingRuleByIndex( sa
>     aVal <<= (sal_Int16)rFmt.GetBulletRelSize();
>     pArray[nIdx++] = beans::PropertyValue(OUString(RTL_CONSTASCII_USTRINGPARAM(UNO_NAME_NRULE_BULLET_RELSIZE)), -1, aVal, beans::PropertyState_DIRECT_VALUE);
> 
>-    DBG_ASSERT( nIdx <= nProps, "FixMe: Array uebergelaufen!!!! [CL]" );
>+    DBG_ASSERT( nIdx <= nProps, "FixMe: overflow in Array!!! [CL]" );
>     Sequence< beans::PropertyValue> aSeq(pArray, nIdx);
> 
>     delete [] pArray;
>diff --git a/editeng/source/uno/unotext.cxx b/editeng/source/uno/unotext.cxx
>index 3acc7fe..7bcfe0e 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/uno/unotext.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/uno/unotext.cxx
>@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ const SvxItemPropertySet* ImplGetSvxUnoOutlinerTextCursorSvxPropertySet()
> 
> const SfxItemPropertyMapEntry* ImplGetSvxTextPortionPropertyMap()
> {
>-    // Propertymap fuer einen Outliner Text
>+    // Propertymap for an Outliner Text
>     static const SfxItemPropertyMapEntry aSvxTextPortionPropertyMap[] =
>     {
>         SVX_UNOEDIT_CHAR_PROPERTIES,
>@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ const SfxItemPropertySet* ImplGetSvxTextPortionSfxPropertySet()
> 
> const SfxItemPropertyMapEntry* ImplGetSvxUnoOutlinerTextCursorPropertyMap()
> {
>-    // Propertymap fuer einen Outliner Text
>+    // Propertymap for an Outliner Text
>     static const SfxItemPropertyMapEntry aSvxUnoOutlinerTextCursorPropertyMap[] =
>     {
>         SVX_UNOEDIT_CHAR_PROPERTIES,
>@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ const SfxItemPropertySet* ImplGetSvxUnoOutlinerTextCursorSfxPropertySet()
> }
> 
> // ====================================================================
>-// helper fuer Item/Property Konvertierung
>+// helper for Item/Property conversion
> // ====================================================================
> 
> void GetSelection( struct ESelection& rSel, SvxTextForwarder* pForwarder ) throw()
>@@ -444,14 +444,14 @@ void SAL_CALL SvxUnoTextRangeBase::setString(const OUString& aString)
>         CheckSelection( maSelection, pForwarder );
> 
>         String aConverted( aString );
>-        aConverted.ConvertLineEnd( LINEEND_LF );		// Zeilenenden nur einfach zaehlen
>+        aConverted.ConvertLineEnd( LINEEND_LF );  // Simply count the number of line endings
> 
>         pForwarder->QuickInsertText( aConverted, maSelection );
>         mpEditSource->UpdateData();
> 
>-        //	Selektion anpassen
>-        //!	Wenn die EditEngine bei QuickInsertText die Selektion zurueckgeben wuerde,
>-        //!	waer's einfacher...
>+        //  Adapt selection
>+        //!	It would be easier if the EditEngine would return the selection
>+        //! on QuickInsertText...
>         CollapseToStart();
> 
>         sal_uInt16 nLen = aConverted.Len();
>@@ -538,9 +538,9 @@ void SvxUnoTextRangeBase::setPropertyValue( const SfxItemPropertySimpleEntry* pM
> {
>     if(!SetPropertyValueHelper( rOldSet, pMap, rValue, rNewSet, &rSelection, GetEditSource() ))
>     {
>-        //	Fuer Teile von zusammengesetzten Items mit mehreren Properties (z.B. Hintergrund)
>-        //	muss vorher das alte Item aus dem Dokument geholt werden
>-        rNewSet.Put(rOldSet.Get(pMap->nWID));			// altes Item in neuen Set
>+        // For parts of composite items with multiple properties (eg background)
>+        // must be taken from the document before the old item.
>+        rNewSet.Put(rOldSet.Get(pMap->nWID));  // Old Item in new Set
>         mpPropSet->setPropertyValue(pMap, rValue, rNewSet, false );
>     }
> }
>@@ -658,7 +658,7 @@ uno::Any SAL_CALL SvxUnoTextRangeBase::_getPropertyValue(const OUString& Propert
>             else
>                 pAttribs = pForwarder->GetAttribs( GetSelection() ).Clone();
> 
>-            //	Dontcare durch Default ersetzen, damit man immer eine Reflection hat
>+            //	Replace Dontcare with Default, so that one always has a mirror
>             pAttribs->ClearInvalidItems();
> 
>             getPropertyValue( pMap, aAny, *pAttribs );
>@@ -789,7 +789,7 @@ sal_Bool SvxUnoTextRangeBase::GetPropertyValueHelper(  SfxItemSet& rSet, const S
>     return sal_True;
> }
> 
>-// wird (noch) nicht unterstuetzt
>+// is not (yet) supported
> void SAL_CALL SvxUnoTextRangeBase::addPropertyChangeListener( const OUString& , const uno::Reference< beans::XPropertyChangeListener >& ) throw(beans::UnknownPropertyException, lang::WrappedTargetException, uno::RuntimeException) {}
> void SAL_CALL SvxUnoTextRangeBase::removePropertyChangeListener( const OUString& , const uno::Reference< beans::XPropertyChangeListener >& ) throw(beans::UnknownPropertyException, lang::WrappedTargetException, uno::RuntimeException) {}
> void SAL_CALL SvxUnoTextRangeBase::addVetoableChangeListener( const OUString& , const uno::Reference< beans::XVetoableChangeListener >& ) throw(beans::UnknownPropertyException, lang::WrappedTargetException, uno::RuntimeException) {}
>@@ -1324,7 +1324,7 @@ uno::Any SAL_CALL SvxUnoTextRangeBase::getPropertyDefault( const OUString& aProp
> 
>             default:
>                 {
>-                    // Default aus ItemPool holen
>+                    // Get Default from ItemPool
>                     if(pPool->IsWhich(pMap->nWID))
>                     {
>                         SfxItemSet aSet( *pPool,	pMap->nWID, pMap->nWID);
>@@ -1422,7 +1422,7 @@ sal_Bool SvxUnoTextRangeBase::GoLeft(sal_Int16 nCount, sal_Bool Expand) throw()
>         else
>         {
>             if ( !pForwarder )
>-                pForwarder = mpEditSource->GetTextForwarder();	// erst hier, wenn's noetig ist...
>+                pForwarder = mpEditSource->GetTextForwarder();	// first here, it it is necessary...
> 
>             --nNewPar;
>             nCount -= nNewPos + 1;
>@@ -1451,7 +1451,7 @@ sal_Bool SvxUnoTextRangeBase::GoRight(sal_Int16 nCount, sal_Bool Expand)  throw(
>         CheckSelection( maSelection, pForwarder );
> 
> 
>-        sal_uInt16 nNewPos = maSelection.nEndPos + nCount;			//! Ueberlauf ???
>+        sal_uInt16 nNewPos = maSelection.nEndPos + nCount; //! Overflow???
>         sal_uInt16 nNewPar = maSelection.nEndPara;
> 
>         sal_Bool bOk = sal_True;
>@@ -1758,15 +1758,14 @@ ESelection SvxUnoTextBase::InsertField( const SvxFieldItem& rField ) throw()
>         pForwarder->QuickInsertField( rField, GetSelection() );
>         GetEditSource()->UpdateData();
> 
>-        //	Selektion anpassen
>-        //!	Wenn die EditEngine bei QuickInsertText die Selektion zurueckgeben wuerde,
>-        //!	waer's einfacher...
>-
>+        //	Adapt selection
>+        //!	It would be easier if the EditEngine would return the selection
>+        //! on QuickInsertText...
>         CollapseToStart();
>-        GoRight( 1, sal_True );		// Feld ist immer 1 Zeichen
>+        GoRight( 1, sal_True );  // Field is always 1 character
>     }
> 
>-    return GetSelection();	// Selektion mit dem Feld
>+    return GetSelection();	// Selection with the field
> }
> 
> // XInterface
>@@ -1891,11 +1890,12 @@ void SAL_CALL SvxUnoTextBase::insertString( const uno::Reference< text::XTextRan
>     SvxUnoTextRangeBase* pRange = SvxUnoTextRange::getImplementation( xRange );
>     if(pRange)
>     {
>-        //	setString am SvxUnoTextRangeBase statt selber QuickInsertText und UpdateData,
>-        //	damit die Selektion am SvxUnoTextRangeBase angepasst wird.
>-        //!	Eigentlich muessten alle Cursor-Objekte dieses Textes angepasst werden!
>+        // setString on SvxUnoTextRangeBase instead of itself QuickInsertText
>+        // and UpdateData, so that the selection will be adjusted to 
>+        // SvxUnoTextRangeBase. Actually all cursor objects of this Text must
>+        // to be statement to be adapted!
> 
>-        if (!bAbsorb)					// nicht ersetzen -> hinten anhaengen
>+        if (!bAbsorb)					// do not replace -> append on tail
>             pRange->CollapseToEnd();
> 
>         pRange->setString( aString );
>@@ -1921,7 +1921,7 @@ void SAL_CALL SvxUnoTextBase::insertControlCharacter( const uno::Reference< text
>         {
>         case text::ControlCharacter::PARAGRAPH_BREAK:
>         {
>-            const String aText( (sal_Unicode)13 );	// '\r' geht auf'm Mac nicht
>+            const String aText( (sal_Unicode)13 );	// '\r' does not work on Mac
>             insertString( xRange, aText, bAbsorb );
> 
>             return;
>@@ -2530,7 +2530,7 @@ String SvxDummyTextSource::GetText( const ESelection& ) const
> 
> SfxItemSet SvxDummyTextSource::GetAttribs( const ESelection&, BOOL ) const
> {
>-    // AW: Very dangerous: The former implementation used a SfxItemPool created on the
>+    // Very dangerous: The former implementation used a SfxItemPool created on the
>     // fly which of course was deleted again ASAP. Thus, the returned SfxItemSet was using
>     // a deleted Pool by design.
>     return SfxItemSet(EditEngine::GetGlobalItemPool());
>diff --git a/editeng/source/uno/unotext2.cxx b/editeng/source/uno/unotext2.cxx
>index 5f4a19a..731aa8c 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/uno/unotext2.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/uno/unotext2.cxx
>@@ -516,7 +516,8 @@ SvxUnoTextCursor::~SvxUnoTextCursor() throw()
> {
> }
> 
>-// automatisch auskommentiert - [getIdlClass(es) or queryInterface] - Bitte XTypeProvider benutzen!
>+// Comment out automatically - [getIdlClass(es) or queryInterface]
>+// Please use the XTypeProvider!
> //sal_Bool SvxUnoTextCursor::queryInterface( uno::Uik aUIK, Reference< uno::XInterface > & xRef)
> uno::Any SAL_CALL SvxUnoTextCursor::queryAggregation( const uno::Type & rType )
>     throw(uno::RuntimeException)
>diff --git a/editeng/source/uno/unoviwou.cxx b/editeng/source/uno/unoviwou.cxx
>index 6c4c024..2117334 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/uno/unoviwou.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/uno/unoviwou.cxx
>@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ SvxDrawOutlinerViewForwarder::~SvxDrawOutlinerViewForwarder()
> 
> Point SvxDrawOutlinerViewForwarder::GetTextOffset() const
> {
>-    // #101029# calc text offset from shape anchor
>+    // calc text offset from shape anchor
>     Rectangle aOutputRect( mrOutlinerView.GetOutputArea() );
> 
>     return aOutputRect.TopLeft() - maTextShapeTopLeft;
>@@ -70,7 +70,6 @@ Rectangle SvxDrawOutlinerViewForwarder::GetVisArea() const
>     {
>         Rectangle aVisArea = mrOutlinerView.GetVisArea();
> 
>-        // #101029#
>         Point aTextOffset( GetTextOffset() );
>         aVisArea.Move( aTextOffset.X(), aTextOffset.Y() );
> 
>@@ -100,7 +99,6 @@ Point SvxDrawOutlinerViewForwarder::LogicToPixel( const Point& rPoint, const Map
>         Point aPoint1( rPoint );
>         Point aTextOffset( GetTextOffset() );
> 
>-        // #101029#
>         aPoint1.X() += aTextOffset.X();
>         aPoint1.Y() += aTextOffset.Y();
> 
>@@ -126,7 +124,6 @@ Point SvxDrawOutlinerViewForwarder::PixelToLogic( const Point& rPoint, const Map
>         Point aPoint2( OutputDevice::LogicToLogic( aPoint1,
>                                                    aMapMode.GetMapUnit(),
>                                                    rMapMode ) );
>-        // #101029#
>         Point aTextOffset( GetTextOffset() );
> 
>         aPoint2.X() -= aTextOffset.X();
>diff --git a/editeng/source/xml/xmltxtexp.cxx b/editeng/source/xml/xmltxtexp.cxx
>index 5062aa7..5cc3b16 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/xml/xmltxtexp.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/xml/xmltxtexp.cxx
>@@ -358,7 +358,6 @@ void SAL_CALL SvxSimpleUnoModel::removeEventListener( const ::com::sun::star::un
> class SvxXMLTextExportComponent : public SvXMLExport
> {
> public:
>-    // #110680#
>     SvxXMLTextExportComponent( 
>         const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>         EditEngine* pEditEngine,
>@@ -381,7 +380,6 @@ private:
> 
> ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
> 
>-// #110680#
> SvxXMLTextExportComponent::SvxXMLTextExportComponent( 
>     const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>     EditEngine* pEditEngine,
>@@ -463,7 +461,6 @@ void SvxWriteXML( EditEngine& rEditEngine, SvStream& rStream, const ESelection&
>             // export text
>             const OUString aName;
> 
>-            // #110680#
>             // SvxXMLTextExportComponent aExporter( &rEditEngine, rSel, aName, xHandler );
>             SvxXMLTextExportComponent aExporter( xServiceFactory, &rEditEngine, rSel, aName, xHandler );
> 
>diff --git a/editeng/source/xml/xmltxtimp.cxx b/editeng/source/xml/xmltxtimp.cxx
>index 78f26b7..4fdbaf6 100644
>--- a/editeng/source/xml/xmltxtimp.cxx
>+++ b/editeng/source/xml/xmltxtimp.cxx
>@@ -119,7 +119,6 @@ SvXMLImportContext *SvxXMLTextImportContext::CreateChildContext( USHORT nPrefix,
> class SvxXMLXTextImportComponent : public SvXMLImport
> {
> public:
>-    // #110680#
>     SvxXMLXTextImportComponent( 
>         const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>         const uno::Reference< XText > & xText );
>@@ -136,7 +135,6 @@ private:
> 
> // --------------------------------------------------------------------
> 
>-// #110680#
> SvxXMLXTextImportComponent::SvxXMLXTextImportComponent( 
>     const ::com::sun::star::uno::Reference< ::com::sun::star::lang::XMultiServiceFactory > xServiceFactory,
>     const uno::Reference< XText > & xText )
>@@ -227,7 +225,6 @@ void SvxReadXML( EditEngine& rEditEngine, SvStream& rStream, const ESelection& r
> 
> */
> 
>-            // #110680#
>             // uno::Reference< XDocumentHandler > xHandler( new SvxXMLXTextImportComponent( xText ) );
>             uno::Reference< XDocumentHandler > xHandler( new SvxXMLXTextImportComponent( xServiceFactory, xText ) );
>

Actions: View | Splinter Review

Attachments on bug 34196: 43275

Use of freedesktop.org services, including Bugzilla, is subject to our Code of Conduct. How we collect and use information is described in our Privacy Policy.